Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C-4869 - Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK Leilani I. Brown, MMC September 10, 2015 Optima RPM, Inc. 17945 Sky Park Circle, Suite D Irvine, CA 92614 Subject: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project — C-4869 Dear Optima RPM, Inc.: On September 9, 2014 the City Council of Newport Beach accepted the work for the subject project and authorized the City Clerk to file a Notice of Completion, to release the Labor & Materials Bond 65 days after the Notice of Completion had been recorded in accordance with applicable portions of the Civil Code, and to release the Faithful Performance Bond one year after Council acceptance. The Notice of Completion was recorded by the Orange County Recorder on September 18, 2014. Reference No. 2014000378739. The Surety for the contract is American Contractors Indemnity Company and the bond number is 1001006632. Enclosed is the Faithful Performance Bond. Sincerely, f��� 4ly- 001 Z Leilani I. Brown, MMC City Clerk Enclosure 100 Civic Center Drive • Post Office Box 1768 • Newport Beach, California 92658-8915 Telephone: (949) 644-3005 • Fax: (949) 644-3039 • www.newportbeachca.gov PREMIUM IS FOR THE CONTRACT TERM AND IS SUBJECT TO ADJUSTMENT BASED ON FINAL CONTRACT PRICE Premium $28,378.00 Executed in Two originals EXHIBIT C CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH BOND NO. 1001006632 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND The premium charges on this Bond is $ 28.378.00 , being at the rate of $ 23.50 per thousand for the first $100,000.00 thousand of the Contract price. '$18 per thousand thereafter WHEREAS, the City of Newport Beach, State of California, has awarded to OPTIMA RPM, Inc. hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project, C-4869, in the City of Newport Beach, in strict conformity with the Contract on file with the office of the City Clerk of the City of Newport Beach, which is incorporated herein by this reference. WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute the Contract and the terms thereof require the furnishing of a Bond for the faithful performance of the Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, we, the Principal, and American Contractors Indemnity Company , duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of California as Surety (hereinafter "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Newport Beach, in the sum of One Million Five Hundred Forty Six Thousand Dollars and 001100 ($1,546,000.00) lawful money of the United States of America, said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount of the Contract, to be paid to the City of Newport Beach, its successors, and assigns; for which payment well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal, or the Principal's heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, fail to abide by, and well and truly keep and perform any or all the Work, covenants, conditions, and agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration thereof made as therein provided on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to its true intent and meaning, or fails to indemnify, defend, and save harmless the City of Newport Beach, its officers, employees and agents, as therein stipulated, then, Surety will faithfully perform the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this Bond; otherwise this obligation shall become null and void. As a part of the obligation secured hereby, and in addition to the face amount specified in this Performance Bond, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred by City, only in the event City is required to bring an action in law or equity against Surety to enforce the obligations of this Bond. Optima RPM, Inc. Page C-1 Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions of the Contract or to the Work or to the specifications. This Faithful Performance Bond shall be extended and maintained by the Principal in full force and effect for one (1) year following the date of formal acceptance of the Project by City. In the event that the Principal executed this bond as an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal and Surety above named, on the stn day of December ,2013 . Optima RPM, Inc. Name of Contractor (Principal) American Contractors Indemnity Company Name of Surety 601 South Figueroa Street, 16th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Address of Surety (310)649-0990 Telephone r Authorized Signature/Title PPaykel anna, vice President r Authorized Agent ' ature Stephanie Hoang, Attorney -in -Fact Print Name and Title NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENTS OF CONTRACTOR AND SURETY MUST BE ATTACHED Optima RPM, Inc. Page C-2 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California County of ( Ifa (�f , I On Dat ' personally appeared WITN official Signature: \,_.4 1" Place Notary Seal and/or Stamp Above Signalu of N, ry Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons re on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Title or Type of C Document Date: Signers) Other l Capacity(les) Claimed by /Sign r(s) 7C(IV SiName: l Ger Corporate Officer — Title(s): Number of Pages: Signer's Name: ❑ Corporate Officer— Title(s): ❑ Individual ❑ Individual ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General Top of thumb here ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General Top of thumb here ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: ❑ Other: nerIs Represent U Signer Is Representing ®2008 National Notary Associatlon•9350 De Soto Ave,, P.O. Box 2402•ChatswoM, CA 91313-2402•w .NationalNotary.org Itemk5907 Reorder Call Toll-Free1-800.8]&682] who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the perso9A whose name(arj' is/aW subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to''`me that he/ /tfyay executed the same in hispWauthorized capacity(iQ8r and that by I• Cowl his/ /ter signature ,A on the instrument the �ypum - chlor Me personas); or the entity upon behalf of which the perso�acted, executed the instrument. Lee llnpelee County MV Comm. E fres FeD 21, 20t4+ I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITN official Signature: \,_.4 1" Place Notary Seal and/or Stamp Above Signalu of N, ry Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons re on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Title or Type of C Document Date: Signers) Other l Capacity(les) Claimed by /Sign r(s) 7C(IV SiName: l Ger Corporate Officer — Title(s): Number of Pages: Signer's Name: ❑ Corporate Officer— Title(s): ❑ Individual ❑ Individual ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General Top of thumb here ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General Top of thumb here ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: ❑ Other: nerIs Represent U Signer Is Representing ®2008 National Notary Associatlon•9350 De Soto Ave,, P.O. Box 2402•ChatswoM, CA 91313-2402•w .NationalNotary.org Itemk5907 Reorder Call Toll-Free1-800.8]&682] CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California 1 County of Orange J} On �y/��� before me, Barbara Copeland, Notary Public Date Here Insert Name enE TMa d M. cer personally appeared _ Stephanie Hoang Namels) of SiBrierls) S BARBARA COPELAND Commission # 2016348 z�r 9 iVotary Public - Caiifornia Orange County AAy Comm. Expires Apr 19, 2017 who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that -he/she/thW executed the same in 44s/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that byitislher/thek signature(o on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(* acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my ind and official seal. Signature Place Notary Seal Above SignaWre of tary P Ilc OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, A may prove valuable to persons relying an the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name: Stephanie Hoang ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer—Title(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General _ * Attorney in Fact ' ❑ Trustee Tap of thumb here ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: Number of Pages: Signer's Name: ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer—Title(s): _ ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: RGHOPRINT G CITY OF NEWPORT, BEACH OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK Leilani Brown, CMC November 24, 2014 Optima RPM, Inc. 17945 Sky Park Circle, Suite D Irvine, CA 92614 Subject: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project - C-4869 Dear Optima RPM, Inc.: On September 9, 2014 the City Council of Newport Beach accepted the work for the subject project and authorized the City Clerk to file a Notice of Completion, to release the Labor & Materials Bond 65 days after the Notice of Completion had been recorded in accordance with applicable portions of the Civil Code, and to release the Faithful Performance Bond one year after Council acceptance. The Notice of Completion was recorded by the Orange County Recorder on September 18, 2014, Reference No. 2014000378739. The Surety for the bond is American Contractors Indemnity Company and the bond number is 1001006632. Enclosed is the Labor & Materials Payment Bond. Sincerely, Vowk to'-� Leilani I. Brown, MMC City Clerk Enclosure 100 Civic Center Drive • Post Office Box 1768 • Newport Beach, California 92658-8915 Telephone: (949) 644-3005 • Fax: (949) 644-3039 • www.newportbeachca.gov Premium Listed On Performance Bond Executed in Two originals EXHIBIT B CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH BOND NO. 1001006632 LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND WHEREAS, the City of Newport Beach, State of California, has awarded to OPTIMA RPM, INC. hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project, C-4869, in the city of Newport Beach, in strict conformity with the contract on file with the office of the city clerk of the city of Newport Beach, which is incorporated herein by this reference. WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute the Contract and the terms thereof require the furnishing of a bond, providing that if Principal or any of Principal's subcontractors, shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the Work agreed to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, the Surety on this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth. NOW, THEREFORE, We the undersigned Principal, and, American Contractors Indemnity Company duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, (referred to herein as "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto the City of Newport Beach, in the sum of One Million Five Hundred Forty Six Thousand Dollars and 001100 ($1,546,000.00) lawful money of the United States of America, said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount payable by the City of Newport Beach under the terms of the Contract; for which payment well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal or the Principal's subcontractors, fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies, implements or machinery used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the Work contracted to be done, or for any other work or labor thereon of any kind, or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work or labor, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the Principal and subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work and labor, then the Surety will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this Bond, and also, in case suit is brought to enforce the obligations of this Bond, a reasonable attorneys' fee, to be fixed by the Court as required by the provisions of Section 9554 of the Civil Code of the State of California. The Bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies, and corporations entitled to file claims under Section 9100 of the California Civil Code so as to give a right of action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon this Bond, as required by and in accordance with the provisions of Sections 9500 et seq. of the Civil Code of the State of California. Optima RPM, Inc. Page B-1 And Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder shall in any wise affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the specifications. In the event that any principal above named executed this Bond as an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the above named Principal and Surety, on the 5th day of December 12013 . Optima RPM, Inc. Name of Contractor (Principal) American Contractors Indemnity Company Name of Surety 601 South Figueroa Street, 16th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Address of Surety (310)649-0990 Telephone Authori ed Signature/Title tgaykgpA Hanna, Vice President Stephanie Hoang, Attorney -in -Fact Print Name and Title NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENTS OF CONTRACTOR AND SURETY MUST BE ATTACHED Optima RPM, Inc. Page B-2 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California 1 County of (' Raw) Ji �,,,,[it- On %m5 before Dahl meI ,��LaYJCT��Here Inse�Na a Aw1Q�1/l)��i�a and I We Or the OBmer personally appeared �1 L�l, n16 �/ B who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the perso*) whose nameq Ism subscribed to the within instrument and ackKowledged to me that h?re!p6 executed the same in hist/ter authorized capacity�j4, and that by hi016/t it signatureX on the Instrument the ELIVAM1.RAWREZ persoW, or the entity upon behalf of which the S uli # 1111780 Notary Public • Californiai4 personXacted, executed the instrument. 4 Lee Angeles County + My Comm. Expires Feb 21, 2014 1 certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNE m an a fficial seal. Signature: Place Notary Seal and/or Stamp Above Sgnatu m P [eryublic OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Title or Type of I Document Date: Signer(s) Other' Capacity(les) Claimed by Signe (s) 7is Name: t�C�w� Signer's Name: rporate Officer — fitle(s): ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Individual ❑ Individual ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General Top of thumb here ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: ❑ Other: Signer Is Representi Signer Is Representing: RIGHTTHUMBPRINT OF SIGNER F1200B National Notary Association • 9350 De Solo Ave.. P.O. Box 2402 • Chatsworth, CA 9131M402, w NatlonalNotary.org Item #5907 Reorrar Call Toll -Free 1-BOM768 827 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California County of Orange On 2A` A� before me, Barbara Copeland Notary Public �� Here Ineert NaTe anE m[le d Cie O licer ' personally appeared to hie R n Nemets) a Sianarls who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) isfare subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that 4wJshe/they executed the same in-Hs/her/their authorized capacity(iss), and that by- tisfhedtteW signature(4 on the instrument the person(e), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my heand and official seal. Signature Place Notary Seal Abo� Sloma, of otary Pabic OPTIONAL Though the information betow is not required by law, it may prove mtuabte to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(fes) Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name: Stephanie Hoang ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Tite(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General * Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee Top of thumb here ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: Number of Pages: Signer's Name ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): _ ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: RIGHTTHUMBPRINT OF SIGNaR BARBARA COPELPhO I �„ Commission # 2016348-, Z �f Motary Public - Cal fornia z Orange County , bty Comm. Ez fres Apr 19, 2017 who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) isfare subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that 4wJshe/they executed the same in-Hs/her/their authorized capacity(iss), and that by- tisfhedtteW signature(4 on the instrument the person(e), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my heand and official seal. Signature Place Notary Seal Abo� Sloma, of otary Pabic OPTIONAL Though the information betow is not required by law, it may prove mtuabte to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(fes) Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name: Stephanie Hoang ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Tite(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General * Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee Top of thumb here ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: Number of Pages: Signer's Name ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): _ ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: RIGHTTHUMBPRINT OF SIGNaR _ l 11 i IIJ 1I t31' IR11r. = _— POWER OF ATTORNEY AMERICAN E CAN CONTRA CTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY Sli�ate` M BYTHESE PRESENTS. T1 AmeL n Contractors IndelItity,I r Cotnpanty, a California corporation Urttted� s z Dr Maryland corrat �dpecialty Insura�icG K oYnpny, 'Iexss corporation-AbSefawft f _ *hese presentsiaa s=ap}mint: IIIIII� VIII it bl. Shawn Blume, Stephanie Hoang, Eric Lowey or Mark Richardson of Costa Mesa, California its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, with full power and authority hembf mitts name, lace and ste�ad> o�gpdut�)Iacknowledge and deliver�ny all Ids, reeogoizances, uaderta c - It to t s or contract b�' uret ftu actionJude riders a — �d�nsr of surety, pEeY m k ionic P �1 �dtYs1(P Jude �_ Meed R,I v.y * *„�`ThFGe Million**** _ Dollars iiFPower of Attorney shall expire *Ithdon December 09MM.IiiiiitttsPower of Attorney is gran l—nideir anti authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of the Companies: Be it Resolved that the President, any Vice -President, any Assistant Vice -President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on be alf of the Company subject to the following ����� i I I III it �I �t�reen F iven full' power'tgndtaug of and on behalf'oti �il�'e1Cor�p toL_I, iljeknowledge and d�:�y�ndbor ci so ilswt"greements or inti» I odor obligatory uhlde.{f#ipgsf i anti ihll consents form im�b �- �c ges a�oi'�nal estimates on engmeermgand�snstruction contracts, and any and all n'o[i'des add"documents canceling or terminatingWWI— pal Ga�iitity thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attomey-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by filicsirmlealand any power of attorney or certificate bei facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall ba al,d-ud binding upon the Company with resgeet to .may td - which it is attached+ 1 7 -I EOF, laIt , IIIt 1L III 11 111' Thllli 'instrument - - - seals to bei x 4i- �tfili of December, 2012. - AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY as Kraxek -- '1 i 1 Ila I I'I'I LA i 11 Ilii, D P. Aguilar, -Vice ar, V' Daniel 1 ice President P State of California `';g,�a`�' Cotmtys Wiles SS: Qrtl t ffledl 2012, b*rel �ttollll Varipp� 1�I ght, a notary publtes�t�c—1 Burl P Aguila l Ms i� ,r can—ontractors Indemnity Coiinlj>larty, Um[eb Srates Surety Company ate- .Wil altyInsurance Company pt'oved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his authorized capacity, and that by his signature on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the personl acted, executed the instrument 1 111 xilfilfilnM LTY OF PER th the State of IAif i lthtil the 1 ili ng P �aP aro i Oi� Vf1 nd and official sem _ 11II 11 V, :- — 1.,,,11 etttutln 6pue4fka ♦ Iglq/91 A Signature - -' (Seal) ttaarr Paha •tlWaM iwtrcoum .i n `-L& Stant Secretary o M qj �dmract�rls Indemnity C st C u do hereby cert y t Ilia#I, I'lhe abcgve eAd I�regoing is a —�_ r oto tue wfich is still in fill {1I%ltolinfid 0ffeet;i'El rthermore, the re Attorney are in full force and effect. In Wt ess W her/�,of, I�have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Los Angeles, California this 6�* day ofiql IIII Ir �I llII Ig111i, �rattl a<aamaae 'q, 1E=SaRFr n vmzu^e... 0. E Bond LYi/Qd - �e _ q �o- _ Jeannie Lee ssistant Secretary Agency TS200jj y a 4 ♦Z _ I�<4YauaMfN'm.R 4�D RECORDING REQUEST ED Y A WHEN RECORDED RETURN TO - 71,111,11 City Clerk City of Newport Beach CE OF 100 Civic Center D:riv CITY CLERK Newport Beach, CA 2660 `E�a`fr "'T BEACr Recorded in Official Records, Orange County Hugh Nguyen, Clerk -Recorder N 0 FEE E $ IIRI ��0 ����� 0 ����6 ����I 7���I 2 ��,���3 ����I $ 2014000378739 9:17 am 09118114 47 405 N12 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 "Exempt from recording fees pursuant to Government Code Section 27383" NOTICE OF COMPLETION NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City of Newport Beach, 100 Civic Center Drive, Newport Beach, California, 92660, as Owner, and Optima RPM, Inc. of Irvine, CA, as Contractor, entered into a Contract on December 11, 2013. Said Contract set forth certain improvements, as follows: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project (C-4869) Work on said Contract was completed, and was found to be acceptable on September 9, 2014 by the City Council. Title to said property is vested in the Owner and the Surety for said Contract is American Contractors Indemnity Company. _ Public Works Director City of Newport Beach VERIFICATION I certify, under penalty of perjury, that the foregoing is true and correct to the best of my knowledge. �JLRt&�Q Executed on 41kV1)1at Newport Beach, California. BY 14 &- k 7� City Clerk l F©ari CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK Leilani I. Brown, MMC September 10, 2014 Orange County Recorder P.O. Box 238 Santa Ana, CA 92702 RE: Notice of Completion for the following project: • Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project (Contract No. 4869) Please record the enclosed document and return to the City Clerk's Office. Thank you. Sincerely, ow -JA N*- Leilani I. Brown, MMC City Clerk Enclosure 100 Civic Center Drive • Post Office Box 1768 • Newport Beach, California 92658-8915 Telephone: (949) 644-3005 • Fax: (949) 644-3039 • www.newportbeachca.gov RECORDING REQUESTED BY AND WHEN RECORDED RETURN TO: City Clerk City of Newport Beach 100 Civic Center Drive Newport Beach, CA 92660 "Exempt from recording fees pursuant to Government Code Section 27383" NOTICE OF COMPLETION NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City of Newport Beach, 100 Civic Center Drive, Newport Beach, California, 92660, as Owner, and Optima RPM, Inc. of Irvine, CA, as Contractor, entered into a Contract on December 11, 2013. Said Contract set forth certain improvements, as follows: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project (C-4869) Work on said Contract was completed, and was found to be acceptable on September 9. 2014 by the City Council. Title to said property is vested in the Owner and the Surety for said Contract is American Contractors Indemnity Company. _ BY Public Worcs Director City of Newport Beach VERIFICATION I certify, under penalty of perjury, that the foregoing is true and correct to the best of my knowledge. / (� , I Executed on U/�© n /NnJi at Newport Beach, California. 4BY O 0 . City Clerk City Clerk CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH NOTICE INVITING BIDS Sealed bids may be received at the office of the City Clerk, 100 Civic Center Drive, Newport Beach, CA 92660 until 10:00 A.M. on the 30th day of October, 2013, at which time such bids shall be opened and read for NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT Title of Project Contract No. 4869 $1,060,000.00 Engineer's Estimate proved by t u) 1_ Patrick Thomas City Engineer Prospective bidders may obtain Bid Documents, Project Specifications and Drawings by contacting Santa Ana Blue Print at (949)756-1001 Located at 2372 Morse Avenue, Irvine, CA 92614 Mandatory Pre -Bid Meeting at 10:00 a.m. On October 16, 2013, to be held at the Lifeguard Headquarters located at 70 Newport Pier, Newport Beach, CA 92663 Contractor License Classification required for this project: "B" For further information, call Peter Tauscher, Project Manager at (949) 644-3316 BID INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE ON THE CITY WEBSITE: http://www.NewportBeachCA.go CLICK: Online Services / Bidding & Bid Results City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS The following documents shall be completed, executed and received by the City Clerk in accordance with NOTICE INVITING BIDS: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS/ BIDDER'S BOND J DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORV CONTRACTOR'S INDUSTRIAL SAFETY RECORD/ INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDER/ ALL ADDENDA TO PLANS AD SPECIFICATIONS AS ISSUED BY AGENCY PRIOR TO BID OPENING DATE (if any) ✓ TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE REFERENCES✓ NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT/ DESIGNATION OF SURETIES/ PROPOSAL 2. Cash, certified check or cashier's check (sum not less than 10 percent of the total bid price) may be received in lieu of the BIDDER'S BOND. The title of the project and the words "Sealed Bid" shall be clearly marked on the outside of the envelope containing the documents. 3. The City of Newport Beach will not permit a substitute format for the Contract Documents listed above. Bidders are advised to review their content with bonding and legal agents prior to submission of bid. 4. BIDDER'S BOND shall be issued by an insurance organization or surety (1) currently authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business of insurance in the State of California, and (2) listed as an acceptable surety in the latest revision of the Federal Register Circular 570. The successful bidder's security shall be held until the Contract is executed. 5. The estimated quantities indicated in the PROPOSAL are approximate, and are given solely to allow the comparison of total bid prices. 6. Bids are to be computed upon the estimated quantities indicated in the PROPOSAL multiplied by unit price submitted by the bidder. In the event of discrepancy between wording and figures, bid wording shall prevail over bid figures. In the event of error in the multiplication of estimated quantity by unit price, the correct multiplication will be computed and the bids will be compared with correctly multiplied totals. The City shall not be held responsible for bidder errors and omissions in the PROPOSAL. 7. The City of Newport Beach reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any minor irregularity or informality in such bids. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, at the request and expense of the Contractor, securities shall be permitted in substitution of money withheld by the City to ensure performance under the contract. The securities shall be deposited in a state or federal chartered bank in California, as the escrow agent. 3 8. The Contractor shall be responsible for insuring compliance with provisions of Section 1777.5 of the Labor Code Apprenticeship requirements and Section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code, "Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act". 9. All documents shall bear signatures and titles of persons authorized to sign on behalf of the bidder. For corporations, the signatures shall be of a corporate officer or an individual authorized by the corporation. For partnerships, the signatures shall be of a general partner. For sole ownership, the signature shall be of the owner. The signature below represents that the above has been reviewed. 961714 A & B Contractor's License No. & Classification Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder Authorized Signature/Title November 5, 2013 Date 12 Bond No: 1000941760-12 City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 BIDDER'S BOND We, the undersigned Principal and Surety, our successors and assigns, executors, heirs and administrators, agree to be jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Newport Beach, a charter city, in the principal sum of (low ten percent of bid amount not to exceed One Hundred Thirty Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($ 130,000.00 ), to be paid and forfeited to the City of Newport Beach if the bid proposal of the undersigned Principal for the construction of NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS, Contract No. 4869 in the City of Newport Beach, is accepted by the City Council of the City of Newport Beach and the proposed contract is awarded to the Principal, and the Principal fails to execute the Contract Documents in the form(s) prescribed, including the required bonds, and original insurance certificates and endorsements for the construction of the project within thirty (30) calendar days after the date of the mailing of "Notification of Award", otherwise this obligation shall become null and void. If the undersigned Principal executing this Bond is executing this Bond as an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this Bond. Witness our hands this 30th Optima RPM, Inc. Name of Contractor (Principal) American Contractors Indemnity Company Name of Surety day of October 601 South Figueroa Street, 16th Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90017 Address of Surety (310) 649-0990 Telephone , 2013. 9--� - I �I _-:-7-7 -i Authorized Signature/Title M MP� -howt� Auth&iied Age nature Stephanie Hoang, Attorney -in -Fact Print Name and Title (Notary acknowledgment of Principal & Surety must be attached) 5 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT 6th,ERn^�^'.cv�.c��VQ�i�-•i^,i`'t'�-1'�.r'.s=�x,�Gx^�w"-�.C`,�1�;��".c{'„c'��`.ECS`.,���rr�rc�,M•OfScv^�`.c'<`- 1-�Y`�ct.Mct.c�tSi-K',rc State of California County of Orange On 111)11,1)1 before me, Barbara Copeland, Notary Public Date Here Insert Name and Title of the Officer ' personally appeared Stephanie Hoang Names) of Signers) who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/arm subscribed to the BARBARA COPELANDwithin instrument and acknowledged to me that Commission # 2016348 -he/she/they executed the same in +iis/her/their authorized Notary Public - California z capacity("), and that b his/her/their si natures on the Z Orange County D instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of " My Comm Expires Apr 19 7017 which the person(sacted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my nd and official seal. Signature o N ary Public 02007 National Notary Association• 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 -Chatsworth, CA 91313-2402- www.NationalNotaryorg Item #5907 Reorder: Call Toll -Free 1-800-876-6827 d,61e Signature C__ -)Place Notary Seal Above OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name: Stephanie Hoang Signer's Name: L1 Individual ❑ Individual 11 Corporate Officer — Title(s): El Corporate Officer — Title(s): L1 Partner — ❑ Limited __ General _ El Partner — El Limited L1 General E;4 Attorney in Fact • El Attorney in Fact • L1 Trustee Top of thumb here ❑ Trustee Top of thumb here 11 Guardian or Conservator FJ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: 11 Other: Signer Is Representing: Signer Is Representing: 02007 National Notary Association• 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 -Chatsworth, CA 91313-2402- www.NationalNotaryorg Item #5907 Reorder: Call Toll -Free 1-800-876-6827 POWER OF ATTORNEY AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Contractors Indemnity Company, a California corporation, United States Surety Company, a Maryland corporation and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company, a Texas corporation (collectively, the "Companies"), do by these presents make, constitute and appoint: Shawn Blume, Stephanie Hoang, Eric Lowey or Mark Richardson of Costa Mesa, California its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include riders, amendments, and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty does not exceed *****Three Million***** Dollars ($ **3,000,000.00** ). This Power of Attorney shall expire without further action on December 08, 2016. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of the Companies: Be it Resolved, that the President, any Vice -President, any Assistant Vice -President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings, including any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts, and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attomey-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 10th day of December, 2012. AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY Corporate Seals onpCTO: o, tlSU n- nlr. , SEPT. zs.1999 :..r,; s Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President— State of California County of Los Angeles SS: On 10th day of December, 2012, before me, Vanessa Wright, a notary public, personally appeared Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President of American Contractors Indemnity Company, United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his authorized capacity, and that by his signature on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. 1 -certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. v. wassttr Signature � Commission # IM319 Sl g (Seal) Notary Pwic • Caitiorala �w j' — Los Angeles County M Comm. Ex ros Dec B. Yt)t6 µ 1, Jeannie Lee, Assistant Secretary of American Contractors Indemnity Company, United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect; furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness W ereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Los Angeles, California this day of G� 1>Ji� Corporate Seals �; t .......... /CJI����%7� oz_ , d» C 3x.Ma00.Aif0 ,y4 t Jeannie Lee, ssistant Secretary Bond No Agency No. 18200 sEnr 5 1890 f ? Ya. ' yt 'aT C Y ACKNOWLEDGMENT .................. 0 0 0 0 E 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 a a E E a 0 0000. . 0 0 0 0 ...... 0. 0 0. 0 .. 0 0 a 0 0 0\. 0 0 0 0 ... 0 State of California County of Orange I ss. On November 5. 2013 before me, Elizabeth I. Ramirez Notary Public, personally appeared Maykel Hanna ,who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the personV whose named is/ice subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/fie/two executed the same in his/fir/thy authorized capacity4eb"), and that by his/�thlzPF' signatureska'j on the instrument the personX, or the entity upon behalf of which the personX acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WIT hand a offs al seal. LI 1 t� Z Caokilsioe 01 dmiZ 1110 N"y Public - Cafamis Signa Los "65 Cowry re0021.20141 ................... 0 M a 0 N 0 ... a 0 0 0 E M ............ ■ 0 0. 0 0 0 .............. a 0 N E 0 0 0 0 000 Date of Document Type or Title of Document Number of Pages in Document Document in a Foreign Language OPTIONAL INFORMATION October 30, 2013 Bidder's Bond Type of Satisfactory Evidence: X Personally Known with Paper Identification Paper Identification Credible Witness(es) Capacity of Signer Trustee Power of Attorney CEO / CFO /C _X President ice -President / ecretary / Treasurer Other: Other Information: 1.1 Thumbprint of Signer Check here if no thumbprint or fingerprint is available. City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR(S) State law requires the listing of all subcontractors who will perform work in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the Contractor's total bid. If a subcontractor is not listed, the Contractor represents that he/she is fully qualified to and will be responsible for performing that portion of the work. Substitution of subcontractors shall be made only in accordance with State law and/or the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, as applicable. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300 appropriate securities may be substituted for any monies to be withheld to ensure performance under the Contract. The Bidder, by signing this designation, certifies that bids from the following subcontractors have been used in formulating the bid for the project and that these subcontractors will be used subject to the approval of the Engineer and in accordance with State law. No changes may be made in these subcontractors except with prior approval of the City of Newport Beach. (Use additional sheets if needed.) Subcontractor's Information Bid Item Number Description of Work % of Total Bid Name: �Gr� -f-VL 1� Address: f �3L,N CA ow a �,k Q Phone: � 7X—t.- State License Number: CA ku A Name: ?\ r C:_'(,©i��'V1 1 Address: P� Y ('J ' 'C Phone: r1 AWA l �('\ g�� . C�v 6�. •�rW\� State License Number: �1 Name V-1 Address: 11A J� Phone- hone State State License Number: Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder A f __VIc _a President/RMO Authorized Signature/Title City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR(S) State law requires the listing of all subcontractors who will perform work in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the Contractor's total bid. If a subcontractor is not listed, the Contractor represents that he/she is fully qualified to and will be responsible for performing that portion of the work. Substitution of subcontractors shall be made only in accordance with State law and/or the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, as applicable. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300 appropriate securities may be substituted for any monies to be withheld to ensure performance under the Contract. The Bidder, by signing this designation, certifies that bids from the following subcontractors have been used in formulating the bid for the project and that these subcontractors will be used subject to the approval of the Engineer and in accordance with State law. No changes may be made in these subcontractors except with prior approval of the City of Newport Beach. (Use additional sheets if needed.) Subcontractor's Information Bid Item Number Description of Work % of Total Bid Name: U 1 Address: a Phone: State License Number: Name-j�,��,,��S�r� Address: �� YYUUII Phone: h, State License umber: L Name:��� Address: Phone: State License Number: Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder L f� mice President/RMO Authorized Signature/Title City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR(S) State law requires the listing of all subcontractors who will perform work in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the Contractor's total bid. If a subcontractor is not listed, the Contractor represents that he/she is fully qualified to and will be responsible for performing that portion of the work. Substitution of subcontractors shall be made only in accordance with State law and/or the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, as applicable. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300 appropriate securities may be substituted for any monies to be withheld to ensure performance under the Contract. The Bidder, by signing this designation, certifies that bids from the following subcontractors have been used in formulating the bid for the project and that these subcontractors will be used subject to the approval of the Engineer and in accordance with State law. No changes may be made in these subcontractors except with prior approval of the City of Newport Beach. (Use additional sheets if needed.) Subcontractor's Information Bid item Description of Work %of Number Total Bid Name: Address: Phone: State License Number. Name: Address: Phone: State License Number: Name: Address: Phone: State License Number: Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder 0 -"Vice President/RMO Authorized Signature/Title City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE REFERENCES Contractor must use this formal Please print or type. Bidder's Name Optima RPM, Inc. FAILURE OF THE BIDDER TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED INFORMATION IN A COMPLETE AND ACCURATE MANNER MAY BE CONSIDERED NON-RESPONSIVE. For all public agency projects you have worked on (or are currently working on) in the past 2 years in excess of $15,000, provide the following information: No. 1 Project Name/Number South Whittier Education Center Annex Renovation #1191 Project Description Renovations to existing education center Approximate Construction Dates: From 11/7/2011 To: 4/30/2013 Agency Name Rio Hondo College District Contact Person Ken McEI Telephone ( ) 562.692.0921 Original Contract Amount $497,000 Final Contract Amount $ 497,000.00 If final amount is different from original, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.) N/A Did you file any claims against the Agency? Did the Agency file any claims against you/Contractor? If yes, briefly explain and indicate outcome of claims. No W No. 2 Project Name/Number Mission Viejo Library -Story Time Remodel CIP 601 Project Description Remodel to City library story time room Approximate Construction Dates: From 5/7/2012 To: 9/7/2012 Agency Name City of Mission Viejo Contact Person Dan Sullivan Telephone ( ) 949.470.3044 Original Contract Amount $ 358,344 Final Contract Amount $ 377,386.00 If final amount is different from original, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.) Extra work requested by Owner Did you file any claims against the Agency? Did the Agency file any claims against you/Contractor? If yes, briefly explain and indicate outcome of claims. No No. 3 Project Name/Number Dana Point Public Works Renovation #333 Project Description Renovation to City existing public work department Approximate Construction Dates: From 4/29/2013 Agency Name City of Dana Point Contact Person Archie Rhemper Telephone ( 8/28/2013 949.248.3558 Original Contract Amount $ 488.600 Final Contract Amount $ 523.955.00 If final amount is different from original, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.) Extra work reouested by Owner Did you file any claims against the Agency? Did the Agency file any claims against you/Contractor? If yes, briefly explain and indicate outcome of claims. No 10 No. 4 Project Name/Number Santa Ana College Building "G" Misc. Upgrades #1189 Project Description Upgrades to existing college building and site work Approximate Construction Dates: From 6/13/2013 To: 10/17/2013 Agency Name Rancho Santiago Community College District Contact Person Alex Oviedo Telephone ( ) 714.480.7517 Original Contract Amount $419,000 Final Contract Amount $ 419,000.00 If final amount is different from original, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.) N/A Did you file any claims against the Agency? Did the Agency file any claims against you/Contractor? If yes, briefly explain and indicate outcome of claims. No No. 5 Project Name/Number ABC USD Central Kitchen #330004 Project Description Remodel of District's central kitchen Approximate Construction Dates: From 7/15/2013 Agency Name ABC Unified School District Contact Person Joshie Cox Telephone ( 11/1/2013 ) 562.926.5566 Ext. 21218 Original Contract Amount $580,000 Final Contract Amount $ 580,000.00 If final amount is different from original, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.) Did you file any claims against the Agency? Did the Agency file any claims against you/Contractor? If yes, briefly explain and indicate outcome of claims. 23 11 No. 6 Project Name/Number Fullerton College Quad Renovations #311 Project Description Demolition & remodel of college quad area Approximate Construction Dates: From 7/10/2012 Agency Name North Orange Community College District Contact Person Jeff Bisiri Telephone ( 9/21/2012 ) 323.543.8300 Ext. 8311 Original Contract Amount $263,200 Final Contract Amount $ 280,697.00 If final amount is different from original, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.) Extra work requested by Owner Did you file any claims against the Agency? Did the Agency file any claims against you/Contractor? If yes, briefly explain and indicate outcome of claims. Attach additional sheets if necessary. Attach to this Bid the experience resume of the person who will be designated as General Construction Superintendent or on-site Construction Manager for the Contractor. Upon request, the Contractor shall attach a financial statement and other information sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of the Contractor's current financial conditions. Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder 12 1�1914A /'" _'Vice President_/RMO A4razed signature/Title Randy Bludworth Laguna Hills, CA 92653 (951) 217-4609 (C) (949) 916-8853 (H) pamal a att.net QUALIFICATIONS • Over twenty years experience in commercial construction with eleven years as a project superintendent. • Highly dependable, punctual, dedicated and efficient. • Supportive team worker, committed and responsible. • Able to prioritize workload, meet deadlines, adhere to schedules, and work independently. • Committed to quality client service with extensive correspondence / telephone contact. • Computer skills include M/S Word, M/S Outlook, and Pro Filemaker Data Base System. • (PC and Mac system experienced) Project Superintendent $57,200 plus Benefits WORK HISTORY Optima RPM, Inc — Irvine, CA 01/2012 -Present One site superintendent responsible for all high end quality projects, restaurant and retail projects. $78,000.00 plus Allowances Cat Select Builders, Inc. - Yorba Linda, Ca. 11/2007 - 09/2011 On site project superintendent responsible for construction development of restaurants, Fitness Center & Retail projects. Responsibilities included contract claims resolution, client relations, and project management. • This position was responsible for the on site management of complex, multi-million dollar commercial construction projects in the So Cal area which include, new and existing shell tenant Improvements, free standing building renovation and new ground up construction. Interactions with Landlord/Developer and Client's Construction, Operations and Management Divisions, Architects and Engineers, City Building Departments for plan review and permits, Utility Companies for Applications, Construction & Inspections, Inspectors for City, County, and Special Inspections. Experienced in estimating and purchasing, preparation of subcontracts and addendums specific to project requirements, reading and understanding plans and specifications, knowledge of building codes and ADA requirements, review and processing of submittals. Ability to generate, track, review and distribute RFPs. I am proficient in the evaluation, negotiating and processing of change orders and back charges, site prep, job start up / close out, construction scheduling, punch lists with trade distribution and finalization resulting in completion of successful projects. • Responsible for the direct supervision and scheduling of crafts, subcontractors, owner vendors, project assigned professionals. and field office support staff on a daily basis. Estimation of over $20M in ground up and TI projects as listed: YardhOuse, Riverside Ca. The Outback Steakhouse, Glendale Ca. 24 Hour Fitness, Ontario Ca. 24 Hour Fitness, Monterey Park Ca. 24 Hour Fitness, Irvine Ca. Toys R Us,' Babies R Us, Buena Park Ca. Project Manager Adlin Construction - Mission Viejo, CA 10/2000 - 10/2007 $75,000 On site project superintendent responsible for construction development of multiple restaurants projects nationwide. Responsibilities included contract claims resolution, client relations, and project management. • This position was responsible for the on site management of complex, multi-million dollar commercial construction projects with diverse locations which include, major shopping malls, theme park, new and existing shell tenant Improvements, free standing building renovation and new ground up construction. • Interactions with Landlord/Developer and Client's Construction, Operations and Management Divisions, Architects and Engineers, City Building Departments for plan review and permits, Utility Companies for Applications, Construction & Inspections, Inspectors for City. County, and Special Inspections. Experienced in estimating and purchasing, preparation of subcontracts and addendums specific to project requirements, reading and understanding plans and specifications, knowledge of building codes and ADA requirements, review and processing of submittals. Ability to generate, track, review and distribute RFPs. I am proficient in the evaluation, negotiating and processing of change orders and back charges, site prep, job start up / close out, construction scheduling, punch lists with trade distribution and finalization resulting in completion of successful projects. • Responsible for the direct supervision and scheduling of crafts, subcontractors, owner vendors, project assigned professionals, and field office support staff on a daily basis. Estimation of over $80M in ground up and TI projects as listed: Bubba Gump Shrimp Co., Daytona Beach, FL Bubba Gump Shrimp Co., Mall Of America, Bloomington, Mt Bubba Gump Shrimp Co., Long Beach, CA Bubba Gump Shrimp Co., Universal City Walk, Orlando, FL Bubba Gump Shrimp Co., Denver, CO Claim Jumper Restaurant, Summerlin, NV Claim Jumper Restaurant, Tucson, AZ Islands Restaurant, Pasadena.. CA Mai Tai Bar, Daytona Beach, FL Mai Tai Bar, Long Beach, CA The Cheesecake Factory, Seattle, WA The Cheesecake Factory, Bellvue, WA Project Foreman $50,000.00 plus Allowances Sunset Designs — Riverside, CA 5/1990 -10/2000 Working Field Foreman for rough framing and finish carpentry crews on projects which included restaurants, retail and commercial office buildings {single & multi -story}, earthquake retrofits {churches and schools}, large custom homes. Responsibilities included: Supervise, organize, assign and delegatejobs for employees on a daily basis. Perform material take -offs, order materials and equipment as needed, schedule manpower, coordinate inspections, Quality Control, and OSHA compliance. Carpenter $28,000.00 R. Z Construetion - Mira Lama, Ca. 1/1982 - 4/1990 Entry to journeyman level carpenter specializing in track homes, strip mall centers, fast food restaurants. All phases of rough carpentry and minor finish carpentry. City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT State of California ) ) ss. Countyof Orange ) Maykel Hanna being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is Vice President of Optima RPM, Inc. , the party making the foregoing bid; that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that party making the foregoing bid; that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation, that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham, that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid. I declare under penalty of perjury of the laws of the State of Ca ifornia that the foregoing is true and correct. Optima RPM, Inc. 0 y bice President/RMO Bidder Authorized Signature/Title Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me on this 5th day of November 2013 by Mavkel Hanna , proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the personX who appeared before me. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under foregoing paragraph is true and correct. [SEAL] LIZ E i. 18TO mmf Coatio187 a 8 6062 Notary Pub6e - Calitornis Lot Angeles County + My Comm. Expires Feb 21, 2014 13 State of California that the Publ My Commission Expires: February 21, 2014 City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 DESIGNATION OF SURETIES Bidder's name Optima RPM, Inc. Provide the names, addresses, and phone numbers for all brokers and sureties from whom Bidder intends to procure insurance and bonds (list by insurance/bond type): Surety: American Contractors Indemnity Company 601 South Figueroa Street 16th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Phone 310.649.0990 Broker: Pinnacle Suretv Insurance Services 151 Kalmus Drive Suite A201 Costa Mesa, CA 92626 Phone 714.546.5100 14 City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 CONTRACTOR'S INDUSTRIAL SAFETY RECORD TO ACCOMPANY PROPOSAL Bidder's Name Optima RPM, INc. Record Last Five (5) Full Years Current Year of Record I ne information required for these items is the same as required for columns 3 to 6, Code 10, Occupational Injuries, Summary --Occupational Injuries and Illnesses, OSHA No. 102. 15 Current Record Record Record Record Record Yearof for for for for for Record 2012 2011 2010 2009 2008 Total 2013 No. of contracts 13 20 3 0 0 0 36 Total dollar Amount of Contracts (in 3.4Mil 3.3Mil 1.6Mi1 0 0 0 8.3Mil Thousands of $) No. of fatalities 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No. of lost Workday Cases 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No. of lost workday cases involving permanent transfer to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 another job or termination of employment I ne information required for these items is the same as required for columns 3 to 6, Code 10, Occupational Injuries, Summary --Occupational Injuries and Illnesses, OSHA No. 102. 15 Legal Business Name of Bidder Optima RPM Inc. Business Address: 17945 Sky Park Circle Suite D Irvine CA 92614 Business Tel. No.: 949.724.1399 Extension 202 State Contractor's License No. and Classification: 961714 A, B Title Vice President The above information was compiled from the records that are available to me at this time and I declare under penalty of perjury that the information is true and accurate within the limitations of those records. Signature of bidder�-�— Date November 5, 2013 Title Signature of bidder Date Title President/Treasurer/Manager Signature of bidder Date Title Signature of bidder Date Title Signature Requirements: If bidder is an individual, name and signature of individual must be provided, if doing business under a fictitious name, the fictitious name must be set fort along with the County. If bidder is a partnership or joint venture, legal name of partnership/joint venture must be provided, followed by signatures of all of the partners/joint ventures or if fewer than all of the partners/joint ventures submit with evidence of authority to act on behalf of the partnership/joint venture. If bidder is a corporation, legal name of corporation must be provided, followed by signatures of the corporation President or Vice President or President and Secretary or Assistant Secretary, and the corporate seal, or submit with evidence of authority to act on behalf of the corporation. All must be acknowledged before a Notary Public, who must certify that such individuals, partners/joint ventures, or officers were proven on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the persons whose name are subscribed to and acknowledged that they executed the same in their authorized capacities. [NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENT and CORPORATE SEAL MUST BE ATTACHEDI 16 ACKNOWLEDGMENT ..................................................... 0 E 0 E E E ...... 0 0 0 E E E 0 0 0 a H 0 State of California County of Orange }ss. On November 5. 2013 before me, Elizabeth I. Ramirez Notary Public, personally appeared Maykel Hanna ,who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the personK whose name,(.g) is/,ue subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/.%�/tl6y executed the same in his/bet their authorized capacity4es`j; and that by his/�gOtWir signatures on the instrument the persoW,, or the entity upon behalf of which the persons'jacted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. y hand a o ial seal. Signa ure ELIZABETH 1. RAMIREZ Commission # 1878062 +r1 Notary Public - California i Y YLos Angeles County I ............................................................ 0 a M M M M ........... ■ Date of Document Type or Title of Document Number of Pages in Document Document in a Foreign Language OPTIONAL INFORMATION N/A Thumbprint of Signer Contractors Industrial Safety Type of Satisfactory Evidence: X_ Personally Known with Paper Identification Paper Identification Credible Witness(es) Capacity of Signer Trustee Power of Attorney CEO / CFO /C X President / l ice -President ecretary / Treasurer Other: Other Information: X ❑ Check here if no thumbprint or fingerprint is available. ACKNOWLEDGMENT .. ■ 0 a a 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E a. 0 .. 0 0 .. 0 .. ■ 00■ 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 a 0. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a .. 0. 0 0 .. 0. State of California County of Orange }ss. On November 5. 2013 before me, Elizabeth I. Ramirez Notary Public, personally appeared Mohamed Mamoun ,who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the persowhose name is/� subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that n/t� executed the same in hist/tl & authorized capacit�), and that by his/�r/lir signatureso) on the instrument the persone, or the entity upon behalf of which the persoacted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. E 7ndofficial seal. Signa ure Elt ltdE'T**H t AAM EZ Commission 0 1878062 Notary Public - California Los Angeles County M Comm. Ex ires Feb 21, 2014 N 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 a 0 a 0 a 0 0 a 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. 0. 0 0 a 0 0 a a a 0 a 0 0 a 0 a Date of Document Type or Title of Document Number of Pages in Document Document in a Foreign Language OPTIONAL INFORMATION N/A Thumbprint of Signer Contractors Industrial Safety Type of Satisfactory Evidence: _X Personally Known with Paper Identification Paper Identification Credible Witness(es) Capacity of Signer: Trustee Power of Attorney CFO / COO Presiden Vice -President / Secretary / Treasurer Other Information: 0 Check here if no thumbprint or fingerprint is available. City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA Bidder's name Optima RPM Inc. The bidder shall signify receipt of all Addenda here, if any, and attach executed copy of addenda to bid documents: Addendum No. Date Received Si nature A 1 10/29/2013 2 10/30/2013 17 City of Newport Beach NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS Contract No. 4869 INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDER Bidder certifies under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the following information is true and correct: Name of individual Contractor, Company or Corporation: Corporation Business Address: 17945 Sky Park Circle Suite D Irvine, CA 92614 Telephone and Fax Number: Phone 949.724.1399 Extension 202 Fax 949.724.1851 California State Contractor's License No. and Class: 961714 A, B (REQUIRED AT TIME OF AWARD) Original Date Issued: 6.3.2011 Expiration Date: 6.30.2015 List the name and title/position of the person(s) who inspected for your firm the site of the work proposed in these contract documents: Maykel Hanna, Vice President/RMO The following are the names, titles, addresses, and phone numbers of all individuals, firm members, partners, joint ventures, and company or corporate officers having a principal interest in this proposal: Name Title Address Telephone Mohamed Mamoun President, Treasurer, Manager 7 Malaga Irvine, CA 92614 Phone 949.529.7948 Maykel Hanna Vice President, Secretary, RMO 17 Grenache Irvine, CA 92614 Phone 949.529.7949 Corporation organized under the laws of the State of California Iw The dates of any voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy judgments against any principal having an interest in this proposal are as follows: N/A All company, corporate, or fictitious business names used by any principal having interest in this proposal are as follows: N/A For all arbitrations, lawsuits, settlements or the like (in or out of court) you have been involved in with public agencies in the past five years (Attach additional Sheets if necessary) provide: Provide the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the parties; N/A Briefly summarize the parties' claims and defenses, N/A Have you ever had a contract terminated by the owner/agency? If so, explain. NO Have you ever failed to complete a project? If so, explain. NO For any projects you have been involved with in the last 5 years, did you have any claims or actions by any outside agency or individual for labor compliance (i.e. failure to pay prevailing wage, falsifying certified payrolls, etc.)? Yes No. 19 Are any claims or actions unresolved or outstanding? Yes /A If yes to any of the above, explain. (Attach additional sheets, if necessary) Failure of the bidder to provide ALL requested information in a complete and accurate manner may be considered non-responsive. Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder Mohamed Mamoun (Print name of Owner or President of Corporation/Comps) President Authorized Signature/Title President Title November 5, 2013 Date On November 5, 2013 before me, Elizabeth I. Ramirez Notary Public, personally appeared Mohamed Mamoun who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name9S) is/.aK subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/s/may executed the same in his er/yk4ir authorized capacity(iga'j, and that by his N `eir signature ,W on the instrument the personf , or the entity upon behalf of which the personf,,dj acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WI hand and official seal. (SEAL) +4a��.w+,� Notary Public in nd or said State re,e ELIZABETH I. RAMIREZ Commission #t 1878062 Notary Public - California z February 21 2014 Los Angeles Count My Commission Expires: Y � y MY Comm. Expires Feb 21, 2014 20 CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT ADDENDUM NO. A NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT NO. 869 DATE: October 25 2013 BY: Public Works Depuiy Director/City Engineer TO: ALL PLANHOLDERS The following changes, additions, deletions, or clarifications shall be rnade to the contract documents — all other conditions shall remain the same. SPECIFICATIONS 1. Section 01 26 13, INTERPRETATION OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Section 1.01.A was updated to identify that a written request for interpretation of the construction documents must be made no later than eight (8) calendar days before the date bids will be opened. B. Section 1.02.13 was added and identifies the specific date and time that all questions must be submitted by in order to receive a response from the project team. C. Page 2 has been provided which includes the form for a "Request For Interpretation of Contract Documents". This form is to be used when preparing questions to be answered by the project team during the bidding process. Bidders must sign this Addendum No. A and attach it to the bid proposal. Bid may not be considered unless this signed Addendum No. A is attached. have carefully examined this Addendum and have included full payment in my Proposal. Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder's Name (Please Print) November 5, 2013 Date Vice President/RMO Auth ized Signature & Title CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT PROPOSAL NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUATERS REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT NO. 4869 To the Honorable City Council City of Newport Beach 100 Civic Center Drive Newport Beach, California 92660 Gentlemen: The undersigned declares that he has carefully examined the location of the work, has read the Instructions to the Bidders, has examined all Contract Documents including the Plans, Special Provisions, and Project Manual, and hereby proposes to furnish all materials except that material supplied by the City and shall perform all work required to complete Contract No. 4869 in accordance with the Plans, Special Provisions, and Project Manual, and will take in full payment therefore the following lump sum prices for the work, complete in place, to wit: ITEM UNIT ITEM DESCRIPTION TOTAL ITEM PRICE IN FIGURES Lump Sum Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Ute' iA%%J)Wn @S�cr� f 1�� TIAt�J�.tto ollars and fCZ J Cents $ Per Lump Sum Lump Sum Mobilization @ SIX THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents $ 6,000.00 3. Lump Sum As -Built Drawings @ Five Thousand Dollars and zero Cents $ 5,000.00 Per Lump Sum PR2of4 The award of the Contract shall be made based on the total price submitted for bid items Nos. 1, 2 and 3. Bid Item #3 shall be included at a set value of $5,000. The City, at its discretion, may or may not include, Additive Bid Items No. Al, A2, and A3. TOTAL PRICE IN WRITTEN WORDS and N 0 Cents November 5, 201 Date T 949.724.1399 #202 F 949.724.1851 Bidder's Telephone and Fax Numbers T \A V 'r--' 011ars $ 91000-C-1� Total Price (Figures) Optima RPM, Inc. _ Bidder ^`Mice President/RMO Bi er's Authorized Signature and Title Within five calendar days after bids are opened, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review and approval, a "Schedule of Values" for the Lump Sum construction items in this proposal. The Engineer will use said Schedule to calculate monthly progress payments during the term of construction and to pay for units of extra work. PR3of4 The selection of lowest responsible bidder shall be based on the Total Base Bid amount above. The bid amount entered for the additive bid item below is for the sole purpose of City information. The City may, during construction, elect to construct one, all, or none of these additive bid items through Change Order(s). Al. Lump Sum Furnish and Install New Generator, fuel tank, signage, conduits, wiring, electrical gear, foundation system and warranty as described in plans and technical specifications. @ ONE HUNDRED TWENTY THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents $ 120,000.00 Per Each A2. Lump Sum Additional shear wall paneling per Exhibit 1. Contractor to provide a complete system and finish materials if not already described in plans. @ TWENTY FIVE THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents "$ 25,000.00 Per Each A3. Lump Sum Contractor to furnish and install new \"— masonry (CMU) wall, reinforced and connected to existing foundation and framing system per Exhibit 2. @TWENTY FOUR THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents $ 24,000.00, Per Each A4. Lump Sum Per Exhibit 1 and 2, add new collector elements and connections at the upper floor diaphragm along lines B, D, and 3, and at the ground floor diaphragm along lines A, B, and D. @ THIRTY FIVE THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents $ 35,000.00 Per Each A5. of A7 PR4of4 Lump Sum Per Exhibit 1 and 2, add new CMU wall to diaphragm anchors and add new cross diaphragm ties at the upper floor diaphragm. @ THIRTY EIGHT THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents $ 38,000.00 Per Each Lump Sum Per Exhibit 1 and 2, add new collector elements and connections along various wood shear wall lines at the roof diaphragm. @TWENTY FIVE THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents $ 25,000.00 Per Each Lump Sum Per Exhibit 1 and 2, add new 1/z" plywood over the top of the 2x decking between lines 2 and 4 at the ground floor. @ TWENTY THOUSAND Dollars and NO Cents $ 20,000.00 Per Each W serslPBlMSharedlCantfactslFY'34g1C-0669 - Lifeguard HO Building ReplacementlPROPOSAL C-0859 doa NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT NO. 4869 THIS CONTRACT FOR PUBLIC WORKS ("Contract") is entered into this 11th day of December, 2013 ("Effective Date"), by and between the CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH, a California municipal corporation and charter city ("City"), and OPTIMA RPM, INC., a California corporation ("Contractor"), whose address is 17945 Sky Park Circle, Suite D, Irvine, CA 92614, and is made with reference to the following: RECITALS A. City is a municipal corporation duly organized and validly existing under the laws of the State of California with the power to carry on its business as it is now being conducted under the statutes of the State of California and the Charter of City. B. City has advertised for bids for the following described public work: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project. The work necessary for the completion of this contract consists of: Interior tenant improvements on the 1st floor, 2nd floor and attic spaces of the existing Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters and an addition on the 2nd floor to expand the dispatch look -out and add an office space, as further detailed in the Project drawings and specifications. (the "Project" or "Work"). C. Contractor has been determined by City to be the lowest responsible bidder and Contractor's bid, and the compensation set forth in this Contract, is based upon Contractor's careful examination of all Contract documents, plans and specifications. NOW, THEREFORE, it is mutually agreed by and between the undersigned parties as follows: 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The complete Contract for the Project includes all of the following documents: Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Bidder's Bond, Non -Collusion Affidavit, Notice to Successful Bidder, Faithful Performance Bond, Labor and Materials Payment Bond, Permits, Standard Special Provisions and Standard Drawings, Plans and Special Provisions for Contract No. 4869, Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current adopted edition and all supplements), and this Contract, and all modifications and amendments thereto (collectively the "Contract Documents"), all of which are incorporated herein by reference. The Contract Documents comprise the sole agreement between the parties as to the subject matter therein. Any representations or agreements not specifically contained in the Contract Documents are null and void. Any amendments must be made in writing, and signed by both parties in the manner specified in the Contract Documents. 2. SCOPE OF WORK Contractor shall perform everything required to be performed, and shall provide and furnish all the labor, materials, necessary tools, expendable equipment and all utility and transportation services required for the Project. All of the Work to be performed and materials to be furnished shall be in strict accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is required to perform all activities, at no extra cost to City, which are reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as being necessary to produce the intended results. 3. COMPENSATION 3.1 As full compensation for the performance required by the Contract Documents, City shall pay accepts as full payment the sum of One Million Five Dollars and 00/100 ($1,546,000.00). 3.2 This compensation includes: and completion of the Project as to Contractor and Contractor Hundred Forty Six Thousand 3.2.1 Any loss or damage arising from the nature of the Work; 3.2.2 Any loss or damage arising from any unforeseen difficulties or obstructions in the performance of the Work; and 3.2.3 Any expense incurred as a result of any suspension or discontinuance of the Work, but excludes any loss resulting from earthquakes of a magnitude in excess of 3.5 on the Richter Scale and tidal waves, and which loss or expense occurs prior to acceptance of the Work by City. 4. NOTICE OF CLAIMS Unless a shorter time is specified elsewhere in this Contract, before making its final request for payment under the Contract Documents, Contractor shall submit to City, in writing, all claims for compensation under or arising out of this Contract. Contractor's acceptance of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims for compensation under or arising out of this Contract except those previously made in writing and identified by Contractor in writing as unsettled at the time of its final request for payment. The Contractor and City expressly agree that in addition to all claims filing requirements set forth in the Contract and Contract Documents, Contractor shall be required to file any claim Contractor may have against City in strict conformance with the Government Claims Act (Government Code 900 et seq.). WRITTEN NOTICE 5.1 All notices, demands, requests or approvals, including any change in mailing address, to be given under the terms of this Contract shall be given in writing, and conclusively shall be deemed served when delivered personally, or on the third Optima RPM, Inc. Page 2 business day after the deposit thereof in the United States mail, postage prepaid, first- class mail, addressed as hereinafter provided. 5.2 All notices, demands, requests or approvals from Contractor to City shall be addressed to City at: Attention: Peter Tauscher, Associate Engineer City of Newport Beach Public Works Department 100 Civic Center Drive P.O. Box 1768 Newport Beach, CA 92658 5.3 All notices, demands, requests or approvals from City to Contractor shall be addressed to Contractor at: Attention: Maykel Hanna Optima RPM, Inc. 17945 Sky Park Circle, Suite D Irvine, CA 92614 6. INSURANCE Without limiting Contractor's indemnification of City, and prior to commencement of Work, Contractor shall obtain, provide and maintain at its own expense during the term of this Contract or for other periods as specified in the Contract Documents, policies of insurance of the type, amounts, terms and conditions described in the Insurance Requirements attached hereto as Exhibit A, and incorporated herein by reference. 7. RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES OR INJURY 7.1 City and its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials, employees and volunteers shall not be responsible in any manner for any loss or damage to any of the materials or other things used or employed in performing the Project or for injury to or death of any person as a result of Contractor's performance of the Work required hereunder, or for damage to property from any cause arising from the performance of the Project by Contractor, or its subcontractors, or its workers, or anyone employed by either of them. 7.2 Contractor shall be responsible for any liability imposed by law and for injuries to or death of any person or damage to property resulting from defects, obstructions or from any cause arising from Contractor's Work on the Project, or the Work of any subcontractor or supplier selected by Contractor. 7.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless City, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials, employees and volunteers (collectively, the "Indemnified Parties") from and against any and all Optima RPM, Inc. Page 3 claims (including, without limitation, claims for bodily injury, death or damage to property), demands, obligations, damages, actions, causes of action, suits, losses, judgments, fines, penalties, liabilities, costs and expenses (including, without limitation, attorneys' fees, disbursements and court costs) of every kind and nature whatsoever (individually, a Claim; collectively, "Claims'), which may arise from or in any manner relate (directly or indirectly) to any breach of the terms and conditions of this Contract, any Work performed or Services provided under this Contract including, without limitation, defects in workmanship or materials or Contractor's presence or activities conducted on the Project (including the negligent, reckless, and/or willful acts, errors and/or omissions of Contractor, its principals, officers, agents, employees, vendors, suppliers, subconsultants, subcontractors, anyone employed directly or indirectly by any of them or for whose acts they may be liable for any or all of them). 7.4 Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify the Indemnified Parties from any Claim arising from the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties. Nothing in this indemnity shall be construed as authorizing any award of attorneys' fees in any action on or to enforce the terms of this Contract. This indemnity shall apply to all claims and liability regardless of whether any insurance policies are applicable. The policy limits do not act as a limitation upon the amount of indemnification to be provided by Contractor. 7.5 Contractor shall perform all Work in a manner to minimize public inconvenience and possible hazard, to restore other work areas to their original condition and former usefulness as soon as possible, and to protect public and private property. Contractor shall be liable for any private or public property damaged during the performance of the Project Work. 7.6 To the extent authorized by law, as much of the money due Contractor under and by virtue of the Contract as shall be considered necessary by City may be retained by it until disposition has been made of such suits or claims for damages as aforesaid. 7.7 Nothing in this Section or any other portion of the Contract Documents shall be construed as authorizing any award of attorneys' fees in any action to enforce the terms of this Contract, except to the extent provided for above. 7.8 The rights and obligations set forth in this Section shall survive the termination of this Contract. 8.1 This Contract may be amended or modified only by mutual written agreement of the parties. 8.2 The Contractor shall only commence work covered by a change order after the change order is executed and notification to proceed has been provided by the City. Optima RPM, Inc. Page 4 8.3 There shall be no change in the Contractor's members of the project team, as listed in the approved proposal, which is a part of this contract without prior written approval by the City. 9. EFFECT OF CONTRACTOR'S EXECUTION Execution of this Contract and all other Contract Documents by Contractor is a representation that Contractor has visited the Project site, has become familiar with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and has correlated all relevant observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 10. CONFLICT If there is a conflict between provisions of this Contract and any other Contract Document, the provisions of this Contract shall prevail. ii�rJN_119�7 A waiver by City or any term, covenant, or condition in the Contract Documents shall not be deemed to be a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other term, covenant or condition. 12. RECITALS City and Contractor acknowledge that the above Recitals are true and correct and are hereby incorporated by reference into this Contract. [SIGNATURES ON NEXT PAGE] Optima RPM, Inc. Page 5 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed on the dates written below. APPROVED AS TO FORM: CITY T, ,� 'S OFFICE Date: By: VVL---- Aawron C. Harp City Attorney ATTEST:' Date: By: Le' a i Brown City Clerk CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH, a California municipal corporation Date: 17 • IB • t3 By: Keith D. Cur Mayor CONTRACTOR: Optima RPM, Inc., a California corporation Date: /Z— — 4:� — / .-3 By: Mohamed Mamoun President Date: 12- 6- /3 By:�- Mayo Hanna Vice President and Secretary [END OF SIGNATURES] Attachments: Exhibit A — Insurance Requirements Exhibit B -- Labor and Materials Payment Bond Exhibit C -- Faithful Performance Bond Optima RPM, Inc. Page 6 EXHIBIT A INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS — PUBLIC WORKS AND CONSTRUCTION 1. Provision of Insurance. Without limiting Contractor's indemnification of City, and prior to commencement of Work, Contractor shall obtain, provide and maintain at its own expense during the term of this Contract, policies of insurance of the type and amounts described below and in a form satisfactory to City. Contractor agrees to provide insurance in accordance with requirements set forth here. If Contractor uses existing coverage to comply and that coverage does not meet these requirements, Contractor agrees to amend, supplement or endorse the existing coverage. 2. Acceptable Insurers. All insurance policies shall be issued by an insurance company currently authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business of insurance in the State of California, with an assigned policyholders' Rating of A- (or higher) and Financial Size Category Class VII (or larger) in accordance with the latest edition of Best's Key Rating Guide, unless otherwise approved by the City's Risk Manager. 3. Coverage Requirements A. Workers' Compensation Insurance. Contractor shall maintain Workers' Compensation Insurance providing statutory benefits and Employer's Liability Insurance with limits of at least one million dollars ($1,000,000) each employee for bodily injury by accident and each employee for bodily injury by disease in accordance with the laws of the State of California, Section 3700 of the Labor Code. In addition, Contractor shall require each subcontractor to similarly maintain Workers' Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability Insurance in accordance with California law for all of the subcontractor's employees. The insurer issuing the Workers' Compensation insurance shall amend its policy by endorsement to waive all rights of subrogation against City, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials, employees and volunteers. Contractor shall submit to City, along with the certificate of insurance, a Waiver of Subrogation endorsement in favor of City, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials, employees and volunteers. B. General Liability Insurance. Contractor shall maintain commercial general liability insurance, and if necessary umbrella liability insurance, with coverage at least as broad as provided by Insurance Services Office form CG 00 01, in an amount not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence, two million dollars ($2,000,000) general aggregate and two million dollars ($2,000,000) completed operations aggregate. The policy shall cover liability arising from premises, operations, products -completed operations, personal and advertising injury, and liability assumed under an Optima RPM, Inc. Page A-1 insured contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract) with no endorsement or modification limiting the scope of coverage for liability assumed under a contract. C. Automobile Liability Insurance. Contractor shall maintain automobile insurance at least as broad as Insurance Services Office form CA 00 01 covering bodily injury and property damage for all activities of Contractor arising out of or in connection with Work to be performed under this Contract, including coverage for any owned, hired, non -owned or rented vehicles, in an amount not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) combined single limit for each accident. D. Builder's Risk Insurance. For Contracts with property exposures during construction, Contractor shall maintain Builders Risk insurance or an installation floater as directed by City, covering damages to the Work for "all risk" or special causes of loss form with limits equal to 100% of the completed value of contract, with coverage to continue until final acceptance of the Work by City. At the discretion of City, the requirement for such coverage may include additional protection for Earthquake and/or Flood. City shall be included as an insured on such policy, and Contractor shall provide City with a copy of the policy. E. Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance. Contractor shall obtain and maintain an umbrella or excess liability insurance policy with limits of not less than four million dollars ($4,000,000) that will provide bodily injury, personal injury and property damage liability coverage at least as broad as the primary coverages set forth above, including commercial general liability and employer's liability Such policy or policies shall include the following terms and conditions: • A drop down feature requiring the policy to respond in the event that any primary insurance that would otherwise have applied proves to be uncollectable in whole or in part for any reason; • Pay on behalf of wording as opposed to reimbursement; • Concurrency of effective dates with primary policies; • Policies shall "follow form" to the underlying primary policies; and • Insureds under primary policies shall also be insureds under the umbrella or excess policies. 4. Other Insurance Requirements. The policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: A. Waiver of Subrogation. All insurance coverage maintained or procured pursuant to this Contract shall be endorsed to waive subrogation against City, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials employees and volunteers or shall specifically allow Contractor or others providing insurance evidence in compliance with these requirements to waive their Optima RPM, Inc. Page A-2 right of recovery prior to a loss. Contractor hereby waives its own right of recovery against City, and shall require similar written express waivers and insurance clauses from each of its subcontractors. B. Additional Insured Status. All liability policies including general liability, excess liability, pollution liability, and automobile liability, if required, shall provide or be endorsed to provide that City, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials employees and volunteers shall be included as additional insureds under such policies. C. Primary and Non Contributory. Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance and/or the primary source of recovery with respect to City, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by City shall be excess of Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. D. Notice of Cancellation. All policies shall provide City with thirty (30) calendar days notice of cancellation or nonrenewal of coverage (except for nonpayment for which ten (10) calendar days notice is required) for each required coverage except Builders Risk Insurance, which shall contain an endorsement with said required notices. 5. Additional Agreements Between the Parties. The parties hereby agree to the following: A. Evidence of Insurance. Contractor shall provide certificates of insurance to City as evidence of the insurance coverage required herein, along with a waiver of subrogation endorsement for workers' compensation and other endorsements as specified herein for each coverage. All of the executed documents referenced in this Contract must be returned to City within ten (10) regular City business days after the date on the "Notification of Award". Insurance certificates and endorsements must be approved by City's Risk Manager prior to commencement of performance. Current certification of insurance shall be kept on file with City at all times during the term of this Contract. City reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, at any time. B. City's Right to Revise Requirements. The City reserves the right at any time during the term of the Contract to change the amounts and types of insurance required by giving Contractor ninety (90) calendar days advance written notice of such change. If such change results in substantial additional cost to Contractor, City and Contractor may renegotiate Contractor's compensation. C. Right to Review Subcontracts. Contractor agrees that upon request, all agreements with subcontractors or others with whom Contractor enters into contracts with on behalf of City will be submitted to City for review. Optima RPM, Inc. Page A-3 Failure of City to request copies of such agreements will not impose any liability on City, or its employees. D. Enforcement of Contract Provisions. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any actual or alleged failure on the part of City to inform Contractor of non-compliance with any requirement imposes no additional obligations on City nor does it waive any rights hereunder. E. Requirements not Limiting. Requirements of specific coverage features or limits contained in this Exhibit A are not intended as a limitation on coverage, limits or other requirements, or a waiver of any coverage normally provided by any insurance. Specific reference to a given coverage feature is for purposes of clarification only as it pertains to a given issue and is not intended by any party or insured to be all inclusive, or to the exclusion of other coverage, or a waiver of any type. F. Self -Insured Retentions. Contractor agrees not to self -insure or to use any self-insured retentions on any portion of the insurance required herein and further agrees that it will not allow any indemnifying party to self - insure its obligations to City. If Contractor's existing coverage includes a self-insured retention, the self-insured retention must be declared to City. City may review options with Contractor, which may include reduction or elimination of the self-insured retention, substitution of other coverage, or other solutions. Contractor agrees to be responsible for payment of any deductibles on their policies. G. City Remedies for Non Compliance. If Contractor or any subcontractor fails to provide and maintain insurance as required herein, then City shall have the right but not the obligation, to purchase such insurance, to terminate this Contract, or to suspend Contractor's right to proceed until proper evidence of insurance is provided. Any amounts paid by City shall, at City's sole option, be deducted from amounts payable to Contractor or reimbursed by Contractor upon demand. H. Timely Notice of Claims. Contractor shall give City prompt and timely notice of claims made or suits instituted that arise out of or result from Contractor's performance under this Contract, and that involve or may involve coverage under any of the required liability policies. City assumes no obligation or liability by such notice, but has the right (but not the duty) to monitor the handling of any such claim or claims if they are likely to involve City. Coverage not Limited. All insurance coverage and limits provided by Contractor and available or applicable to this Contract are intended to apply to the full extent of the policies. Nothing contained in this Contract or any other agreement relating to City or its operations limits the application of such insurance coverage. Optima RPM, Inc. Page A-4 J. Coverage Renewal. Contractor will renew the coverage required here annually as long as Contractor continues to provide any Work under this or any other Contract or agreement with City. Contractor shall provide proof that policies of insurance required herein expiring during the term of this Contract have been renewed or replaced with other policies providing at least the same coverage. Proof that such coverage has been ordered shall be submitted prior to expiration. A coverage binder or letter from Contractor's insurance agent to this effect is acceptable. A certificate of insurance and/or additional insured endorsement as required in these specifications applicable to the renewing or new coverage must be provided to City with five (5) calendar days of the expiration of the coverages. K. Maintenance of General Liability Coverage. Contractor agrees to maintain commercial general liability coverage for a period of ten (10) years after completion of the Project or to obtain coverage for completed operations liability for an equivalent period. Optima RPM, Inc. Page A-5 Premium Listed On Performance Bond Executed in Two originals EXHIBIT B CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH BOND NO. 1001006632 LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND WHEREAS, the City of Newport Beach, State of California, has awarded OPTIMA RPM, INC. hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for Newp Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project, C-4869, in the city of Newf Beach, in strict conformity with the contract on file with the office of the city clerk of city of Newport Beach, which is incorporated herein by this reference. WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute the Contract and the terms thereof require the furnishing of a bond, providing that if Principal or any of Principal's subcontractors, shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the Work agreed to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, the Surety on this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth. NOW, THEREFORE, We the undersigned Principal, and, American Contractors Indemnity Company duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, (referred to herein as "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto the City of Newport Beach, in the sum of One Million Five Hundred Forty Six Thousand Dollars and 001100 ($1,546,000.00) lawful money of the United States of America, said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount payable by the City of Newport Beach under the terms of the Contract; for which payment well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal or the Principal's subcontractors, fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies, implements or machinery used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the Work contracted to be done, or for any other work or labor thereon of any kind, or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work or labor, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the Principal and subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work and labor, then the Surety will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this Bond, and also, in case suit is brought to enforce the obligations of this Bond, a reasonable attorneys' fee, to be fixed by the Court as required by the provisions of Section 9554 of the Civil Code of the State of California. The Bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies, and corporations entitled to file claims under Section 9100 of the California Civil Code so as to give a right of action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon this Bond, as required by and in accordance with the provisions of Sections 9500 et seq. of the Civil Code of the State of California. Optima RPM, Inc. Page B-1 And Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder shall in any wise affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the specifications. In the event that any principal above named executed this Bond as an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the above named Principal and Surety, on the 5th day of December 12013 Optima RPM, Inc. Name of Contractor (Principal) American Contractors Indemnity Company Name of Surety 601 South Figueroa Street, 16th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Address of Surety (310) 649-0990 Telephone Autho ed Signature/Title Maykej Hanna, Vice President re Stephanie Hoang, Attorney in -Fact Print Name and Title NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENTS OF CONTRACTOR AND SURETY MUST BE ATTACHED Optima RPM, Inc. Page B-2 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California 1 County ofyi`QWQVJ 11 I y oni�C'G. cl t Y� before me,F/imdlAP ij. I Amiyci, K�uvi,( Pybl C' , Date° t_ I Here Ineen Name and Title of the Officer v. n �... 1 1 .. personally appeared ELIZABET1i L -- -" Commission • 1678062 yaary Public - California Los Aftoes Cou M Comm. Expires Fe2ry 4 Place Notary Seal ancVor Stamp Above who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s)' is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/tfaeG executed the same in his/he'r/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s)' on the instrument the person(s); or the entity upon behalf of which the person acted, executed the instrument I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. Signature: seal. OPTIONAL k 77 -- Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Title or Type of E Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Cllaiim�e�dl fby, Sl igner(s) Sij er's Name: Y Y t `V &A on, iNhJc_ ©7 Officer — Title(s): V ' ❑ Individual ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General Top or thumb here ❑ Attorney in Fact -1 Trustee Guardian or Conservator L Other: Signer Is Representing_ document Number of Pages: CJS Signer's Name: ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Individual ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General Top or lhomb here ❑ Attorney in Fact C Trustee C Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: 02008 Nabonal Notary Association- 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 •Chatswom, CA 91313-2402 Item#590] ReorderCall Tnll-Fres t-Bnn-Rog-RR9] CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California 1 County of Orange On ll} On �o/S�/� before me, Barbara Copeland,Notary Public Owe Here Insert Name arta Tido d the oeimr personally appeared Stephanie Hoang Nemels) of SiIner(s) i3AR8ARA C0PELAND -✓' Commission # 2016346 a`i�se Notary Public - California Z X44 -MPS` ID Orange County My Comm. Expires Apr ig, I'll u who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the persons) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that -he/she/they executed the same in 4i s/her/their authorized capacity("), and that by-hisfher/their signature(4 on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(&) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS moand and official seal. ?2' / Signature"`1j,"- Place Notary Seal Above Signature orotary Public OPTIONAL V Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer(s) Signet's Name: Stephanie Hoang ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer—Title(s): ❑ Partner—L] Limited ❑ General X Attorney in Fact 11 El Trustee Top of thumb here ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: Number of Pages: Signer's Name: ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General _ ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee Top of thumb here ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: btrM714atimal Notary A iatbn-9350 De Soto Ale.,RO.aox2402-Chatoworm.CA 91313240-• .Na tetlotar,tM Item 45907 Reortler:CallW-Free1-81 867 7 POWER OF ATTORNEY AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Contractors Indemnity Company, a California corporation, United States Surety Company, a Maryland corporation and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company, a Texas corporation (collectively, the "Companies"), do by these presents make, constitute and appoint: Shawn Blume, Stephanie Hoang, Eric Lowey or Mark Richardson of Costa Mesa, California its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, with full power and authority hereby conferredin its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings - or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include riders, amendments, and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty doe& not exceed *****Three Million***** Dollars ($ **3,000,000.00** ). _This --Power of Attorney shall expire without further action on December 08, 2016. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of the Companies: Be it Resolved, that the President, any Vice -President, any Assistant Vice -President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions -. - Attorney -in -Fact may he given full power an -authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bortsls, recognizances, contracts, agreements or initannity, and other conditional or obligatory undertakings, including any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineetieg and construction contracts, and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attomey-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate beating facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any band or:rudertaking to which it is attached - - _ IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 10th day of December, 2012. - AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY Corporate Seals T� .o�tanc,ons ... saw 14, =1ek Bond No. /M/4UG��2 ,,"� x= =vim ,rx a Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President State of California''`°;;dog,",;,'°`• County of Los Angeles SS: Dn406ilayW December, 2012, before me, Vanessa Wright, a notary public, persorrIly appeared Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President of --.=Ai eaiffCmdractors Indemnity Company, United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his authorized capacity, and that by his signature on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURYrutder the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal - ¢ WfliaaT c _ - pwy Public. 11988ai9 Signature V � - '^ (Seal) ao/us AngiCafflonfla � as An9�es Canty M Comm.r iru lMc 8.2016+ L Jeannie Lee, Assistant Secretary of American Contractors Indemnity Company United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty fasirrance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true andcorrectcopy of a Power of Attorney, executed by ---said-Companies, which is still in full force and effect; furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Wi�ttess Whereof, hhave hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Los Angeles, California this S%w day of /i�GeGH�X/� ,o�20/j. Corporate Seals .o�tanc,ons ... Rus sugFr .,, u.... .. s Bond No. /M/4UG��2 ,,"� "P R� a + ;3 _ Jeannie Lee, ssistant Secretary Agency No. 18200 PREMIUM IS FOR THE CONTRACT TERM AND IS SUBJECT TO ADJUSTMENT BASED ON FINAL CONTRACT PRICE Premium $28,378.00 Executed in Two originals 1*:4:II:IYI[�? CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH BOND NO. 1001006632 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND The premium charges on this Bond is $ 28,378.00 , being at the rate of $ 23.50 per thousand for the first $100,000.00° thousand of the Contract price. '$18 per thousand thereafter WHEREAS, the City of Newport Beach, State of California, has awarded to OPTIMA RPM, Inc. hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project, C-4869, in the City of Newport Beach, in strict conformity with the Contract on file with the office of the City Clerk of the City of Newport Beach, which is incorporated herein by this reference. WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute the Contract and the terms thereof require the furnishing of a Bond for the faithful performance of the Contract. NOW, THEREFORE, we, the Principal, and American Contractors Indemnity Company , duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of California as Surety (hereinafter "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Newport Beach, in the sum of One Million Five Hundred Forty Six Thousand Dollars and 00/100 ($1,546,000.00) lawful money of the United States of America, said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount of the Contract, to be paid to the City of Newport Beach, its successors, and assigns; for which payment well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal, or the Principal's heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, fail to abide by, and well and truly keep and perform any or all the Work, covenants, conditions, and agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration thereof made as therein provided on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to its true intent and meaning, or fails to indemnify, defend, and save harmless the City of Newport Beach, its officers, employees and agents, as therein stipulated, then, Surety will faithfully perform the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this Bond; otherwise this obligation shall become null and void. As a part of the obligation secured hereby, and in addition to the face amount specified in this Performance Bond, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred by City, only in the event City is required to bring an action in law or equity against Surety to enforce the obligations of this Bond. Optima RPM, Inc. Page C-1 Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions of the Contract or to the Work or to the specifications. This Faithful Performance Bond shall be extended and maintained by the Principal in full force and effect for one (1) year following the date of formal acceptance of the Project by City. In the event that the Principal executed this bond as an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal and Surety above named, on the 5th day of December 32013 Optima RPM, Inc. Name of Contractor (Principal) American Contractors Indemnity Company Name of Surety 601 South Figueroa Street, 16th Floor Los Angeles, CA 90017 Address of Surety (310)649-0990 Telephone *ayQcre , aenaa;lr V'itce Presidant Authorized Agent Signature Stephanie Hoang, A/riey-in-Fact Print Name and Title NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENTS OF CONTRACTOR AND SURETY MUST BE ATTACHED Optima RPM, Inc. Page C-2 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT State of California I Countyof OI QNa� On DcGl ' to � before me, F� VrOhIfK- 1+1 _1 Date Here Insert Name and Title of the OMcei personally appeared K t Ytl/IYSIUt LIZA6ETti 1. RAMIREZ Cemmf Wm • 1678062 me" Public - California Lot Angeles County Comm. Ea fres Feb 21, 2014+ Place Notary Seal amVor Stamp Above who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/ber/(heir` authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/he6their signatures) on the instrument the person,(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the personjs)'acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. Signature: OPTIONAL I` Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relyflg-6,document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Title or Type of C Document Date: t C71 ;C I t //\;1 U t Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed}.1 by tSigner(s) Signer's Name: 1 ' `U� I�gft N� VCorporate Officer — Title(s): IV Number of Pages: Signer's Name: J Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Individual J Individual ❑ Partner— ❑ Limited ❑ General Top or thumb here �:] Partner — ❑ Limited 7 General Top of thumb here ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator 71 Guardian or Conservator -1 Other: ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing:, Signer Is Representing: C`, -* rw\� o Yv� G MUld Natlenal NotaryAssaclaoon• 93su ue boto Ave, Y.U. tlox 2402•Ulratswcnh, CA 91313-2402 w .Nationa Notary.om Item #5907 Reorder Call Tall -Free 1-800-876-6827 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT GYs'.FAi\. Q4vR' �Y-�M=.(-'�I`rG`l�.C`�!`l.C`��NyN.i'�"•.ZIL "��.E�.fZiPb R'%f`i 2�� � � .C'f�.C`hiC(�—Ali-rY.CC— !-i^.C1i.C< State of California l County of /Orange J} On �5 �J before me, Barbara Copeland, Notary Public Dale Hero Insert Name ane re of #w cricer ' personally appeared Steohanie Hoang Neme(s) al Sigrleq.I Place Notary Seal Above who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(&) whose name(s) islare subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that -he/she/they executed the same in -his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that byt)is/her/their signature(&} on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(&) acted, executed the instrument. 1 certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. G , Signature /i Signature bf otary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name: Stephanie Hoang ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General l* Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee Top of thumb here ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: Number of Pages: Signer's Name: ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: RIGHTTHBMBPRINT iDF SIGNER L D2007 National Notary AsodaGon• 9150 De Soto Ave., R0 Box 24M-Cludeb l,. CA 91313.24112• w .Netionall,otaryorg Item #590] R,eorEer:Cell Tall -Free 1ElNld766527 moi; BARBARA CO PELAND -..,i "•• CBmmission # 2016348 Notary Public - Caiitornia Orange County D My Comm. Expires Apr 19, 2017+ Place Notary Seal Above who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(&) whose name(s) islare subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that -he/she/they executed the same in -his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that byt)is/her/their signature(&} on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(&) acted, executed the instrument. 1 certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. G , Signature /i Signature bf otary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name: Stephanie Hoang ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General l* Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee Top of thumb here ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: Number of Pages: Signer's Name: ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s): ❑ Partner —❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer Is Representing: RIGHTTHBMBPRINT iDF SIGNER L D2007 National Notary AsodaGon• 9150 De Soto Ave., R0 Box 24M-Cludeb l,. CA 91313.24112• w .Netionall,otaryorg Item #590] R,eorEer:Cell Tall -Free 1ElNld766527 �''C© ' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YVVV) THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER SullivanCurtisMonroe Insurance Services 550 South Hope Street, Suite 1000 CONTACT NAME: PHONE o Ext: 213-233-0400 FAX (ac No : 21 - -1593 - EMAIL ADDRESS: Los Angeles, CA 90071 www.SullivanCurtisMonroe.com License #OE83670 _ INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC p INSURERA: Great American Assurance Co 26344 INSURED Opptima RPM, Inc. 17945 Sky Park Circle, Bldg 34, Ste. D Irvine CA 92614 _ INSURER B: Nationwide Mutual Insurance CO _ 3787 INSURER c: United S ecialty Insurance Co. 12537 INSURER D: CA State Com epnsation Insurance Fund 35076 INSURER E: INSURER F: MED EXP (Any one person) $ Excluded PERSONAL AOV INJURY $ 1,000001) COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 1R54R7R9 RFVISIr m NI IMRFR• THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP (MMIDDMYYt i IMMIDDi LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY V ✓ GLP4647929 5/9/2013 15/9/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE S 1,000,000 ✓ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY r , I CLAIMS -MADE a OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence) $ 50,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ Excluded PERSONAL AOV INJURY $ 1,000001) ✓ 5000 BIIPD Ded per Ow. _& GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMPIO_P AGG $ 2,000, Goo GEN' L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY ,/ PRO LOC $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ✓ ACPBA7625445336 5/9/2013 5/9/2014 COMBINED l) SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000 000 ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ I/HIREDAUTCS AU OS SCHEOULEOBODILY AUTO�( INJURY Per accidentAUTOS ) $ L/ NON -OWNED AUTOS I PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per acctlenl $ $ $ GHUMBRELLA LIAB ✓ OCCUR USA4017730 7/1/2013 5/9/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 4,000000 EXCESS Llga CLAIMS -MADE AGGREGATE $ 4,000,000 $ _ DED RETENTION $0 $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY YJN ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDEDP ,NIA (Mandatory in NHI If yes, describe under ✓ 196546613 1i 9/1/2013 9/1/2014 WC STATU- 0TH-' ✓ I TORY LIMITS Eft E L EACH ACCIDENT S 1,000,00 E L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE! $ 1,000,00 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1 $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS VEHIC ES(Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) RE: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabiliation Project Contract # 4869.0 City of Newport, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials employees and volunteers are included as Additional Insureds under the General and Auto Liability per attached endorsement. Primary Wording applies to General Liability. Waiver of Subrogation applies to Workers Compensation and General Liability. Excess Liability if Following form to Liability policies. 30 Day Notice of Cancellation Applies. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Newport SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN Public Works Department ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Attn: Peter Tauscher, Associate Engineer P.O. Box 1768 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Newport Beach CA 92658 Kathy Roberge © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2010/05) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Act:>RbF CERTIFICATE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDDIYYYY) 6�- PI THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. If this certificate is being prepared for a party who has an insurable interest in the property, do not use this form. Use ACORD 27 or ACORD 28. PRODUCER SUllivanCUrtisMOn roe Insurance Services 550 South Hope Street, Suite 1000 Los Angeles, CA 90071 www. SullivanCurtisMonroe.com License CONTACT NAME: PHONE 213-2.33-0400 FAz 213-892-1593 E-MAIL ADDRESS: PRODUCER CUSTOMERID: OPTIMRPM INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURER A: Chubb Insurance Company NAICN INSURED Otime RPM, Inc. p 17945 Sky Park Circle, Bldg 34, Ste. D Irvine CA 92614 INSURER 9: INSURER C: INSURER 0 INSURER E: _ BUILDING INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 18546748 REVISION NUMBER: LOCATION OF PREMISES I DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if mare space is requiretl) THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSft LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY IN UMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE(MWDDIYYYY) POLICY EXPIRATION COVERED PROPERTY DATE(MMIDDNYYY) LIMITS PROPERTY BUILDING $ CAUSES OF LOSS DEDUCTIBLES PERSONAL PROPERTY $ BASIC BUILDING - BUSINESS INCOME I $ I BROAD CONTENTS EXTRA EXPENSE $ SPECIAL _ RENTAL VALUE $ EARTHQUAKE BLANKET BUILDING $ WIND BLANKET PERS PROP FLOOD BLANKET BLDG 8 PP $ $ I INLAND MARINE 'TYPE OF POLICY ✓ Limit Of Ins $1,546,000. Builders Risk $100% ✓ Coinsurance POLICY NUMBER A In Issuance 12/16/2013 6/16/2014 ✓ Transit $ 100,000 $ 5,0.00 CAUSES OF LOSS ✓ Deductible NAMED PERILS I$ $ ✓ S ecial ✓ Re lacer Cost CRIME $ TYPE OF POLICY BOILERMACHINERY EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN $ $ $ SPECIAL CONDITIONS I OTHER COVERAGES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schetlule, if mare space is required) RE: Project Newport Beach Lifeguard headquarters Rehabilitation Contract No, 4869. City of Newport Beach Public Works Department Attn: Peter Tauscher, Associate Engineer P.O. Box 1768 Newport Beach CA 92658 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Kathy Roberge Optima RPM, Inc. POLICY NUMBER: GLP4647929 COMMERCIAL GENERAL L.V at.1T�YF 5/9/2013 5/9/2014 Ca 20 37 til CH THIS ENDORSEAPIEN"3 CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ F CAREFULLY. ,ADDITIONAL INSURED - bWNERS, LESSEES O CONTRACTORS - COMPLIF-TED OPERATIONS This andorsernerfl alolifµad Insurenoe,,(ovld*d under the tolltyo/,ng: COMM,?ERCIAL GENERA. LIA181LITY COVERAGE pAR'r Nemo Of AJdWonal Insured Person(s) Engineer CA 92658 5CHEDU4,µ Sec210.1 It — Who is An Insurea Is amended to IMAWO as an addtaonsl innrirod VW Por"s) or organtzat on(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with res a to Ilability for "trod ly ln)ury" or'property dam- ag5" cawed, In v+tm!a or In part, by "yor.!r wo-k" at IN locatlon daalgnatad and dezcrlbed In the schad- ule of this erKloraernont performed for that addltlonai Insurod and iiduded In the "prodwia ampla3aQ operations h27.7rd'1. CG 20 37 07 04 0 ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 PaC, i of 1 0 GLP4647929 Optima RPM, Inc. 12/9/2013 GAC 3649CG (Ed. 11 06) THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY NON-CONTRIBUTORY INSURANCE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM This insurance is primary to any other insurance held by third parties with respect to work performed by you under written contractual agreements with such third parties and any other insurance which may be available to such third parties shall be non-contributory. GAC 3649CG Ed. 111061 XS Optima RPM, Inc. 5/9/2013 POLICY NUMBER: GLP4647929 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 24 04 05 09 WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Person Or Organization: Any person or organization who requires, you to obtain this waiver of our right of recovery under a written contract or agreement. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV —Conditions: We waive any right of recovery we may have against the person or organization shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your ongoing operations or "your work' done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products -completed operations hazard." This waiver applies only to the person or organization shown in the Schedule above. CG 24 04 05 09 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 1 of 1 WAIVER OF SUBROGATION REP DI 1965466-13 RENEWAL SG 5-44-99-30 PAGE 1 HOME OFFICE ;AN FRANCISCO EFFECTIVE DECEMBER 9, 2013 AT 12.01 A.M. 1LLEFFECTIVE DATES ARE AND EXPIRING SEPTEMBER 1, 2014 AT 12.01 A.M. 1T 12:01 AM PACIFIC STANDARD TIME OR THE "IME INDICATED AT 'ACIFIC STANDARD TIME OPTIMA RPM, INC 17945 SKY PARK CIR STE D IRVINE, CA 92614 ANYTHING IN THIS POLICY TO THE CONTRARY NOTWITHSTANDING, IT IS AGREED THAT THE STATE COMPENSATION INSURANCE FUND WAIVES ANY RIGHT OF SUBROGATION AGAINST. CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH WHICH MIGHT ARISE BY REASON OF ANY PAYMENT UNDER THIS POLICY IN CONNECTION WITH WORK PERFORMED BY, OPTIMA RPM, INC IT IS FURTHER AGREED THAT THE INSURED SHALL MAINTAIN PAYROLL RECORDS ACCURATELY SEGREGATING THE REMUNERATION OF EMPLOYEES WHILE ENGAGED IN WORK FOR THE ABOVE EMPLOYER. IT IS FURTHER AGREED THAT PREMIUM ON THE EARNINGS OF SUCH EMPLOYEES SHALL BE INCREASED BY 03%. NOTHING IN THIS ENDORSEMENT CONTAINED SHALL BE HELD TO VARY, ALTER, WAIVE OR EXTEND ANY OF THE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AGREEMENTS, OR LIMITATIONS OF THIS POLICY OTHER THAN AS STATED. NOTHING ELSEWHERE IN THIS POLICY SHALL BE HELD TO VARY, ALTER, WAIVE OR LIMIT THE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AGREEMENTS OR LIMITATIONS OF THIS ENDORSEMENT. COUNTERSIGNED AND ISSUED AT SAN FRANCISCO: DECEMBER 11, 2013 2570 ��� ,TFC AC"RU® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCEF -, OATS tMMIDDIYYYY) 21912013 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER SUllivanCurtisMonroe Insurance Services 550 South Hope Street, Suite Suite 1000 Los Angeles, CA 90071 www. SullivanCurtisMon roe. com License # OE83670 CONTACT NAME: PHONEINC,No Ext: 213-233-0400 FAX A/c No): 213-892-1593 EMAIL ADDRESS: INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAICN INSURERA: Great American Assurance Co. 26344 INSURED 0plima RPM, Inc. 17945 Sky Park Circle, Bldg 34, Ste. D Irvine CA 92614 _ INSURERS: Nationwide Mutual Insurance Co. 23787 INsuRERc: United Specialty Insurance Co.12537 INSURER D: CAS ate Compensation Insurance Fund 35076 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: IAAAA7AQ REVISION NUMBER' THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WTH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR' POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF MMIDDIYYYY POLICY EXP MM/DD/YYYY LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY ✓ ✓ GLP4647929 5/9/2013 5/9/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 ✓ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE a OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTEDPREMISES E. opurrencel $ 50,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ Excluded PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 ✓ $5.000 BI/PD Ded per Occ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEH L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER. PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGO $ 2,000,000 POLICY ✓ PRO LOC $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ✓ ACPBA7825445336 5/9/2013 5/912014 COMBINED tSINGLE LIMIT $ _ 000 000 ✓ ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ALL Oe SCHEDULED AUTOSS AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accidenU $ ✓ NON -OWNED HIRED AUTOS ✓ AUTOS _ PROPERTY DAMAGE Per accident $ $ $ C UMBRELLA LIAR ✓ OCCUR USA4017730 7/1/2013 5/9/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 4,000,000 AGGREGATE s 4,000,000 EXCESS UAB CLAIMS-MADE DEO RETENTION$0 _ $ $ $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY y I N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNERIEXECUTIV� OFFICERIMEMBER E%CLUDED? ❑Y NIA ,� 196546613 9/1/2013 9/1/2014 &Yu ITU TS oR E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1 000 000 — El DISEASE -EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,00 (Mandatory In NHl If yes, describe Lntler EL DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/ LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space Is required) RE: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabiliation Project Contract It 4869.0 City of Newport, its elected or appointed officers, agents, officials employees and volunteers are included as Additional Insureds under the General and Auto Liability per attached endorsement. Primary Wording applies to General Liability. Waiver of Subrogation applies to Workers Compensation and General Liability. Excess Liability if Fallowing form to Liability policies. 30 Day Notice of Cancellation Applies. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE City of Newport THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN Public Works Department ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Attn: Peter Tauscher, Associate Engineer P.O. Box 1768 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Newport Beach CA 92658 Kathy Roberge © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION, All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2010105) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Optima RPM, Inc. POLICY NUMBER: GLP4647929 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LiAlatLny 5/9/2013 5/9/2014 GO 20 37 07 eh; THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES 3THE POLICY. PLEASE READ tT CAJ.REFU LY. ADDITIONAL INSURED e bWN RS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPUUTIONS This endoraemerd rno tirl9y Insurance rwovicisd under fha folia,Ying: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILrFY COVERAr E PAR'r SCHEDL)LE Sectto.a A – Who is An Insures; is amended to Inoitr3e as an addiknaf insured the person4s) or orWLBtkxKs) shown in the Scheduli,, but only with MspacS to nathtily for "bodily In)u r or 'properly dam_ aga" catmad, in vAx4a or In part, by 'your work" at IN tvcallon des4natrod and dean t,:d in VA scllsd- uI9 of this aredamemant periormsd for Iasi additional Insured and boltkla-d In the "producits-complalaa oparadona h rvurd". CG 20 37 07 04 0 ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Paga 1 of 4 Li Or Orcaenitation s :_ ^_,ry�Locatlon y ofl7ew'�'rt"" Or Or Public Works Department Ar:d 9oscrtPRO OS Cam�rlotod OpmrasFon� —. Attn: Peter Tauscher, Associate Engineer P.O. Box 1768 Newport Beach CA 92658 tnrormaYon required to cos 2leta this Scheriulajd got sNov 2bave• rain be ahowmin the Declarati;xra�� Sectto.a A – Who is An Insures; is amended to Inoitr3e as an addiknaf insured the person4s) or orWLBtkxKs) shown in the Scheduli,, but only with MspacS to nathtily for "bodily In)u r or 'properly dam_ aga" catmad, in vAx4a or In part, by 'your work" at IN tvcallon des4natrod and dean t,:d in VA scllsd- uI9 of this aredamemant periormsd for Iasi additional Insured and boltkla-d In the "producits-complalaa oparadona h rvurd". CG 20 37 07 04 0 ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Paga 1 of 4 Li GLP4647929 Optima RPM, Inc. 12/9/2013 GAC 3649CG (Ed. 11 06) THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY NON-CONTRIBUTORY INSURANCE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM This insurance is primary to any other insurance held by third parties with respect to work performed by you under written contractual agreements with such third parties and any other insurance which may be available to such third parties shall be non—contributory. GAC 3649CG Ed, 11/06) XS Optima RPM, Inc. 5/9/2013 POLICY NUMBER: GLP4647929 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 24 04 05 09 WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Person Or Organization: Any person or organization who requires, you to obtain this waiver of our right of recovery under a written contract or agreement, Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV —Conditions: We waive any right of recovery we may have against the person or organization shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your ongoing operations or "your work' done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products -completed operations hazard." This waiver applies only to the person or organization shown in the Schedule above. CG 24 04 05 09 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 1 of 1 4COR[7®CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 4r�..i DATE 21171201313 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Sullivan Curti sMonroe Insurance Services 550 South Hope Street, Suite 1000 Los Angeles, CA 90071 www.SullivanCurtisMonme.com License # OE83670 CONTACT NAME: PHONE AC Nq: - -92-1593 E-MAIL ADDRESS: INSURER 5 AFFOROING COVERAGE NAIC k INSURERA: Great Americzin Assurance Co. 26344 INSURED Optima RPM, Inc. 17945 Sky Park Circle, Bldg 34, Ste. D Irvine CA 92614 INSURER a: Insurance 57 INSURERC: In urn O 12537 INSURER D: CA StateCompen5ation Ins r n F 7 INSURER E: INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 18633155 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADOL SUER POLICYNUMBER POLICY EFF fNi POLICY EXP RNIMIDDIYYYY LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY ✓ V GLP4647929 5/9/2013 5/9/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 ✓ COMMERCIALGENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE OCCUR DAMAGE T RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $ 50,000 MED EXP (My we person) $ Excluded PERSONAL 9 ADV INJURY $ 11000,000 ✓ $5 000 BI/PD Ded oer Occ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY✓ PRO LOC g B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ✓ ACPBA7826445336 5/9/2013 5/9/2014 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT Ea accitlsm $ 1 000.000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ✓ ANYAUTO ALL OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS (Per acpitlenl BODILY INJURY P ( ) $ ✓ NON -OWNED HIRED AUTOS ✓ AUTOS PROPERTYDAJAGE Per accident $ G UMBRELLA LIAB ✓ OCCUR USA4017730 7/112013 5/9/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 4,000,000 AGGREGATE 8 4,000,000 EXCESS LAB CLAIMS -MADE DEO RETENTION $0 $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION ANDEMPLOYERS'LIABILITY YIN ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNEWEXECUTIVE OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? NIA ✓ 196546613 9/1/2013 9/1/2014 'A'C STATU- DI- TORY LIMITS E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1'000000 (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (Attach ACORD id 1, Additional Remarks Schedule, If more space Is required) RE: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabiliation Project Contract # 4869.0 The City of Newport Beach, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers are included as Additional Insureds under the General and Auto Liability per attached endorsement. Primary Wording applies to General Liability. Waiver of Subrogation applies to Workers Compensation and General Liability. Excess Liability if Following form to Liability policies. 36 Day Notice of Cancellation Applies. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE The City of Newport Beach, its officers, THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN officials, employees, and volunteers ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. P.O. Box 1768 Newport Beach CA 92658 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Lo e C -T~ Kathy Roberge ©1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2010/05) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Optima RPM, Inc. POLICY NUP413ER: GLP4647929 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIA ILITY 5/9/2013 5/9/2014 CG 20 37 07 f, TPIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES T14E POLICY. PLEASE READ IT C.ARIEPtULLY, ADDITIONAL INSURED - bWMERS, LESSEES OF1 CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endonsemar.4 mo(Mm )nsWanoe provided under Ola iojlgwing: COMMERML GFNERAL LIAEILi fY COVERACg PART SCNMVW _ Nerve OfAddiitonal Insured person{e) Or On_��je���nt>_atlongsj: l.oca3lg, n Asad D®sctl Yion Oi Com rleSsG OIL ara£rary� ---'4-------- -^--------�—•- e y o ewpor eacTi;its 0 kers; olficials, employees, and volunteers P.O. Box 1768 Newport Beach CA 92658 Ilrformatlon required to complete tt6s Schedule,il not sha+n above, wql be shown in the Declarations. SecNou 11 — Who to An In.^,umd Is amendo to InclWe as an addidonsl insured the porson(s) or orWIzatpn(a) ahown In the Schedule, but oniy with Mas to HaURY for "God7; Injury Or 'Prop" dam - ago" mrad, In v/,h-da or In part, by 'your morr at the location daOgplatled and demlced in the sohed- ula of thls sndomernent perforrnod for that addltlonai Inaured and WdLldod7 1n the "pr0ctir camplata4 operas ons W-aW. CG 20 37 07 04 Q7 ISO Properties, Inc., 2U04 pagq 1 ei 1 M GLP4647929 Optima RPM, Inc. 12/17/2013 GAC 3649CG (Ed. 11 06) THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY, PRIMARY NON-CONTRIBUTORY INSURANCE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM This insurance is primary to any other insurance held by third parties with respect to work performed by you under written contractual agreements with such third parties and any other insurance which may be available to such third parties shall be non-contributory, GAC 3649CG IEd.r 11(061 XS Optima RPM, Inc. 5/9/2013 POLICY NUMBER: GLP4647929 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 24 04 05 09 WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Person Or Organization: Any person or organization who requires, you to obtain this waiver of our right of recovery under a written contract or agreement. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV — Conditions: We waive any right of recovery we may have against the person or organization shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your ongoing operations or "your work" done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products -completed operations hazard." This waiver applies only to the person or organization shown in the Schedule above. CG 24 04 05 09 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 1 of 1 WAIVER OF SUBROGATION REP D1 1965466-13 RENEWAL SG 5-44-99-30 PAGE 1 HOME OFFICE ;AN FRANCISCO EFFECTIVE DECEMBER 9, 2013 AT 12.01 A.M. \LL EFFECTIVE DATES ARE AND EXPIRING SEPTEMBER 1, 2014 AT 12.01 A.M. 1T 12:01 AM PACIFIC STANDARD TIME OR THE 'IME INDICATED AT 'ACIFIC STANDARD TIME OPTIMA RPM, INC 17945 SKY PARK CIR STE D IRVINE, CA 92614 ANYTHING IN THIS POLICY TO THE CONTRARY NOTWITHSTANDING, IT IS AGREED THAT THE STATE COMPENSATION INSURANCE FUND WAIVES ANY RIGHT OF SUBROGATION AGAINST, CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH WHICH MIGHT ARISE BY REASON OF ANY PAYMENT UNDER THIS POLICY IN CONNECTION WITH WORK PERFORMED BY, OPTIMA RPM, INC IT IS FURTHER AGREED THAT THE INSURED SHALL MAINTAIN PAYROLL RECORDS ACCURATELY SEGREGATING THE REMUNERATION OF EMPLOYEES WHILE ENGAGED IN WORK FOR THE ABOVE EMPLOYER. IT IS FURTHER AGREED THAT PREMIUM ON THE EARNINGS OF SUCH EMPLOYEES SHALL BE INCREASED BY 03%. NOTHING IN THIS ENDORSEMENT CONTAINED SHALL BE HELD TO VARY, ALTER, WAIVE OR EXTEND ANY OF THE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AGREEMENTS, OR LIMITATIONS OF THIS POLICY OTHER THAN AS STATED. NOTHING ELSEWHERE IN THIS POLICY SHALL BE HELD TO VARY, ALTER, WAIVE OR LIMIT THE TERMS, CONDITIONS, AGREEMENTS OR LIMITATIONS OF THIS ENDORSEMENT. COUNTERSIGNED AND ISSUED AT SAN FRANCISCO: DECEMBER 11, 2013 2570 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CHECKLIST City of Newport Beach This checklist is comprised of requirements as outlined by the City of Newport Beach. * Date Received: 12/10/13 Dept./Contact Received From Lucie Date Completed: 12/18/13 Sent to: Lucie By: Chris Company/Person required to have certificate: Optima RPM, Inc. Type of contract: All Others I. GENERAL LIABILITY EFFECTIVE/EXPIRATION DATE: 5/9/13-5/9/14 A. INSURANCE COMPANY: Great American Assurance Company B. AM BEST RATING (A-: VII or greater): A:XIV C. ADMITTED Company (Must be California Admitted): Is Company admitted in California? N Yes ❑ No D. LIMITS (Must be $1 M or greater): What is limit provided? 1,000,000/2,000,000 E. ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT— please attach N Yes ❑ No F. PRODUCTS AND COMPLETED OPERATIONS (Must (What is limits provided?) include): Is it included? (completed Operations status does F. PRIMARY & NON-CONTRIBUTORY WORDING (For Waste not apply to Waste Haulers or Recreation) N Yes ❑ No G. ADDITIONAL INSURED FOR PRODUCTS AND G. HIRED AND NON -OWNED AUTO ONLY: COMPLETED OPERATIONS ENDORSEMENT (completed H. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION: Operations status does not apply to Waste Haulers) N Yes ❑ No H. ADDITIONAL INSURED WORDING TO INCLUDE (The City its officers, officials, employees and volunteers): Is it included? N Yes ❑ No I. PRIMARY & NON-CONTRIBUTORY WORDING (Must be included): Is it included? N Yes ❑ No J. CAUTION! (Confirm that loss or liability of the named insured is not limited solely by their negligence) Does endorsement include "solely by negligence" wording? ❑ Yes N No K. ELECTED SCMAF COVERAGE (RECREATION ONLY): N N/A ❑ Yes ❑ No L. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION: ❑ N/A N Yes ❑ No IL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY EFFECTIVE/EXPIRATION DATE: 5/6/13-5/9/14 A. INSURANCE COMPANY: Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company B. AM BEST RATING (A-: VII or greater) A+:XV C. ADMITTED COMPANY (Must be California Admitted): Is Company admitted in California? N Yes ❑ No D. LIMITS - If Employees (Must be $1 M min. BI & PD and $500,000 UM, $2M min for Waste Haulers): What is limits provided? 1,000,000 E. LIMITS Waiver of Auto Insurance / Proof of coverage (if individual) (What is limits provided?) N/A F. PRIMARY & NON-CONTRIBUTORY WORDING (For Waste Haulers only): N N/A ❑ Yes ❑ No G. HIRED AND NON -OWNED AUTO ONLY: ❑ N/A ❑ Yes N No H. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION: ❑ N/A N Yes ❑ No WORKERS' COMPENSATION EFFECTIVE/EXPIRATION DATE: 9/1/13-9/1/14 A. INSURANCE COMPANY: State Fund B. AM BEST RATING (A-: VII or greater): NR C. ADMITTED Company (Must be California Admitted): D. WORKERS' COMPENSATION LIMIT: Statutory E. EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY LIMIT (Must be $1M or greater) F. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION (To include): Is it included? G. SIGNED WORKERS' COMPENSATION EXEMPTION FORM: H. NOTICE OF CANCELLATION: ADDITIONAL COVERAGE'S THAT MAYBE REQUIRED IV. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY V POLLUTION LIABILITY V BUILDERS RISK HAVE ALL ABOVE REQUIREMENTS BEEN MET? IF N0, WHICH ITEMS NEED TO BE COMPLETED? Approved: Agent of Alliant Insurance Services Broker of record for the City of Newport Beach 12/18/13 Date ® Yes ❑ No ® Yes ❑ No 1,00M00 ® Yes ❑ No ® N/A ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A ® Yes ❑ No ® N/A ❑ Yes ❑ No ® N/A ❑ Yes ❑ No ® N/A ❑ Yes ❑ No ® Yes ❑ No RISK MANAGEMENT APPROVAL REQUIRED (Non -admitted carrier rated less than _ Self Insured Retention or Deductible greater than $ ) ❑ N/A ❑ Yes ❑ No Reason for Risk Management approval/exception/waiver: Approved: Risk Management Date * Subject to the terms of the contract. City of Newport Beach Quest Business License Application - eReceipt Page 1 of 1 Calendar Subscribe to News & Alerts FAQs Contact Us Ut Oni Service Requests Nelmme Mohamed I Edi�Iff� I Slun Gut U25t Home 12/10/2013 Thank you Mohamed' Your Business License Application has been submitted and your payment has been received. Your application will be reviewed by a staff member and then approved accordingly. Please wait 10 business days to receive your Business License Certificate via Postal Service. You may login to Quest at any time to view the status of your request. Are you interested in joining your local chamber? Click the link below to learn more. httoWwww.newoortbeach.corr I htto:/lwww.cdmchambercom Receipt No: 520740299 Business License #: BT30045593 Total Amount: s240.00 Please help us improve cur services: Take a 30 second Survey View My Recuests Please print this receipt for your records. E—hnt areipt / I•"_ U" n[r Du. ,rt r+ I, .P 9h.,,., 11 I.,Iterl HL, by %F.a.yl r�Lsden .. le nlel. .r .-1 I+ pan lnler 1 To cnr_al �r yC,-.naox littps://www5.newportbeachca.gov/quest/bus_ticcnse/receipt.aspx?receipt=520740299&a... 12/10/2013 State Of California ;;,•..;. , CONTRACTORS STATE LICENSE BOARD ACTIVE LICENSE -'•' A Cfrn rtairs .961714 CORP ® m OPTIMA R P M INC i 06/30/2015 www.cslb.ca.gov a�nleu6iS aasua��� HgHSG Ve asuaW qua` '�'� g l alel5 sio �� J zoq�geya6ue U, a6elsodluo ui tivp 'uoseau heiuo s4e 'a4si6ay a4! of aPaWola 'a91 '24 -AR, o PaPuatlsnePuen laHootl s",P 66 w41.W reslsBaa ayl of paPWor a91 nW aW u 2�sue�l lou suew asua.p s 41 s issaPPe ssae�s^9Jo a6ue4s Auy CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT ADDENDUM NO. 2 LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRA qO. 48 9 DATE: October25,2013 BY:Uc��-��h�� City Engineer/bep6ty Public Works Director TO: ALL PLANHOLDERS The bid due date has been changed to November 5, 2013 at 10:00 a.m. The Notice Inviting Bids has been changed to read: Sealed bids may be received by the City Clerk, In the City Clerks Office 100 Civic Center Drive, Newport Beach, CA 92660 until 10:00 AM on the 5th day of November, 2013, at which time such bids shall be opened and read for the SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section 6.1.1 Construction Schedule is deleted and replaced with the following: 6-1.1 Construction Schedule. No work shall begin until a "Notice to Proceed" has been issued, a pre -construction meeting has been conducted, and a schedule of work has been approved by the Engineer. The apparent low bid Contractor shall submit at preliminary work schedule five days after the bids opening along with the schedule of values. At a minimum, the schedule shall include the anticipate start /end date of the project and major project milestones. The Contractor shall submit a construction a detailed schedule to the Engineer for approval a minimum of five working days prior to the pre -construction meeting. The schedule shall be CPM style. The Engineer will review the schedule and may require the Contractor to modify the schedule to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. If work falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor shall be prohibited from starting additional work until Contractor has exerted extra effort to meet the original schedule and has demonstrated that the ability to n:\2011\1111033-newport-beach-lifeguard\architecture\currenttask\addenda\addendum 92\addendum no.2doc maintain the approved schedule in the future. Such stoppages of work shall in no way relieve the Contractor from the overall time of completion requirement, nor shall it be construed as the basis for payment of extra work because additional personnel and equipment were required on the job." Section 6.7.1 Time of Completion — General is deleted and replaced with the following: 6-7.1 General. Add to this section: "The Contractor shall complete all work under the Contract within 102 consecutive working days after the date on the Notice to Proceed. The contractor shall re-establish all communication equipment essential to lifeguard operations no later than Friday, April 18, 2014. The Contractor shall ensure the availability and delivery of all material prior to the start of work. Unavailability of material will not be sufficient reason to grant the Contractor an extension of time for 100 percent completion of work." ADDITIVE BID ITEMS Refer to the attached Exhibits 1 and 2 for location of Alternate Numbers Alternate No. A2 - Wood Shear Walls: Add new hold-down anchors, sill attachments, and strap top plate at the new plywood shear walls along lines 4, 6, B, D at the upper floor, and C.5 at the ground floor. Alternate No. A3 - Concrete Masonry Shear Wall: Add a new reinforced masonry shear wall along line D with a grade beam and new concrete drilled piles. Items A4 through A7 have been added to the additive bid items. Contractors to include them in their bid form. Alternate No. A4 — Collectors (High Priority): Add new collector elements and connections at the upper floor diaphragm along lines B, D, and 3, and at the ground floor diaphragm along lines A, B, and D. Alternate No. A5 - CMU Wall Anchorage: Add new CMU wall to diaphragm anchors and add new cross diaphragm ties at the upper floor diaphragm. Alternate No. A6 — Collectors (Moderate Priority): Add new collector elements and connections along various wood shear wall lines at the roof diaphragm. Alternate No. A7 - Diaphragms: Add new 1/2" plywood over the top of the 2x decking between lines 2 and 4 at the ground floor. EXHIBITS See Attached. Construction Fencing and Storage Container Location Exhibit. n:\2011\1111033-newport-beach-lifeguard\architecture\currenttask\addenda\addendum #2\addendum no.2doc ARCHITECT'S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The following technical specifications have been revised to provide further clarification for bidders: 0001 10 Table of Contents 01 26 13 Interpretation of Contact Documents (Prior to Bid) 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 0241 19 Selective Structure Demolition 03 01 00 Maintenance of Concrete 06 1500 Wood Decking 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 82 00 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 07 1400 Fluid -Applied Waterproofing 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 0731 13 Asphalt Shingles 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 0771 00 Roof Specialties 0771 23 Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 07 90 05 Joint Sealers 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 0831 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 32 00 Sliding Glass Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 0843 13 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 08 53 13 Vinyl Windows 08 62 00 Unit Skylights 0871 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 0921 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 30 00 Tiling 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid Applied Flooring for Concrete 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 1021 13 Metal Toilet Compartments 1051 00 Lockers 11 31 00 Residential Appliances 11 52 13 Projection Screens 1221 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds 26 09 23 Lighting Control Panel & Devices 312316 Trenching 31 2323 Fill REPORTS See Attached. Soils Report. See Attached. Abatement Report. n:\2011\1111033-newport-beach-lifeguard\architecture\currenttask\addenda\addendum #2\addendum no.2.doc REVISIONS TO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS The construction documents have been updated as a result process with the City of Newport Beach. All changes from documents are clouded and labeled with a Detla #1 symbol. The following Structural sheets have been updated S-1.1 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES S-2.2 UPPER FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S-2.3 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-4.3 DETAILS S-4.4 DETAILS S-4.5 DETAILS The following Mechanical sheets have been updated M-0.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES M-2.1 GROUND FLOOR RECONSTRUCTION PLAN M-2.3 UPPER FLOOR RECONSTRUCTION PLAN M-2.4 ATTIC DEMO & RECONSTRUCTION PLANS M-4.1 ROOF RECONSTRUCTION PLAN M-5.0 DETAILS M-5.1 DETAILS M-5.2 DETAILS M-6.0 WIRING DIAGRAMS The following Electrical sheets have been updated E-0.1 GENERAL NOTES, CODE ANALYSIS AND DRAWING LIST E-1.1 SITE PLAN E-8.0 DETAILS E-8.1 DETAILS The following Plumbing sheets have been updated P-0.1 GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND & DRAWING LIST P-3.0 WASTE AND VENT ISOMETRIC P-4.1 DETAILS P-4.2 DETAILS of a concurrent plan check review the original bid Architectural set of REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION QUESTIONS AND RESPONSES 0-1 The PA Products section specifies University Sound equipment. This manufacturer's line of products has been discontinued for many years. Please advise replacement manufacturer. A-1 The scope of work is relocation & expansion of existing equipment. Use compatible equipment by Bogen, Rauland or equal. Q-2 The CATV Riser diagram appears to have reversed the coax cable types for the service feed - RG6 and the outlet drops — RG 11. A-2 Reverse riser diagram coax types. Use RG11 for service feed and RG6 for outlet drops. Q-3 It appears the seven single -channel antenna signals are intended to be inserted into the CATV band. What CATV channels are to be deleted to ucconunodate the single -channel antenna feeds? What Over -the -Air stations are intended to be captured and available for TV viewing? n.\2011\1111033-newport-beach-lifeguard\architecturelcurrenttask%ad den da\addendum#2\addendum no.2. doc A-3 No change of CATV band. The existing single -channel antenna signals are to be removed and reinstalled as shown on plan. Refer to drawing E-2.5 & E-5.2. Q-4 What projection screen size is required for the training room? Where is the projection screen to be mounted? On the wall along gridline 6 or in -ceiling? A-4 Refer to specification section 115213.2.02 for the approved front projection screen manufacturers and their associated products. The screen will be mounted to the wall along gridline 6 just below the finished ceiling. Q-5 The integrated AV system is specified as using an Extron WallVault system. The projector feed junction box is located approximately 12' from the wall. This product is not intended to support a projector -to -screen distance as currently indicated. Perhaps the customer would consider the Extron PoleVault system which is functionally identical to the WallVault system but allows projector mounting at the currently indicated distance. The assumption is the projection screen is intended to be mounted close to the wall along gridline 6. A-5 Scope of work is to provide conduits and accessories for future AIV connection system only. Refer to specification section 115213.2.02 for the approved front projection screen manufacturers and their associated products. The screen will be mounted to the wall along gridline 6 just below the finished ceiling. Q-6 What AV system is intended for installation for Conference Room 205? Two speaker symbols are indicated to be interconnected by conduit which does not appear correct. A-6 Change symbol "SP" (WALL SPEAKER) located in wall G/L 2 with symbol "SV" (for combination SGVA outlets and (2) RCA jack outlets in Conference room 205. Q-7 The specs have two sections for the Communication Cabling. One is Section 27 13 00 - Structured Cabling System and the other is section 27 13 43 - Communication Services Cabling. Which is the correct one for bidding this project? A-7 The two specs sections are needed. The Communication Cabling (27 13 00) is for the public address and telephone. The Structured Cabling (27 13 43) is for the data horizontal and backbone cabling. 0-8 A clarification for main switchboard "MSB" and distribution switchboard "OS" finish is required. The single line diagram drawing E-0.4 note #2 calls for two (2) coat epoxy paint. The specifications, 262413 2.1 I, calls for Nema 4X enclosure (stainless steel). Both pieces of equipment appear to be indoors, "MSB" is in storage room #003 and "DS" is in the garage. Which finish is the correct one? A-8 Switchboard "MSB" and "OS" should be in NEMA 4X enclosures without (2) coats of epoxy paint. 0-9 Can a door finish schedule be provided? We have a list of hardware but need to list/attach what is required at each door. Hager seems to be the preferred product. n: Q011\1111033-newport-beach-lifeguardlarchitecture\currenttask\addenda\addendum #2\addendum no.2.doc A-9 All door hardware to meet ADA requirements & applicable CBC code sections. The contractors are to refer to the plans for exterior versus interior locations and specifications. Panic Hardware with Locket 119 201 202 209 Lock Set 101 102 103 109 114 115 116 203 (Dutch door — provide lock at top and bottom) 206 207 210 215 221 Push/Pull 111 113 204 Lever 112 117 212 Privacy Lock with Lever 110 205 208 211 213 214 216 217 219 Slider with Lock 218 220 r \201 1\1 11 1033-newport-heach-lifeguard\architecturelcurrenttask\addenda\addendum #2\addendum no.2.doc Q-10 In review of the electrical drawings: Only Exterior Lighting circuits (NL and CL) need to be controlled by a LCP (lighting control panel). All interior rooms are controlled by line voltage switching in conjunction with line voltage ceiling occupancy sensors. Some rooms are controlled by 'line voltage" wall mounted occupancy switch/s in a, or a,b configuration. Please provide a lighting control spec section that is applicable to "this" job. The current spec section; 260923; appears to provide for completely different devices/controls etc. than shown on lighting floor plans. Please provide: a. Brand and Part number for LCP to include quantity and type/s of relays, modems, time clocks, photocells, etc. b. provide brand and part numbers for ceiling and wall sensors in liu of multiple choices as specs list. IE: a one relay, one switch leg wall mounted occ. sensor switch is a Watt Stopper TYPE PW,UW,OR DW pick one please. If it is a PW let us know if it is a PW -100, PW200, PW103, Or PW203. None of the previously listed types, part numbers show up on floor plans. c. If the exterior lighting is to be controlled by P.C./Time Clock with circ.#14NL, and 14CL for example... Please provide a panel schedule with information such as.. P.C. ON/T.C. OFF or visa/versa. A-10 a. Refer to the attached revised specs section 26 09 23 & detail 5/E-0.8 for type of LCP, number of relays, etc. b. Refer to the attached revised specs section 26 09 23 Part 2 - 2.2 & 2.3 for type and part number of wall/ceiling sensors. c. Refer to the attached revised specs section 26 09 23 Part 2 - 2.1 A. Q-11 Specs 075400: It is unclear, calling for both TPO and PVC roofing, please clarify which it is. A-11 The roofing is to be TPO. Q-12 Specs 075400: Is the membrane color supposed to be "tan" or "white"; please clarify which. A-12 Membrane color is to be White. Q-13 Specs 075400: Is the membrane supposed to be fleecebacked, or flatbacked? Please clarify. A-13 The membrane is to be Flatback. 0-14 Specs 075400: Is the membrane supposed to be 60mil or 45mil? Please clarify. A-14 The membrane is to be 60 mil in order to provide a 20yr warranty. Q-15 Plans call for this area to be built-up roofing; please clarify. A-15 The new roof section is to be a built-up roof system to match the existing conditions of the building. Q-16 Details page A9.2 has note saying all details are as built details. Please provide details for "future construction" n12011\1111033-newport-beach-lifeguard\architecture\currenttask\addenda\addendum #2\addendum no.2doc A-16 The intent of those details is to build the proposed construction to match the existing condition fo the building, thus the past and future details are the same. 0-17 072100 calls for a total R -value of R-60 at the roof construction. Please confirm this is not a typo or mistake. A-17 Refer to sheet M-0.3 for Title 24 requirements. Per the report, the roof needs to conform to an R-30 value. Provide rigid insultation and built-up roofing to match the existing condition. If that assembly is not sufficient to make R-30, then provide insulation between the roof joists. ENGINE GENERATOR Provide a cast -in-place concrete pad large enough to support the size of the generator indicated in specification section 26 32 13 and all associated clearances around the equipment as indicated by the manufacturer. At a minimum the concrete pad will sit 2' below and 3' above the finished grade for a total depth of 5'. Provide necessary sleeves within the cast base for proper site drainage. Anchorage system is to be per the manufacturer's recommendations. Bidders must sign this Addendum No. 2 and attach it to the bid proposal. No bid will be considered unless this signed Addendum is attached. I have carefully examined this Addendum and have included full payment in my Proposal. Optima RPM, Inc. Bidder's Name (Please Print) November 5, 2013 Date `b'ice President/RMO Authorfzed Signature & Title n:\2011\1111033-newport-beach-lifeguard\architecture\currenttask\addenda\addendum #2\addendum no.2.doc Di D1 (E) fi x 6 POST ABOVE T (N) 4 x 4 POST ABOVE (E) /2" STRUCT I PLYWOOD OVER ) — (E) 6 x 8 2x DECKINGO 1Y (E,4x4 POST ABOVE 1! I 06x8 l II �0(,) 1 VE fi x 6 POST ABO (E)6x8 (E) 4 x 6 POST ABOVE)% II �1 w _ (E) 61 8 m (E)4x4 POST ABOVE II �I (E)6x8 (N)HSS5151' r9 D COLUMN FULL Sq,g (E)6x 6 POST ABOVE HEIGHT 11I i— —(E)-6 x�l 1 (N) HSS 6 x 6 COLUMN FULL 99'-3/2" (E) 4 116 I- I I ----�-- it (E) 6 x 8 `D T A4 I U I I A4 (E) 6 x 8 (E)4x6 POST ABOVE (E) 4 x 4 POST ABOVE _ (E) 6 x 8 — — 1 I II� I U U � I A2 e U I (N)4"HOUSEKEEPING 0 — — _( e s (N)6x8 Pi ) (x)6xa PT A4 A3 (N)6z8 Pi of Y/ I (N)6v8 PI E e 3 (N)6x6P< _ _-1...---- _-=-- --_-= _ INDICATES ALTERNATE BID DESCRIPTION NUMBER (N)6 6PT 1�CbNT -- i /L_ 4 Vil �J (N)e"STRUCTI T L�—�_____ HT EC PLYWOOD Pi (N)18'[1ANElE ~ �NN) US" DIAMETER / 10d @ 4"CA CONCRETE PIIS (BUSSE 6x14 A CONCRETE PILE 54.4 AND 12' D.C. COLUNN FULL S42 ti .h al z HEIGHT Q j a o CL ADDITIVE BID ITEMS EXHIBITS 1 AND 2 LL 1 5'-4' �-r 2" as 5'-6" CONCEPTUAL SEISMIC STRENGTHENING 1.22 2.1 22 2.5 3 3.1 3.5 113-0)-2013 FOUNDATION AND GROUND FLOOR PLAN 1 8' 16' III I II II II —III / I V I I U i \ /r^�` B II IIS (E) 6 x ID II ()4x4 POST ABOVE II 3 II IIS II �I II 3 O� I I II II I� II (E)4x4POST ABOVE &BELOW II ;II II `(E)4x4 (E)4x4 /4 POST ABOVE POST / II Ili „ ADOVE III �I (E)4x4 POST ABOVE & BELOW - - -I E'4x 4 POST ABOVE 1 s43 - POST ABOVEAND I% BELOW LL of LL z : J� A4 I (N)4x4 POST wl ABOVE & (N) 4 x a POST BELOw— iN)4x8NOR HDR L(N)4x6 IoU A II �I II _�( 10 (E) 6 x 6 POST BELOW & (E) 4 x 4 54.4 POST ABOVE C.8 SII $4.3 sa.a� �II &(E)3LG I_ \\ SITE BELOW E)6x10f E)C8x C.9 � D E F sIM. F.5 � G (N) Ae' STRUCT I PLYWOOD BLOCKED w/ 108 P 4" E.N. & 12" PISS x 5x -- — — ��------------- —H �= ------ ------ rr III �I (NAx. wi. is II 433 LBSJ I sa'6 I _(E) 6x10 ii ':. 4 IN LL L- - �1 (E)4xI- 71-T` 9EL ---J, I I I III GITNUE 'N GS BETWEINLOV� ----� - - - ----� A2 GRID LINES "5"&"6' A2 �I e NE` (E)2xi6 EJ_@16 __ _(E)2x 14 E>!@16°OSS ` A5 / A2 -- ---= PC �STsT _ f P x8e I T A(N)TS--_� ABOVE �a = W II ) ILSE6x 4. %e 1 s4.4 `\ I 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 wl�o 0 og A5 s s��77, �� A4 A2 o i � I ® INDICATES ALTERNATE BID DESCRIPTION NUMBER ADDITIVE BID ITEMS EXHIBITS I AND 2 CONCEPTUAL SEISMIC STRENGTHENING TB -m-2013 UPPER FLOOR FRAMING PLAN NORTH I I I I II I I I I I II II II II II II II n II II II H II II II II II II II II II II II II JJ 4 s43 - 03 I% LL of o �d� z U Itil i (N)HSS COLUMN IoU A ) ILSE6x 4. %e 1 s4.4 `\ I 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 wl�o 0 og A5 s s��77, �� A4 A2 o i � I ® INDICATES ALTERNATE BID DESCRIPTION NUMBER ADDITIVE BID ITEMS EXHIBITS I AND 2 CONCEPTUAL SEISMIC STRENGTHENING TB -m-2013 UPPER FLOOR FRAMING PLAN NORTH I I I I II I I I I I II II II II II II II n II II II H II II II II II II II II II II II II JJ N 2 x 10 R.Jl� 1600, -- (E)2x 10 R.J@tfi"OQ GO (E) e wF D vi I I I I IE) z x to R.J /-� za" 01 //S�III � cu qg ) { (MAX. WT. vW BELOWSi (E)2x 10 R.J I@ O.C. 163 LES I®I Q$4 L I117 54.51—__ (, (� 8 Wd - --__ ______F____ iI� S4,2 I (N)ax� POST LOW- _ �) 2110 R.J 24"O.C. _ - I I s� IL_ lli II (E)4x4 POST BELOW (E)4e4 (N)1J/4x910LVL@(1)) F POST BELOW AC C.6 54.5 54.3 II 3A �� ST 54.5 54.3 00 IBS.) K'G T 6LTP. iJ_ Y UN) HSS L (N)9x4 POST BE ` (N)HSS L lN) 3/2x9/4 P` t- COLUMN BELOW x u COLkMyI BELOW 4J COLUMN B LOW 10 e e S45 SIM F `, AdAN OC. m a - 545 wN ARD ROOF flAi"IER DIOL 6@160G MAyS491 w,'f$R1W4 � 4 44 554.3 ) C 2x 10 R.J. �UNDEDII RHPHE N UNDER NIP BN 91 34z PSL J s a @ 16" O.C, II (N) x 944 Q H85 LOLUNN BELGw a (N)HS]tix4x Ye I 4 54.5 i.z z z.i z.z (E)2xi0 R. J. V4"OC - - , fi i 1`/4x910 LVL@UE) il US 2x10 2x E 2x,0 III I _�ixL� z� u 2x10 _ /'�.a (E) 2x,9 Piu 'Ieir7--, 91/d•LV[@T�71'� 1 II I 2x,0 (R.J.@24"O.C.i ) l el I II _ (E)4x10 _ a E n2x10 Yi _ (N)V/4x91/4LA@NE) 2x10RJ it 10 2x10 4 (N)1%dx9'/4 LVLT E)'2x10H.J (N) 34a x 944 PSL L y (N)9x4 POST BE -(N)4x4-- (NIIxIVY61j POSTBEL �j NRR VN6Y m , u - (N)HSS 6 AT 4J COLUMN B LOW 10 e e S45 SIM F `, (E)2x 10fRJ. ' VP a - DER UNDER VALLEY DIOL 6@160G MAyS491 w,'f$R1W4 � 4 44 554.3 ) C �UNDEDII RHPHE N UNDER NIP BN 91 U--- ., (N) 1A .9YZ LA EA CH SRE ' 10 HSS COLUMN BROW SIM. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I �I II ---- ,'' (E)1/z E,RNDT� f 1 1 � � T -- 17T �YWOOD I I�'i 11<yl I_ I I I —I—I I I E -k _IIPPNN''-__ _ ,moi n I I I w��Nl � I I m l I I I sas I I III l� II D, u MAH. Wi. (E)POST BELOW 810 LED) L__1_------� of Ilm I II �_�_ar__ r___. ;; w �I el uw n EF w (E) 2 x 10 R.� ti @16" O.C. a a ¢ (MAH. S ~ IZ _ 120 LBS.)II �I al III I �i II I`� I � I I I � I of of of I� I xl I III I� II ylll I �� A6 VR> I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I � II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II FRAME AREA ® INDICATES ALTERNATE BID DESCRIPTION NUMBER ADDITIVE BID ITEMS EXHIBITS I AND 2 CONCEPTUAL SEISMIC STRENGTHENING 10-0)-2013 ROOF FRAMING PLAN o PUBLIC RESTR, F LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS � J v 20' CONTAINER FOR LIFEGUARD USE, PROVIDED BY OWNER EXISTING DRIVEWAY CONSTRUCTION 1 \\ FENCING PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR \ / a EXISTING ROCK BULKHEAD .OG EXISTING PATH CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH GaER LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS rrmdeslgngroup #C1052 creatingREHABILITATION environments people en�ay° _� 2 °o ADDENDUM 2 REF. SHEET A-1.0 DRAWN BY EL CHECKED BY MH DATE 10/25/13 JOB NO. 1111033 SCALE 1"=30' Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0110 Table of Contents PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Division 00 -- Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders 00 21 16 - Instructions to Proposers SPECIFICATIONS Division 01 -- General Requirements O1 10 00 -Summary 0120 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 0125 00 - Substitutions 01 26 13 —Interpretation of Contract Documents 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements 0131 19— Project Meetings 0132 16 — Construction Progress Schedule O1 33 00 - Submittals 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements 01 42 13 -Abbreviations 0145 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities 01 52 13 - Field Offices and Sheds 0155 00 - Vehicular Access and Parking 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls 01 60 00 - Product Requirements O1 6100 — Seismic Requirements for Non -Structural Components 01 71 23 —Field Engineering 01 7135 — Restoration of Improvements O1 73 29 — Cutting and Patching 0174 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 74 20 — Cleaning 01 77 00 —Contact Closeout 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements 00 01 10 - Table of Contents 8/3012013 Page 1 of 4 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 02 -- Existing Conditions 02 4100 — Demolition 02 41 19 — Selective Structure Demolition Division 03 -- Concrete 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete Division 04 -- Masonry (NOT USED) Division 05 -- Metals 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 05 73 - Wood Treatment 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry 06 15 00 - Wood Decking 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework 06 82 00 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing 07 12 00 - Built -Up Bituminous Waterproofing 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing 07 14 00 — Fluid -Applied Waterproofing 07 15 13 - Lead Sheet Waterproofing 07 16 13 - Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing 07 2100 - Then -nal Insulation 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles 07 46 33 - Plastic Siding 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories 07 84 00 - Firestopping 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 2 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 08 -- Openings 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights 08 7100 - Door Hardware 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager 08 80 00 - Glazing 08 9100 - Louvers Division 09 -- Finishes 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 30 00 - Tiling 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Flooring for Concrete 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating Division 10 -- Specialties 10 14 00 - Signage 10 21 13 - Metal Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties 10 5100 - Lockers 10 56 13 - Metal Storage Shelving Division 11 -- Equipment 11 31 00 -Residential Appliances 1152 13 - Projection Screens Division 12 -- Furnishings 12 21 13 - Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 36 00 — Countertops 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 3 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 13 -- Special Construction (NOT USED) Division 14 -- Conveying Equipment (NOT USED) Division 21 -- Fire Suppression (NOT USED) Division 22 -- Plumbing 22 05 03 — Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 23 — General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 — Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 — Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation 22 34 00 — Fuel -Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning (HVAC) 23 05 29 — Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00—HVAC Insulation 23 09 23 — VVT Control System 23 11 23 - Facility Natural -Gas Piping 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories 23 34 00 — HVAC Fans 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets 23 40 00 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 23 55 00 — Fuel Fired Heaters 23 8103 — Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units — Small Capacity 23 81 26 — Split -System Air -Conditioners Division 26 -- Electrical 26 00 60 — Electrical Demolition 26 0100 — Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 03 — Equipment Wiring Connections 26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 4 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 —Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 48 — Seismic Controls for Electrical Work 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 72 — Acceptance Testing 26 05 73 — Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices 26 24 13 - Switchboards 26 24 16 - Panelboards 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices 26 28 13 - Fuses 26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches 26 32 13 - Engine Generator 26 36 23 — Automatic Transfer Switch 26 5100 - Interior Lighting 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting Division 27 — Communications 27 05 23 — Television System 27 05 26 — Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 27 05 29 — Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems 27 05 33 — Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems 27 05 53 — Identification for Communications Systems 27 13 00 — Structured Cabling System 27 13 43 — Communication Service Cabling 27 41 16—Integrated AudioNisual System 27 51 16 — Public Address System 27 5130 — Hearing Assistance System Division 28 — Electronic Safety and Security 28 05 33 — Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security 28 05 53 — Identification for Electronic Safety and Security 28 16 00 - Intrusion Alarm 28 23 00 — Closed Circuit Television System 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm System 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 3/30/2013 Page 5 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 31 -- Earthwork 31 23 16 —Trenching 3123 23 —Fill Division 32 -- Exterior Improvements 32 12 16 — Bituminous Concrete Paving 32 12 17 —Tack Coat 32 17 23 - Painted Pavement Markings 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers Division 33 -- Utilities 33 31 11 — Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 6 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 012613 Interpretation of Contract Documents (Prior to Bid) PART1-GENERAL 1.01 Interpretation of Contract Documents Section 012613 A. If any firm contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed contract is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the drawings, specifications, or other Contract Documents, or finds discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings or specifications, he or she shall submit to the Architect a written request (use attached "Request for Interpretation" form) for an interpretation or correction thereof not later than eight (8) calendar days before the date bids will be opened. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation or correction of the Contract Documents will be made only by Addendum and will be faxed or e-mailed and/or mailed to each person receiving a set of such documents. City will not be responsible for any other explanation or interpretation of the Contract Documents. 1.02 Requests for Interpretation A. Page 2 of Section 012613 is a form titled, "Request for Interpretation". Bidders are to use this form to submit written requests for interpretation or corrections by fax or e-mail to the City's Construction Management Firm: Project Dimensions (949) 476-2246 ATTN: Blair Fickett E-mail address: bfickett@projectdimensions.com To expedite the interpretation process, interpretations may be faxed or e-mailed to bidders as addenda, follow-up hard copies may be delivered by mail. B. All questions as submitted via the "Request for Interpretation" form will be allowed until 10:00am on Wednesday, October 23, 2013, or up to 8 days prior to bid opening date. C. All information must be filled out on the form as pertains to the Contractor's information: Company name, address, phone, fax number, e-mail, contact person, date, and time of request. Questions or Requests for Clarification are to be printed or typed on these forms. If bidders have several questions, which will not fit on one form, the bidder is to photo copy the form, number each page, and submit multiple forms. 1.03 Deadline for Requests for Interpretation - AO requests for interpretation must be received by noon of the tenth (10th) calendar day preceding the bid date. End of Section 01 26 13 - Interpretation of Contract Documents (Prior to Bid) 10/7/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 012613 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Date: Company: Contact Person: Address: Telephone: E-mail : Plan Sheet: Specification Section: Interpretation Requested: Reply: See Addendum #_ item # Issued: Time: Fax: 01 26 13 - Interpretation of Contract Documents (Prior to Bid) 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY Section 01 51 00 A. Power Service Characteristics: 120/208 or 120/240 volt, required ampere, three phase, four wire. B. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required. C. Provide main service disconnect and over -current protection at convenient location and meter. D. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. E. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 1.05 TEMPORARY HEATING A. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.06 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization. B. Connect to existing water source. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED End of Section 01 5 l 00 - Temporary Utilities 10/1612019 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alterations purposes. B. Media blasting of exterior surfaces in preparation for subsequent finish work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Section 02 4119 A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re -use by Contractor. B. Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. D. Section 01 7135 - Restroration of Improvements E. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching F. Section 02 4113 - Selective Site Demolition G. Section 09 2513 - Acrylic Plastering H. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 3 - Submittals B. Site Plan: Showing: 1. Areas for temporary construction and field offices. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.05 PROJECT A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 SCOPE A. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling. B. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as required so that required rough grade elevations do not subside within one year after completion. 2.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition 10/1612019 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 02 4119 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 5. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 6. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 8. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and City; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. 2.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take -offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to City. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 2.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 50 00 in locations indicated on drawings. 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 02 4119 C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. If rotted wood, corroded metals, or deteriorated masonry or concrete are uncovered in the work not indicated to be removed, notify Architect and City. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. F. Media Blasting 1. Remove existing finishes of exterior surfaces to remain to receive subsequent finishes including but not limited to paint or acrylic plaster. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces to remain. G. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 2.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 -Waste Management. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. End of Section 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition 10/16/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 Maintenance of Concrete PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of existing concrete surfaces. B. Repair of exposed structural, shrinkage, and settlement cracks. C. Resurfacing of concrete surfaces having spalled areas and other damage. D. Repair of deteriorated concrete. E. Repair of internal concrete reinforcement. F. Scope of Work: As indicated on the drawings. Section 03 0100 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. B. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. C. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. D. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b. E. ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail -Steel and Axle -Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. F. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a. G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. H. ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars; 2008. I. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. J. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear; 2012. K. ASTM C928/C928M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid -Hardening Cementitious Material for Concrete Repairs; 2009. L. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010. M. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics; 2010. N. AWS DIA/DIAM - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2011. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling: Perform blast cleaning only between the hours of 7 am to 10 pm. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 10/1612013 Page 1 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Section 03 0100 B. Product Data: Indicate product standards, physical and chemical characteristics, technical specifications, limitations, maintenance instructions, and general recommendations regarding each material. C. Qualification Statements. D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of structural reinforcement repairs and type of repair. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design reinforcement splices under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Newport Beach, CA. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. C. Cleaner Qualifications: Company specializing in, and with minimum of 3 years of experience in, the type of cleaning specified. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with minimum of 3 years of experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP(S) A. Test each type of maintenance procedure required on each type of existing construction, to determine the most appropriate procedures to use and as a record of expected results. B. Crack Injection: Prepare one sample of each type of injection. C. Horizontal Surface Repair: Total of 10 foot square area, demonstrating each type of repair. D. Where color or texture matching is required, first prepare a small size sample on cementitious board. E. Re -work mock-up(s) until satisfactory to Architect. F. Re -work mock-up(s) until satisfactory to City. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for storage, shelf life limitations, and handling of products. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Degreaser: 1. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; Citrus Cleaner: www.specchemllc.com. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Ultrite Degreaser: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Detergent: Non-ionic detergent. C. Alkaline Cleaning Agent: Mayco Mix. D. Acidic Cleaning Agent: Dupont Glycolic Acid. E. Blasting Medium: Blastrac. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 2.02 CEMENTITIOUS PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 2. SpecChem, LLC: www.specchenillc.com. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Cementitious Resurfacing Mortar: One- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer -modified cementitious mortar designed for continuous thin -coat application. 1. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 3. Nominal Thickness: 1/8 inch. 4. Color: Light gray. 5. Products: a. Prospec, an Oldcastle brand; CR Concrete Resurfacer: www.prospec.com. b. SpecChem, LLC: Duo Patch: www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Parge-All AF or Meadow -Patch T2: www.wnneadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Cementitious Repair Mortar, Trowel Grade: One- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer -modified cementitious mortar. 1. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Dry Material: ASTM C928/C928M. 3. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 4. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; RepCon V/O: www.specchemllc.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; Duo Patch: www.specchernllc.com. c. Meadow -Crete GPS: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Cementitious Repair Mortar, Form and Pour/Pump Grade: Flowable, one- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer -modified cementitious mortar; in-place material capable of withstanding freeze/thaw conditions. 1. Mixed with water in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FDM: www.ardexamericas.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; Duo Patch; www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Meadow -Crete FNP: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. E. Cementitious Pavement Repair Mortar: Fast hardening, flowable; composed of cement, sand, and additives; capable of setting in cold weather conditions without the aid of chloride- or gypsum -based accelerators; in-place material capable of withstanding freeze/thaw conditions. 1. Dry Material: ASTM C928/C928M. 2. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 3. Time To Open To Traffic: 6 hours, maximum. 4. Time to Top -Coating: 4 hours, maximum. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 10/16/2013 Page 3 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 5. Products: a. Prospec, an Oldcastle brand; Premium Patch 100: www.prospec.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; RepCon 928: www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Futura-15: www.wnneadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 EPDXY PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 2. SpecChem, LLC: www.specchemllc.com. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Epoxy Repair Mortar: Epoxy resin mixed with aggregate and other materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for purpose intended; conform to pot life and workability limits. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 1000, SpecPoxy 2000, SpecPoxy 3000 or SpecPoxy 3000 FS: www.specchemllc.com. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste, Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State, Rezi-Weld 1000, Rezi-Weld 1000 State, Rezi-Weld LV, or Rezi-Weld LV State: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Epoxy Injection Adhesive: 1. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 1000; www.specchemllc.com. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld LV, Rezi-Weld LV State, Rezi-Weld (IP), or Rezi-Weld Gel Paste: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: Non -sag, two-part, 100 percent solids. 1. Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi, minimum. 2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 6,600 psi, minimum. 3. Percent Elongation (ASTM D638): 3.3 percent at 7 days at 70 degrees F, maximum. 4. Percent Elongation (ASTM D638): 2 percent at 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi, minimum. 6. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX ArdiBond AP: www.ardexamericas.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 2000: www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Anchoring Adhesive: Self -leveling or non -sag as applicable. 1. Self -Leveling Polyester -Based Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Poly -Grip: www.wrmeadows.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Self -Leveling Epoxy Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 2000; www.specchemllc.com. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 10/16/2013 Page 4 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld 1000, Rezi-Weld 1000 State, Rezi-Weld (IP), or Rezi-Weld 3/2: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 3. Non -Sag Epoxy Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 3000 or SpecPoxy 3000 FS; www.specchemllc.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, grey. C. Sand: ASTM C33 or ASTM C404; uniformly graded, clean. D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) billet -steel deformed bars, unfinished. F. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280), Type A. G. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A82/A82M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 CLEANING EXISTING CONCRETE A. Provide enclosures, barricades, and other temporary construction as required to protect adjacent work from damage. B. Clean concrete surfaces of dirt or other contamination using the gentlest method that is effective. 1. Try the gentlest method first, then, if not clean enough, use a less gentle method taking care to watch for impending damage. 2. Clean out cracks and voids using same methods. C. The following are acceptable cleaning methods, in order from gentlest to less gentle: 1. Water washing using low-pressure, maximum of 100 psi, and, if necessary, brushes with natural or synthetic bristles. 2. Increasing the water washing pressure to maximum of 400 psi. 3. Adding detergent to washing water; with final water rinse to remove residual detergent. 4. Steam -generated low-pressure hot-water washing. D. Do not use any of the following cleaning methods, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Brushes with wire bristles, grinding with abrasives, solvents, hydrochloric or muriatic acid, sodium hydroxide, caustic soda, or lye. 2. Soap or detergent that is not non-ionic. 3.03 CONCRETE STRUCTURAL MEMBER REPAIR A. See the drawings for specific areas to be repaired. B. Remove broken and soft concrete at least 1/4 inch deep. C. Mechanically cut away damaged portions of reinforcement. D. Remove corrosion from steel and clean mechanically. E. Blast clean remaining exposed reinforcement surfaces. F. Repair by welding new bar reinforcement to existing reinforcement using sleeve splices. 1. Perform welding work in accordance with AWS D1.4. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 10/16/2013 Page 5 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 2. Make welded sleeve splices to achieve strength to exceed strength of new reinforcement. G. Cover exposed steel reinforcement with epoxy mortar. H. Work epoxy mortar into broken surface and build up patch to match original. I. Feather edges of repairs flush to sound surface and trowel surface to match surrounding area. 3.04 CRACK REPAIR USING EPDXY ADHESIVE INJECTION A. Repair exposed cracks. B. Provide temporary entry ports spaced to accomplish movement of fluids between ports; no deeper than the depth of the crack to be filled or port size diameter no greater than the thickness of the crack. Provide temporary seal at concrete surface to prevent leakage of adhesive. C. Inject adhesive into ports under pressure using equipment appropriate for particular application. D. Begin injection at lower entry port and continue until adhesive appears in adjacent entry port. Continue from port to port until entire crack is filled. E. Remove temporary seal and excess adhesive. F. Clean surfaces adjacent to repair and blend finish. 3.05 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR USING CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS A. Clean concrete surfaces, cracks, and joints of dirt, laitance, corrosion, and other contamination using method(s) specified above and allow to dry. B. Apply coating of bonding agent to entire concrete surface to be repaired. C. Fill voids with cementitious mortar flush with surface. D. Apply repair mortar by steel trowel to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch over entire surface, terminating at a vertical change in plane on all sides. E. Trowel finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces. F. Damp cure for four days. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 0140 00, will perform field inspection and testing. 1. Test concrete for calcium chloride content during the execution of the Work. End of Section 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 10/16/2013 Page 6 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 15 00 Wood Decking PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plywood structural wood decking. B. Composite wood decking. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Bearing support. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 0615 00 A. ASTM D1761 -Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood; 2006. B. AWPA Ul -Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood -Preservers' Association; 2010. C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, and bearing details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience and certified by AITC. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plywood Decking: 1. Boise Cascade, LLC: www.bc.com. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.gp.com. 3. Weyerhaeuser Cc: www.weyerhaeuser.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Composite Wood Decking: L CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. Correct Building Products, Inc.: www.correctdeck.com. 3. Trex Company, Inc: www.trex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 06 15 00 - Wood Decking 10/1612013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0615 00 B. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site; see Section 01 60 00 for requirements for locally -sourced products. C. Plywood Decking: PS 1 veneer plywood; APA Rated Sheathing, Span Rating (Refer to Structural Notes and Drawings); Exterior grade; l A interior veneer appearance grade; sanded. D. Composite Decking: Recycled hardwood mixed with polypropylene and molded into standard lumber board sizes and accessory shapes; minimum polypropylene content o£40 percent. 1. Texture: Molded wood grain finish one side; smooth, matte finish on the other. 2. Color: Select from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Edges, Field Boards: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 80, maximum; smoke developed index of 285, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Fastener Type and Finish for Composite Decking: Stainless steel, trim head. 2.04 WOOD TREATMENT A. Factory -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage plywood tongue and groove edges. C. Allow expansion space at edges and ends. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. C. Secure with fasteners. Side spike planks together, through pre -drilled holes. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. End of Section 06 15 00 - Wood Decking 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. C. Hardware and attachment accessories. Section 06 20 00 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. C. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awigcp.org. D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. E. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). F. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough -in, electrical rough -in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. 2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 3. Include certification program label. D. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 10/1612013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 06 20 00 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality certification of completed work. 1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS Grade or Grades specified. 2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels. 3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program. 4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and products meet the specified requirements. 5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification. 6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. B. Exterior Woodwork Items: 1. Window Casings and Moldings: Softwood; prepare for paint finish. 2. Soffits and Fascias: Prepare for paint finish. 3. Enclosing Soffit Spaces: As detailed. 4. Enclosing Structural Members: Softwood lumber; "PT" preservative treat. C. Interior Woodwork Items: Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint finish. 2. Window Sills: Clear fir; prepare for transparent finish. 3. Suspended Wood Ceiling System: "FR -S" treated. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS Section 06 20 00 A. Hardwood Lumber: Birch species, smooth sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. 2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, VGS color(s) as indicated; furniture finish. B. Laminate Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. 2.05 FASTENINGS A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9. 2.08 WOOD TREATMENT A. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking. B. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 19 percent moisture content. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 2.10 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 10/16/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 06 20 00 B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. End of Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 10/16/2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 82 00 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass fiber reinforced, resin fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 06 82 00 A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products. C. Samples: Submit two 2, _6_x_6_ inch in size, illustrating color, texture, and finish. D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for stain removal, surface and gloss restoration . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in architectural glass fiber and resin components with 5 years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect components from damage by retaining shipping protection in place until installation. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install site fabricated components when site conditions may be detrimental to successful installation. B. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions favorable to proper curing of resin during and after installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications: 1. Crane Composities; Product Glasbord: www.cranecomposties.com. 2. Marlite; Product Standard FRP: www.marlite.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fabric Reinforcement: Glass fiber woven fabric 9.5 oz/sq yd B. Resin: Polyester type, fire resistant, high workability characteristics, integral coloring additives. 2.03 FINISH A. Exposed to view Surface Texture: Pebbled Embossed. 06 82 00 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 10/1612013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 82 00 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fabrications in accordance with design drawings and fabricator's instructions. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum offset from true alignment: 1/8 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean components of foreign material without damaging finished surface. B. Hand rub smooth surfaces with polishing cream. C. Clean fabrications in accordance with fabricator's instructions. End of Section 06 82 00 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0714 00 Fluid -Applied Waterproofing PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 0714 00 A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal copings and counterflashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C836/C836M - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid -Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing Course; 2012. B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension; 2006a. C. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact; 2007. D. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005 (Reapproved 2010). E. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane. C. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid -applied waterproofing membranes with 5 years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of fluid -applied waterproofing with minimum 5 years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until cured. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no cost to City. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Polyurethane Waterproofing Manufacturers: 07 14 00 - Fluid -Applied Waterproofing 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0714 00 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc; Product CCW -703: www.carlisle-ccw.com. 2. Karnak Corporation; Product 502 RC -W Elasto-Kote: www.kamakcorp.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; Compur 11 Deck Coating System: www.buildingsystems.basf.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS A. Polyurethane Waterproofing: Use at exterior deck areas.. 2.03 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING MATERIALS A. Polyurethane Waterproofing: Cold -applied one or two component polyurethane, complying with ASTM C836/C836M. 1. Cured Thickness: 60 mils, minimum. 2. VOC Content: None. 3. Tensile Strength: 400 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 4. Ultimate Elongation: 500 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 5. Hardness: 60, measured in accordance with ASTM D2240, using Type A durometer. 6. Adhesion: greater than 150 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D4541. 7. Brittleness Temperature: -50 F, measured in accordance with ASTM D746. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tack -Reducing Surfacing: Type 1 Portland cement. B. Counterflashings: Galvanized steel type, 0.01 inches thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials. D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum thickness. B. Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. C. At joints and cracks less than 1/2 inch in width including joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces, apply 12 inch wide strip of joint cover sheet. 07 14 00 - Fluid -Applied Waterproofing 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0714 00 D. At joints from 1/2 to 1 inch in width, loop joint cover sheet down into joint between 1-1/4 and 1/-3/4 inch. Extend sheet 6 inches on either side of expansion joint. E. Center joint cover sheet over joints. Roll sheet into 1/8 inch coating of waterproofing material. Apply second coat over sheet extending minimum of 6 inches beyond sheet edges. F. Extend membrane over cants and up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum 6 inches above horizontal surface for first ply and inches at subsequent plies laid in shingle fashion. G. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at comers, intersections, and angles. H. Install flexible flashings and seal into waterproofing material. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. L Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install counterflashing over all exposed edges. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. City will provide testing services in accordance with Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing. B. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood testing. C. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks. D. If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. End of Section 07 14 00 - Fluid -Applied Waterproofing 10/22/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 14 00 - Fluid -Applied Waterproofing 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Section 0714 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 0725 00 A. Water -Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not air right or vapor retardant. B. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water -resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders. B. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm. C. Water -Resistive Barrier: Water -shedding barrier made of material that is moisture -resistant, to the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2008. B. ASTM D 1970/1)1970M - Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2011. C. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. D. ICC -ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water -Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2011. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A. Water -Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding. 2.02 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BARRIER NOR VAPOR RETARDER) A. Building Paper: Asphalt -saturated Kraft building paper complying with requirements of ICC -ES AC38 Grade D. 1. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, for minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127. 2.03 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER -RESISTIVE) A. Vapor Retarder Sheet: Butyl, black color. 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers 10/1612013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Thickness: 45 mil. Section 0725 00 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perm, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 2.04 SEALANTS A. Polyurethane Sealant: as specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.05 ADHESIVES A. Mastic Adhesive : Compatible with sheet seal and substrate, thick mastic of uniform knife grade consistency. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970, except slip resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Water -Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to shed water but with seams not sealed. C. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. D. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior: I. Install sheets shingle -fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. Install water -resistive barrier over jamb flashings. 5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 6. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing. E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: 1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non -flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing. 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0725 00 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not leave paper- or felt -based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week. End of Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers 10/16/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing. Section 07 3113 B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection. C. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings. C. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D225 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2007. B. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. C. ASTM D1970/131970M - Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2011. D. ASTM D3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind -Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan -Induced Method); 2012. E. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2010a. F. ASTM D3909/D3909M -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 1997b (Reapproved 2012)e1. G. ASTM D6380 -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt); 2003 (Reapproved 2009). H. ASTM E96/E96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. L ICC -ES AC 188 -Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2012. J. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. K. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern; for color selection. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2. Extra Shingles: 10% of total new roof area sq ft of each type and color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 07 3113 A. Products Required to Comply with Fire Resistance Criteria: UL listed and labeled. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of 16 sq ft, including underlayment. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or cave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHINGLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Pinnacle: www.atlasroofing.com. 2. GAF; Timberline Cool Series: www.gaf.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp; Product Oakridge Series: www.owenscoming.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt -coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D3462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Style: Square. 2. Basis of Design: Match existing asphalt shingle. 3. Color: Color to match existing asphalt shingle; blend tiles at transition from new to existing roofing areas . 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt -coated organic felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D6380, Class M, Type II, with 2 inch wide selvage; black color. B. Eave Protection Membrane: Self -adhering polymer -modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. C. Underlayment: Synthetic non -asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanically fastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams. 1. Self Sealability: Passing nail scalability test specified in ASTM D1970. 2. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970. 3. Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer and building code qualification report or approval, if any. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot -dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. 2.04 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal cave edge, ridge, ridge vents, open valley flashing, and other flashing indicated. 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Section 07 3113 A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. C. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. At areas where cave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler. B. Install cave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 6 inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Install cave protection membrane from cave edge to minimum 4 It up-slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT A. At Roof Slopes Up to 4:12 : Install two layers of underlayment over area not protected by cave protection, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. B. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement. 3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION A. Install flexible flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches. C. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. D. At Exposed Valleys: Install one layer of sheet metal flashing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over open valley and crimped to guide water. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inch wide band of lap cement along each edge of fust, press roll roofing into cement, and nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. 3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. B. Secure in place with nails at 6 inches on center. Conceal fastenings. C. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. 3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is greater. 2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater. B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves. C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 E. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. End of Section 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Section 07 3113 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane. B. Flashings. C. Roofing stack boots and walkway pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs. B. Section 072100 -Thermal Insulation Section 07 54 00 C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings, reglets,. D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof -mounted units; prefabricated curbs. E. Section 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights: Skylight frame, integral curb, and counterflashing. F. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drains. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Cl 177/C1177M -Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008. B. ASTM D4434/D4434M -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing; 2012. C. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. D. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low -Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011. E. NRCA ML 104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. F. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories hic.; current edition. G. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meering: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. C. Specimen Warranty: For approval. D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 6x6 inches in size illustrating insulation and colored coating. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10/16/2013 Page 1 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section: 1. With minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Approved by membrane manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material that shows manufacturing defects within 5 years after installation. C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. Warranty Term: 20 years. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty. 3. Exceptions NOT Permitted: a. Damage due to roof traffic. b. Damage due to wind of speed greater than 56 mph but less than 90 mph. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Materials: 1. Carlisle Roofing Systems, Inc; Sure -Weld TPO: www.carlisle-syntec.com. 2. Flex Membrane International Corporation; Flex TPO Plus: www.flexroofingsystems.com. 3. GAF; EverGuard TPO: www.gaf.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Membrane Materials: 1. Carlisle Roofing Systems, Inc; Sure -Flex PVC KEE: www.carlisle-syntec.com. 2. Flex Membrane International Corporation; Flex FB PVC: www.flexroofingsystems.com. 3. GAF; EverGuard PVC: www.gafcom. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 2 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Insulation: 1. GAF; EnergyGuard PolyIso Insulation: www.gaf.com. 2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscoming.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONS Section 07 54 00 A. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over insulation. B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980. a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI. 2. Roof Covering External Fire -Resistance Classification: UL Class A. 2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Samafil G410 polyester reinforced membrane with a lacquer coating. B. Location: All low slope roofs C. Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434-96 (or latest revisions), "Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing," Classification: Type III. I . Samafil G410, 60 mil (1.5 mm), thermoplastic membrane with polyester reinforcement. D. Color Membrane: 1. EnergySmart (TAN), initial reflectivity of 0.83, initial emissivity 0.92, solar reflective index (SRI) of>104. E. Typical Physical Properties:PropertiesASTM Test 1. Reinforcing Material: Polyester - 2. Overall Thickness, min., inches (mm): 60 mil.D751 3. Breaking Strength, min, lbf/in. (KN/m):230 (40.0)D751 4. Elongation at Break, min.20%D751 5. Seam strength*, min. (% of breaking strength): 85D75 1 6. Retention of Properties After Heat Aging: -D3045 a. Breaking Strength, min., (% of original): 95D751 b. Elongation, min., (% of original):90D751 7. Tearing Strength, min., lbf (N):50 (220)D 1004 8. Low Temperature Bend, -40°F (-40°C):PassD2136 9. Accelerated Weathering Test (UV exposure): 10,000 HoursG154 a. Cracking (7x magnification):None- b. Discoloration (by observation):Negligible- c. Crazing (7 x magnification):None- 10. Linear Dimensional Change:0.1%oD1204 11. Weight Change After Immersion in Water:2.5%D570 12. Static Puncture Resistance, 33 lbf (15 kg):PassD5602 13. Dynamic Puncture Resistance, 14.7 ft-lbf (20 J):PassD5635 2.04 FLASHING MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES A. Flashing Material - Note: All Flashing touching thermoplastic roof system is to be provided as part of this specification by the roofing contractor. 1. Wall/Curb Flashing a. Samafil G410 Membrane 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 3 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 1) A fiberglass reinforced membrane adhered to approved substrate using Sarnacol adhesive. Consult manufacturer for adhesive options and additional information. b. Samaclad 1) A PVC -coated, heat -weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad is a 25 -gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Samafil membrane laminated on one side. The dimensions ofSamaclad are 4ftx8It(1.2mx2.4in) or4ftx 10ft(1.2mx 3.0m). Consult manufacturer for additional information. 2. Perimeter Edge Flashing a. Sarnaclad 1) A PVC -coated, heat -weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad is a 25 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Samafil membrane laminated on one side. The dimensions of Sarnaclad are 4ftx8ft(1.2mx2.4in) or4ftx 10ft(1.2mx 3.0m). Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 3. Miscellaneous Flashing a. Sarnaflash 1) A prefabricated expansion joint cover made from Samafil membrane. Samaflash is designed for securement to vertical or horizontal surfaces to span and accommodate the movement of new and existing expansion gaps from 1 inch to 41/2 inches (25 mm to 114 mm) across. Available in 40 foot (12 m) rolls. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. b. Samareglet 1) A heavy-duty, extruded aluminum flashing termination reglet used at walls and large curbs. Samareglet is produced from 6063-T5, 0.10 inch - 0.12 -inch (2.5 mm - 3.0 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Samareglet has a 2'/4 -inch (57 mm) deep profile, and is provided in 10 -foot (3 m) lengths. Use prefabricated Samareglet mitered inside and outside corners where walls intersect. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. c. Sarnastack 1) A prefabricated vent pipe flashing made from 0.048 -inch (48 mil/1.2 mm) thick Samafil G410 membrane. Available in five (4) different sizes. Consult Product Data Sheet for sizes and additional information. d. Sarnacorner 1) Prefabricated outside and inside flashing corners made of 0.060 -inch (60 mil/1.5 mm) thick membrane that is heat -welded to membrane or Samaclad base flashings. Samnacomner is available in 2 outside sizes (5 -inch and 8Yz-inch diameter/127 mm and 215 mm) and 1 inside size. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. e. Multi -Purpose Sealant 1) A proprietary sealant used at flashing terminations. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. B. INSULATION AND COVER BOARD 1. Insulation a. Refer to Specification Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation 2. Dens -Deck® a. A siliconized gypsum, fire -tested hardboard with glass -mat facers. '/4 Dens -Deck is provided in a 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 in x 2.4 m) board size. C. MEMBRANE ADHESIVE 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 4 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 Water-based 2121 Adhesive: A water-based adhesive used to attach the membrane to the horizontal or near -horizontal substrate. a. Appliecation Rate for Dens -Deck Prime are as follows: 1) Substrate Rate - gallons/100 ft: 1.50 2) Membrane Rate - gallons/100ft: 0 3) Total Rate - gallons/100ft: 1.50 b. There is a significant increase in drying time due to an increase in humidity and/or a decrease in temperature. Do not install when outdoor or substrate temperatures during drying period are expected to fall below 40°F. c. Do not allow 2121 adhesive to skin -over or surface -dry prior to installation of membrane. d. Use a water -filled, foam -covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly press the membrane into the adhesive layer. D. INSULATION BOARD ADHESIVE Samaco12163 Adhesive: a. A low odor, VOC compliant, one step, low-rise urethane foam used to attach insulation to approved compatible substrates. Adhesive is applied with a gravity fed applicator or by hand with a dual component caulk gun. Additional adhesive may be required for rougher surfaces. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information. Application rate is as follows: b. Coverage -Approximately 600 sq. ft. (55.7 sq. m) per case. Rates are based on an application pattern of 4 ribbons, 1/4-1/2 in. (6-13 mm) beads, 12 in. (30 cm) o.c. per 4 x 4 ft. (121.9 x 121.9 cm) insulation board. Coverage rates may vary over irregular surfaces. c. Notes: 1) Not recommended for use with insulation boards larger than 4x4 ft. (1.2x1.2 m). 2) Place insulation board into the adhesive shortly after it has reached its maximum rise [typically within 30-45 seconds at 60-80°F (16°C -27°C)] and walk into place. 3) Minimum product temperature before entering the dispenser should be 707 (21-C). 4) Store between 60°F (16°C) and 80°F (27C). 5) Adhesive shall not be used during inclement weather. 6) Adhesive shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. 7) A min. of 1 Sarnabar placed 4 ft. (1.2 m) from the roof edge and fastened 12 in. (305 mm) o.c. to the structural deck with acceptable fasteners is required after installation of the Samafil roof membrane. The Samabar is to have a cover strip hot air welded over it. d. Sta-Bond 1) A solvent -based reactivating -type adhesive used to attach membrane to flashing substrate. E. WALKWAY PROTECTION 1. Crossgrip Walkway a. Rolled -out walkway protection mat used to protect Samafil roofing membrane from mechanical abuse. Crossgrip Walkway is 9/16 inch (14 mm) thick flexible PVC with a heavily textured surface. Crossgrip Walkway is loose laid on top of completed Samafil roof assemblies. Where design wind speeds exceed 94 mph (150 km/h) the walkway must be secured with loops of Samafil membrane welded to the field sheet. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 5 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 F. MISCELLANEOUS RELATED MATERIALS Section 07 54 00 1. Aluminum Tape a. A 2 -inch (50 mm) wide pressure -sensitive aluminum tape used as a separation layer between small areas of asphalt contamination and the membrane and as a bond - breaker under the coverstrip at Samaclad joints. 2. Sealing Tape Strip a. Compressible foam with pressure -sensitive adhesive on one side. Used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. 3. Multi -Purpose Tape a. A high performance sealant tape with used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. 4. Samasolv a. A high quality solvent cleaner used for the general cleaning of residual asphalt, scuff marks, etc., from the membrane surface. Samasolv is also used daily to clean seam areas prior to hot-air welding in tear off or dirty conditions or if the membrane is not welded the same day it is unrolled. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. G. SEALANTS AND PITCH POCKET FILLERS Samafil Multi -Purpose Sealant (for termination details). H. MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND ANCHORS 1. All fasteners, anchors, nails, straps, bars, etc. shall be post -galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel. Mixing metal types and methods of contact shall be assembled in such a manner as to avoid galvanic corrosion. Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonry shall be expansion type fasteners with stainless steel pins. All concrete fasteners and anchors shall have a minimum embedment of P/4 inch (32 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. All miscellaneous wood fasteners and anchors used for flashings shall have a minimum embedment of 1 inch (25 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. 2.05 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: 1. Material: Polyvinyl chloride sheet roofing complying with ASTM D4434/D4434M. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric. 3. Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible. 5. Solar Reflectance:. 83, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council. 6. Thermal Emissivity:.92, minimum, initial, and 0.79, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Raring Council. 7. Color: White. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane. 2.06 DECK SHEATHING A. Deck Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM Cl 177/C1177M, fire resistant type, 1/4 inch thick. Products: a. Georgia-Pacific DensDeck, DensDeck Prime, or DensDeck DuraGuard: www.densdeck.com. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 6 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 b. Temple-Inland, Inc.; GreenGlass Roof Board or GreenGlass Primed Roof Board: www.templeinland.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.07 INSULATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect the roof areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Inspect roof drain and outlets to insure proper elevation to permit free flow of water into such drain and prevent water dams at rim. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. The Roofing Subcontractor shall comply with all reasonably applicable requirements of the Owner's safety and security requirements and with all applicable Federal, State, Local and City regulations, laws, and ordinances. B. The Roofing Subcontractor shall provide coverings to protect building and ground surfaces in all areas in which work is being performed and the surfaces to be protected in that location. Protection requirements shall include those surfaces over or past which materials, including pumped adhesives, are being transported. C. The surface of the deck must be broom clean, dry, properly secured and free of defects. D. Other Conditions: Contractor shall verify that the concrete roof substrata are smooth, dry, clean and free from sharp projections, properly graded to roof outlets and that all metal fittings are in place prior to start of installation of insulation and roofing. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Application of roofing materials shall not be performed when weather conditions interfere with good application practices. Materials shall not be stored or applied on damp surfaces or in the presence of rain or snow. B. Installed materials shall be protected from repetitive traffic with plywood or other rigid materials. Unfinished perimeters of the roof system shall be sealed with temporary water cutoffs. Materials used in constructing temporary cutoffs shall be removed before the application of finished assemblies. C. Roofing may be installed under certain adverse weather conditions such as extremes of high and low temperatures or high humidity conditions, but only after consulting the Manufacturer since special precautions may have to be applied. D. Only as much new roofing as can be made watertight each day shall be installed each day. This includes all flashing work. E. Precautions shall be taken to prevent wind blow -off or wind damage during the course of the roofing application. This may necessitate additional attachment of temporary construction. F. Temporary water stops shall be installed at the end of each workday. These temporary water stops shall be removed at the start of the next workday and disposed of properly. G. Do not install the roofing membrane in direct contact with any products containing asphalt, coal tar pitch, creosote, or other harmful materials. H. All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing interior building areas to the effects of inclement weather. The building and its contents shall be protected against all reasonable risks. Arrange work sequences to avoid use of newly roofing for storage, walking surfaces and equipment movement. Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and barriers to 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 7 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 segregate the work areas and prevent damage to adjacent areas. If excessive foot traffic over newly installed membrane is necessary, contractor shall provide plywood or felt protection to prevent damage. 3.04 INSULATION AND DENSDECK INSTALLATION A. Install the insulation, tapered insulation and protection board according to manufacturer's instructions. Stagger all joints 12 inches minimum in each direction. Adhere the new insulation and protection board over the existing deck. B. Neatly cut the insulation and protection board to fit around penetrations and projections. C. Do not install more insulation and protection board than can be covered with single -ply membrane by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. D. The insulation shall be installed by a trained lightweight fill Applicator in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's requirements and industry practice. The surface shall be free from dust and loose fragments, be smooth, level, and free from moisture. Sharp ridges or other projections above the surface shall be removed before roofing. An insulation recover board shall be required as a substrate to adhere to. Fastening for recover board shall be into structural deck below insulation. 3.05 INSTALLATION MEMBRANE A. Inspect the surface of the protection board prior to installation of the new roof membrane. The substrate shall be clean, dry, free from debris and smooth with no surface roughness or contamination. Broken, delaminated, wet or damaged boards shall be removed and replaced. B. Water-based 2121 Adhesive: 1. Pour over the properly installed and prepared absorbent substrate, 2121 adhesive out of the pail and spread using notched squeegees. Apply the adhesive at a rate according to Manufacturer's requirements (no adhesive is placed on back of the membrane). Do not allow the formation of a film on the surface of the adhesive. Carefully unrolled into the wet adhesive while the edges are overlapped by 3 inches. Press the membrane firmly into the adhesive layer with a water -filled, foam -covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. 2. Do not use 2121 adhesive if temperatures below 40° F are expected during application or subsequent drying time. 3. No adhesive in seam areas. Apply to all of the membrane in the same manner. 3.06 HOT-AIR WELDING OF SEAM OVERLAPS A. General 1. All seams shall be hot air welded. Seam overlaps should be 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) wide for Samadisc and Samadisc-XPN, and 7 inches (177.8 mm) wide for Sarnadisc- MAXLoad when automatic machine -welding and 4 inches (100 mm) wide when hand - welding, except for certain details. 2. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by Samafil. All mechanics intending to use the equipment shall have successfully completed a training course provided by a Samafil Technical Representative prior to welding. 3. All membrane to be welded shall be clean and dry. B. Hand -Welding 1. Hand -welded seams shall be completed in two stages. Hot-air welding equipment shall be allowed to warm up for at least one minute prior to welding. 2. The back edge of the seam shall be welded with a narrow but continuous weld to prevent loss of hot air during the final welding. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2019 Page 8 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 3. The nozzle shall be inserted into the scam at a 45 -degree angle to the edge of the membrane. Once the proper welding temperature has been reached and the membrane begins to "flow," the hand roller is positioned perpendicular to the nozzle and pressed lightly. For straight seams, the 1% inch (40 mm) wide nozzle is recommended for use. For corners and compound connections, the'/4 inch (20 mm) wide nozzle shall be used. C. Machine Welding 1. Machine welded seams are achieved by the use of Sarnafil's automatic welding equipment. When using this equipment, Sarnafil's instructions shall be followed and local codes for electric supply, grounding and over current protection observed. Dedicated circuit house power or a dedicated portable generator is recommended. No other equipment shall be operated off the generator. 2. Metal tracks may be used over the deck membrane and under the machine welder to minimize or eliminate wrinkles. D. Quality Control of Welded Seams 1. The Applicator shall check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver. Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted flow of dark gray material from the underside of the top membrane. On-site evaluation of welded seams shall be made daily by the Applicator to locations as directed by the Owner's Representative or Samafil's representative. One -inch (25 mm) wide cross-section samples of welded seams shall be taken at least three times a day. Correct welds display failure from shearing of the membrane prior to separation of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.07 MEMBRANE FLASHINGS A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and Samafil. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, dry, smooth, and solvent -resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn into the building. B. Sarnacol Adhesive for Membrane Flashings 1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate, Sarnacol adhesive shall be applied according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The Sarnacol adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Only an area, which can be completely covered in the same day's operations, shall be flashed. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller. 2. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels of membrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels as required by welding techniques. C. Install Sarnabar/Samacord according to the Detail Drawings with approved fasteners into the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. Sarnabars may be required by Samafil at the base of all tapered edge strips and at transitions, peaks, and valleys according to Sarnafil's details. Sarnafil's requirements and recommendations and the specifications shall be followed. All material submittals shall have been accepted by Samafil prior to installation. D. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches (0.2 m) above roofing level unless otherwise accepted in writing by the Owner's Representative and Samafil Technical Department. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2019 Page 9 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 E. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior corners and miters shall be cut and hot air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in contact with the Samafrl membrane. F. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter -flashed top edge with Samastop at 6-8 inches (0.15-0.20 m) on center. G. Sarnafil flashings shall be terminated according to Sarnafil recommended details. H. All adhered flashings that exceed 30 inches (0.75 m) in height or that of the perimeter Sarnabar spacings shall receive additional securement. Consult Sarnafil Technical Department for securement methods. I. All mechanically attached flashings that exceed 18 inches (0.46 m) in height shall receive additional securement. Consult Samafil Technical Department for securement methods. 3.08 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal details, fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following: 1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 (latest issue). 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - latest issue. B. Metal, other than that provided by Sarnafil, is not covered under the Sarnafil warranty. C. Complete all metal work in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight condition exists daily. D. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending to allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. E. Metal joints shall be watertight. F. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid wood blocking. Fasteners shall penetrate the wood nailer a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm). G. Airtight and continuous metal hook strips are required behind metal fascias. Hook strips are to be fastened 12 inches (0.3 m) on center into the wood nailer or masonry wall. H. Counter flashings shall overlap base flashings at least 4 inches (100 mm). I. Hook strips shall extend past wood nailers over wall surfaces by l Yz-inch (38 mm) minimum and shall be securely sealed from air entry. 3.09 SARNACLAD METAL BASE FLASHINGS/EDGE METAL A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and Sarnafil. Acceptance shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing due to incomplete flashings, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. B. Samaclad metal flashings shall be formed and installed per the Detail Drawings. 1. All metal flashings shall be fastened into solid wood nailers with two rows of post galvanized flat head annular ring nails, 4 inches (100 mm) on center staggered. Fasteners shall penetrate the nailer a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. C. Adjacent sheets of Samaclad shall be spaced '/4 inch (6 min) apart. The joint shall be covered with 2 -inch (50 mm) wide aluminum tape. A 4 -inch minimum (100 mm) wide strip of Sarnafil flashing membrane shall be hot air welded over the joint. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 10 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. A. Crossgrip: 1. Install Crossgrip Walkway loose laid on completed Sarnafil roof assembly. Where design wind speeds exceed 94 mph secure the walkway with loops of Sarnafil membrane welded to the field sheet. Unroll and position Crossgrip Walkway within specified areas and cut to desired length. Do not install Crossgrip Walkway directly over bars. Connecting clips are available for butting two ends together. Important: Check all existing deck membrane seams that are to be covered and re -weld any inconsistencies before installation. 3.11 TEMPORARY CUT-OFF A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a watertight condition as the work progresses. All temporary waterstops shall be constructed to provide a 100% watertight seal. The stagger of the insulation joints shall be made even by installing partial panels of insulation. The new membrane shall be carried into the waterstop. The waterstop shall be sealed to the deck and/or substrate so that water will not be allowed to travel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane shall be sealed in a continuous heavy application of sealant as described in Section 2.10. When work resumes, the contaminated membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated membrane, insulation fillers, etc. shall be removed from the work area and properly disposed of off site. None of these materials shall be used in the new work. B. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Applicator shall provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition. C. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 4.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 4.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and reglets are in place. 4.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Rollout membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate indirection of drainage. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page I1 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate per manufacturer's recommendations. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips. F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. 4.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 4.05 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from fmished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. 4.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. End of Section 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 10116/2013 Page 12 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 7100 Roof Specialties PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured roof specialties, including conductor heads and downspouts. B. Roof membrane vents. C. Application of asphaltic roof traffic pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories B. Section 07 6200 (07620) - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 07 7100 A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2010. B. NRCA ML 104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations. C. Samples: Submit two appropriately sized samples of roof vent. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Stack roof traffic pads on smooth ground or wood platform to eliminate warping. D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Louvered Vents: 1. Copper Craft: www.coppercraft.com. 2. Vulcan Supply Corp: www.vulcansupply.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 07 7100 - Roof Specialties 10122/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 7100 B. Pipe and Penetration Flashings: 1. Portals Plus by Commercial Products Group of Hart and Cooley, Inc.; None - N/A: www.portalsplus.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Roof Traffic Pads: 1. W.R. Meadows, Inc., PO Box 338, Hampshire, Illinois 60140-0338. (800) 342-5976. (847) 683-4500. Fax (847) 683-4544. Website www.wrmeadows.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Roof Traffic Pads: 1/2" or 3/4" thick multi -ply, asphaltic panels, consisting of a reinforced carrier sheet, fortified asphaltic core and a non -slip top surface of white mineral granules, shall be Whitewalk Roof Traffic Pads, as manufactured by W. R. MEADOWS. 1. Accessories: Plastic Cement: # 625 Plastic Cement by W.R. Meadows. 2. Finish: White. 2.03 ACCESSORIES 2.04 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual drawing details as noted: C. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and base flashings. D. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water tightness. 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties 10/22/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 7123 Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel gutters and downspouts. B. Precast concrete splash pads. C. Sheet metal splash pans. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07-3213: Sloped roofing system. B. Section 07 3216 (07320) - Concrete Roof Tiles C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Section 07 7123 D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting of metal surfaces. E. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods, locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components. D. Samples: Submit 6 samples, 12 inch long, illustrating component design, finish, color, and configuration. 1. Samples are to be used by painting contractor to provide samples of special finishing copper paint. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet. 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 10/1612013 Page I of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Section 07 7123 A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: Profile as indicated. 1. To match existing B. Downspouts: Profile as indicated and to match existing. C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. To match existing 2. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 3. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 4. Downspout Supports: Brackets. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Splash Pans: Same metal type as downspouts, formed to 18x30 inches size; rolled sides 1 inch high for inverted pan placement. B. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. C. Strainer Guard: Install "beehive" -type strainer -guard at downspouts, removable for cleaning. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight. 2.05 SPECIAL FINISHING A. Gutters and Downspouts and all attachment accessories are to be finished with special copper paint prior to installation. Gutter and downspout manufacturer are required to coordinate with painting contractor to provide an acceptable final finish. Refer to specification section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 10/16/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 7123 B. Sheet Metal: Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Slope gutters 1/16 inch per foot. D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. End of Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 10/16/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 10/16/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 07 7123 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 90 05 Joint Sealers PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 07 90 05 A. Sealants and joint backing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders: B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. D. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a. D. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed -Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011). E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gunnable and Pourable Sealants: 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 90 05 1. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 2. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcoming.com. 3. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. 3. Polyurethane Products: a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I -XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant: www.pecora.com. b. Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede -1/ -TX Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. 2. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; 898NST Sanitary Silicone Sealant - Class 50: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco Global Sealants; Vulkem 45SSL: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger thanjoint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.02 PREPARATION Section 07 90 05 A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. End of Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Section 07 90 05 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Thermally insulated steel doors. C. Sound -rated steel doors and frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed liter. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 081113 A. ANSI/ICC Al 17.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory -Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007 (R2011). C. ANSI A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. D. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2011). E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. F. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. G. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. H. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. 1. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. J. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1992. K. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2006. L. NAAMM HMMA 862 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2003. M. NAAMM HMMA 863 - Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2004. N. NAAMM HMMA 865 - Guide Specifications for Sound Control Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2003. O. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 081113 B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2 x 2 inches in size showing factory finishes, colors, and surface texture. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors; Product Standard: www.republicdoor.com, 3. Steelcraft, an Ingersoll Rand brand; Product B -Series: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSUICC At 17.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non -removable stops on non -secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors : 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 08 11 13 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 081113 2. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. B. Interior Doors, Non -Fire -Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Interior Doors, Sound -Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with ASTM E90. 3. Core: Polyurethane. 4. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame. D. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Interior Door Frames, Non -Fire -Rated: Knock -down type. D. Sound -Rated Door Frames: Knock -down type. E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components; factory -installed. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed. C. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. D. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 7100. 1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 11 13 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Coordinate installation of hardware. D. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straightedge, comer to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to this section. End of Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall access door and frame units. B. Ceiling access door and frame units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 08 3100 A. ITS (DIR) -Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Samples: Submit two access units, _6_x_6_ inch in size illustrating frame configuration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS A. Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Standard duty, hinged door. 3. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. 4. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. B. Walls in Wet Areas: I. Material: Steel, hot -dipped zinc or zinc -aluminum -alloy coated. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 4. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. 5. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. C. Fire Rated Walls: See drawings for wall fire ratings. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Uninsulated, single thickness door panel. D. Ceilings, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Same type as for walls. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size in Other Ceilings: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. E. Fire Rated Ceilings: See drawings for ceiling fire ratings. 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels 10/2212013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 3100 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. a. Units in Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: ACUDOR ADWT. 2. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com. a. Units in Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Cendrex CTR, concealed frame, pantograph hinge. b. Units with Recess for Wall Finish: Cendrex AHA, AHA -GYP, or AHA -PLY, as appropriate. c. Aluminum Units: Cendrex PAL. d. Attic Draft Stop Units: Cendrex DRD. e. Removable Panels (No Hinge): Cendrex RMD, metal. 3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, hic; Product M -Architectural Grade Flush Door: www.milcorinc.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with comer joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. 1. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 2. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum. 3. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. a. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 4. Steel Finish: Primed. 5. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color. 6. Hardware: a. Hardware for Fire Rated Units: As required for listing. b. Hinges for Non -Fire -Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. End of Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels 10/2212013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 32 00 Sliding Glass Doors PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated sliding glazed doors with frames and operating hardware. B. Insect screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 08 32 00 A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough opening framing. B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Fibrous stuffing insulation at door frame perimeter. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder locks. D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Product and execution requirements for glass type and installation. E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Product requirements for glass units. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/LS.2/A440 -North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component dimensions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, and framed opening tolerances. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical sliding door panel corner construction, accessories, and finishes. D. Submit two samples of door hardware. E. Certificates: Certify that sliding glass doors meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of residential sliding doors with not fewer than three years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site and store in manufacturer's protective cartons until openings are ready for door installation. B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 32 00 C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum Sliding Doors: 1. Arcadia Architectural Products, Inc; Product Series 5000: www.areadiaproducts.com. 2. Peerless Products, Inc; Product GSD2: www.peerlessproducts.com. 3. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Product D-5100: www.wausauwindow.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SLIDING GLASS DOORS A. Sliding Glass Doors: Extruded aluminum unit frame and operable panel frame, factory fabricated, factory glazed; complete with integral sloped sill/threshold, flashings, and anchorage devices. 1. Configuration: One fixed panel and one horizontal sliding panel. 2. Finish: Powder coat paint finish. 3. Color: White. 4. Frame Depth: 6 inches, minimum. 5. Aluminum Members: Factory finished; screw lock comer construction; thermally broken. 6. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces and for condensation occurring within frame construction. 7. Glass Stops: Same material and color as frame, sloped for wash. 8. Operable Panels: Stainless steel bottom rollers; adjustable. B. Construction: Factory assemble door frame as one unit, including head jambs, and sill; factory assembly operating and fixed panels. 1. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around perimeter of assemblies. 2. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof, accurately and rigidly joined corners. 3. Sills: One piece, sloped to drain, with integral roller track. C. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 Class R Performance Grade 15. 2. Grade Substantiation: Either AAMA Certification Label or independent test report itemizing compliance will constitute acceptable evidence of compliance. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, low -E coated, argon filled, fully tempered, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions. 2.04 SLIDING GLASS DOORS A. Sliding Doors: Extruded aluminum framed, factory fabricated; vision glass, threshold, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. I. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440HC40. 2. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around perimeter of assemblies. 3. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof. Accurately and rigidly join corners. Match and align cladding joints for continuity of line and design. 4. Sills and Stools: One piece; slope sills for wash. 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 32 00 5. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces and for condensation occurring within frame construction. 2.05 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Pull Handles: Manufacturer's standard type. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. B. Sliding Panel Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable from interior. C. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber. D. Anchors: Hot -dipped galvanized or stainless steel. E. Bituminous Paint: Fibered asphaltic type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit in conjunction with air and vapor seal. B. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without distortion or imposed stresses. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straightedge. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction activities. End of Section 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Section 08 32 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 08 33 23 A. Overhead coiling doors and shutters, operating hardware, fire -rated, non -fire -rated, and exterior, manual and electric operation. B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Samples: Submit two slats, _6_x.6 inch in size illustrating shape, color and finish texture. E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Clopay Corporation; Model CERD20: www.clopaydoor.com. 2. The Cookson Company; Product Rolling Service Door: www.cooksondoor.com. 3. Wayne -Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation; Product Model 900: www.wayne-dalton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COILING DOORS A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain. 1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf, without undue deflection or damage to components. 2. Single thickness slats. 3. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches wide x required length. 4. Finish: Galvanized. 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors 10122/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 5. Finish: Factory painted, Per Architect color. 6. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel. 7. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 8. Electric operation. 9. Mounting: Within framed opening. 10. Exterior lock and latch handle. 2.03 MATERIALS Section 08 33 23 A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors. B. Steel Slats: Minimum 22 gage ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet. 1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating. C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap -on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. D. Steel Guides: Formed from galvanized steel sheet, 18 gage; 3 inch wide; complying with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating. E. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Prime paint. F. Hardware: 1. Lock Cylinders: Specified in Section 08 7100. 2. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to keep in locked or retracted position. 3. Latch Handle: Interior and exterior handle. G. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid -travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. 2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Electric Operators: 1. Motor Raring: 1/3 hp; continuous duty. 2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 3. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1. 4. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second. 5. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 6. Manual override in case of power failure. B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN -STOP -CLOSE) momentary control for each operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro -mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered. 1. Products: 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors 10/22/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 a. Miller Edge, Inc; MGR20: www.MillerEdge.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Section 08 33 23 B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 27 17. F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 1011 straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. End of Section 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors 10/22/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors 10/22/2013 Page 4 of 4 Section 08 33 23 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 43 13 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum -framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Weatherstripping. D. Door hardware. E. Perimeter sealant. Section 08 43 13 F. All required attachments, trim, and accessories to provide a complete installation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry B. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows: Operable sash within glazing system. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. D. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2010. E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2011. F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). J. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). K. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 10/2212013 Page 1 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Section 08 43 13 A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of California Building code. a. 70 mph wind speed, exposure C 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 6.00 lbFsq ft. E. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. F. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details . C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 inches long illustrating finished aluminum surface . E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum 5 years of documented experience. B. Installer - The storefront installer shall be currently approved by the manufacturer, and have experience of at least five (5) years installing the selected system. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 10/2212019 Page 2 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 4313 C. Replacements - In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the University. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. All storefront and entrances system components shall be the product of a single manufacturer and represent an integrated system. B. The aluminum storefront system was designed based on the product of Kawneer as a standard of quality. C. Aluminum -Framed Storefront and Doors: 1. EFCO Corporation; Product Series 402 (NT): www.efcocorp.com. 2. Kawneer North America; Product Trifab Series 451T: www.kawneer.com. 3. Tmlite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC; CG450[]: www.trulite.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Glazing: Refer to Section 08 80 00 Glazing. B. Aluminum -Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back). 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. 3. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 6.00 lbf/sq ft. 4. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf. 5. Condensation Resistance Factor: 40 minimum 6. Finish: Class I color anodized. 7. Finish Color: As selected from manufacturer's standards. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of California Building code. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 10/2212013 Page 3 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 4313 2. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq It of wall area, measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283. 4. Condensation Resistance Factor: Measure in accordance with AAMA 1503 with 1 inch insulating glass installed. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Fabrication Method — Shearblock or equal. Use of exposed fasteners and stacking system with receptor sill not acceptable. 3. Glazing stops: Flush. B. Doors: Glazed aluminum. Series 500 wide Stile 1. Thickness: 13/4 inches. 2. Top Rail: 6 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 6 inches wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Finish: Same as storefront. 7. Pull Handles: See Section 08 7100 8. Hinges: Kawneer 4 1/2 x4 ball bearing butt hinge with non -removable pin or equal electrified hinge where required. 9. Exit Device: See Section 08 7100 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM 13221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Perimeter Sealant: Type -General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component specified in Section 07 90 05. D. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00. E. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.05 FINISHES A. Comply with AA DAF -45 for aluminum finishes required. B. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating or AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 10/2212013 Page 4 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.06 HARDWARE Section 08 43 13 A. General: Refer to Section 08710 "Door Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. 1. Coordinate with hardware provider regarding electronic access control - provide components required for a complete system. B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 1. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and comers. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. I. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 10/2212013 Page 5 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 43 13 I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Install hardware using templates provided. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using exterior dry glazing method. L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05. M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. B. Opening force for doors not to exceed 5 lbs of force 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. End of Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 10/2212013 Page 6 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 53 13 Vinyl Windows PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated tubular extruded plastic windows with fixed sash. B. Factory glazed including infill panels. C. Operating hardware. D. Insect screens. E. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 08 5313 A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/LS.2/A440 -North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; 2011. B. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. C. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, installation requirements. D. Submit two samples of operating hardware. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect fmished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 53 13 B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or joints. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Vinyl Windows: 1. Pella Corporation; 350 Series: www.pellacommercial.com. 2. Milgard; Product Tuscany Series. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 VINYL WINDOWS A. Vinyl Windows: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded hollow ultra -violet -resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color; with factory -installed glazing, hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings, with single hung, outward projecting awning, and fixed, non-operable sash. 2. Color: White. 3. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly but still providing adequate space for perimeter seals. 4. Operable Units: Double weatherstripped. 5. Framing Members: Fusion welded comers and j oints, with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring within system. 7. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of extruded PVC, fitting tightly into frame assembly. S. trisect Screens: Located on inside of windows. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, low -E coated, argon filled, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions. B. Frames: 2 inch wide x 4 1/2 inch deep profile; flush glass stops of screw fastened type. C. Sills: 2 inch nominal thickness, extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash to 1/2 inch beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening. D. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen mesh taut and secure to frame; secured to window with adjustable hardware allowing screen removal without use of tools. 1. Hardware: Spring loaded steel pins; four per screen unit. 2. Screen Mesh: Vinyl -coated fiberglass, window manufacturer's standard mesh. 3. Frame Finish: Baked enamel, color to match window interior color. E. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Resilient PVC; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal. 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.04 HARDWARE A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. B. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Section 08 53 13 A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install window units in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Install operating hardware. E. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in accordance with ASTM E 1105 using uniform pressure and same pressure difference as specified for laboratory tests. 1. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense. B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. End of Section 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Section 08 53 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 62 00 Unit Skylights PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed plastic skylights with integral metal frame. B. Counterflashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 08 62 00 A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing for rough opening. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood support curbs. C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Skylight counterflashing. D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured curbs for installation of unit skylights. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. D. ASTM B221M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. E. ASTM D4479/D4479M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos -Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e I. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide structural, thermal, and daylighting performance values. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configurations, dimensions, locations, fastening methods, and installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for including leakage due to defective skylight materials or workmanship. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Unit Skylights: 1. Bristolite Skylights; Product AL -CM -1: www.bristolite.com. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope; Product Versalite Glass: www.oldcastlebe.com/. 3. PHP Systems/Design; VTECH Glass Curb Mounted Cap (CMC): www.vtechskylights.com. 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights 10/2212013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 UNIT SKYLIGHTS Section 08 62 00 A. Unit Skylights: Factory -assembled glazing in aluminum frame, free of visual distortion, weathertight. 1. Shape: Square dome. 2. Glazing: Single. 3. Operation: Operable for ventilation. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Double Glazing: Acrylic plastic with aerogel insulation between layers; factory sealed. 1. Outer Glazing: Clear transparent. 2. later Glazing: Clear transparent. B. Frames: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M) Extruded aluminum thermally broken, reinforced and welded corner joints, integral curb frame mounting flange and counterflashing to receive roofing flashing system, with integral condensation collection gutter, glazing retainer; clear anodized finish. 1. Ventilation: Provide protected pivot hinge and lifting/latching mechanism that allow skylight units to be opened manually and secured in both open and closed positions from interior. Include removable insect screen. C. Support Curbs: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) Sheet aluminum, sandwich construction; 1 inch thick, 4 inches high; glass fiber insulation; with integral flange for anchorage to roof deck. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, exposed to view. B. Counterflashings: Same metal type and finish as skylight frame. C. Protective Back Coating: Zinc molybdate alkyd. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that openings and substrate conditions are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply protective back coating on aluminum surfaces of skylight units that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install aluminum curb assembly, fastening securely to roof decking. Flash curb assembly into roof system. B. Place skylight units and secure to curb assembly. Install counterflashing as required. C. Apply sealant to achieve watertight assembly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant. End of Section 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights 10/2212013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 Door Hardware PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel and aluminum doors. B. Hardware for fire -rated doors. C. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. D. Thresholds. E. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Section 08 7100 B. Section 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors: Hardware for same, except cylinders; installation of cylinders. C. Section 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Lockable coiling doors. D. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts: Hardware for doors in storefront, including: 1. Integral weatherstripping. 2. Hinges. 3. Narrow stile locks. 4. Exit devices. 5. Closers. 6. Push bars and pull handles. 7. Overhead stops. 8. Thresholds. 9. Installation of lock cylinders provided under this section. E. Section 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ANSI/ICC At 17.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSIBHMA A156.2). D. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3). E. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA At 56.4). F. B14MA A156.5 - Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSPBHMA A156.5). G. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6). 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 1 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 08 7100 H. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSUBHMA Al 56.8). I. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). J. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13). K. BHMA A156.14 - American National Standard for Sliding & Folding Door Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.14). L. BHMA Al 56.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSUBHMA A156.15). M. BHMA A156.17 - American National Standard for Self Closing Hinges & Pivots; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSI/BHMA A156.17). N. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18). O. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems, Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22). P. BHMA At 56.31 - Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.31). Q. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. R. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004. S. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. T. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. B. Convey City's keying requirements to manufacturers. C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly show products to be famished for this project. B. Hardware Schedule: 1. Organize schedule into "Hardware Sets" with an index of doors and heading, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include manufacturers catalog information for each type of hardware supplied. Catalog information is to be separated into type with identification tabs between each hardware type. IE: "Hinges", "Locks", "Closers" etc. C. Samples: Prior to preparation of hardware schedule: 1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, and closer illustrating style, color, and finish. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 2 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 D. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated items and include power requirements. E. Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of City. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. G. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. H. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to City by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. L Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, exit devices, hinges, and closers) from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. 2. Hardware supplier shall be a direct factory contract supplier who has in his employment a certified hardware consultant (AHC) who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the Work for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. B. Schedule Designations: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of one manufacturer's numeric designation system in schedules does not imply that another manufacturer's products will not be acceptable, unless they are not equal in design, size, weight, finish, function, or other quality of significance. See 1.03 A for substitutions. C. Exit Doors: Operable at all times from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. I : ♦ .::: ► A. See Section 01 78 00 - Contract Closeout, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers. C. Closers: Ten years, except electronic closers, two years. D. Exit Devices: Three years. E. All other Hardware: Two years. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN A. Hager Companies products as specified in Section 08 71 10, for hinges, locks, closers, and other items specified: www.hagerco.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 3 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL Section 08 7100 A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 3. All Hardware on Fire -Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated. 1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D). 2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D). a. Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing chrome or stainless steel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment; provide primary finish on one side of door and secondary finish on other side if necessary. 3. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18. 4. Exceptions: a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearance equivalent according to BHMA Al 56.18. b. Hinges for Fire -Rated Doors: Steel base metal with painted finish. 2.03 HINGES A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door. 1. Provide five -knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers. 3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated. 4. Provide non -removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges. B. Manufacturers - Hinges: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Bommer Industries, Inc: www.bommer.com. 3. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 PUSH/PULLS A. Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6. 1. Provide push and pull on doors not specified to have lockset, latchset, exit device, or auxiliary lock. 2. On solid doors, provide matching push plate and pull plate on opposite faces. B. Manufacturers - Push/Pulls: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 4 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 2.05 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking. 1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. 4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim. B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, six -pin standard core. 1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required. C. Keying: Grand master keyed. D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch". 2.06 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS A. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.2, and as follows: 1. Passage: No locking, always free entry and exit. 2. Privacy: F76, emergency tool unlocks. 3. Office: F82 Grade 1, key not required to lock, unlocks upon exit. 4. Classroom: F84, key required to lock. B. Manufacturers - Cylindrical Locksets: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Schlage: www.schlage.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.07 MORTISE LOCKSETS A. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.13, and as follows: I. Passage: FOl. 2. Privacy: F 19, or F02 with retraction of deadbolt by use of inside lever/knob. 3. Office: F04, key not required to lock, remains locked upon exit. 4. Classroom: F05, key required to lock. 5. Entry, Deadbolt: F20, may be locked without key, free egress. 6. Store Door: F14, deadbolt locked by key from both sides, not an emergency exit (must be unlocked during occupied hours). B. Manufacturers - Mortise Locksets: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagereo.com. 3. Schlage: www.schlage.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.08 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.5, and as follows: 1. Deadbolt, Classroom: E017. 2. Public Entry/Exit ("nightlatch"): E023, D012 3. Deadbolt, Unoccupied: E015 or F17, deadbolt by key outside and turn inside. 4. Deadbolt, Classroom, Unoccupied: E010 or F18, deadbolt by key outside. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 5 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Manufacturers - Auxiliary Locks: Same as other locks. 2.09 FLUSHBOLTS Section 08 7100 A. Flushbolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of frame. I. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply with code. 2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds. B. Manufacturers - Flushbolts: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.10 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.31 and UL listed as a Burglary -Resistant Electric Door Strike; style to suit locks. B. Manufacturers: 1. Assa Abloy Folger Adam EDC, HES, or Securitron: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.11 EXIT DEVICES A. Locking Functions: Functions as defined in BHMA A156.3, and as follows: 1. Entry/Exit, Always -Unlocked: Outside lever unlocked, no outside key access, no latch holdback. 2. Entry/Exit, Free Swing: Key outside retracts latch, latch holdback (dogging) for free swing during occupied hours, not fire -rated; outside trim must be specified as lever or pull. 3. Entry/Exit, Always -Latched: Key outside locks and unlocks lever, no latch holdback (dogging). 4. Entry/Exit, Always -Locked: Key outside retracts latchbolt but does not unlock lever, no latch holdback. 5. Exit Only, Secure: No outside trim, no key entry, no latch holdback, deadlocking latchbolt. B. Manufacturers: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.bagerco.com. 3. Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.12 CLOSERS A. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4. 1. Provide surface -mounted, door -mounted closers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door. 3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke -rated door. Spring hinges are not an acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated. 4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to ensure the leaves close in proper order. B. Manufacturers - Closers: 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 6 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Norton, Rixson, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. LCN: www.Icnclosers.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.13 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide overhead stop. 3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated. B. Floor Stops: C. Magnetic Holder/Releases: Complying with BHMA A156.15; fail safe; doors release to close automatically when electrical current is interrupted; holding force: 25 to 40 pounds -force. D. Manufacturers - Wall and Floor Stops/Holders: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagereo.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. E. Manufacturers - Magnetic Holder/Releases: 1. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.14 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS A. Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22. 1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting stile of pairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke gaskets on each door identified as a "smoke door" and 20 -minute rated fire doors. 2. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top, sides, and meeting stiles of pairs. a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets functioning as both smoke and weather seals. 3. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated. B. Thresholds: 1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated. C. Manufacturers - Gasketing and Thresholds: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.15 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Protection Plates: 1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer, except storefront and all -glass doors. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 7 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Manufacturers - Protection Plates and Architectural Trim: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Ives Hardware: professional.iveshardware.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.16 MATERIALS Section 08 7100 A. Locksets: Locksets and latchsets shall be Schlage - No Substitutions. Strikes shall be 16 gage curved lip stainless .steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box. Strike must have lip of sufficient length to clear trim, but of a profile that will prevent clothing or other items from snagging on strike. 1. Locks shall have minimum 1/4 -inch throw. 2. Comply with requirements of local security ordinances. 3. Provide approved fusible links at levers for labeled doors. 4. Lock Series and Design: Schlage ND Series - Sparta Levers or Schlage L series - #17 lever. 5. All ND series Locksets shall have a breakaway lever. 6. All ND series Locksets used at classroom security locksets to have an engraved inside rose indicating the direction to lock the lock. 7. Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface. Knurled finish shall be applied to door hardware leading to non -accessible rooms or space and shall conform to CBC Section 113313.8.3 and 113313.8.4. B. Hinges: 1. All exterior hinges to be full height full mortise continuous hinge. Hinge to allow the door to open 180 degrees. Fill bottom space between door and frame below hinge to prevent rodent intrusion. 2. Interior doors shall have 3 butts per leaf up to 7 feet 0 inches height. Add one each hinge for each 12 inches in height of fraction thereof. 3. Provide 5" extra heavy weight hinges on doors over 3 feet 0 inches in width. C. Panic Hardware and Exit Devices: Furnish sets at wood doors with sex bolts unless otherwise specified. Lever handle trim shall match locksets. Device push bar must release when 15 lbs. maximum pressure is applied in the direction of travel. Products shall comply with UBC Standard 10-4 and shall be mounted between 30" and 44" above the finished floor. Hardware shall also comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9. D. Surface Door Closers: 1. Full rack and pinion type with removable non-ferrous case. Provide sex bolts and grommets at all wood doors. Place closers inside building, stairs, and rooms. Closers shall be non -sized, non -handed and adjustable. a. Provide drop brackets, shoe supports, and blade stop spacers as required at narrow top rails. b. Exterior doors to have 5 lbs. maximum pressure to open( 3 lbs preferred), interior doors to have 5 lbs. maximum pressure to open( 3 lbs preferred).To insure positive latching of fire labeled doors, doors may have up to 12 lbs. maximum pressure to open if approved by Code Official. c. Closers to be equipped with spring cushion stops and hold open feature typical. E. Kick Plates: 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/22/2019 Page 8 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 Provide with four beveled edges, 10" high by width less 2". Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. F. Seals: 1. Seals shall be finished to match other finish hardware. Seals applied to Fire rated openings must be accompanied with a stick on label or stamped U.L. label showing compliance with labeling requirements. G. Screws: Exposed screws shall be Phillips head. H. Silencers: 1. Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire -rated door assemblies. I. Thresholds: Shall comply with CBC 113313.2.4.1. 1. Thresholds shall be supplied with either flat head sleeve anchors or flathead machine screws with lead anchors. 2. Thresholds to be installed in a bed of aluminum colored 100% silicon caulk. Caulk must seal all edges as well as between threshold and jamb. Threshold must be installed with sufficient caulk as to prevent squeaking of threshold when stepped upon. 3. Maximum rise of threshold not to exceed f2". 4. Contractor to co-ordinate with other trades ( Concrete, Flooring, etc.) to insure that between interior and exterior elevation there is no more than 'h" rise after threshold is applied. 2.17 Finish A. Generally to be BHMA 626 Dull Chromium. 1. Areas using BHMA 626 shall have push, pulls and kick plates of BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted. B. Spray door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire -rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. D. Install hardware on fire -rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. E. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 9 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.06 SCHEDULE -Attached. End of Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 10/2212013 Page 10 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 Glazing PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers. B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. Section 08 80 00 C. Section 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors: Glazing furnished by door manufacturer. D. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer. E. Section 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer. F. Section 08 63 00 - Metal -Framed Skylights: Glazing furnished by skylight manufacturer. G. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011). B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011 el. D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass --Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2012. E. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a. F. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2012a. G. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. H. GANA (GM) -GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009. I. GANA (SM) -GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. C. Samples: Submit two samples _6_ x 6 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration and design. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/2212013 Page 1 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 08 80 00 A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Provide mockup of Angled Observation Window including glass and air barrier and vapor retarder seal. B. Locate where directed. C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. nurijumvTommm A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units. D. Polycarbonate Sheet Glazing: Provide a fifteen (15) year warranty to include coverage for breakage, coating failure, abrasion resistance, including replacement of failed units. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES A. Type IG -1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing. 1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise noted; windows at Dispath area and to be angled away from the building at a degree that matches the existing condition.. 2. Outboard Lite: Anti -reflective glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch. B. Type E-1 -Single Exterior Vision Glazing: 1. Applications: Vinyl Windows. 2. Type: Annealed float glass. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. C. Type S-2 - Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing: 1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: D -H -T-90 or W-90, minimum. 2. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in fire doors. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/2212013 Page 2 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 b. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an hourly fire rating. 3. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 4. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating. 2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2010 CBC code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na. 2. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type 1, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat -Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Anti -Reflective Glass: Float glass pyrolytically-coated both sides to reduce reflection and glare. 1. Manufacturers: a. G1asTroesch Holding AG; LUXAR Anti Reflective Glass: www.mcgrory.com. b. SCHOTT North America Inc; Amiran: www.us.schott.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing: 1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: D -H -T-90 or W-90, minimum. 2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: I. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/2212013 Page 3 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 B. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non -skinning. C. Silicone Sealant : Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non -staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color. 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; _1/8_x_1/2_ inch size; black color. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option I; Black color. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal comers by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/2212013 Page 4 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.05 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line. F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with silicone type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line. G. Apply cap bead of silicone type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.06 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with silicone type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal. D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.07 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR BUTT GLAZED METHOD (SEALANT ONLY) A. Temporarily brace glass in position for duration of glazing process. Mask edges of glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members. B. Temporarily secure a small diameter non -adhering foamed rod on back side of joint. C. Apply sealant to open side ofjoint in continuous operation; thoroughly fill the joint without displacing the foam rod. Tool the sealant surface smooth to concave profile. D. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod. Apply sealant to opposite side, tool smooth to concave profile. E. Remove masking tape. 3.08 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/22/2013 Page 5 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.09 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with silicone type sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.10 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND) A. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line. B. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool surface to straight line. 3.11 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.12 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.13 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/2212013 Page 6 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 End of Section 4.01 This Page Blank End of Section 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/2212013 Page 7 of 8 Section 08 80 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/2212013 Page 8 of 8 Section 08 80 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Cementitious backing board. E. Gypsum wallboard. F. Joint treatment and accessories. G. Textured finish system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. B. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Tile backing board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 09 2116 A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. B. ANSI Al 18.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2011. F. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011. G. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. H. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non -Asbestos Fiber -Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets; 2008b. I. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011. J. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012. K. GA -216 -Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010. L. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 09 2116 A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA -216. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Fire Rated Ceilings and Soffits:; 1 hour rating. 2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum -Based Board: 1. American Gypsum; Product EagleRoc: www.americangypsum.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation; Product AirRenew: www.certainteed.com. 3. USG Corporation; Product FiberRock: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire -Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 3. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch. b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch. 4. Paper -Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard. b. American Gypsum; LightRoc Gypsum Wallboard. c. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Gypsum Board. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds, shower ceilings, and wainscoating. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. ANSI Cement -Based Board: Non -gypsum -based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI At 18.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board. 3) USG Corporation; Durock Brand Cement Board. 4) Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 2116 D. Ceiling Board: Special sag -resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Products: a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling. c. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag -Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. C. Textured Finish Materials: Latex -based compound; plain. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1002; self -piercing tapping type; cadmium -plated for exterior locations. E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard. I. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Fire -Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. C. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 2116 B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.06 TEXTURE FINISH A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to match approved sample. B. Texture Required: Level 5 Knock Down Finish. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. End of Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 Tiling PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. D. Stone thresholds. E. Cerarnic accessories. F. Ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 09 30 00 A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2012.1. 1. ANSI A 108.1 a -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 2. ANSI A108. lb - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 3. ANSI A108.1c -Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2012.1. 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar, 2012.1. 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2012.1. 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2012.1. 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2012.1. 9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2012.1. 10. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. 11. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior glue plywood) Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 12. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2012.1. 13. ANSI A 118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2012.1. 09 30 00 - Tiling 1 0/2 212 01 3 Page I of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 14. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. 15. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2012.1. B. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2012. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/Al 18 Series on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. See Section 0140 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent -based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal -Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSl A137.1, and as follows: 09 30 00 - Tiling 10/2212013 Page 2 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 1. Size and Shape: 1 inch square. 2. Edges: Square. 3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. C. Glazed Wall Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Size and Shape: 4x8. 2. Surface Finish: High gloss. 3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Pattern: Running Bond Pattern. 5. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base. 2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. C. Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams. 1. Applications: Provide at the following locations: a. At doorways where tile terminates. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type. 1. Use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure. 2. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX D14: www.ardexamericas.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 15 Premium Mastic: www.latierete.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; PmColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospee.com. 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 4. Products: 09 30 00 - Tiling 10/2212013 Page 3 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FG -C MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PermaColor: www.laticrete.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew resistant type. 1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX Flex Caulk: www.ardexamericas.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Latasil: www.laticrete.com. c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Colored Caulking: www.merkrete.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. D. Grout Sealer: Liquid -applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout. 1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone. 2. Products: a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 THIN -SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin -set tile; complying with ANSI At 18.10. 1. Type: Fluid -applied. 2. Thickness: 25 mils, minimum, dry film thickness. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX 8+9: www.ardexamericas.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Hydro Ban: www.laticrete.com. c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Hydro Guard 2000: www.merkrete.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin -set tile; complying with ANSI At 18.10. 1. Type: Fluid -applied. 2. Thickness: 25 mils, minimum, dry film thickness. 3. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Hydro Ban: www.laticrete.com. b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Hydro Guard 2000: www.merkrete.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive tile. 09 30 00 - Tiling 10/2212013 Page 4 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through rile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place the joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Install thresholds where indicated. H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout the joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS A. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F 142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. B. Over wood substrate with backer board underlayment, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F 144, for cementitious backer boards, with standard grout. 3.05 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS A. Grout with standard grout as specified above. B. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type - Bathtub/Tile: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant specified in Section 07 90 05. 3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over cememitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms. 09 30 00 - Tiling 10/22/2019 Page 5 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. 3.09 SCHEDULE End of Section THIS PAGE BLANK End of Section 09 30 00 - Tiling 10/2212013 Page 6 of 6 Section 09 30 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 65 00 Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved 2010)el. B. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008, C. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002. D. FS RR -T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant; Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision E, 1994. E. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; 1998. F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, _6 x 6 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Flooring Material: 20 square feet of each type and color. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 65 00 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Pattern: Solid color. 5. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.arnistrong.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STAIR COVERING A. Stair Treads: Rubber; full width and depth of stair tread in one piece; tapered thickness; nosing not less than 1-5/8 inch deep. I. Minimum Requirements: Comply with FS RR -T-650 requirements corresponding to type specified. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.1875 inch. 3. Nosing: Square. 4. Style: Contrasting color abrasive grit strips full width. 5. Color: Solid. 6. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in one piece, matching treads in material and color: 1. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 2. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Stair Nosings: 1-1/2 inch horizontal return, 1-1/8 inch vertical return, full width of stair tread in one piece: 1. Material: Rubber. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Pattern: Smooth. 4. Color: Solid color. 5. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 5. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring; Product BurkeBase Type TS: www.burkemercer.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.04 ACCESSORIES Section 09 65 00 A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings. B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. C. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. D. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. E. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3.05 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.06 STAIR COVERINGS A. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. 3.09 SCHEDULE End of Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Section 09 65 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 SECTION 09 67 00 09 67 00 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING FOR CONCRETE Part 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid -applied flooring for Concrete 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishes B. Section 03 01 00 - Maintenance of Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES A. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning B. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning C. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning D. SSPC-SP 13 / NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation for Concrete E. ASTM F1869 - Moisture Test by use of Calcium Chloride F. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Cleaning Concrete G. ASTM D4259 - Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete H. ASTM D4260 - Standard Practice for Etching Concrete I. ASTM D4263 - Plastic Sheet Method for Checking Moisture in Concrete J. 1CRI # 03732 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0133 00, Submittal Procedures. Section 09 67 00 B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each paint and coating product should include: 1 Product characteristics 2 Surface preparation instructions and recommendations 3 Primer requirements and finish specification 4 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 5 Application methods 6 Cleanup information 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Floor for Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0110 C. Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of manufacturer's color samples available. D. Coating Maintenance Manual: upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacture/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams "Custodian Project Color and Product Information" report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.5 MOCK-UP Include a mock-up if the project size and/or quality warrant taking such a precaution. The following is one example of how a mock-up on a large project might be specified. When deciding on the extent of the mock-up, consider all the major different types of painting on the project. A. Finish surfaces for verification of products, colors, & sheens B. Finish area designated by Architect C. Provide samples that designate prime & finish coats D. Do not proceed with remaining work until the Architect approves the mock-up samples 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer's name, label, and the following list of information: 1 Product name, and type (description) 2 Application & use instructions 3 Surface preparation 4 VOC content 5 Environmental handling 6 Batch date 7 Color number B. Storage: Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer's instructions. Protect from freezing. C. Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the coatings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Floor for Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 2 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Part 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A Acceptable Manufacturer: The Sherwin-Williams Company 101 Prospect Avenue NW Cleveland, OH 44115 Tel: (800) 321-8194 Fax: (216) 566-1392 www.sherwin-wffliams.com Section 00 0110 B. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 0160 00 Product Requirements. When submitting request for substitution, provide complete product data specified above under Submittals, for each substitute product. 2.2 APPLICATION/SCOPE A This material is to be applied at the fust floor garage area. Apply a minimum of two coats and ensure that a slip resistant additive is included. B Where existing fluid applied flooring occurs in the garage, be sure to prepare the surface to receive a smooth a flush transition.. C Surfaces to Be Coated: Concrete Floors: Severe Duty 2.3 SCHEDULE INDEX Concrete Floors: Severe Industrial Duty 1. Epoxy Primer / Self -Leveling Epoxy System 2. Epoxy Primer / Self -Leveling Epoxy Decorative Quartz System 3. Epoxy / Moisture Cure Urethane System 4. Moisture Cure Urethane System 5. Epoxy / H.S Polyurethane 2.4 SCHEDULE Severe Industrial Duty: (Is Generally Considered for Heavy Vehicle Traffic, Heavy Abrasion Areas, & Frequent Cleaning/Rinsing.) 1 Epoxy Primer / Self -Leveling Epoxy System 1st Coat: ArmorSeal 33 Epoxy Primer/Sealer, B58-33 Series (7.0 - 8.0 mils dry) 2nd Coat: ArmorSeal 650 SL/RC Self -Leveling Epoxy, B58-650 Series (10.0 - 30.0 mils dry per coat) Epoxy Primer / Self -Leveling Epoxy Decorative Quartz System 1st Coat: ArmorSeal 33 Epoxy Primer/Sealer, B58-33 Clear (10.0 mils wft, broadcast to excess with color quartz) 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Floor for Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 3 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0110 2nd Coat: ArmorSeal 33 Epoxy Primer/Sealer, B58-33 Clear (24.0 mils wft, broadcast to excess with color quartz) 3rd Coat: ArmorSeal 650 SL/RC Clear Self -Leveling Epoxy, B58-650 Clear (15 mils wft) 4th Coat: ArmorSeal 650 SL/RC Clear Self -Leveling Epoxy, B58-650 Clear (8 mils wft) Epoxy / Moisture Cure Urethane System 1st Coat: ArmorSeal 1000 HS Epoxy, B67-2000 Series (1.5 - 2.0 mils dry) 2nd Coat: ArmorSeal Rexthane I MCU, B65-60 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) 3rd Coat: ArmorSeal Rexthane I MCU, B65-60 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) (optional) Alternate 1st Coat: ArmorSeal Floor-Plex 7100 Primer, 137OW410 (1.5 - 2.0 mils dry) 2nd Coat: ArmorSeal Rexthane I MCU, B65-60 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) 3rd Coat: ArmorSeal Rexthane I MCU, B65-60 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) (optional) Moisture Cure Urethane System 1st Coat: ArrnorSeal Rexthane I MCU, B65-60 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) 2nd Coat: ArmorSeal Rexthane I MCU, B65-60 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) 3rd Coat: ArmorSeal Rexthane I MCU, B65-60 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) (optional) Epoxy /Polyurethane 1st Coat: ArmorSeal 1000 HS Epoxy, B67-2000 Series (1.5 - 2.0 mils dry) 2nd Coat: ArmorSeal H.S Polyurethane, B65-220 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) 3rd Coat: ArmorSeal H.S Polyurethane, B65-220 Series (2.0 - 3.0 mils dry per coat) (optional) 2.5 MATERIALS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Paints and Coatings - General: 1 Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory -mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B Primers: 1 Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Floor for Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 4 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0110 2.6 ACCESSORIES: A Coating Application Accessories: 1 Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required, per manufacturer's specifications. Part 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly examined and prepared. Notify Architect or Specifier of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. B If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected, and approved by all parties, otherwise application of coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions. D Previously Painted Surfaces: Verify that existing painted surfaces do not contain lead based paints, notify Architect immediately if lead based paints are encountered. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION WARNING! Removal of old paint by sanding, scraping or other means may generate dust or fumes that contain lead. Exposure to lead dust or fumes may cause brain damage or other adverse health effects, especially in children or pregnant women. Controlling exposure to lead or other hazardous substances requires the use of proper protective equipment, such as a properly fitted respirator (NIOSH approved) and proper containment and cleanup. For more information, call the National Lead Information Center at 1 -800 -424 -LEAD (in US) or contact your local health authority. Removal must be done in accordance with EPA Renovation, Repair and Painting Rule and all related state and local regulations. Care should be taken to follow all state and local regulations which may be more strict than those set under the federal RRP Rule. A Proper product selection, surface preparation, and application affect coating performance. Coating integrity and service life will be reduced because of improperly prepared surfaces. Selection and implementation of proper surface preparation ensures coating adhesion to the substrate and prolongs the service life of the coating system. B Selection of the proper method of surface preparation depends on the substrate, the environment, and the expected service life of the coating system. Economics, surface contamination, and the effect on the substrate will also influence the selection of surface preparation methods. C Surface must be clean, dry, and in sound condition. Remove all oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust, and other foreign material to ensure adequate adhesion. D Poured Concrete 1 New For surface preparation, refer to SSPC-SP13/NACE 6/ICRI # 03732. Surfaces must be clean, dry, sound and offer sufficient profile to achieve adequate adhesion. Minimum substrate cure is 28 days at 75°F. Remove all form release agents, curing compounds, salts, efflorescence, laitance, and other foreign matter by sandblasting, shotblasting, mechanical scarification, or suitable chemical means. Refer to ASTM D4260. Rinse thoroughly to achieve a final pH between 8.0 and 10.0. Allow to dry thoroughly prior to coating. 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Floor for Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 5 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0110 Old Surface preparation is done in much the same manner as new concrete, however, if the concrete is contaminated with oils, grease, chemicals, etc., they must be removed by cleaning with a strong detergent. Refer to ASTM D4258. Form release agents, hardeners, etc. must be removed by sandblasting, shotblasting, mechanical scarification, or suitable chemical means. If surface deterioration presents an unacceptably rough surface, ArmorSeal 5020 Floor Resurfacer is recommended to patch and resurface damaged concrete. E Previously Painted Surfaces If in sound condition, clean the surface of all foreign material. Smooth, hard or glossy coatings and surfaces should be dulled by abrading the surface. Apply a test area, allowing paint to dry one week before testing adhesion. If adhesion is poor, or if this product attacks the previous finish, removal of the previous coating may be necessary. If paint is peeling or badly weathered, clean surface to sound substrate and treat as a new surface as above. F Fill all cracks, voids, bug holes and joints with appropriate filler or ArmorSeal Crack Filler, ArmorSeal Joint Sealant, or ArmorSeal Expresspatch. G Always follow the ASTM methods listed below: 1 ASTM F1869 Moisture Test by use of Calcium Chloride 2 ASTM D4258 Standard Practice for Cleaning Concrete. 3 ASTM D4259 Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. 4 ASTM D4260 Standard Practice for Etching Concrete. 5 ASTM D4263 Plastic Sheet Method for Checking Moisture in Concrete. 6 SSPC-SP 13/Nace 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete 7 ICRI # 03732 Surface Preparation of Concrete 3.3 INSTALLATION A Apply all coatings and materials with the manufacturer's specifications in mind. Mix and thin coatings according to manufacturer's recommendation. B Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces. 1 Wait at least 28 days before applying to new concrete or masonry. Or follow manufacturer's procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 28 days. 2 Test new concrete for moisture content. C Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer. D Uniformly apply coatings without runs, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent sheen. E Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. F Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the Architect or Engineer just prior to the application of each coat. 3.4 PROTECTION A Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project. 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Floor for Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 6 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0110 B Touch-up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacturer's recommendation for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder the performance of the coatings. END OF SECTION 09 67 00 09 67 00 — Fluid Applied Floor for Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 7 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. Section 09 90 00 B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop -primed items. c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, including that which is factory -finished. d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory -finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02765 - Pavement markings. B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop -primed items. C. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood -Base Materials; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10122/2013 Page 1 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. C. Samples: Submit three paper "drop" samples, 8-1/2 by I 1 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required. 3. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect. D. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. Work to be performed only by workers thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the techniques of painting, and who are completely familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the paint material being used. C. Single -Source Responsibility - Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. D. Conform to applicable code and regulatory requirements for products and finishes including 1. Specification manual of selected manufacturer 2. Air Pollution Control District regulations and federal lead content laws. 3. California Air Resources Board (CARB) Rules, especially 1113 4. Woodworking Institute (W.I.). 1.06 MOCK-UP A. See Section 0140 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. 1. Mock-up: Before proceeding with paint application, finish one complete surface of each color scheme required, clearly indicating selected colors, finish texture, materials and work quality. If approved, sample area will serve as a minimum standard for work throughout. 2. Locate during on-site construction meeting with Architect present.. 3. If approved, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/22/2013 Page 2 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. 1. hi the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. B. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: ICI Dulux. 2. Or approved equal C. Stains: 1. Olympic_ www.ppg.com 2. Watco: www.rust-olcum.com D. Sealers: 1. Thompson's Water Seal E. Substitutions: See Section 01130 -Substitutions. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field -catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D --National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/22/2013 Page 3 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to City. 3. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 4. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under. E. Color Schedules 1. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting after color selection from samples submitted. 2. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work, subject to the following: a. Exterior Work: A maximum of four (4) different colors will be used, with variations for trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work. 3. Interior Work: A maximum of four (4) different pigmented colors will be used, with variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots. 4. Paints at Wet Areas F. In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an approved fungicide to paints. 1. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophenate. 2. Compatability 3. All paint materials and equipment shall be compatible in use: finish coats shall be compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated; all tools and equipment shall be compatible with the coating to be applied. G. Thinners, when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of the material to be thinned. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. EP-lAll Exterior Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete and concrete masonry. 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer recommended by manufacturer. 3. Primer On Concrete and Concrete Masonry: One heavy coat latex block filler (100 percent acrylic) squeegeed into pores. B. EP -2 Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain: 1. One coat sealer. C. EP -3 Wood,Transparent, Sealer, Optional Stain: 1. One coat of stain; Architect to select stain color. 2. One coat of clear sealer; Architect to select clear sealer. D. EP -4 Masonry/Concrete/Plaster, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler/primer. 2. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. E. EP -5 Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust -inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. F. EP -6 Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. G. EP -7 Aluminum, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat etching primer. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/22/2013 Page 4 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; Architect to select color. H. EP -8 Vinyl Siding, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler/primer. 2. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. I. EP -9 Pavement Marking Paint: 1. Yellow: One coat, with reflective particles. 2. White: One coat, with reflective particles. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR Section 09 90 00 A. IP-IAll Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, wood, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations. 3. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen for items subject to frequent touching by occupants, including door frames and railings. 4. Semi -Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all walls and ceilings in wet areas including: restrooms, wet bars and breakrooms. 5. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. B. IP-2Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including metals: 1. Medium duty applications include doors, door frames, railings, handrails, guardrails, and balustrades 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. C. IP-3Medium Duty VerticaUOverhead: Including gypsum board. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. D. IP -4 Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. E. IP -5 Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with latex primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. F. IP -6 Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. G. IP -7 Aluminum, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat etching primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Architect to select color. H. IP -8 Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex -Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of acrylic primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex -acrylic enamel; Architect to select color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Perform ph and moisture content tests on substrates where indicated by manufacturer. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/22/2013 Page 5 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri -sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. I. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. J. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP I (solvent cleaning). K. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. L. Shop -Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. M. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. N. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/22/2013 Page 6 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.03 APPLICATION Section 09 90 00 A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Where previous paint coatings have been applied, test for adhesion of the substrate prior to application of new coatings. Remove any substrate that fails to adhere to the coatings below it. Sand surfaces to achieve uniform finish. 3.04 WORK QUALITY A. All materials shall be applied free from runs, sags, wrinkles, streaks, shiners, holidays, and brush marks. B. All materials shall be applied uniformly. If any reduction on the coating's viscosity is necessary, it shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's label directions. C. Carry all finish coats to natural breaks and transitions. D. Allow each coat to dry before re -coating, adjusting manufacturer's MINIMUM time recommendations between coats to job conditions. E. Apply each coat to achieve the specified dry fihn thickness per coat. Achieving the total system recommended dry mil thickness with application rates in excess of those recommended and fewer coats than specified will not be accepted. F. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker (or lighter depending on the finish color) than the preceding coat unless otherwise approved. G. Enamels and undercoats are to be sanded smooth prior to topcoating. H. Tops, bottoms, and sides of doors and garage doors are to be finished with the same number of coats as the face. I. Where spray application is used, backrolling should immediately follow. Spraying alone without backrolling is unacceptable. Wet film gauges are to be used after backrolling to insure acceptable wet film thickness. A quality control log, recording weather and surface conditions must be completed each day prior to beginning painting. Paint batches are to be recorded as used showing which building each is applied to and when. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/22/2013 Page 7 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.05 CLEANING Section 09 90 00 A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. End of Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/22/2013 Page 8 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 2113.13 Metal Toilet Compartments PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. B. Urinal and Vestibule screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. B. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Section 10 2113.13 A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and ceilings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. C. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, _6_x_6_ inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. General Partitions Mfg. Corp; Product Floor Mounted - Powder Coated Steel: www.gencralpartitions.com. 2. Global Steel Products Corp; Product Floor Mounted - Powder Coated Steel: www.globalpartitions.com. 3. Metpar Corp; Product FT -700 - Luxor - Floor Mounted: www.metpar.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Powder coated steel, floor -mounted unbraced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground smooth. C. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and floor -to -ceiling vertical upright consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel with polished finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. B. Brackets: Polished chrome -plated non-ferrous cast metal. C. Hardware: Polished chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal: 10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments 10/2212013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 2113.13 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 2.05 FINISHING A. Powder Coated Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats powder coat enamel. B. Color: Architect to select from manufacturer's color chart.. PART EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. End of Section 10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments 10/2212013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 5100 Lockers PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal lockers. B. Locker units with hinged doors. C. Locker benches. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories. Section 10 5100 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and combination lock code. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lockers: 1. Penco Products, Inc; Product Invincible II: www.pencoproducts.com. 2. Republic Storage Systems Co; Product All Welded Ventilated Lockers www.republicstorage.com. 3. Gear Grid; Product Wall Mount Lockers. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS A. Wardrobe Lockers: single and two tier metal lockers, wall mounted with matching closed base. 1. Width: Per Plan inches. 2. Depth: Per Plan inches. 3. Height: 72 inches. 4. Fittings: Hat shelf, 2 coat hooks. 5. Locking: Padlock hasps, for padlocks provided by Owner. B. Locker Benches: Stationary type; bench top of laminated birch; painted steel pedestals. 2.03 METAL LOCKERS A. Lockers: Factory assembled, made of formed sheet steel, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled; metal edges finished smooth without burrs; baked enamel finished inside and out. 1. Where ends or sides are exposed, provide flush panel closures. 2. Provide filler strips where indicated, securely attached to lockers. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect. B. Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded. 1. Body and Shelves: 24 gage, 0.024 inch. 2. Base: 20 gage, 0.036 inch. 3. Metal Base Height: 4 inch. 10 5100 - Lockers 10/2212013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 5100 C. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gaskets and latching for quiet operation. 1. Door Frame: 16 gage, 0.060 inch, minimum. 2. Provide ventilation slots in top and bottom of door frame. D. Doors: Hollow double pan, sandwich construction, 1-3/16 inch thick; welded construction, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs, grind and finish edges smooth. 1. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. 2. Provide ventilation slots in top and bottom of door. E. Hinges: Two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high; weld securely to locker body and door. I. Hinge Thickness: 14 gage, 0.075 inch. F. Coat Hooks: Stainless steel or zinc -plated steel. G. Locking device supplied by City. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers plumb and square. C. Place and secure on prepared base. D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb. E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. F. Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops. G. Install accessories. H. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. End of Section 10 5100 - Lockers 10/2212013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 11 31 00 Residential Appliances PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances. B. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 113100 A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators. C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens. D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. All Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. B. Refrigerator: Free-standing, top -mounted freezer, frost -free. 1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity. 2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency standards set by DOE. 3. Features: Include glass shelves. 4. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated. 5. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product FFHT1826PS: www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product GTZI8GCESS: www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product W8RYEGMWS: www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Microwave: Countertop. 1. Capacity: 1.6 cubic ft. 2. Power: 700 watts. 11 31 00 - Residential Appliances 10/2212013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 113100 3. Features: Include turntable, night light, and 2 -speed exhaust fan. 4. Finish: Stainless Steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product FFCE1638LS: www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product JES1656SRSS: www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product UMC5165AS: www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Dishwasher: Undercounter. 1. Controls: Solid state electronic. 2. Wash Levels: 3. 3. Cycles: 4, including normal. 4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no -heat dry, optional water temperature boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack. 5. Finish: Stainless steel. 6. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product FDB2410HIC: www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product GDF540HSFSS: www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product WDF530PAYM: www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough -ins are present and correctly located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment. End of Section 11 3100 - Residential Appliances 10/2212013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 1152 13 Section 1152 13 Projection Screens PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Front projection screen assemblies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls and ceilings. B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings for recessed screens, and openings in gypsum board partitions for fixed and rear projection screens. C. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and descriptive information on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Experienced in manufacturing products specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of the work of this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver projection screens to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Inspect for damage and size before accepting delivery. B. Store in a protected, clean, dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Stack according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Acclimate screens to building temperatures for 24 hours prior to installation, or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain interior of building between 60 degrees F and 75 degrees F during and after installation of projection screens. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for projection screen assembly. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Da -Lite Screen Company: www.da-lite.com. 1152 13 - Projection Screens 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Draper, Inc: www.draperine.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. Manufacturers: 1. Da -Lite Screen Company, Model Da -Mat®: www.da-lite.com. 2. Draper, Inc (Motorized); Premier: www.draperinc.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Section 1152 13 B. Front Projection Screens: Factory assembled unless otherwise indicated. 1. In Classrooms: Motorized, matte light diffusing fabric screen, horizontally tensioned, wall mounted. C. Matte Light Diffusing Fabric: Light diffusing screen fabric; washable, flame retardant and mildew resistant. 1. Material: Matte white vinyl on fiberglass backing, with nominal gain of 1.0 over viewing angle not less than 70 degrees from axis, horizontally and vertically. D. Masking Borders: White, four sides. E. Exposed Screen Cases: Steel; integral roller brackets. 1. Finish: Baked enamel. 2. Color: White. 3. End Caps: Steel; finished to match case. 4. Mounting: Wall. F. Electrically -Operated Screens: 1. Roller: 2 inch aluminum, with locking device. 2. Vertical Tensioning: Screen fabric weighted at bottom with steel bar with plastic end caps. 3. Horizontal Tensioning: Tab -guided cable system. G. Provide mounting hardware, brackets, supports, fasteners, and other mounting accessories required for a complete installation, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for specified substrates and mountings. 2.03 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Motors: Direct drive, 110V, 60 Hz. 1. Screen Motor: Mounted inside roller; three wire with ground; quick reverse type; equipped with thermal overload cut-off. a. Electrical Characteristics: 1.2 amps. b. Motor mounted on sound absorber. C. Controls: 3 position control switch with plate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is finished and ready to accept screen installation. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify type and location of electrical connections. 1152 13 - Projection Screens 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 1152 13 D. Do not install projection screens until climate control systems are in place and interior painting and other finishes are completed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate screen installation with installation of projection systems. B. Coordinate installation with adjacent construction and fixtures, including ceilings, walls, lighting, fire suppression, and registers and grilles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's recommended hardware for relevant substrates. B. Do not field cut screens. C. Install screens in mountings as specified and as indicated on drawings. D. Install plumb and level. E. Install electrically operated screens ready for connection to power and control systems by others. F. Adjust projection screens and related hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for proper placement and operation. G. Test electrical screens for proper working condition. Adjust as needed. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. End of Section 1152 13 - Projection Screens 10/22/2019 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1152 13 - Projection Screens 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 Section 1152 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 12 2113 Horizontal Louver Blinds PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 12 2113 A. WCMA A100.1 -Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2010. (ANSUWCMA A101.1) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord type and color. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Hunter Douglas; Product Macro aluminum blinds: www.hunterdouglas.com. 2. Levolor Contract; Product Mark I: www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full -width headrail with full -width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA A100.1. B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre -finished aluminum; radiused slat corners, with manufacturing buns removed. 1. Color: Match louver color specified for vertical blinds, subject to approval of Architect. C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Head Rail: Pre -finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats E. Bottom Rail: Pre -finished, formed steel with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Color: Same as headrail. F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop. G. Control Wand: Extruded aluminum; round shape. H. Headrail Attachment: Ceiling brackets. 12 21 13 - Horizontal Louver Blinds 10/2212013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 L Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Determine sizes by field measurement. B. Fabricate blinds to cover window frames completely. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. End of Section 12 21 13 - Horizontal Louver Blinds 10/2212013 Page 2 of 2 Section 12 2113 SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL & DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Digital Occupancy and Sensor Control 2. Emergency Lighting Control (if applicable) B. Related Section 1. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices 2. Section 265100 — Interior Lighting C. Control Intent — Control Intent includes, but is not limited to: 1. Defaults and initial calibration settings for such items as time delay, sensitivity, fade rates, etc. 2. Initial sensor and switching zones 3. Initial time switch settings 4. Task lighting and receptacle controls 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) B. Underwriter Laboratories of Canada (ULC) C. International Electrotechnical Commission D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. 916 — Energy Management Equipment. 2. 924 — Emergency Lighting Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -1 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION A. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment: Digital Occupancy Sensors — Self -configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications. 2. Digital Switches — Self -configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. 3. Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU) — allows a standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building 1.4 LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS A. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum application of lighting controls as follows: Space Control Requirements — Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual -ON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic -ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual -ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, open plan system and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line -of -sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner -mounted sensors and Manual -ON switches. 2. Task Lighting / Plug Loads — Provide automatic shut off of non essential plug loads and task lighting in all spaces except toilet rooms and storerooms. Provide Automatic -ON of plug loads whenever spaces are occupied. For spaces with multiple occupants a single shut off consistent with the overhead lighting may be used for the area. B. Additional controls: Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants or where line -of -sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner -mounted with manual -on switches. 2. Conference, meeting, training, auditoriums, and multipurpose rooms shall have controls that allow for independent control of each local control zone. Rooms larger than 300 square feet shall instead have at least four (4) pre-set lighting scenes unless otherwise specified. Occupancy / vacancy sensors shall be provided to extinguish all lighting in the space. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, and the product data specified below at the same time as a package. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed (standard diagrams will not be accepted). 2. Scale drawing for each area showing exact location of each sensor, room controller, and digital switch. 3. Provide lighting control panel (LCP) schedule based on the lighting plan. Schedule shall include circuit number and panelboard. C. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. D. Include data for each device which: 1. Indicates where sensor is proposed to be installed. 2. Prove that the sensor is suitable for the proposed application. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Minimum (5) five years experience in manufacture of lighting controls. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment: 1. Ambient temperature: 00 to 40° C (320 to 104° F). 2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non -condensing. lirwv_vV:7_l011yj A. Provide a five year complete manufacturer's warranty on all products to be free of manufacturers' defects. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: 1. Provide 2 each product to be used for maintenance. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-3 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. WattStopper LC8-120/277 Volt Modular Contractor Panel with 16 NO relays, minimum and equipped with photocell and time -clock, or approved equal by Copper Lighting Control. 2.2 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Ceiling: DT-300/DT-305 series. B. Wall: CX -100/105 Series. 2.3 COMBINATION OCCUPANCY SENSOR/WALL SWITCHES A. WattStopper product numbers: CU -250 2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Emergency Lighting Control Unit — A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include: 1. 120/277 volts, 60 Hz., 20 amp ballast rating 2. Push to test button 3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface B. WattStopper Product Numbers: ELCU-100, ELCU-200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. When using wire for connections other than the DLM local network (Cat 5e with RJ -45 connectors), provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination. Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements B. Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise indicated. C. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -4 1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after occupant leaves area. D. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including room by room description including: 1. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.) 2. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.) E. Re -commissioning — After 30 days from occupancy re -calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner's Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of re -commissioning activity. 3.2 FACTORY COMMISSIONING A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized representative who will verify a complete fully functional system. B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with ten working days written notice of the system startup and adjustment date. C. Upon completion of the system commissioning the factory -authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 16.13 Trenching PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 3123 16.13 A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 3123 23 - Fill B. Section 32 12 16 Bituminous Concrete Paving. C. City of Newport Beach Standard Specifications and Standard Drawings, dated 2003. D. "GREENBOOK" Standard Specifications for Public Works, 2006 edition. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-1b) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2010 B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. D. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances, containing no rocks or lumps over 2 inches in greatest dimension. B. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1 inch in the upper 12 inches of fill. C. Cohesionless Material Used for Structural Backfill: Provide sand free from organic material and other foreign matter, and as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. D. Bedding material shall meet the minimum standards listed below: 1. 3/4" Crushed Gravel. E. Slurry backfill where required shall be 2 sack unless otherwise specified. F. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Meeting the approval of the engineer of record. 4. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL. 3123 16.13 - Trenching 10/2212013 Page 1 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 3.02 GENERAL Section 3123 16.13 A. Utilities: 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to trenching. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted. 3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Section, immediately notify the Engineer and secure instructions. 5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instructions are received from the Engineer. B. Protection of Persons and Property: 1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of the Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section. C. Dewatering: I. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and substructure work to an approved location by pumps, drains, and other approved methods. 2. Keep excavations and site construction area free from water. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times. 3.03 TRENCHING A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Provide sheeting and shoring necessary for protection of the Work and for the safety of personnel. 1. Prior to backfilling, remove all sheeting. 2. Do not permit sheeting to remain in the trenches except when, in the opinion of the Architect, field conditions or the type of sheeting or methods of construction such as use of concrete bedding are such as to make removal of sheeting impracticable. In such cases, the Architect may permit portions of sheeting to be cut off and remain in the trench. C. Open Cut: 1. Excavate for utilities by open cut. 2. If conditions at the site prevent such open cut, and if approved by the Engineer, trenching may be used. 3123 16.13 - Trenching 10/2212013 Page 2 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 16.13 3. Short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the conductor can be installed safely and backfill can be compacted properly into such tunnel. 4. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the limits of normal excavation lines in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects, backfill the voids remaining after removal of the objects as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 5. When the void is below the subgrade for the utility bedding, use suitable earth materials and compact to the relative compaction directed by the soil engineer, but in no case to a relative compaction less than 90%. 6. When the void is in the side of the utility trench or open cut, use suitable earth or sand compacted, or consolidated as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, but in no case to a relative compaction less than 90%. 7. Remove boulders and other interfering objects, and backfill voids left by such removals, at no additional cost to the City. 8. Excavating for appurtenances: a. Excavate for manholes and similar structures to a distance sufficient to leave at least 12" clear between outer surfaces and the embankment or shoring that may be used to hold and protect the banks. b. excavation beyond such appurtenances that has not been directed will be considered unauthorized. Fill with sand, gravel, or lean concrete as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer, and at no additional cost to the City. D. Trench to the minimum width necessary for proper installation of the utility, with sides as nearly vertical as possible. Accurately grade the bottom to provide uniform bearing for the utility. E. Depressions: 1. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after the trench has been graded. Provide uniform bearing for the pipe on prepared bottom of the trench. 2. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depth indicated or specified. 3. Where rock is encountered, excavate rock to a minimum over depth of 4" below the trench depth indicated or specified. F. Where utility runs traverse public property or are subject to governmental or utility company jurisdiction, provide depth, bedding, over, and other requirements as set forth by legally constituted authority having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the depth shown in the Contract Documents. G. Cover: I. Provide minimum trench depth indicated below to maintain a minimum 36" cover over the top of the installed storm drain. H. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. L Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. J. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. K. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. L. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. M. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re -use from site. N. Stockpile excavated material to be re -used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 3122 00. 3123 16.13 - Trenching 10/2212013 Page 3 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 O. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.04 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT Section 3123 16.13 A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.05 BEDDING A. Bedding for trenches is that material supporting, surrounding, and extending to 1 foot above the top of the pipe. Where concrete is specified to cover the pipe, the top of the concrete shall be considered as the top of the bedding. B. Where it becomes necessary to remove boulders or other interfering objects at subgrade for bedding, any void below such subgrade shall be filled with the bedding material. C. Bedding material, approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and meeting the minimum standards listed in Section 2.01.E above, shall be deposited and compacted to 90% relative compaction in the trench uniformly on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 12 inches over the top of the pipe. For pipes larger than 48" diameter, bedding material shall be placed up to spring -line. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. For non-metallic lines install a magnetic tracer tape at 12 inch maximum depth over top of pipe. C. When flexible pipe (PVC, HDPE etc.) is used, pipe shall be backfilled to the spring line, compacted and backfill tested prior to completing initial backfill. D. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. F. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. G. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2.5 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. I. Correct areas that are over -excavated. 1. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. At the upper foot of subgrade beneath pavement and in all aggregate base: minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density. K. Reshape and re -compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.07 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Utilities lying parallel to stuctures and within the influence of the footings shall be backfilled with slurry. 3123 16.13 - Trenching 10/2212013 Page 4 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.08 TOLERANCES Section 3123 16.13 A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. End of Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching 10/2212013 Page 5 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3123 16.13 - Trenching 10/2212013 Page 6 of 6 Section 3123 16.13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 23 Fill PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 3123 23 A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for paving. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches to utility main connections. B. Section 02810 Irrigation System. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-1b) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2010 B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/113 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. D. ASTM D 2488 - Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual -Manual Procedure); 2000. E. ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2010. F. ASTM D 4829 - Standard Test Method for Expansion Index of Soils; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01- General Requirements - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. 1. Provide Certification that import material meets these specifications. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill and backfill materials. 1. Engineered Fill: a. Non -expansive soil consisting of relatively granular material. b. Free of organic and inorganic debris. c. Shall have a Plasticity Index (P.L) of 15 or less. 2. On-site soil may be used as engineered fill if the meet the engineering fill criteria and are approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. 3123 23 - Fill 10/2212013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 23 3. Import soil may be used as engineered fill if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Import material must be approved prior to bringing to the site. 4. Fill material shall have a minimum R -value of 66. 5. All fill and backfill material shall consist exclusively of nonexpansive material. a. Materials fall into the GM, GC, SM, SC, SP, or SW categories (ASTM D2488-00). b. Materials shall have an expansion index of 10 or less (ASTM D 4829-03). 6. Rocks in fill material shall be placed in a sufficient soil matrix to ensure that voids caused by nesting of the rocks will not occur and that the fill can be properly compacted. 7. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1 inch in the upper 12 inch of fill or embankment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cutout soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Backfill excavations as promptly as progress of the Work permits, but not until: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade. 2. Inspecting, testing, approving, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Concrete formwork is removed. 4. Shoring and bracing are removed, and voids have been backfilled with satisfactory materials. 5. Trash and debris have been removed. B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Fill shall be placed in level lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness. E. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. G. Spread and thoroughly blend all fill materials, including backfill, after achieving proper moisture content. H. Prior to compaction, bring fill to proper moisture content (+/- 3% of optimum) by aeration or moistening. I. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum dry density. J. The upper 12 inches of subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density. K. Subgrade should be firm and unyielding when proof rolled with heavy, rubber -tired grading equipment. L. Slope grade away from building minimum 2.5 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. 3123 23 - Fill 10/2212013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 M. Correct areas that are over -excavated. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches 1. Bedding: Use Fill Type 3/4" Crushed Gravel. 2. Cover with fill per City standard. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.05 TOLERANCES Section 3123 23 A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 COMPACTING A. Control soil compaction during construction to provide the minimum percentage of density specified for each area as determined according to ASTM D 1557. B. Provide not less than the following maximum density of soil material compacted at optimum moisture content for the actual density of each layer of soil material in place, and as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Pavements: a. Compact the top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density for cohesive soil material. 3.07 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture -conditioned before compacting, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compacting operations. B. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compacting to the specified density. C. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture -density relation tests approved by the Geotechnical Engineer 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01- General Requirements - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. D. Secure the Geotechnical Engineer's inspection and approval of subgrades and fill layers before subsequent construction is permitted thereon. E. Provide at least the following tests to the approval of the Geotechnical Engineer. I. At paved areas, at least one field density test for every 2,000 square feet of paved area, but not less than three tests. 2. ht each compacted fill layer, one field density test for every 2,000 square feet of overlaying paved area, but not less than three tests. 3123 23 - Fill 10/2212013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 23 F. If, in the Geotechnical Engineer's opinion, base on reports of the testing laboratory, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compacting and testing under the provisions of Division 01- General Requirements - Quality Requirements. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. End of Section 3123 23 - Fill 10/2212013 Page 4 of 4 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING EXPLORATION AND ANALYSIS PROPOSED RENOVATION NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS 70 NEWPORT PIER NEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA Prepared For: RRM Design Group 232 Avenida Fabricante, Suite 112 San Clemente, California 92672 Project No. 10148.001 May 15, 2013 4 Leighton Consulting, Inc. A LEIGHTON GROUP COMPANY 4 Leighton Consulting, Inc. A LEIGHTON GROUP COMPANY May 15, 2013 Project No. 10148.001 RRM Design Group 232 Avenida Fabricante, Suite 112 San Clemente, California 92672 Attention: Mr. David Chacon, Project Manager Subject: Geotechnical Engineering Exploration and Analysis Proposed Renovation to the Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters 70 Newport Pier, Newport Beach, California INTRODUCTION In accordance with your request, Leighton Consulting, Inc. has performed a geotechnical exploration and engineering analysis for the proposed renovation to existing Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters located at the Newport Pier. This report presents the results of our exploration and analysis and presents recommendations for design and construction. PURPOSE AND SCOPE The purpose of this study was to provide recommendations for use in design and construction of the improvements planned for the renovation that include geotechnical considerations. The scope of our work included the following tasks: Review available in-house literature pertinent to the site to assist in evaluating site conditions. Review of the relevant plans of the existing structure that were prepared for original construction and subsequent building expansion as provided by the project structural engineer. 17781 Cowan ■ Irvine, CA 92614-6009 949.250.1421 ■ Fax 949.250.1114 ■ www.leightonarouo.com 10148.001 Review of the preliminary plans and details of the proposed improvements to the existing structure that are affected by geotechnical aspects of the site. Perform geotechnical subsurface exploration by advancing two test borings. Laboratory testing to evaluate relevant geotechnical engineering properties of the soils. Perform geotechnical engineering analysis of the collected data. Prepare this report summarizing our findings, conclusions and recommendations. PROJECT DESCRIPTION Site Location The Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters is located on the beach adjacent to the Newport Beach Pier, between McFadden Place and 20th Street in Newport Beach, California. The location of the facility is shown in Figure 1. At the time of field exploration, the facility consisted of a two-story building that appeared to be of wood frame construction. The long dimension of the building is oriented in a northeast - southwest direction. An earthen berm approximately 4 feet in height was located between the southwestern end of the building and the active shoreline. The berm was fortified by a zone of cobble and boulder riprap to provide erosion protection. Existing Building Review of the foundation plan for the building indicates original construction in the mid - 1960's. The original building was expanded in the late 1980's. Selected sheets from the structural plan sets for the original construction and the addition are included in Appendix B. The floor plan configuration of the building indicated the southwestern region is primarily used for office and workspace along with restroom and locker room facilities while the remainder generally consists of a vehicle garage. Structural plans developed for building construction indicates the foundation system consists of three types of pile foundations: driven timber piling; jetted piles; and concrete piles. The plans indicate the driven and jetted piles are 12 inches in diameter while the concrete piles are 18 inches in diameter. The pile lengths are depicted on the plans as being approximately 13 to 15 feet for the driven timber piles; 25 to 29 feet for the jetted piles and 23 to 27 feet for the concrete piles. Pile locations shown on the plans indicate -2- Leighton 10148.001 a regular rectangular array within the office and locker room region with the piles of the garage area located along the continuous exterior walls with a single pile at the pilaster between the bay doors. Pile spacing within the office/locker room region is typically 11'8" feet by 11'11" as shown on the plans. The original structure was expanded by constructing an addition along the exterior walls of the garage region of the building. Access to the addition was created by an opening in the rear wall of the garage. The foundation system for the addition is depicted on the plans to consist of 18 -inch diameter concrete piles 30 feet in length with the top of the piles 4'/z feet below finished floor elevation. Proposed Development The proposed building renovation primarily consists of modifications to the building interior. The primary geotechnical aspect of the proposed renovation is the need for new foundations to support one or two new columns at Grid Line locations G-1.2 and G- 3. A copy of the architectural floor plans is included in Appendix B for reference. The structural loads to be supported by the new column(s) are relatively light no greater than 15 kips as indicated by the project structural engineer. In addition, the structural engineer reported no significant lateral load demand was expected for the new foundations that will support the columns. Review of the original foundation plan (Sheet S-1; Appendix B) indicates an existing pile foundation is located at current Grid Line F/3. The details of the existing piles are difficult to discern from the quality of the available plan, but the pile appears to be approximately 15 feet in length and is reported by the structural engineer to be approximately 2.5 feet (center -to -center) from the foundation that supports the existing column. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION Field exploration consisted of initially conducting a site reconnaissance to mark the proposed boring locations and to evaluate the proposed boring locations with respect to access for drilling equipment and subsurface structures. Underground Service Alert (USA) was then notified of the marked locations. The locations of the test borings were somewhat restricted by the existing structure. -3- Leighton 10148.001 Subsurface exploration consisted of a total of two (2) test borings advanced by a truck- mounted drilling rig using conventional rotary drilling techniques and 3'/4 inch LD hollow stem augers. The test borings were each advanced to a depth of 20 feet below the current grade. The test boring logs are included in Appendix B. The approximate locations and depths of the borings are shown on Figure 2, Boring Location Map. The test borings were logged by a member of our technical staff during the field exploration. Soil samples were collected at regular intervals by conducting the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) in general accordance with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Test Methods D1586 and D3550. The ASTM D3550 test method pertains to the modified California sampler which is used to collect larger diameter relatively undisturbed samples. The number of blows required to drive the sampler using a 140 -pound weight falling 30 inches for an 18 -inch drive length is shown on the boring logs in the 'Blows per Six Inches" column (Appendix C). The combined number of blows to drive the sampler the final 12 inches is referred to as the N -value. Bulk samples were also obtained from the borings. Each soil sample collected was reviewed and described in general conformance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The soil descriptions were entered on the boring logs. All samples were sealed and packaged for transportation to our laboratory. After completion of drilling, borings were backfilled with soil cuttings. LABORATORY TESTING Laboratory tests were performed on representative samples to verify the field classification of the recovered samples and to determine geotechnical properties of the subsurface materials. The following tests were performed: In-situ moisture content and density (ASTM D2216 and D2987); Sieve Analysis (ASTM D421); Direct Shear (ASTM D3080); Collapse (ASTM D4546); and Corrosivity (DOT Test 417, 422 and 532/643). -4- Leighton 10148.001 All laboratory tests were performed in general conformance with ASTM or State of California Standard Methods. The results of the in-situ moisture and density tests are presented on our geotechnical boring logs (Appendix C). The results of other laboratory tests are presented in Appendix D of this report. GEOLOGIC AND SUBUSFACE CONDITIONS Site Geology The Newport Pier is located on the seaward side of a natural coastal barrier island formed by littoral ocean currents at the seaward edge of San Diego Creek drainage within Newport Bay coastal estuary. The Newport Bay estuary received sediment from San Diego Creek and the lower reaches of the Santa Ana River, however, due to extensive widespread flooding in 1915-1916, the Santa Ana River realigned its course to the west. Regionally, the Site is located at the broad southern margin of the Los Angeles Basin, which culminates abruptly with the Newport -Inglewood Uplift. This uplift is characterized by broadly warped coastal mesas of late Miocene to early Pleistocene marine sediments and late Pleistocene marine terrace deposits, which, are deeply incised by the antecedent ancestral Santa Ana River system of latest Pleistocene to earliest Holocene. Soil Stratigraphy The field exploration indicates the pavement section encountered at the test boring locations consisted of 4 to 5 inches of asphaltic concrete underlain by approximately 4 inches of coarse granular base course. The encountered soil consisted of loose to medium dense silty sand to a depth of approximately 8 to 9 feet where dense sandy silt was encountered to a depth of approximately 14 feet. The soil below the silt and extending to at least the maximum depth explored of 20 feet consisted of dense relative density coarsely graded sands. Groundwater Groundwater was encountered at a depth approximately 6 feet below existing grade at the boring locations. Groundwater is expected to be influenced by tidal fluctuations due to the proximity of the site to the shore and may, therefore, periodically exist at shallower or greater depth. -5- Leighton 10148.001 Historical groundwater data presented in the Seismic Hazard Zone Report for the Newport Beach Quadrangle (CDMG, 1997) indicates the historical high water table at a depth less than 10 feet below grade. Soil Corrosivity In general, soil environments that are detrimental to concrete have high concentrations of soluble sulfates and/or pH values of less than 5.5. Section 4.3 of ACI 318, as referred in the 2010 CBC, provides specific guidelines for the concrete mix -design when the soluble sulfate content of the soil exceeds 0.1 percent by weight or 1,000 parts per million (ppm). The minimum amount of chloride ions in the soil environment that are corrosive to steel, either in the form of reinforcement protected by concrete cover or plain steel substructures, such as steel pipes, is 500 ppm per California Test 532. Concentrations of chloride ions above the stated concentration or other characteristics such as soil resistivity or redox potential may warrant special corrosion protection measures. For screening purposes, one representative bulk sample of the onsite soils at shallow depth (within upper 5 feet) from Boring No. LB -1 was subjected to a suite of tests to evaluate the corrosivity of the soils that included soluble sulfate, chloride, pH and resistivity. The test results are included in Appendix D; a summary of the results and corresponding hazard levels are presented in the following Table 1. These limited test results indicate that the subsurface soils have "negligible" soluble sulfate contents and low chloride contents. The test results indicate the soils do not present a high corrosion potential to buried ferrous metal, but corrosive conditions are expected to exist below the water table. Table 1 — Summary of the Corrosivity Test Results Test Parameter Test Results General Classification of Hazard Water-soluble sulfate 0.0082 Negligible sulfate exposure to buried content percent by weight concrete (per ACI 318) Water-soluble chloride Non -corrosive to buried concrete 80 ppm Content (per Caltrans Specifications) pH 8.71 Acidic, relatively passive to buried metals Minimum resistivity Corrosive to buried ferrous pipes (in saturated condition) 6890 ohm -cm (per ASTM') 1 ASTM STP 1013 titled Effects of Soil Characteristics on Corrosion (February, 1989). -6- Leighton 10148.001 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS The conclusions and recommendations subsequently discussed have been based upon the engineering characteristics of the materials encountered during the field exploration and their anticipated behavior during and after construction. The following recommendations are provided for use in design of new foundations to support new load bearing columns required as part of the building renovation. The recommendations are based upon available subsurface data and our understanding of the project at this time and the anticipation that we will be allowed the opportunity to review final project plans and review field conditions during construction and make revisions to the recommendations as warranted. Earthwork The proposed building renovation is not expected to include any significant grading or alteration of site grades. However, some excavation activities may be necessary to complete renovation activities such as utility installation and construction of non- structural site improvements such as new flatwork. Subgrades for new flatwork should be properly prepared prior to construction and utility trenches should be properly backfilled. Site Preparation: Prior to construction of new exterior improvements supported on grade, the areas should be cleared of all existing structures. Existing utility lines should also be removed or properly rerouted if they interfere with the proposed construction. Cavities resulting from removal of the existing underground structures and lines should be removed to expose competent material before being properly backfilled and compacted. Suborade Preparation and Evaluation: Subgrades for new improvements and in areas where excavation was performed should be reviewed by a representative of the geotechnical engineer prior to placement of fill to support new improvements. Soils that are disturbed by the demolition and/or excavation activities should be either removed to a stable subgrade or recompacted in-place if possible. Excavation of soils adjacent to the existing foundations (or within the zone of footing influence) includes special considerations to maintain stable conditions and reduce the potential for initiating damage and the need for additional cosmetic repairs as part of renovation. Distortion to existing foundations can be reduced by maintaining specific minimum clearance from foundations along with proper excavation sidewall slopes for -7 4T - Leighton 10148.001 stability. Foundation underpinning may be necessary where excavations are required adjacent to existing shallow spread footings. Fill Placement and Compaction: Fill soils should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 inches, moisture -conditioned as necessary to optimum or slightly above, and compacted to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM Test Method D1557. Any imported fill soil should be approved by the geotechnical engineer prior to placement as fill that will support new improvements. Seismic Design Parameters The following data may be considered for the seismic analysis of the proposed structure based upon the 2010 edition of the California Building Code: SEISMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS 2010 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE Site Class Table 1613.5.2 D Spectral Response Acceleration 0.2 -second SS Figure 1613.5(3) 1.874 1.0 -second S, Figure 1613.5(4) 0.709 Site Coefficient (Fa) Table 1613.5.3(1) 1.0 Site Coefficient (F„) Table 1613.5.3(2) 1.5 Spectral Design ResponseSD, Equation 16-39 1.249 Spectral Design Response Sp1 Equation 16-40 0.709 Foundation Recommendations Structural load demands of new foundations to support the column(s) associated with the proposed building renovation will be relatively light, reported to be less than 15 kips. The location of these column(s) relative to the existing structure includes consideration of the potential effect of differential settlement due to the short span, particularly at Grid Lines G-3 and F-3. In consideration that the existing building is supported by a deep foundation system consisting of different types of piles, a similar type of deep foundation system is recommended for the proposed renovation to reduce the potential for differential settlement. However, due to the anticipated mobilization costs associated with pile driving, the use of shallow drilled piers may prove to be a more economical foundation alternative for the installation of one or two foundation elements. The -8- Leighton 10148.001 recommendations subsequently presented in this report focus on a drilled pier foundation system. Other foundation alternatives may be feasible with respect to geotechnical aspects of the site and can be specifically addressed through an addendum to this report if economically feasible means are identified and if requested by the client. Axial Capacity The axial capacity of a drilled pier foundation system was evaluated using the computer software package SHAFT (v6.0) (Ensoft, 2007) which computes the capacity of drilled piers on the basis of the methodology developed by Reese and O'Neil (FHWA, 1988, 1999). The results of the analysis are summarized in Figure 3 which presents allowable axial compressive capacity with depth for a minimum on -center spacing of 2'/z diameters for drilled piers of 18 -inch diameter. The capacities are based upon a factor of safety of 3 for shaft friction. Shaft friction capacity is recommended to be reduced by 50 percent for calculating uplift resistance. The output of the computations is included in Appendix E of this report. The allowable shaft resistance indicated in Figure 3 is based solely on the strength characteristics of the soils. The structural capacity of the drilled piers should be evaluated considering the compressive and tensile forces applied to the piers. The proposed building renovation may require additional structural load application to existing foundation elements. The total load supported by existing foundations should not exceed the design load capacity indicated in prior project plans. Load application to existing foundations will result in some additional settlement. If design capacity is not exceeded, the amount of new settlement is anticipated to be within tolerable levels, but some cosmetic repairs may be required as part of the renovation due to settlement that will occur as additional load capacity is mobilized. Lateral Load Resistance Passive earth pressure developed adjacent to new pier foundations can be assumed to have a triangular distribution (equivalent fluid) that increases linearly with depth. The lateral load capacity may be calculated on the basis of an equivalent passive fluid pressure of 240 psf/foot to a maximum of 2,500 psf beginning 3 feet below existing grade. -9- Leighton 10148.001 Settlement Estimate The post -construction total settlement at the top of the pier is estimated to be less than Yz inch based upon geotechnical considerations and use of proper construction techniques to prevent caving and segregation of concrete during placement. Construction Considerations The drilling operations associated with drilled piers construction are recommended to be observed and evaluated by a representative of the geotechnical engineer to allow further evaluation of the actual subsurface conditions and verify proper embedment depth. A minimum drilled shaft diameter of 18 inches is recommended to help eliminate arching of concrete and possible void formation. If possible, the boreholes should be free of groundwater and sloughed soils that may accumulate in the interim between drilling and the placement of concrete. To ensure proper depth and diameter throughout the full length of the drilled shafts, a clean-out bucket may be required prior to setting reinforcing steel and placing concrete if casing is not used as part of construction. Pier construction below the water table will require the concrete placement by tremie in which the tremie pipe is positioned at the bottom of the borehole and gradually withdrawn during concrete placement. The subsurface conditions indicate the soils primarily consist of granular soils with groundwater at a depth of 6 feet below grade at the time of exploration. Borehole stability will require the use of temporary casing or drilling mud. Care should be used in the installation/removal of temporary casing and/or the use of slurry for borehole stability to reduce the potential for adversely affecting the frictional resistance of the soils and thereby reduce the load capacity of the piles. A minimum concrete head of 5 feet is recommended to be maintained at all times during the removal of the temporary casing to prevent caving. Concrete should be placed at a 6 -inch slump when long reinforcing steel is used. Concrete placement by tremie is recommended to avoid striking rebar, avoid segregation of cement and aggregate, and allow displacement of water that may accumulate. The construction of the drilled shafts is recommended to be performed in accordance with American Concrete Institute specifications (ACI 336.1-01). _10 - Leighton 10148.001 Drilling of the pier boreholes may encounter some reduction in drilling rate where the dense silt layer encountered at depths of 8 to 10 feet and other difficulties may be encountered if the boreholes are extended greater than 20 feet below existing grade. Temporary Excavation and Shoring Design All temporary excavations, including utility trenches, elevator pit excavation, and other excavations should be performed in accordance with project plans, specifications, and all OSHA requirements. Excavations 5 feet or deeper should be laid back or shored in accordance with OSHA requirements before personnel are allowed to enter. Typical cantilever shoring should be designed based on an active fluid pressure of 30 pcf, assuming level ground above the shoring and excavation above the water table. If excavations are braced at the top and at specific design intervals, the active pressure may then be approximated by a trapezoidal soil pressure distribution with the maximum pressure per foot of width equal to 20H, where H is equal to the depth of the excavation being shored. The distribution of pressure increases from zero at top and increases linearly with depth to the recommended maximum pressure at a depth of 0.25H which remains constant to a depth of 0.75H and then decreases linearly to zero at the bottom. Excavation below the water table will require dewatering to be implemented prior to initiating exaction activities to lower the water table a sufficient depth below the proposed bottom of the excavation to ensure stability and safe working conditions. The depth of water table drawdown will be a function of the planned depth of excavation below the water table. No surcharge loads should be permitted within a horizontal distance equal to the height of cut or 5 feet, whichever is greater from the top of the cut, unless the cut is shored appropriately. Excavations that extend below an imaginary plane inclined at 45 degrees below the edge of any adjacent existing foundation should be properly shored to maintain support of the adjacent structure. During construction, the soil conditions should be regularly evaluated to verify that conditions are as anticipated. The contractor shall be responsible for providing an individual designated as the `competent person" required by OSHA, standards to evaluate soil conditions. Close coordination between the designated individual and the geotechnical engineer should be maintained to facilitate construction while providing safe excavations. -11- Leighton 10148.001 Cement Type and Corrosion Protection Laboratory testing is recommended to be performed to evaluate the sulfate content and corrosive potential of the soils. Based on the results of such testing, concrete mix designs are recommended to comply with Table 4.3.1 of ACI 318R-05. If the soils are fond to be corrosive to iron, steel and other metallic elements embedded in soils, special measures for corrosion control such as cathodic protection, corrosion allowance, or use of protective coatings or sleeves, will be required. Leighton does not practice corrosion engineering. An engineer that specializes in corrosion protection should be consulted to provide specific recommendations, if warranted. Geotechnical Observation and Testing of Earthwork Operations This report was based in part on data obtained from a limited field exploration. Such information is, by nature, incomplete. The nature of many sites is such that differing soil or geologic conditions can be present within small distances. Changes in subsurface conditions can and do occur over time. Therefore, the findings, conclusions, and recommendations presented in this report are only valid if Leighton has the opportunity to observe the subsurface conditions during construction to confirm that our preliminary data are representative for the site. Based upon our understanding of the proposed project and the magnitude of structural load to be supported by new foundations, the depth of exploration performed for this geotechnical exploration is anticipated to be adequate. However, if pier tips extend to depths greater than 20 feet below grade, our office should be contacted to review the proposed pier foundations and determine if supplemental field exploration will be necessary. Leighton should also review the appropriate plans and specifications, when available, to comment on the geotechnical aspects. Construction is recommended to be performed under the observation and testing of Leighton at the following stages: During the drilling of the pier foundations; • During subgrade preparation for new improvements supported on grade; During fill placement; and When geotechnical conditions are encountered during construction that vary form the conditions described in this report. -12- Leighton 10148.001 LIMITATIONS The conclusions and recommendations presented in this report have been based upon the generally accepted principles and practices of geotechnical engineering utilized by other competent engineers at this time and place. No other warranty is either expressed or implied. The conclusions and recommendations presented in this report have been based upon the subsurface conditions encountered at discrete and widely spaced locations and at specific intervals below the ground surface. The recommendations presented in this report are not considered to be valid unless Leighton has the opportunity to review field conditions during construction to verify consistency between actual conditions with the conditions upon which the recommendations are based. Due to the inherent variance in soils conditions, variability may be encountered during construction. Where encountered during construction, such variances should be brought to our attention to determine the impact upon the recommendations presented in this report. This report has been prepared for the use of our client and their design professional designees. The report may not be used by others or for other projects without the express written consent of our client and our firm. -13- Leighton 10148.001 CLOSING The opportunity to be of continued service to you is sincerely appreciated. If you have any questions regarding this report or if we may be of assistance, please do not hesitate to call. JEH/VPI/gv Respectfully submitted, NO. 2W }mjj LEIGHTON CONSULTING, INC. John E. Haertle. PE. GE 2352 Associate Engineer Vincent P. Ip, PE, G 522 Senior Principal Engineer Attachments: Figure 1 — Site Location Map Figure 2 — Boring Location Plan Figure 3 — Axial Capacity of Drilled Pier Foundation Appendix A — References Appendix B — Selected Plan Sheets Appendix C — Test Boring logs Appendix D — Laboratory Test Results Appendix E — Drilled Pier Capacity Analysis Distribution: (4) Addressee -14- Leighton Y c '$✓ ol �. ,%':.Q � I T 1T 0 30 SCALE Proj: 10148.001 Eng/Geol: JEH/JAR Scale: 1"=30' Date: 05/2013 Drafted By: BOT cneckea ey: BQT I I RAITI.0.1 211-0.1. 11' 1 REd ..RN. LocITION-1.-W lQ-Ia-+a slslaeA.l I1.1..a 11 1-11 BORING LOCATION MAP Proposed Newport Beach Lifegard Headquarters Rehabilitation Newport Pier Newport Beach, California LB -2 Approximate Location of Leighton Consulting Boring T.D.20' G.W.06.6' FIGURE 2 ♦ LL iu'n�m 0 1 0 Newport Beach lifeguard Headquarters Renovation - Allowable Shaft Resistance Skin Friction w/F.S.(tons) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 to 11 12 13 14 15 'ITTf-f�P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _L _L---- L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _____________________________________ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ____ II_I_I_I_1_1_1_1_1_ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Dia=1.5 R Figure 3 Allowable Shaft Resistance PN 10148.001 APPENDIX A 10148.001 Id\„A04IQKC-Al References California Division of Mines and Geology, CDMG 1997, Revised 2001, Seismic Hazard Zone Report For the Newport Beach and Anaheim 7.5 -Minute Quadrangles, orange County, California, Seismic Hazard Zone Report 003. Ensoft, Inc., 2007, SHAFT v6.0, A Program for the Study of Drilled Shafts Under Axial Loads, User Manual. 2010, LPILE v.6.0.8, A Program for the Analysis of Deep Foundations Under Axial Loading, User Manual. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), 1988, Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and Design Methods, FHWA-HI-88-042, Lymon C. Reese and Michael W. O'Neill, August 1988. Federal Highway Administration FHWA (2010). Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 10 - Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and LRFD Design Methods. FHWA- NHI-10-016. Reese, Lymon C. and William Van Impe, 2001, Single Piles and Pile Groups under Lateral Loading, A.A. Balkema Publishers, 2001. APPENDIX B I u`l° f ll' � * I , .Y p N� as r1 d J� xr.un x,_.v �_ •.i.r v..mw..nr ,l.rC.1 r4` _4- I , .Y IN 1 ca m �uncn� on ��en � t tl _ . _ - _— • bac. N : 97 R .!, ' I� -•r -�� � � I ��.t1 {�, -ice 'f'___�4 _ ,N� n+ �. _ 4 � � •ate n ... �� 0 L _� e �, IalA- 1= ,db -d,� +...,. '. te d._ E�� €_ A• .I �)�� xr.un x,_.v �_ •.i.r v..mw..nr ,l.rC.1 r4` _4- lil � w o - Ir a Ir u (7 W W IN 1 ca m �uncn� on ��en � t tl _ . _ - _— • bac. N : 97 R .!, ' I� -•r -�� � � I ��.t1 {�, -ice 'f'___�4 _ ,N� n+ �. _ 4 � � •ate n ... �� 0 L _� e �, IalA- 1= ,db -d,� +...,. '. te d._ E�� €_ A• .I �)�� ----------- ----- - -------- n r,\ n n Q,\ n 17,1111010-1 CD) L u`�z 1Il�F 4TjF-11 ;�I�DCQM ILI I m A LIFI- �=� I ILIF �-u m 7A X\x x 114 6Hr. ef 11 :1 2 2 3 �4\ vel �7 - -I I i I I I I I C E F. I \ I I � I I >'I I / � I i (E) FIRST AID STATION 101 - I t \ I L --L- 1'1\ —L_ ■ fi- v (E) MEN'S RR &,' WH LOCKERRM,' + ++ ;�- i L+— \ / \ T g --� (E) CORRIDOR I (E) ST / 102 VIII 1( (E) SQUAD ROOM 1107 i I I i 1 1.1 1.2 2 3 4 5 GROUND FLOOR EXISTING/ DEMO PLAN A-5.0 A-2.0 1/8"=I' -O" (E) GARAGE 110 (E) GARAGE ADDITION 106 (E) SCUBA STORAGE ---I 108 Ti Ti (E) ELEC &— NSFORMER RM 109 B G D rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy' 3765 South Higuera St., Ste. 102, San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 P: (805) 543-1794 1 F: (805) 543-4609 1 www.rrmdesign.com ACrIbmla CGWatianIVNDMon"g y,eeTited YClIM I Jerry MrdUel PE#36895,L5F62161JNIFBha IA#2M THE INCLUDED DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, IDEAS, DESIGNS AND ARRANGEMENTS REPRESENTED THEREBY ARE AND SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF FIRM DESIGN GROUP AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK OR PROJECT OTHER THAN THE SPECIFIED PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED AND DEVELOPED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF RRM DESIGN GROUP. VISUAL CONTACT WITH THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL CONSTITUTE CONCLUSIVE EVIDENCE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THESE RESTRICTIONS. SUBMITTAL OF THESE DOCUMENTS FOR PUBLIC AGENCY REVIEW SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED A WAIVER OF RRM DESIGN GROUP'S RIGHTS. RRM DESIGN GROUP COPYRIGHT 2013 RRM IS A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION GENERAL NOTES KEYNOTES LEGEND I� ��in�rKa�n�il<.rt�•nml WALLS TO BE DEMOLISHED. N **65% SUBMITTAL** GROUND FLOOR DEMO PLAN C-5130 BIBB REVISIONS REVIEWED: NEWPORT BEACH NO. BY DESCRIPTION DATE FY 2011-2012 SENIOR CIVIL ENGINEER LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS R.C.E. NO. 65329 REHABILITATION DATE PROJ MGR DC Et. DRAWN CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH A-2.0 CHECKED MH 03/22/13 DATE PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SHEET OF I� j----- n -1-4 --4 �. II \I (E) SQUAD ROOM 1107 i I I i 1 1.1 1.2 2 3 4 5 GROUND FLOOR EXISTING/ DEMO PLAN A-5.0 A-2.0 1/8"=I' -O" (E) GARAGE 110 (E) GARAGE ADDITION 106 (E) SCUBA STORAGE ---I 108 Ti Ti (E) ELEC &— NSFORMER RM 109 B G D rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy' 3765 South Higuera St., Ste. 102, San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 P: (805) 543-1794 1 F: (805) 543-4609 1 www.rrmdesign.com ACrIbmla CGWatianIVNDMon"g y,eeTited YClIM I Jerry MrdUel PE#36895,L5F62161JNIFBha IA#2M THE INCLUDED DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, IDEAS, DESIGNS AND ARRANGEMENTS REPRESENTED THEREBY ARE AND SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF FIRM DESIGN GROUP AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK OR PROJECT OTHER THAN THE SPECIFIED PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED AND DEVELOPED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF RRM DESIGN GROUP. VISUAL CONTACT WITH THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL CONSTITUTE CONCLUSIVE EVIDENCE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THESE RESTRICTIONS. SUBMITTAL OF THESE DOCUMENTS FOR PUBLIC AGENCY REVIEW SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED A WAIVER OF RRM DESIGN GROUP'S RIGHTS. RRM DESIGN GROUP COPYRIGHT 2013 RRM IS A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION GENERAL NOTES KEYNOTES LEGEND I� ��in�rKa�n�il<.rt�•nml WALLS TO BE DEMOLISHED. N **65% SUBMITTAL** GROUND FLOOR DEMO PLAN C-5130 BIBB REVISIONS REVIEWED: NEWPORT BEACH NO. BY DESCRIPTION DATE FY 2011-2012 SENIOR CIVIL ENGINEER LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS R.C.E. NO. 65329 REHABILITATION DATE PROJ MGR DC Et. DRAWN CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH A-2.0 CHECKED MH 03/22/13 DATE PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SHEET OF 2 A-5.0 1 1.1 1.2 2 3 4 5 1 A-6.1 A_ _ ------ ------ (N,) ---- (N) MENS RR & LOCKER A-6.0 RM- B _ 115 (V C C? \ c 1 o (N) LUNCH ROOM / (E) STOR ' I — 100 112 J� 2' - 1 1/8" (E) STAIRS 1 0 5'-23/8" 1'-51/4" #11111 �� N • / A-5.0 20� E F. A- .0 13 (N) WOMENS RR & LOCKER RM 116 14 A-7.0 15 2 (N) FIELD REPORT (N) OFFICE STATION 114 A-6..0 113 I 3 A-2.5 1 99'- 3 5/16" I� (E) GARAGE 110 I 2 A-2.5 2 -6.1 6 (E) GARAGE ADDITION 106 -(E) SCUBA STORAGE III �I p 10(J - SII --SII 1 1.1 1.2 2 3 4 5 6 2 A-5.1 1 1 GROUND FLOOR RECONSTRUCTION PLAN A-5.0 I A-2.1 1 1 /8" = V-0" I(E) ELEC & TRANSFORMER I 109 7 7 rrmdesigngroup III creating environments people enjoy' 3765 South Higuera St., Ste. 102, San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 P: (805) 543-1794 1 F: (805) 543-4609 1 www.rrmdesign.com ACaIlbmla CcrWaJionIVdDMan"g y,eFTLeel#CIIMI Jerry WMe! PE#36895,L5F62161Jeff FRhaq IA#2M q (B ;J G 3 A THE INCLUDED DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, IDEAS, DESIGNS AND ARRANGEMENTS REPRESENTED THEREBY ARE AND SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF FIRM DESIGN GROUP AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK OR PROJECT OTHER THAN THE SPECIFIED PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED AND DEVELOPED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF RRM DESIGN GROUP. VISUAL CONTACT WITH THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL CONSTITUTE CONCLUSIVE EVIDENCE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THESE RESTRICTIONS. SUBMITTAL OF THESE DOCUMENTS FOR PUBLIC AGENCY REVIEW SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED A WAIVER OF FIRM DESIGN GROUP'S RIGHTS. RRM DESIGN GROUP COPYRIGHT 2013 RRM IS A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION NO. I BY I DESCRIPTION GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. 2. REFER TO ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. 3. REFER TO MECHANICAL PLANS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. 4. REFER TO PLUMBING PLANS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. 5. ALL FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT IS BY OWNER AND IS SHOWN FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLY. 6. REFER TO FINISH PLAN AND SCHEDULE FOR INTERIOR WALL, CEILING AND FLOOR FINSH INFORMATION. 7. DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FRAMING UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 8. PROVIDE ADEQUATE BLOCKING IN WALLS FOR CABINETS AND OTHER WALL MOUNTED ACCESSORIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO HANDRAILS, SHELVING AND BATHROOM FIXTURES. 9. PROVIDE FIRE BLOCKING FOR WALL CAVITIES THAT EXCEED CBC HEIGHT LIMITATION. KEYNOTES LEGEND EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN EXTERIOR- 2 X 4 WOOD STUD W/ PLYWOOD SHEATHING AND SOLID VINYL SIDING TO MATCH EXISTING STYLE AND PATTERN. ONE LAYER GYPSUM WALL BOARD INTERIOR. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INTERIOR- 2 X 4 WOOD STUD W/ONE LAYER GYPSUM WALL BOARD EACH SIDE. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INTERIOR- 2 X 6 WOOD STUD W/ONE LAYER GYPSUM WALL BOARD EACH SIDE. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INTERIOR- MTL RESTROOM PARTITION. **65% SUBMITTAL** GROUND FLOOR RECONSTRUCTION PLAN C-5130 MENOMONEE REVISIONS REVIEWED: NEWPORT BEACH DATE FY 2011-2012 SENIOR CIVIL ENGINEER LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS R.C.E. NO. 65329 REHABILITATION DATE PROJ MGR DRAWN DC H. CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH A-2.1 CHECKED MH 03/22/13 DATE PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SHEET OF GENERAL NOTES 1 1.1 1.2 2 (-3 4 5 6 7 ' KEYNOTES A�-- - �- - --OA ;moi (ic-, ) � - - D F. 1 1 UPPER FLOOR DEMO PLAN A-5.0 I A-2.2 1 1/8" = 1'-0" (E) DECK 217 i I I 1 1.1 1.2 2 3 L 4 CB) 0 rrmdesigngroup III creating environments people enjoy' 3765 South Higuera St., Ste. 102, San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 P: (805) 543-1794 1 F: (805) 543-4609 1 www.rrmdesign.com ACrIbmla CGWati"nIVNDMon"g y,eeTited YClIM I Jerry MIdUel PE#36895,L5F6216IJNIFBha IA#2M THE INCLUDED DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, IDEAS, DESIGNS AND ARRANGEMENTS REPRESENTED THEREBY ARE AND SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF FIRM DESIGN GROUP AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK OR PROJECT OTHER THAN THE SPECIFIED PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED AND DEVELOPED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF RRM DESIGN GROUP. VISUAL CONTACT WITH THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL CONSTITUTE CONCLUSIVE EVIDENCE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THESE RESTRICTIONS. SUBMITTAL OF THESE DOCUMENTS FOR PUBLIC AGENCY REVIEW SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED A WAIVER OF RRM DESIGN GROUP'S RIGHTS. RRM DESIGN GROUP COPYRIGHT 2013 RRM IS A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION LEGEND WALLS TO BE DEMOLISHED. N **65% SUBMITTAL** UPPER FLOOR DEMO PLAN C-5130 NO. I BY I DESCRIPTION REVISIONS DATE REVIEWED: SENIOR CIVIL ENGINEER R.C.E. NO. 65329 1.\�-2 NEWPORT BEACH FY 2011-2012 LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION PROJ MGR DEt. DRAWN CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH C CHECKED DATE PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT MH 03/22/13 A-2.2 SHEET OF A B C_ 0 7 F. 1 1.1 1.2 2 3 1 1 1 I1 - 1 (E) ENTRY DECK I w A -6.o 218 - 0C (N) (N) 2ND FLR CORRIDOR 231 (N) RECEPI 237 (N) CONK RM 229 (N) BATT. CHIEF I OFFICE w G K 0 U 2 I0 0 U) Iz T 5 A-6.1 rn z II o c� o 04I € CD W1 1216 1 (N) DEPUTY CHIEF OFFICE 227 12'-0" 12'-011 1 1.1 1.2 2 3 4 1 1 UPPER FLOOR RECONSTRUCTION PLAN A-5.0 I A-2.3 ) 1/8" = 1'-0" MEN (N) STORAGE 238 8 A-7.1 (N) ELECT 240 Z (N) TRAINING \,,j) ill RM. STOR. 232 I W ^� r N (N) TRAINING RM. STATION z I I 233 101-0. 6'- 11 3/8" 6 7 1 2 A-6.1 (N) TRAINING. RM 40 CLASS RM. 70LECTURE L230 rrmdesigngroup III creating environments people enjoy' 3765 South Higuera St., Ste. 102, San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 P: (805) 543-1794 1 F: (805) 543-4609 1 www.rrmdesign.com ACrIbmla CGWatianjVNDMon"g y,eeTited YClIM I Jerry MIdUel PE#36895,L5F6216IJNIFBhaq IA#2M THE INCLUDED DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, IDEAS, DESIGNS AND ARRANGEMENTS REPRESENTED THEREBY ARE AND SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF FIRM DESIGN GROUP AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED TO OTHERS OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK OR PROJECT OTHER THAN THE SPECIFIED PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED AND DEVELOPED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF RRM DESIGN GROUP. VISUAL CONTACT WITH THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL CONSTITUTE CONCLUSIVE EVIDENCE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THESE RESTRICTIONS. SUBMITTAL OF THESE DOCUMENTS FOR PUBLIC AGENCY REVIEW SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED A WAIVER OF RRM DESIGN GROUP'S RIGHTS. RRM DESIGN GROUP COPYRIGHT 2013 RRM IS A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION NO. I BY I DESCRIPTION GENERAL NOTES KEYNOTES LEGEND EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN. EXTERIOR- 2 X 4 WOOD STUD W/ PLYWOOD SHEATHING AND SOLID VINYL SIDING TO MATCH EXISTING STYLE AND PATTERN. ONE LAYER GYPSUM WALL BOARD INTERIOR. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INTERIOR- 2 X 4 WOOD STUD W/ONE LAYER GYPSUM WALL BOARD EACH SIDE. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INTERIOR- 2 X 6 WOOD STUD W/ONE LAYER GYPSUM WALL BOARD EACH SIDE. SEE STRUCTURAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. INTERIOR- MTL RESTROOM PARTITION. **65% SUBMITTAL** UPPER FLOOR RECONSTRUCTION PLAN C-5130 REVISIONS REVIEWED: NEWPORT BEACH DATE FY 2011-2012 SENIOR CIVIL ENGINEER LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS R.C.E. NO. 65329 REHABILITATION DATE PROJ MGR DC Et. DRAWN CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH A-2.3 CHECKED MH 03/22/13 DATE PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SHEET OF APPENDIX C GEOTECHNICAL BORING LOG LB -1 Project No. 10148-001 Date Drilled Project Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Logged By Drilling Co. 2R Drilling Inc. Hole Diameter Drilling Method Hollow Stem Auger - 1401b - Autohammer - 18" Drop Ground Elevation Location See Figure 2 - Boring Location Map Sampled By 2-8-13 Jeff Johnson V. 9' Jeff Johnson * * * This log is a part of a report by Leighton and should not be used as a stand-alone document. * * * Page 1 of 1 o � SOIL DESCRIPTION43 r N W= y^. its am 0-o s= d o U This Soil Description applies only to a location of the exploration at the P PP Y P ~ ,0 w >U. Qty 15 -IT « C o p C C Ur/j time of sampling. Subsurface conditions may differ at other locations o Q R m Z, O O� and may change with time. The description is a simplification of the �y W to 6`. p U W_ actual conditions encountered. Transitions between soil types may be p, gradual. � 0 al @0': 5" Asphalt Concrete over 4" Aggregate Base CR SPT -B 11 99 4 @9": Silty SAND, light grayish yellow brown, moist, fine grained, DS R-1 16 tnicaccous 23 @1': medium dense, light gray 5 R-2 10 105 20 @3.5': becomes dark gray, very moist to wet, fine to medium Co 17 grained 5 25 R-3 25 102 24 @6': Wet, Local groundwater table encountered 40 50 R-4 14 94 28 @8.5': Becomes Sandy SILT to Silty SAND, dense, dark gray, wet, 50/6" very fine to fine grained, very micaceous 10 5 SPT -1 7 14 @14': SAND, medium to coarse grained, broken shell fragments, 15 21 reddish gray brown, increase in feldspar grains -10 SPT -2 18 @18.5': Fine to coarse grains, abundant shell fragments, trace 24 well-rounded black slaty gravels 20 34 Tota] Depth of Boring: 20 feet bgs Local groundwater table encountered @6 feet bgs Hole Backfilled with soil cuttings and capped with quick set concrete and black dye upon completion of drilling. -15- 1525-20 25- -20 SAMPLFTYPES: TYPE OF TESTS: B BULK SAMPLE -200 % FINES PASSING DS DIRECT SHEAR SA SIEVE ANALYSIS C CORE SAMPLE AL LIMITS EI EXPANSION INDEX SE SAND EQUIVALENT G GRAB SAMPLE CN CONSOLIDAIDA CONSOLIDATION TION H HYDROMETER SG SPECIFIC GRAVITY R RING SAMPLE CO COLLAPSE MD MAXIMUM DENSITY UC UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH S SPLIT SPOON SAMPLE CR CORROSION PP POCKET PENETROMETER T TUBE SAMPLE CU UNDRAINED TRIAXIAL RV R VALUE * * * This log is a part of a report by Leighton and should not be used as a stand-alone document. * * * Page 1 of 1 GEOTECHNICAL BORING LOG LB -2 Project No. 10148-001 Date Drilled Project Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Logged By Drilling Co. 2R Drilling Inc. Hole Diameter Drilling Method Hollow Stem Auger - 1401b - Autohammer - 18" Drop Ground Elevation Location See Figure 2 - Boring Location Map Sampled By 2-8-13 Jeff Johnson V. 10' Jeff Johnson * * * This log is a part of a report by Leighton and should not be used as a stand-alone document. * * * Page 1 of 1 o � SOIL DESCRIPTION43 r N W= y^. is am 0-o s= d o U This Soil Description applies only to a location of the exploration at the P PP Y P ~ w >U. Qty 15 -IT « C o p o. C Ut/j time of sampling. Subsurface conditions may differ at other locations 0 o Q R m Z, O O� and may change with time. The description is a simplification of the �y W to 6`. p U W_ actual conditions encountered. Transitions between soil types may be p, gradual. � 10 0 - g-1 @0'; 4" Asphalt Concrete over 4" Aggregate Base RV R -i 90 96 3 @8": Silty SAND, light grayish to yellow brown, moist, fine CO wined, micaceous medium dense, becomes whitish yellow R-2 6 47 14 @3.5': becomes light gray, trace shells IIS 10 5 5 10 R-3 14 loo 24 @6': becomes very moist to wet 27 @6.6': Local groundwater table encountered 25 R-4 21 102 25 @8.5': Sandy SILT to Silty SAND, dark olive gray, wet, very fine to 50/6" fine grained, micaceous, trace shells 0 10 SPT -1 15 26 -5 15 30 @14.5': SAND, reddish gray brown, medium to coarse grained, very moist, trace coarse shells, abundant fine shells, increase in feldspar grains SPT -2 13 26 @18.5': fine to coarse grained, trace fine well-rounded slaty black gravels, abundant shells -10 20 5 Total Depth of Boring: 20 feet bgs Local table encountered @6.6 feet bgs groundwater Hole Backfilled with soil cuttings and capped with quick set concrete and black dye upon completion of drilling. -15 25 SAFAPAYPES: TYPE OF TESTS: At B BULK SAMPLE •200 % FINES PASSING DS DIRECT SHEAR SA SIEVE ANALYSIS C CORE SAMPLE AL LIMITS EI EXPANSION INDEX SE SAND EQUIVALENT G GRAB SAMPLE CN CONSOLIDAIDA CONSOLIDATION TION H HYDROMETER SG SPECIFIC GRAVITY 49 R RING SAMPLE CO COLLAPSE MD MAXIMUM DENSITY UC UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH S SPLIT SPOON SAMPLE CR CORROSION PP POCKET PENETROMETER T TUBE SAMPLE CU UNDRAINED TRIAXIAL RV R VALUE * * * This log is a part of a report by Leighton and should not be used as a stand-alone document. * * * Page 1 of 1 APPENDIX D QW01 511101 r 2.50 Y y 2.00 1.50 `m CD z rn 1.00 'elms] 3.50 1011111 w 2.50 N Y_ N 2.00 N N 1.50 m 1.00 0.50 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 Horizontal Deformation (in.) 0.00 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 Boring No. LB -1 Sample No. R-1 Depth (ft) 1 Sample Type: Ring Soil Identification: Light olive brown poorly - graded sand with silt (SP - SM) Normal Stress (ksf) Normal Stress (kip/ftz) 1.000 2.000 4.000 Peak Shear Stress (kip/ftz) • 1.003 ■ 1.764 A 3.292 Shear Stress @ End of Test (ksf) O 0.714 C] 1.239 L 2.424 Deformation Rate (in./min.) 0.0500 0.0500 0.0500 Initial Sample Height (in.) 1.000 1.000 1.000 Diameter (in.) 2.415 2.415 2.415 Initial Moisture Content (%) 4.04 4.04 4.04 Dry Density (pcf) 99.0 98.8 99.2 Saturation (%) 15.5 15.4 15.6 Soil Height Before Shearing (in.) 0.9952 0.9881 0.9869 Final Moisture Content (%) 21.2 21.5 22.0 Project No.: 10148.001 Leighton DIRECT SHEAR TEST RESULTS Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ / Consolidated Undrained 02-13 DS LB -1, R-1 @I QW01 511101 W11, y 2.00 1.50 `m CD r 7 911f, 111WO] �xaa 3.50 1011111 2.50 0.50 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 Horizontal Deformation (in.) 0.00 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 Boring No. LB -2 Sample No. R-2 Depth (ft) 3.5 Sample Type: Ring Soil Identification: Light olive brown poorly - graded sand with silt (SP - SM) Normal Stress (ksf) Normal Stress (kip/ftz) 1.000 2.000 4.000 Peak Shear Stress (kip/ftz) • 0.887 ■ 1.704 A 3.263 Shear Stress @ End of Test(ksf) O 0.651 11 1.289 0 2.682 Deformation Rate (in./min.) 0.0500 0.0500 0.0500 Initial Sample Height (in.) 1.000 1.000 1.000 Diameter (in.) 2.415 2.415 2.415 Initial Moisture Content (%) 18.86 18.86 18.86 Dry Density (pcf) 97.1 97.4 96.4 Saturation (%) 69.3 69.7 68.0 Soil Height Before Shearing (in.) 0.9920 0.9907 0.9866 Final Moisture Content (%) 25.0 25.3 25.6 Project No.: 10148.001 Leighton DIRECT SHEAR TEST RESULTS Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ / Consolidated Undrained 02-13 DS LB -2, R-2 @ 3.5 One -Dimensional Swell or Settlement Leighton Potential of Cohesive Soils (ASTM D 4546) Project Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Tested By: G. Bathala Project No.: 10148.001 Checked By: J. Ward Boring No.: LB -1 Sample Type: Ring Sample No.: R-2 Depth (ft.) 3.5 Sample Description: Light olive brown poorly -graded sand with silt (SP -SM) Initial Dry Density (pcf): 106.0 104.8 Initial Moisture (%): Initial Void ratio: 19.57 Initial Length (in.): 2.70 1.0000 Initial Dial Reading: Load 0.1990 Diameter in : Corrected 2.416 Date: 02/13/13 Date: 02/15/13 Final Dry Density (pcf): 106.0 Final Moisture (%) : 20.2 Initial Void ratio: 0.6085 Specific Gravity(assumed): 2.70 Initial Saturation % 86.8 Percent Swell (+) / Settlement (-) After Inundation = 0.6100 0.6080 0.6060 0.6040 0.6020 Z 0.6000 Of 0 0.5980 0.5960 0.5940 0.5920 0.5900 0.5880 0.010 Void Ratio - Log Pressure Curve 0.100 Log Pressure (ksf) 1.000 10.000 Swell or Collapse LB -i, R-2 @ 3.5 Swell (+) Pressure (p) Final Reading Apparent Load Settlement (-) Corrected Thickness Compliance Void Ratio Deformation (ksf) (in) % of Sample (in) (/°) (/0) Thickness 0.100 0.1993 0.9997 0.00 -0.03 0.6080 -0.03 2.100 0.2093 0.9897 0.00 -1.03 0.5919 -1.03 H2O 0.2102 0.9888 0.00 -1.12 0.5905 -1.12 Percent Swell (+) / Settlement (-) After Inundation = 0.6100 0.6080 0.6060 0.6040 0.6020 Z 0.6000 Of 0 0.5980 0.5960 0.5940 0.5920 0.5900 0.5880 0.010 Void Ratio - Log Pressure Curve 0.100 Log Pressure (ksf) 1.000 10.000 Swell or Collapse LB -i, R-2 @ 3.5 Leighton Project Name: Project No.: Boring No.: Sample No.: One -Dimensional Swell or Settlement Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ 10148.001 LB -2 R-1 Sample Description: Potential of Cohesive Soils (ASTM D 4546) Tested By: G. Bathaia Date: 02/13/13 Checked By: J. Ward Date: 02/15/13 Sample Type: Ring Depth (ft.) 1.0 Light olive brown poorly -graded sand with silt (SP -SM) Initial Dry Density (pcf): 97.1 95.6 Initial Moisture (%): Initial Void ratio: 3.10 Initial Length (in.): 2.70 1.0000 Initial Dial Reading: Load 0.2169 Diameter in : Corrected 2.416 Final Dry Density (pcf): 97.1 Final Moisture (%) : 23.7 Initial Void ratio: 0.7632 Specific Gravity(assumed): 2.70 Initial Saturation % 11.0 Percent Swell (+) / Settlement (-) After Inundation = 0.7650 0.7600 0.7550 0 cc of 0.7500 0 0.7450 0.7400 0.7350 0.010 Void Ratio - Log Pressure Curve 0.100 Log Pressure (ksf) 1.000 Inundate with Tap water 10.000 Swell or Collapse LB -2, R4 @ I Swell (+) Pressure (p) Final Reading Apparent Load Settlement (-) Corrected Thickness Compliance Void Ratio Deformation (ksf) (in) % of Sample (in) (/°) (/0) Thickness 0.100 0.2172 0.9997 0.00 -0.03 0.7626 -0.03 2.100 0.2310 0.9859 0.00 -1.41 0.7383 -1.41 H2O 0.2321 0.9848 0.00 -1.52 0.7364 -1.52 Percent Swell (+) / Settlement (-) After Inundation = 0.7650 0.7600 0.7550 0 cc of 0.7500 0 0.7450 0.7400 0.7350 0.010 Void Ratio - Log Pressure Curve 0.100 Log Pressure (ksf) 1.000 Inundate with Tap water 10.000 Swell or Collapse LB -2, R4 @ I Leighton R-VALUE TEST RESULTS DOT PROJECT.. - Lifeguard HQ -. 10148.001 BORING SAMPLE NUMBER: B-1 TECHNICIAN: S. Felter olive brown aaa RkA EXUDATIONPRESSURE, EXPANSION,O. aaa orzy"995- M. . -- • m l aaa : Wl ......................................... ......................................... ........................................ ::::::::::::::::::ii:: ........................................ ...OOO.O.■..O.O.O....O......00...00....O EMMEMMEM M::::::::Ee eee: MENOMONEE MEMO :::................... ......................................... ......................................... ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ ........................................... ........................................ ........................................ ...................•..................... ......................................... ......................................... . .........■...O...EO...EO............M... ........................................ :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::ENIN: MEN NINEEMI EMIN:MIN .............•........................... ........................................ MENOMONEE MENEEMEMENE .........■.M.MM.MM...................... ........................................ ......................................... ......................................... ......................................... ........................................ ........................................ ........................................ ......................................... .•........■.............................. .......................................0 ::::::::: ........................................ ::::::::::::::::::::::NONE::::: MONOMMEMEME .............■..1.1....1.1...1.1..........1.. :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: EEM .. :::::::::::::::::::HIM 49 411 SOIL RESISTIVITY TEST Leighton DOT CA TEST 532 / 643 Project Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Tested By : G. Berdy Date: 02/15/13 Project No.: 10148.001 Data Input By: J. Ward Date: 02/19/13 Boring No.: LB -1 Depth (ft.) : 0-5 Sample No.: B-1 37.03 Soil Identification:* Light olive brown (SP -SM) Soil *California Test 643 requires soil specimens to consist only of portions of samples passing through the No. 8 US Standard Sieve before resistivity testino. Therefore, this test method may not be representative for coarser materials. Moisture Moisture Content %) (MCi) 0.17 Adjusted 277.45 Dry Wt. of Soil + Cont. (g) 277.04 Water 37.03 Resistance Soil Specimen Added (ml) Moisture Reading Resistivity No. (Wa) ContCent (ohm) (ohm -cm) 1 30 23.29 10500 10500 2 40 30.99 7700 7700 3 50 38.70 6900 6900 4 60 46.40 7200 7200 5 Moisture Content %) (MCi) 0.17 Wet Wt. of Soil + Cont. (g) 277.45 Dry Wt. of Soil + Cont. (g) 277.04 Wt. of Container (g) 37.03 Container No. IF 80 8.71 Initial Soil Wt. (Wt) 130.00 Box Constant 1.000 MC = 1+Mci/100 x Wa/Wt+1 -1 x100 Min. Resistivity (ohm -cm) Moisture Content M Sulfate Content (ppm) Chloride Content Soil pH (ppm) pH Temp. (°c} DOT CA Test 532 / 643 DOT CA Test 417 Part II DOT CA Test 422 DOT CA Test 532 / 643 6890 39.7 mossonsow- 82 IF 80 8.71 18.6 11000 10500 10000 9500 E V 9000 s 0 8500 8000 N .N 7500 O N 7000 6500 6000 4- 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 Moisture Content (%) 50.0 APPENDIX E Newport Beach lifeguard Headquarters Renovation - Allowable Shaft Resistance Skin Friction w/F.S.(tons) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 l0 11 12 13 14 15 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I q _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I o I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I d I I I I I I I I I I I I I I d I I I I I I I I I I I I I I y Q N _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I----- I_---- I_---- I_---- I_---- 1_---- 1_---- 1_---- 1_---- 1_---- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L _L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I N I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I o Dia=1.5 ti 10198.001 - Dia. 18 in. VERTICALLY LOADED DRILLED SHAFT ANALYSIS PROGRAM SHAFT VERSION 6 (C)COPYRIGHT ENSOFT,INC.1989,1995,1998,2001,2003,2007 Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Renovation PROPOSED DEPTH = 25.0 FT NUMBER OF LAYERS = 3 WATER TABLE DEPTH = 3.0 FT. ------------------- FACTOR OF SAFETY APPLIED TO THE TOTAL ULTIMATE CAPACITY = 3.00 FACTOR OF SAFETY APPLIED TO THE ULTIMATE BASE CAPACITY = 3.00 SOIL INFORMATION LAYER NO 1 ----SAND AT THE TOP SKIN FRICTION COEFFICIENT- BETA = 0.120E+01 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, LB/SQ, FT = 0.000E+00 INTERNAL FRICTION ANGLE, DEG. = 0.300E+02 BLOWS PER FOOT FROM STANDARD PENETRATION TEST = 0.000E+00 SOIL UNIT WEIGHT, LB/CU FT = 0.100E+03 MAXIMUM LOAD TRANSFER FOR SOIL, LB/SQ FT = 0.100E+11 DEPTH, FT = 0.000E+00 AT THE BOTTOM SKIN FRICTION COEFFICIENT- BETA = 0.120E+01 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, LB/SQ. FT = 0.000E+00 INTERNAL FRICTION ANGLE, DEG. = 0.300E+02 BLOWS PER FOOT FROM STANDARD PENETRATION TEST = 0.000E+00 SOIL UNIT WEIGHT, LB/CU FT = 0.100E+03 MAXIMUM LOAD TRANSFER FOR SOIL, LB/SQ FT = 0.100E+11 DEPTH, FT = 0.300E+01 LAYER NO 2 ----SAND AT THE TOP SKIN FRICTION COEFFICIENT- BETA = 0.120E+01 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, LB/SQ FT = 0.000E+00 INTERNAL FRICTION ANGLE, DEG. = 0.390E+02 BLOWS PER FOOT FROM STANDARD PENETRATION TEST = 0.000E+00 SOIL UNIT WEIGHT, LB/CU FT = 0.120E+03 MAXIMUM LOAD TRANSFER FOR SOIL, LB/SQ FT = 0.100E+11 DEPTH, FT = 0.300E+01 AT THE BOTTOM SKIN FRICTION COEFFICIENT- BETA = 0.896E+00 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, LB/SQ FT = 0.000E+00 INTERNAL FRICTION ANGLE, DEG. = 0.390E+02 BLOWS PER FOOT FROM STANDARD PENETRATION TEST = 0.000E+00 SOIL UNIT WEIGHT, LB/CU FT = 0.120E+03 Page 1 10148.001 - Dia. 18 in. MAXIMUM LOAD TRANSFER FOR SOIL, LB/SQ. FT = 0.100E+11 DEPTH, FT = 0.200E+02 LAYER NO 3 ----SAND AT THE TOP SKIN FRICTION COEFFICIENT- BETA = 0.896E+00 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, LB/SQ FT = 0.000E+00 INTERNAL FRICTION ANGLE, DEG. = 0.340E+02 BLOWS PER FOOT FROM STANDARD PENETRATION TEST = 0.000E+00 SOIL UNIT WEIGHT, LB/CU FT = 0.120E+03 MAXIMUM LOAD TRANSFER FOR SOIL, LB/SQ FT = 0.100E+11 DEPTH, FT = 0.200E+02 AT THE BOTTOM SKIN FRICTION COEFFICIENT- BETA = 0.761E+00 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, LB/SQ FT = 0.000E+00 INTERNAL FRICTION ANGLE, DEG. = 0.340E+02 BLOWS PER FOOT FROM STANDARD PENETRATION TEST = 0.000E+00 SOIL UNIT WEIGHT, LB/CU FT = 0.120E+03 MAXIMUM LOAD TRANSFER FOR SOIL, LB/SQ FT = 0.100E+11 DEPTH, FT = 0.300E+02 DRILLED SHAFT INFORMATION DIAMETER OF STEM = 1.500 QS FT. DIAMETER OF BASE = 1.500 FT. END OF STEM TO BASE = 0.000 FT. ANGLE OF BELL = 0.000 DEG. IGNORED TOP PORTION = 2.000 (TONS) FT. IGNORED BOTTOM PORTION = 2.000 (TONS/CU.YDS) FT. AREA OF ONE PERCENT STEEL = 2.545 SQ.IN. ELASTIC MODULUS, Ec = 0.360E+07 LB/SQ IN VOLUME OF UNDERREAM = 0.000 3.86 CU.YDS. PREDICTED RESULTS QS = ULTIMATE SIDE RESISTANCE; QB = ULTIMATE BASE RESISTANCE; WT = WEIGHT OF DRILLED SHAFT (FOR UPLIFT CAPACITY ONLY); QU = TOTAL ULTIMATE RESISTANCE; QBD = TOTAL ALLOWABLE LOAD USING A FACTOR OF SAFETY APPLIED TO THE ULTIMATE BASE RESISTANCE; QDN = TOTAL ALLOWABLE LOAD USING FACTORS OF SAFETY APPLIED TO THE ULTIMATE SIDE RESISTANCE AND THE ULTIMATE BASE RESISTANCE. LENGTH VOLUME QS QB QU QBD QDN QU/VOLUME (FEET) (CU.YDS) (TONS) (TONS) (TONS) (TONS) (TONS) (TONS/CU.YDS) 5.0 0.33 0.69 9.52 10.20 3.86 3.40 31.46 6.0 0.39 1.86 10.77 12.63 5.45 4.21 32.17 7.0 0.46 3.03 12.03 15.06 7.04 5.02 32.87 8.0 0.52 4.33 13.2.9 17.62 8.76 5.87 33.65 9.0 0.59 5.76 14.54 20.31 10.61 6.77 34.47 10.0 0.65 7.31 15.80 23.11 12.58 7.70 35.31 11.0 0.72 8.98 17.06 26.04 14.66 8.68 36.16 12.0 0.79 10.76 18.32 29.07 16.86 9.69 37.01 13.0 0.85 12.64 18.85 31.50 18.93 10.50 37.01 14.0 0.92 14.63 18.85 33.49 20.92 11.16 36.54 15.0 0.98 16.73 18.85 35.58 23.01 11.86 36.24 16.0 1.05 18.91 18.85 37.77 25.20 12.59 36.06 Page 2 RESULT FROM TREND (AVERAGED) LINE TOP LOAD TOP MOVEMENT TIP LOAD TIP MOVEMENT ton 10148.001 - Dia. 18 in. IN. 17.0 1.11 21.20 18.85 40.05 0.6437E-04 27.48 0.1833E-02 13.35 0.5000E-04 35.99 0.7434E-01 18.0 1.18 0.3666E-02 23.57 0.1000E-03 18.85 0.3717E+01 42.42 29.85 14.14 36.01 0.9655E-02 19.0 1.24 26.03 18.85 0.1287E-01 44.88 0.3666E+00 32.31 0.1000E-01 14.96 0.1707E+02 36.09 20.0 1.31 0.2500E-01 28.57 0.2715E+02 18.85 47.43 34.86 15.81 0.8784E-01 36.23 0.2750E+01 21.0 1.37 31.20 0.1146E+00 18.85 0.3656E+01 50.05 0.1000E+00 37.48 0.4304E+02 16.68 36.41 22.0 1.44 0.4736E+02 33.90 18.85 52.75 40.18 0.6479E+00 17.58 0.1510E+02 36.63 0.6250E+00 23.0 1.51 0.8057E+00 36.67 0.1746E+02 18.85 0.7813E+00 55.53 0.5339E+02 42.96 18.51 36.88 24.0 1.57 39.52 18.85 58.38 45.81 19.46 37.16 25.0 1.64 42.44 18.85 61.29 48.72 20.43 37.46 RESULT FROM TREND (AVERAGED) LINE TOP LOAD TOP MOVEMENT TIP LOAD TIP MOVEMENT ton IN. ton IN. 0.7434E-02 0.1287E-04 0.3666E-03 0.1000E-04 0.3717E-01 0.6437E-04 0.1833E-02 0.5000E-04 0.7434E-01 0.1287E-03 0.3666E-02 0.1000E-03 0.3717E+01 0.6437E-02 0.1833E+00 0.5000E-02 0.5576E+01 0.9655E-02 0.2750E+00 0.7500E-02 0.7443E+01 0.1287E-01 0.3666E+00 0.1000E-01 0.1707E+02 0.3165E-01 0.9165E+00 0.2500E-01 0.2715E+02 0.6076E-01 0.1833E+01 0.5000E-01 0.3191E+02 0.8784E-01 0.2750E+01 0.7500E-01 0.3581E+02 0.1146E+00 0.3656E+01 0.1000E+00 0.4304E+02 0.2687E+00 0.8558E+01 0.2500E+00 0.4736E+02 0.5216E+00 0.1301E+02 0.5000E+00 0.4942E+02 0.6479E+00 0.1510E+02 0.6250E+00 0.5174E+02 0.8057E+00 0.1746E+02 0.7813E+00 0.5339E+02 0.9256E+00 0.1914E+02 0.9000E+00 RESULT FROM UPPER -BOUND LINE TOP LOAD TOP MOVEMENT TIP LOAD TIP MOVEMENT ton IN. ton IN. 0.1021E-01 0.1393E-04 0.5237E-03 0.1000E-04 0.5106E-01 0.6964E-04 0.2619E-02 0.5000E-04 0.1021E+00 0.1393E-03 0.5237E-02 0.1000E-03 0.5106E+01 0.6964E-02 0.2619E+00 0.5000E-02 0.7672E+01 0.1045E-01 0.3928E+00 0.7500E-02 0.1025E+02 0.1393E-01 0.5237E+00 0.1000E-01 0.2302E+02 0.3395E-01 0.1309E+01 0.2500E-01 0.3447E+02 0.6376E-01 0.2619E+01 0.5000E-01 0.3816E+02 0.9056E-01 0.3928E+01 0.7500E-01 0.4086E+02 0.1170E+00 0.5195E+01 0.1000E+00 0.4767E+02 0.2714E+00 0.1184E+02 0.2500E+00 0.5100E+02 0.5236E+00 0.1517E+02 0.5000E+00 0.5274E+02 0.6497E+00 0.1691E+02 0.6250E+00 0.5470E+02 0.8072E+00 0.1887E+02 0.7813E+00 0.5620E+02 0.9270E+00 0.2036E+02 0.9000E+00 RESULT FROM LOWER -BOUND LINE TOP LOAD TOP MOVEMENT TIP LOAD TIP MOVEMENT ton IN. ton IN. 0.4756E-02 0.1184E-04 0.2095E-03 0.1000E-04 0.2378E-01 0.5922E-04 0.1047E-02 0.5000E-04 0.4756E-01 0.1184E-03 0.2095E-02 0.1000E-03 0.2378E+01 0.5922E-02 0.1047E+00 0.5000E-02 0.3567E+01 0.8883E-02 0.1571E+00 0.7500E-02 0.4756E+01 0.1184E-01 0.2095E+00 0.1000E-01 0.1126E+02 0.2938E-01 0.5237E+00 0.2500E-01 0.1976E+02 0.5774E-01 0.1047E+01 0.5000E-01 0.2557E+02 0.8510E-01 0.1571E+01 0.7500E-01 0.3068E+02 0.1122E+00 0.2116E+01 0.1000E+00 0.3841E+02 0.2661E+00 0.5279E+01 0.2500E+00 0.4371E+02 0.5196E+00 0.1085E+02 0.5000E+00 0.4610E+02 0.6462E+00 0.1329E+02 0.6250E+00 Page 3 10148.001 - Dia. 18 in. 0.4877E+02 0.8042E+00 0.1605E+02 0.7813E+00 0.5058E+02 0.9242E+00 0.1791E+02 0.9000E+00 Page 4 Limited Hazardous Materials Surveys Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters VISTA ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING OAKLAND • MONTEREY • SAN JOSE • ANAHEIM • SAN DIEGO "FROM BUILDINGS TO BULLDOZERS" September 11, 2012 Project No. 1231701 LIMITED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SURVEY REPORT NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS 70 NEWPORT PIER NEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA PREPARED FOR: RRM Design Group 232 Via Fabricante, Suite 112 San Clemente, CA 92672 PREPARED BY: Vista Environmental Consulting, Inc. 950 N. Tustin Ave., Suite 140 Anaheim, CA 90807 September 11, 2012 Project No. 1231701 VISTA ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING Limited Hazardous Materials Surveys September 11, 2012 Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Project No. 1231701 TABLE OF CONTENTS EXECUTIVE SUMMARY i MAIN REPORT 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 2.0 METHODOLOGY 2 3.0 RESULTS 6 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS 7 5.0 LIMITATIONS & EXCLUSIONS 12 APPENDICES A. 70 Newport Pier Hazardous Materials Summary Tables Asbestos Analytical Reports XRF Measurement Results Field Drawings PAGE VISTA ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING Limited Hazardous Materials Surveys Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters September 11, 2012 Project No. 1231701 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Vista Environmental Consulting, Inc. (VEC) performed a limited building related hazardous materials survey of the Newport Beach, Lifeguard Headquarters located at 70 Newport Pier, Newport Beach, California 92663 (Project Site). The surveys were performed to identify and sample accessible, suspect asbestos -containing materials (ACMs), asbestos -containing construction materials (ACCMs), representative building components for the presence of lead -containing surface coatings/lead-based paints (LCSC/LBP), universal waste (UW) materials, devices containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), mechanical equipment & machines which contain ozone depleting chemicals, devices with low- level radioactive sources, and other building -related hazardous materials that may be present within the facilities. The "limited building related hazardous materials surveys" performed were limited to representative rooms areas, were not intrusive in nature, and did not include access of areas and sampling of materials which would have required demolition or destructive testing. Prior to demolition activities, a follow-up inspection should be performed at each facility to identify and sample potential environmental hazards located beneath finishes and/or enclosed in wall voids, pipe chases, and the like. The following tables list the identified materials, the location of the materials and the estimated quantity of the materials identified as hazardous: 70 Newport Pier MATERIAL. DESCRIPTION LOCATION CONTAMINANT ESTIMATED QUANTITY' Vinyl Asbestos Floor 12" x 12" Multi -Layered under Carpet, Offices and Asbestos 1,500 SF Tile and Mastics Multi -Colored Hallways Textured Drywall, 2^s & 3^d Floor Hallways, Asbestos Ceilings & Walls Textured White Offices and Kitchen Trace <1% 2,500 SF Spray Applied Asbestos Acoustic Spray -On White Closets &Storage Rooms Trace <1% 250 SF Exterior Plaster Grey Assumed Under All Exterior Siding Assumed TBD* Asbestos Paint Blue Entry Signage Lead -Based Paint LEA Fluorescent Light Tubes & Non- Throughout Mercury, Universal 214 EA Incandescent Lamps \C rite VISTA ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING 111 Limited Hazardous Materials Surveys Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters September 11, 2012 Project No. 1231701 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION LOCATION CONTAMINANT ESTIMATED QUANTITY' Polychlorinated Light Fixture Ballasts Throughout Bipbenyls (PCBs) Electronic W aste 94 EA 3 Each HVAC System Roof Mounted Ozone Depleting 1 Wall Mounted ND = No Asbestos Detected I Order of Magnitude ESTIMATED Quantities and Locations ARE NOT to be used forbidding purposes. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to verify quantities and locations of hazardous materials in the path of construction through site visits and contractual bid set documents, including, but not limited to all specifications, drawings, and addenda. Any discrepancies between the contractual bid set documents and site visits must be submitted in writing PRIOR to bidding. Y Materials for which laboratory analytical result is reported as "Trace" must be managed, abated, and disposed of following the SCAQMD, NESHAPS, and OSHA regulations applicable to materials containing >1.0% asbestos. Additional analysis by Point Count or TEM methodology is required to determine if the material is above or below the 1.0% threshold. Materials found to be below 1.0% asbestos are not regulated by SCAQMD or NESHAPS reducing notification, work practice, and disposal requirements, but are still regulated by Cal -OSHA per the requirements of 8 CCR 1529. 3 Material was reanalyzed by 1,000 point count and the wallboard system composite was found to contain <0.1%asbestos. The Initial analysis found the joint compound to contain 2% asbestos and no asbestos was detected in the wallboard. The wallboard system removal is not regulated by SCAQMD or NESHAPS, but disturbance of the joint compound used only at nail heads and seams is still regulated by Cal -OSHA per the requirements of 8 CCR 1529. 4 This material was assumed to contain >1.0% asbestos as the material could not be accessed without dismantling equipment or damage to finishes associated with this material. 5 This material was assumed to contain >1.0% asbestos as it was excluded from the survey.. All asbestos (>0.1%) disturbance and/or removal operations must be performed by a Cal/OSHA registered and State licensed asbestos removal contractor. All disturbance and/or abatement operations should be under the direction of a California Certified Asbestos Consultant. Should the removal of identified asbestos -containing materials involve at least 100 square feet then a 14 calendar day written notification to the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) in accordance with Rule 1403, and a 24 hour written notice to Cal/OSHA prior to the initiation of such activities are required. Notification to employees and contractors working within the buildings should be made in accordance with the California Health and Safety Code, Section 25915 et.seq. And Proposition 65. All activities involving potential and identified lead -containing surfaces should be performed in accordance with California Health & Safety Code sections 17920.10 and 10525, 10525.7, Title 8, California Code of Regulations (CCR), Section 1532.1. In addition, all activities involving identified lead-based paints (LBP) must be performed in accordance with Title 17, CCR, Division 1, Chapter 8, Sections 35001 through 36100, Los Angeles County Municipal Code ANk A ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING 1V Limited Hazardous Materials Surveys Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters September 11, 2012 Project No. 1231701 Chapter 11.28 and 40 CFR 745 which prescribe the use of California Department of Public Health (CDPH) or Federal EPA certified firms, workers, work practices, and other requirements. Written notification to Cal/OSHA must be accomplished should LBP activities involve equal to or more than 100 square feet or 100 linear feet of removal in accordance with the requirements of 8 CCR 1532.1. Any welding, cutting or heating of metal surfaces containing surface coatings should be conducted in accordance with 8 CCR 1537 Welding, Cutting, and Heating of Coated Metals. This standard requires surfaces covered with toxic preservatives, and in enclosed areas, be stripped of all toxic coatings for a distance of at least 4 inches, in all directions, from the area of heat application prior to the initiation of such heat application, or 8 CCR 1536 Ventilation Requirements for Welding, Brazing, and Cutting. Proper waste characterization and disposal of lead and other heavy metal contaminated debris, universal waste materials, PCBs, ozone depleting chemicals, low-level radioactive sources, and other hazardous materials should be conducted in accordance with 22 CCR Division 4.5, and the California Health and Safety Code, Section 25157.8. Should materials similar to those identified in this report, or other forms of suspect hazardous materials are present, maintenance personnel/contractors should be instructed to immediately cease work activities which may initiate an exposure episode, and notify the appropriate management personnel. Respectfully Submitted, Vista Environmental Consulting, Inc. Michael Cardone Project Manager Certified Asbestos Consultant #01-3025 CDPH Lead Certification #I/M-5485 Reviewed and Approved by: Raul Garcia Vice President Certified Asbestos Consultant #05-3783 VISTA ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING V PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT INDEX FOR SPECIAL PROVISIONS NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT NO. 4869 INTRODUCTION PART 1 ---GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 2 SCOPE AND CONTROL OF THE WORK 1 2-6 WORK TO BE DONE 1 SECTION 3 CHANGES IN WORK 2 3-3 EXTRA WORK 2 3-3.2 Payment 2 3-3.2.3 Markup 2 SECTION 4 CONTROL OF MATERIALS 3 4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 3 4-1.3 Inspection Requirements 3 4-1.3.4 Inspection and Testing 3 SECTION 5 UTILITIES 3 5-1 LOCATION 3 5-2 PROTECTIONS 3 5-7 ADJUSTMENT TO GRADE 3 SECTION 6 PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK 4 6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK 4 6-1.1 Construction Schedule 4 6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION 4 6-7.1 General 4 6-7.2 Working Days 4 6-7.4 Working Hours 5 6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 5 SECTION 7 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 5 7-1 THE CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES 5 7-1.2 Temporary Utility Services 5 7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK 6 7-8 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE 6 7-8.4.3 Storage of Equipment and Materials in Public Streets 6 7-8.6 Water Pollution Control 6 7-8.6.2 Best Management Practices (BMPs) 7 7-8.7.2 Steel Plates 7 7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY 7 7-10.1 Traffic and Access 7 7-10.4 Safety 7 7-10.4.1 Safety Orders 8 7-10.5 "No Parking" Signs 8 7-10-6 Notice to Residents 8 7-15 CONTRACTOR LICENSES 9 7-16 CONTRACTOR'S RECORDS/AS BUILT DRAWINGS 9 SECTION 9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 9 9-3 PAYMENT 9 9-3.1 General 9 9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment 10 PART 2 ---CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SECTION 201 CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS 10 201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 10 201-1.1.2 Concrete Specified by Class 11 201-2 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE 11 201-2.2.1 Reinforcing Steel 11 201-7 NON -MASONRY GROUT 11 201-7.2 Quick Setting Grout 11 SECTION 203 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 11 203-5.2 EMULSION -AGGREGATE SLURRY 11 203-5.2 Materials 11 203-5.3 Composition and Grading 12 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE 12 203-6.4 Asphalt Concrete Mixtures 12 203-6.4.3 Composition of Grading 12 PART 3 ---CONSTRUCTION METHODS SECTION 300 EARTHWORK 12 300-1.5 Solid Waste Diversion 12 SECTION 302 ROADWAY SURFACING 12 302-4 EMULSION -AGGREGATE SLURRY 12 302-4.3 Application 12 302-4.3.1 General 12 302-4.3.2 Spreading 13 302-4.3.3 Field Sampling 13 APPENDIX — ARCHITECT'S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION CONTRACT NO.0-4869 INTRODUCTION SP 1 OF 13 All work necessary for the completion of this contract shall be done in accordance with (1) these Special Provisions; (2) the Plans (Drawing No. B -5221-S); (3) the City's Standard Special Provisions and Standard Drawings for Public Works Construction, (2004 Edition), including Supplements; (4) Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (2009 Edition), including supplements. Copies of the City's Standard Special Provisions and Standard Drawings may be purchased at the Public Works Department. Copies of the Standard Specifications may be purchased from Building News, Inc., 1612 South Clementine Street, Anaheim, CA 92802, 714-517-0970. The following Special Provisions supplement or modify the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction as referenced and stated hereinafter: PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 2 ---SCOPE AND CONTROL OF THE WORK 2-6 WORK TO BE DONE Add to this section, "The work necessary for the completion of this contract consists of: 1. INTERIOR TENANT IMPROVEMENTS ON THE 1 ST, 2ND AND ATTIC SPACES OF THE EXISTING NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS. AN ADDITION IS PROPOSED ON THE 2ND FLOOR TO EXPAND THE DISPATCH LOOK -OUT AND ADD AN OFFICE SPACE. WORK INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: INTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS, ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING, DEMOLITION OF INTERIOR WALLS & DRYWALL, RECONFIGURATION OF EXISTING PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL FIXTURES. 2. EXTERIOR BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS TO BLEND THE PROPOSED SECOND FLOOR ADDITION INTO THE EXISTING STRUCTURE. WORK INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: THE CONSTRUCTION OF NEW MANSARD AND FLAT ROOF AREAS, THE INSTALLATION OF NEW WINDOWS, BLENDING OF NEW AND EXISTING VINYL SIDING AT THE PROPOSED ADDITION, ERECTION OF TWO NEW SP2OF13 COLUMNS WITH BOXED ENCLOSURES TO MATCH THE EXISTING ARCHITECTURE AND PAINTING. 3. STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS WILL BE MADE TO THE EXISTING BUILDING. THE GENERAL GUIDELINE TO OUR APPROACH IS SUCH THAT ALTERATIONS OR ADDITIONS MADE TO THE EXISTING BUILDING WILL BE MADE SUCH THAT THE EXISTING BUILDING TOGETHER WITH THE ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS ARE NO LESS CONFORMING TO THE PROVISIONS OF THE CURRENT CBC THAN THE EXISTING BUILDING WAS PRIOR TO THE ALTERATIONS OR ADDITIONS. WHERE POSSIBLE, NEW CONSTRUCTION WILL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENT CBC. THIS IS CONSIDERED IN THE IEBC CHAPTER 3, SECTION 302.1 [CBC 3403.1] AND SECTION 303.1 [CBC 3404.11. 4. ALL SITE WORK WITHIN THE PROPERTY LINE AS INDICATED ON THE CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLANS. WORK INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: TRENCHING AND CONNECTION OF A STINGRAY BASIN TO THE SEWER LATERAL, A NEW SLURRY COAT AND PAINT STRIPING AT THE EXISTING PARKING LOT AREA. 5. ALL WORK SHOWN IN THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS." SECTION 3 ---CHANGES IN WORK 3-3 EXTRA WORK 3-3.2 Payment 3-3.2.3 Markup. Replace this section with the following: "(a) Work by Contractor. The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor's costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits: 1) Labor ............................................ 15 2) Materials ....................................... 15 3) Equipment Rental ........................... 15 4) Other Items and Expenditures ........... 15 To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this subsection, one (1) percent shall be added for compensation for bonding. (b) Work by Subcontractor. When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in 3-3.2.3(a) shall be applied to the Subcontractor's actual cost (prior to any markups) of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor. SP 3 OF 13 SECTION 4 ---CONTROL OF MATERIALS 4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 4-1.3 Inspection Requirements Add Section 4-1.3.4 Inspection and Testing "4-1.3.4 Inspection and Testing. All material and articles furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to rigid inspection, and no material or article shall be used in the work until it has been inspected and accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer full information as to the progress of the work in its various parts and shall give the Engineer timely (48 -hours minimum) notice of the Contractor's readiness for inspection. Submittals are required for all construction material. The Engineer shall select an independent testing laboratory and pay for all testing as specified in the various sections of the Standard Special Provisions and these Special Provisions. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, additional tests and retesting due to failed tests or inspections are required because of unsatisfactory results in the manner in which the Contractor executed the work, such tests and inspections shall be paid for by the Contractor." SECTION 5 ---UTILITIES 5-1 LOCATION. All utilities are existing unless noted otherwise. Contractor to identify all utilizes prior to commencement of work and to call USA dig alert. "Within seven (7) Calendar days after completion of the work or phase of work, the Contractor shall remove all USA utility markings. Removal by sand blasting is not allowed. Any surface damaged by the removal effort shall be repaired to its pre -construction condition or better." 5-2 PROTECTION. "In the event that an existing pull or meter box or cover is damaged by the Work and is not re -useable, the Contractor shall provide and install a new pull or meter box or cover of identical type and size at no additional cost to the City." Add Section 5-7 ADJUSTMENT TO GRADE 5-7 ADJUSTMENTS TO GRADE. The Contractor shall adjust or replace to finish grade of City -owned water meter boxes, water valve covers, sewer manholes, sewer cleanouts and survey monuments. The Contractor will be required to contact Southern California Edison, The Gas Company, AT&T Telephone, cable television, and any other utility facilities to have their SP4OF 13 existing utilities adjusted to finish grade. The Contractor shall coordinate with each utility company for the adjustment of their facilities in advance of work to avoid potential delays to the Project Schedule. SECTION 6 ---PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK 6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. Add to this section: "The time of completion as specified in Section 6-7, shall commence on the date of the 'Notice to Proceed.' 6-1.1 Construction Schedule. No work shall begin until a "Notice to Proceed" has been issued, a pre -construction meeting has been conducted, and a schedule of work has been approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a construction schedule to the Engineer for approval a minimum of five working days prior to the pre -construction meeting. Schedule may be bar chart or CPM style. The Engineer will review the schedule and may require the Contractor to modify the schedule to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. If work falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor shall be prohibited from starting additional work until Contractor has exerted extra effort to meet the original schedule and has demonstrated that the ability to maintain the approved schedule in the future. Such stoppages of work shall in no way relieve the Contractor from the overall time of completion requirement, nor shall it be construed as the basis for payment of extra work because additional personnel and equipment were required on the job." 6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION 6-7.1 General. Add to this section: "The Contractor shall complete all work under the Contract within 102 consecutive working days after the date on the Notice to Proceed." The Contractor shall ensure the availability and delivery of all material prior to the start of work. Unavailability of material will not be sufficient reason to grant the Contractor an extension of time for 100 percent completion of work." 6-7.2 Working Days. Revise 3) to read: "any City holiday, defined as January 1St (New Year's Day), the third Monday in January (Martin Luther King Day), the third Monday in February (President's Day), the last Monday in May (Memorial Day), July 4th the first Monday in September (Labor Day), November 11th (Veterans Day), the fourth Thursday and Friday in November (Thanksgiving and Friday after), December 24th (Christmas Eve), December 25th (Christmas), and December 31St (New Year's Eve). If the holiday falls on a Sunday, the following Monday will be considered the holiday. If the holiday falls on a Saturday, the Friday before will be considered the holiday." SP 5 OF 13 Add the following Section 6-7.4 Working Hours 6-7.4 Working Hours. Normal working hours are limited to 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. The contractor may continue to work from 4:00 p.m. to 8:00 p.m. Monday through Friday within the building. The contractor may also work within the building on Saturdays from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. The Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, etc., shall not generate any noise at the work site, storage sites, staging areas, etc., before or after the normal working hours prescribed above. Should the Contractor elect to work outside normal working hours, Contractor must first obtain special permission from the Engineer. A request for working outside the normal working hours must be made at least 72 hours in advance of the desired time period. A separate request must be made for each work shift. The Engineer reserves the right to deny any or all such requests. Additionally, the Contractor shall pay for supplemental inspection costs of $146 per hour when such time periods are approved. 6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Revise sentence three to read: "For each consecutive calendar day after the time specified in Section 6-7-1 for completion of the work, the Contractor shall pay to the City or have withheld from moneys due it, the daily sum of $2,500. Revise paragraph two, sentence one, to read: "Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that the above liquidated damages per day is the minimum value of the costs and actual damage caused by the failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the allotted time. The intent of this section is to emphasize to the Contractor the importance of prosecuting the work in an orderly preplanned continuous sequence so as to minimize inconvenience to residences, businesses, vehicular and pedestrian traffic, and the public as a result of construction operations." SECTION 7 ---RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 7-1 THE CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT AND FACILIITIES 7-1.2 Temporary Utility Services. Add to this end of this section: "If the Contractor elects to use City water, he shall arrange for a meter and tender an $1,073.21 meter deposit with the City. Upon return of the meter to the City, the deposit will be returned to the Contractor, less a $90 monthly charge for meter use, a charge for water usage and any repair charges for damage to the meter." SP 6 OF 13 Water used during construction shall be paid for by the Contractor. This includes water for flushing and pressure testing water lines, and soil compaction, etc. City shall designate to the Contractor the location of the fire hydrant or other connection acceptable for drawing of construction and temporary water. City reserves the right to limit the location, times and rates of drawing of such water" 7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK. Add to this section: "City forces will perform all shut downs of water facilities as required. The Contractor shall give the City seven calendar days notice of the time he desires the shutdown of water and/or sewer facilities to take place. A four-hour shut down of water facilities during the daytime hours of 10:00 a.m. to 2:00 p.m. or a six -hour shut down between the nighttime hours of 11:00 p.m. to 5:00 a.m. will be allowed. The Contractor will be responsible for completing all water connections within the time period allowed. The times and dates of any utility to be shut down must be coordinated with the Engineer. The City must approve any nighttime work in advance. It is the Contractor's responsibility to notify the affected business and residents of the upcoming water shutdown with a form provided by the Engineer at least 48 hours minimum in advance of the water shut down." 7-8 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE Add Section 7-8.4.3 Storage of Equipment and Materials in Public Streets 7-8.4.3 Storage of Equipment and Materials in Public Streets. Delete the first paragraph and add the following: "Construction materials and equipment may only be stored in streets, roads, or sidewalk areas if approved by the Engineer in advance. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain an area for the storage of equipment and materials. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of a site for storage of equipment and materials prior to arranging for or delivering equipment and materials to the site. Prior to move -in, the Contractor shall take photos of the lay down area. The Contractor shall restore the lay down area to its pre -construction condition. The Engineer may require new base and pavement if the pavement condition has been compromised during construction." 7-8.6 Water Pollution Control. Add to this section, "Surface runoff water, including all water used during saw cutting operations, containing mud, silt or other deleterious material due to the construction of this project shall be treated by filtration or retention in settling basin(s) sufficient to prevent such material from migrating into any catch basin, Newport Harbor, the beach, or the ocean. The Contractor shall also comply with the Construction Runoff Guidance Manual which is available for review at the Public Works Department or can be found on the City's website at www.newportbeachca.gov/publicworks and clicking on permits, then selecting the link Construction Runoff Guidance Manual. Additional information can be found at www.cleanwaternewport.com." SP7OF13 7-8.6.2 Best Management Practices (BMPs). Add to this section: The Contractor shall submit a Best Management Practice (BMP) plan for containing any wastewater or storm water runoff from the project site including, but not limited to the following: a. No placement of construction materials where they could enter storm drain system or ocean, which includes gutters that lead to catch basins. b. Checking construction vehicles for leaking fluids. c. Providing a controlled area for cleaning or rinse -down activities. d. Monitoring construction activities. e. Minimizing usage of water when saw -cutting and vacuum the residue. f. Providing measures to capture or vacuum -up water contaminated with construction debris. g. Removing any construction related debris on a daily basis. h. Protecting work areas from erosion. The BMP will be approved by the Engineer prior to any work. The City of Newport Beach will monitor the adjacent storm drains and streets for compliance. Failure of the Contractor to follow BMP will result in immediate cleanup by City and back -charging the Contractor for all costs plus 15 percent. The Contractor may also receive a separate Administrative Citation per Section 14.36.030A23 of the City's Municipal Code. 7-8.7.2 Steel Plates. "Steel plates utilized for trenching shall be the slip resistant type per Caltrans Standards. In addition, steel plates utilized on arterial highways shall be pinned and recessed flush with existing pavement surface." 7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY 7-10.1 Traffic and Access. Add to this section: "The Contractor shall provide traffic control and access in accordance with Section 7-10 of the Standard Specifications and the Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (WATCH), also published by Building News, Inc. Pedestrian access to all storefronts, offices, residences, existing pier and to public restrooms etc., within the limits of work must be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer to provide advance notice to any and all establishments whose access will be impacted by construction operations, particularly sidewalk construction. The Contractor shall furnish and install signage, barricades, delineators, yellow safety ribbon, and any other measures deemed necessary by the Engineer to safely direct the public around areas of construction, and into (and out of) the affected establishments. Such measures shall be shown on the Detailed Traffic Control Plans (see Section 7-10.3)." 7-10.4 Safety SP 8 OF 13 7-10.4.1 Safety Orders. Add to this section: "The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job -site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work, and the Contractor shall fully comply with all State, Federal and other laws, rules, regulations, and orders relating to the safety of the public and workers. The right of the Engineer or the City's Representative to conduct construction review or observation of the Contractor's performance shall not include review or observation of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site." Add the following Section 7-10.5 "No Parking" Signs 7-10.5 "No Parking" Signs. The Contractor shall install, and maintain in place "NO PARKING -TOW AWAY" signs (even if streets have posted "NO PARKING" signs) which he shall post at least forty-eight hours in advance of the need for enforcement. The signs will be provided by the City at no cost to the Contractor. However, the City reserves the right to charge $2.00 per sign following any excessive abuse or wastage of the signs by the Contractor. In addition, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the City's Police Department at (949) 644-3717 for verification of posting at least forty-eight hours in advance of the need for enforcement. The City of Newport Beach "Temporary Tow -Away, No Parking" signs are available at the Public Works Department public counter. The Contractor shall print the hours and dates of parking restriction on the "NO PARKING -TOW AWAY" sign in 2 -inch high non -erase letters and numbers. A sample of the completed sign shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to posting. Add the following Section 7-10.6 Notice to Residents 7-10.6 Notices to Residents. Ten working days prior to starting work, the Contractor shall deliver a construction notice to residents within 500 feet of the project, describing the project and indicating the limits of construction. The City will provide the notice. Forty-eight hours prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall distribute to the residents a second written notice prepared by the City clearly indicating specific dates in the space provided on the notice when construction operations will start for each block or street, what disruptions may occur, and approximately when construction will be complete. An interruption of work at any location in excess of 14 calendar days shall require re -notification. The Contractor shall insert the applicable dates and times at the time the notices are distributed. The written notices will be prepared by the City, but shall be completed and distributed by the Contractor. Errors in distribution, false starts, acts of God, strikes or other alterations of the schedule will require Contractor re -notification using an explanatory letter furnished by the City. SP 9 OF 13 7-15 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSES. At the time of the award and until completion of work, the Contractor shall possess a "B" License and its subcontractors must possess the appropriate speciality license for the subcontractor work and associated trade for the work they are performing. At the start of work and until completion of work, the Contractor and all Sub -contractors shall possess a valid Business License issued by the City of Newport Beach. 7-16 CONTRACTOR'S RECORDS/AS BUILT DRAWINGS. A stamped set of approved plans and specifications shall be on the job site at all times. In addition, the Contractor shall maintain "As -Built" drawings of all work as the job progresses. A separate set of drawings shall be maintained for this purpose. These drawings shall be up-to-date and reviewed by the Engineer at the time each progress bill is submitted. Any changes to the approved plans that have been made with approval from the Engineer shall be documented on the "As -Built" drawings. The "As -Built' shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to final payment or release of any bonds. The Contractor shall maintain books, records, and documents in accord with generally accepted accounting principles and practices. These books, records, and documents shall be retained for at least three years after the date of completion of the project. During this time, the material shall be made available to the Engineer. Suitable facilities are to be provided for access, inspection, and copying of this material." SECTION 9 ---MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 9-3 PAYMENT 9-3.1 General. Revise paragraph two to read: "The unit and lump sum prices bid for each item of work shown on the proposal shall include full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment and doing all the work, including restoring all existing improvements, to complete the item of work in place and no other compensation will be allowed thereafter. Payment for incidental items of work not separately listed shall be included in the prices shown for the other related items of work. The following items of work pertain to the bid items included within the Proposal: Item No. 1 The demolition and reconstruction of the Existing Lifeguard Headquarters per plans and specifications as well as Project Manual other than worked covered within bid items 2 and 3 for the Lifeguard Headquarters renovation project. Bids shall be items per CSI divisions found in the Technical Specifications. Item No. 2 Mobilization and Demobilization: Work under this item shall include providing bonds, insurance and financing, establishing a field office, preparing the BMP SP 10 OF 13 Plan and construction schedule, attending all construction meetings, and all other related work as required by the Contract Documents. It shall also include work to demobilize from the project site including but not limited to site cleanup, removal of USA Markings and providing any required documentation as noted in these Special Provisions. Item No. 3 Provide As -Built Drawings: Work under this item shall include all actions necessary to provide as -built drawings. These drawings must be kept up to date and submitted to the Engineer for review prior to request for payment. An amount of $5,000 is determined for this bid item. The intent of this pre-set amount is to emphasize to the Contractor the importance of as -build drawings. ADDITIVE BID ITEM Item No. Al Furnish and Install New Generator, fuel tank, signage, conduits, wiring, electrical gear, and technical specifications. Item No. A2 Additional shear wall paneling per Exhibit 1. Contractor to provide a complete system and finish materials if not already described in plans. Item No. A3 Contractor to furnish and install new masonry (CMU) wall, reinforced and connected to existing foundation and framing system per Exhibit 2. 9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. Delete the third paragraph and replace with the following: "From each progress estimate, five (5) percent will be retained by the Agency, and the remainder less the amount of all previous payments will be paid." Add to this section: "Partial payments for mobilization shall be made in accordance with Section 10264 of the California Public Contract Code." PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS Refer to the plans and Technical Specifications for additional materials and systems not listed in the following sections. 201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE SP 11 OF 13 201-1.1.2 Concrete Specified by Class. Add to this section: "Portland Cement concrete for construction shall be Class 560-C-3250." 201-2 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE 201-2.2.1 Reinforcing Steel. Add to this section: "Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 steel conforming to ASTM A 615 with 2 -inch minimum cover unless shown otherwise on the plans." 201-7 NON -MASONRY GROUT 201-7.2 Quick Setting Grout. Add to this section: "The Contractor shall grout the area between an existing reinforced concrete structure and the new storm drain pipe with a quick setting grout." SECTION 203 — BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 203-5 EMULSION -AGGREGATE SLURRY 203-5.2 Materials. Replace a) with the following: "Emulsified Asphalt shall be of a quick set type. It shall be cationic unless otherwise specified and shall conform to the requirements of CQS-1h of 203-1.3 (Test Reports and Certification), 203-3.2, and to the following specifications when tested according to appropriate ASTM Methods: 1/ 1 H,a 1 M, 11. Furol Viscosity at 77 degrees F sec. 15 50 Sieve Test 0.10 Residue from distillation. % 60 80 Penetration of Residue at 77 degrees F 40 75 Particle Charge Test Positive Replace 2) with the following: "ADDITIVES Latex - Latex shall be Ultrapave 65K produced by the Textile Rubber and Cement Company, Inc., or equal approved by the Engineer in advance of ordering the latex additive. It shall be added to the emulsified asphalt by the co -mill method at the emulsion plant at the rate of 2'/z percent of weight of the emulsified asphalt. Latex - added emulsified asphalt shall be kept in a suspended state by an agitating mixer and mixed every three days. Materials testing shall be performed as directed by the Engineer." Replace in Table 203-5.2 (B): Sand Equivalent shall range from a value of 55 to a value of 45." SP 12 OF 13 203-5.3 Composition and Grading. Add this Section: "Replace Residual Asphalt percentage of Dry Aggregate Weight for Type II aggregate from a value of 7.5 minimum to 8.5 minimum." 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE 203-6.4 Asphalt Concrete Mixtures. 203-6-4.3 Composition of Grading: Add this Section: "Asphalt Concrete for the finish course shall be C2 64-10 and B 64-10 for the base course. Add the following Section 301.5 Solid Waste Diversion PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS SECTION 300 ---EARTHWORK 300-1.5 Solid Waste Diversion. Non -reinforced concrete and asphalt wastes generated from the job site shall be disposed of at a facility that crushes such materials for reuse. Excess soil and other recyclable solid wastes shall not be disposed of at a sanitary landfill. The Contractor shall maintain monthly tonnage records of total solid wastes generated and solid wastes disposed of at a sanitary landfill. The Contractor shall report said tonnage monthly to the Engineer and provide appropriate confirmation documentation from the recycling facility. All material disposal manifests shall be provided to the Engineer prior to release of final retention." SECTION 302 ---ROADWAY SURFACING SECTION 302-4 EMULSION -AGGREGATE SLURRY 302-4.3 Application 302-4.3.1 General. Add to this section; "Type I slurry shall be applied at the rate of 9.5 pounds per square yard. Type II slurry shall be applied at the rate of 13 pounds per square yard. At all intersections where the intersecting street does not receive a slurry seal, slurry seal application shall end along a projection of the edge of gutter (or curb face if no gutter exists) of the intersecting street unless otherwise directed by the Engineer." SP 13 OF 13 302-4.3.2 Spreading. Replace the first sentence of the second paragraph with, "Slurry seal shall be sufficiently cured for vehicle traffic without tracking or damage to the surface by 3:00 p.m. on the same day. In case of damage done by vehicles and/or pedestrians upon slurry that has not been sufficiently cured by 3:00 p.m., the Contractor shall replace all of the damaged work at the Contractor's expense and no additional compensation shall be made by the City. Upon the completion of the day's slurry, street or parking lot shall be temporary striped. Final striping shall be installed no more than ten (10) working days after placement of slurry." Replace the first sentence of the third paragraph with, "Prior to the slurry application, the Contractor shall clean all work surfaces and remove all loose materials, vegetation, oil, and other foreign material. Additionally, all weeded locations shall be treated by an approved weed -killer before any slurry shall be applied." 302-4.3.3 Field Sampling. Add this section: "Upon the Engineer's direction, the Contractor shall slurry seal test sections within the construction limits for each batch of slurry mix. The Contractor shall apply the slurry test sections as directed by the Engineer. No slurry shall be applied until the test slurry sections have been approved the Engineer. The costs of these slurry tests shall be included in the contract price paid for slurry seal and no additional compensation shall be made by the City to the Contractor. Field samples that do not meet the requirements of Table 301-4.2.2 (A) shall be re -tested. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cost associated with the re -testing." The Contractor shall fully comply with the following Architect's Technical Specification for the Construction of the Newport Lifeguard Headquarters Renovation which augments, but is not referenced to in the above sections of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. APPENDIX - ARCHITECT'S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard AQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0101 Project Title Page CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION Section 00 0101 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, GENERAL PROVISIONS, SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS END OF PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0 0 - Project Title Page 8/90/2013 Page I of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 00 01 01 - Project Title Page &30/2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 00 0101 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 0110 Table of Contents PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Division 00 -- Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders 00 21 16 - Instructions to Proposers SPECIFICATIONS Division 01 -- General Requirements O1 10 00 -Summary 0120 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 0125 00 - Substitutions 01 26 13 —Interpretation of Contract Documents 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements 0131 19— Project Meetings 0132 16 — Construction Progress Schedule O1 33 00 - Submittals 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements 01 42 13 -Abbreviations 0145 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities 01 52 13 - Field Offices and Sheds 0155 00 - Vehicular Access and Parking 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls 01 60 00 - Product Requirements O1 6100 — Seismic Requirements for Non -Structural Components 01 71 23 —Field Engineering 01 7135 — Restoration of Improvements O1 73 29 — Cutting and Patching 0174 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 74 20 — Cleaning 01 77 00 —Contact Closeout 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements 00 01 10 - Table of Contents 8/3012013 Page 1 of 4 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 02 -- Existing Conditions 02 4100 — Demolition 02 41 19 — Selective Structure Demolition Division 03 -- Concrete 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete Division 04 -- Masonry (NOT USED) Division 05 -- Metals 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 05 73 - Wood Treatment 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry 06 15 00 - Wood Decking 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework 06 82 00 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing 07 12 00 - Built -Up Bituminous Waterproofing 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing 07 15 13 - Lead Sheet Waterproofing 07 16 13 - Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing 07 2100 - Then -nal Insulation 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles 07 46 33 - Plastic Siding 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 7100 - Roof Specialties 07 7123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories 07 84 00 - Firestopping 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 2 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 08 -- Openings 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights 08 7100 - Door Hardware 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager 08 80 00 - Glazing 08 9100 - Louvers Division 09 -- Finishes 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 30 00 - Tiling 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating Division 10 -- Specialties 10 14 00 - Signage 10 21 13 - Metal Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties 10 5100 - Lockers 10 56 13 -Metal Storage Shelving Division 11 -- Equipment 11 31 00 -Residential Appliances 1152 13 - Projection Screens Division 12 — Furnishings 12 21 13 - Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 36 00 — Countertops 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 3 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 13 -- Special Construction (NOT USED) Division 14 -- Conveying Equipment (NOT USED) Division 21 -- Fire Suppression (NOT USED) Division 22 -- Plumbing 22 05 03 — Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 23 — General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 — Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 — Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation 22 34 00 — Fuel -Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning (HVAC) 23 05 29 — Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00—HVAC Insulation 23 09 23 — VVT Control System 23 11 23 - Facility Natural -Gas Piping 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories 23 34 00 — HVAC Fans 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets 23 40 00 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices 23 55 00 — Fuel Fired Heaters 23 8103 — Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units — Small Capacity 23 81 26 — Split -System Air -Conditioners Division 26 -- Electrical 26 00 60 — Electrical Demolition 26 0100 — Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 03 — Equipment Wiring Connections 26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 4 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 —Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 48 — Seismic Controls for Electrical Work 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 72 — Acceptance Testing 26 05 73 — Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices 26 24 13 - Switchboards 26 24 16 - Panelboards 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices 26 28 13 - Fuses 26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches 26 32 13 - Engine Generator 26 36 23 — Automatic Transfer Switch 26 5100 - Interior Lighting 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting Division 27 — Communications 27 05 23 — Television System 27 05 26 — Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 27 05 29 — Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems 27 05 33 — Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems 27 05 53 — Identification for Communications Systems 27 13 00 — Structured Cabling System 27 13 43 — Communication Service Cabling 27 41 16—Integrated AudioNisual System 27 51 16 — Public Address System 27 5130 — Hearing Assistance System Division 28 — Electronic Safety and Security 28 05 33 — Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security 28 05 53 — Identification for Electronic Safety and Security 28 16 00 - Intrusion Alarm 28 23 00 — Closed Circuit Television System 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm System 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 3/30/2013 Page 5 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Division 31 -- Earthwork 31 23 16 —Trenching 3123 23 —Fill Division 32 -- Exterior Improvements 32 12 16 — Bituminous Concrete Paving 32 12 17 —Tack Coat 32 17 23 - Painted Pavement Markings 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers Division 33 -- Utilities 33 31 11 — Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 -Table of Contents 8/30/2013 Page 6 of 6 Section 00 0110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 1 Section 00 2113 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders &30i2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 00 2113 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 21 16 Instructions to Proposers PART 1 COMPETITION PROCESS 1.01 PROJECT SCHEDULE 1.02 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS A. The RFP Documents will consist of: Section 00 2116 1. The Request for Proposal, including: a. Project Information. b. The Instructions to Proposers. c. The Proposal Form. d. The Agreement and Conditions of the Contract and Contract Definitions. 2. The Conceptual Documents, as defined in Section 00 7100, including: a. The Project Program. b. The Design Criteria. c. The Specifications. B. Proposal Submission: Date as indicated in schedule. 1. Location: The office of the Owner. 2. Number of Copies: 1 original of Proposal and Exhibits. a. 2 extra copies of all written materials. C. Proposals will be opened publicly at the place where proposals are to be submitted. D. Acceptance, Award, And Rejection: All proposals will remain subject to acceptance for the time period indicated in Section 00 01 02 - Project Information, but City may, at its sole discretion, release any proposal and return the proposal security prior to that date. 1. City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, including without limitation the right to reject any or all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional proposals. 2. City reserves the right to reject the proposal of any proposer if City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the project to make an award to that proposer, whether because the proposal is not responsive or the proposer is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by City. 3. City also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the work, and to negotiate contract terms with the apparent successful proposer. E. Execution Of Agreement: When the City gives a Notice of Award to the successful proposer, the proposer will be expected to execute the Agreement within 15 days thereafter and deliver the required contract security. PART EVALUATION 2.01 THE EVALUATORS 2.02 SELECTION CRITERIA A. Proposal Exhibits: Submit drawings, specifications, and other data as indicated on the Proposal Form of form and character sufficient to adequately explain the design intent and the character of the proposed construction; incorporate into the exhibits all substantiation specified in the Performance Specifications as to be submitted for the Proposal. B. Qualifications Criteria: To demonstrate qualifications to perform the work, each proposer must submit written evidence, as called for below, on the Qualifications Form attached. 00 21 16 - Instructions to Proposers 10/8/2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 2116 The individuals or entities that will be providing design professional services must be listed in the Proposal. C. Minimum Qualifications Required: I. Licensure of design professionals in applicable jurisdiction. 2. Minimum Experience in Similar Projects: Similar type, size, and scope. a. Design -Builder Team: 2 projects. b. Construction Team: 2 projects. c. Design Team: 2 projects. 3. Minimum Experience in Design -Build Method of Contracting: a. Design -Builder Team: 2 projects. b. Construction Team: 2 projects. c. Design Team: 2 projects. D. Additional Qualifications Criteria: The following criteria will be used to distinguish between otherwise apparently equivalent qualifications, in the order given: PART 3 TERMS AND PROCEDURES 3.01 QUESTIONS A. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Documents are to be directed to the City's RFP Consultant at the address indicated in Section 00 01 02 - Project Information. B. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the City in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda faxed or mailed to all parties recorded by City as having received the Proposal Documents. C. Proposers may arrange for courier delivery at their own expense. D. Questions received later than the date indicated in Section 00 0102 - Project Information may not be answered. E. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding; oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. F. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Proposal Documents as deemed advisable by the City. 3.02 BRIEFINGS A. Representatives of the City will be present to discuss the project. B. City will transmit to all prospective proposers of record such Addenda as the City considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. C. Oral statements made at briefings may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. 3.03 EXAMINATION OF CONCEPTUAL DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. It is the responsibility of each proposer, before submitting a proposal, to: B. Examine the Proposal Documents thoroughly. C. Visit the site to become familiar with and satisfy the proposer as to the general, local, and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the work. D. Consider federal, state, and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the work. 00 21 16 - Instructions to Proposers mie/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 2116 E. Study and carefully correlate the proposer's knowledge and observations with the Proposal Documents and other related data. F. Promptly notify the City of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies which the proposer has discovered in the Proposal Documents. 3.04 SUPPLEMENTARY INVESTIGATIONS A. Before submitting a proposal each proposer will be responsible for obtaining such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise, which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the work, or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction to be employed by the proposer and safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or which the proposer deems necessary to prepare its proposal for performing the work in accordance with the time, price, and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.05 AVAILABILITY OF SITE FOR WORK 3.06 CONTRACT TIME A. The time within which the work is to be completed will be incorporated into the Agreement. B. The apparent successful proposer will be required to satisfy City that it will be able to achieve Substantial Completion and final completion within the designated times. 3.07 PROPOSAL FORM A. Proposal Form: The Proposal Form is included in the Proposal Documents; additional copies may be obtained from the City. B. All blanks on the Proposal Form must be completed by printing in black ink or by typewriter. 1. In addition to signatures, names must be typed or printed in blank ink. 2. The address, telephone number, fax number, and email address for communications regarding the proposal must be shown. C. Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature. 1. The official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. D. Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. 1. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. 2. If the proposer is an out-of-state corporation, evidence of authority to conduct business in the state where the work is to be performed must be attached. E. The Proposal Form shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which must be filled in on the Proposal Form. 3.08 PROPOSAL EXHIBITS A. All materials submitted will become the property of the City. B. City reserves the right to publish or display publicly all exhibits. 3.09 PROPOSAL SUBMISSION A. Proposals shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope or box, marked with the project title and the designated portion of the project for which it is submitted and the name and address of the proposer. 00 21 16 - Instructions to Proposers 10ie/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 00 2116 B. If the submission is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope or box shall be enclosed in a separate envelope marked "QUALIFICATIONS ENCLOSED" or "PROPOSAL ENCLOSED" (as applicable). C. All Exhibits shown on the Proposal Form shall accompany the Proposal Form in the same envelope or box; clearly identify each separate item with the proposer's name and project name. 3.10 DISQUALIFICATION A. Any proposer may be disqualified due to breach of proposal procedures, modification of proposal after submission, or withdrawal of proposal after submission. 3.11 EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT A. Notice of Award will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned copies of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. B. The RRM Design Group shall sign and deliver the required number of copies of the Agreement and attached documents to City with the required contract security. C. Within 15 days thereafter City shall deliver one fully signed copy to the RRM Design Group. D. The Conditions of the Contract set forth the City's requirements as to performance and payment bonds or other contract security. When the successful proposer delivers the executed Agreement to City, it must be accompanied by the required contract security. End of Section 00 21 16 - Instructions to Proposers 10ie/2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0110 00 Summary PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project. B. City's Name: Newport Beach. C. Architect's Name: RRM Design Group. D. The Project consists of the alteration of an existing 2 -story structure. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK Section 0110 00 A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings. B. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings. C. Plumbing: Replace existing system with new construction, keeping existing in operation until ready for changeover. D. HVAC: Replace existing system with new construction, keeping existing in operation until ready for changeover. E. Electrical Power and Lighting: Replace existing system with new construction, keeping existing in operation until ready for changeover. F. Telephone: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. City does not intend to occupy the existing building during the entire construction period. They will maintain a minor presence on-site via the use of a small storage unit, which will be kept in the project's parking lot. B. City intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. C. Cooperate with City to minimize conflict and to facilitate City's operations. D. Schedule the Work to accommodate City occupancy. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required bylaw and by City: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED End of Section 01 10 00 - Summary 101er2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 10 00 - Summary 10/82013 Page 2 of 2 Section 0110 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0120 00 Section 0120 00 Price and Payment Procedures PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 5 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following 1. Item Number. 2. Description of work. 3. Scheduled Values. 4. Previous Applications. 5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application. 6. Authorized Change Orders. 7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application. 8. Percentage of Completion. 9. Balance to Finish. 10. Retainage. E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. F. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. 1.04 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED End of Section 0120 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 10/8/2013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 10182013 Page 2 of 1 Section 0120 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0125 00 Substitutions PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 "Or Equal' Substitutions Section 0125 00 A. One Product Specified: Unless the Specifications state that no substitution is permitted, whenever in the Contract Documents any specific article, device, equipment, product, material, fixture, patented process, form, method, or type of construction is indicated or specified by name, make, trade name, or catalog number, with or without the words "or equal', such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating description of material, process, or article desired and shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or equal'. Contractor may, unless otherwise stated, offer any material, process, or article, which shall be substantially equal or better in every respect to that so indicated or specified and will completely accomplish the purpose of the Contract Documents. B. Two or More Products Specified: When two or more acceptable products are specified for an item of the Work, the choice will be up to the Contractor. Contractor shall utilize the same product throughout the Project. If a timely substitution request as set forth in Section 1.02.A. is not provided and an "or equal' substitution is requested, the City may consider the substitution only if the product specified is no longer commercially available. 1. The burden of proof as to the equality of any material, process or article shall rest with the Contractor, and the Contractor shall submit all data substantiating a request for an "or equal' substitution item as provided in Section 3400 of the Public Contract Code, Specification Section 01310 and other specific sections of the specifications prior to Award of Contract. 1.02 Request for Substitutions A. Substitute Request Form: Requests for substitutions of products, materials, or processes other than those specified must be made on the Substitution Request form attached. Requests must be submitted fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the date of the Bid Opening to be considered. An addendum will be issued seven (7) calendar days prior to Bid Opening, identifying all equipment and materials deemed equivalent to those specified and approved by the Architect. B. Substitution Request Content: A substitution request must constitute a representation that the subcontractor/general contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it is equal in quality and serviceability of the specified item. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work, which may be required for the work to be complete with no additional cost to General Contractor / Owner. 4. Will be acceptable in consideration of the required design and artistic effect. 5. Will require no excessive or more expensive maintenance including adequacy and availability of replacement parts. 6. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension, which may subsequently become apparent. 7. Will reimburse City for review or redesign services by the Architect and re -approval fees by authorities, agencies, or the City. C. Substitution Submittal Procedure: Contractor shall furnish four (4) copies of the requested information sufficient to determine whether the proposed substitution is equivalent including, but not limited to, all 0125 00 - Substitutions 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0125 00 drawings, specifications, samples, performance data, calculations, and other information as may be required to assist the Architect and the City in determining whether the proposed substitution is acceptable. 2. The final decision shall be the City's. City may condition its approval of the substitution upon delivery to City of an extended warranty or other assurances of adequate performance of the substitution. 3. If the Substitution is Permitted: The Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible for fitting approved substituted material and equipment into the available space in a manner acceptable to the City and for the proper operation of the substituted equipment with all other equipment with which it may be associated. The Contractor shall bear all costs of meeting the above requirements for presenting a proposed substitution, and if the substitution is accepted, the Contractor must bear all costs involved including costs of Construction Manager's, Architect's, and Engineer's services required in adapting the substituted material or equipment to the installation to the complete satisfaction of the City. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED End of Section O1 25 00 - Substitutions &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 012613 Interpretation of Contract Documents (Prior to Bid) PART1-GENERAL 1.01 Interpretation of Contract Documents Section 012613 A. If any firm contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed contract is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the drawings, specifications, or other Contract Documents, or finds discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings or specifications, he or she shall submit to the Architect a written request (use attached "Request for Interpretation" form) for an interpretation or correction thereof not later than ten (10) calendar days before the date bids will be opened. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation or correction of the Contract Documents will be made only by Addendum and will be faxed or e-mailed and/or mailed to each person receiving a set of such documents. City will not be responsible for any other explanation or interpretation of the Contract Documents. 1.02 Requests for Interpretation A. Page 2 of Section 012613 is a form titled, "Request for Interpretation". Bidders are to use this form to submit written requests for interpretation or corrections by fax or e-mail to the City's Construction Management Firm: Project Dimensions (949) 476-2246 ATTN: Blair Fickett E-mail address: bfickett@projectdimensions.com To expedite the interpretation process, interpretations may be faxed or e-mailed to bidders as addenda, follow-up hard copies may be delivered by mail. B. All information must be filled out on the form as pertains to the Contractor's information: Company name, address, phone, fax number, e-mail, contact person, date, and time of request. Questions or Requests for Clarification are to be printed or typed on these forms. If bidders have several questions, which will not fit on one form, the bidder is to photo copy the form, number each page, and submit multiple forms. 1.03 Deadline for Requests for Interpretation - All requests for interpretation must be received by noon of the tenth (10th) calendar day preceding the bid date. End of Section 01 26 13 - Interpretation of Contract Documents (Prior to Bid) 10/7/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 26 13 - Interpretation of Contract Documents (Prior to Bid) 1017/2013 Page 2 of 2 Section 012613 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Preconstruction Conference Section 013119 A. Prior to commencement of work, a preconstruction conference will be held to discuss procedures to be followed during the progress of the work. B. Location: A convenient site for all parties designated by the City. C. Attending shall be: 1. City's Representative 2. Construction Manager 3. Architect or Architect's designated representative. 4. Contractor 5. Contractor's Superintendent 6. Major Listed Subcontractors 7. Others subcontractors as appropriate 8. Testing Lab and Inspection 1.02 Labor Compliance Program Meeting A. Prior to commencement of work, a labor compliance conference will be held to discuss procedures to be followed during the progress of the work. B. Location: A convenient site for all parties designated by the City. C. Attending shall be: 1. City's Representative 2. Construction Manager 3. Architect or Architect's designated representative. 4. Contractor 5. Contractor's Superintendent 6. All Subcontractors 7. Testing Lab and Inspection 1.03 Preinstallation Conference A. Prior to commencement of the work listed below, a preinstallation conference will be held to discuss procedures to be followed during the progress of the work. 1. Plumbing Fixture Layout - prior to rough out 2. Roofing 3. Others as requested by the Construction Manager B. Location: A convenient site for all parties designated by the City. C. Attending shall be: 1. City's Representative 2. Construction Manager/Project Inspector 3. Architect or Architect's designated representative 4. Contractor 5. Contractor's Superintendent 6. Affected Subcontractors 7. Testing Lab and Inspection 013 1 19 - Project Meetings 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.04 Proposed Progress Meetings Section 013119 A. Weekly progress meetings will be conducted by the Construction Manager. B. Location: Construction Manager's field office C. Attending shall be: 1. Construction Manager/Project Inspector 2. Contractor's Project Manager 3. Contractor's Superintendent 4. Subcontractors, as appropriate to the issues to be reviewed 5. Suppliers, as appropriate to the issues to be reviewed 6. Others, as appropriate to the issues to be reviewed 7. City's Representative 8. Architect or Architect's designated representative. a. Consultants, as appropriate to the issues to be reviewed, as determined by the Construction Manager D. Construction manager will take and distribute meeting notes to the attendees. Attendees taking exception to anything in the meeting notes shall state same in writing, directed to Construction Manager within five (5) working days following receipt of meeting notes. 1.05 Billing Meetings A. As part of the last progress meeting each month, the Construction Manager may schedule and hold a billing meeting for the purpose of agreeing on the percentage of the work completed up to that date and establishing the amount to be requested in the Application for Payment. B. Location: Construction Manager's field office C. Attending shall be: 1. Construction Manager 2. City's Representative 3. Contractor 4. Architect or Architect's designated representative. D. Prepare an itemized draft of the month's proposed billing for review with the Project Team at the billing meeting. E. Following review of the proposed billing, revise as required, prepare Application for Payment, and submit to the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager will review, certify, and forward it to the City, who will authorize payment upon receipt of partial waivers of lien from the Contractor for previous payment, monthly certified payroll, and updated progress schedule. 1.06 Guarantee/Warranties, Bonds, and Service and Maintenance Contracts Review Meeting A. Eleven months following date of final completion and acceptance of the Owner, the Contractor shall arrange for and hold a meeting at the Project Site for the purpose of review of guarantees/warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts for materials and equipment. Contractor shall notify the following attendees of the date and time at least seven (7) days in advance. Contractor shall take action as appropriate to implement repair or replacement of defective items, and to extend service and maintenance contracts. B. Attending shall be: 1. The City's Representative 2. Construction Manager 3. Architect or Architect's designated representative. 013 1 19 - Project Meetings &30/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 4. Contractor 5. Subcontractors, as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers, as appropriate to the agenda 7. Others, as appropriate to the agenda PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED. End of Section 013 1 19 - Project Meetings &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Section 013119 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 013 1 19 - Project Meetings &30i2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 013119 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0132 16 Construction Progress Schedule PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 013216 A. Work under this section shall consist of furnishing computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) contract schedule showing in detail how the Contractor plans to execute and coordinate the work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. CPM Contract Schedule 1. Within seven (7) calendar days after receiving Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall furnish the City's Representative, Architect and Construction Manager each, two (2) prints of a CPM contract schedule (six copies total). 2. Construction Manager will review the CPM contract schedule for conformance with the requirements of the contract. Within seven (7) calendar days after receipt, City's Representative will accept the CPM contract schedule or will return it with comments. If the proposed CPM contract schedule is not accepted, Contractor shall revise the schedule to incorporate comments and resubmit the schedule for acceptance within seven (7) calendar days after receiving it. B. Construction Progress Schedule 1. Contractor shall submit to the Construction manager, Architect and City's Representative each month an up-to-date status report of the work. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The contract schedule shall be the basis for evaluating job progress, payment requests, and time extension requests. The responsibility for developing the contract schedule and monitoring actual progress as compared to the schedule rests with the Contractor. B. Failure of the contract schedule to include any element of the work, or any inaccuracy in the contract schedule, will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for accomplishing all the work in accordance with the contract. C. No constraint on any activity is allowed in the schedule unless it is required by the contract. The schedule should reflect a logical flow of the project activities. D. Acceptance of the official contract schedule will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for accomplishing the work in accordance with the contract. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. The Contractor's monthly Construction Progress Schedule report shall include: I. Contractor's estimated percentage complete for each activity not yet completed. 2. Actual start/finish dates for activities as appropriate. 3. Identification of processing errors, if any, on the previous update reports. 4. Revisions, if any, to the assumed activity durations, including revisions for weather impact, for any activities due to the effect of the previous update on the schedule. 5. Identification of activities which are affected by Cost Request Bulletin issued during the update period. 6. Resolution of conflict between actual work progress and schedule logic. When out -of -sequence activities develop in the contract schedule because of actual construction 01 32 16 -Construction Progress Schedule 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 013216 progress, the Contractor shall submit a revision to schedule logic to conform to current status and direction. B. Progress payments pursuant to the contract will require an update of the construction progress schedule. 1.05 SHORT INTERVAL SCHEDULE: A. Short Interval Scheduling (SIS) may be used throughout the on-site construction activity. B. The interval shall be a three (3) week projection and shall include the week submitted and two (2) weeks thereafter. C. It shall contain sufficient detail to evaluate daily milestones and manpower/equipment loading, and shall identify/tie into the monthly updated contract schedule. D. Short interval schedule shall be approved by the Construction Manager and City's Representative. E. Short interval schedule shall be submitted weekly. F. During the weekly construction meeting, the Construction Manager and the Contractor will review and discuss short interval schedules. 1.06 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Should the Contractor, after acceptance of the contract schedule, intend to change his plan of construction, the Contractor shall submit his requested revisions to the Construction Manager and City's Representative along with a written statement of the revision; including a description of the logic for rescheduling the work, methods of maintaining adherence to intermediate milestones, and other specific dates and the reasons for the revisions. If the requested changes are acceptable to the City's Representative, they will be incorporated into the contract schedule in the next reporting period. B. Schedule revisions shall be submitted at least seven (7) calendar days prior to the date of submission of update information. The City will have seven (7) calendar days to review the revisions. C. If the sequence of construction differs significantly from the contract schedule, as determined by the City's Representative or the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall submit within fifteen (15) calendar days a revised schedule to the City's Representative for acceptance. 1.07 SCHEDULE CHANGES A. When a Cost Request Bulletin is issued which has the potential to impact specified completion dates, a network window shall be prepared by the Contractor to reflect the impact of such changes, said network window shall be submitted to the City's Representative and Construction Manager. After the network window has been accepted, by the City's Representative and Construction Manager, and the Contractor ordered to proceed with the Cost Request Bulletin, it shall be incorporated into the contract schedule. Time extensions will be considered only to the extent there is insufficient remaining float to accommodate these changes, and pursuant to Part 1 of these specifications. No additional cost beyond that provided in the General Conditions will be allowed for the incorporation of approved Cost Request Bulletin into the contract schedule. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager, Architect and City's Representative, a network window for all claimed time extension requests showing the impact of claimed delay on the contract schedule. Time extensions shall be negotiated per the requirements of the General Conditions. 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 013216 C. Float or Slack Time is the amount of time between the earliest start date and the late start date or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date of activities of the contract schedule. No time extensions or delay costs will be allowed for delays caused by the City, on paths or activities containing float time, providing such delay does not exceed the float time per the latest updated version of the contract schedule. D. The City's Representative and Construction Manager shall have no obligation to consider any time extension request unless the requirements of the contract documents are complied with; the City shall not be responsible or liable to the Contractor for any construction acceleration due to failure of the City to grant time extensions under the contract documents should the Contractor fail to substantially comply with the submission requirements and the justification requirements of this contract for time extension requests. The Contractor's failure to perform in accordance with the contract schedule shall not be excused because the Contractor has submitted time extension requests; until, and unless, such requests are approved by the City. 1.08 RECOVERY SCHDEULE: A. If the contract schedule falls fourteen (14) calendar days behind schedule on milestone dates or completion dates, the Contractor shall be required to prepare and submit a Recovery Schedule to the Construction Manager and City's Representative, with form and detail appropriate to the need to explain, and display, how they intend to reschedule activities to regain compliance with the contract schedule during the immediate subsequent pay period. B. Upon acceptance by the Construction Manager and City's Representative, the recovery schedule shall be incorporated into the contract schedule by the Contractor. 1.09 PAYMENTS WITHHELD: A. Progress payments may be withheld in whole or in part should the Contractor fail to comply with the requirements of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED End of Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 013216 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0133 00 Submittals PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description Section 0133 00 A. To ensure that specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with plans and specifications, transmittal procedures have been established for submittals for review by the Construction Manager, the Architect, and the Owner. B. Make all following submittals in strict accord with provisions of this Section and with requirements of the General Conditions: 1. Progress Schedule. 2. Schedule of Values 3. Certification. 4. Shop Drawings. 5. Descriptive Data/Material Lists. 6. Samples. 7. Alternatives (Substitutions). 1.02 Related Requirements A. General Conditions. B. Section 017700 - Contract Closeout: C. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedule D. Test Reports: Pertinent Specification Sections. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Progress Schedule -- Prepare and submit progress schedule of procurement and fabrication activities, and component deliveries as required by Section 013216 and within the time of completion identified in Notice to Bidders. 2.02 Shop Drawings A. Submittals shall include six complete copies of each original, name and location of project, name of Contractor, and contract numbers and cross references to contract documents. Number shop drawings consecutively. Make drawings legible and complete in every respect. Refer to General Conditions. B. If shop drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or other reason, make specific mention of such variations in letter of transmittal, as well as on drawings, in order that (if acceptable) suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment of Contract. Unless specific changes have been noted and accepted, no deviations from Contract Documents will be permitted. 2.03 Product Data/Material Lists A. Manufacturer's Standard Schematic Drawings: 1. Modify drawings to delete information, which is not applicable to Project. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to Project. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations, and other standard descriptive data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products, or models. 01 33 00 - Submittals 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring diagrams and controls. 5. Include calculations when applicable. Section 0133 00 2.04 Samples — Where required by the specifications and by change orders, the Contractor shall provide at no additional cost: A. Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work is judged. B. Where size of samples is not specified, office samples should be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. a. After review, samples may be used in construction of project. PART 3- 3.01 Submission Requirements A. Schedule submissions at least eight weeks before dates reviewed submittals will be needed. Some submissions may be required to be submitted even earlier. B. Identification: Identify all submittals with names and location of project, name of Contractor and contract numbers. 1. Submittals shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal addressed to Construction Manager following format and procedures established at the Preconstruction Conference. 2. Each subinittal shall be consecutively numbered and shall contain list of items submitted, properly identified as to drawing numbers, Specifications Section or other identification. 3. Submittals not adequately identified will be returned to Contractor for correction and resubmittal. C. Architect will review submittals for conformance with Contract Documents and acceptance by Architect covers only such conformance. Responsibility for accuracy and correction and resubmittal shall be the Contractor's. D. Acceptance of submittals will be general and shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for proper fitting and construction of work, nor from furnishing materials and work required by Contract, which may not be indicated on submittals. E. No portion of work requiring submittals that affect the construction shall be commenced until submittal has been reviewed and accepted by Architect. All such portions of work shall be in accordance with accepted submittals. F. Number of copies required by Architect: Provide copies as follows; or greater quantity where so specified in individual Specification Section. Add number of copies required by Contractor for distribution to the following numbers: 1. Schedule of Values: Two (2) copies AIA form G107 with backup sheets. 2. Certification: Three (3) copies 3. Samples: As specifically indicated in pertinent Specification Section. 4. Samples for Color/Pattern Selection. Three (3) sets of manufacturer's complete range for initial selection: and additional samples as requested of selected color/pattern for inclusion in final color schedule. 5. Alternatives: Six (6) copies of all required related data and information. 01 33 00 - Submittals &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0133 00 3.02 Submittals shall include (where applicable): A. Date and revision dates. 1. Project title and work order number. 2. Names of Contractor, subcontractor and supplier or manufacturer. 3. Identification of product or material. 4. Relation to adjacent structure or material. 5. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 6. Specification Section number. 7. Consecutive submittal number. 8. Blank space for Architect's stamp and approving agency as required. 9. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION O1 33 00 - Submittals &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 33 00 - Submittals &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 0133 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0140 00 Quality Requirements PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Definitions Section 0140 00 A. Soils Engineer and Testing Laboratory: The City will retain a qualified soils engineer and testing laboratory to perform tests and report on work as specified in the contract documents, and as otherwise required. B. Testing Agency: An organization other than the testing laboratory, retained and paid by the City to perform tests and report on whether or not designated items of work comply with the requirements of the contract documents. 1.02 Tests A. The City will select an independent testing laboratory to conduct the tests. Selection of the material required to be tested shall be by the laboratory or the City's representative and not by the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall notify the City's representative a sufficient time in advance of the manufacture of material to be supplied by him under the contract documents, which must by terms of the Contract be tested, in order that the City may arrange for the testing of same at the source of supply. C. Any material shipped by the Contractor from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from said representative that such testing and inspection will not be required shall not be incorporated in the job. D. The City will select and pay testing laboratory costs for all tests and inspections, but may be reimbursed by the Contractor for such costs under the contract documents. 1.03 Testing Laboratory A. General: Services of a testing laboratory are required for work specified in various individual specification Sections. B. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Contractor shall cooperate with testing laboratory personnel. 2. Furnish copies of product test reports as specified. 3. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to work to be tested b. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested as requested by the testing lab c. To facilitate inspections and tests d. To facilitate storage and curing of test samples e. To fabricate testing samples as indicated 1.04 Test Reports A. The testing laboratory will distribute reports as follows: 1. Construction Manager (1 copy) 2. Architect (I copy) 3. Applicable Consultants (1 copy each) 4. State Agencies as appropriate 5. City's Project hispector 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0140 00 B. The Owner shall distribute reports in the same manner and number as for the testing laboratory. 1.05 Retesting A. The City Representative shall have the right to order additional tests as instructed if he has reasonable doubt that materials comply with Specification requirements. 1. If additional tests establish that materials comply with Specification requirements, costs for such tests will be paid by the City. 2. If additional tests establish that materials do not comply with Specification requirements, costs for such retests shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.06 Inspection by the City A. The City, Construction Manager and Architect shall, at all times, have access for the purpose of inspection to all parts of the work and to the shops wherein the work is in preparation, and the Contractor shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for such inspection. B. The City, Architect and Construction Manager shall have the right to reject materials and quality of work, which are defective, or to require their correction. Rejected work quality shall be satisfactorily corrected and rejected materials shall be removed from the premises without charge to the City. If the Contractor does not correct such rejected work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the City may correct same and charge the expense to the Contractor. C. Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the City, Architect or Construction Manager, at any time before final acceptance of the entire work to make an examination of the work already completed by removing or tearing out the same, the Contractor shall on request promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and materials. If such work is found to be defective in any respect due to the fault of the Contractor or his subcontractor, he shall defray all expenses of such examinations and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the additional cost of labor and material necessarily involved in the examination and replacement shall be allowed the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 0140 00 F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. 1. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. 2. Observer subject to approval of Architect. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not confornling to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. End of Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements &30i2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 0140 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0142 13 Abbreviations PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Abbreviations A. The following abbreviations may be used in the contract documents: AAMAArchitectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association Section 014213 AASHTOAmerican Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACIAmerican Concrete Institute AIAAmerican Institute of Architects AIMAAcoustical and Insulation Materials Association AISCAmerican Institute of Steel Construction ANSIAmerican National Standards Institute APAAmerican Plywood Association ASHRAEAmerican Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and air-conditioning Engineers ASMEAmerican Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTMAmerican Society for Testing and Materials AWIArchitectural Woodwork Institute AWPIAmerican Wood Preservers' Association AWSAmerican Welding Society BHMABuilders Hardware Manufacturers' Association BMPBest Mangement Practices BTUBritish Thermal Unit CACCalifornia Administrative Code CAL/OSHAState of California Construction Safety Orders CBCCalifornia Building Code CECCalifornia Electric Code C FCChl orofluorocarbon CLFMIChain Link Fence Manufacturers' Institute CMCCalifornia Mechanical Code CPCCalifomia Plumbing Code CRSIConcrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CALTRANSState of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation, "Standard Specifications" ESOElectrical Safety Orders FAAFederal Aviation Administration FGMAFlat Glass Marketing Association FMFactory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation FSFederal Specifications FSCForest Stewardship Council HVACHeating, Ventilation, & Air Conditioning IAQIndoor Air Quality IBCInternational Building Code LEEDLeadership in Energy and Environmental Design MMState of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation, "Materials Manual" NECNational Electrical Code 01 42 13 -Abbreviations 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 NEMANational Electric Manufacturers' Association NFPANational Fire Protection Association Section 014213 PSUnited States Department of Commerce Product Standard RISRedwood Inspection Service SFMState of California, Office of State Fire Marshal SMACNASheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. SRISolar Reflectance Index TCATile Council of America UBCUnifonn Building Code ULUnderwriters Laboratories, Inc. USGBCUnited States Green Building Council USSUnited States Standard VOCVolotile Organic Compound WCLIBWest Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WlWoodwork Institute B. Additional abbreviations used only on the drawings are listed and defined thereon. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED. End of Section 01 42 13 -Abbreviations &30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0145 33 Code -Required Special Inspections PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Code -required special inspections. B. Testing services incidental to special inspections. C. Submittals. D. Manufacturers' field services. E. Fabricators' field services. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. Section 0145 33 B. Section 0140 00 -Quality Requirements. C. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010. B. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010. C. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 2012. D. ASTM C172/CI72M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 2010. E. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a. F. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2011. G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010. H. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2008. L AWS DIA/D I AM -Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011. J. IAS AC89 - Accreditation Criteria for Testing Laboratories; 2010. K. IAS AC291 - Accreditation Criteria for Special Inspection Agencies; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Special Inspection Agency Qualifications: Prior to the start of work, the Special Inspection Agency shall: 1. Submit agency name, address, and telephone number, names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 3. Submit certification that Special Inspection Agency is acceptable to AHJ. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Prior to the start of work, the Testing Agency shall: 01 45 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections 10/8/2013 Page 1 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0145 33 I. Submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 3. Submit certification that Testing Agency is acceptable to AHJ. D. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement: Manufacturer shall submit documentation of manufacturing capability and quality control procedures. Include documentation of AHJ approval. E. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Fabricator shall submit documentation of fabrication facilities and methods as well as quality control procedures. Include documentation of AHJ approval. F. Special Inspection Reports: After each special inspection, Special Inspector shall promptly submit two copies of report; one to Architect and one to the AHJ. G. Fabricator Special Inspection Reports: After each special inspection of fabricated items at the Fabricator's facility, Special Inspector shall promptly submit two copies of report; one to Architect and one to AHJ. H. Test Reports: After each test or inspection, promptly submit two copies of report; one to Architect and one to AHJ. L Certificates: When specified in individual special inspection requirements, Special Inspector shall submit certification by the manufacturer, fabricator, and installation subcontractor to Architect and AHJ, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports to Architect and AHJ. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.05 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY A. City or Architect will employ services of a Special Inspection Agency to perform inspections and associated testing and sampling required by the building code. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. City or Architect may employ services of an independent testing agency to perform additional testing and sampling associated with special inspections but not required by the building code. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special Inspection Agency Qualifications: 1. Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. 2. Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC291. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: 0145 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections 10/8/2013 Page 2 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0145 33 I. Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. 2. Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC89. C. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, GENERAL A. Frequency of Special Inspections: Special Inspections are indicated as continuous or periodic. 1. Continuous Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area where the work is being performed and observe the work at all times the work is in progress. 2. Periodic Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area where work is being performed and observe the work part-time or intermittently and at the completion of the work. 3.02 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR STEEL CONSTRUCTION A. High -Strength Bolt, Nut and Washer Material: I. Verify identification markings conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved contract and to AISC 360, A3.3; periodic. 2. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance; periodic. B. Welding: Structural steel and cold formed steel deck: a. Complete and partial joint penetration groove welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; continuous. b. Multipass fillet welds: Verify compliance with AWS DI. 1; continuous. c. Single pass fillet welds less than 5/16 inch wide: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; continuous. d. Plug and slot welds: Verify compliance with AWS DI J; continuous. e. Single pass fillet welds 5/16 inch or greater: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; periodic. f Floor and roof deck welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.3; continuous. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Verify items listed below comply with AWS DIA and ACI 318, Section 3.5.2. a. Verification of weldability; periodic. b. Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames as well as boundary elements of special structural walls of concrete and shear reinforcement; continuous. c. Shear reinforcement; continuous. d. Other reinforcing steel; periodic. 3.03 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION A. Reinforcing Steel, Including Prestressing of Tendons and Placement: Verify compliance with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 3.5 and 7.1 through 7.7; periodic. B. Reinforcing Steel Welding: Verify compliance with AWS D1.4 and ACI 318, 3.5.2; periodic. C. Design Mix: Verify plastic concrete complies with the design mix in approved contract documents and with ACI 318, Chapter 4 and 5.2; periodic. 0145 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections mi3r2013 Page 3 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0145 33 D. Specified Curing Temperature and Techniques: Verify compliance with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 5.11 through 5.13; periodic. E. Concrete Strength in Situ: Verify concrete strength complies with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 6.2, for the following. F. Formwork Shape, Location and Dimensions: Verify compliance with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 6.1.1; periodic. 3.04 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR PREFABRICATED WOOD CONSTRUCTION A. High Load Diaphragms: Verify compliance of each item below with approved contract documents. 1. Grade and thickness of sheathing. 2. Nominal size of framing members at adjacent panel edges. 3. Nail or staple diameter and length. 4. Number of fastener lines. 5. Fastener spacing at lines and at edges. 3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SOILS A. Materials and Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Design bearing capacity of material below shallow foundations; periodic. 2. Design depth of excavations and suitability of material at bottom of excavations; periodic. 3. Materials, densities, lift thicknesses; placement and compaction of backfill: continuous. 4. Subgrade, prior to placement of compacted fill; periodic. B. Testing: Classify and test excavated material; periodic. 3.06 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR DRIVEN DEEP FOUNDATIONS A. Materials, Equipment and Final Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Material types, sizes and lengths; continuous. 2. Capacities of test elements and additional load tests as required; continuous. 3. Placement locations and plumbness; continuous. 4. Type and size of hammer; continuous. B. Installation: Observe driving operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each element; continuous. 1. Record number of blows per foot of penetration. 2. Determine penetration required to achieve design capacity. 3. Record tip and butt elevations. 4. Document any damage to foundation element. 3.07 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR HELICAL PILE FOUNDATIONS A. Materials, Equipment and Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Type and capacity of equipment used; continuous. 2. Pile dimensions; continuous. 3. Tip elevation; continuous. 4. Final depth; continuous. 5. Final installation torque; continuous. 6. Placement locations and plumbness; continuous. 01 45 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections 10/8/2013 Page 4 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Other installation data requested in writing by Architect; continuous. 3.08 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE Section 0145 33 A. Designated Seismic System Verification: Verify label, anchorage or mounting conforms to certificate of compliance provided by manufacturer or fabricator. B. Structural Observations for Seismic Resistance: Visually observe structural system for general conformance with the approved contract documents; periodic. 3.09 CONTRACTOR DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities, General: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials for special inspections that require material verification. 2. Cooperate with agency and laboratory personnel; provide access to the work, to manufacturers' facilities, and to fabricators' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to work to be tested or inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested or inspected. c. To facilitate tests or inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing or inspection services. 5. Arrange with City's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 3.10 MANUFACTURERS' AND FABRICATORS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material suppliers, assembly fabricators, or product manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, to test, adjust, and balance equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. End of Section 0145 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections 10/8/2013 Page 5 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 0145 33 - Code -Required Special Inspections i➢/8/2013 Page 6 of 5 Section 0145 33 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0150 00 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls PARTIGENERAL 1.01 Work Included Section 0150 00 A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Temporary electric power and light. 3. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water and washing facilities. 4. Storm and sanitary sewer. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary enclosures. 2. Waste disposal services. 3. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary fire protection. 2. Enclosure fence for the site. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. Installer - Work to be performed only by workers thoroughly skilled and specifically trained in the techniques of installing prefmished interior panels. Installer to be currently approved by Manufacturer of prefinished panels. 1.03 Standards - Comply with the following listed standards A. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations B. ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition C. NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities D. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code." E. NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" F. NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." O1 50 00 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls &30i2013 Page 1 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.04 Project Conditions Section 0150 00 A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire -prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Open -Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120 -inch- (3 -mm-) thick, galvanized 2 -inch (50 -mm) chain link fabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) I.D. for corner posts. 2.02 Equipment A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4 -inch (19 -mm), heavy-duty, abrasion -resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA -polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120 -Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard -service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length -voltage ratio. E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered -glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job -built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable fmishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. G. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single -occupant toilet units of the chemical type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Provide self contained washing facilities, stocked with soap, disposable towels, and drinking cups; Use only potable water in Health Dept. approved containers. H. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand -carried, portable, UL -rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand -carried, portable, O1 50 00 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 8130/2013 Page 2 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0150 00 UL -rated, Class ABC, dry -chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures. I. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART3EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.02 Temporary Utility Installation A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. 1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked -in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the City's easements cannot be used for that purpose. 4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the City or Architect. Neither the City nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. B. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload -protected disconnects, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. 1. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used. 2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. C. Temporary Internet Access: Provide high speed internet access in the job trailer for use by superintendent and project staff. Provide high speed internet access to District trailer. D. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs. Maintain service until District allows use of permanent facilities. 3.03 Support Facilities Installation A. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Where O1 50 00 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 8130/2013 Page 3 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 0150 00 feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water. B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. C. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg Q. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. 3.04 Security and Protection Facilities Installation A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect. B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. C. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates. D. Provide open -mesh, chainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and earth or portable fencing, if appropriate, with sufficient hold down weight to prevent overturning.. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. F. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise -making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or ferns near the site. 3.05 Operation, Termination, and Removal A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. O1 50 00 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 8130/2013 Page 4 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0150 00 I. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. I. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period including, but not limited to, the following: End of Section O1 50 00 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 8130/2013 Page 5 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 8130/2013 Page 6 of 5 Section 0150 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 51 00 Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Power Service Characteristics: volt, ampere, three phase, four wire. B. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required. C. Provide main service disconnect and over -current protection at convenient location and meter. D. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. E. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 1.05 TEMPORARY HEATING A. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.06 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization. B. Connect to existing water source. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED End of Section 01 5 l 00 - Temporary Utilities 8/3012013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 51 00 -Temporary Utilities &30i2010 Page 2 of 1 Section 01 51 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 015213 Section 0152 13 Field Offices and Sheds PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary field offices for use of Contractor. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: 1.03 USE OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Existing facilities shall not be used for field offices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Contractor OFFICE AND FACILITIES A. Size: For Contractor's needs and to provide space for project meetings. B. Telephone: As specified in Section 01 50 00. C. Furnishings in Meeting Area: Conference table and chairs to seat at least eight persons; racks and files for Contract Documents, submittals, and project record documents. D. Equipment: Six adjustable band protective helmets for visitors, one 10 inch outdoor weather thermometer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. fnstall office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed. 3.02 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for offices. B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. 3.03 REMOVAL A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas. End of Section 01 52 13 - Field Offices and Sheds 8/30/2013 Page I of I Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 0152 13 - Field Offices and Sheds &30i2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 0152 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0155 00 Vehicular Access and Parking Section 0155 00 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access roads. B. Existing pavements and parking areas. C. Removal, repair. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 PREPARATION A. Clear areas, provide surface and storm drainage of road, parking, area premises, and adjacent areas. 2.02 ACCESS ROADS A. Use of designated existing on-site streets and driveways for construction traffic is permitted. B. Location as approved by Architect. C. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20 foot width driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials. 2.03 REMOVAL, REPAIR A. Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to original condition. B. Repair damage caused by installation. End of Section 0l 55 00 - Vehicular Access and Parking 8/3012013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 0155 00 - Vehicular Access and Parking &30i2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 0155 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0157 21 Indoor Air Quality Controls PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 0157 21 A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. 1.02 PROJECT GOALS A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture -impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. D. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay -in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. O1 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls 8/30/2013 Page 1 oft Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0157 21 E. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. F. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. End of Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0160 00 Product Requirements PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 0160 00 A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the City; notify City promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by City. C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the City, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the City, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing asbestos O1 60 00 -Product Requirements &30i2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS Section 0160 00 A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to City. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 01 60 00 -Product Requirements &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0160 00 F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. End of Section O1 60 00 -product Requirements &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 60 00 -Product Requirements &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 0160 00 SECTION 00 16 10 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS I2_13SWC3401I:1:L1111 iniliolONI�ONYA11.0 A. Nonstructural components, including seismic restraints and connection to the structure shall meet all requirements of the contract documents and the 2010 California Building Code (CBC), which includes the requirements of ASCE/SEI 7-05 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Structures', Section 13 B. This section includes seismic design requirements for nonstructural components including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Equipment and Conveyances. 2. Electrical Equipment and Conveyances. 3. Alarms and Fire Suppression Systems. 4. Communication Systems. 5. Data Systems. 6. Cladding. 7. Glazing. 8. Partitions. 9. Suspended Ceilings. 1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Nonstructural components, including seismic restraints and connections to the structure shall be designed to meet seismic requirements of the 2010 CBC and ASCE/SEI 7-05, Section 13. The following seismic criteria are applicable to this project. The Contractor shall obtain any required additional seismic criteria that may not be identified within this specification. B. Seismic Forces: ASCE/SEI 7-05 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." Section 13, using the following parameters: 1. Occupancy Category IV. 2. Seismic Design Category D. 3. MCE Spectral Response Acceleration, Ss = 1.586g MCE Spectral Response Acceleration, Si = 0.643g 4. Importance Factor (IP) = 1.0 5. Fp Shall be determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7-05, Section 13.3. C. The Component Amplification Factor (ap) and the Component Response Modification Factor (RP) shall be determined by the Contractor for each individual application, unless otherwise specified in the construction documents. D. For applications where combination of different ap and or Rp design values are intermixed, the design shall be based on the worst case within the mixture. When applicable, the following shall apply: 1. Steel, copper aluminum, and ductile iron, piping systems may be designed as High Deformability Elements. 2. Cast-iron and plastic piping systems may be designed as Limited Deformability Elements 3 Glass piping systems shall be designed as Low Deformability Elements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS Specifications 00 16 10 -1 1.3 DETAILED SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. All suspended systems and components shall be seismically restrained. B. Request for omission of seismic restraints for a given system or component, must be submitted to the Architect for review and acceptance. Omission request must include the following: 1. Referenced code language that Contractor believes to be supportive of requested seismic restraint omission. 2. Shop drawings indicating system or component included in omission request and any other systems and components located within 10 feet of the requested omission. 3. An itemized statement identifying the cost savings for labor and materials the Contractor agrees to credit back to the Owner. C. No omission of seismic restraint shall be permitted for the following: 1. All suspended emergency, life safety, and hazardous content systems and components. 2. All fire protection sprinkler piping. The omission of seismic restraints for certain sizes of fire protection sprinkler piping listed within NFPA, Factory Mutual, UL and other standards shall not be allowed. 3. All suspended vibration isolated systems and components. 4. All suspended equipment. D. Nonstructural components and systems shall be designed for the effects of combined horizontal and vertical earthquake forces. 1.4 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURE A. The design of seismic restraint connections to the building structure shall take into account the following Point Load Limits. The restraint design at any given restraint anchorage location shall not exceed the building structure limits identified below: 1. Roof deck without structural concrete: Attachment to roof deck is not permitted, with the exception of suspended acoustic or drywall ceilings with hanger wires at 4' on center each way. 2 Structural concrete slab -on -deck and cast -in-place concrete slabs: Loading not to exceed 250 pounds vertically and 500 pounds horizontally at any single flute within one span and no closer than 4' to any adjacent point load. 3 Structural Steel Framing a. Horizontal: I. Loading parallel to beam: Attachment shall be centered on beam web and loading shall not exceed 500 pounds. ii. Loading perpendicular to beam: Attachment shall be within top 1/3 of beam and loading shall not exceed 500 pounds. b. Vertical: I. Beam composite with structural concrete fill: Attachment shall be centered on beam web and loading shall not exceed 1000 pound point load, 2,000 pounds total for single beam. ii. Beam not composite with structural concrete fill: Attachment shall be centered on beam web and loading shall not exceed 500 pound point load, 1000 pounds total for single beam. 4. Other items Not identified: Consult with project Structural Engineer of Record. B. Beam clamps, and single and double flange mounts shall not be used to make seismic restraint support connections. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS Specifications 001610-2 C. When shallow expansion anchors, shallow chemical anchors, or shallow (low deformability) cast -in-place anchors are used, the value of the component response modification factor (RP) shall be 1.5 when determining the forces in the connected part. D. Designs for drilled -in anchors to concrete shall use the manufacturer's ICC evaluation report without capacity increases that may be indicated for special inspection allowable tension values. Installation shall be per the ICC evaluation report requirements. E. Design values for anchors tested in lightweight concrete may be used for anchors installed in normal -weight concrete, provided the specified compressive strength of the normal -weight concrete is equal to or greater than the specified compressive strength of the lightweight concrete in which the anchor was tested. F. Concrete screws and large diameter screw type concrete anchors shall not be used for connections to concrete filled metal decking. G. Cast -in-place inserts shall be constructed entirely of steel. Inserts that contain plastic, cast-iron, etc., shall not be allowed for any seismic restraint connections to the building structure. H. Seismic restraint connections to the building structure for fire protection sprinkler piping shall be engineered, sealed and signed by a California registered Structural Engineer hired by Contractor. 1. Use of, reference of, reproduction of, etc., building structure details, designs, assemblies, load rating, design capacities, etc., from NFPA shall not be considered compliance or qualification with the Design Responsibility and Quality Assurance requirements identified in 1.5, "SEISMIC RESTRAINTS". When computing the embedment depth to diameter ratio for anchors and/or cast -in-place inserts, the outside dimension of the anchor or insert shall be used as the diameter. 1.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Design Responsibility The Contractor is responsible for compliance with all seismic requirements for nonstructural components in this contract. The Contractor shall provide seismic restraint and gravity support designs engineered (sealed and signed) by a California registered Structural Engineer (hired by Contractor) to meet the specified requirements identified within these project construction documents and required by the 2010 CBC. 2. Where conflicts are identified within this specifications section and/or between this and other parts of the project specifications and/or governing code requirements, the more stringent shall apply. B. Quality Assurance 1. The Contractor shall not install any seismic restraints prior to review and acceptance by the Architect. 2. The Contractor shall only submit and install seismic restraint designs that use engineered seismic hardware brackets, as defined below in 1.5C, "Definitions". 3. For non -vibration isolated supported systems, the contractor shall only submit and install seismic restraint designs that use captive or vibration resistant engineered seismic hardware brackets, as defined below in 1.5C, "Definitions" Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS Specifications 001610-3 4. For vibration isolated supported systems, the Contractor shall only submit and install seismic restraint designs that use vibration resistant, engineered seismic hardware brackets, as defined below in 1.5C, "Definitions". a. Contractor shall not submit or install any seismic restraint designs that use non -captive, and/or non-compliant seismic hardware brackets, as defined below in 1.5C, "Definitions". b. Pre -approvals, approvals, listings, evaluation reports, pre-engineered manuals, trade standards, etc., from entities such as, but not limited to, Factory Mutual, ICC, NFPA, SMACNA, OSHPD, UL, Etc., shall not be considered qualification of, or substitutions for, compliance with the Design Responsibility and Quality Assurance requirements identified within this specification. Exception — Anchorage capacity designs for seismic restraints, vertical supports, and other connections to concrete, metal decking, structural steel, and other building structure connection points, may be derived from appropriate ICC evaluation report data. C. Contractor shall reimburse the project for all costs incurred for the review of, inspection of, removal of, seismic restraint designs and/or installations that do not comply with the Design Responsibility and Quality Assurance requirements identified above. C. Definitions 1. Engineered — Seismic Hardware Brackets: Those that have manufacturer identified load capacities signed and sealed by a California registered Structural Engineer. Service load capacities shall be derived from independent lab testing of a seismic hardware bracket as an assembly. 2. Captive — Seismic Hardware Brackets: Those that completely enclose or encircle the rod, anchor, bolt, fastener, etc. 3. Vibration Resistant — Seismic Hardware Brackets: Captive seismic brackets that have been designed and manufactured with a vibration resistance feature that provides resistance against the hex nut that is securing the seismic bracket from becoming loose due to system vibrations 4. Captive seismic hardware brackets such as those listed above in Part 1.313.2 can be submitted for review and acceptance as vibration resistant seismic hardware brackets, provided the submitted design is engineered and detailed to include the use of lock washers or locking hex nuts. 5. Non -Captive — Seismic Hardware Brackets: Those that do not completely enclose or encircle the rod, anchor, bolt fastener, etc. Under NO circumstance shall the non -captive seismic hardware brackets be allowed. 6. Non -Compliant — Seismic Hardware Brackets: those that are designed to allow for more than one brace arm member to be attached to the same seismic hardware bracket. Under NO circumstance shall the non-compliant seismic hardware brackets be allowed. D. Design Requirements 1. The overall seismic restraint system design shall provide restraint in all directions, including vertical. 2. In addition to any other limits on spacing, including those based on design loads, seismic restraints shall not exceed the maximum spacing identified below, provided the restraint connection force does not exceed that of the Point Load Limits in 1.4A a. Single Hanger or Trapeze Supported Steel Piping and Conduit — Transversely 40 feet, Longitudinally 80 feet. b. Single Hanger Supported Copper Tubing and Cast -Iron Piping — Transversely 20 feet, Longitudinally 40 feet. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS Specifications 001610-4 C. Trapeze Supported Copper Tubing — Transversely 40 feet, Longitudinally 80 feet. d. Sheet Metal Ducting — Transversely 40 feet, Longitudinally 80 feet. e. Trapeze Supported Metal Cable Tray or Bus Duct — Transversely 40 feet, Longitudinally 80 feet. f. Center Hung or Single Hanger Supported Metal Cable Tray or Bus Duct — Transversely 40 feet, Longitudinally 80 feet g. Systems with hazardous content including but not limited to natural gas, fuel, and toxic or combustible substances shall have maximum restraint spacings limited to — Transversely 20 feet, Longitudinally 40 feet. h. Plastic piping, glass piping, fiberglass ducts, wire type trays, and other items not identified above shall have maximum restraint spacings limited to that identified in writing by the manufacturer of the item to be braced. 3. Seismic restraints shall not be installed with brace angles greater than 45 degrees from the horizontal. 4. The connection and assembly configuration of seismic restraint to system / item(s) being restrained shall provide for adequate load transfer. (Example: do not attach seismic restraint over pipe insulation — if pipe insulation is not rated to adequately transfer seismic design loads to restraint.) 5. Seismic restraints shall not transmit gravity loads, induce uplift, and/or misalignment to the system or item being restrained. 6. Seismic restraints shall be installed at, or within 4 inches of, a vertical support for that equipment or conveyance. The vertical support shall be designed as part of the seismic restraint assembly. 7. Longitudinal restraints may also act as transverse restraints if the restraint is installed within 24 inches of a 90 -degree change in direction, if shown adequate by engineering design or testing. 8. Conduits, pipes, cable trays, ducts, etc., shall be properly attached to each braced or non -braced trapeze support. 9. Multiple tiered or layered trapeze support configurations shall be seismically restrained at each individual tier or layer. 10. Single hanger supported piping, tubing, conduits and fire protection sprinkler piping shall be supported at seismic restraint locations by standard duty, clevis hangers, J -hangers or seismic hanger clamps. Under no circumstance shall the use of other type hangers (e.g. band, ring, loop, light duty, extended, etc.) be allowed. 11. Vertical support rod(s) at seismic restraint locations shall pass through the trapeze or hanger support and shall have hex nuts installed on both the bottom and the topside of the support. 12. Vertical support rods and connections to the building structure at the seismic restraint location shall be sized to address calculated seismic tension and compression design loads. 13. All vertical support rod(s) at seismic restraint locations including fire protection sprinkler piping shall be installed with rod stiffeners. Rod stiffeners may be omitted if the vertical support rod(s) at a given seismic restraint location have individual hanger rod lengths equal to / or less than 45 times the rod diameter. 14. Seismic restraint designs and installations for non -vibration isolated systems can use either rigid or flexible brace arm members. Do not mix rigid and flexible brace arms at a given restraint location. 15. Vibration isolation devices for suspended applications shall be connected directly to the underside of the building structure, (e.g. not from hanger rod). 16. Vertical supports suspended from the vibration isolation device shall include limit stops, designed by the vibration isolation device manufacturer to prevent over - travel. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS Specifications 001610-5 17. Do not design, install, or use, seismic restraints on systems or items that are subject to hydrodynamic / thermal expansion and contraction, without properly providing for those required movements. 18. Provide appropriately sized openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for anticipated seismic movement. Maintain specified fire rating at penetrations through fire rated surfaces. 19. Systems crossing building seismic or expansion joints, passing from building to building, or supported from different portions of the building shall be installed to allow for differential displacements without damaging the system, its restraints, or support connections. E. Systems Components 1. Seismic Hardware Manufacturers a. The manufacturer's seismic hardware brackets shall fully comply with the Quality Assurance requirements of this specification. 2. Seismic Bracing Components a. Seismic restraint components shall include, but shall not be limited to: Seismic Brackets, Rod Stiffener Clamps / Brackets, Strut, Strut Nuts, Aircraft Cable, Cable Clamps / Fittings, Anchors, Bolts, Hex Nuts, Washers, Threaded Rod, Hangers, Strut Clamps. b. For interior applications components shall be commercial grade steel with a minimum electro galvanized zinc coating thickness of 0.5 mils. Exterior and special interior environment applications seismic restraint components shall be 316 Stainless Steel. F. Installation 1. Contractor shall install seismic restraints per the engineered designs reviewed and accepted by the Architect and when applicable, the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Contractor shall coordinate and resolve seismic restraint conflicts with other trades at the Contractors expense. Conflicts shall be resolved in a timely manner, so as not to delay the project construction time schedule. 3. Contractor shall upon completion of installation of seismic restraints, give written notice to the Architect AHJ and inspector of Record that the work has been completed and is ready for inspection. 4. See the vibration isolation section of the project specifications for the design and installation requirements of vibration isolated devices for system and/or components, which are to be suspended from, attached to, and/or installed as part of this project. 5. See the vibration isolation section of the project specifications for the design and installation connection requirements for vibration and non -vibration isolated equipment. 6. Support and hanger requirements for non -seismic, gravity -only supports and hanger configurations are to be installed per their appropriate support specification section and shall meet the requirements of the 2010 CBC. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. These submittal requirements are in addition to other submittal requirements stated elsewhere in the contract documents. One reproducible submittal copy will be returned. B. Contractor shall submit engineered seismic restraint designs to the Architect for the non- structural components including but not limited to, the items listed in 1.1B. Documents shall be prepared in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7-05 Section 13 signed and sealed by the Contractor's California registered Structural Engineer responsible for their preparation. Calculations will be reviewed for compliance with design criteria only. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS Specifications 001610-6 C. Submit applicable engineered seismic restraint to structure connection anchorage detail sheets with calculations and corresponding ICC evaluation report data sheets, signed and sealed by a California registered Structural Engineer. D. Submit applicable manufacturer's, engineered seismic hardware data and installation detail sheets, signed and sealed by a California registered Structural Engineer. E. Submit shop drawings with layout of seismic restraint locations for review and acceptance as follows: 1. Layout drawings shall accurately represent the intended systems, size, routing and seismic restraint locations. 2. Layout drawings shall provide a minimum of 2 transverse and 1 longitudinal seismic restraints per system run. Seismic restraint layout shall account for system changes in direction, off sets, material type, joint / assembly method, etc. 3. Layout drawings shall include coordinated reflected ceiling plans, showing all seismic restraint locations. 4. Any conflicts shall be addressed before starting installation of restraints. F. Submittals for fire protection sprinkler piping systems must first be submitted to the Architect for review and acceptance. Once accepted, the approved submittal shall then be submitted to the local Fire Protection Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), for their review and approval. 1. Contractor shall include with the submittal to the AHJ a cover letter stating that the: a. Fire protection sprinkler piping system has been engineered, sealed, and signed by a California registered Structural Engineer to meet the specified requirements of the approved and permitted construction documents. b. Review of the fire protection sprinkler piping system by the Architect is limited to the design of the seismic restraints and the effects these seismic restraints will impart to the supporting building structure and components. 2. Once approved by the AHJ the Contractor shall provide the Architect a complete set of the AHJ approved documents, clearly identifying all seismic restraint related changes. PART2-PRODUCTS Not applicable PART 3 -EXECUTION Not applicable I=1 i! Axel W11:1150111111 lei 011 Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS Specifications 001610-7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 017123 Field Engineering PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. Lay out and install the work to the lines and grades indicated and specified. Section 01 7123 B. Retain and pay expenses of a qualified civil engineer or land surveyor to establish on the site the required reference points and bench marks. Establish building lines and elevations, check structural framework for plumbness, and establish the required basic grid lines from which work of other SECTIONS shall be laid out. 1.02 Qualifications of Engineer or Surveyor - The engineer or land surveyor shall be licensed in the State of California and shall be acceptable to the Owner. 1.03 Survey Reference Points A. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice from the City's Representative and Architect. 2. Report to the City's Representative and Architect if a reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Require the civil engineer or land surveyor to replace control points which become lost or destroyed; base replacements on original survey control. 1.04 Project Survey Requirements A. Establish and maintain lines and levels, locate and lay out: 1. Site Improvements a. Stakes for grading, fill, and topsoil placement b. Utility slopes and invert elevations 2. Batter boards for structures 3. Building foundations, column locations, floor level, and retaining walls. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work B. From time to time verify layouts 1.05 Records A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 1.06 Submittals A. Submit name and address of civil engineer or land surveyor. B. Upon request, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED. End of Section 01 71 23 -Field Engineering &30/2013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 71 23 - Field Engineering &30i2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 01 7123 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 017135 Restoration of Improvements PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Structures Section 01 7135 A. The Contractor shall carefully cut and or remove such existing structures, utilities, and improvements as required to complete the work, including but not limited to: curbs, gutters, pipelines, sidewalks and utility poles, as may be necessary for the performance of the work and shall rebuild the structures thus removed in as good a condition as found. The Contractor shall also repair existing structures or improvements, which may be damaged as a result of the work under this contract. 1.02 Roads and Streets A. Unless otherwise specified, roads and streets in which the surface is removed, broken, or damaged, or in which the ground has caved or settled during the work under this contract, shall be resurfaced and brought to the original grade and section by the Contractor. Roadways used by the Contractor shall be cleaned and repaired to local County and State Standards. Before resurfacing material is placed, edges of pavements shall be trimmed back far enough to provide clean solid, saw -cut vertical faces, and shall be free of loose material. 1.03 Cultivated Areas and Other Surface Improvements A. Cultivated or planted areas and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of the Contractor shall be restored to their original condition or better. B. Existing guard posts, barricades, and fences shall be protected and replaced if damaged. C. Special attention shall be given to avoid trees, bushes and shrubs not indicated for removal. 1.04 Protection of Existing Installations A. The Contractor shall immediately correct or replace existing equipment, controls or systems that are damaged as a result of his operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED End of Section 01 71 35 - Restoration of Improvements a30i2013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 71 35 - Restoration of Improvements 3130/2013 Page 2 of I Section 01 7135 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0173 29 Cutting and Patching PART I -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 01 73 29 A. Proceedures for cutting and patching as may be required to complete the work of this project. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 5000 - Construction Facilties and Temporary Controls B. Section 01 7135 - Restoration of Improvements C. Section 01 7420 - Cleaning D. Section 017419 -Construction Waste Mangement & Disposal 1.03 DEFINITONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended pr that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut or patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut or patch in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 0173 29 - Cutting and Patching &30i2013 Page 1 oft Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 73 29 I. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original installer, comply with original installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean, piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. End of Section 0173 29 - Cutting and Patching &30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0174 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS Section 01 7419 A. City requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible with the goal of diverting 70% of waste from the landfill. B. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. C. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports. D. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. E. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: I. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. F. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. 0l 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal &30/2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 7419 K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Waste Management Plan within within 30 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Bid, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner; submit projection of all trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling. B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: I. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site -separated and self -hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to City. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: O1 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal &30i2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 7419 a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards. c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Waste management and diversion goals maybe achieved by the following methods: 1. Roll Off Waste Container: Contractor may hire a company which provides a roll off waste container which is then sorted off site. 2. On Site Sorting: Contractor to sort waste on site. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, City, and Architect. C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-bid meeting. 2. Pre -construction meeting. 3. Regular job -site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. I. Provide containers as required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal &30i2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 7419 materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On -Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. End of Section O1 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal 8130/2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0174 20 Cleaning PARTIGENERAL 1.01 Section Includes Section 01 74 20 A. Cleaning throughout the construction period, and final project cleaning prior to the acceptance tour. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 01 5000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 1.03 Quality Assurance A. Inspection: Conduct daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to the requirements specified herein, comply with pertinent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 Cleaning Materials and Equipment A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness. 2.02 Compatibility A. Use cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with the surfaces being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material to be cleaned. PART3EXECUTION 3.01 Progress Cleaning A. General: 1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding drainage or traffic, and providing the required protection of materials. 2. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required for construction of this work. Debris shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a lawful manner. Disposal receipts or dump tickets shall be furnished to Architect upon request. 3. At least twice each month, and more often if necessary, remove scrap debris, and waste material from the job site. 4. Provide adequate storage for items awaiting removal from the job site, observing requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. B. Site: Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove items to the place designated for their storage. Combustible waste shall be removed from the site. Flammable waste shall be kept in sealed metal containers until removed from the site. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect, arrangements of materials stored on the site; restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements to meet the requirements specified above. 3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition. C. Structures: 01 74 20 -Cleaning &30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 74 20 I. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structures and pick up scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean. a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a handheld broom, i.e., "broom -clean". 3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structures of pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness. 4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily, and more often if necessary, and while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials have been installed. a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from foreign material that, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material, i.e., "vacuum -clean". b. Final Cleaning D. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Prior to completion of the work, remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste, conduct final progress cleaning as described below. E. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, water and broom clean paved areas on the site and public paved areas directly adjacent to the site. Remove resultant debris F. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. G. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. Sweep and mop vinyl and rubber surfaces. H. Structures: 1. Exterior: In areas affected by the work under this contract, visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste material, smudges, and other foreign matter. Remove traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. 2. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the Architect may require light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the City. L Interior: In areas affected by the work under this contract, visually inspect interior surfaces and remove traces of soil waste material, smudges, and other foreign matter. Remove traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. Remove paint drippings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment instructed by the manufacturer of the surface material. 01 74 20 -Cleaning &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Glass: Clean glass inside and outside. Section 01 74 20 K. Polished surfaces: On surfaces requiring the routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. Glossy surfaces shall be cleaned and shined as intended by the manufacturer 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 2. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even -textured surface. L. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. M. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. N. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the City's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. O. Extra Materials: Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the City's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. P. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as accepted by the Architect to enable the City to accept a completely clean project. Q. Cleaning During City's Occupancy 1. Should the City occupy the work or any portion thereof prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the City, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning of the occupied spaces shall be determined by the Architect in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. End of Section O1 74 20 -Cleaning &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 74 20 -Cleaning &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 01 74 20 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0177 00 Contract Closeout PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Requirements Included A. Closeout Procedures. B. Project Record Documents. C. Operation and Maintenance Data. D. Guaranties, Warranties, Bonds and Waivers. E. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 1.02 Related Requirements Section 01 77 00 A. General Conditions: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals and other administrative requirements. B. Section 01 1100 -Summary of Work C. Section 01 3300 -Submittals D. Section 01 7135 -Restoration of Improvements E. Section 01 7420 - Cleaning 1.03 Closeout Procedures A. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract. B. When Contractor considers work has reached substantial completion, submit written certification that work is ready for inspection. 1.04 Removal of Utilities, Facilities, and Controls A. Each trade/subcontractor responsible for installation shall be responsible for and not limited to the following: 1. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to final application for payment inspection. 2. Remove unused or temporary underground utilities or installations completely. 3. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. 4. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1.05 Project Record Drawings and Specifications A. General 1. Maintain, on daily basis, record drawings showing "as-builts" conditions of project; subject to monthly review by Architect, Construction Manager, or City. 2. Store documents separate from those used for construction. 3. At time of installation, installed locations of all work relating to above and underground utilities, architectural, structural, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, plumbing, electrical, and other scopes of work as may be required, shall be recorded on prints by Contractor, and reviewed with the Owner. Do not conceal work until required information is recorded. 4. The Contractor will transfer installed locations to reproducible prints and submit prints for review by Architect through the Construction Manager. a. All information entered on reproducible prints shall be neat, legible, and emphasized by drawing "balloons" around changed items. 0177 00 - Contract Closeout 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 77 00 b. Locate and dimension all work, including stubs for future connections, with reference to permanent landmarks or buildings and indicate approximate depth below finish grade. c. Symbols and designations used in preparing record drawings shall match those used in Contract Drawings. 5. Prior to final inspection, submit project record documents with transmittal letter containing date, project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents and signature of Contractor. a. Failure of the Contractor to comply with this section in total or in part may constitute reason for the withholding of all or part of the monthly progress payment due the Contractor for that month. 6. Prior to processing the Contractor's monthly payment request, Construction Manager, Architect, or City's Representative will meet with the Contractor to review and verify that the Record Documents have been updated. 7. Label and date each Record Drawing "RECORD DOCUMENT" in legibly printed letters. B. Record Drawing Information: 1. Record the following information: a. Locations of work buried under or outside each building, such as plumbing and electrical lines and conduits. b. Actual numbering of each electrical circuit. c. Locations of significant work concealed inside each building whose general locations are changed from those shown on the Contract. d. Locations of all items, not necessarily concealed, which vary from the Contract Documents. e. Installed location of all cathodic protection anodes. f Deviations from the sizes, locations and other features of installation shown in the Contract Documents. g. Locations of underground work, points of connection with existing utilities, changes in direction, valves, manholes, catch basins, capped stubouts, invert elevations, etc. It. Sufficient information to locate work concealed in each building with reasonable ease and accuracy; in some instances, this may be by dimension. In others, it may be in relation to the spaces in the building near which it was installed. 2. Provide additional drawings as necessary for clarification. C. Record Specifications 1. City's Representative will provide Contractor with one (1) set of Contract Specifications, which shall be labeled "Record Document" in legible letters. 2. Mark each section legibly to record manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 1.06 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Provide data for other Sections as required by the Contract Documents. B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch three ringside binders with durable plastic covers; with identification on, or readable through, front cover stating general nature of manual. C. Provide a separate volume for each system, with a table of contents and index tabs for each volume; all material neatly typewritten; each volume containing: 0177 00 - Contract Closeout &30/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 77 00 I. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of City's Representative and Contractor; and index furnishing complete information as to location in manual of all emergency data regarding installation. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system. For each system, give names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers; and include the following: a. List of equipment. b. Parts list; including complete nomenclature and names and address of nearest vendor of parts. c. Detailed operating instructions. d. Maintenance instructions, equipment, including routine maintenance cards with time frequency of routine maintenance noted. e. Maintenance instructions, finishes. f Shop drawings and product data, including changes made during construction. g. Copies of Guaranties/Warranties. D. Extraneous Data: Where contents of manuals include manufacturers' catalog pages, clearly indicate precise items included in this installation and delete, or otherwise clearly indicate, all manufacturer's data with which this installation is not concerned. E. Final inspection will not be scheduled until all maintenance/operating manuals are delivered to the District Representative. F. Contractor will be responsible for training of City's personnel for operation of all building systems. 1.07 Guaranties, Warranties, and Bonds A. Standard Guarantee: Guarantee all work executed under this Contract to be free of all defects of work quality and materials for a period of one (1) year after completion and acceptance by the City. Refer to General Conditions. 1.08 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials Extra Stock A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in guaranties specified in each section, in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with the Construction Manager and deliver to project site. Provide with a detailed transmittal and obtain receipt prior to final payment. End of Section 0177 00 - Contract Closeout &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 0177 00 - Contract Closeout &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 01 77 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0179 00 Demonstration and Training PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Section 01 79 00 A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of City personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software -operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Electrical systems and equipment. 5. Items specified in individual product Sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred. B. Draft Training Plans: City will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill -level of attendees. 1. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. L Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. D. Training Reports: 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training &30/2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 79 00 I. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. 2. Sign -in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session. 4. Include Commissioning Authority's formal acceptance of training session. E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for City's subsequent use. 1. Format: DVD Disc. 2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by City. B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless City personnel training is specified. C. Demonstration may be combined with City personnel training if applicable. D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. E. Non -Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted. B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. C. City will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Commissioning Authority. E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms. 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 79 00 G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of City's personnel to be trained; re -schedule training sessions as required by City; once schedule has been approved by City failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for City to charge Contractor for personnel "show -up" time. H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. I. Product- and System -Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. It. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. End of Section O1 79 00 -Demonstration and Training &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 01 79 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0191 13 General Commissioning Requirements PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Section 01 91 13 A. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section specifies the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning: 1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists executed by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents: Functional Tests executed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this. 3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to City are complete: Detailed operation and maintenance (O&M) data submittals by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 4. Verify that the City's operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is utilized to achieve this. B. The Commissioning Authority directs and coordinates all commissioning activities; this section describes some but not all of the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Scope and procedures for operation and maintenance manuals and project record documents. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority, unless they require review by Architect; in that case, submit to Architect first. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of Prefunctional Checklists or Functional Test requirements; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred. 5. As soon as possible after submittals made to Architect are approved, submit copy of approved submittal to the Commissioning Authority. B. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer -provided instructions that are shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered. C. Product Data: If submittals to Architect do not include the following, submit copies as soon as possible: 1. Manufacturer's product data, cut sheets, and shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Startup, operating, and troubleshooting procedures. 4. Fan and pump curves. 5. Factory test reports. 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 91 13 6. Warranty information, including details of City's responsibilities in regard to keeping warranties in force. D. Startup Plans and Reports. E. Completed Prefunctional Checklists. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of City. B. Calibration Tolerances: Provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: 1. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to accuracy of 0.5 degree F and resolution of plus/minus 0.1 degree F. 2. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter), calibrated within the last year. 3. Calibration: According to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged; affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection. C. Equipment -Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of the work at no extra cost to City; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the property of City. D. Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment. 1. Dataloggers required to for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning Authority and will not become the property of City. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Authority has prepared the Commissioning Plan. 1. Attend meetings called by the Commissioning Authority for purposes of completing the commissioning plan. 2. Require attendance and participation of relevant subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and manufacturer representatives. B. Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan. C. Commissioning Plan: The commissioning schedule, procedures, and coordination requirements for all parries in the commissioning process. D. Commissioning Schedule: 1. Submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to Commissioning Authority within 60 days after award of Contract. 2. Re -submit anticipated startup dates monthly, but not less than 4 weeks prior to startup. 3. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems. 01 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements &30/2013 Page 2 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 91 13 4. Provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority for delivery of relevant Checklists and Functional Test procedures, to avoid delay. 3.02 STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS A. Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup plan, submit the plan not less than 8 weeks prior to startup. B. Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet), document compliance by submitting the completed startup checklist prior to startup, signed and dated by responsible entity. C. Submit directly to the Commissioning Authority. 3.03 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS A. A Prefunctional Checklist is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other assembly specified to be commissioned. 1. No sampling of identical or near -identical items is allowed. 2. These checklists do not replace manufacturers' recommended startup checklists, regardless of apparent redundancy. 3. Prefunctional Checklist forms will not be complete until after award of the contract; the following types of information will be gathered via the completed Checklist forms: a. Certification by installing contractor that the unit is properly installed, started up, and operating and ready for Functional Testing. b. Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified, itemized by unit. c. Manufacturer, model number, and relevant capacity information; list information "as specified," "as submitted," and "as installed." d. Serial number of installed unit. e. List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup and Functional Testing; these will be primarily static inspections and procedures; for equipment and systems may include normal manufacturer's start-up checklist items and minor testing. f Sensor and actuator calibration information. B. Contractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists, after completion of installation and before startup; witnessing by the Commissioning Authority is not required unless otherwise specified. I. Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed, initialed, and dated by the actual witness; checklists are not complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete without deficiencies. 2. Checklists with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the Contractor attests that incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and reliable Functional Testing; re -submission of the Checklist is required upon completion of remaining items. 3. Individual Checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one installer; Contractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or subcontractors, with identification recorded on the form. 4. If any Checklist line item is not relevant, record reasons on the form. 5. Contractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests, at his option. O1 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements &30i2013 Page 3 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 019113 6. Regardless of these reporting requirements, Contractor is responsible for correct startup and operation. 7. Submit completed Checklists to Commissioning Authority within two days of completion. C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklists to Contractor. 1. Initial Drafts: Contractor is responsible for initial draft of Prefunctional Checklist where so indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Authority to aid in preparation of checklists, such as shop drawing submittals, manufacturers' startup checklists, and O&M data. 3. Commissioning Authority may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of whether they are explicitly mentioned in the Contract Documents or not. 4. When asked to review the proposed Checklists, do so in a timely manner. D. Commissioning Authority Witnessing: Required for: 1. Each piece of primary equipment, unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by the commissioning plan. 2. A sampling of non -primary equipment, as allowed by the commissioning plan. E. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re -inspect or re -test, as applicable, at no extra cost to City. I. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning Authority immediately. 3.04 FUNCTIONAL TESTS A. A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment, system, or other assembly specified to be commissioned, unless sampling of multiple identical or near -identical units is allowed by the final test procedures. B. Contractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests, after completion of Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout. C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Tests, including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose. D. Contractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and re -testing at no extra cost to City; if a deficiency is not corrected and re -tested immediately, the Commissioning Authority will document the deficiency and the Contractor's stated intentions regarding correction. 1. Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or does not perform properly. 2. When the deficiency has been corrected, the Contractor completes the form certifying that the item is ready to be re -tested and returns the form to the Commissioning Authority; the Commissioning Authority will reschedule the test and the Contractor shall re -test. 3. Identical or Near -Identical Items: If 10 percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical or near -identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items will be considered defective; provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all items. 4. Contractor shall bear the cost of City and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re -testing. 01 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements 8130/2013 Page 4 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 019113 5. Contractor shall bear the cost of City and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re -testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant Prefunctional Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been identified in the Prefunctional Checklist process, Contractor shall bear the cost of the second and subsequent re -tests. E. Functional Test Procedures: 1. Some test procedures are included in the Contract Documents; where Functional Test procedures are not included in the Contract Documents, test procedures will be determined by the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with Contractor. 2. Examples of Functional Testing: a. Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just components) using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). b. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. c. Systems are run through all the HVAC control system's sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state. d. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not Functional Testing; spot checking of TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Authority is Functional Testing. F. Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions; performance of these tests remains the Contractor's responsibility regardless of timing. 3.05 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION A. Calibrate all field -installed temperature, relative humidity, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and pressure sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on this piece of equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated. B. Calibrate using the methods described below; alternate methods may be used, if approved by City beforehand. See PART 2 for test instrument requirements. Record methods used on the relevant Prefunctional Checklist or other suitable forms, documenting initial, intermediate and final results. C. All Sensors: I. Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic operation. 2. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end. 3. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, for temperature make sure they are reading within 0.2 degree F of each other, and for pressure, within tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other. 4. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter. D. Sensors Without Transmitters - Standard Application: I. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. O1 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements &30/2013 Page 5 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 91 13 2. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument -measured value. 3. If not, install offset, calibrate or replace sensor. E. Sensors With Transmitters - Standard Application. 1. Disconnect sensor. 2. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor. 3. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation system control panel. 4. Using manufacturer's resistance -temperature data, simulate minimum desired temperature. 5. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter. 6. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the building automation system. 7. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform with specified control ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction. 8. Reconnect sensor. 9. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. 10. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument -measured value. 11. If not, replace sensor and repeat. 12. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator. F. Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums: 1. Watthour, Voltage, Amperage: 1 percent of design. 2. Pressure, Air, Water, Gas: 3 percent of design. 3. Air Temperatures (Outside Air, Space Air, Duct Air): 0.4 degrees F. 4. Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design. 5. Barometric Pressure: 0.1 inch of Hg. 6. Flow Rate, Air: 10 percent of design. 7. Flow Rate, Water: 4 percent of design. 8. AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 2.0 degrees F. G. Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be required for selected sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet. H. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check: 1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the control system readout. 2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode. 3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required. 4. Command valve/damper to open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required. 5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions. 6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics). I. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils. 1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed. 2. Use an ultra -sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage. O1 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements &30i2013 Page 6 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.06 TEST PROCEDURES - GENERAL Section 01 91 13 A. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem -solving. B. Provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows, pressures, temperatures, and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, return all affected equipment and systems to their pre-test condition. C. Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or near -identical items is explicitly permitted, perform sampling as follows: 1. Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation; only minor size or capacity difference. 2. Sampling is not allowed for: a. Major equipment. b. Life -safety -critical equipment. c. Prefunctional Checklist execution. 3. XX = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample; defined for specific type of equipment. 4. YY = the percent of the sample that if failed will require another sample to be tested; defined for specific type of equipment. 5. Randomly test at least XX percent of each group of identical equipment, but not less than three units. This constitutes the "first sample." 6. If YY percent of the units in the first sample fail, test another XX percent of the remaining identical units. 7. If YY percent of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining identical units. 8. If frequent failures occur, resulting in more troubleshooting than testing, the Commissioning Authority may stop the testing and require Contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing. D. Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts, or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the "observation"). E. Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the response of a system; for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the response in a VAV box. F. Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value. G. Over -Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control system to see the response of the system; for example, change the outside air temperature value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation. H. Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed, are considered indirect indicators. I. Monitoring: Record parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control systems; where monitoring of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures: 01 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements a30i2013 Page 7 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 01 91 13 I. All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by Contractor; at the Commissioning Authority's request, Contractor shall trend up to 20 percent more points than specified at no extra charge. 2. Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers. 3. At the option of the Commissioning Authority, some control system monitoring may be replaced with datalogger monitoring. 4. Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and at least 5 columns of point values on same page. 5. Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it. 6. Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing. 3.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements. B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submission to City. C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority. D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to City. End of Section 01 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements &30/2013 Page 8 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 02 4100 Demolition PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of built site elements. B. Disposal of materials to be removed. C. Salvage materials to the City. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Section 02 4100 A. See Division 01- General Requirements -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill Material: As specified in Section 3122 00 -Grading PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE A. Refer to the C-2 of working drawing for demolition notes, demolish indicated structures and appurtenances. B. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work. C. Remove all paving and curbs as indicated on drawings. D. Remove concrete slabs on grade as indicated on drawings. E. Remove fences and gates. F. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling. G. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as specified in Section 3122 00. H. Relies, antiques, and similar objects remain the property of the City. Notify the Architect prior to removal, and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal. Relics and antiques may include: 1. Cornerstones and commemorative plaques. 2. Historical remains or artifacts. I. Remove and dispose of all other materials. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. Including but not limited to an encroachment permit for work done within the City Right of Way. 2. Use of explosives is not permitted. 02 41 00 - Demolition &30i2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 02 4100 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 7. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 8. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 9. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. D. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. E. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take -offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to City. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. I. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 02 41 00 - Demolition 81302013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 02 4100 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. C. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove and dispose debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. End of Section 02 41 00 - Demolition &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 02 41 00 - Demolition &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 02 4100 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alterations purposes. B. Media blasting of exterior surfaces in preparation for subsequent finish work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Section 02 4119 A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re -use by Contractor. B. Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. D. Section 01 7135 - Restroration of Improvements E. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching F. Section 02 4113 - Selective Site Demolition G. Section 09 2513 - Acrylic Plastering H. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 3 - Submittals B. Site Plan: Showing: 1. Areas for temporary construction and field offices. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.05 PROJECT A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 SCOPE A. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, recycling, and B. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as required so that required rough grade elevations do not subside within one year after completion. 2.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 02 4119 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 5. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 6. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 8. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City. C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and City; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. 2.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take -offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to City. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 2.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 50 00 in locations indicated on drawings. 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 02 4119 C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. If rotted wood, corroded metals, or deteriorated masonry or concrete are uncovered in the work not indicated to be removed, notify Architect and City. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. F. Media Blasting 1. Remove existing finishes of exterior surfaces to remain to receive subsequent finishes including but not limited to paint or acrylic plaster. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces to remain. G. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 2.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 -Waste Management. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. End of Section 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition 81302013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition 81302013 Page 4 of 3 Section 02 4119 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 Maintenance of Concrete PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of existing concrete surfaces. B. Repair of exposed structural, shrinkage, and settlement cracks. C. Resurfacing of concrete surfaces having spalled areas and other damage. D. Repair of deteriorated concrete. E. Repair of internal concrete reinforcement. F. Scope of Work: As indicated on the drawings. Section 03 0100 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. B. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. C. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. D. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b. E. ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail -Steel and Axle -Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. F. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a. G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. H. ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars; 2008. I. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. J. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear; 2012. K. ASTM C928/C928M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid -Hardening Cementitious Material for Concrete Repairs; 2009. L. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010. M. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics; 2010. N. AWS DIA/DIAM - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2011. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling: Perform blast cleaning only between the hours of 7 am to 10 pm. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Section 03 0100 B. Product Data: Indicate product standards, physical and chemical characteristics, technical specifications, limitations, maintenance instructions, and general recommendations regarding each material. C. Qualification Statements. D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of structural reinforcement repairs and type of repair. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design reinforcement splices under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Newport Beach, CA. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. C. Cleaner Qualifications: Company specializing in, and with minimum of 3 years of experience in, the type of cleaning specified. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with minimum of 3 years of experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP(S) A. Test each type of maintenance procedure required on each type of existing construction, to determine the most appropriate procedures to use and as a record of expected results. B. Crack Injection: Prepare one sample of each type of injection. C. Horizontal Surface Repair: Total of 10 foot square area, demonstrating each type of repair. D. Where color or texture matching is required, first prepare a small size sample on cementitious board. E. Re -work mock-up(s) until satisfactory to Architect. F. Re -work mock-up(s) until satisfactory to City. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for storage, shelf life limitations, and handling of products. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Degreaser: 1. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; Citrus Cleaner: www.specchemllc.com. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Ultrite Degreaser: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Detergent: Non-ionic detergent. C. Alkaline Cleaning Agent: D. Acidic Cleaning Agent: E. Blasting Medium: 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete &30/2013 Page 2 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 2.02 CEMENTITIOUS PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 2. SpecChem, LLC: www.specchenillc.com. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Cementitious Resurfacing Mortar: One- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer -modified cementitious mortar designed for continuous thin -coat application. 1. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 3. Nominal Thickness: 1/8 inch. 4. Color: Light gray. 5. Products: a. Prospec, an Oldcastle brand; CR Concrete Resurfacer: www.prospec.com. b. SpecChem, LLC: Duo Patch: www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Parge-All AF or Meadow -Patch T2: www.wnneadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Cementitious Repair Mortar, Trowel Grade: One- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer -modified cementitious mortar. 1. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Dry Material: ASTM C928/C928M. 3. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 4. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; RepCon V/O: www.specchemllc.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; Duo Patch: www.specchernllc.com. c. Meadow -Crete GPS: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Cementitious Repair Mortar, Form and Pour/Pump Grade: Flowable, one- or two -component, factory -mixed, polymer -modified cementitious mortar; in-place material capable of withstanding freeze/thaw conditions. 1. Mixed with water in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FDM: www.ardexamericas.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; Duo Patch; www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Meadow -Crete FNP: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. E. Cementitious Pavement Repair Mortar: Fast hardening, flowable; composed of cement, sand, and additives; capable of setting in cold weather conditions without the aid of chloride- or gypsum -based accelerators; in-place material capable of withstanding freeze/thaw conditions. 1. Dry Material: ASTM C928/C928M. 2. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 3. Time To Open To Traffic: 6 hours, maximum. 4. Time to Top -Coating: 4 hours, maximum. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete &30/2013 Page 3 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 5. Products: a. Prospec, an Oldcastle brand; Premium Patch 100: www.prospec.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; RepCon 928: www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Futura-15: www.wnneadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 EPDXY PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 2. SpecChem, LLC: www.specchemllc.com. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Epoxy Repair Mortar: Epoxy resin mixed with aggregate and other materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for purpose intended; conform to pot life and workability limits. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 1000, SpecPoxy 2000, SpecPoxy 3000 or SpecPoxy 3000 FS: www.specchemllc.com. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste, Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State, Rezi-Weld 1000, Rezi-Weld 1000 State, Rezi-Weld LV, or Rezi-Weld LV State: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Epoxy Injection Adhesive: 1. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 1000; www.specchemllc.com. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld LV, Rezi-Weld LV State, Rezi-Weld (IP), or Rezi-Weld Gel Paste: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: Non -sag, two-part, 100 percent solids. 1. Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi, minimum. 2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 6,600 psi, minimum. 3. Percent Elongation (ASTM D638): 3.3 percent at 7 days at 70 degrees F, maximum. 4. Percent Elongation (ASTM D638): 2 percent at 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi, minimum. 6. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX ArdiBond AP: www.ardexamericas.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 2000: www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Anchoring Adhesive: Self -leveling or non -sag as applicable. 1. Self -Leveling Polyester -Based Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Poly -Grip: www.wrmeadows.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Self -Leveling Epoxy Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 2000; www.specchemllc.com. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete &30i2013 Page 4 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld 1000, Rezi-Weld 1000 State, Rezi-Weld (IP), or Rezi-Weld 3/2: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 3. Non -Sag Epoxy Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 3000 or SpecPoxy 3000 FS; www.specchemllc.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, grey. C. Sand: ASTM C33 or ASTM C404; uniformly graded, clean. D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) billet -steel deformed bars, unfinished. F. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280), Type A. G. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A82/A82M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 CLEANING EXISTING CONCRETE A. Provide enclosures, barricades, and other temporary construction as required to protect adjacent work from damage. B. Clean concrete surfaces of dirt or other contamination using the gentlest method that is effective. 1. Try the gentlest method first, then, if not clean enough, use a less gentle method taking care to watch for impending damage. 2. Clean out cracks and voids using same methods. C. The following are acceptable cleaning methods, in order from gentlest to less gentle: 1. Water washing using low-pressure, maximum of 100 psi, and, if necessary, brushes with natural or synthetic bristles. 2. Increasing the water washing pressure to maximum of 400 psi. 3. Adding detergent to washing water; with final water rinse to remove residual detergent. 4. Steam -generated low-pressure hot-water washing. D. Do not use any of the following cleaning methods, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Brushes with wire bristles, grinding with abrasives, solvents, hydrochloric or muriatic acid, sodium hydroxide, caustic soda, or lye. 2. Soap or detergent that is not non-ionic. 3.03 CONCRETE STRUCTURAL MEMBER REPAIR A. See the drawings for specific areas to be repaired. B. Remove broken and soft concrete at least 1/4 inch deep. C. Mechanically cut away damaged portions of reinforcement. D. Remove corrosion from steel and clean mechanically. E. Blast clean remaining exposed reinforcement surfaces. F. Repair by welding new bar reinforcement to existing reinforcement using sleeve splices. 1. Perform welding work in accordance with AWS D1.4. 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete &30i2013 Page 5 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 03 0100 2. Make welded sleeve splices to achieve strength to exceed strength of new reinforcement. G. Cover exposed steel reinforcement with epoxy mortar. H. Work epoxy mortar into broken surface and build up patch to match original. I. Feather edges of repairs flush to sound surface and trowel surface to match surrounding area. 3.04 CRACK REPAIR USING EPDXY ADHESIVE INJECTION A. Repair exposed cracks. B. Provide temporary entry ports spaced to accomplish movement of fluids between ports; no deeper than the depth of the crack to be filled or port size diameter no greater than the thickness of the crack. Provide temporary seal at concrete surface to prevent leakage of adhesive. C. Inject adhesive into ports under pressure using equipment appropriate for particular application. D. Begin injection at lower entry port and continue until adhesive appears in adjacent entry port. Continue from port to port until entire crack is filled. E. Remove temporary seal and excess adhesive. F. Clean surfaces adjacent to repair and blend finish. 3.05 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR USING CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS A. Clean concrete surfaces, cracks, and joints of dirt, laitance, corrosion, and other contamination using method(s) specified above and allow to dry. B. Apply coating of bonding agent to entire concrete surface to be repaired. C. Fill voids with cementitious mortar flush with surface. D. Apply repair mortar by steel trowel to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch over entire surface, terminating at a vertical change in plane on all sides. E. Trowel finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces. F. Damp cure for four days. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 0140 00, will perform field inspection and testing. 1. Test concrete for calcium chloride content during the execution of the Work. End of Section 03 0100 - Maintenance of Concrete &30/2013 Page 6 of 6 SECTION 00 31 00 FORMWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Includes: Provision of formwork for cast -in-place concrete and installation of embedded items. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 003200 - Concrete Reinforcement 2. Section 003300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.2 REFERENCES A. Requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION NO. 1 apply to all Work in this Section. B. Published specification, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations applyto Work of this Section where cited by abbreviations noted below (latest editions apply). 1. California Building Code (CBC), 2010 Edition. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. Federal Specifications (FS). 4. American Concrete Institute's "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork," (ACI 347). 5. United States Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood, (PS1). 6. American Plywood Association's "Guide to Plywood Grades" (APA). 7. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau's "Standard Grading Rules No. 16" (WCLIB). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Formwork shall conform to ACI 347. 1. Formwork: a. Shall prevent leakage or washing out of cement mortar. b. Shall resist spread, shifting, and settling. C. Shall reproduce accurately required lines, grades, and surfaces within tolerances specified. 2. Safety: The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate strength and safety of all formwork including falsework and shoring. B. Allowable Tolerances: Formwork shall produce concrete within tolerance limits recommended in ACI 347, unless otherwise noted. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Only as requested by the Architect. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FORMWORK Specifications 0031 00-1 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Sequencing Schedule: 1. Ensure timely delivery of embedded items. Be responsible for cutting and patching necessitated by failure to place embedded items. 2. Plan erection and removal to permit proper sequence of concrete placing without damage to concrete. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forming Materials: 1. Panel or board forms at the Contractor's option. a. Panel Forms: Minimum 5/8 -inch thick exterior grade plywood with sealed edges, PS 1 grade Plyform Class I and II B -B Exterior or HDO Exterior. b. Board Forms: Shiplap ortongue and groove lined with PS 1 grade Plyform Class I and II Exterior 1/2 -inch or HDO Exterior 1/2 -inch or 3/16 -inch thick fiberboard conforming to FS LLL -B -810a(1), type I. 2. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on Drawings. a. Use Plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 "B -B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. Panels to receive specified form sealer to ensure uniform finish of exposed surfaces. b. Designated "Architectural Concrete" Surfaces: Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standards PS -1 "A -C or B -B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form", Class 1. 3. Pan Joist forms: Provide removable forms, Ceco Corporation or equal. Forms shall have adequate strength to maintain their shape during placing of concrete and shall permit easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. Forms shall be true to shape, free from bulges, tears or other damage, and shall be free from oil, grease, paint, dirt or other deleterious coatings. Forms shall fit close, tight and straight. Forms shall be cleaned up before reuse. 4. Chamfer Strips: Burke Concrete Accessories' PVC type CSF 1/2 -inch, all exposed corners. B. Wood Framing: WCLIB standard grade or better Douglas Fir. C. Form Ties and Spreaders: Metal type acting as spreaders, leaving no metal within one -inch of concrete face and no fractures, spalls, depressions or other surface disfigurations greaterthan 3/4 - inch in diameter. D. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Fiber Type: Premolded asphalt -impregnated fiber, ASTM D1751, 1/4 -inch thick unless otherwise noted. Same as W. R. Meadows, Inc.'s "Sealtight Fiber Expansion Joint"; Grace Construction Materials "Serviced Fiber Expansion Joint Filler, Code 1390"; National Expansion Joint Co.'s "Fiber Joint Filler No. 12"; Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc.'s "Burke Fiber Expansion Joint"; or equal. 2. Cork Type: Preformed cork, ASTM D1752, Type II, 1/4 -inch size unless otherwise noted. Same as W. R. Meadows, Inc.'s "Sealtight Cork Expansion Joint"; Sonneborn-Contech's "Sonoflex Cork"; Grace Construction Materials' "Serviced Standard Cork Expansion Joint Filler, Code 4323; or equal. E. Form Sealer: Same as Grace Construction Material's "Formfilm"; or approved equal. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FORMWORK Specifications 0031 00-2 F. Release Agent: Must not stain or otherwise adversely affect architectural concrete surfaces. Same as The Nox-Crete Co.'s "Nox-Crete Form Coating"; Industrial Synthetics Corp.'s "Synthex;" or equal. G. Foam Board: Extruded close cell polystyrene foam, channeled for drainage, with a minimum compressive strength of 60 psi at 0.1 -inch deformation when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621-73, and meeting requirements of FS -HH -1-524b, Type 11, Class B. Same as The Dow Chemical Co.'s "Styrofoam PD Brand" or equal. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Plywood shall bear APA grade -trademark. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas where formwork will be constructed and verify that: 1. Excavations are sufficient to permit placement, inspection and removal of forms. 2. Excavations for earth forms have been neatly and accurately cut. 3. Conditions are otherwise proper for formwork construction. B. Do not start Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Obtain necessary information for coordination of formwork with items to be embedded in concrete and other related work. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. 2. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb Work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and otherfeatures required in Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly buttjoints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. 3. Frame openings where indicated on Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing or Electrical drawings. B. Earth Forms: 1. Construct wood edge strips at top sides of excavations. 2. Provide forms for footings wherever concrete cannot be placed against solid earth excavation. 3. Remove loose dirt and debris prior to concrete pours. C. Walls and Other Formed Elements: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FORMWORK Specifications 0031 00-3 1. Erect outside forms for exposed exterior walls first and obtain the Architect's approval before reinforcement is placed. Obtain Architect's approval of the reinforcement before interior form is erected. 2. Carefully align inside and outside forms before tightening ties. 3. Plywood Forms: Insure vertical joints are plumb and horizontal joints are level; arrange joints and ties in geometrical pattern as approved by the Architect. 4. Form inside corners at exposed conditions with mitered boards or plywood so that no concrete is placed against form ends. 5. After erection, seal all cracks, holes, slits, gaps, and apertures in forms so that they will withstand the pressure and will remain completely watertight. 6. Provide a means to seal the bottom of forms at construction joints such as foam tape or other gasket devices. 7. Apply a coating of release agent prior to the erection of formwork. Follow approved manufacturer's recommendations. D. Slab Forms: 1. Establish levels and set screeds. 2. Depress slabs where required to receive special floor finishes. E. Beam or Joist Forms: 1. Provide cambers as noted on Contract Drawings. F. Cleanouts and Openings: Provide on interior face of wall forms as required for effective removal of loose dirt, debris and waste material, for inspection of reinforcing and for introduction of vibrators where the Architect deems necessary. G. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide in exterior concrete paving on grade at maximum 20 -feet on center oras noted and at intersections with vertical surfaces, curbs, manholes or other penetrations through paving. 2. Use fibertype expansion joint fillers typically and depress 1/4 -inch unless otherwise noted. 3. Use cork type expansion joint fillers at conditions with non -bituminous waterproofing, liquid waterproofing or sealant systems. H. Construction Joints: 1. Provide where shown on the drawings or as directed by the Architect. 2. Provide key indentations at all joints. 3. Provide pour strips on inside face of forms at horizontal joints, but remove strips and thoroughly clean out reglets before placing subsequent portions of wall. 4. Prevent formations of shoulders and ledges. 5. Provide means for drawing forms into firm contact with concrete before placing additional concrete over previous pours where shrinking and warping has separated concrete from forms. Embedded Items: 1. Properly locate, unless locating is specified elsewhere, and place inserts and embedded items required by other trades prior to casting concrete. J. Shoring: 1. Adequately brace and maintain shoring to safely support vertical, lateral, and asymmetrical loads until completed structure has attained design strength. 2. Distribute shoring loads over area where shoring is erected and protect against undermining or settlement. 3. Provide means for making vertical adjustments to compensate for settlement either before or during placing of concrete. 4. Construct shores for soffits of beams to permit removal of forms without removing shores. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FORMWORK Specifications 0031 00-4 5. Reshoring will be permitted. Shores and reshores shall be designed by a Civil Engineer registered in the State of California and installed under this direction. This Civil Engineer shall be employed by the Contractor. 3.4 REMOVAL A. Secure the Architect's approval for time and sequence of removal. B. Form Removal: Forms shall be removed without damage to the concrete, and in no case shall they be removed prior to the concrete member attaining the specified strength. MEMBER STRENGTH MINIMUM TIME' Vertical surfaces of 0.60 f 7 days walls, columns, beams, girders Beams, soffits, slab, 0.75 fc 14 days girder *Estimated curing time required to obtain desired strength. Results of the 7 -day test cylinder break shall be presented to the Architect to demonstrate compliance with above specified strength requirements prior to form removal. If a 7 -day test cylinder break demonstrates strength that is less than that specified, the Contractor may elect to take additional cylinders at the time of next pour to demonstrate strength requirements. The Contractor shall bear the cost of taking and testing the additional samples. C. Forms: 1. Remove forms carefully to avoid damaging comers and edges of exposed concrete. 2. Reuse: a. The Architect will approve reuse of forms provided they are straight, clean, free from nails, dirt, hardened concrete, or other injurious matter and edges and surfaces are in good condition. b. Clean and repair any damage caused by placing, removal, or storage. Reuse of formwork with repairs or patches which would result in adverse effects to architectural concrete finish will not be permitted. C. Store formwork in manner to prevent damage or distortion. d. Reseal as required to achieve concrete of specified quality. D. Shoring and Reshoring 1. Two levels of shoring or one level of shores over one level of reshores shall be maintained below any newly cast level until it has attained design strength and is at least 28 days old. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FORMWORK Specifications 0031 00-5 SECTION 00 32 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: Provision of reinforcement for all concrete unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 003100 - Formwork 2. Section 003300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.2 REFERENCES A. Requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION NO. 1 apply to all Work in this Section. B. Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations applyto Work of this Section where cited by abbreviations noted below (latest editions apply). 1. California Building Code (CBC), 2010 Edition. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. American Concrete Institute's a. "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" (ACI 315). b. "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318). 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) and/or Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (WCRSI). a. "Manual of Standard Practice." b. "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars." 5. American Welding Society's a. "Mild Steel Covered Arc -Welding Electrodes" (AWS A5.1). b. "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code: (AWS D1.4). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welders' Qualifications: Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4. B. Reinforcing steel shall not be permitted to rust where there is danger of staining exposed surfaces of adjacent concrete. The Contractor shall replace rust -stained concrete at his expense. C. Allowable Tolerances: Reinforcing steel shall be placed within tolerances permitted by ACI 318, Section 7.5.2 unless otherwise approved by the Architect. D. The Owner's Testing Agency will: 1. Collect mill test reports for reinforcement. 2. Provide inspection of welding, including prior fit -up, welding equipment, weld quality and welder certification in accordance with AWS D1.4 and UBC Standard No. 19-1. Chemical analysis sufficient to determine carbon equivalent and minimum preheat temperature shall be performed when reinforcement does not conform to low -alloy steel requirements of ASTM A706. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Specifications 00 32 00 -1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show bending and placing details, size and location of reinforcing steel. Include diagrammatic wall elevations at 1/4 -inch equals one foot scale to clearly show position and erection marks of bars including marginal bars around openings with dowels, splices, etc. One reproducible copy will be returned. B. Mill Test reports for each heat or melt of steel. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement and accessories to site not more than 48 hours before placement. B. Store in manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with grease, dirt, orother bond -weakening coatings. C. Take precautions to maintain identification after bundles are broken. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bars: New billet steel, ASTM A615 Grade 60; ASTM A706 for welded bars. B. Tie Wires and Spirals: ASTM A82. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. D. Welding Electrodes: Mild steel covered arc -welding types conforming to AWS A5.1. E. Bar Supports: As required for assembling and supporting reinforcement in place. 1. CRSI Class 3: Where bar supports do not come in contact with exposed concrete surfaces. 2. CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected; or Class 2 stainless steel wire: Interior and Exterior Soffits and Other Exposed Conditions. 3. Precast Concrete Wired Block: At slabs -on -grade and as necessary at other locations. F. Threaded coupler: Lenton Standard coupler by ERICO or equal product substituted per Section 016300. Coupler shall develop 125 -percent of specified yield strength of reinforcement. G. Welded Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A-108 fy = 70,000 psi, flux filled deformed bar anchors. Same as Nelson DZL or equal product substituted per Section 016800. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop -fabricate to comply with drawings. B. Conform to requirements of ACI 315 where specific details are not shown or where drawings and specifications are not more demanding. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Specifications 003200-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Place bars as noted. 2. All reinforcement shall be continuous. See drawings for lap splice schedule. Stagger splices where possible. Contact lap splices shall be securely wired together to maintain alignment. 3. Ensure placement will permit concrete protection in conformance with CRSI or to extent shown. 4. Support and fasten bars securely with spacers, chairs or ties to permit their being walked upon without displacement or movement both before and during placement of concrete. Wire -tie bar intersections. 5. Do not bend bars around openings or sleeves. Wherever conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, etc. interfere with placing of reinforcement, obtain the Architect's approval of placing before concreting. 6. Do not field bend bars unless expressly noted in the Contract Documents. B. Welding: 1. Employ shielded metal -arc method and conform to AWS D1.4. 2. Ensure equipment supplies proper current and voltage and is adjustable to suit arrangement and thickness of items welded. C. Prior to placing concrete, verify reinforcement has been bent, positioned, and secured in accordance with drawings; ensure removal of oil, grease, dirt, or other bond -weakening coatings; replace severely rust -pitted reinforcing bars. D. Quality Assurance: 1. The Owner's Testing Agency will inspect placement of reinforcement and mechanical splices and notify Architect of any discrepancies in placement 2. The Owner's Testing Agency will inspect shop and field welding per CBC 1704. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Specifications 003200-3 SECTION 00 33 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: Provision of cast -in-place concrete unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 003100 - Formwork. 2. Section 003200 - Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 005120 - Structural Steel. 4. Section 005500 - Metal Fabrications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION NO. 1 apply to all Work in this Section. B. Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations apply to Work of this Section where cited by abbreviations noted below (latest editions apply). 1. California Building Code (CBC), 2010 Edition. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. American Concrete Institute's: a. "Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials' (ACI 117) b. "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings" (ACI 301). C. "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing Concrete" (ACI 304). d. "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting" (ACI 305). e. "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" (ACI 306) f. "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318). 4. State of California, Business and Transportation Agency Division of Highways' "Materials Manual," (CMM). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor's Testing Laboratory Qualifications: The Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall be under direction of a Civil Engineer registered in the State of California, shall have operated successfully for four years prior to this work, and shall conform to requirements of ASTM E329. B. Requirements of ACI 301 shall govern work, materials and equipment related to this Section; specifications herein set minimum results required, and references to procedures are intended to establish minimal guides. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for quality of concrete in place and shall bear burden of proof that concrete meets minimum requirements. Tolerances shall meet the requirements of ACI 117 except as modified in the Construction Documents. D. Placing of concrete by means of pumping will be an acceptable method of placement providing that the Contractor can demonstrate that: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-1 1. Specified concrete strengths will be met. 2. Equipment has a record of satisfactory performance under similar conditions and using a similar mix. 3. Trial batches have been made. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit: 1. Certified copies of mix designs for each concrete class specified including compressive strength test reports. 2. Certification that materials meet the requirements specified. 3. Samples only as requested by the Architect. 4. Certification from vendor that samples originate from and are representative of each lot proposed for use. B. The Owner's Testing Agency will submit reports on tests and inspections performed to the Owner, the Architect, the Contractor, and the City Building Department. C. Shop Drawings: Show construction and expansion and contraction joint locations and details. D. Schedule of placing concrete for the Architect's review before starting work. E. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with installation instructions for proprietary materials including reinforcement and forming accessories, form coatings, admixtures, joint materials, hardeners, curing materials and others as requested by the Architect. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ensure storage facilities are weather tight and dry. B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. C. Store bulk cement in bins capable of preventing exposure to moisture. D. Use sacked cement in chronological order of delivery. Store each shipment so that it may be readily distinguishable from other shipments. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE A. Concrete Properties LOCATION 28 -DAY AGGREGATE WEIGHT SLUMP WATER/ % Comments STRENGTH SIZE CEMENT FLYASH FOOTINGS, GRADE 4500 1 145 4 .45 15 BEAMS SLAB -ON -GRADE 4500 3/4 145 4 .45 0 water reducing admixture FILL ON METAL 4000 3/4 145 4 .45 0 water DECK reducing admixture SUSPENDED 4500 3/4 145 4 .45 0 SLABS, BEAMS AND WALLS B. Strength refers to the compressive strength in psi after 28 -days when tested in accordance with ASTM C39. All concrete shall develop compression strength specified in 28 -days. To meet above requirements, mix shall be designed such that average compressive strength will exceed specified 28 -day strength by an amount as specified by ACI 318. C. Aggregate size refers to the maximum size in inches. D. Weight refers to pounds per cubic foot, air dry. E. Slump is measured in inches and tested in accordance with ASTM C143. F. Water/Cement Ratio is the maximum ratio of water to cementitious material by weight. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Cement and aggregates shall have proven history of successful use with one another. Sources of cement and aggregate shall remain unchanged through -out work unless the Architect approves request for change made at least 10 -days prior to anticipated date of casting. 2. Ready -mixed concrete shall meet requirements of ASTM C94. 3. Deviations in properties of materials tested by the Owner's Testing Agency shall be cause for their rejection pending additional test results and redesign of mix by the Contractor's Testing Laboratory. 4. No frozen aggregates will be permitted. B. Cements: ASTM C150, Type II or V as specified on plans. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise directed by the Architect. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type F. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-3 D. Aggregates: 1. Coarse: ASTM C33. Coarse aggregate shall consist of a clean, hard, fine grained, sound crushed rock, or washed gravel or a combination of both. It shall be free from oil, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than two percent by weight of shale or cherry material. "Cleanness value shall not be less than 75 when tested per MM Test Method, 227 and conforming to CBC Section 1903. 2. Fines: ASTM C33. Sand equivalent shall be not less than 75 when tested as per ASTM D2419. 3. Light Weight Aggregates: ASTM C330; expanded shale type uniformly graded from 3/4 - inch to No. 200 Mesh. Cleanliness value and sand equivalent not less than 75. 4. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. E. Water: Clean and potable, free from impurities detrimental to concrete. F. Admixtures: 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A, non-lignini sulfonate. Same as Grace Construction Materials' "WRDA with Hycol"; Master Builders "Pozzolith 322N"; Sika Corp.'s "Plastocrete 161"; or equal. 2 Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other products. Same as W.R. Grace's "Daravair", Master Builders' "Micro -Air", Sika Corp.'s "Sika Aer", or equal. 3 High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. Same as W.R. Grace's "Daracem 19", Master Builders' "Rheobuild", Sika Corp.'s "Sikament", or equal. 4 Water Reducing, Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. Same as W.R. Grace's "Polarset", Master Builder's "Pozzutec 20", Sika's "Sikaset NC", or equal product substituted per Section 016300. 5 Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D. Same as W.R. Grace's "Daratard-17", Master Builders' "Pozzoliith R", Sike's "Plastiment", or equal product substituted per Section 016300. 6 Other Admixtures: Only as approved by the Architect. G. Wax Sealer: Heavy penetrating type as manufactured by approved manufacturer of clear hardener. Non -Shrink Grout: Premixed high strength grout requiring only addition of water at the site. Same as Master Builder's "Masterflow 928 Grout"; "MasterFlow 713 Grout", Burke's "Non - Ferrous, Non -Shrink Grout", or equal product substituted per Section 016300. Curing Materials: 1. Waterproof Paper: ASTM C171, Type 1, regular. Same as Sisalkraft Division of St. Regis Paper Co.'s "Orange Label" or equal product substituted per Section 016300. 2. Sheet Plastic: Polyethylene, four mils thick, fungus -resistant. 3. Curing Compound: ASTM C309. Same as Curecrete Chemical Company's "Ashford Formula"; Master Builders' "Masterkure N -Seal -W", or equal. J. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment (Sealer/Hardener): Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate, potassium siliconate, or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, densifies and seals concrete surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Titan Hard; Burke Group, LLC. b. Chemisil Plus; ChemMasters. C. Intraseal; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Ashford Formula; Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-4 e. Day -Chem Sure Hard; Dayton Superior Corporation. f. Euco Diamond Hard; Euclid Chemical Co. g. Seal Hard; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. h. Elite—HS: Atlas Tech Products K. Hardener, Clear Liquid Type: Grace construction Materials' "Hornstone Crystal Chemical Hardener" Master Builder's "Mastercron"; Sonneborn-Contech's "Lapidolith"; Upco Co.'s "Vitrox 4701" or equal. L. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, approved standard product resin type. 1. Gray Cement: Free of wax or oil, compatible with subsequently applied finishes or coverings, delivered in unopened labeled container. 2. Integrally Colored Concrete: Compound recommended by manufacturer of color admixture M. Epoxy Adhesive: Two component materials suitable for anchoring rebar into dry or damp concrete. Same as Covert's "CIA -Gel 7000", Hilti's "HIT HY-150" or equal. Fibrous Reinforcement: ASTM C1116, Type 3, collated, fillibrated %" (20mm) polypropylene fibers designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs. Same as W.R. Grace's "Grace Fibers', Buckeye's "UltraFiber 500", Euclids "Fiberstrand 100" or Fibermesh's "Fibermesh". Add 1 '/2 lbs. of fibers per cubic yard of concrete. Use in strict accordance with fiber supplier's recommendation. O. Joint Materials: 1. Preformed Fiber Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751 non -extruding preformed bituminous saturated fiberboard units. Plain or punched for dowels as required. 2. Joint Sealing Compound: Refer to Section 079200. Under Slab Vapor Retarder: 1. Provide vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material where shown. Use only materials resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154. 2. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, minimum water vapor permeance of 0.3 perms per ASTM E 154. Minimum 15 mils thick. Do not use visqueen or polyethylene. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:: 1. "Griffolyn Type 65G" by Reef Industries Inc. 2. "Moistop Ultra A" by Fortifiber. 3 "Stego Wrap" 15 mil, Class A Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries. 4. "Vapor -Mat" 15 mil by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 3. Sand Cushion (under floor slabs): Clean, screened "Manufactured" Sand (not natural sand), graded and passing the following sieve analysis: 4/100°/x, 8/75°/x, 16/51%, 30/36%, 50-27%, 100/14%, and 200/17%. Materials shall be compactible at optimum moisture content. 2.5% absorption when tested per ASTM C 127. Q. Color Additive for integral colored exterior cove paving 2.3 MIXES A. General Requirements: 1. The Contractor shall perform tests or assemble the necessary data indicating conformance with specifications. 2. For each mix submit data showing that proposed mix will attain the required strength in accordance with requirements of CBC Section 1905.3. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-5 3. If sufficient test results are not available, the contractor shall produce trial mixes in accordance with requirements of CBC Section 1905.4, Method "C". 4. The Contractor shall instruct Laboratory to base mix design on use of materials tested and approved by the Owner's Testing Agency. 5. Mix design shall include compression strength test reports per CBC Section 1905.3. 6. Mix shall be designed, tested, and adjusted if necessary in ample time before first concrete is scheduled to be placed. Laboratory data and strength test results for revised mix design shall be submitted to Architect prior to using in project. 7. Ensure mix designs will produce concrete to strengths specified and of uniform density without segregation. 8. If mix yield exceeds 1 -cubic yard, modify mix design to no more than one cubic yard without changing cement content. 9. The Contractor's mix designs shall be subject to review by the Architect and by the Owner's Testing Agency. 10. Introduction of calcium chloride will not be permitted. 11. Unspecified admixtures will not be permitted unless the Architect reviews, the Contractor modifies mix designs as necessary, and modifications are accepted by the Owner's Testing Agency. B. Slab -on -Grade Mix requirements: Use of Water -Reducing admixture is required. High Range Water -Reducing admixture (super plasticizer) shall be used when required to maintain workability and pumpability. C. Patching Mortar: Mix in proportions by volume of one part cement to two parts fine sand. D. Concrete Fill at Stairs: Mix in proportions by volume of one part cement, two parts fine aggregate, one part coarse aggregate (3/8- inch); with as little water as necessary to make stiff workable plastic mix. E. Non -Shrink Grout: Follow approved manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 2.4 MIXING A. Batching Plant Conditions: 1. Batch plant shall be certified to comply with the requirements of the National Concrete Ready Mix Association. 2. Ensure equipment and plant will afford accurate weighing, minimize segregation and will efficiently handle all materials to satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner's Testing Agency. 3. Replace at no additional expense equipment the Architect and the Owner's Testing Agency deem inadequate or unsuitable. 4. Use approved moisture meter capable of determining moisture content of sand. B. General Requirements: 1. Thoroughly clean concrete equipment before use for architectural concrete mixes to avoid contamination. 2. Mix cement, fine and coarse aggregates, admixtures and water to exact proportions of mix designs. 3. Measure fine and coarse aggregates separately according to approved method that provides accurate control and easy checking. 4. Adjust grading to improve workability; do not add water unless otherwise directed. 5. Maintain proportions, values, or factors of approved mixes throughout work. 6. Mix concrete in transit mixers five minutes immediately prior to discharge in addition to mixing as called for by ACI 304 and ASTM C94. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-6 C. Admixtures: Use automatic metering dispenser to introduce admixture into mix. Dispenser shall be recommended and calibrated by admixture manufacturer. D. Transit -Mixed Concrete: ASTM C 94. Provide from established commercial plant. 1. Truck Mixers: Minimum 2 cu. yd. capacity, equipped with accurate revolution counter. Operate at rated speed. Discontinue use of mixers producing unsatisfactory concrete or showing more than 10% difference in sand -cement or water -cement ratios in samples taken from front, center and back of mixer. 2. Mixing Time: Total at least 15 minutes, with at least 5 minutes immediately after addition of water, and at least 10 minutes just before discharging. 3. Mixing Water: Withhold 2-1/2 gallons per cubic yard from predetermined water content. All or part thereof may be added at site, as directed. 4. Retempered Concrete: Do not use concrete not placed within 90 minutes after water is introduced into mix or which has stood for 30 minutes after leaving mixer. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner's Testing Agency will: 1. Review mix designs, certificates of compliance, and samples of materials the Contractor proposes to use. 2. Test and inspect materials, as necessary, in accordance with ACI 318. 3. Take samples as required from the Contractor's designated sources. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine units of work to be cast and verify that: 1. Construction of formwork is complete. 2. Required reinforcement, inserts, and embedded items are in place. 3. Form ties at construction joints are tight. 4. Concrete -receiving places are free of debris. 5. Dampen subgrade or sand course for slabs -on -grade. Do not saturate. 6. Depths of depressed slab conditions are correct for delayed finish noted and for its proper bonding to concrete. 7. Conveying equipment is clean and properly operating. 8. The Architect has reviewed formwork and reinforcing steel and that preparations have been checked with the Project Inspector. B. Do not begin casting before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure availability of sufficient labor, equipment and materials to place concrete correctly in accordance with scheduled casting. B. Protect finished surfaces adjacent to concrete -receiving places. C. Clean transportation and handling equipment at frequent intervals and flush thoroughly with water before each day's run. Do not discharge wash water into concrete form. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-7 3.3 PLACING A. The Inspector of Record, Architect, Structural Engineer, and Testing Laboratory shall be notified at least 48 hours before placing concrete. B. Place concrete in accordance with CBC Section 1905. C. Place concrete in cycles as a continuous operation to permit proper and thorough integration and to complete scheduled placement. Place no concrete where sun, wind, heat, or facilities prevent proper finishing and curing. D. Convey concrete as rapidly and directly as practicable to preserve quality and to prevent separation from rehandling and flowing; do not deposit concrete initially set. Complete placement of concrete within ninety (90) minutes after adding water unless otherwise noted. Retempering of concrete which has partially set will not be permitted. E. Take precautions to avoid damage to under -slab moisture barrier and displacement of reinforcement and formwork. F. Deposit concrete vertically in its final position. Avoid free falls in excess of six feet where reinforcement will cause segregation and in typical conditions unless the Architect approves otherwise. G. Keep forms and reinforcement clean above pour line by removing clinging concrete with wire brush before casting next lift. Also remove leakage through forms. H. Interruption in casting longer than 60 -minutes shall be cause for discontinuing casting for remainder of day. In this event, cut back concrete and provide construction joints as the Architect directs; clean forms and reinforcement as necessary to receive concrete at a later time. Hot Weather Concreting: Conform to ACI 305 and following requirements when mean daily temperature rises above 75 degrees Fahrenheit. 1. An upper temperature limit of concrete mixes shall be established by the Contractor for each class of concrete. Concrete temperature during placing shall not be so high as to cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints, and shall not exceed 90°F. Other project climatic conditions detrimental to concrete quality such as relative humidity, wind velocity, and solar radiation shall also be considered. 2. Trial batches of concrete for each mix design shall be made at the limiting mix temperature selected. In lieu of trial batches, compression strength test reports (20 minimum) at the limiting temperature for each proposed mix shall be submitted to the Owner's testing laboratory for review. 3. Practices to maintain concrete below maximum limiting temperature shall be in accordance with ACI 305. Concrete ingredients may be cooled before mixing, or flake ice or well -crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for part of the mixing water. 4. Practices to avoid the potential problems of hot weather concreting shall be employed by the Contractor in accordance with ACI 305. 5. When the temperature of the reinforcing steel or steel deck forms is greater than 120°F, reinforcing and forms shall be sprayed with water just prior to placing the concrete. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-8 J. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. No placement of concrete will be allowed at temperatures below 20 degrees Fahrenheit or if mean daily temperature for curing period is anticipated to be below 20 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Conform to ACI 306 and following requirements when mean daily temperature falls below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. a. Reinforcement, forms or ground to receive concrete shall be completely free from frost. b. Concrete at time of placement for footings shall have temperature no lower than 50 degrees Fahrenheit, for all other concrete this minimum temperature at time of placement shall be 60 degrees Fahrenheit. Maximum temperature shall be 90 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Concrete shall be maintained at temperature no lower than 50 degrees Fahrenheit for minimum 7 -day period after placement by means of blanket insulation, heaters, or other methods as approved by the Architect. d. Use of calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride as accelerators will not be permitted. e. The Contractor shall keep a record of concrete surface temperature for first 7 - days after each pour. This record shall be open to inspection by the Architect. K. Consolidating: 1. Use vibrators for thorough consolidation of concrete. 2. Provide vibrators for each location during simultaneous placing to ensure timely consolidation around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms; ensure availability of spare vibrators in case of failures. Vibrate through full depth of freshly placed concrete. 3. Do not place vibrators against reinforcement, attach to forms, or use to spread concrete. 4. Exposed Concrete: Vibrate with rubber type heads and, in addition, spade along forms with flat strap or plate. L. Construction Joints: 1. Verify location and conformance with typical details; provide only where designated or approved by the Architect. Comply with CBC Section 1906.4. 2. All horizontal and vertical construction joints to be thoroughly sandblasted to clean and roughen entire surface to minimum 1/4 -inch relief exposing clean coarse aggregate solidly embedded in mortar matrix. 3. Just prior to depositing concrete, the surface of the construction joint shall be thoroughly wetted. M. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: 1. Construct contraction joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels of patterns indicated on Shop Drawings. Use "Early Entry" saw equipment. Use saw cuts 1/8" x 1/4 slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Time saw cutting to allow sufficient curing of concrete to prevent raveled or broken edges. 3. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. 4. If joint pattern not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15' in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third - bays). N. Walls and Other Formed Elements: 1. Space points of deposit to eliminate need for lateral flow. Placing procedures of concrete in forms permitting escape of mortar, or flow of concrete itself, will not be permitted. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-9 2. Level top surface upon stopping work. 3. Take special care to fill each part of the forms by depositing concrete directly as near final position as possible, and to force concrete under and around reinforcement, embedded items, without displacement. 4. After concrete has taken its initial set, care shall be exercised to avoid jarring forms or placing any strain on ends of projecting reinforcement. 5. Where backfill is placed against a wall, it shall be adequately shored until it has attained design strength. O. Concrete Fill at Stairs: 1. Preparation: a. Remove laitance, mortar, oil, grease, paint, etc. b. Mechanically chip insufficiently rough surfaces. C. Remove sand, etc., with compressed air. 2. Finish stairs to profiles shown with cove at base of risers and radius at top: tool grooves at edge of treads as detailed. 3.4 CURING A. General Requirements: 1. Take curing measures immediately after casting and for measures other than application of curing compound, extend for seven days. The Architect may recommend longer periods based upon prevailing temperature, wind and relative humidity. Comply with CBC Section 1905.11. 2. Avoid alternate wetting and drying and fluctuations of concrete temperature. 3. Protect fresh concrete from direct rays of sun, rain, freezing, drying winds, soiling, and damage. 4. Do not permit curing method to affect adversely finishes or treatments applied to finish concrete. B. Curing Method, Typical: Obtain the Architect's approval of alternate measures. 1. Keep forms and concrete surfaces moist during period forms are required to remain in place. 2. Apply curing compound per manufacturers' recommendations, except at slabs -on -grade apply curing compound at 150% of manufacturer's recommended application coverage rate. 3. For slab on grade, provide 7 day wet cure with "Burlene" moist curing blanket. C. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect and coating manufacturer. D. Slab Curing: Concrete slabs shall be moisture -cured or moisture cover cured as specified above for a minimum of 7 days after installation. Construction schedule shall allow for a minimum of 7 days. 1. Unacceptable vapor emissions may be caused by excessive moisture from too high water/cement ratio in the concrete mix or curing practices or admixtures which prevent proper hydration by accelerating the curing process. 2. For interior slabs -on -grade tested and found to have moisture vapor emission rate higher than that allowed by flooring material manufacturer, employ whatever means necessary to bring slab into compliance at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Should it be necessary to apply a topical treatment to slabs -on -grade in order to mitigate moisture vapor emissions, comply with following: a. Submit proposed products to Architect for review. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-10 b. Obtain written confirmation from flooring material manufacturer that proposed treatment is compatible with installation adhesives. 3.5 CLEANING, PATCHING AND DEFECTIVE WORK A. Where concrete is under strength, out of line, level or plumb, or shows objectionable cracks, honeycombing, rock pockets, voids, spelling, exposed reinforcement, signs of freezing or is otherwise defective, and, in the Architect's judgement, these defects impair proper strength or appearance of the work, the Architect will require its removal and replacement at the Contractor's expense. B. Immediately after stripping and before concrete is thoroughly dry, patch minor defects, form -tie holes, honeycombed areas, etc., with patching mortar. Patch shall match finish of adjacent surface unless otherwise noted. Remove ledges and bulges. C. Compact mortar into place and neatly file defective surfaces to produce level, true planes. After initial set, dress surfaces of patches mechanically or manually to obtain same texture as surrounding surfaces. D. Rock Pockets: 1. Cut out to full solid surface and form key. 2. Thoroughly wet before casting mortar. 3. Where the Architect deems rock pocket too large for satisfactory mortar patching as described, cut out defective section to solid surface, key and pack solid with concrete to produce firm bond and match adjacent surface. E. Cleaning 1. Ensure removal of bituminous materials, form release agents, bond breakers, curing compounds if permitted and other materials employed in work of concreting which would otherwise prevent proper application of sealants, liquid waterproofing, and other delayed finishes and treatments. 2. Where cleaning is required, take care not to damage surrounding surfaces or leave residue from cleaning agents. 3. Remove all exposed, loose fibers from slabs to the satisfaction of the architect. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete from injurious action of the elements and defacement of any nature during construction operations, including stairs. B. Protect exposed corners of concrete from traffic or use which will damage them in any way. C. Make provisions to keep all exposed concrete free from laitance caused by spillage or leaking forms or other contaminants. Do not allow laitance to penetrate, stain, or harden on surfaces which have been textured. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner's Testing Agency will: 1. Perform testing in accordance with ACI 318 and CBC Section 1903 and 1905. 2. Review concrete mix designs. 3. Inspect concrete and grout placement continuously. 4. Test concrete to control slumps according to ASTM C143. 5. Continuously monitor concrete temperature as it arrives on the site. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-11 6. Test concrete for required compressive strength in accordance with CBC Section 1905.6: a. Make and cure four specimen cylinders according to ASTM C31 for not more than each 50 cubic yards, or 2000 square ft for of surface areas of slab or walls poured each day. b. Retain one cylinder for 7 -day test, two for the 28 -day test and hold one cylinder for additional testing as required. C. Number each cylinder 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D etc; date each set; and keep accurate record of pour each set represents. d. Transport specimen cylinders from job to laboratory after cylinders have cured for 24 -hours on site. Cylinders shall be covered and kept at air temperatures between 60 and 80 degrees Fahrenheit. e. Test specimen cylinders at age 7 -days and age 28 -days for specified strength according to ASTM C39. f. Base strength value on average of two cylinders taken for 28 -day test. 7. Test and inspect materials, as necessary, in accordance with ACI 318, MM Test Method 227 (Coarse Aggregates) and MM Test Method 217 (Fine Aggregates), for compliance with requirements specified in this section. B. The Contractor shall: 1. Submit ticket for each batch of concrete delivered to job site. Ticket shall bear the following information: a. Design mix number. b. Signature or initials of ready mix representative. C. Time of batching. d. Weight of cement, aggregates, water and admixtures in each batch with maximum aggregate size. e. Total volume of concrete in each batch. f. Notation to indicate equipment was checked for contaminants prior to batching. 2. Pay the Owner's Testing Agency for taking core specimens of hardened structure and testing specimen according to ASTM C88 and C42 when laboratory tests of specimen cylinders show compressive strengths below specified minimum. 3. Submit Concrete Weighmaster affidavit. 3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish Work or by other construction. Concrete surface shall have texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is as -cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Architectural Concrete Finish: Integrally colored concrete, using specified color additive; smooth light sandblast surface. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-12 3.9 SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. 1. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerances for floor flatness FF of 20 and floor levelness FL of 15. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances for flatness FF of 25 and levelness FL of 20. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed -to -view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. Check and level surface plane to tolerances flatness FF of 35 and levelness FL of 25. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 2. Floors to receive traffic topping shall have steel trowel finish. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin -set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. Non -Slip Broom Finish: Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. Chemical -Hardener Finish: Apply chemical -hardener finish to interior concrete floors where indicated, after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. G. Sealer: Apply only to slabs not receiving other floor coverings, as indicated in Finish Schedule. Apply only to surfaces that are sound, properly troweled and finished, and that are clean, dry, and free of form release agents, retarders, alkali, curing compounds, oil, grease and other contaminants. 1. Discolored or stained slabs shall be acid -cleaned and etched before sealer is applied if, in Architect's judgment, a satisfactory uniform finish cannot be otherwise achieved. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-13 Other Slabs: Completely and uniformly seal with the specified clear sealer applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and prescribed coverage rate. Apply uniformly, producing a coating which is smooth and free from runs and blemishes 3.10 CLEAN UP A. Perform Work under this Section to keep affected portions of building site neat, clean, and orderly. Remove, immediately upon completion of Work under this Section, surplus materials, rubbish, and equipment associated with or used in performance. Be aware that failure to perform clean-up operations within 24 hours of notice by Architect will be considered adequate grounds for having work done by others at no added expense to the Owner. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Specifications 003300-14 SECTION 00 51 20 PART 1 -GENERAL A. Section Includes: Provision of structural steel as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Structural steel framing, including all structural steel shown on the structural drawings and all standard shapes, plates and rods shown on the Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings that connect to the building structure. 2. Elevator rail bracing. 3. Welded stud connectors for composite construction, concrete engagement, and attachment of building components. 4. Anchor rods. 5. Shop painting. 6. Bent plate deck closures. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 003200 - Concrete Reinforcement 2. Section 003300 - Concrete 3. Section 005500 - Metal Fabrications 1.2 REFERENCES A. Requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION NO. 1 apply to all Work in this Section. B. Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations applyto Work of this Section where cited by abbreviations noted below (latest editions apply). 1. California Building Code (CBC), 2010 Edition. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. American Institute of Steel Construction: a. "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005" (AISC 360). b. "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, June 30, 2004" (AISC 348). C, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, March 18, 2005" (AISC' 303). i. No provision of AISC 303 shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Contractor or Structural Engineer from those set forth in these Contract Documents. ii. Where discrepancies exist between the requirements of the Contract Documents and AISC 303, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern. d. "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Including Supplement Number 1, March 9, 2005" (AISC 341). 4. American Welding Society's: a. "Structural Welding Code -- Steel" (AWS D1.1), 2002. b. "Seismic Welding Supplement" (AWS D1.8), 2005. C. "Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination (AWS A2.4). Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 00 51 20 -1 d. "Filler Metal Specifications" (AWS A5). e. "Criteria for Describing Oxygen -Cut Surfaces and Oxygen Cutting Surface Roughness Gauge" (AWS C4.1). f. "Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors" (AWS QC1). 5. American National Standards Institute's: a. "Plain Washers" (ANSI 818.22.1). b. "Beveled Washers" (ANSI B18.22.1). 6. Society of Protective Coatings': a. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP 1). b. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP 2). C. Brush -Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP 7). 7. American Society of Non -Destructive Testing's: a. ASNT Standard for Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Personnel (ANSI/ASNT CP -189-2001). b. Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing, 2001 Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A). 1.3 DEFINITIONS Testing (ASNT A. Demand -Critical Welds: Demand -Critical Welds are designated on the structural drawings. All Demand -Critical Welds are part of the Seismic -Load -Resisting System. B. Extra Smooth: Surfaces noted herein as "Extra Smooth" require a finish with surface variation of 500 micro -inches or less (AWS C4.1-77, Sample #4). C. Gouge: any depression deeper than the overall surface roughness. D. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as defined below. 1. ASTM A6 shapes with flanges thicker than 1 1/2"- 2. Welded built-up members with plates exceeding 2" in thickness, 3. Column base plates exceeding 2" in thickness. E. Nondestructive Testing: Nondestructive testing (NDT) includes magnetic particle testing (MT), penetrant testing (PT), radiographic testing (RT), and ultrasonic testing (UT).The terms nondestructive examination (NDE) and nondestructive testing (NDT) are synonymous. F. Protected Zone: The Protected Zone is defined as structural members, or portions thereof, to which connections of structural and non-structural elements are limited. The Protected Zone is designated on the structural drawings. G. Quality Assurance Plan: The Quality Assurance Plan is set of the written requirements containing the set of procedures that are to be followed by the Owner's Testing Agency to confirm compliance with these requirements. Seismic -Load -Resisting System (SLRS): The Seismic -Load -Resisting System (SLRS) is defined as all items designated "SLRS" on the Structural Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces, and their connections along grid lines denoted "SLRS" on the framing plans. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Steel Fabricator's Qualifications: Fabricator shall have had not less than 5 years' experience in fabrication of structural steel and be able to furnish evidence of his ability, facilities, proficiency of his personnel and completed projects. Fabricator shall be a City of Newport Beach Approved Licensed Fabricator. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-2 B. Steel Erector's Qualifications: Erector shall have had not less than 5 years' experience in erection of structural steel and be able to furnish evidence of his ability, facilities, proficiency of his personnel and completed projects. C. Welder Qualifications: Welders, welding operators, and tackers shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Welders shall have a valid Welding Performance Qualification Record (WPQR) for each welding procedure to be performed. 2. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before performing further welding. 3. Supplemental Welding Personnel Testing: Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom -flange Demand -Critical Welds shall pass Supplemental Welder Qualification Testing, as required by AWS D1.8, Section 5.1. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification 4. Qualification Period: Personnel who have not welded for a period of three or more months shall be requalified. Welding personnel required to be tested using the Supplemental Welding Personnel Testing shall be qualified by test within 12 months prior to beginning welding on the project. 5. The Contractor shall pay costs of certifying qualifications and requalifications. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Inspector Qualifications: 1. All Welding Inspectors shall be trained and thoroughly experienced in inspecting welding operations, and qualified as Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI) in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS QC1. 2. NDT Personnel Qualifications a. NDT personnel shall be qualified under one of the ASNT documents referenced in this specification. NDT performed by NDT Level I personnel shall be underthe close, direct supervision of an NDT Level Il. b. Demand -Critical Welds: UT may be performed only by UT technicians certified as Level II by their employer, or as ASNT Level III certified by examination by the ASNT. Ultrasonic testing technicians who perform flaw detection or sizing shall be trained in applicable UT procedure and shall demonstrate theircompetence through testing as prescribed in AWS D1.8, Annex E. B. Bolting Inspector Qualifications: Competency shall be demonstrated through the administration of a written examination and through the hands-on demonstration by the Inspector of the methods to be used for bolt installation and inspection. C. Submittals: The Owner's Testing Agency will submit the following items: 1. Quality Assurance Plan: The Quality Assurance Plan shall contain the Quality Assurance and Inspection items contained in this Section. 2. Qualifications of Owner's Testing Agency management and personnel designated for the project. 3. Qualification records for Owner's Testing Agency's Inspectors and NDT technicians designated for the project. 4. Owner's Testing Agency's Quality Control Plan for the monitoring and control of the Agency's operations. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-3 5. Written Practice for Owner's Testing Agencies: The Owner's Testing Agency shall maintain a Written Practice for the selection and administration of inspection personnel, describing the training, experience and examination requirements for qualification and certification of inspection personnel, including those of subcontracting agencies. The Written Practice shall also describe the Agency's procedures for determining the acceptability of the structure in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, and specifications. The Written Practice shall also describe the Agency's inspection procedures, including general inspection, material controls, visual welding inspection, and bolting inspection. a. Bolting Inspection Procedures: Comply with AISC 348 and the Quality Assurance Plan. b. Welding Inspection Procedures: Meet the requirements of the AWS D1.1 and the Quality Assurance Plan. C. Nondestructive Testing Procedures: The Written Practice shall describe the responsibility of each level of certification for determining the acceptability of material and welds in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, specifications and procedures. iffs�3U= LVA 11I/_1llll: A. The following items shall be submitted to the Architect for review. One reproducible copy will be returned. Do not fabricate material prior to obtaining final review of submittals. 1. Manufacturer's test reports and literature describing products, including but not limited to the following, and excluding those listed in Section 1.613: a. Manufacturer's Certifications for electrodes, fluxes and shielding gasses to be used. Certifications shall satisfy AWS A5 requirements. In addition submit a Certificate of Compliance from the Contractor supplying the materials. Submit certifications that the product meets any additional requirements of the project. b. Manufacturer's product data sheets for all welding material to be used. The data sheets shall describe the product, limitations of use, recommended welding parameters, and storage and exposure requirements, including baking and rebaking. 2. Plans of all levels showing dimensioned location of edge of slab, deck, and openings. Submit prior to Shop and Erection drawings. 3. Shop and Erection Drawings. Prior to the start of fabrication and erection, submit detailed shop and erection drawings for all structural steel showing: a. Size and location of all structural members and connection material. b. Type, size and location of bolts and welds. C. Identification of high-strength boltedjoints as snug -tight, pretensioned or slip -critical, as required by the Contract Documents. d. Locations where the Construction Documents require backing bars to be removed. e. Locations where the Construction Documents require supplemental fillet welds where backing is permitted to remain. f. Locations where the Construction Documents require weld tabs to be removed. g. Identification of members and connections of the Seismic -Load -Resisting System. h. Location and dimensions of the Protected Zone. i. Identification of welds in the Seismic -Load -Resisting System. j. Identification of Demand -Critical Welds. k. Shop and erection drawings shall clearly identify revisions and revision dates in accordance with AISC 303. I. Other items as required by AISC 303 or AISC 341, Section 5. M. Shop drawings shall include the following additional information: i. Complete information necessary for the fabrication of members including cuts, copes, holes, doubler plates, stiffeners, and camber. ii. Surface preparation and finishes, including both painting and grinding. iii. Material grades of all members, connection material, fasteners, and weld Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-4 filler metal. iv. Connection details drawn to scale for members of the Seismic -Load - Resisting System. V. With each set of shop drawings include corresponding erection plans or elevation drawings identifying pieces. n. Erection drawings shall include the following additional information: i. Identification mark of members. ii. Orientation and relation of members to appropriate grid lines. iii. Setting elevations for column bases. iv. Standard and special details for field connections. V. Identification of joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly order, welding sequence, welding technique, or other special precautions are required. o. Samples: Material samples shall be provided as requested by the Structural Engineer or Owner's Testing Agency. B. The following items shall be submitted to the Architect and Owner's Testing Agency. Submittal to the Architect is for record purposes only, and will not be reviewed. No copies will be returned. 1. Manufacturer's test reports and literature describing products: a. Structural Steel: Material test reports (MTRs), also called mill test reports, for all structural steel. MTRs shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A6. MTRs shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance from the fabricator. Structural steel shall be identified in accordance with CBC Section 2203. Submittal of mill test reports is required prior to start of steel fabrication. b. Fastening Material: Manufacturer's Certifications for fastener components, including bolts, nuts, washers, and direct tension indicators (if used), accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance from the Contractor. Manufacturer certifications shall contain: I. Heat analysis, heat number, and a statement certifying that prohibited elements were not added to produce the bolts. ii. Results of hardness, tensile, and proof load tests, as required and performed. iii. If galvanized, measured zinc coating weight or thickness, and the results of rotational capacity tests, including test method used (solid plate or tension measuring device) and lubricant present. iv. Results of visual inspection for bursts. V. Statement of compliance with dimensional and thread fit requirements. vi. Lot number and purchase order number. vii. For A490 bolts, only the Production Lot Method of testing and certification is acceptable. Shipping Lot Method is not acceptable. C. Welded Stud Connectors: Submit the following items: I. Manufacturer's Certification that the studs, as supplied, meet the requirements of AWS D1.1. ii. Certified copies of the stud manufacturer's test reports covering the last completed set of in -plant quality control mechanical tests for the diameter supplied. iii. Certified material test reports from the steel supplier. The Manufacturer's Certification shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance from the Contractor. 2. Bolting and Welding Procedures: Procedures shall assign responsibility to a person or position and shall contain enough detail to be useful to the workforce without reference to governing specifications. The procedures need not act as work instructions. Procedures shall be dated and indicate the person or position that has the authority to maintain the procedure. a. Fastener Installation Procedures: Submit written procedures for the pre -installation Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-5 testing, installation, snugging, pre -tensioning, and post -installation inspection of high strength fasteners. b. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs): Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1. Submit Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) as required by AWS D1.1, to be used on the project to the Owner's Testing Agency. C. Use forms provided in Annex E of AWS D1.1 or equivalent. d. Weld Sequence Procedures: Submit written procedures indicating field welding sequences for each type of connection with multiple field -welded joints, and the sequence of such connections to be Feld -welded at each level. e. Weld Shrinkage and Distortion Control Plan: Where shrinkage is likely to cause distortion or other problems, submit a mitigation plan. The contractor is responsible for determining conditions requiring a Weld Shrinkage and Distortion Control Plan. 3. Welding Performance Qualification Records (WPQRs): Written Welding Performance Qualification Records (WPQRs), in accordance with AWS D1.1, for all welders on the project. Submit documentation that the welder has passed all designated supplemental welder qualification testing required for the types of welding to be performed. Submit documentation showing that the welder continued to use the applicable welding process on an ongoing basis since the WPQR test was conducted. I11111111115�911.111011110_11o11:11 :1aW:1:K0]►691C11101[*P► Kole] 011y:1:7=10[$]q When requested by structural engineer and prior to performing any fabrication or erection work, the Owner's Representative, Architect, Structural Engineer, and Owner's Testing Agency, together with Steel Fabricator personnel and Steel Erector personnel supervising the shop, field and Quality Control work shall hold a Pre -construction Conference to review submittal requirements, welding procedures, bolting procedures, fabrication and erection issues, and inspection requirements for all structural steel operations. fiU:i0]bill" 9Q214U/21:YR.`110:7_lei=0V IH:1910119141010 A. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. B. Structural steel shall be stored and handled in a manner that prevents damage or distortion. Discharge materials carefully; do not dump onto ground. C. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members of the supporting structure. D. Store structural steel members, whether on or off site, above ground on platforms, skids, or other support; store other materials in weather -tight, dry place until use. E. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. F. Electrode Requirements: 1. Packaging of weld filler metals shall conform to the requirements of AWS D.1.1. FCAW electrodes shall be received in undamaged moisture -resistant containers. They shall be protected against contamination and injury during shipment and storage. When removed from protective packaging and installed on machines, care shall be taken to protect the electrodes and coatings from deterioration or damage. 2. Modification or lubrication of an electrode after manufacture is not permitted, except that drying shall be permitted when recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Electrode Storage and Exposure Limits for Demand -Critical Welds: The exposure time limit for electrodes shall be in conformance with AWS D1.8 Section 6.4. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-6 G. Fasteners shall be stored in a protected place. Except for ASTM F1852 "twist -off" type assemblies, clean and relubricate bolts, nuts and washers that become dry or rusty before use. F1852 fastener components may be relubricated following the manufacturers written instructions, and must be retested after relubrication and prior to use to verify suitability for installation. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS A. Provide the Owner's Testing Agency with free access to places on and off job site where materials are stored or fabricated, to places where equipment is stored or serviced, and to job site. B. Sequencing, Scheduling: 1. Notify the Architect and Owner's Testing Agency in sufficient time prior to shop or field fabrication and erection to permit testing and inspection without delaying Work. 2. Ensure timely delivery of items to be embedded in work of other sections; furnish setting drawings and directions for installation 3. Provide templates for setting of anchor rods, one per location. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Plates, Tube, Pipe, and other sections: As noted on drawings. 1. All HSS shapes shall be manufactured (rolled and seam welded) in the United States. Alternatively, HSS shapes from outside the United States shall have all seam welds tested by ultrasonic examination. Costs of tests and repairs, if any, shall be borne by the contractor. B. Heavy Sections: 1. Heavy Sections in the Seismic -Load -Resisting System shall be supplied with Charpy V - notch (CVN) testing in accordance with AISC 341 requirements. 2. Plates and Flanges in Heavy Sections shall be free of laminations within 3" of areas to be welded with complete -joint -penetration welds. C. Standard Threaded Fasteners: 1. Machine Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Plain Washers: ASTM F844. 3. Beveled Washers: ANSI B18.23.1. High Strength Bolts: 1. ASTM A325 -N, snug -tight, unless otherwise noted. 2. Bolted joints in the Seismic -Load -Resisting System shall be Slip -Critical, with pretensioned high-strength bolts and a Class A Paying surface or better. 3. Twist -off -Type Tension -Control Bolt Assemblies: ASTM F1852. 4. Direct Tension Indicators: Load Indicator Washers: ASTM F959 5. Nuts for High Strength Bolts: ASTM A563. 6. Washers for High Strength Bolts: ASTM F436. E. Welding materials: 1. Comply with AWS D1.1 with a nominal 70 ksi tensile strength. 2. Supplemental Requirements for the Seismic -Load -Resisting System: Welds shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.8, Section 6. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-7 Welded Stud Connectors: 1. Headed Shear Studs: AWS D1.1 "Type B" automatic end -welded headed studs made from ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020. 2. Threaded Studs: Automatic end -welded threaded studs made from ASTM At 08, Grades 1010 through 1020. G. Anchor Rods and Nuts: ASTM F1554; Grade as noted on drawings. 1. Grade 55 shall be weldable per supplement S1. 2. Grades 55 shall have a minimum CVN toughness of 15 ft -lbs at 40° F per supplement S4. 3. Grade 105 shall have a minimum CVN toughness of 15 ft -lbs at -20° F per supplement S5. H. Threaded Rods: As noted on drawings. Clevises and Turnbuckles: AISI C-1035; in addition clevises and turnbuckles shall have design strengths corresponding to the 2005 AISC Steel Construction Manual with ultimate capacities at least 200% of the tabulated LRFD values. J. Primer 1. Interior steel: primer shall conform to SSPC Paint Specification No. 13. 2. Exterior steel: primer shall conform to SSPC Paint Specification No. 20 (Zinc -Rich Primer) 3. Primers shall contain no lead or chromates. 4. Contractor shall verify compatibility with finish paint where applicable. K. Zinc -Rich Coating for Repair of Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich coatings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A780. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General Requirements: 1. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC 360 (Chapter M and Section J2), AISC 303, and AWS D1.1 as applicable to Statically Loaded Structures, except as otherwise noted herein. a. Assume all thermally cut edges are subject to tension stresses. b. Delete paragraphs M4.6 and M5.1 from Chapter M of AISC 360. 2. Fabricate and assemble work in shop to greatest extent possible. 3. Where possible, use procedures that do not require Architect's approval. Such approval may not be given in some circumstances. 4. Coordinate as required for attachment of other work to structural steel. 5. Drill or punch holes for passage of reinforcing steel shapes, sections, plates, or bars as indicated on Contract Drawings. Notify Architect of conditions not shown or noted. 6. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with AISC 360, Chapter M, and AISC 303, Section 6. Where more restrictive tolerances are necessary to properly install other building systems and components then adopt the more restrictive tolerances. 7. Holes and attachments to structural steel in areas designated as the Protected Zone are not allowed except as explicitly shown or noted on structural drawings. B. Connections: 1. Shop Connections: Bolted or welded as noted. 2. Field Connections: Locate splices only where noted or approved by Architect. 3. To the extent possible, assemble structural steel in the shop prior to galvanization. C. Bolted Joints: 1. Punch or drill holes 1/16" larger than bolt size. Material having thickness in excess of connector diameter plus '/a" shall be drilled rather than punched. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-8 2. Ream unfair holes, but only up to next larger bolt size and install a bolt corresponding to the new hole size. Where unfairness exceeds maximum, weld hole in base material solid and drill hole of proper size. 3. Remove burrs that would prohibit solid seating of connected parts. 4. Mark completely tightened bolts with identifying symbol. 5. Provide hardened washers over slotted holes. 6. Draw up tight, check threads with chisel or provide approved lock washers where bolts are not pretensioned. 7. Assembly with Standard Threaded Fasteners: Provide beveled washers under bolt heads or nuts resting surfaces exceeding five percent slope with respect to head or nut. 8. Assembly of High -Strength Structural Bolted Joints: a. Meet requirements of AISC 348. b. Seismic -Load Resisting System joints shall be slip -critical (friction -type) as defined in AISC 348 with Class A or better Paying surfaces. C. Provide hardened washers under provided under the element turned in the tightening procedure of high strength bolts. d. Direct tension indicator washers, where used, shall be provided under the head of slip -critical high strength bolts. D. Welded Construction: (shop and field) 1. Weld in accordance with AISC 360, AWS D1.1, and CBC Chapter 22. 2. Welding shall be performed in accordance with the WPS for the joint. 3. Welds that will be permanently exposed to view shall have burrs, flux, welding oxide air spots, and discolorations removed. Surfaces of such welds shall be reasonably smooth and uniform. 4. Exterior welds shall be watertight. 5. Each welderworking on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark. Each welder shall mark or stamp this identification symbol at each weld completed. Stamps, if used, shall be the low -stress type. 6. Before testing, all welds to be subjected to ultrasonic testing (UT) shall be given a visible mark, "for UT," accurately placed on the steel a distance of 4" away from the root of the edge preparation. 7. Groove welds shall be complete -joint -penetration welds, unless specifically designated otherwise. 8. WPSs shall be available to welders and inspectors prior to and during the welding process. Prior to welding, joint fit -up shall be verified by the welder for conformance with the WPS and AWS D1.1. 9. Supplemental Welding Requirements a. Maximum Preheat and Interpass Temperature: The maximum preheat and maximum interpass temperature permitted is 550° F, measured at a distance of 1" from the point of arc initiation. This maximum temperature may not be increased by the WPS, regardless of qualification testing. b. Nonfusible Backing: The use of nonfusible backing materials, including ceramic and copper, is permitted only with satisfactory welder qualification testing performed using the type of backing proposed for use and using the test plate shown in AWS D1.1, Figure 4.21, except that groove dimensions shall be as provided in the WPS and PQR. For nonfusible weld tabs and short segments of nonfusible backing bars used at the ends of welds between shear plates and column faces, or at the ends of continuity plate welds, special welding personnel and welding procedure qualification testing is not required. C. Peening, Controlled Cooling, and Post -Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT): If peening, controlled cooling, or PWHT are used, they shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1 and a written procedure for their performance shall be incorporated into the appropriate WPS. i. If insulating blankets are used to control cooling a written procedure and Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 005120-9 temperature measurements are not required. ii. The application of heat immediately following completion of a joint to maintain a nominal temperature at or below 550° F is not considered PWHT. d. Intermix of Filler Metals: For Demand -Critical Welds in which different weld filler metals are used, supplemental toughness testing shall be conducted as prescribed in FEMA 353, Part I, Appendix C. e. Wind Velocity Limits: In the Seismic -Load -Resisting -System, in lieu of the wind speed limitations in AWS D1.1, welds using GMAW, FCAW-G, GTAW and EGW methods shall not be performed when the wind velocity in the immediate vicinity of the weld exceeds three miles per hour. Welding performed within an enclosed area, and not subject to drafts may be deemed to satisfy this requirement. For SMAW, FCAW-S, and SAW processes wind shall not affect the appearance of the molten weld puddle. 10. Welded joints of the Seismic -Load -Resisting -System shall conform to AWS D1.8, Section 6. 11. Welded Joint Details: a. Backing bars: The use of backing bars shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Backing bars shall be removed where required by the Contract Documents or AWS D1.1. i. Heavy Section Splices Requiring Removal of Backing Bars: All welded splices of Heavy Sections, shall have the backing bars removed. Where fusible backing material is used, the root pass area shall be backgouged after backing bar removal, and backwelded until flush or with slight reinforcement. The surface shall then be ground Extra Smooth. ii. Beam -Column Connection Joints Requiring Removal of Backing Bars: Following removal of backing, remove un -sound weld metal at the root area and any excessive weld discontinuities, and backweld. Minimize gouging and removal of base metal. A reinforcing fillet weld with a minimum leg size of 5/16' or the root opening plus 1/16°, whichever is larger, shall be provided. Perform MT on the fillet weld and the immediately adjacent area. iii. If groove weld backing is permitted to remain, the backing shall not exceed 3/8" thickness. For connections of the seismic -load -resisting system in which backing is not removed, backing shall be attached to the member or plate that does not have its surface prepared for the groove weld. Attachment shall be by either a '/4" fillet or 1/8" groove weld along the complete bar length on the side of the bar opposite the groove weld. b. Weld dams are not allowed. C. Weld Tabs: i. Use of Weld Tabs: Welds shall be terminated at the end of ajoint in a manner that will ensure sound welds. Whenever necessary, this shall be done by use of weld tabs. 1. Weld tabs shall extend beyond the edge of the joint a distance equal to a minimum of the part thickness, but not less than 1 ". 2. Weld tabs shall be oriented parallel to the joint preparation and to the weld direction. 3. Nonfusible weld tabs may be used in applications and locations where qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 4. ii Heavy Section Joint Weld Tab Removal and Finish: All welded tension splices in Heavy Sections, shall have the weld tabs removed and ground Extra Smooth. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-10 iii SLRS Beam -Column Connection Weld Tab Removal and Finish: 1. Weld tabs of SLRS connections shall be removed. Removal may be performed by air carbon arc cutting (CAC -A), grinding, chipping, or thermal cutting to within 1/8" of the base metal surface. For continuity plate weld tabs, removal within 1/4" of the plate edge is adequate. The process shall be controlled to minimize removal of base metal except for that material immediately adjacent to the weld. The edges where the weld tabs have been removed shall be finished Extra Smooth. 2. In SLRS connections, gouges deeper than 1/16" at locations of removal of weld tabs shall be repaired by welding according to the requirements of this Specification for Deep Gouges. Weld filler metal requirements for Demand -Critical Welds apply. The contour of the weld at the ends shall provide a smooth transition, free of gouges and sharp corners. A minimum radius at the corner need not be provided. 3. Following weld tab removal, finishing, and completion of any necessary repairs, the exposed ends of the weld shall be inspected using magnetic particle testing (MT). d. Weld toes: Weld toes, whether for groove welds or fillet welds, shall provide a smooth transition between the weld and base metal. The as -welded profile is adequate provided it satisfies the criteria of AWS D1.1, Section 5.24. e. Weld access holes: I. Weld access holes shall meet the dimensional, surface finish, and testing requirements of AISC 360 Chapter J1.6 and AWS D1.1, except as otherwise required by the Contract Documents. ii. Where the height of the weld access hole exceeds the quantity k-tf+1'/" or where the length of the weld access hole exceeds 4 tf (where k and tf are defined in AISC 360), welded reinforcement is required. Notify the Architect for specific instruction. iii. At welded flange joints that are part of the Seismic Load Resisting System, the weld access hole detail shown in Figure 6.2 of the AWS D1.8 shall be used unless the section is a Heavy Section. iv. The SLRS access hole shall conform to AWS D1.8, Section 6.9.2. V. SLRS weld access holes shall be inspected using magnetic particle testing (MT) or liquid penetrant testing (PT) and shall be free of cracks. If a welded gouge repair has been performed, magnetic particle testing (MT) shall be performed. f. Web weld details: A minimum clear distance of/" shall be provided between the weld access hole and fillet welds connecting the shear plate and beam web. g. Welding for Moment Connection of Bottom Beam Flange shall be sequenced so as to minimize residual stresses in the joint h. Weave Passes: Weave passes are not permitted in groove welds in the SLRS.Column continuity plate details: I. Column continuity plate details: 1. If backing bars are used and remain in place, they shall receive a reinforcing fillet weld between the backing bar and column flange. No fillet weld should be placed between backing bar and continuity plate. 2. Weld terminations near the end of the column flange tips may be completed using weld tabs. Weld tabs shall be removed. Conform to AWS D1.8 Sections 6.10.3 and 6.10.4. Following finishing, the edge shall be inspected using MT. Fillet weld terminations between the continuity plate and column web shall be approximately %" from each end of the joint. I. Tack Welds in the SLRS Protected Zones: Tack welds in the SLRS Protected Zones are permitted only if they are incorporated into a required weld. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-11 E. Heavy Sections: 1. General: See AISC 360 Chapter A3.1 c for materials requirements. 2. Applicability of Provisions: All requirements of AISC 360 for Group 4 and 5 shapes shall apply to Heavy Sections as defined in this Specification. 3. Access Hole Requirements: Access holes shall conform to the requirements of AISC 360, Chapter J1.6. Weld access holes must be preheated to a minimum of 150° F prior to thermal cutting, ground to an Extra Smooth finish. Inspect holes for cracks using either penetrant testing (PT) or magnetic particle testing (MT). Optionally, weld access holes may be made by drilling and saw -cutting without grinding, but PT or MT of the cut surface is still required. 4. Welding: The minimum preheat and interpass temperature shall be as specified by AISC 360, Chapter J2. Weld tabs and backing bars shall be removed, ground to an Extra Smooth finish, with reinforcement not to exceed '/8", at a transition slope not to exceed 1:10. See AISC 360 J2 for preheat requirements and J1.5 for weld tab and backing bar removal requirements. 5. Splices shall conform to the requirements of AISC 360, Chapter J1.5 Camber: Provide camber as indicated on contract drawings in accordance with AISC 360 Chapter M2.1. G. Welded Connectors: Install in accordance with AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's recommendations. There shall be no porosity or evidence of lack of fusion between the end of the stud and the steel member. Repair of Discontinuities in Protected Zone of Seismic -Load -Resisting System. 1. Tack Welds: Tack welds are permitted only if they are incorporated into a required weld. 2. Repair of Discontinuities: If erection aids within the Protected Zone cannot be avoided, the Structural Engineer's approval of the aid's placement, use, and the repair method is required. Conform to AWS D1.8 Section 6.15.4. 3. Air Carbon Arc Cutting and Thermal Cutting: Air carbon arc cutting (CAC -A) and thermal cutting is permitted in the Protected Zone with the prior approval of the Structural Engineer for the removal of backing bars and weld tabs, as specified in these documents. 4. Gouges in members and connections in the Seismic -Load -Resisting System shall be repaired according to the requirements of this Specification. Weld filler metal requirements for the Seismic -Load -Resisting System apply, unless otherwise noted. Surface Finish 1. Flush Surfaces: Welds in butt joints required to be flush shall be finished so as to not reduce the thickness of the thinner base metal orweld metal by more than'/1 fi', or 5%ofthe material thickness, whichever is less. Remaining reinforcement shall not exceed '/32" in height. However, all reinforcement shall be removed where the weld forms part of a faying or contact surface. All reinforcement shall blend smoothly into the plate surfaces with the transition areas free from undercut. 2. Finish Methods and Values: Chipping and gouging may be used, provided these methods are followed by grinding. Where surface finishing is required, surface shall be Extra Smooth, unless otherwise noted orspecified in this document. Measurementofsurfacefinish values by visual appearance or tactile comparison is acceptable. J. Repair of Gouges: Gouges are not permitted in areas requiring an Extra Smooth finish surface, or where specifically prohibited by AWS D1.1 or this Specification. Repair of gouges meet the following requirements, unless otherwise noted: 1. Shallow Gouges: Gouges up to 3/16" deep shall be removed by grinding as per D1.1, or to a radius of not less than 3/e'. Deep Gouges: Gouges deeper than 3/16" shall be repaired by welding. Prior to welding, Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-12 gouges shall be ground to provide an Extra Smooth contour with a radius not less than 3/3". The repair area shall be preheated to a temperature between 400° F and 550° F, measured at the point of welding approximately one minute after removal of the heating source, or shall be preheated in accordance with AWS D1.1 Annex XI for high restraint. Awritten repair WPS for the application shall be followed. Following completion of welding, the area shall be ground Extra Smooth, with fairing of the welded surface to adjoining surfaces where applicable, and shall be inspected using magnetic particle testing (MT). 3. The transitional slope after gouge removal shall not exceed 1:5. K. Weld Acceptance Criteria shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Regions of welds that cannot be inspected shall be identified and recorded, and the Structural Engineer shall be notified. 2.3 FINISHES A. Prime Painting 1. Surfaces to be painted: a. Apply one coat of exterior primer to structural steel surfaces permanently exposed to weather. b. Apply one coat of primer to interior structural steel surfaces. C. Do not prime paint following surfaces: 1. Surfaces to be encased in concrete except initial 2". 2. Surface to be field welded. 3. Surface to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 4. Contact surfaces joined by high-strength bolts. 2. Preparation of Surfaces: a. Thoroughly clean mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from steel prior to painting. b. Where hand -cleaning methods are inadequate, clean in accordance with SSPC-SP1, SSPC-SP 2, or SSPC-SP 7, as required. 3. Painting: a. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's specifications to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mils per coat. b. Permit thorough drying before shipment. C. Do not prime in temperatures lower than 45 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Galvanization 1. Galvanize steel where required by the Drawings or by other sections of the Specification. 2. Galvanize Shapes in accordance with ASTM At 53, ASTM At 23 / A123M. 3. Galvanize Fasteners in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 40 minimum. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner's Testing Agency will: 1. Review ladle analysis and certificates of compliance. Where certification is questionable, test material to verify compliance. 2. Inspect shop fabrication. 3. Provide the management, personnel, equipment, and services required to perform the quality assurance functions required below. 4. Verify that no improper attachments to the Protected Zone have been made. 5. Inspect Heavy Sections: a. Heavy Section flanges shall be ultrasonically examined at locations to be groove - welded, for evidence of laminations, inclusions, or other discontinuities, in accordance with ASTM A898, Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes. Examination shall include entire area within 3" of such joints. b. For plates, ultrasonically examine in accordance with ASTM A435, Straight Beam Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-13 Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates. Any discontinuity causing a total loss of back reflection that cannot be contained within a circle with a diameter of the greater of 3" or one-half the plate thickness shall be rejected. Forward copies of all product and procedure certificates, data sheets, and test and inspection reports to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, and, Contractor, and the Building Department. B. Welding Inspection: The Welding Inspector shall perform the tasks indicated in the following list. This list shall not be considered exclusive of any additional inspection tasks that may be necessary to meet the requirements of AWS D1.1, CBC, and the Quality Assurance Plan 1. Review and understand the applicable portions of the specifications, the Contract Documents and the shop drawings for the project. 2. Verify that all applicable welder qualifications, welding operator qualifications and tack welder qualifications are available, current, accurate, and in compliance with these specifications. 3. Verify welder identification and qualification. Verify that any required supplemental welder qualification testing, if required for the joint, has been executed and that the welder has passed. 4. Verify that each welder has a unique identification mark or die stamp to identify welds. 5. Verify that all applicable Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs), with Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs) as needed, are available, current and accurate, and comply with AWS D1.1 and this specification. 6. Verify that an approved Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) has been provided and that each welder performing the weld has reviewed the WPS. A copy of the appropriate WPS shall be available for each joint, although need not be present at each joint location. 7. Review mill test reports for all main member and designated connection base material for compliance with the project requirements. 8. Verify base material identification with the contract documents. 9. Verify the electrode, flux and shielding gas certifications for compliance with the Contract Documents. 10. Verify welding consumables with the approved WPSs. 11. Verify that electrodes are used only in the permitted positions and within the welding parameters specified in the WPS. 12. Verify that electrodes and fluxes are properly stored, and that exposure limits for the welding materials are satisfied. 13. At suitable intervals, observe joint preparation, assembly practice, preheat temperatures, interpass temperatures, welding techniques, welder performance and any post -weld controlled cooling and heat treatment to ensure that the requirements of the WPS and AWS D1.1 are satisfied. 14. At suitable intervals, verify current and voltage of the welding equipment in application of the WPS, if needed, by a calibrated amp and voltmeter. Current and voltage shall be measured near the arc with this equipment. 15. Inspect the work to ensure compliance with AWS D1.1 and the specified weld acceptance criteria. 16. Schedule NDT technicians in a timely manner, after the visual inspection is complete and the assembly has cooled. The final NDT on a specific weld shall be performed at least 24 hours after the welding has been completed. 17. Mark the welds, parts, and joints that have been inspected, and accepted, with a distinguishing mark ordie stamp, or maintain records indicating the specific welds inspected and accepted by each inspector. 18. Document the accepted and rejected items in a written report. Transmit the report to the designated recipients in a timely manner. C. Nondestructive Testing of Welded Joints Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-14 1. Magnetic Particle Testing: Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) shall be conducted by the Owner's Testing Agency at the frequency designated in Table 2-1. MT shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1, and AWS D1.8 Annex F. 2. Ultrasonic Testing: Ultrasonic testing (UT) shall be conducted by the Owner's Testing Agency for the percentage of joints designated in Table 2-1. UT shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Weld Acceptance Criteria shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Regions of welds that cannot be inspected shall be identified and recorded, and the Structural Engineer shall be notified. 4. K -Area Welding Inspection: After welds of continuity plates and doubler plates have cooled to ambient temperature, test column webs for cracking using liquid penetrant (PT) or magnetic particle testing (MT) over a zone 3" above and below each weld. Table 2-1. Nondestructive Testing Requirements Notes: UT is required only when the weld thickness is 5/16" or greater. If anyjoint fails testing, test 100% of joints until 40 consecutive welds pass. The testing rate may then be reduced to 25%. Test joint on each side of cantilever beam support. Reduce the rate of UT to 25% if after 40 welds have been inspected, an individual welder's reject rate is less than 5%. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine units of Work to be placed and verify that all anchor rods have been installed properly and have sufficient bolt and thread elevation. B. Do not begin erection before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. General Requirements: 1. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC 360 Chapter M, AISC 303, and AWS D1.1 Structural Steel Welding Code as applicable to Statically Loaded Structures. 2. Requirements for bolted and welded joints specified in Part 2 of this Specification shall also apply to field connections unless otherwise noted. 3. Erection Tolerances: Do not exceed the erection tolerances specified in AISC 303, Section Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-15 Nondestructive Testing Requirements Complete -Joint- partial -Joint -Penetration Welds and Weld Category Penetration Welds' Fillet Welds Welds not described below No NDT required unless otherwise No NDT required unless otherwise noted noted SLRS welds not described MT 25% of joints, full length 2 MT 25% of joints, 6" spot at random2 below UT 25% of joints, full length Top -flange joints at MT 100% of joints, full length cantilever beam MT 100% of joints, full length connections3 UT 100% of joints, full length Demand -Critical Welds: MT 100% of joints, full length MT 100% of joints, full length Buttjoints in column splices UT 100% of joints, full length" Notes: UT is required only when the weld thickness is 5/16" or greater. If anyjoint fails testing, test 100% of joints until 40 consecutive welds pass. The testing rate may then be reduced to 25%. Test joint on each side of cantilever beam support. Reduce the rate of UT to 25% if after 40 welds have been inspected, an individual welder's reject rate is less than 5%. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine units of Work to be placed and verify that all anchor rods have been installed properly and have sufficient bolt and thread elevation. B. Do not begin erection before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. General Requirements: 1. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC 360 Chapter M, AISC 303, and AWS D1.1 Structural Steel Welding Code as applicable to Statically Loaded Structures. 2. Requirements for bolted and welded joints specified in Part 2 of this Specification shall also apply to field connections unless otherwise noted. 3. Erection Tolerances: Do not exceed the erection tolerances specified in AISC 303, Section Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-15 7. Where more restrictive tolerances are necessary to properly install other building systems and components then adopt the more restrictive tolerances. 4. Where erection requires performing work of fabrication on site, conform to applicable standards for fabrication. B. Field Cutting or Alteration: There shall be no field cutting, alteration, or repair of structural steel members or of connections without prior review and approval by the Structural Engineer. Structural elements with fabrication errors or that do not satisfy tolerance limits shall be repaired. Submit drawings showing reasons for, and details of, proposed corrective work. C. Anchor rods shall be set in conformance with Section 7.5 of AISC 303. D. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide shoring and bracing as needed until permanent lateral - support is in place and complete. Contractor is responsible for identifying the need for temporary shoring and bracing. E. Erection Procedures: Control erection procedures and sequences to avoid problems caused by temperature differentials and weld shrinkage, and other sources of expansion and contraction. Field Assembly: 1. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact before assembling members. 2. Do not fasten splices of columns and other members with bearing joints designated on the drawings before abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact. 3. Bolted Construction: a. Installation of high-strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A325 for slip -critical or snug -tightened type joints, as applicable, in accordance with AISC 348. Provide washer under head or nut of high strength bolts. Washer shall be provided underthe element being turned during tightening. Bolts in welded connections shall be tensioned after completion of welding. b. At bolted joints designated as Slip -Critical orthose require Pretension, use Twist -off - Type Tension -Control bolt assemblies or Direct Tension Indicators. C. Do not use flame cutting to align bolt holes except as permitted by AISC 348 specifications. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Do not enlarge holes to a diameter greater than 1 ". When reaming beyond 1/32", drill or ream to the next larger hole size and use the next larger size bolt. 4. Mill scale shall be removed from the column in the area where the beam flanges will be welded to the column. G. Gas Cutting: Use of flame cutting torch will be permitted only after the Architect's prior written approval and only where metal cut will not carry stress during cutting, and cut surfaces will not be visible. When thermal cutting is permitted, cutting shall be done with a mechanically guided torch or a torch controlled using a guide bar. Field Touch -Up Painting: After erection, touch-up paint field connections and abrasions resulting from the Work of this Section with same paint used for shop prime painting. Remove and repair galvanized surface as required for field welding in accordance with ASTM -A780, A2; required thickness is 100 micro -inches. Touch up with zinc -rich coating. Repair material shall extend at least three inches beyond edges of damaged areas. J. Protected Zone: Attachments to structural steel in the Protected Zone, other than spot welding of metal deck to beams and welding of metal studs to braces as shown on structural drawings, are not allowed Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-16 3.3 CLEANING A. After erection, thoroughly clean surfaces of foreign or deleterious matter such as dirt, mud, oil, or grease that would impair bonding of fireproofing, concrete, or other finishes as applicable. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE The Owner's Testing Agency shall: A. Verify proper anchor rod group location, elevation, and orientation prior to placement of concrete foundations. B. Verify proper anchor rod group location, elevation, and orientation subsequent to placement of concrete foundations prior to arrival of structural steel. C. Perform field welding inspection and testing in accordance with the requirements in Part 2 of this Specification for shop fabrication, unless otherwise noted. D. Inspect and test high strength bolted joints in accordance with AISC 348. E. Sample and test bolt assemblies that include direct tension indicators, on a daily basis to verify proper indication of deformation with required bolt tension for each size and lot. F. Inspect erected structural steel as required to establish conformity of Work with reviewed shop drawings and Contract Drawings. G. Perform testing and inspection of welded stud connectors in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1. After the bend test, the weld section shall not exhibit any tearing or cracking. Inspect structural steel to verify that the Protected Zones of members of the Seismic -Load -Resisting System are free of damage and attachments not approved by the Structural Engineer. Forward copies of all test and inspection reports to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, and, Contractor, and the Building Department. AIIIXOM-1x0lIPL`I Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation STRUCTURAL STEEL Specifications 0051 20-17 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings. B. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry C. Section 12 3600 - Countertops D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 05 50 00 A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. F. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. G. ASTM B21 IM - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Rolled or Cold -Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2012e1. H. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. I. ASTM B22 IM - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. J. AWS D1.1/D1.IM - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). L. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type Il, "Organic'); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). M. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications &30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 05 50 00 B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold -formed structural tubing. C. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black fmish. D. Welding Materials: AWS 131.1/13LIM; type required for materials being welded. E. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A143; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish at interior locations, hot dip galvanized at exterior locations. 1. Mezzanine Access Ladder, as shown on drawings. 2. Side Rails: 3/8 x 2 inches members spaced at 20 inches. 3. Rungs: one inch diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches on center. 4. Space rungs 7 inches from wall surface. B. Steel countertop support bracket: 1/4" thick minimum steel angle as detailed on drawings, prime paint finish. C. Fabricated Steel Hanging Rod and Supports: as detailed on drawings. Grind all welds. prime paint finish all parts, except hanging rod to be stainless steel. 2.05 PREFABRICATED LADDERS A. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section. 2. Materials: Aluminum; ASTM B221/B221M, alloy 6063-T52. 3. Products: a. O'Keeffe's, Inc; Model 500: www.okeeffes.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Miscellaneous embedments and attachments. 2.06 FINISHES -STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications &30/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 05 50 00 I. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: Two coats. E. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.07 FINISHES - ALUMINUM A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-C22A44 Electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick; dark bronze. 2.08 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. F. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply or brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 0.051 mm (2.0 mils). G. At all galvanized products, clean all damaged areas and re -coat using specified galvanizing coating per manufacturer's criteria. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 1/4 inch. End of Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 05 50 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted handrails. B. Stair railings and guardrails. C. Free-standing railings at steps. D. Balcony railings and guardrails. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 05 5213 A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of backing plates in stud wall construction. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611 -Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. C. ASTM E985 -Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Handrails and Railings: I. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc: www.crlaurence.com. 2. Kee Safety, Inc: www.keesafety.com. 3. KaneSterling: www.sterlingdula.com. 4. The Wagner Companies: www.wagnercompanies.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code. B. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. C. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. D. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings &30i2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 05 5213 E. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T -shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.03 ALUMINUM MATERIALS A. Welding Fittings: No exposed fasteners; cast aluminum. 2.04 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop -welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. D. Welded Joints: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. 2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A44 Electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. B. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply 2 coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. C. Anchor railings securely to structure. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings &30/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 1/4 inch. End of Section 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Section 05 5213 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 05 5213 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 05 73 Wood Treatment PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Factory treatment for wood products. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Section 06 05 73 B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Nisus Corporation: www.nisuscorp.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied, penetrating termiticide. 1. Products: a. Nisus Corporation; Bora-Care: www.nisuscorp.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood, Steel and Concrete: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied termiticide formulated for use on wood, steel, concrete and other building materials. 1. Products: a. Nisus Corporation; Bora-Care Commercial: www.nisuscorp.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove dust, dirt and other contaminants from treatment surfaces. Remove tarpaulins, dropcloths, strippable protective films, etc., from areas to be treated Move equipment and stored materials that block or prevent product application. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. End of Section 06 05 73 - Wood Treatment &30i2013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 06 05 73 - Wood Treatment &30/2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 06 05 73 SECTION 00 61 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: Provision of all lumber framing, rough hardware and blocking as indicated in the contract drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 003100 — Concrete Framework 2. Section 006180 — Glue -Laminated Construction A. Requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION NO. 1 apply to all Work in this Section. B. The following published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations apply to Work in this Section (latest editions apply). 1. California Code of Regulations. Title 24, 2010 edition, also known as California Building Code (CBC). 2. (APA) — American Plywood Association, "Guide to Plywood Grades". 3. (PS) — United States Product Standard, PS -1 and PS -2 "Construction and Industrial Plywood". 4. (UL) — Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., "Fire Hazard Classification, FR -S'. 5. (WCLIB) — West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules No. 16". 6. (WWPA) — Western Wood Products Association, "Grading Rules for Lumber". 7. (AWPA)—American Wood Preservers' Association Standards. 8. (AF&PA) — American Forest and Paper Association. 9. (ASTM) — American Society of Testing and Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings of all specially fabricated rough hardware. B. Samples only as requested by the Architect. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. B. Keep materials dry. Where necessary, stack materials off ground on level flat forms, fully protected from weather. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform moisture content of lumber at not more than 19 -percent during and after installation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation ROUGH CARPENTRY Specifications 0061 00-1 B. Sequencing, Scheduling: Coordinate details with other Work supporting, adjoining or fastening to rough carpentry Work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Rough Carpentry 1. Sills on Concrete: Pressure treated Douglas Fir. 2. Lumber (Wood Framing): Meet requirements of following minimum grades. Item Studs D. F. No.2 Plates D. F. No.2 Beams D. F. No.1 Joists D. F. No.1 Posts D. F. No.1 Blocking D. F. No.2 3. Plywood: Provide thickness, grade, and panel identification index shown on drawings. For plywood thickness 15/32 or greater provide minimum of 5 ply. B. Rough Hardware: All exterior hardware shall be hot -dipped galvanized. 1. Nails: Common wire, typical; hot -dipped galvanized at exposed conditions and pressure -treated lumber. 2. Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with special corrosion -resistant finish. Provide guide washers to accurately control penetration. Accomplish fastening by low-velocity piston -driven powder -actuated tool. Pins and tool: Hilti Fastening Systems. 3. Expansion Bolts: Reverse cone, self -wedging, expansion type, Tightening of nut or increased tension on bolt shank shall act to force wedges outward to create positive increased resistance to withdrawal, Hilti Kwik - Bolt II or equal product substituted per Section 01630. 4. Metal Framing Connectors: Fabricate from hot -dipped galvanized steel (G90 coating). Connectors in contact with pressure treated lumber shall have G185 hot dipped galvanized coating per ASTM A653. Connectors shall be at least 16 - gauge material, 1/8 -inch plate materials where welded, unless otherwise shown or specified, punched for nailing. Nails and nailing shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions, with a nail provided for each punched nail hole. Use maximum nail size listed by manufacturer. Manufactured by Simpson Company or equal product substituted per Section 01630. 5. Miscellaneous Hardware: Provide all common screws, bolts, fastenings, washers and nuts required to complete rough carpentry Work. 6. Bolts and sill bolts in wood shall be ASTM A307 with standard cut threads; full diameter bolts (no rolled or "upset" threads permitted) per ANSI/ASME standard B18.2.1. 2.2 TREATMENTS A. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Same as Koppers Co., Inc.'s "Non -Com" J.H. Baxter and Co.'s "Baco-Pyresote"; or equal product substituted per Section 01630. B. Preservative Treatment: Furnish in accordance with AWPA. Preservatives with an ammonia base, including Ammoniacal Copper Zinc Arsenate (ACZA) are not permitted. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation ROUGH CARPENTRY Specifications 0061 00-2 2.3 FABRICATION A. Preparation 1. Verify measurements at job site. 2. Verify details and dimensions of equipment and fixtures integral with finish carpentry for proper fit and accurate alignment. 3. Coordinate details with other work supporting, adjoining, or fastening to casework. B. Lumber 1. Air- or kiln -dry to maximum 19 -percent moisture content at time of surfacing. 2. Furnish surfaced four sides, S4S, unless otherwise noted. 3. Size to conform with rules of governing standard. Sizes shown are nominal unless otherwise noted. C. Wood Treatments 1. Fire -Retardant Treatment: a. Fire -retardant treat only wood blocking supporting truss joists on steel beams, unless otherwise noted. b. Treat in accordance with AWPA C20 and approved manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Preservative Treatment: a. Treat lumber and plywood sheathing. I. In contact with concrete and masonry less than six feet above the ground. ii. Exposed to weather permanently. iii. Where specified in the Contract Documents. b. Lumber: Treat in accordance with AWPA C2 C. Plywood: Treat in accordance with AWPA C9 d. After Treatment and prior to shipping, air- or kiln -dry lumber to maximum 12 -percent moisture content. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Lumber shall bear grade -trademark or be accompanied by certificate of compliance of appropriate grading agency. B. Plywood shall bear APA grade -trademark. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive rough carpentry Work and verify following: 1. Completion of installation of building components to receive rough carpentry Work. 2. That surfaces are satisfactory to receive Work. 3. That spacing, direction, and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking, backing, stripping, furring and nailers. 4. That all anchor bolts and holdown bolts are properly installed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Cutting: Perform all cutting, boring, and similar Work required. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation ROUGH CARPENTRY Specifications 0061 00-3 B. Studs, Joists, Beams, and Posts: Install all members true to line. No wood shingle shims are permitted. Place joists with crown up; maximum 1/4 -inch crown permitted. C. Nail joints in accordance with applicable requirements of the CBC Table 2304.9.1 unless otherwise shown or specified. Predrill where nails tend to split wood. Nails into pressure -treated lumber shall be hot -dipped galvanized. D. Bolt holes to be 1/16 -inch oversize. Threads shall not bear on wood. Use standard malleable iron washers against wood unless noted otherwise on drawings. Carriage bolts require washers under the nut only. E. Provide blocking, nailers, stripping, and backing as shown and as required to secure other Work. F. Maintain 1/8 -inch gap between all plywood panel edges. G. Do not use plywood sheets having a width smaller than 2 -feet 0 -inches. H. Plywood flooring shall be field glued with adhesive meeting APA specification applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply continuous line of glue on joists and in groove of tongue and groove panels. I. Where wood is cut, sawed, planed, bored or marred after preservative or fire -retardant treatment, apply two heavy brush coats of compatible material used in treatment. Nail heads shall be driven flush with plywood surface. Overdriven nails (nails which fracture the outer ply layer) shall be replaced one for one. K. Screws (Wood or Lag): Screws shall be screwed and not driven into place. Screw holes for un -threaded portion shall be predrilled to the same diameter and depth of shank. Holes for threaded portion shall be predrilled less than or equal to the diameter of the root of the thread. Provide standard cut washers under head of lag screws. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING EXPOSED TIMBER A. Remove damaged or otherwise disfigured portions and replace with new prior to the Owner's acceptance. B. Wash finished Work in strict accordance with product manufacturer's directions and ensure that washed surfaces do not differ from clean unwashed surfaces. Any difference will be considered unsatisfactory work. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner's Testing Agency shall: 1. Inspect erected timber framing as required to establish conformity of work with Drawings. 2. Inspect all bolted connections. 3. Inspect all timber connectors per CBC. 4. Inspect roof diaphragm nailing for nail size, spacing and penetration at plywood panel edges, and special nailing at collector and drag members. 5. Inspect shear wall nailing for nail size, spacing, edge distance and penetration at plywood panel edges, and nailing at holdown posts. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation ROUGH CARPENTRY Specifications 0061 00-4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 15 00 Wood Decking PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plywood structural wood decking. B. Composite wood decking. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Bearing support. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 0615 00 A. ASTM D1761 -Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood; 2006. B. AWPA Ul -Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood -Preservers' Association; 2010. C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, and bearing details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience and certified by AITC. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plywood Decking: 1. Boise Cascade, LLC: www.bc.com. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.gp.com. 3. Weyerhaeuser Cc: www.weyerhaeuser.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Composite Wood Decking: L CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. Correct Building Products, Inc.: www.correctdeck.com. 3. Trex Company, Inc: www.trex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 06 15 00 - Wood Decking &30i2013 Page 1 oft Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0615 00 B. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site; see Section 01 60 00 for requirements for locally -sourced products. C. Plywood Decking: PS 1 veneer plywood; APA Rated Sheathing, Span Rating ; Exterior grade; l A interior veneer appearance grade; sanded. D. Composite Decking: Recycled hardwood mixed with polypropylene and molded into standard lumber board sizes and accessory shapes; minimum polypropylene content o£40 percent. 1. Texture: Molded wood grain finish one side; smooth, matte finish on the other. 2. Color: Select from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Edges, Field Boards: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 80, maximum; smoke developed index of 285, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Fastener Type and Finish for Composite Decking: Stainless steel, trim head. 2.04 WOOD TREATMENT A. Factory -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage plywood tongue and groove edges. C. Allow expansion space at edges and ends. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. C. Secure with fasteners. Side spike planks together, through pre -drilled holes. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. End of Section 06 15 00 - Wood Decking &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. C. Hardware and attachment accessories. Section 06 20 00 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. C. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awigcp.org. D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. E. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). F. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough -in, electrical rough -in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. 2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 3. Include certification program label. D. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 06 20 00 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality certification of completed work. 1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS Grade or Grades specified. 2. This project has been registered as AWUQCP project number 3. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels. 4. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program. 5. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and products meet the specified requirements. 6. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification. 7. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWUAWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. B. Exterior Woodwork Items: 1. Window Casings and Moldings: Softwood; prepare for paint finish. 2. Soffits and Fascias: Prepare for paint finish. 3. Enclosing Soffit Spaces: As detailed. 4. Enclosing Structural Members: Softwood lumber; "PT" preservative treat. C. Interior Woodwork Items: 1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint finish. 2. Window Sills: Clear fir; prepare for transparent finish. 3. Suspended Wood Ceiling System: "FR -S" treated. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry &30/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS Section 06 20 00 A. Hardwood Lumber: Birch species, smooth sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. 2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, VGS color(s) as indicated; furniture finish. B. Laminate Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. 2.05 FASTENINGS A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9. 2.08 WOOD TREATMENT A. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking. B. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum percent moisture content. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 2.10 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry &30/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 06 20 00 B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. End of Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry &30i2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 4100 Architectural Wood Casework PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Cabinet hardware. Section 06 4100 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops. C. Division 22 Plumbing D. Division 23 Mechanical E. Division 26 Electrical 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 1037 - 99 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood -Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. C. AWUAWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. D. HPVA HP -1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2009 (ANSI/HPVA HP -1). E. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. B. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule # 1168 (http://www.aqmd.gov/rules/reg/regl l_tofc.html) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. Shop Drawings shall have WI, Certified Compliance Label affixed to first page of drawing set. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. Provide MSDS Sheets for all composite wood and agrifiber products, adhesives, and sealants used. D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, locksets, and plastic laminates, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework &30/2013 Page 1 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 4100 I. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. B. Perform work in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. The millwork supplier shall issue a W.I. Certificate Compliance Certificate indicating the grade of millwork products to be furnished for this job and certifying that they will fully meet all the requirements of the grade specified. Each unit of casework shall bear the W.I. Certificate Compliance label. Each plastic laminate countertop shall bear the W.I. Certified Compliance label. Upon the completion of the installation, a W.I. Certified Compliance shall be issued for the installation. The type of construction used must meet the seismic force requirements of Title 24. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. B. Delivery shall only be made when the area of operation is enclosed, all wet work is dry, all overhead work is complete, and the area broom clean. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. B. The HVAC system shall be on and functioning, and the architectural millwork shall be acclimated to these conditions for 72 hours prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Hardwood Faced Plywood: HPVA HP -1; graded in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork, core of lumber; exterior glue ; thickness 3/4'; 1. Exposed Open Shelving 2. Semi Exposed Shelving B. Particleboard shall not be used C. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in WI Manual of Millwork; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant formaldehyde free adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. 1. Medex, as manufactured by Sierra Pine or approved equal 2. Located at all casework construction, except as identified above. 2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.fomiica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, lnc�Nevamar: www.nevainar.com. 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 4. Or approved equal, prior to bidding B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for all exposed applications as scheduled. C. Melamine finish at all semi -exposed cabinet shelving, divisions and faces. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework &30i2013 Page 2 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 4100 D. Interior faces of cabinet doors to be faced with the same material as exposed surfaces. 2.04 COUNTERTOPS A. Quartz Surface Countertops: Square edge 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by Wl to suit application. B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness. C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome -plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome -plated finish in exposed locations. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. F. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side -mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards and coordinated self rests, satin finish, for nominal 9/16 inch spacing adjustments. 1. Standards, SP -1820, manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal. 2. Supports; SP -15, manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 6 inch centers. 1. Product: H -42-C-15 manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish. 1. Pin tumbler cylinder cam lock, National Lock 8102 Series or approved equal. 2. Keying as selected. All locks shall be installed in a hole shaped the same shape as the cylinder of the lock to eliminate rotation. Round lock cylinders installed in round holes will not be allowed. D. Catches: Magnetic. 1. Product: M00099 manufactured by Sugatsune 2. Product: 323A92 manufactured by Ives 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. E. Drawer Slides: 1. Static Load Capacity: 100 lb, medium duty. 2. Mounting: Side mounted. 3. Stops: Integral type. 4. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. 5. Products: a. Accuride International, Inc; Product 7434: www.accuride.com. b. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Product 8409: www.knapeandvogt.com. c. Grant; Product 5632. d. Hettich: e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. F. Hinges: Overlay type, BHMA No. 156.9, Grade 1, with 26D dull chrome finish. 1. Products: a. Rockford Process Control; Product Series 370 or 450. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework a30i2013 Page 3 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 b. Or approved equal, c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. G. Countertop Support Brackets: 1. Product: BTK -480 manufactured by Sugatsune or approved equal a. Color: Black b. Capacity: 181 lbs H. Silencers: Clear vinyl silencers to be installed at each cabinet door 2.07 FABRICATION A. Cabinets shall be fabricated to Woodwork Institute standards Grade: Premium Section 06 4100 B. Exceptions to WI standards 1. Wall Hung Cabinets : Depth 14 inches 2. Storage, Janitor, Closet and Utility Room Cabinets shall be of the same construction as typical cabinets. 3. Shelves shall be designed as per schools and libraries, for a 501b per square foot live load as per table 15-1. 4. Exterior Edges: Include doors, drawer fronts, and front edge of vertical end panels and leg panels. Exterior edges are to be edged with heavy-duty 3mm PVC edgebanding, color to match door or drawer front. 5. Locate grommets as directed by Owner. Assume one per workstation C. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. 2.08 SHOP FINISHING A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 CASEWORK INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework &30/2013 Page 4 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 06 4100 G. Secure upper cabinets, counter bases, full height cabinets, and counter partitions to floor and wall using appropriate angles and anchorages to obtain seismic restraint per Title 24 Section 2336 3.03 COUNTERTOP INSTALLATION A. Countertops shall be installed in as long of lengths possible. Unless impractical, no joints shall be closer than 12" to any sink or above unsupported knee spaces. Joints in plastic laminate countertops shall be factory prepared for joining using concealed clamping devices, located within 6" of front, at back edges and at intervals not exceeding 12". Joints shall be sealed and glued with polyseamseal caulking compound with clamping devices tightened to exert a constant, heavy clamping pressure and to provide flush hairline joints. B. Countertops shall be adequately screwed to the cabinets or other supports at a minimum of 36" o.c. at front and at rear. Top mounted splashes shall be attached to countertops with polyseamseal caulking compound and #10 x 1-3/4 sheet metal screws at 12" o.c. minimum. C. Cut-outs in countertops for sinks and appliances shall be provided with radiused inside corners to resist cracking. Cutouts shall be sealed against moisture penetration with "Thompson's Water Seater" or equal. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.05 CLEANING A. Defective work shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Owner or his representative upon completion of installation. B. Shop finished surfaces shall be cleaned, touched -up as required and damaged or umepairable areas shall be refinished or replaced as directed. C. Clean cabinetry free of debris. Installer shall be responsible for the immediate removal of all trash, crating, etc., associated with the cabinet installation. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Finishes to be selected by architect from full line of colors and patterns. (Colors and Patterns are based on Formica Brand as a standard of quality unless otherwise noted.) End of Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework &30i2013 Page 5 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework &30/2013 Page 6 of 5 Section 06 4100 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 82 00 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass fiber reinforced, resin fabrications. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 06 82 00 A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products. C. Samples: Submit two 2, _6_x_6_ inch in size, illustrating color, texture, and finish. D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for stain removal, surface and gloss restoration . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in architectural glass fiber and resin components with 5 years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect components from damage by retaining shipping protection in place until installation. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install site fabricated components when site conditions may be detrimental to successful installation. B. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions favorable to proper curing of resin during and after installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications: 1. Crane Composities; Product Glasbord: www.cranecomposties.com. 2. Marlite; Product Standard FRP: www.marlite.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fabric Reinforcement: Glass fiber woven fabric oz/sq yd B. Resin: Polyester type, fire resistant, high workability characteristics, integral coloring additives. 2.03 FINISH A. Exposed to view Surface Texture: Pebbled Embossed. 06 82 00 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic &30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 06 82 00 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fabrications in accordance with design drawings and fabricator's instructions. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum offset from true alignment: 1/8 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean components of foreign material without damaging finished surface. B. Hand rub smooth surfaces with polishing cream. C. Clean fabrications in accordance with fabricator's instructions. End of Section 06 82 00 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic &30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous dampproofing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 071113 A. ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2011. B. ASTM D43/D43M - Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2000 (Reapproved 2012)el. C. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing; 2003 (Reapproved 2008). D. ASTM D450 - Standard Specification for Coal -Tar Pitch Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2007. E. ASTM D1187/1)1187M - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal; 1997 (Reapproved 2011). F. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing; 1995 (Reapproved 2007). G. ASTM D2822/D2822M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Containing; 2005 (Reapproved 2011)el. H. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)eL I. ASTM D5643/D5643M - Standard Specification for Coal Tar Roof Cement, Asbestos Free; 2006 (Reapproved 2012)e I. J. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application until dampproofing has cured. 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing &30i2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Karnak Corporation: www.kamakcorp.com. 2. Mar -Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DAMPPROOFING PRODUCTS Section 071113 A. Bituminous Dampproofing: Cold -applied water-based emulsion; asphalt with mineral colloid or chemical emulsifying agent; with or without fiber reinforcement; asbestos -free; suitable for application on vertical and horizontal surfaces. 1. Composition - Vertical Application: ASTM D 1227 Type III or ASTM D 1187 Type I. 2. Composition - Horizontal and Low -Slope Application: ASTM D1227 Type II or III. 3. VOC Content: Not more than permitted by local, State, and federal regulations. 4. Applied Thickness: 1/16 inch, minimum, wet film. 5. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Sealmastic Emulsion Type I (spray -grade): www.wrmeadows.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Primers, Mastics, and Related Materials: Type as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. 2.03 HOT ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Bitumen: ASTM D449, Type I, asphalt. B. Primer: ASTM 1341, compatible with substrate. C. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D4586, Type I. 2.04 COAL TAR MATERIALS A. Bitumen: ASTM D450, Type B, coal tar pitch. B. Primer: ASTM D43, coal tar type. C. Sealing Mastic: ASTM D5643, coal tar roof cement. 2.05 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate. B. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D2822, Type I. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of dampproofing system. C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 071113 B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply bitumen with mop. D. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. End of Section 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproo6ng &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 071113 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 12 00 Built -Up Bituminous Waterproofing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hot applied asphaltic waterproofing. B. Cold applied asphaltic waterproofing. C. Hot applied coal tar waterproofing. D. Cant strips. E. Drainage panels. F. Protective cover. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Protection board. Section 0712 00 B. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drain and plumbing vent flashing flanges. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2011. B. ASTM D43/D43M - Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2000 (Reapproved 2012)el. C. ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing; 2003 (Reapproved 2008). D. ASTM D450 - Standard Specification for Coal -Tar Pitch Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2007. E. ASTM D3747 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Adhesive for Adhering Roof Insulation; 1979 (Reapproved 2007). F. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e 1. G. ASTM D5643/D5643M - Standard Specification for Coal Tar Roof Cement, Asbestos Free; 2006 (Reapproved 2012)el. H. NRCA ML 104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, mastics, and characteristics of reinforcement fabric. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 07 12 00 - Built -Up Bituminous Waterproofing &30i2013 Page I of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 0712 00 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA M1_104. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application until membrane has cured. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Contractor shall correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to City. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of waterproofing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. 1. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or concrete shrinkage is not considered a structural failure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HOT ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Asphalt: ASTM D449, Type I. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate. C. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D4586, Type I. 2.02 COAL TAR MATERIALS A. Coal Tar: ASTM D450, Type II. B. Coal Tar Primer: ASTM D43. C. Coat Tar Sealing Mastic: ASTM D5643, coal tar roof cement. 2.03 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Asphalt Emulsion: Conforming to ASTM D3747. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate surfaces are durable and free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. B. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Apply moppings of bitumen and embed reinforcement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply hot bitumen at a temperature limited by equiviscous temperature (EVT) plus or minus 25 degrees F; do not exceed finish blowing temperature for four hours. 07 12 00 - Built -Up Bituminous Waterproofing &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Section 0712 00 A. Independent agency inspection services will be provided under provisions of Section 0140 00. B. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood testing. C. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks. D. If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair any damage to building caused by leaking. E. When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. B. Protect membrane and board from damage. End of Section 07 12 00 - Built -Up Bituminous Waterproofing &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 12 00 - Built -Up Bituminous Waterproofing &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 0712 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 13 00 Sheet Waterproofing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Drainage panels and Protection boards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation used for protective cover. Section 0713 00 B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet, coping, and counterflashing. C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for -joints in substrates. D. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drain and plumbing vent flashing flanges. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension; 2006a. B. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved 2010). C. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2012). D. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact; 2007. E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. F. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with three years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS A. www.wrmeadows.com.; Product Mel-Rol.www.wrmeadows.com. 2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Parapet Walls, Windows, Doors and Skylight Conditions 1. Membrane: Mel Rol 2. Accessories: a. Mel -Prime water based primer b. Sealtight pointing mastic c. Sealtight detail strip d. Additional sealnats as required by the manufacturer. Section 0713 00 B. Masonry Planter Walls 1. Membrane: Mel Rol 2. Accessories: a. Mel -Prime water based primer b. Sealtight pointing mastic c. Sealtight detail strip. d. Sealtight termination bar e. Mel -Drain drainage system f. Protection course g. Additional sealms and accessories as required by the manufacturer for a complete and watertight installation. C. Membrane: Mel Rol.- Polymeric membrane over cross laminated polyethylene carrier film. Adhesive bonded. 1. Thickness: a. Carrier Film: 4mils b. Polymeric Membrane: 56 mils 2. Tensile Strength: a. Carrier Film: 5,900 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. b. Polymeric membrane: 590 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 3. Ultimate Elongation: Polymeric membrane 455% percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 4. Peel Adhesion - Wet and Dry - 71b./in. 5. Lap Adhesion - Dry - 51b./in. 6. Water Absorbtion:.1%, 72 hrs. maz. per ASTM D 1970 7. Puncture Resistance: 67 lb. per ASTM E154 2.03 ATTACHMENT MATERIALS 2.04 ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing &30/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.02 PREPARATION Section 0713 00 A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Rollout membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Self -Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer. Rollout on substrate with a mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints are static or dynamic. F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate indirection of drainage. Seal joints and seams. G. Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal watertight to membrane. H. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install counterflashing over all exposed edges. 3.04 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL and PROTECTION BOARD A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and out boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. B. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. C. Adhere protection board to substrate with compatible adhesive. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood testing. B. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks. C. I£ leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building. D. When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. End of Section 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing &30i2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 0713 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 15 13 Lead Waterproofing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 071513 A. Lead flashings sealing penetrations and perimeters of lead sheet waterproofing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. B. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products; 2003 (Reapproved 2009). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and catalog data demonstrating compliance with referenced standards; include installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Employ only qualified journeymen lead burners to join sheets of lead. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle, store, and protect lead sheet from deformation, construction traffic, and damage. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERLALS A. Lead Sheet: Sheet lead complying with ASTM B749. 1. Weight/Thickness: 3/32 inch thick. 2. Furnish in 8 x 25 foot rolls, unless otherwise required or approved. B. Solder: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sn50, Sn40A, or Sn40B. C. Temporary Protection Board: At least one 1/2 inch thick layer of suitable particle board or plywood. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive waterproofing. 1. Verify that surfaces are smooth and even, free of projections, protrusions, or other irregularities. 2. Verify that angles and edges over which lead sheet will be turned are chamfered or eased. 3. Do not begin waterproofing operations until surrounding or abutting construction and penetrations through waterproofing are completed and approved. B. Notify the Architect in writing of any defective conditions encountered. C. Correct defective conditions before beginning waterproofing work. Starting of work constitutes acceptance of such conditions. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Layout lead sheet to minimize joints. 07 15 13 - Lead Waterproofing 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 071513 B. Lap joints between adjoining sheets 1-1/2 inches. C. Use only tools, forms, tongs, and other proper lead working tools (wooden mallets, dressers, etc.) that will bend and work lead to easy curves and prevent scoring or damaging the material. D. Allow room for expansion between rigid members. 3.04 JOINTING - SOLDERING A. Clean sections of lead sheet that are to become a part of the joint using shave hook, lead scraper, or wire brush, including the underside of the overlapping sheet and the area of the bottom sheet directly under the lap and at least 1/4 inch beyond the edge of the lap. B. After solder -tacking sheets together at suitable intervals, feed solder to joints using a clean, well tinned soldering iron at the proper temperature. Fully solder the joint surfaces including the underside of the overlapping sheet and the area of the bottom sheet directly under the lap. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect material and work in place from damage. Repair any damage that may occur. B. Provide temporary water cut-offs to prevent penetration of water underneath the membrane when work is interrupted, at end of day, or during inclement weather. Remove and discard temporary cut-offs before proceeding. C. Temporary Protection: Do not permit construction traffic directly on top of lead sheet. Install suitable protection board as installation proceeds to guard against occasional, essential light traffic and against excessive temperature changes until permanent covering has been installed. End of Section 07 15 13 - Lead Waterproofing a30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 16 13 Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 071613 A. Waterproofing for light traffic surfaces. I. Horizontal and sloped surfaces of balcony decks, pool decks, utility room floors, pedestrian walkways, and sidewalks. B. Waterproofing under cementitious mortar applications. I. On concrete slab before tile mortar bed is placed, in locations indicated on drawings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete to be waterproofed. B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealing of moving joints in waterproofed surfaces. C. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Mortar setting bed to be installed over waterproofing. D. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Sleeves and seals for piping that penetrates below -grade walls and foundations. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 109/C 109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or (50 -mm) Cube Specimens); 201 lb. B. ASTM C666/C666M - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing; 2003 (Reapproved 2008). C. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers --Tension; 2006a. D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Details of joints and intersections. C. Certification: Provide manufacturer's certification that waterproofing to be provided is suitable for the purpose specified and the locations where it is intended to be installed and that the requirements of the contract documents do not preclude satisfactory installation and performance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 07 16 13 - Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing &30/2013 Page I of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Section 071613 A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original packaging, marked with manufacturer's product identification. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Keep stored products dry; store under cover and elevated above grade. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.08 WARRANTY PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Polymer -Modified Cement Waterproofing: 1. Aquafin, Inc : www.aquafin.net. 2. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 3. The Euclid Chemical Company: www.cuelidchemical.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Polymer -Modified Cement Waterproofing for Under Cementitious Mortar: Manufactured slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer admixtures, and water; no solvents; for application directly to cementitious substrate, with re -coat time of less than 24 hours. 1. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as dampproofing. 2. Provide finished product capable of bridging cracks up to 1 mm in width without failure. 3. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of 3 perm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 4. Freeze -Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM C666 for 300 cycles. 5. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M. 6. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for the specific application but not less than 1/16 inch. B. Polymer -Modified Cement Waterproofing for Traffic Surfaces: Manufactured slurry coating of Portland or hydraulic cement, aggregates, polymer admixtures, and water; no solvents; for application directly to cementitious substrate. 1. Explicitly recommended by manufacturer as waterproofing, not simply as dampproofing. 2. Explicitly approved by manufacturer for light pedestrian traffic. 3. Requiring green concrete cure time of not more than 28 days. 4. Elongation at Failure: 20 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 5. Water Vapor Transmission: MINIMUM permeance of finished coating of 1 perm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 6. Freeze -Thaw Durability: No change when tested in accordance with ASTM C666 for 300 cycles. 07 16 13 - Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing 8130/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 071613 7. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi, minimum, at 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M. 8. Finished Coating Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for the specific application but not less than 1/16 inch. C. Crack Repair Material, Joint Tape, and Reinforcing: Type and application as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. D. Water: Clean, clear, non -alkaline potable water, free of salts and other harmful elements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces where waterproofing is to be applied for conditions detrimental to satisfactory performance. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove defective concrete and rebuild to original profiles. B. Plug active leaks according to waterproofing manufacturer's instructions. C. Patch holes and non-moving cracks and joints. D. Clean and prepare surfaces thoroughly prior to installation; schedule cleaning and preparation so that residue will not fall on newly coated, uncured surfaces. E. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Use sandblasting, water blasting, or acid etching as recommended. F. Application of waterproofing constitutes acceptance of substrates. G. Protect other work from fallout, overspray, and spatter from waterproofing application; provide temporary enclosures and covers as necessary to do so. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Perform installation only during ambient and substrate conditions recommended by manufacturer; provide temporary enclosures and/or temporary heating as necessary to do so. C. Fill voids and holes prior to application of first coat. D. Apply the number of coats and at the rates recommended by manufacturer for the specific application but not less than specified minimum thickness; apply at least two coats unless one coat is specifically indicated. E. Extend waterproofing to all surfaces in areas indicated to form continuous waterproofed surfaces. F. Cure waterproofing by recommended methods for recommended period prior to making waterproofed area available for use or occupancy; protect from too rapid drying, severe weather exposure, and water accumulation. I. Hot, Dry Weather: Use wet -cure methods regardless of manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not use covers that could stain waterproofing surfaces. 07 16 13 - Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing 8130/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 071613 3. Do not use chemical curing agents unless explicitly approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 4. Do not expose waterproofing to sunlight for minimum of 72 hours after placement. G. Do not backfill, fill water or liquid holding structures, or apply finish coatings until time period recommended by manufacturer has passed. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - WATER HOLDING STRUCTURES A. Flood test waterproofing application by filling to capacity and allowing to stand for not less than 24 hours. B. If any leaks appear, notify Architect and drain. 1. Repair leaks at no additional cost to City. 2. Repeat flood test until all leakage is eliminated. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. End of Section 07 16 13 - Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing &3012013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 2100 Board and Batt Insulation PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermal batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction - R19. Section 072100 B. Thermal batt insulation at sloped roof areas - R30 C. Rigid foam board insulation at low slope (Flat) roof areas - R30 D. Rigid foam board insulation - tapered for roof drainage. E. Thermal batt insulation at low slope (Flat) roof areas - R30 (In addition to Rigid foam board insulation.for a total of R-60) F. Sound insulation at all interior demising walls not otherwise thermally insulated - size to fill void 3 5/8" min. G. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. H. Thermal batt insulation at low slope roof area (In addition to rigid insulation) 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation. B. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials. C. Section 08 62 00 -Tubular Skylights D. Section 09 25 00 - Gypsum Drywall 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer - Work to be performed only by workers thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the techniques of insulation, and who are completely familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being used. Installer to take care that facing material of batt insulation is not torn or punctured. B. Materials of this section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2012. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. C. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. 07 21 00 - Board and Batt Insulation &30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 072100 C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection 1. Insulating materials to be stored at the job site in a safe, dry place with all labels intact and legible at time of installation. 2. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. Use all means to protect insulating materials before, during, and after installation. Do not allow products to become wet, damp, or punctured. B. Replacements - In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation: 1. JohnsManville 2. Owens Corning Fiberglass 3. Certainteed 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. B. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. C. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. 2.03 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non -reinforced foam core. I. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Roof Insulation to conform to HH -1-1972 4. Compressive Strength: 16 psi 5. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 6. Board Thickness: As required to achieve R value specified. 7. Board Edges: Square. 8. Product: Thermax by Dow Chemical Company as a standard of quality. 9. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. b. GAF: www.gaf.com. 07 21 00 - Board and Batt Insulation &30i2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 072100 10. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 FIBER BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS 2.05 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: I. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 3. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 4. Thermal Resistance: (Unless otherwise noted on plans with an increase value) a. At Pitched Roof Area (including: mansard roofing areas) : R-30 FKS faced baits (with vapor not exceeding 1 perm- installed on the warm side of the attic insulation) b. At Flat (Low Slope) Roof Areae: R-30 FKS faced baits (with vapor not exceeding 1 perm- installed on the warm side of the attic insulation) c. At Exterior Walls: R-19 Kraft Face Batts. d. Interior Wall Sound Insulation: fiberglass sound control batts 3-5/8" thick 5. Manufacturer shall certify that a minimum of 25% of content of insulation is of recycled materials. 6. Facing: Asphalt treated Kraft paper, one side. 7. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscoming.com. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all other materials and products necessary for the proper completion of the work. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. C. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. D. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where installation can properly begin. C. Verify that specified products may be installed in accordance with the original design and the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. 07 21 00 - Board and Batt Insulation &30i2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 072100 C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.03 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. F. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center. G. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. H. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. I. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. J. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. End of Section 07 21 00 - Board and Batt Insulation &30/2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 0725 00 A. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water -resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders. B. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm. C. Water -Resistive Barrier: Water -shedding barrier made of material that is moisture -resistant, to the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Install air barrier, vapor retarder, and water -resistive barrier materials in mock-up specified in Section 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES 2.02 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BARRIER NOR VAPOR RETARDER) 2.03 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER -RESISTIVE) 2.04 SEALANTS 2.05 ADHESIVES 2.06 ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Section 0725 00 B. Water -Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to shed water but with seams not sealed. C. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. D. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior: 1. Install sheets shingle -fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. Install water -resistive barrier over jamb flashings. 5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 6. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing. E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: I. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non -flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. End of Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers &30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 07 3113 A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection. C. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings. C. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D225 -Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2007. B. ASTM D226 -Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. C. ASTM D1970/D1970M -Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for lee Dam Protection; 2011. D. ASTM D3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind -Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan -Induced Method); 2012. E. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2010a. F. ASTM D3909/D3909M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 1997b (Reapproved 2012)el. G. ASTM D6380 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt); 2003 (Reapproved 2009). H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. I. ICC -ES AC 188 - Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2012. J. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. K. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern; for color selection. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2. Extra Shingles: 10% of total new roof area sq ft of each type and color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 07 3113 A. Products Required to Comply with Fire Resistance Criteria: UL listed and labeled. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of 16 sq ft, including underlayment. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHINGLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Pinnacle: www.atlasroofmg.com. 2. GAF; Timberline Cool Series: www.gaf.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp; Product : www.owenscoming.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt -coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D3462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Style: Square. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: Asphalt -coated organic felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D6380, Class M, Type B, with 2 inch wide selvage; black color. B. Eave Protection Membrane: Self -adhering polymer -modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. C. Underlayment: Synthetic non -asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanically fastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams. 1. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970. 2. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970. 3. Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer and building code qualification report or approval, if any. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot -dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. 2.04 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, ridge, ridge vents, open valley flashing, chimney flashing, dormer flashing, and other flashing indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles &30i2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 C. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. 3.02 PREPARATION Section 07 3113 A. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler. B. Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT A. At Roof Slopes Up to 4:12 : Install two layers of underlayment over area not protected by eave protection, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. B. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement. 3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION A. Install flexible flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches. C. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. D. At Exposed Valleys: Install one layer of sheet metal flashing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over open valley and crimped to guide water. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inch wide band of lap cement along each edge of first, press roll roofing into cement, and nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges. 3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. B. Secure in place with nails at inches on center. Conceal fastenings. C. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. 3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is greater. 2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater. B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves. C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. E. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles &30/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. End of Section 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles &30/2013 Page 4 of 4 Section 07 3113 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 46 33 Section 07 46 33 Plastic Siding PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl siding and trim. B. Vinyl soffit and trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Water -resistive barrier under siding. C. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers. Weather barrier under siding. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4477 - Standard Specification for Rigid (Unplasticized) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Soffit; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. installer Qualifications: Not less than three years of experience with products specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Soffit: Comply with ASTM D4477. B. Vinyl Soffit: 1. Thickness: 0.038 inch, minimum. 2. Length: 12 feet, minimum; where available, provide up to 12 foot by 12 foot panels. 3. Nailing Hem: Single layer, with 1-1/8 inch long nail holes at maximum 18 inches on center. 4. Finish: Smooth. 5. Color: Match siding. C. Accessories: Provide coordinating accessories made of same material as required for complete and proper installation whether or not specifically shown on the drawings. 1. Color: Match adjacent siding or soffit panels. 2. Length: a. Corner Posts: 10 feet, minimum. b. Other Trim: 12.5 feet, minimum. 3. Profiles: Provide types as indicated on the drawings. D. Fasteners: Aluminum nails, alloy 5056 or 6110, with minimum tensile strength of 63,000 pounds per square inch; length as required to penetrate framing at least 3/4 inch. 07 46 33 - Plastic Siding &30/2013 Page 1 oft Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Section 07 46 33 A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation; verify dimensions and acceptability of substrate. B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. C. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install siding, soffit, and trim in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions . B. Attach securely to framing, not sheathing, with horizontal components true to level and vertical components true to plumb, providing a weather resistant installation. C. Clean dirt from surface of installed products, using mild soap and water. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. End of Section 07 46 33 - Plastic Siding &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane. B. Flashings. C. Roofing stack boots and walkway pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs. Section 07 54 00 B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings, reglets, and D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof -mounted units; prefabricated curbs. E. Section 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights: Skylight frame, integral curb, and counterflashing. F. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drains. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM CI177/CI177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008. B. ASTM D4434/D4434M - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing; 2012. C. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. D. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low -Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011. E. NRCA ML 104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. F. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. G. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. C. Specimen Warranty: For approval. D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 6x6 inches in size illustrating insulation and colored coating. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section: I. With minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Approved by membrane manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or above degrees F. C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material that shows manufacturing defects within 5 years after installation. C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. Warranty Term: 20 years. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty. 3. Exceptions NOT Permitted: a. Damage due to roof traffic. b. Damage due to wind of speed greater than 56 mph but less than 90 mph. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Materials: 1. Flex Membrane International Corporation; Flex TPO Plus: www.flexroofingsystems.com. 2. GAF; EverGuard TPO: www.gafcom. 3. GenFlex Roofing Systems, LLC; : www.genflex.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Membrane Materials: 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 2 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 I. Flex Membrane International Corporation; Flex FB PVC: www.flexroofingsystems.com. 2. GAF; EverGuard PVC: www.gaf.com. 3. Johns Manville Corporation; : www.jm.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. Insulation: 1. GAF; EnergyGuard PolyIso Insulation: www.gaf.com_ 2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscoming.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONS A. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over insulation. B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980. a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI. 2. Roof Covering External Fire -Resistance Classification: UL Class A. 2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Samafil G410 polyester reinforced membrane with a lacquer coating. B. Location: All low slope roofs C. Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434-96 (or latest revisions), "Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing," Classification: Type III. 1. Sarnafil G410, 60 mil (1.5 mm), thermoplastic membrane with polyester reinforcement. D. Color Membrane: EnergySmart (TAN), initial reflectivity of 0.83, initial emissivity 0.92, solar reflective index (SRI) of>104. E. Typical Physical Properties:PropertiesASTM Test 1. Reinforcing Material: Polyester - 2. Overall Thickness, min., inches (mm): 60 mi1.D751 3. Breaking Strength, min., lbf/in. (KN/m):230 (40.0)D751 4. Elongation at Break, min.20%D751 5. Seam strength*, min. (% of breaking strength): 85D751 6. Retention of Properties After Heat Aging: -D3045 a. Breaking Strength, min., (% of original):95D751 b. Elongation, min., (% of original): 90D751 7. Tearing Strength, min., lbf (N):50 (220)D 1004 S. Low Temperature Bend, -40°F (-40°C):PassD2136 9. Accelerated Weathering Test (UV exposure): 10,000 HoursG154 a. Cracking (7x magnification):None- b. Discoloration (by observation):Negligible- c. Crazing (7 x magnification):None- 10. Linear Dimensional Change: 0. 1 %D 1204 11. Weight Change After Immersion in Water:2.5%D570 12. Static Puncture Resistance, 33 lbf (15 kg):PassD5602 13. Dynamic Puncture Resistance, 14.7 ft-lbf (20 J):PassD5635 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 3 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.04 FLASHING MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES Section 07 54 00 A. Flashing Material - Note: All Flashing touching thermoplastic roof system is to be provided as part of this specification by the roofing contractor. 1. Wall/Curb Flashing a. Samafil G410 Membrane 1) A fiberglass reinforced membrane adhered to approved substrate using Sarnacol adhesive. Consult manufacturer for adhesive options and additional information. b. Samaclad 1) A PVC -coated, heat -weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Samaclad is a 25 -gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side. The dimensions of Samaclad are 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 in x 2.4 m) or 4 ft x 10 ft (1.2 in x 3.0m). Consult manufacturer for additional information. 2. Perimeter Edge Flashing a. Samaclad 1) A PVC -coated, heat -weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Samaclad is a 25 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil (1 mm) unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side. The dimensions of Samaclad are 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 in x 2.4 m) or 4 ft x 10 ft (1.2 in x 3.0m). Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 3. Miscellaneous Flashing a. Samaflash 1) A prefabricated expansion joint cover made from Sarnafil membrane. Sarnaflash is designed for securement to vertical or horizontal surfaces to span and accommodate the movement of new and existing expansion gaps from 1 inch to 41/2 inches (25 nun to 114 mm) across. Available in 40 foot (12 m) rolls. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. b. Samareglet 1) A heavy-duty, extruded aluminum flashing termination reglet used at walls and large curbs. Sarnareglet is produced from 6063-T5, 0.10 inch - 0.12 -inch (2.5 nun - 3.0 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Samareglet has a 2/4 -inch (57 nun) deep profile, and is provided in 10 -foot (3 m) lengths. Use prefabricated Samareglet mitered inside and outside corners where walls intersect. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. c. Samastack 1) A prefabricated vent pipe flashing made from 0.048 -inch (48 mil/1.2 mm) thick Sarnafil G410 membrane. Available in five (4) different sizes. Consult Product Data Sheet for sizes and additional information. d. Samacomer 1) Prefabricated outside and inside flashing corners made of 0.060 -inch (60 mil/1.5 mm) thick membrane that is heat -welded to membrane or Samaclad base flashings. Samacomer is available in 2 outside sizes (5 -inch and 8'/�-inch diameter/127 mm and 215 mm) and 1 inside size. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. e. Multi -Purpose Sealant 1) A proprietary sealant used at flashing terminations. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30/2013 Page 4 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1. Insulation a. Refer to Specification Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation 2. Dens -Deck(& Section 07 54 00 a. A siliconized gypsum, fire -tested hardboard with glass -mat facers. %4 Dens -Deck is provided in a 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) board size. C. MEMBRANE ADHESIVE Water-based 2121 Adhesive: A water-based adhesive used to attach the membrane to the horizontal or near -horizontal substrate. a. Appliecation Rate for Dens -Deck Prime are as follows: 1) Substrate Rate - gallons/100 ft : 1.50 2) Membrane Rate - gallons/100ft: 0 3) Total Rate - gallons/100ft: 1.50 b. There is a significant increase in drying time due to an increase in humidity and/or a decrease in temperature. Do not install when outdoor or substrate temperatures during drying period are expected to fall below 40°F. c. Do not allow 2121 adhesive to skin -over or surface -dry prior to installation of membrane. d. Use a water -filled, foam -covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly press the membrane into the adhesive layer. D. INSULATION BOARD ADHESIVE Samacol 2163 Adhesive: a. A low odor, VOC compliant, one step, low-rise urethane foam used to attach insulation to approved compatible substrates. Adhesive is applied with a gravity fed applicator or by hand with a dual component caulk gun. Additional adhesive may be required for rougher surfaces. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information. Application rate is as follows: b. Coverage -Approximately 600 sq. ft. (55.7 sq. m) per case. Rates are based on an application pattern of 4 ribbons, 1/4-1/2 in. (6-13 mm) beads, 12 in. (30 cm) o.c. per 4 x 4 ft. (121.9 x 121.9 cm) insulation board. Coverage rates may vary over irregular surfaces. c. Notes: 1) Not recommended for use with insulation boards larger than 4x4 ft. (1.2x1.2 m). 2) Place insulation board into the adhesive shortly after it has reached its maximum rise [typically within 30-45 seconds at 60-80°F (16°C -27°C)] and walk into place. 3) Minimum product temperature before entering the dispenser should be 70°F (21 °C). 4) Store between 60°F (16°C) and 80°F (27C). 5) Adhesive shall not be used during inclement weather. 6) Adhesive shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. 7) A min. of 1 Sarnabar placed 4 ft. (1.2 m) from the roof edge and fastened 12 in. (305 mm) o.c. to the structural deck with acceptable fasteners is required after installation of the Samafil roof membrane. The Sarnabar is to have a cover strip hot air welded over it. d. Sta-Bond 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30/2013 Page 5 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 I A solvent -based reactivating -type adhesive used to attach membrane to flashing substrate. E. WALKWAY PROTECTION L Crossgrip Walkway a. Rolled -out walkway protection mat used to protect Sarnafil roofing membrane from mechanical abuse. Crossgrip Walkway is 9/16 inch (14 mm) thick flexible PVC with a heavily textured surface. Crossgrip Walkway is loose laid on top of completed Sarnafil roof assemblies. Where design wind speeds exceed 94 mph (150 km/h) the walkway must be secured with loops of Sarnafil membrane welded to the field sheet. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. F. MISCELLANEOUS RELATED MATERIALS 1. Aluminum Tape a. A 2 -inch (50 mm) wide pressure -sensitive aluminum tape used as a separation layer between small areas of asphalt contamination and the membrane and as a bond -breaker under the coverstrip at Sarnacladjoints. 2. Sealing Tape Strip a. Compressible foam with pressure -sensitive adhesive on one side. Used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. 3. Multi -Purpose Tape a. A high performance sealant tape with used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. 4. Samasolv a. A high quality solvent cleaner used for the general cleaning of residual asphalt, scuff marks, etc., from the membrane surface. Samasolv is also used daily to clean seam areas prior to hot-air welding in tear off or dirty conditions or if the membrane is not welded the same day it is unrolled. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. G. SEALANTS AND PITCH POCKET FILLERS Sarnafil Multi -Purpose Sealant (for termination details). H. MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND ANCHORS All fasteners, anchors, nails, straps, bars, etc. shall be post -galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel. Mixing metal types and methods of contact shall be assembled in such a manner as to avoid galvanic corrosion. Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonry shall be expansion type fasteners with stainless steel pins. All concrete fasteners and anchors shall have a minimum embedment of PA inch (32 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. All miscellaneous wood fasteners and anchors used for flashings shall have a minimum embedment of 1 inch (25 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. 2.05 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: 1. Material: Polyvinyl chloride sheet roofing complying with ASTM D4434/D4434M. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric. 3. Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible. 5. Solar Reflectance:. 83, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 6 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 6. Thermal Emissivity:.92, minimum, initial, and 0.79, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council. 7. Color: White. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane. 2.06 DECK SHEATHING A. Deck Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, fire resistant type, 1/4 inch thick. 1. Products: a. Georgia-Pacific DensDeck, DensDeck Prime, or DensDeck DuraGuard: www.densdeck.com. b. Temple-Inland, Inc.; GreenGlass Roof Board or GreenGlass Primed Roof Board: www.templeintand.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.07 INSULATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect the roof areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Inspect roof drain and outlets to insure proper elevation to permit free flow of water into such drain and prevent water dams at rim. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. The Roofing Subcontractor shall comply with all reasonably applicable requirements of the Owner's safety and security requirements and with all applicable Federal, State, Local and City regulations, laws, and ordinances. B. The Roofing Subcontractor shall provide coverings to protect building and ground surfaces in all areas in which work is being performed and the surfaces to be protected in that location. Protection requirements shall include those surfaces over or past which materials, including pumped adhesives, are being transported. C. The surface of the deck must be broom clean, dry, properly secured and free of defects. D. Other Conditions: Contractor shall verify that the concrete roof substrata are smooth, dry, clean and free from sharp projections, properly graded to roof outlets and that all metal fittings are in place prior to start of installation of insulation and roofing. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Application of roofing materials shall not be performed when weather conditions interfere with good application practices. Materials shall not be stored or applied on damp surfaces or in the presence of rain or snow. B. Installed materials shall be protected from repetitive traffic with plywood or other rigid materials. Unfinished perimeters of the roof system shall be sealed with temporary water cutoffs. Materials used in constructing temporary cutoffs shall be removed before the application of finished assemblies. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30/2013 Page 7 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 C. Roofing may be installed under certain adverse weather conditions such as extremes of high and low temperatures or high humidity conditions, but only after consulting the Manufacturer since special precautions may have to be applied. D. Only as much new roofing as can be made watertight each day shall be installed each day. This includes all flashing work. E. Precautions shall be taken to prevent wind blow -off or wind damage during the course of the roofing application. This may necessitate additional attachment of temporary construction. F. Temporary water stops shall be installed at the end of each workday. These temporary water stops shall be removed at the start of the next workday and disposed of properly. G. Do not install the roofing membrane in direct contact with any products containing asphalt, coal tar pitch, creosote, or other harmful materials. H. All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing interior building areas to the effects of inclement weather. The building and its contents shall be protected against all reasonable risks. Arrange work sequences to avoid use of newly roofing for storage, walking surfaces and equipment movement. Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and barriers to segregate the work areas and prevent damage to adjacent areas. If excessive foot traffic over newly installed membrane is necessary, contractor shall provide plywood or felt protection to prevent damage. 3.04 INSULATION AND DENSDECK INSTALLATION A. Install the insulation, tapered insulation and protection board according to manufacturer's instructions. Stagger all joints 12 inches minimum in each direction. Adhere the new insulation and protection board over the existing deck. B. Neatly cut the insulation and protection board to fit around penetrations and projections. C. Do not install more insulation and protection board than can be covered with single -ply membrane by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. D. The insulation shall be installed by a trained lightweight fill Applicator in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's requirements and industry practice. The surface shall be free from dust and loose fragments, be smooth, level, and free from moisture. Sharp ridges or other projections above the surface shall be removed before roofing. An insulation recover board shall be required as a substrate to adhere to. Fastening for recover board shall be into structural deck below insulation. 3.05 INSTALLATION MEMBRANE A. Inspect the surface of the protection board prior to installation of the new roof membrane. The substrate shall be clean, dry, free from debris and smooth with no surface roughness or contamination. Broken, delaminated, wet or damaged boards shall be removed and replaced. B. Water-based 2121 Adhesive: Pour over the properly installed and prepared absorbent substrate, 2121 adhesive out of the pail and spread using notched squeegees. Apply the adhesive at a rate according to Manufacturer's requirements (no adhesive is placed on back of the membrane). Do not allow the formation of a film on the surface of the adhesive. Carefully unrolled into the wet adhesive while the edges are overlapped by 3 inches. Press the membrane firmly into the adhesive layer with a water -filled, foam -covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. 2. Do not use 2121 adhesive if temperatures below 40° F are expected during application or subsequent drying time. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 8 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 3. No adhesive in seam areas. Apply to all of the membrane in the same manner. 3.06 HOT-AIR WELDING OF SEAM OVERLAPS A. General 1. All seams shall be hot air welded. Seam overlaps should be 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) wide for Samadisc and Sarnadisc-XPN, and 7 inches (177.8 nun) wide for Samadisc-MAXLoad when automatic machine -welding and 4 inches (100 mm) wide when hand -welding, except for certain details. 2. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by Sarnafil. All mechanics intending to use the equipment shall have successfully completed a training course provided by a Sarnafil Technical Representative prior to welding. 3. All membrane to be welded shall be clean and dry. B. Hand -Welding 1. Hand -welded seams shall be completed in two stages. Hot-air welding equipment shall be allowed to warm up for at least one minute prior to welding. 2. The back edge of the seam shall be welded with a narrow but continuous weld to prevent loss of hot air during the final welding. 3. The nozzle shall be inserted into the seam at a 45 -degree angle to the edge of the membrane. Once the proper welding temperature has been reached and the membrane begins to "flow," the hand roller is positioned perpendicular to the nozzle and pressed lightly. For straight seams, the 1'/� inch (40 mm) wide nozzle is recommended for use. For corners and compound connections, the % inch (20 mm) wide nozzle shall be used. C. Machine Welding 1. Machine welded seams are achieved by the use of Samafil's automatic welding equipment. When using this equipment, Samafil's instructions shall be followed and local codes for electric supply, grounding and over current protection observed. Dedicated circuit house power or a dedicated portable generator is recommended. No other equipment shall be operated off the generator. 2. Metal tracks may be used over the deck membrane and under the machine welder to minimize or eliminate wrinkles. D. Quality Control of Welded Seams 1. The Applicator shall check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver. Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted flow of dark gray material from the underside of the top membrane. On-site evaluation of welded seams shall be made daily by the Applicator to locations as directed by the Owner's Representative or Samafil's representative. One -inch (25 mm) wide cross-section samples of welded seams shall be taken at least three times a day. Correct welds display failure from shearing of the membrane prior to separation of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.07 MEMBRANE FLASHINGS A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and Sarnafil. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 9 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 dry, smooth, and solvent -resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn into the building. B. Sarnacol Adhesive for Membrane Flashings 1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate, Sarnacol adhesive shall be applied according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The Sarnacol adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Only an area, which can be completely covered in the same day's operations, shall be flashed. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller. 2. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels of membrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels as required by welding techniques. C. Install Sarnabar/Sarnacord according to the Detail Drawings with approved fasteners into the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. Sarnabars may be required by Sarnafil at the base of all tapered edge strips and at transitions, peaks, and valleys according to Sarnafil's details. Samafil's requirements and recommendations and the specifications shall be followed. All material submittals shall have been accepted by Samafil prior to installation. D. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches (0.2 m) above roofing level unless otherwise accepted in writing by the Owner's Representative and Sarnafil Technical Department. E. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior corners and miters shall be cut and hot air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in contact with the Sarnafil membrane. F. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter -flashed top edge with Samastop at 6-8 inches (0.15-0.20 m) on center. G. Sarnafil flashings shall be terminated according to Sarnafil recommended details. H. All adhered flashings that exceed 30 inches (0.75 m) in height or that of the perimeter Sarnabar spacings shall receive additional securement. Consult Sarnafil Technical Department for securement methods. L All mechanically attached flashings that exceed 18 inches (0.46 m) in height shall receive additional securement. Consult Sarnafil Technical Department for securement methods. 3.08 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal details, fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following: 1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 (latest issue). 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - latest issue. B. Metal, other than that provided by Sarnafil, is not covered under the Sarnafil warranty. C. Complete all metal work in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight condition exists daily. D. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending to allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. E. Metal joints shall be watertight. F. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid wood blocking. Fasteners shall penetrate the wood nailer a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm). 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing a30i2013 Page 10 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 54 00 6. Airtight and continuous metal hook strips are required behind metal fascias. Hook strips are to be fastened 12 inches (0.3 m) on center into the wood nailer or masonry wall. H. Counter flashings shall overlap base flashings at least 4 inches (100 mm). I. Hook strips shall extend past wood nailers over wall surfaces by Ph -inch (38 mm) minimum and shall be securely sealed from air entry. 3.09 SARNACLAD METAL BASE FLASHINGS/EDGE METAL A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and Sarnafil. Acceptance shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing due to incomplete flashings, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. B. Sarnaclad metal flashings shall be formed and installed per the Detail Drawings. 1. All metal flashings shall be fastened into solid wood nailers with two rows of post galvanized flat head annular ring nails, 4 inches (100 mm) on center staggered. Fasteners shall penetrate the nailer a minimum of 1 inch (25 rnm). 2. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. C. Adjacent sheets of Sarnaclad shall be spaced 1/4 inch (6 mm) apart. The joint shall be covered with 2 -inch (50 mm) wide aluminum tape. A 4 -inch minimum (100 mm) wide strip of Sarnafil flashing membrane shall be hot air welded over the joint. 3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. A. Crossgrip: 1. Install Crossgrip Walkway loose laid on completed Sarnafil roof assembly. Where design wind speeds exceed 94 mph secure the walkway with loops of Sarnafil membrane welded to the field sheet. Unroll and position Crossgrip Walkway within specified areas and cut to desired length. Do not install Crossgrip Walkway directly over bars. Connecting clips are available for butting two ends together. Important: Check all existing deck membrane seams that are to be covered and re -weld any inconsistencies before installation. 3.11 TEMPORARY CUT-OFF A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a watertight condition as the work progresses. All temporary waterstops shall be constructed to provide a 100% watertight seal. The stagger of the insulation joints shall be made even by installing partial panels of insulation. The new membrane shall be carried into the waterstop. The waterstop shall be sealed to the deck and/or substrate so that water will not be allowed to travel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane shall be sealed in a continuous heavy application of sealant as described in Section 2.10. When work resumes, the contaminated membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated membrane, insulation fillers, etc. shall be removed from the work area and properly disposed of off site. None of these materials shall be used in the new work. B. if inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Applicator shall provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition. C. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30/2013 Page 11 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART 3 EXECUTION 4.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL Section 07 54 00 A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 4.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and reglets are in place. 4.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate of gal/square. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips. F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. 4.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 4.05 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 12 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 4.06 PROTECTION Section 07 54 00 A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. End of Section 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 13 of 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing &30i2013 Page 14 of 13 Section 07 54 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 62 00 Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings. B. Reglets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for batten seams. C. Section 07 32 13 - Clay Roof Tiles: Flashings associated with clay roofing tiles. D. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. E. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. F. Section 08 1100 (08110) - Steel Doors and Frames G. Section 08 4313 (08410) - Metal Framed Storefronts H. Section 08 63 00 - Metal -Framed Skylights: Metal curbs. I. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. J. Division 15 - Mechanical : Roof curbs for mechanical equipment. K. Division 16 - Electrical : Flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through roofing membrane. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. B. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. C. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e 1. D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of documented experience. 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 62 00 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. B. Note: Flashing directly contacting the thermoplasitc roof membrane is to be flashed with clad metal by the roofing manufacture. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. D. Sealant: Type 1 specified in Section 07 90 05. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type 1. F. Reglets: Surface mounted type, galvanized steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape . G. Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing . Return and brake edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. C. In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.03 INSTALLATION Section 07 62 00 A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. End of Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 07 62 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 7100 Roof Specialties PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured roof specialties, including conductor heads and downspouts. B. Roof membrane vents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories B. Section 07 6200 (07620) - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 07 7100 A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2010. B. NRCA ML 104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations. C. Samples: Submit two appropriately sized samples of expansion joint cover and roof vent. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Louvered Vents: L CopperCraft: www.coppercraft.com. 2. Vulcan Supply Corp: www.vulcansupply.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Pipe and Penetration Flashings: 1. Portals Plus by Commercial Products Group of Hart and Cooley, Inc.: www.portalsplus.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Roofing Vents: Formed aluminum inch thick, of watertight construction to permit construction below roof membrane to breathe; with attachment flanges inch wide. Provide manufactured by 07 7100 - Roof Specialties 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Finish: Mill finish. 2.03 ACCESSORIES 2.04 FINISHES Section 07 7100 A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual drawing details as noted: C. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and base flashings. D. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water tightness. End of Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties &30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 7123 Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel gutters and downspouts. B. Precast concrete splash pads. C. Sheet metal splash pans. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07-3213: Sloped roofing system. B. Section 07 3216 (07320) - Concrete Roof Tiles C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Section 07 7123 D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting of metal surfaces. E. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods, locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components. D. Samples: Submit 6 samples, 12 inch long, illustrating component design, finish, color, and configuration. 1. Samples are to be used by painting contractor to provide samples of special finishing copper paint. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet. 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 8/30/2013 Page I of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Section 07 7123 A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: Profile as indicated. 1. To match existing B. Downspouts: Profile as indicated and to match existing. C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. To match existing 2. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 3. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 4. Downspout Supports: Brackets. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Splash Pans: Same metal type as downspouts, formed to 18x30 inches size; rolled sides 1 inch high for inverted pan placement. B. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. C. Strainer Guard: Install "beehive" -type strainer -guard at downspouts, removable for cleaning. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight. 2.05 SPECIAL FINISHING A. Gutters and Downspouts and all attachment accessories are to be finished with special copper paint prior to installation. Gutter and downspout manufacturer are required to coordinate with painting contractor to provide an acceptable final finish. Refer to specification section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 7123 B. Sheet Metal: Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Slope gutters 1/16 inch per foot, _ percent minimum. D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. End of Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 8/30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 8/30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 07 7123 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 72 00 Roof Accessories PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals. B. Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 07 72 00 A. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. B. ASTM A153/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS A. Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies: Factory -assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded comers, integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water. 1. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not on insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck. 2. Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings. 2.02 ROOF HATCHES, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION A. Roof Hatches: Factory -assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. B. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick. 2. Finish: Factory prime paint. 3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb. C. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. 1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load. 2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 3. Hold open arm with vinyl -coated handle for manual release. 4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. 5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior. 6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior. 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 72 00 2.03 NON -PENETRATING ROOFTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Non -Penetrating Rooftop Assemblies: Manufacturer -engineered and factory -fabricated, with pedestal bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly. 1. Design Loadings and Configurations: As required by applicable codes. 2. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported items to top of roofing. 3. Support Spacing and Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 4. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 5. Hardware, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. B. Non -Penetrating Pedestals: Steel pedestals with square, round, or rectangular bases. 1. Bases: High density polypropylene. 2. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 3. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. I£ substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like -new condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. End of Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 84 00 Section 07 84 00 Firestopping PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS 2.03 FIRESTOPPING FOR FLOOR -TO -FLOOR, WALL -TO -FLOOR, AND WALL-TO-WALL JOINTS 2.04 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 2.05 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYPSUM BOARD WALLS 2.06 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. End of Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping &30/2013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 84 00 - Firestopping &30/2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 07 84 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 90 05 Joint Sealers PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 07 90 05 A. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders: B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. D. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a. D. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed -Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011). E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gunnable and Pourable Sealants: 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers &30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 07 90 05 I. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 2. Dow Coming Corporation: www.dowcoming.com. 3. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. B. Type - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. 3. Polyurethane Products: a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I -XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant: www.pecora.com. b. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Polysulfide Products: a. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; www.chemrex.com. C. Type - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. 2. Products: a. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; www.buildingsystems.basf.com. b. Tremco Global Sealants; : www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; manufactured by D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION Section 07 90 05 A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1 193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. End of Section 07 90 05 - Joint Scalers &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 07 90 05 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Thermally insulated steel doors. C. Sound -rated steel doors and frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed liter. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 081113 A. ANSI/ICC Al 17.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory -Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007 (R2011). C. ANSI A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. D. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2011). E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. F. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. G. ASTM E413 -Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. H. BHMA A156.115 -Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. I. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. J. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1992. K. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2006. L. NAAMM HMMA 862 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2003. M. NAAMM HMMA 863 - Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2004. N. NAAMM HMMA 865 - Guide Specifications for Sound Control Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2003. O. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 081113 B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2 x 2 inches in size showing factory finishes, colors, and surface texture. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors; Product : www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft, an Ingersoll Rand brand; Product : www.steetcraft.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSUICC Al 17.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non -removable stops on non -secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors Type 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames &30/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 11 13 2. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. B. Interior Doors, Non -Fire -Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Interior Doors, Sound -Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with ASTM E90. 3. Core: Polyurethane. 4. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame. D. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Interior Door Frames, Non -Fire -Rated: Knock -down type. D. Sound -Rated Door Frames: Knock -down type. E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components; factory -installed. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed. C. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. D. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 7100. 1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 08 11 13 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames &30i2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 08 11 13 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames &30i2013 Page 4 of 4 B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Coordinate installation of hardware. D. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straightedge, corner to comer. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to this section. End of Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames &30i2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 11 16 Aluminum Doors and Frames PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush aluminum doors with aluminum faces. B. Glazed interior aluminum doors. C. Aluminum door frames for doors specified in this section. D. Glazing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware for aluminum doors. Section 081116 B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing materials for aluminum doors and frames. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 609 - Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Anodized Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. B. AAMA 611 -Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. C. AAMA 701/702 - Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2011. D. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2002. E. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2010 F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. G. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. H. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. I. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. J. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. K. ASTM C365/C365M - Standard Test Method for Flatwise Compressive Properties of Sandwich Cores; 2011a. L. ASTM C1363 -Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011. M. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 081116 N. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of door; include information on fabrication methods. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations of each opening type. 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings. C. Selection Samples: Complete set of color and finish options, using actual materials, for Architect's selection. D. Verification Samples: Actual pieces of products in each finish specified, not less than 6 inches square or 6 inches long for linear components. For finishes subject to color variation, include not less than two samples illustrating extreme range to be anticipated. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing components of the types specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with documented experience in installing components of the types specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum components in manufacturer's standard protective packaging, palleted, crated, or banded together. B. Inspect delivered components for damage and replace. Repaired components will not be accepted. C. Store components under cover in manufacturer's packaging until installation. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not begin installation of interior aluminum components until space has been enclosed and ambient thermal conditions are being maintained at levels consistent with final project requirements. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for defects in workmanship and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flush Aluminum Doors with Aluminum Faces and Related Frames and Accessories: 1. Cline Aluminum Doors, Inc; Series 10013E: www.clinedoors.com. 2. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc; U.S. Aluminum; Series 1000 Flush Panel Doors: www.crl-arch.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames &30/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Glazed Interior Aluminum Doors: 1. Wilson Partitions: www.wilsonpart.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES Section 081116 A. Flush Doors with Aluminum Faces: Aluminum internal framing and faces; no steel components. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal. 2. Finish: Natural anodized. 3. Weatherstripping: Replaceable pile type; at jambs and head of exterior doors. B. Glazed Aluminum Doors: Extruded aluminum tube frame, full glazed, with middle rail; factory glazed. I. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal. 2. Finish: Natural anodized. C. Door, Sidelight, and Transom Frames: Extruded aluminum hollow or C-shaped sections; no steel components. 1. Finish: Same as doors. 2. Weatherstripping: Replaceable pile type; at jambs and head. D. Dimensions and Shapes: As indicated on drawings; dimensions shown are nominal. 1. Provide clearances as follows: a. Hinge and Lock Stiles: 0.125 inch. b. Between Meeting Stiles: 0.25 inch. c. At Top Rail and Bottom Rail: 0.125 inch. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Flush Door Panels: Without visible seams on face. 1. Framing and Hardware Backup: Extruded aluminum tubing, 0.125 inch minimum thickness. 2. Top, Side, and Bottom Edges: Extruded aluminum cap. 3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard low-VOC materials. B. Tubular Doors: Extruded aluminum tubing, 0.125 inch minimum thickness, with heavy-duty plated steel through bolts in rails, glazing stops, and glazing gaskets. C. Frames: Extruded aluminum shapes, not less than 0.062 inch thick, reinforced at hinge and strike locations. 1. Corner Brackets: Extruded aluminum, fastened with stainless steel screws. 2. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, removable snap -in type without exposed fasteners. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), alloy 5005-H14, stretcher leveled. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), alloy 6063-T5 or alloy 6463-T5. C. Natural Anodized Finish: Clear anodic coating; AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A31 Class II, minimum thickness 0.4 mil. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Replaceable Weatherstripping: AAMA 701/702 wool pile. 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames &30i2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 081116 B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other material warranted by manufacturer as non -corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units where feasible, otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or steel hot -dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A123/A123M. D. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphaltic mastic, compounded for 30 -mil thickness per coat. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. B. Verify that frames installed by other trades for installation of doors of this section are in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames as required for project conditions. B. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes. C. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. B. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and within specified tolerances. C. Where aluminum surfaces contact metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact by painting dissimilar metal with heavy coating of bituminous paint. D. Hang doors and adjust hardware to achieve specified clearances and proper door operation. E. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. F. Install glazing; set glazing stops and glazing gaskets flush with face of door or frame. 3.04 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609. B. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial completion. B. Replace damaged or defective components that cannot be repaired to a condition indistinguishable from undamaged components. End of Section 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames &30/2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 3100 Access Doors and Panels PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall access door and frame units. B. Ceiling access door and frame units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 08 3100 A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Samples: Submit two access units, _6_x_6_ inch in size illustrating frame configuration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS A. Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Standard duty, hinged door. 3. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. 4. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. B. Walls in Wet Areas: 1. Material: Steel, hot -dipped zinc or zinc -aluminum -alloy coated. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 4. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. 5. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. C. Fire Rated Walls: See drawings for wall fire ratings. I. Material: Steel. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Uninsulated, single thickness door panel. D. Ceilings, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Same type as for walls. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size in Other Ceilings: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. E. Fire Rated Ceilings: See drawings for ceiling fire ratings. 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 I. Material: Steel. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Manufacturers 1. Acudor Products Inc; Product : www.acudor.com. 2. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com. 3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc; Product www.n ilcorinc.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Section 08 3100 B. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with comer joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. 1. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 2. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum. 3. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. a. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 4. Steel Finish: Primed. 5. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color. 6. Hardware: a. Hardware for Fire Rated Units: As required for listing. b. Hinges for Non -Fire -Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. End of Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels &3012013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 32 00 Sliding Glass Doors PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated sliding glazed doors with frames and operating hardware. B. Insect screens. Section 08 32 00 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough opening framing. B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Fibrous stuffing insulation at door frame perimeter. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder locks. D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Product and execution requirements for glass type and installation. E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Product requirements for glass units. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/LS.2/A440 -North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component dimensions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, and framed opening tolerances. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical sliding door panel corner construction, accessories, and finishes. D. Submit two samples of door hardware. E. Certificates: Certify that sliding glass doors meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of residential sliding doors with not fewer than three years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site and store in manufacturer's protective cartons until openings are ready for door installation. B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors &30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 32 00 C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum Sliding Doors: 1. Arcadia Architectural Products, Inc; Product : www.arcadiaproducts.com. 2. Peerless Products, Inc; Product : www.peerlessproducts.com. 3. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Product : www.wausauwindow.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SLIDING GLASS DOORS A. Sliding Glass Doors: Extruded aluminum unit frame and operable panel frame, factory fabricated, factory glazed; complete with integral sloped sill/threshold, flashings, and anchorage devices. 1. Configuration: One fixed panel and one horizontal sliding panel. 2. Finish: Powder coat paint finish. 3. Color: White. 4. Frame Depth: 6 inches, minimum. 5. Aluminum Members: Factory finished; screw lock corner construction; thermally broken. 6. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces and for condensation occurring within frame construction. 7. Glass Stops: Same material and color as frame, sloped for wash. 8. Operable Panels: Stainless steel bottom rollers; adjustable. B. Construction: Factory assemble door frame as one unit, including head jambs, and sill; factory assembly operating and fixed panels. 1. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around perimeter of assemblies. 2. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof; accurately and rigidly joined comers. 3. Sills: One piece, sloped to drain, with integral roller track. C. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 Class R Performance Grade 15. 2. Grade Substantiation: Either AAMA Certification Label or independent test report itemizing compliance will constitute acceptable evidence of compliance. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, low -E coated, argon filled, fully tempered, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions. 2.04 SLIDING GLASS DOORS A. Sliding Doors: Extruded aluminum framed, factory fabricated; vision glass, threshold, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 HC40. 2. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around perimeter of assemblies. 3. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof. Accurately and rigidly join corners. Match and align cladding joints for continuity of line and design. 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors &30i2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 32 00 4. Sills and Stools: One piece; slope sills for wash. 5. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces and for condensation occurring within frame construction. 2.05 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Pull Handles: Manufacturer's standard type. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. B. Sliding Panel Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable from interior. C. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber. D. Anchors: Hot -dipped galvanized or stainless steel. E. Bituminous Paint: Fibered asphaltic type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit in conjunction with air and vapor seal. B. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without distortion or imposed stresses. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straightedge. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors &30/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.07 PROTECTION Section 08 32 00 A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction activities. End of Section 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors &30/2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 08 33 23 A. Overhead coiling doors and shutters, operating hardware, fire -rated, non -fire -rated, and exterior, manual and electric operation. B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2005). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical equipment, C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Samples: Submit two slats, 6_x_6_ inch in size illustrating shape, color and finish texture. E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency, periodic adjustments required, and 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc; Product www.alpinedoors.com. 2. The Cookson Company; Product : www.cooksondoor.com. 3. Wayne -Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COILING DOORS A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain. 1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf, without undue deflection or damage to components. 2. Single thickness slats. 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches wide x required length. 4. Finish: Galvanized. 5. Finish: Factory painted, Per Architect color. 6. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel. 7. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 8. Electric operation. 9. Mounting: Within framed opening. 10. Exterior lock and latch handle. 2.03 MATERIALS Section 08 33 23 A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors. B. Steel Slats: Minimum 22 gage ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet. 1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating. C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap -on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. D. Steel Guides: Formed from galvanized steel sheet, 18 gage; 3 inch wide; complying with ASTM A653/A653M. I. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating. E. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Prime paint. F. Hardware: 1. Lock Cylinders: Specified in Section 08 7100. 2. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to keep in locked or retracted position. 3. Latch Handle: Interior and exterior handle. G. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid -travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 Ib nominal force to operate. 2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Electric Operators: 1. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp; continuous duty. 2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 3. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1. 4. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second. 5. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 6. Manual override in case of power failure. B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN -STOP -CLOSE) momentary control for each operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors &30/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 33 23 C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro -mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered. 1. Products: a. Miller Edge, Inc; www.MillerEdge.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0l 60 00 -product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 27 17. F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straightedge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. End of Section 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors &30i2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 08 33 23 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 43 13 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 08 43 13 A. Aluminum -framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Weatherstripping. D. Door hardware. E. Perimeter sealant. F. All required attachments, trim, and accessories to provide a complete installation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry B. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows: Operable sash within glazing system. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 -Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 611 -Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. D. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2010. E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2011. F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. G. ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). J. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). K. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Section 08 4313 A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of California Building code. a. 70 mph wind speed, exposure C 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 6.00 lbFsq ft. E. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. F. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details . C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 inches long illustrating finished aluminum surface . E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum 5 years of documented experience. B. Installer - The storefront installer shall be currently approved by the manufacturer, and have experience of at least five (5) years installing the selected system. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts &30i2013 Page 2 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 43 13 C. Replacements - In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the University. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. All storefront and entrances system components shall be the product of a single manufacturer and represent an integrated system. B. The aluminum storefront system was designed based on the product of Kawneer as a standard of quality. C. Aluminum -Framed Storefront and Doors: 1. EFCO Corporation; Product : www.efcocorp.com. 2. Kawneer North America; Product Trifab Series 451T: www.kawneer.com. 3. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC; CG450: www.trulite.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Glazing: Refer to Section 08 80 00 Glazing. B. Aluminum -Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back). 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. 3. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 6.00 lbf/sq ft. 4. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf. 5. Condensation Resistance Factor: 40 minimum 6. Finish: Class I color anodized. 7. Finish Color: As selected from manufacturer's standards. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of California Building code. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts &30/2013 Page 3 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 4313 2. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283. 4. Condensation Resistance Factor: Measure in accordance with AAMA 1503 with 1 inch insulating glass installed. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Fabrication Method — Shearblock or equal. Use of exposed fasteners and stacking system with receptor sill not acceptable. 3. Glazing stops: Flush. B. Doors: Glazed aluminum. Series 500 wide Stile 1. Thickness: 13/4 inches. 2. Top Rail: 6 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 6 inches wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Finish: Same as storefront. 7. Pull Handles: See Section 08 7100 8. Hinges: Kawneer 4 1/2 x4 ball bearing butt hinge with non -removable pin or equal electrified hinge where required. 9. Exit Device: See Section 08 7100 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM 13221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Perimeter Sealant: Type specified in Section 07 90 05. D. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00. E. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.05 FINISHES A. Comply with AA DAF -45 for aluminum finishes required. B. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA -M 12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating or AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts &30i2013 Page 4 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.06 HARDWARE Section 08 43 13 A. General: Refer to Section 08710 "Door Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. 1. Coordinate with hardware provider regarding electronic access control - provide components required for a complete system. B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 1. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. I. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Tum up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts &30/2013 Page 5 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 43 13 I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Install hardware using templates provided. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using exterior dry glazing method. L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05. M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. B. Opening force for doors not to exceed 5 lbs of force 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. End of Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts &3012013 Page 6 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 5313 Section 08 53 13 Vinyl Windows PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated tubular extruded plastic windows with fixed sash. B. Factory glazed including infill panels. C. Operating hardware. D. Insect screens. E. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/i.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; 2011. B. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. C. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details and C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, installation requirements, and D. Submit two samples of operating hardware. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10m2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 08 53 13 B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or joints. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Vinyl Windows: 1. Pella Corporation; 350 Series: www.pellacommercial.com. 2. Milgard; Product Tuscany Series. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 VINYL WINDOWS A. Vinyl Windows: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded hollow ultra -violet -resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color; with factory -installed glazing, hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings, with single hung, outward projecting awning, and fixed, non-operable sash. 2. Color: White. 3. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly but still providing adequate space for perimeter seals. 4. Operable Units: Double weatherstripped. 5. Framing Members: Fusion welded corners and joints, with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring within system. 7. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of extruded PVC, fitting tightly into frame assembly. 8. Insect Screens: Located on inside of windows. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, low -E coated, argon filled, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions. B. Frames: 2 inch wide x 4 1/2 inch deep profile; flush glass stops of screw fastened type. C. Sills: 2 inch nominal thickness, extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash to 1/2 inch beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening. D. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen mesh taut and secure to frame; secured to window with adjustable hardware allowing screen removal without use of tools. I. Hardware: Spring loaded steel pins; four per screen unit. 2. Screen Mesh: Vinyl -coated fiberglass, window manufacturer's standard mesh. 3. Frame Finish: Baked enamel, color to match window interior color. E. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Resilient PVC; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal. 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10/7/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.04 HARDWARE A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. B. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Section 08 53 13 A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install window units in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Install operating hardware. E. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in accordance with ASTM E 1105 using uniform pressure and same pressure difference as specified for laboratory tests. 1. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense. B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. End of Section 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10/7/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows 10/7/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 08 53 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 62 00 Section 08 62 00 Unit Skylights PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed plastic skylights with integral metal frame. B. Counterflashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing for rough opening. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood support curbs. C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Skylight counterflashing. D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured curbs for installation of unit skylights. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. D. ASTM B22 IM - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012. E. ASTM D4479/D4479M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos -Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)el. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide structural, thermal, and daylighting performance values. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configurations, dimensions, locations, fastening methods, and installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. IKIBf'd/_ wa.1►Y61 A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for including leakage due to defective skylight materials or workmanship. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Unit Skylights: 1. Bristolite Skylights; Product www.bristolite.com. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope; Product : www.oldeastlebe.com/. 3. Wasco Products, Inc; Product : www.wascoproducts.com. 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights &30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 4. PHP Systems/Design; VTECH Glass Curb Mounted Cap (CMC): www.vtechskylights.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 UNIT SKYLIGHTS Section 08 62 00 A. Unit Skylights: Factory -assembled glazing in aluminum frame, free of visual distortion, weathertight. 1. Shape: Square dome. 2. Glazing: Single. 3. Operation: Operable for ventilation. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Double Glazing: Acrylic plastic with aerogel insulation between layers; factory sealed. 1. Outer Glazing: Clear transparent. 2. Inner Glazing: Clear transparent. B. Frames: ASTM B221 (ASTM B22 IM) Extruded aluminum thermally broken, reinforced and welded corner joints, integral curb frame mounting flange and counterflashing to receive roofing flashing system, with integral condensation collection gutter, glazing retainer; clear anodized finish. 1. Ventilation: Provide protected pivot hinge and lifting/latching mechanism that allow skylight units to be opened manually and secured in both open and closed positions from interior. Include removable insect screen. C. Support Curbs: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) Sheet aluminum, sandwich construction; 1 inch thick, 4 inches high; glass fiber insulation; with integral flange for anchorage to roof deck. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, exposed to view. B. Counterflashings: Same metal type and finish as skylight frame. C. Protective Back Coating: Zinc molybdate alkyd. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that openings and substrate conditions are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply protective back coating on aluminum surfaces of skylight units that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install aluminum curb assembly, fastening securely to roof decking. Flash curb assembly into roof system. B. Place skylight units and secure to curb assembly. Install counterflashing as required. C. Apply sealant to achieve watertight assembly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 C. Remove excess sealant. End of Section 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Section 08 62 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 62 00 - Unit Skylights &30i2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 08 62 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 Door Hardware PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel and aluminum doors. B. Hardware for fire -rated doors. C. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. D. Thresholds. E. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 08 7100 A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors: Hardware for same, except cylinders; installation of cylinders. C. Section 08 33 23 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Lockable coiling doors. D. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts: Hardware for doors in storefront, including: I. Integral weatherstripping. 2. Hinges. 3. Narrow stile locks. 4. Exit devices. 5. Closers. 6. Push bars and pull handles. 7. Overhead stops. 8. Thresholds. 9. Installation of lock cylinders provided under this section. E. Section 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ANSUICC At 17.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2). D. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2008 (ANSUBHMA A156.3). E. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSUBHMA A156.4). F. BHMA A156.5 - Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSUBHMA A156.5). G. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSUBHMA A156.6). 08 71 00 - Door Hardware 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 08 7100 H. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSUBHMA A156.8). I. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). J. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13). K. BHMA A156.14 - American National Standard for Sliding & Folding Door Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA Al 56.14). L. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.15). M. BHMA A156.17 - American National Standard for Self Closing Hinges & Pivots; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSI/BHMA A156.17). N. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A] 56.18). O. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems, Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22). P. BHMA At 56.31 - Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.31). Q. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. R. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004. S. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. T. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. B. Convey City's keying requirements to manufacturers. C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly show products to be furnished for this project. B. Hardware Schedule: 1. Organize schedule into "Hardware Sets" with an index of doors and heading, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include manufacturers catalog information for each type of hardware supplied. Catalog information is to be separated into type with identification tabs between each hardware type. IE: "Hinges", "Locks", "Closers" etc. C. Samples: Prior to preparation of hardware schedule: 1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, closer, and illustrating style, color, and finish. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30i2013 Page 2 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 08 7100 D. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated items and include power requirements. E. Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of City. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. G. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. H. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to City by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, exit devices, hinges, and closers) from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. 2. Hardware supplier shall be a direct factory contract supplier who has in his employment a certified hardware consultant (AHC) who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the Work for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. B. Schedule Designations: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of one manufacturer's numeric designation system in schedules does not imply that another manufacturer's products will not be acceptable, unless they are not equal in design, size, weight, finish, function, or other quality of significance. See 1.03 A for substitutions. C. Exit Doors: Operable at all times from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00 - Contract Closeout , for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers. C. Closers: Ten years, except electronic closers, two years. D. Exit Devices: Three years. E. All other Hardware: Two years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN A. Hager Companies products as specified in Section 08 71 10, for hinges, locks, closers, and other items specified: www.hagerco.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30/2013 Page 3 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL Section 08 7100 A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 3. All Hardware on Fire -Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated. 1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D). 2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D). a. Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing chrome or stainless steel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment; provide primary finish on one side of door and secondary finish on other side if necessary. 3. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18. 4. Exceptions: a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearance equivalent according to BHMA A156.18. b. Hinges for Fire -Rated Doors: Steel base metal with painted finish. 2.03 HINGES A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door. 1. Provide five -knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers. 3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated. 4. Provide non -removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges. B. Manufacturers - Hinges: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Bommer Industries, hrc: www.bommer.com. 3. Hager Companies: www.hagereo.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 PUSHIPULLS A. Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6. 1. Provide push and pull on doors not specified to have lockset, latchset, exit device, or auxiliary lock. 2. On solid doors, provide matching push plate and pull plate on opposite faces. B. Manufacturers - Push/Pulls: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30i2013 Page 4 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 2.05 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking. 1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. 4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim. B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, six -pin standard core. 1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required. C. Keying: Grand master keyed. D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch". 2.06 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS A. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.2, and as follows: 1. Passage: No locking, always free entry and exit. 2. Privacy: F76, emergency tool unlocks. 3. Office: F82 Grade 1, key not required to lock, unlocks upon exit. 4. Classroom: F84, key required to lock. B. Manufacturers - Cylindrical Locksets: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagcrco.com. 3. Schlage: www.schlage.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.07 MORTISE LOCKSETS A. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.13, and as follows: 1. Passage: FOL 2. Privacy: F 19, or F02 with retraction of deadbolt by use of inside lever/knob. 3. Office: F04, key not required to lock, remains locked upon exit. 4. Classroom: F05, key required to lock. 5. Entry, Deadbolt: F20, may be locked without key, free egress. 6. Store Door: F 14, deadbolt locked by key from both sides, not an emergency exit (must be unlocked during occupied hours). B. Manufacturers - Mortise Locksets: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagereo.com. 3. Schlage: www.schlage.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.08 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.5, and as follows: 1. Deadbolt, Classroom: E017. 2. Public Entry/Exit ("nightlatch"): E023, D012 3. Deadbolt, Unoccupied: E015 or F17, deadbolt by key outside and turn inside. 4. Deadbolt, Classroom, Unoccupied: E010 or F 18, deadbolt by key outside. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30/2013 Page 5 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Manufacturers - Auxiliary Locks: Same as other locks. 2.09 FLUSHBOLTS Section 08 7100 A. Flushbolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of frame. 1. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply with code. 2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds. B. Manufacturers - Flushbolts: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.10 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.31 and UL listed as a Burglary -Resistant Electric Door Strike; style to suit locks. B. Manufacturers: 1. Assa Abloy Folger Adam EDC, HES, or Securitron: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.11 EXIT DEVICES A. Locking Functions: Functions as defined in BHMA A156.3, and as follows: 1. Entry/Exit, Always -Unlocked: Outside lever unlocked, no outside key access, no latch holdback. 2. Entry/Exit, Free Swing: Key outside retracts latch, latch holdback (dogging) for free swing during occupied hours, not fire -rated; outside trim must be specified as lever or pull. 3. Entry/Exit, Always -Latched: Key outside locks and unlocks lever, no latch holdback (dogging). 4. Entry/Exit, Always -Locked: Key outside retracts latchbolt but does not unlock lever, no latch holdback. 5. Exit Only, Secure: No outside trim, no key entry, no latch holdback, deadlocking latchbolt. B. Manufacturers: 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.12 CLOSERS A. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4. 1. Provide surface -mounted, door -mounted closers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door. 3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke -rated door. Spring hinges are not an acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated. 4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to ensure the leaves close in proper order. B. Manufacturers - Closers: 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30i2013 Page 6 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Norton, Rixson, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. LCN: www,lcnclosers.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.13 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise indicated. I. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide overhead stop. 3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated. B. Floor Stops: C. Magnetic Holder/Releases: Complying with BHMA A156.15; fail safe; doors release to close automatically when electrical current is interrupted; holding force: 25 to 40 pounds -force. D. Manufacturers - Wall and Floor Stops/Holders: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagereo.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Manufacturers - Magnetic Holder/Releases: 1. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.14 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS A. Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22. 1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting stile of pairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke gaskets on each door identified as a "smoke door" and 20 -minute rated fire doors. 2. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top, sides, and meeting stiles of pairs. a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets functioning as both smoke and weather seals. 3. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated. B. Thresholds: 1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated. C. Manufacturers - Gasketing and Thresholds: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.15 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Protection Plates: 1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer, except storefront and all -glass doors. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30/2013 Page 7 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Manufacturers - Protection Plates and Architectural Trim: 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Ives Hardware: professional.iveshardware.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.16 MATERIALS Section 08 7100 A. Locksets: Locksets and latchsets shall be Schlage - No Substitutions. Strikes shall be 16 gage curved lip stainless .steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box. Strike must have lip of sufficient length to clear trim, but of a profile that will prevent clothing or other items from snagging on strike. Locks shall have minimum %-inch throw. 2. Comply with requirements of local security ordinances. 3. Provide approved fusible links at levers for labeled doors. 4. Lock Series and Design: Schlage ND Series - Sparta Levers or Schlage L series - #17 lever. 5. All ND series Locksets shall have a breakaway lever. 6. All ND series locksets used at classroom security locksets to have an engraved inside rose indicating the direction to lock the lock. 7. Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface. Knurled finish shall be applied to door hardware leading to non -accessible rooms or space and shall conform to CBC Section 113313.8.3 and 113313.8.4. B. Hinges: 1. All exterior hinges to be full height full mortise continuous hinge. Hinge to allow the door to open 180 degrees. Fill bottom space between door and frame below hinge to prevent rodent intrusion. 2. Interior doors shall have 3 butts per leaf up to 7 feet 0 inches height. Add one each hinge for each 12 inches in height of fraction thereof. 3. Provide 5" extra heavy weight hinges on doors over 3 feet 0 inches in width. C. Panic Hardware and Exit Devices: 1. Furnish sets at wood doors with sex bolts unless otherwise specified. Lever handle trim shall match locksets. Device push bar must release when 15 lbs. maximum pressure is applied in the direction of travel. Products shall comply with UBC Standard 10-4 and shall be mounted between 30" and 44" above the finished floor. Hardware shall also comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9. D. Surface Door Closers: Full rack and pinion type with removable non-ferrous case. Provide sex bolts and grommets at all wood doors. Place closers inside building, stairs, and rooms. Closers shall be non -sized, non -handed and adjustable. a. Provide drop brackets, shoe supports, and blade stop spacers as required at narrow top rails. b. Exterior doors to have 5 lbs. maximum pressure to open( 3 lbs preferred), interior doors to have 5 lbs. maximum pressure to open( 3 lbs preferred).To insure positive latching of fire labeled doors, doors may have up to 12 lbs. maximum pressure to open if approved by Code Official. c. Closers to be equipped with spring cushion stops and hold open feature typical. E. Kick Plates: 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30i2013 Page 8 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 Provide with four beveled edges, 10" high by width less 2". Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. F. Seals: 1. Seals shall be finished to match other finish hardware. Seals applied to Fire rated openings must be accompanied with a stick on label or stamped U.L. label showing compliance with labeling requirements. G. Screws: Exposed screws shall be Phillips head. H. Silencers: 1. Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire -rated door assemblies. I. Thresholds: Shall comply with CBC 113313.2.4.1 . 1. Thresholds shall be supplied with either flat head sleeve anchors or flathead machine screws with lead anchors. 2. Thresholds to be installed in a bed of aluminum colored 100% silicon caulk. Caulk must seal all edges as well as between threshold and jamb. Threshold must be installed with sufficient caulk as to prevent squeaking of threshold when stepped upon. 3. Maximum rise of threshold not to exceed %'. 4. Contractor to co-ordinate with other trades ( Concrete, Flooring, etc.) to insure that between interior and exterior elevation there is no more than V" rise after threshold is applied. 2.17 Finish A. Generally to be BHA/IA 626 Dull Chromium. 1. Areas using BHMA 626 shall have push, pulls and kick plates of BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted. B. Spray door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire -rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. D. Install hardware on fire -rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. E. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30i2013 Page 9 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7100 B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.06 SCHEDULE -Attached. End of Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware &30i2013 Page 10 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 71 10 Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 08 7110 A. Product requirements for certain door hardware, supplementing specifications in Section 08 71 00. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: General administrative and installation requirements applicable to this Section; descriptions of individual door hardware sets. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGES A. Fire Rated Hinges: UL listed up to and including 90 -minute applications for wood doors and up to 3 -hour applications for metal doors. B. Butt Hinges: Complying with ANSUBHMA A156.1 and A156.7; square corner five -knuckle design; flat button tips and ball bearings. 1. Width of Leaves: 4-1/2 inches high, minimum, and as required to clear surrounding trim. 2. Thickness: a. Doors up to 36 inches wide and up to 1-3/4 inches thick: 0.134 inch inch thick, minimum. b. Doors 37 inches to 48 inches wide and 1-3/4 inches thick: Hinges 0.180 inch thick, minimum. c. Doors greater than 1-3/4 inch thick: Hinge material 0.180 inch thick, minimum. 3. Base Material: a. Exterior Doors: 304 Stainless steel. b. Interior Doors: Steel. c. Fire Rated Doors: Steel. 4. Quantity of Hinges Per Door: a. Doors From 60 inches High up to 90 inches High: Three hinges. b. Doors 90 inches High up to 120 inches High: Four hinges. 5. Shimming: Where required to correct frame or door irregularities, provide metal shims only. 6. Products: a. Standard Weight Hinges: Hager BB 1279/ BB1191. b. Heavy Weight Hinges: Hager BBI 168 / BB1199. C. Continuous Geared Hinges: Complying with ANSUBHMA A156.26. 1. Size and Thickness: a. Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for weight of door and finish hardware applied to door; door location and frequency of usage. b. Size: 1 inch less than door height. 2. Base Material: Aluminum extrusion; ASTM B221, 6063 T6 alloy, clear anodized finish. Coat unexposed working metal surfaces with tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) dry lubricant. 3. Products: Hager. a. Standard Weight Hinges: 780-112 / 780-224. b. Heavy Weight Hinges: 780-112HD / 780-22411). 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager &30/2013 Page 1 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.02 PUSH PLATES AND PULL PLATES Section 08 7110 A. Provide products complying with ANSUBHMA A156.6. B. Push Plates and Pull Plates: 0.050 inch thick, aluminum. 1. Push plates: Square comer and beveled edges with counter sunk screw holes. a. Width and Height: As scheduled. b. Products: 1) Hager Companies: 30S. 2. Pull plates: Square corner and beveled edges. a. Width and Height: As scheduled. b. Pull: 3/4 inch diameter; 2-1/2 inch clearance from face of door. c. Products: 1) Hager Companies: H34. C. Push / Pull Sets: 1 inch diameter, round aluminum bar stock. 1. Clearance: 2-1/2 inches from face of door. 2. Offset: 3 inches; 90 -degree standard. 3. Center to Center: Door width less 1 stile width. 4. Push / Pull Set: a. Hager Companies: 11160D. 5. Round Offset Pull: a. Hager Companies: H12L. 6. Round Pull: a. Hager Companies: H4L 2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Provide cylindrical locksets, Grade 1 wherever locksets are called for, unless otherwise indicated. B. Locksets - General: 1. On fire -rated and smoke -rated doors, provide products complying with: a. UL/cUL Labeled and listed for functions up to 3 hours for "A" label and for single doors up to 48 inches in width and up to 96 inches in height. b. ULIOC/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated. 2. All Doors: Comply with ICC/ANSI Al 17.1. 3. Lock and Latch Chassis: Zinc dichromate. 4. Latch Bolts: Stainless steel; 1/2 inch minimum throw and deadlocking. a. Standard Backset: 2-3/4 inches. b. Faceplate: Adjustable for square door edge or 1/8 inch beveled door edge. 5. Keyed Functions: Freewheeling, vandal -resistant. 6. Handing: Non -handed, field reversible. 7. Mounting: Through -bolted with no exposed screws. C. Trim: 1. Levers: Cast zinc; plated to match finish designation specified in Section 08710. D. Strikes: ANSI Al 15; 1-1/4 inches x 4-7/8 inches; select lip length to protect surrounding trim. 2.04 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS A. Cylindrical Locksets: Grade 1; complying with ANSUBHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Certified to Grade 1; requirements specified above; and as follows: 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager &30i2013 Page 2 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 7110 Single -Swing, Out -Swinging Doors: Provide products tested to ANSI/BHMA A250.13: a. Door Assembly Impact Load: 1150 pounds. b. Door Assembly Design Load: 1) 36 inches wide by 84 inches high: 100 pounds per square foot. 2) 48 inches wide by 84 inches high: 70 psf. B. Products: 1. Hager Companies: 3400 Series. 2.05 MORTISE LOCKSETS A. Mortise Locksets: Provide products complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Certified to Grade 1 - Operational and Security, requirements specified above, and as follows: 1. Lock Case: Fully -wrapped, 12 gage steel. 2. Spindles: Breakaway; prevent unlocking during forced entry or vandalism. 3. Levers: Cast Zinc; plated to match finish indicated in hardware schedule. B. Products: 1. Hager Companies: 3800 Series. 2.06 INTERCONNECTED LOCKSETS A. Interconnected Locksets: Provide products complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.12, Series 5000, Certified to Grade 2, requirements specified above, and as follows: 1. Roses: Stainless steel; 2-1/2 inches minimum diameter. B. Products: 1. Hager Companies: 3700 Series. 2.07 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Deadbolt Locks: Complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.5 Grade 1. 1. Latch Bolt: Brass with concealed hardened steel roller and 1 inch throw. 2. Keyed Functions: Freewheeling, vandal -resistant. 3. Handing: Non -handed, field reversible. B. Products - Grade 1: 1. Hager Companies: 3100 Series. 2.08 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS A. Flush Bolts: 1. Hager Companies: 282D / 283D /291D/292D / 296W / 280X. B. Coordinators: 1. Hager Companies: 297D / 297N / 297M. 2.09 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: Touch -pad type; complying with ANSUBHMA A156.3 Grade 1; UL labeled for fire and panic; finished to match balance of hardware. 1. Width: One-half door width, minimum. 2. Covers and Caps: Stainless steel. 3. Chassis: Aluminum. 4. Keyed Functions: Freewheeling, vandal resistant; lever style and design to match other locksets in project. 5. Fasteners: Wood screws, machine screws and through bolts. 6. Mounting: Flush with door; minimum door stile width: 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager &30/2013 Page 3 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 a. Pair with Surface Vertical Rod Devices: 5 inches. b. Single: 5-3/8 inches. c. Pair with Rim Devices and Removable Mullion: 5 inches. d. Pair with Rim Devices and Fixed Frame Mullion: 5-3/4 inches. 7. Products: a. Hager Companies: 4500 Series. 2.10 CLOSERS Section 08 7110 A. Surface -Mounted, Door -Mounted Closers: Non -handed, complying with ANSUBHMA A156.4 Grade 1, with aluminum body and full plastic covers. 1. Also Complying With: a. ICC/ANSI A117.1 2. Springs: Double heat-treated, tempered steel. 3. Piston: Precision -machined, heat-treated steel. 4. Spindle: Triple heat-treated steel. 5. Operation: Full rack and pinion. 6. Adjustment: Separate, staked, adjustable valve screws for latch speed, sweep speed, and backcheck. 7. Arms and Brackets: a. Arm Type: Manufacturer's standard. b. Mounting Types: Manufacturer's standard "Tri -Pack" of regular arm, top jamb arm and parallel arm. 8. Size: Comply with referenced standard for accessibility, including following maximum opening force requirements. a. Interior hinged openings: 5.0 pounds. b. Exterior hinged openings: 8.5 pounds. 9. Fasteners: Provide self -reaming and self -tapping wood and machine screws and sex nuts and bolts for each closer. B. Products - Aluminum Body: 1. Hager Companies: 5200/5300 Series. 2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall Stops: 1. Hager Companies: 232W/236W. 2.12 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS A. Door Bottom Sweeps: 1. Hager Companies: 759SV. B. Thresholds: Provide products complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.21 for Thresholds. 1. Hager Companies: 413S/520S. 2.13 SLIDING AND BIFOLDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Standards: Provide products complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.14, Sliding and Folding Door Hardware. 2.14 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Comply with ANSUBHMA A156.6. B. Trim: 0.050 inch thick aluminum; beveled four edges and countersunk holes. C. Fasteners: Supply #6 x 5/8 inch oval head screws, unless otherwise noted. 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager &30i2013 Page 4 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 D. Products: 1. Hager Companies: 1945. 2.15 SILENCERS Section 08 7110 A. Silencers: Gray rubber, shaped for specific door type and application. 1. Silencers: Three silencers per single door frame, two per double door frame and four per Dutch door frame where smoke, light, weather or acoustical seals not otherwise required. B. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Hager Companies: 307D/308D. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Hardware Schedule and manufacturer's instructions. B. See Section 08 71 00 for additional requirements. End of Section O8 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager W3012013 Page 5 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 71 10 - Basis of Design Door Hardware - Hager W3012013 Page 6 of 5 Section 08 7110 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 Glazing PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers. B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. Section 08 80 00 C. Section 08 32 00 - Sliding Glass Doors: Glazing furnished by door manufacturer. D. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer. E. Section 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer. F. Section 08 63 00 - Metal -Framed Skylights: Glazing furnished by skylight manufacturer. G. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011). B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1. D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass --Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2012. E. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2011a. F. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2012a. G. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. H. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009. I. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. C. Samples: Submit two samples _6_ x 6 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration and design. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10m2013 Page 1 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Provide mockup of Angled Observation Window including glass and air barrier and vapor retarder seal. B. Locate where directed. C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units. D. Polycarbonate Sheet Glazing: Provide a fifteen (15) year warranty to include coverage for breakage, coating failure, abrasion resistance, including replacement of failed units. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES A. Type IG -1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing. 1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise noted; windows at Dispath area and to be angled away from the building at a degree that matches the existing condition.. 2. Outboard Lite: Anti -reflective glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch. B. Type E-1 -Single Exterior Vision Glazing: 1. Applications: Vinyl Windows. 2. Type: Annealed float glass. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. C. Type S-2 - Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing: 1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: D -H -T-90 or W-90, minimum. 2. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in fire doors. 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/7/2013 Page 2 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 b. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an hourly fire rating. 3. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 4. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating. 2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2010 CBC code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na. 2. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat -Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Anti -Reflective Glass: Float glass pyrolytically-coated both sides to reduce reflection and glare. 1. Manufacturers: a. G1asTroesch Holding AG; LUXAR Anti Reflective Glass: www.mcgrory.com. b. SCHOTT North America Inc; Amiran: www.us.schott.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing: 1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: D -H -T-90 or W-90, minimum. 2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 08 80 00 - Glazing mm2013 Page 3 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 B. Butyl Sealant (Type ): Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non -skinning. C. Silicone Sealant (Type _J: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non -staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color. 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; x inch size; black color. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option 1; color. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal comers by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. 08 80 00 - Glazing IDR/2013 Page 4 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.05 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, inch below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line. F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line. G. Apply cap bead of type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.06 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal. D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.07 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR BUTT GLAZED METHOD (SEALANT ONLY) A. Temporarily brace glass in position for duration of glazing process. Mask edges of glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members. B. Temporarily secure a small diameter non -adhering foamed rod on back side of joint. C. Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; thoroughly fill the joint without displacing the foam rod. Tool the sealant surface smooth to concave profile. D. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod. Apply sealant to opposite side, tool smooth to concave profile. E. Remove masking tape. 3.08 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from comers. 08 80 00 - Glazing IDf7/2013 Page 5 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 80 00 C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.09 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with type sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.10 INSTALLATION -INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND) A. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line. B. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool surface to straight line. 3.11 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.12 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.13 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. End of Section 08 80 00 - Glazing 10/7/2013 Page 6 of 7 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 4.01 This Page Blank End of Section 08 80 00 - Glazing mmzois Page 7 of 7 Section 08 80 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 08 80 00 - Glazing mmzois Page 8 of 7 Section 08 80 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 08 9100 Louvers PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 08 9100 A. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Ductwork attachment to louvers. B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Fire/smoke dampers associated with exterior wall louvers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control Association International, hic.; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of connections. 1. Finish: Include coverage against degradation of exterior finish. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Louvers: 1. Airolite Company, LLC; Product K609HP: www.airolite.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 LOUVERS A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified under AMCA 511. 1. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. 2. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, diagonal design. O8 9100 - Louvers &30/2013 Page 1 oft Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh. 2.04 ACCESSORIES Section 08 9100 A. Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw attached; installed on inside face of louver frame. B. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel. C. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one piece per location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. E. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07 90 05. 3.03 CLEANING A. Strip protective finish coverings. B. Clean surfaces and components. End of Section 08 9100 - Louvers &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 05 61 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 09 05 61 A. This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following types of floor coverings: 1. Resilient tile and sheet. 2. Carpet tile. 3. Thin -set ceramic tile and stone tile. B. Removal of existing floor coverings. C. Preparation of new and existing wood -based floors and subfloors for installation of new floor coverings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Handling of existing floor coverings removed. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or (50 -mm) Cube Specimens); 2012. B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009). C. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; October 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Visual Observation Report: For existing floor coverings to be removed. B. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing: 1. Moisture and pH limits and test methods. 2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. C. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report. D. Copy of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging; include installation instructions. C. Keep materials from freezing. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F. B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent. 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation &30/2013 Page 1 oft Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Section 09 05 61 A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali -resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited. 3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS A. Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings, as applicable to floor covering being removed. B. Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and as specified. 3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film -forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. 3.03 PREPARATION A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound. D. Do not fill expansion j oints, isolation joints, or other moving joints. 3.04 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. End of Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation &30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Cementitious backing board. E. Gypsum wallboard. F. Joint treatment and accessories. G. Textured finish system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. B. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Tile backing board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 09 2116 A. ANSI A 108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. B. ANSI Al 18.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2011. F. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011. G. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. H. ASTM C1325 -Standard Specification for Non -Asbestos Fiber -Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets; 2008b. I. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011. J. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012. K. GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010. L. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies &30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section 09 2116 A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA -216. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: I. Fire Rated Ceilings and Soffits:; I hour rating. 2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum -Based Board: 1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation; Product : www.certainteed.com. 3. USG Corporation; Product : www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire -Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 3. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch. b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch. 4. Paper -Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard. b. American Gypsum; LightRoc Gypsum Wallboard. c. CertainTeed Corporation; PmRoc Brand Gypsum Board. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds, shower ceilings, and wainscoating. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. ANSI Cement -Based Board: Non -gypsum -based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI Al 18.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 2) National Gypsum Company; PennaBase Brand Cement Board. 3) USG Corporation; Durock Brand Cement Board. 4) Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies &30i2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 2116 D. Ceiling Board: Special sag -resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C I 396/C I 396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Products: a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling. c. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag -Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. C. Textured Finish Materials: Latex -based compound; plain. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self -piercing tapping type; cadmium -plated for exterior locations. E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Fire -Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. C. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies &30/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 2116 B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3.06 TEXTURE FINISH A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to match approved sample. B. Texture Required: Level 5 Knock Down Finish. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. End of Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies &30/2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 Tiling PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. D. Stone thresholds. E. Ceramic accessories. F. Ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 09 30 00 A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2012.1. 1. ANSI A108.la -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 2. ANSI A108. lb - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 3. ANSI A108.1c -Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2012.1. 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2012.1. 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2012.1. 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2012.1. 9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2012.1. 10. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. 11. ANSI A 108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior glue plywood) Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 12. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2012.1. 13. ANSI Al 18.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2012.1. 09 30 00 - Tiling 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 14. ANSI Al 18.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. 15. ANSI A 118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2012.1. B. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2012. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. See Section 0140 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent -based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal -Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 09 30 00 - Tiling &30/2013 Page 2 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 I. Size and Shape: 1 inch square. 2. Edges: Square. 3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. C. Glazed Wall Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Size and Shape: 4x8. 2. Surface Finish: High gloss. 3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Pattern: Running Bond Pattern. 5. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base. 2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. C. Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams. 1. Applications: Provide at the following locations: a. At doorways where tile terminates. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type. 1. Use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure. 2. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX D14: www.ardexamericas.com. b. Bostik Inc; Product : www.bostik-us.com. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 15 Premium Mastic: www.latierete.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.04 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospec.com. 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI Al 18.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 09 30 00 - Tiling &30/2013 Page 3 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 30 00 4. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FG -C MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com. b. Bostik Inc; Product : www.bostik-us.com. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PermaColor: www.laticrete.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew resistant type. 1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX Flex Caulk: www.ardexamericas.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Latasil: www.laticrete.com. c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Colored Caulking: www.merkrete.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Grout Sealer: Liquid -applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout. 1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone. 2. Products: a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 THIN -SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin -set tile; complying with ANSI Al 18.10. 1. Type: Fluid -applied. 2. Thickness: 25 mils, minimum, dry film thickness. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX 8+9: www.ardexamericas.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Hydro Ban: www.laticrete.com. c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Hydro Guard 2000: www.merkrete.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin -set tile; complying with ANSI Al 18.10. 1. Type: Fluid -applied. 2. Thickness: 25 mils, minimum, dry film thickness. 3. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Hydro Ban: www.laticrete.com. b. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Hydro Guard 2000: www.merkrete.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cememitious, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. 09 30 00 - Tiling &30/2013 Page 4 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 09 30 00 B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A 108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations. B. Lay rile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt file pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Install thresholds where indicated. H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout the joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION -FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS A. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. B. Over wood substrate with backer board underlayment, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F 144, for cementitious backer boards, with standard grout. 3.05 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS A. Grout with standard grout as specified above. B. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type specified in Section 07 90 05. 09 30 00 - Tiling &30i2013 Page 5 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE Section 09 30 00 A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. 3.09 SCHEDULE THIS PAGE BLANK End of Section End of Section 09 30 00 - Tiling &30/2013 Page 6 of 6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 65 00 Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved 2010)el. B. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008. C. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002. D. FS RR -T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant; Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision E, 1994. E. RFC1(RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; 1998. F. SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, _6 x 6 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Flooring Material: 20 square feet of each type and color. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 65 00 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Pattern: Solid color. 5. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STAIR COVERING A. Stair Treads: Rubber; full width and depth of stair tread in one piece; tapered thickness; nosing not less than 1-5/8 inch deep. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with FS RR -T-650 requirements corresponding to type specified. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.1875 inch. 3. Nosing: Square. 4. Style: Contrasting color abrasive grit strips full width. 5. Color: Solid. 6. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0l 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in one piece, matching treads in material and color: I. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 2. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. Stair Nosings: 1-1/2 inch horizontal return, 1-1/8 inch vertical return, full width of stair tread in one piece: 1. Material: Rubber. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Pattern: Smooth. 4. Color: Solid color. 5. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 5. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring; Product www.burkemercer.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0l 60 00 -product Requirements. 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring &30/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.04 ACCESSORIES Section 09 65 00 A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings. B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. C. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. D. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. E. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3.05 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints rightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring &30/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.06 STAIR COVERINGS A. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. 3.09 SCHEDULE End of Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring &30/2013 Page 4 of 4 Section 09 65 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 09 6813 A. Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Reclamation/Recycling of new carpet tile scrap. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum 5 years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile : Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Product: Vibrant Tile manufactured by Shaw Contract Group. 2. Tile Size: 18 x 18 inch, nominal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting &30i2013 Page 1 oft Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 6813 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. End of Section 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. Section 09 90 00 C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop -primed items. c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, including that which is factory -finished. d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory -finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02765 - Pavement markings. B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop -primed items. C. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4442 -Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood -Base Materials; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10m2013 Page 1 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 I. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. C. Samples: Submit three paper "drop" samples, 8-U2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required. 3. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect. D. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. Work to be performed only by workers thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the techniques of painting, and who are completely familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the paint material being used. C. Single -Source Responsibility - Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. D. Conform to applicable code and regulatory requirements for products and finishes including 1. Specification manual of selected manufacturer 2. Air Pollution Control District regulations and federal lead content laws. 3. California Air Resources Board (GARB) Rules, especially 1113 4. Woodworking Institute (W.I.). 1.06 MOCK-UP A. See Section 0140 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. 1. Mock-up: Before proceeding with paint application, finish one complete surface of each color scheme required, clearly indicating selected colors, finish texture, materials and work quality. If approved, sample area will serve as a minimum standard for work throughout. 2. Locate during on-site construction meeting with Architect present.. 3. If approved, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating mmzois Page 2 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS Section 09 90 00 A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. I. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. B. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: ICI Dulux. 2. Or approved equal C. Stains: 1. Olympic: www.ppg.com 2. Watco: www.rust-olcum.com D. Sealers: 1. Thompson's Water Seal E. Substitutions: See Section 01130 - Substitutions. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field -catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating IDR/2013 Page 3 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D --National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to City. 3. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 4. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under. E. Color Schedules 1. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting after color selection from samples submitted. 2. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work, subject to the following: a. Exterior Work: A maximum of four (4) different colors will be used, with variations for trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work. 3. Interior Work: A maximum of four (4) different pigmented colors will be used, with variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots. 4. Paints at Wet Areas F. In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an approved fungicide to paints. 1. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophenate. 2. Compatability 3. All paint materials and equipment shall be compatible in use: finish coats shall be compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated; all tools and equipment shall be compatible with the coating to be applied. G. Thinners, when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of the material to be thinned. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint EC -OP - All Exterior Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete and concrete masonry. 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer recommended by manufacturer. 3. Primer On Concrete and Concrete Masonry: One heavy coat latex block filler (100 percent acrylic) squeegeed into pores. B. Paint WE -TR -V - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain: 1. One coat sealer. C. Paint WE -TR -S - Wood,Transparent, Sealer, Optional Stain: 1. One coat of stain; 2. One coat of clear sealer: D. Masonry/Concrete/Plaster, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: I. One coat of block filler/primer. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating mm2013 Page 4 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; . E. Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; . Section 09 90 00 F. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust -inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; G. Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: I. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; H. Paint MaE-OP-3A - Aluminum, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat etching primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; I. Paint E-Pav - Pavement Marking Paint: 1. Yellow: One coat, with reflective particles . 2. White: One coat, with reflective particles . 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint I -OP - All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, wood, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations. 3. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen for items subject to frequent touching by occupants, including door frames and railings. 4. Semi -Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all walls and ceilings in wet areas including: restrooms, wet bars and breakrooms. 5. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. B. Paint I -OP -MD -DT - Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including metals: 1. Medium duty applications include doors, door frames, railings, handrails, guardrails, and balustrades 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. C. Paint I -OP -MD -WC - Medium Duty Vertical/Overhead: Including gypsum board. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. D. Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; E. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with latex primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; F. Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 1017/2013 Page 5 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 G. Aluminum, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat etching primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; H. Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex -Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of acrylic primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex -acrylic enamel; PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Section 09 90 00 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Perform ph and moisture content tests on substrates where indicated by manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri -sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. L Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. J. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning). 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/7/2013 Page 6 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 K. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. L. Shop -Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. M. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. N. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Where previous paint coatings have been applied, test for adhesion of the substrate prior to application of new coatings. Remove any substrate that fails to adhere to the coatings below it. Sand surfaces to achieve uniform finish. 3.04 WORK QUALITY A. All materials shall be applied free from runs, sags, wrinkles, streaks, shiners, holidays, and brush marks. B. All materials shall be applied uniformly. If any reduction on the coating's viscosity is necessary, it shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's label directions. C. Carry all finish coats to natural breaks and transitions. D. Allow each coat to dry before re -coating, adjusting manufacturer's MINIMUM time recommendations between coats to job conditions. E. Apply each coat to achieve the specified dry film thickness per coat. Achieving the total system recommended dry mil thickness with application rates in excess of those recommended and fewer coats than specified will not be accepted. F. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker (or lighter depending on the finish color) than the preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating 10/7/2013 Page 7 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 09 90 00 G. Enamels and undercoats are to be sanded smooth prior to topcoating. H. Tops, bottoms, and sides of doors and garage doors are to be finished with the same number of coats as the face. I. Where spray application is used, backrolling should immediately follow. Spraying alone without backrolling is unacceptable. Wet film gauges are to be used after backrolling to insure acceptable wet film thickness. A quality control log, recording weather and surface conditions must be completed each day prior to beginning painting. Paint batches are to be recorded as used showing which building each is applied to and when. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. End of Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating IDR/2013 Page 8 of 8 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 14 00 Signage PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. B. Interior directional and informational signs. C. Luminous egress path marking and other "glow -in -the -dark" signs. D. Emergency evacuation maps. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Exit signs required by code. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 1014 00 A. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ANSI/ICC At 17.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from City through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by City through Architect prior to fabrication. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 10 14 00 - Signage &30i2013 Page 1 of Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS Section 1014 00 A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Signs: I. Best Sign Systems, Inc; Product HC300: www.bestsigns.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. I. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade I1 braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 3 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Office Doors: Identify with the room names and numbers shown on the drawings . 6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with the room names and numbers shown on the drawings . 7. Service Rooms: Identify with the room names and numbers shown on the drawings. 8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN' and "WOMEN', room numbers shown on the drawings, and braille. C. Luminous Egress Path Marking and Other "Glow -in -the -Dark" Signs: Photoluminescent media. 1. Provide luminous egress path marking as required by local authority having jurisdiction. D. Emergency Evacuation Maps: 1. Map content to be provided by City. 2. Use clear plastic panel silk-screened on reverse, in brushed aluminum frame, screw -mounted. 2.03 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media in aluminum frame. I. Corners: Square. 2. Frame Finish: Natural (clear) anodized. 3. Wall Mounting of One -Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Century Gothic. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: Contractor to supply color chart to Architect for selection. 4. Character Color: Contractor to supply color chart to Architect for selection of contrasting color. 10 14 00 - Signage &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.04 NON -TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA Section 1014 00 A. Silk Screened Plastic Panels: Letters and graphics silk screened onto reverse side of plastic surface: 1. Sign Color: Clear. 2. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non -corroding metal. B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain City's instructions. D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. End of Section 10 14 00 - Signage &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 10 14 00 - Signage &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 1014 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 2113.13 Metal Toilet Compartments PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. B. Urinal and Vestibule screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. B. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Section 10 2113.13 A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and ceilings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. C. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, _6_x_6 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. General Partitions Mfg. Corp; Product www.generalpartitions.com. 2. Global Steel Products Corp; Product www.globalpartitions.com. 3. Metpar Corp; Product : www.metpar.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Powder coated steel, floor -mounted unbraced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground smooth. C. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and floor -to -ceiling vertical upright consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel with polished finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. B. Brackets: Polished chrome -plated non-ferrous cast metal. C. Hardware: Polished chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Thumb turn or sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 2113.13 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 2.05 FINISHING A. Powder Coated Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats powder coat enamel. B. Color: Single color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Retum out swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. End of Section 10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments &30i2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 28 00 Section 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories. B. Section 10 21 13.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. C. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2010. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed are made by Bobrick. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories -General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES Section 10 28 00 A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, recessed, stainless steel unit with pivot hinge, tumbler lock. Product: B-347, B-3474, B-357, B-3574 manufactured by Bobrick. B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel; seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors. 1. Product: B-3944 manufactured by Bobrick. C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck -mounted on vanity, with polyethylene container concealed below deck; piston and 4 inch spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish; chrome -plated deck escutcheon. Product: B-826 manufactured by Bobrick. D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror. 1. Size: Refer to Interior Elevations. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish. 3. Backing: Full -mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. E. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface -mounted, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock. 1. Product: B-3013 manufactured by Bobrick. F. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish. 1. Standard Duty Grab Bars: a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound -force, minimum. b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. G. Combination Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispenser: Stainless steel, recessed. 1. Product: B-3706 25 manufactured by Bobrick. 2.05 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness, satin -finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin -finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners. B. Shower Curtain: 1. Material: Opaque vinyl, 0.008 inch thick, matte finish, with antibacterial treatment, flameproof and stain -resistant. 2. Grommets: Stainless steel; pierced through top hem on 6 inch centers. 3. Color: White. C. Wall -Mounted Soap Dish: Heavy duty, seamless stainless steel, recessed, without grab bar, satin finish; with concealed mechanical fastening suitable for substrate and backplate. 1. Product: B-4380 manufactured by Bobrick. D. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single -prong, rectangular -shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Product: B-671 manufactured by Bobrick. 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.06 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES Section 10 28 00 A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. 1. Product: B-239 manufactured by Bobrick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on drawings, and as follows: End of Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories &30i2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 10 28 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 44 00 Section 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 -Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com. 2. Pyro-Chem: www.pyrochem.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. Ansul, Inc.: www.ansul.com. 2. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Cc: www.larsensmfg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed stainless steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. C. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. D. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Polished chrome. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. End of Section 10 44 00 - Fire Protection Specialties &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Section 10 44 00 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 5100 Lockers Section 10 5100 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal lockers. B. Locker units with hinged doors. C. Locker benches. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and combination lock code. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect locker fmish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lockers: I. Art Metal Products: www.artmetalproducts.com. 2. Lyon Workspace Products: www.lyonworkspace.com. 3. Penco Products, Inc: www.pencoproducts.com. 4. Republic Storage Systems Co: www.republicstorage.com. 5. Gear Grid. 6. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Locker Benches: Stationary type; bench top of laminated birch species wood, stained, sealed and varnished; pedestals of chrome steel, inches high. 2.03 LOCKER UNITS 2.04 FINISHING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers plumb and square. C. Place and secure on prepared base. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. End of Section 10 5100 - Lockers 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 1 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 10 51 00 - Lockers &30/2013 Page 2 of 1 Section 10 5100 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 56 13 Metal Storage Shelving PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal storage shelving. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 10 56 13 A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Blocking and reinforcement in walls for anchoring shelving units. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI MI -128.1 - American National Standard for the Design, Testing, Utilization and Application of Industrial Grade Steel Shelving - Specifications; 1997. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Rated uniform shelf loads. 2. Details of shelving assemblies, including reinforcement. 3. Accessories. C. Test Reports: Provide independent agency test reports documenting compliance with specified structural requirements. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect for dents, scratches, or other damage. Replace damaged units. B. Store in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store under cover and elevated above grade. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty covering defects of manufacturing and workmanship and rust and corrosion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cantilevered Shelving: 1. Montel: www.montel.com. 2. SpaceSaver Corporation: www.spacesaver.com. 3. Tennsco : www.tennsco.com. 10 56 13 - Metal Storage Shelving 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SHELVING - GENERAL Section 10 56 13 A. Shelving: Provide products tested to comply with ANSI MH28.1 for design criteria, lateral stability, shelf connections, and shelf capacity. 2.03 CANTILEVERED SHELVING A. Cantilevered Shelving: Freestanding formed steel post frame with slots for cantilevered shelving brackets, sufficiently rigid not to require sway bracing, shelving brackets, shelving surfaces, and accessories as specified. 1. Unit Width: Per plans inches, center to center of posts. 2. Shelf Capacity: Rated uniform load of 50 psf, minimum, tested in accordance with ANSI MH28.1. 3. Adjustability of Shelving: At intervals of I inches on center, minimum. 4. Finish: Baked enamel, medium gloss. B. Frame: Formed steel members comprising posts, horizontal spreaders at top and bottom, and base brackets resisting overturning; frame configuration providing full face height and width available for adjustable shelves. 1. Sheet Metal Thickness: 16 gage, minimum. 2. Base Brackets Height from Floor: 9 inches, maximum. 3. Connecting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Provide manufacturer's standard adjustable leveling devices. C. Shelf Brackets: Combination shelf support and bookend, formed steel; full depth of shelves and minimum 6 inches height above shelf surface; rounded outer edges and corners for safety. 1. Thickness: 16 gage, minimum. 2. Connection to Posts: Two hooks at top, safety lug at bottom. D. Shelves: Formed steel, finished on all surfaces. 1. Thickness: 18 gage, minimum. 2. Bottom Shelf Edge Profile: 1 inch with integral kickplate. 3. Upper Shelves Edge Profile: Extending 3/4 inch, maximum, below top surface of shelf. 4. Shelf Connections: Tab interlock with brackets; positive bolt connection between shelf and bracket. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is level and that clearances areas specified. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 10 56 13 - Metal Storage Shelving &30/2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 10 56 13 B. Install shelving with shelf surfaces level and vertical supports plumb; adjust feet and bases as required. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean shelving and surrounding area after installation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. End of Section 10 56 13 - Metal Storage Shelving &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 10 56 13 - Metal Storage Shelving &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 10 56 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 11 31 00 Residential Appliances PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances. B. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 113100 A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators. C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens. D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. All Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. B. Refrigerator: Free-standing, side-by-side, frost -free. 1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity. 2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency standards set by DOE. 3. Features: Include glass shelves. 4. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated. 5. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products: www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Microwave: Countertop. 1. Capacity: 0.7 cubic ft. 2. Power: 700 watts. 11 31 00 - Residential Appliances 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3. Features: Include turntable, night light, and 2 -speed exhaust fan. 4. Finish: Stainless Steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products: www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. Section 113100 D. Dishwasher : Undercounter. 1. Controls: Solid state electronic. 2. Wash Levels: 3. 3. Cycles: 4, including normal. 4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no -heat dry, optional water temperature boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack. 5. Finish: Stainless steel. 6. Manufacturers: a. Frigidaire Home Products; Product : www.frigidaire.com. b. GE Appliances; Product : www.geappliances.com. c. Whirlpool Corp; Product : www.whirlpool.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough -ins are present and correctly located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment. End of Section 11 31 00 - Residential Appliances &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 1152 13 Projection Screens PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Front projection screen assemblies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 115213 A. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls and ceilings. B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings for recessed screens, and openings in gypsum board partitions for fixed and rear projection screens. C. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and descriptive information on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Experienced in manufacturing products specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of the work of this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver projection screens to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Inspect for damage and size before accepting delivery. B. Store in a protected, clean, dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Stack according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Acclimate screens to building temperatures for 24 hours prior to installation, or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain interior of building between 60 degrees F and 75 degrees F during and after installation of projection screens. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for projection screen assembly. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bretford: www.bretford.com. 11 52 13 -Projection Screens &30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 1152 13 B. Da -Lite Screen Company: www.da-lite.com. C. Draper, Inc: www.draperinc.com. D. E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. Front Projection Screens: Factory assembled unless otherwise indicated. 1. In Classrooms: Motorized, matte light diffusing fabric screen, horizontally tensioned, wall mounted. B. Matte Light Diffusing Fabric: Light diffusing screen fabric; washable, flame retardant and mildew resistant. C. Exposed Screen Cases: Steel; integral roller brackets. 1. Finish: Baked enamel. 2. Color: White. 3. End Caps: Steel; finished to match case. 4. Mounting: Wall. D. Electrically -Operated Screens: 1. Roller: 2 inch aluminum, with locking device. 2. Vertical Tensioning: Screen fabric weighted at bottom with steel bar with plastic end caps. E. Provide mounting hardware, brackets, supports, fasteners, and other mounting accessories required for a complete installation, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for specified substrates and mountings. 2.03 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Motors: Direct drive, 110 V, 60 Hz. 1. Screen Motor: Mounted inside roller; three wire with ground; quick reverse type; equipped with thermal overload cut-off. a. Electrical Characteristics: 1.2 amps. b. Motor mounted on sound absorber. C. Controls: 3 position control switch with plate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is finished and ready to accept screen installation. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify type and location of electrical connections. D. Do not install projection screens until climate control systems are in place and interior painting and other finishes are completed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate screen installation with installation of projection systems. 1152 13 - Projection Screens &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 1152 13 B. Coordinate installation with adjacent construction and fixtures, including ceilings, walls, lighting, fire suppression, and registers and grilles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's recommended hardware for relevant substrates. B. Do not field cut screens. C. Install screens in mountings as specified and as indicated on drawings. D. Install plumb and level. E. Install electrically operated screens ready for connection to power and control systems by others. F. Adjust projection screens and related hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for proper placement and operation. G. Test electrical screens for proper working condition. Adjust as needed. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. End of Section 1152 13 - Projection Screens &30/2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1152 13 - Projection Screens &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 1152 13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 12 2113 A. WCMA A100.1 -Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2010. (ANSUWCMA A101.1) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord type and color. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Hunter Douglas; Product www.hunterdouglas.com. 2. Levolor Contract; Product www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full -width headrail with full -width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA A100.1. B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. C. Head Rail: Pre -finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats D. Bottom Rail: Pre -finished, formed steel with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Color: Same as headrail. E. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop. F. Control Wand: Extruded aluminum; round shape. G. Headrail Attachment: Ceiling brackets. H. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Determine sizes by field measurement. 12 21 13 -Horizontal Louver Blinds &30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 B. Fabricate blinds to cover window frames completely. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. End of Section 12 21 13 - Horizontal Louver Blinds &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 Section 12 2113 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 12 36 00 Countertops PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork. B. Countertops for manufactured casework. C. Wall -hung counters and vanity tops. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 12 36 00 A. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org. B. AWUAWMAC/W1(AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. C. ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; 2001 (2007). D. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual; VII, 2007. E. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 12 36 00 - Countertops 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS Section 12 36 00 A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Quality Standard: See Section 06 41 00. B. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum. 2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3; orthopthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non -porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual. b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished. c. Color and Pattern: As selected by from manufacturer's full line. d. Manufacturers: 1) Caesarstone 2) Silestone 3. Other Components Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 2 inch thick; square edge; use marine edge at sinks. 5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 6 inches high. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A -C veneer grade, minimum 5 -ply; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines. B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. C. Joint Sealant: Mildew -resistant silicone sealant, Match countertop color. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 12 36 00 - Countertops &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 12 36 00 C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. D. Wall -Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been fmished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum. B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum. C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. End of Section 12 36 00 - Countertops &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 12 36 00 - Countertops &30/2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 12 36 00 SECTION 22 05 03 PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Pipe and pipe fittings for the following systems: 1. Domestic water piping, within 5 feet of building. 2. Domestic water piping, above grade. 3. Sanitary sewer piping, within 5 feet of building. 4. Sanitary sewer piping, above grade. 5. Equipment drains and over flows. 6. Gas seismic valves. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Unions and flanges. 9. Underground pipe markers. 10. Bedding and cover materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames: Product requirements for access doors for placement by this section. 3. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 4. Section 22 05 23 - General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping: Product requirements for valves for placement by this section. 5. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports for placement by this section. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-1 6. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Product requirements for piping insulation for placement by this section. 7. Section 31 05 13 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches. 8. Section 31 05 16 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches. 9. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation: Product and execution requirements for excavation and backfill required by this section. 10. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching for underground piping systems. 11. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Execution requirements for backfilling required by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASME 816.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 6. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV). 7. ASME 816.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. 8. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 9. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. 10. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-2 3. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 4. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 5. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 6. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. ASTM A746 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe. 8. ASTM A888 — Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 9. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 10. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 11. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 12. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 13. ASTM D1248 — Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Material. C. American Welding Society: AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. American Water Works Association: AWWA C104 - American National Standard for Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. 3. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron and Grey -Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 4. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-3 5. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. E. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute: CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 2. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. Submit shop drawings sealed by registered professional engineer. C. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials and fittings. Submit manufacturers catalog information. D. Design Data: Indicate pipe sizes. Indicate pipe sizing methods. Indicate calculations used. Submit sizing methods and calculations sealed by registered professional engineer. E. Welders' Certificate: Include welders' certification of compliance with ASME Section IX. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience approved by manufacturer. C. Design piping systems with pipe hangers and supports under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of California. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-4 1.6 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. B. Coordinate installation of buried piping with trenching. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K annealed. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Compression connection or Brazed, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING. ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-5 Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. 2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A888 plain ends. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A888. 2. Joints: CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABI, Charlotte and Tyler Pipe. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hub -less. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABI, Charlotte and Tyler Pipe. C. Polyethylene Encasement: ASTM D1248 polyethylene tube or sheet form to encase cast iron pipe, with minimum 0.008 inch (0.20 mm) thickness. Install encasement as per ASTM A74 and manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A888. 2. Joints: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices or lead and oakum. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABI, Charlotte and Tyler Pipe. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hub -less, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABI, Charlotte and Tyler Pipe. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-6 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. 2.5 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type DWV, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin -antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. 2.6 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.7 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Secton. 2. Brady. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Plastic Ribbon Tape: Bright colored, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, bare. 2.8 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-7 A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 05 16. B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 05 16. C. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: As specified in Section 31 05 13. Subsoil with no rocks over 6 inches in diameter, frozen earth or foreign matter. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. C. Verify trenches are ready to receive piping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings. B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 1 ft of cover. C. Establish minimum separation of 1 foot from other services piping in accordance with CPC code. D. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 17. E. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings or as required. F. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density. G. Install pipe on prepared bedding. H. Route pipe in straight line. I. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-8 J. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with this Section. K. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe, 6 inches above pipe line. L. Install trace wire continuous overtop of pipe, 6 inches above pipe line. M. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 23 23. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density. 4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material. 5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. 3.4 INSTALLATION -ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. B. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 22 05 29. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 00. G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 31 13. I. Install non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220503-9 J. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to '/4 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients unless otherwise indicated. K. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. L. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. N. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. O. Install valves with steams upright or horizontal, not inverted. P. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sized 2 inches and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw. Q. Provide firestopping at fire rated walls, floors or ceiling assemblies under provisions of Division 7. R. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. S. Install valves in accordance with Section 22 05 23. T. Insulate piping. Refer to Section 22 07 00. 3.5 INSTALLATION - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install domestic water piping system in accordance with CPC. 3.6 INSTALLATION - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install sanitary waste and vent piping systems in accordance with CPC. 3.7 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment or part of system. Install access panel in hard ceilings and or walls as indicated on plans. D. Install globe or ball valves for throttling, bypass or manual flow control services. Install access panel in hard ceilings and or walls as indicated on plans. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 03-10 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with applicable code. C. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code. D. Test storm drainage piping system in accordance with applicable code. E. Test for Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping in accordance with ASME B31.9. 3.9 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. 3.10 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Disinfect ion of potable water system shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C651-92. B. When hot and cold water piping, including fixtures, have been installed, tested and accepted. Disinfect the system using any of the three methods of chlorination explained in AWWA C651-92 standard. C. The basic disinfection procedure shall consists of: Preventing contaminating materials from entering the water piping system during storage, construction or repair. 2. Removing, by flushing or other means, those materials that may have entered the water piping system. 3. Chlorinating any residual contamination that may remain, and flushing the chlorinated water from the piping system. 4. Protecting the existing distribution system from backflow due to hydrostatic pressure test and disinfection procedures. 5. Determining the bacteriological quality by laboratory test after disinfect ion. At least one water sample from the existing distribution system shall be tested. 6. Final connection of the water piping system to the active distribution system. D. Submit Record of Compliance: The record of compliance shall be the bacteriological test results certifying the water sampled from the water piping Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 03-11 system to be free of coliform bacteria contamination, and to be equal to or better than the bacteriologic water quality in the distribution system. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 03-12 SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ball valves. 2. Check valves. 3. Gas ball valves. 4. Gas cocks. 5. Pressure reducing valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 22 05 03 - Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product and installation requirements for piping materials applying to various system types. 2. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product and installation requirements for pipe hangers and supports. 3. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Product and installation requirements for insulation for valves. 4. Section 22 15 00 - General Service Compressed -Air Systems: Product and installation requirements for valves used in compressed air systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 68 — High Pressure — Offset Seat Butterfly Valves. 2. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 3. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 4. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING 220523-1 5. MSS SP 125 — Gray Iron and Ductile Iron In-line, Spring Loaded, Center - Guided Check Valves. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING 220523-2 B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install valves underground when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials. B. Furnish two packing kits for each size valve. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Valve, North America. 2. Milwaukee Valve Company. 3. NIBCO, Inc. 4. Stockham Valves & Fittings. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 600 psi WOG, two-piece bronze body, 316 stainless steel ball full port, PTFE seats, blow-out proof stem, threaded ends, ]ever handle. Similar to Nibco Model T-580-70-66 2.2 CHECK VALVES A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING 220523-3 Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve, North America. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO, Inc. d. Stockham Valves & Fittings. e. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze seat, bronze disc, solder or threaded ends. Similar to Nibco Model T-433. 3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast iron body, bolted cap, bronze or cast iron disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged ends. Similar to Nibco Model F -918-B. 2.3 GAS BALL VALVES A. 1/4 inch to 1 inch: MSS SP 110, Class 125, two piece, threaded ends, bronze body, chrome plated bronze ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, UL 842 listed for flammable liquids and LPG, full port. B. 1-1/4 inch to 3 inch: MSS SP 110, Class 125, two piece, threaded ends, bronze body, chrome plated bronze ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, UL 842 listed for flammable liquids and LPG, conventional port. 2.4 GAS COCKS A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non -lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, non -lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends. C. Similar to Conbraco Model 50. 2.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE A. The pressure reducing valve shall consist of a cast bronze body and bell housing and a "Y" strainer with 20 mesh stainless steel screen. A separate access cover for the plunger and a bolt to adjust the downstream pressure shall be provided. The bronze bell housing and access cap shall be threaded to the body and shall not require the use of ferrous screws. The assembly shall be of the balanced piston design and shall reduce pressure in both flow and no -flow conditions. The Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING 220523-4 assembly shall be accessible to maintenance without having to remove the body from the line. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify piping system is ready for valve installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Install 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. D. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and allowing access. E. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. F. Refer to Section 22 05 29 for pipe hangers. G. Refer to Section 22 07 00 for insulation requirements for valves. H. Refer to Section 22 05 03 for piping materials applying to various system types. I. For installation of valves in sanitary systems refer to Section 22 13 00. J. For installation of valves in storm systems refer to Section 22 14 00. K. For installation of valves in compressed air piping systems refer to Section 22 15 00. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install ball for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. B. Install ball valves in domestic water systems for shut-off service. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING 220523-5 SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Sleeves. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals. 7. Formed steel channel. 8. Equipment bases and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Execution requirements for placement of sleeves in concrete forms specified by this section. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 4. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: Product requirements for sealant materials for placement by this section. 5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 6. Section 22 05 03 - Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-1 7. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product and execution requirements for vibration isolators. 8. Section 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 9. Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 10. Section 22 14 00 - Facility Storm Drainage: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 11. Section 22 15 00 - General Service Compressed -Air Systems: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME 831.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 5. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire -Resistive Joint Systems. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-2 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. G. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): WH - Certification Listings. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263 and UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. B. Surface Burning: ASTM E84, UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450. C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to FM or UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers. C. Product Data: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-3 Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Submit sizing methods and calculations sealed by a registered professional engineer. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F -Ratings and temperature T -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. Wall Penetrations: Fire F -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. 2. Floor Penetrations: Fire F -Ratings and temperature T -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T -Rating is not required. B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non -Fire Rated Floor Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-4 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. F. Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. G. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-5 C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc. 2. Creative Systems Inc. 3. Flex -Weld, Inc. 4. Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 5. Michigan Hanger Co. 6. Superior Valve Co. 7. Tolco. 8. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Plumbing Piping - DWV: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-6 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper -plated, carbon -steel adjustable, ring. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69 or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-7 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper -plated, Carbon -steel ring. 2.2 PLUMBING PIPING GAS A. Conform to NFPA 54, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. E. Wall Support for Pipe 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.4 MANUFACTURERS — SEISMIC BRACING A. Systems: Products of B -Line, Inc., Oakland, CA, are the standard of quality required and specified herein. Similar products of other manufacturers meeting the same standards of performance and approved by OSHPD or ORS/DSA may be submitted for approval. 2.5 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.6 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 24 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 24 gage thick galvanized steel. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-8 C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 Ib./sq. ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 Ib./sq. ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 1/16 inch thick sheet; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sealant: Acrylic. PART 3: EXECUTION c�illlllllll��:cuAll Fly 1[.7k' A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder -actuated anchors. D. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69 or MSS SP 89. B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-9 D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. G. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. H. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. I. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. J. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. K. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. L. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. M. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 22 07 00. 3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members or formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. Refer to Section 21 05 48. 3.5 INSTALLATION - FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter -flash, and seal. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-10 C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor, shower and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.8 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-11 3.10 SCHEDULES PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches Cast Iron (All Sizes) 5 5/8 Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10 foot length of pipe 10 5/8 Copper Tube, 1-1/4 inches and smaller 6 1/2 Copper Tube, 1-1/2 inches and larger 10 1/2 Steel, 3 inches and smaller 12 1/2 Steel, 4 inches and larger 12 5/8 END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29-12 SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Stencils. 4. Pipe markers. 5. Ceiling tacks. 6. Labels. 7. Lockout devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 220553-1 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping systems and accessories. B. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two containers of spray -on adhesive. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Safety Sign Co. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 220553-2 3. Seton Identification Products. 4. Brady Co. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges, supply with brass jack chain. B. Information Tags: Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. C. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame. 2.3 STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1 -inch high letters. 3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters. 4. Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters. B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi -gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 220553-3 C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.5 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color -coded head. B. Color code as follows: 1. Plumbing valves: Green. 2.6 LABELS A. Description: Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification. 2.7 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches. B. Valve Lockout Devices: 1. Nylon device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00. B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 220553-4 E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. G. Install piping identification on medical gas systems. Refer to Section 22 60 13. H. Identify water heaters with plastic nameplates. I. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. J. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. K. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape pipe markers or stenciled painting. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. L. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T -bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 220553-5 SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories. 2. Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories. B. Related Sections: Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting insulation jackets and covering specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Prefabrication and Field Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, Vessel Lagging, and Dished Head Segments. 2. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 3. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 4. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING INSULATION Specifications 22 07 00 -1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters. C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING INSULATION Specifications 220700-2 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Owens-Corning. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products: 1. Aeroflex. Aerocell. 2. Armacell. LLC. Armaflex. 3. Nomaco. K -flex. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 PIPE INSULATION A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING INSULATION Specifications 220700-3 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F. 3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing adhesive joints. 4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F. B. TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP -69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation. E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with stainless steel jacket single piece construction with self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation. F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING INSULATION Specifications 220700-4 B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour. C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 2. Furnish factory -applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory -applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. D. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F: Furnish factory -applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory -applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. 3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations. E. Inserts and Shields: Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and insulation. 2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish jacket. a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service. F. Insulation Terminating Points: Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of the coil control valve. 2. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING INSULATION Specifications 220700-5 G. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Push insulation on to piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered. 5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. H. High Temperature Pipe Insulation: 1. Install in multiple layers to meet thickness scheduled. 2. Attach each layer with bands. Secure first layer with bands before installing next layer. 3. Stagger joints between layers. 4. Cover with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. I. Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product may be installed in trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap. J. Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Water Supply Services Piping Insulation Schedule: END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING INSULATION Specifications 220700-6 INSULATION INSULATION THICKNESS PIPING SYSTEM TYPE PIPE SIZE inches Domestic Hot Water Supply P-1 1-1/4 inches and smaller 0.5 and Recirculation 1-1/2 inches and larger 1.0 Domestic Hot Water Supply P-1 1 inch and smaller 1.0 and Recirculation systems 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches 1.5 with domestic water temperature maintenance 2-1/2 inches and larger 2.0 cable END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING INSULATION Specifications 220700-6 SECTION 22 34 00 FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial gas-fired water heaters. 2. Expansion tank. 3. Aquastats. 4. Timer switch. 5. Circulation pumps. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 2. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Field applied insulation for domestic water heaters. 3. Section 23 11 23 - Facility Natural -Gas Piping: Execution requirements for gas piping connections specified by this section. 4. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.10.1 - Gas Water Heaters Vol. I Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu per Hour or Less. 2. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Vol. III Storage, with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Specifications 22 34 00 -1 1. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate heater dimensions, size of taps, and performance data. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, taps, and drains. C. Product Data: 1. Water Heaters: Submit dimensioned drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. Indicate capacity and power requirements. Submit electrical characteristics and connection locations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit mounting and support requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit replacement part numbers and availability. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME Section VIII for construction of water heaters. Provide boilers registered with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. B. Water Heater Performance Requirements: Equipment efficiency not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI Z21.10.3. C. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Specifications 223400-2 B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Products storage and handling requirements. B. Accept water heaters on site in original labeled cartons. Inspect for damage. C. Protect tanks with temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters packaged water heating systems. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two pump seals. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith. 2. Lochinvar. 3. Bradford White. 4. American Water Heater Group. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Specifications 223400-3 5. Rheem. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage. C. Capacity: See Schedule. 2. Maximum working pressure: 150 psig. 3. Certification: ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI Z21.10.3. D. Tank: Copper lined or Nickel (nickel/phosphorus) coating. E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. F. Approval: By AGA as automatic storage water heater. 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER EXPANSION TANK A. Precharged welded steel tank with air charging valve and removable heavy duty butyl/ EPDM diaphragm or bladder separating water and air with a working pressure of 150 psig. All internal parts shall comply with FDA regulations and approvals. The tank shall have NPT stainless steel connection, gauge glass openings and drain and be constructed in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. For model number see schedule on the drawings. 2.3 AQUASTATS A. Provide immersed type adjustable volatile liquid mercury tube switch. Set in oversized tee and nipple in hot water return line for automatically controlling hot water circulators and hot water circulating pumps. Refer to schedule for more information. 2.4 TIME SWITCH A. Provide an adjustable heavy duty self-starting synchronous motor clock (120 volt) in NEMA -1 enclosure for automatically controlling hot water circulators, hot water circulating pumps, distilled water booster pumps and demineralizer water booster pumps. B. Clock shall have seven-day calendar dial, similar to Tork Series W and the number of poles as required. 2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - IN-LINE CIRCULATION PUMPS A. Bell and Gossett, see schedules. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Specifications 223400-4 2.6 IN-LINE CIRCULATION PUMPS A. All bronze construction body, stainless steel face plate, 30% glass filled Noryl impeller, carbon steel shaft, stainless steel shaft sleeve, mechanical, carbon on silicon carbide seal, sealed precision steel ball bearing permanently lubricated motor bearings, maximum operating pressure of 150 psi; 1/12 HP, 115 volts, 2650 rpm, non -overloading type motor, drip -proof. For model number see schedule on drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over water heaters. B. Install water heater on concrete housekeeping pad, minimum 32 inches high and 6 inches larger than water heater base on each side. Refer to Section 03 30 00. C. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. D. Connect domestic hot water and domestic cold water piping to supply and return water heater connections. E. Install the following piping accessories. Refer to Section 22 11 00. 1. On supply: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. 2. On return: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Shutoff valve. F. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 23 11 23. G. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor sink. H. Install circulator and diaphragm expansion tank on water heater as indicated on the drawings. I. Install water heater trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting. J. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. K. Install control wiring between water heater control panel and field mounted control devices. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Specifications 223400-5 L. Connect flue to water heater outlet, full size of outlet. Refer to Section 23 51 00. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Specifications 223400-6 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Dual flush water closets. C. Urinals. D. Lavatories. E. Sinks. F. Service sinks. G. Drinking fountains. H. Showers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 22 40 00 A. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Preparation of counters for sinks; lavatory tops. B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to walls and floors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011. B. ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2008. C. ASME Al 12.19AM - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004). D. ASME Al 12.19.14 - Six Liter Water Closets Equipped with Dual Flushing Device; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 22 40 00 B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME Al 12.19.2, floor mounted, siphon jet flush action, china bolt caps. 1. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 2. Flush Operation: Manual, oscillating handle. 3. Handle Height: 44 inches or less. 4. Manufacturers: a. Kohler Company; Model K-4406 and K-4405: www.kohler.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sloan Valve Company; Model 8111-1.28: www.sloaiavalve.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 0l 60 00 -Product Requirements. C. Seats: 1. Manufacturers: a. Olsonite; Model 95 CT: www.olsonite.com. 2.02 WALL HUNG URINALS A. Wall Hung Urinal Manufacturers: 1. Zurn Industries, Inc; EcoVantage Z5798 High -Efficiency Urinal System: www.zum.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Urinals: Vitreous china, ASME At 12.19.2, wall hung with side shields and concealed carrier. 1. Flush Volume: 1.0 gallon, maximum. 2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 3. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. 4. Trap: Integral. C. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Sensor -Operated Type: Solenoid operator, low voltage hard -wired, infrared sensor and over -ride push button. D. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn Industries, Inc; Model Exposed ZEG6003EV: www.zum.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 LAVATORIES A. Lavatory Manufacturers: 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures &30/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 22 40 00 I. American Standard, Inc; Model Aqualyn Drop-in Sink and Lucerne Wall -Hung Lavatory: www.americanstandard-us.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME Al 12.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory, 20 by 18 inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. C. Steel Counter Top Basin: ASME A] 12.19.4M; porcelain on steel self -rimming counter top lavatory, 16 by 20 inch with drillings on 4 inch centers, front overflow, seal of putty, calking, or concealed vinyl gasket. D. Vitreous China Counter Top Basin: ASME Al 12.19.2; vitreous china self -rimming counter top lavatory, 16 by 10 inch with drillings on 4 inch centers, front overflow, seal of putty, calking, or concealed vinyl gasket. E. Supply Faucet Manufacturers: 1. Sloan EBF -650. 2. 2.04 SHOWERS A. Shower Manufacturers: 1. Symmons Safetymix 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Trim: ASME Al 12.18.1; concealed shower supply with indexed handles, bent shower arm with adj ustable spray ball joint showerhead with maximum 2.5 gallons per minute flow, and escutcheon. C. Low -Flow Shower Head: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated vandal -proof institutional head with integral wall bracket, built-in 1.5 gpm flow control. 2.05 DRINKING FOUNTAINS A. Drinking Fountain Manufacturers: 1. Haws Corporation; Model 1119.14: www.hawsco.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components level and plumb. B. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 05, color to match fixture. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confute location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures &30/2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 3.05 ADJUSTING 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.07 PROTECTION Section 22 40 00 A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. End of Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures &30/2013 Page 4 of 4 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Water closets. 2. Urinals. 3. Lavatories. 4. Sinks. 5. Insulation kit. 6. Showers. 7. Drinking fountains. 8. Mop sinks. 9. Floor drains. 10. Water hammer arrestors. 11. Trap primers. 12. Hose bibbs. 13. Sand oil interceptors. 14. Access panels. 15. Cleanouts. 16. Laundry box. 17. Ice maker outlet box. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: Product requirements for calking between fixtures and building components for placement by this section. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 22 40 00 -1 2. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections to sensor valves and faucets specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ANSI Z124.1 - Plastic Bathtub Units. 3. ANSI Z124.2 - Plastic Shower Units. 4. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment. B. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 1010 - Self -Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking -Water Coolers. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.6.1 - Floor -Affixed Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. 2. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 3. ASME Al 12.19.1 M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. 4. ASME Al 12.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 5. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use). 6. ASME Al 12.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. 7. ASME Al 12.19.5 - Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-2 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fixture, trim, exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two sets of faucet washers, flush valve service kits, and lavatory supply fittings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-3 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessible plumbing fixtures shall comply with all of the requirements of CBC Section 1115B. B. Heights and location of all fixtures shall be according to CBC Section 1115B.4. C. Fixture controls shall comply with CBC Sections 1115B.4.4.4 for showers, 1115B.4.3, Item 1 for lavatories, 11158.4.1, Item 5 for toilets, and 1115B.4.2, Item 2 for urinals. D. Each accessible sink shall be a maximum of 6-1/2" deep. Sinks shall be mounted with the counter or rim no higher than 34" above the finish floor. CBC Section 1117B.9, Item 2. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — FIXTURES A. American Standard B. Kohler C. Eljer 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLUSH VALVES A. Sloan 2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER CLOSET SEATS A. Olsonite B. Beneke C. Church 2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE CARRIERS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE TRIM A. Chicago Faucet 2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MIXING VALVES (PRESSURE BALANCED) A. Symmons Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-4 B. Leonard C. Powers 2.8 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SHOWERS A. American Standard B. Symmons C. Kohler 2.9 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — DRINKING FOUNTAINS A. Sunroc B. Haws C. Elkay 2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLOOR DRAINS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLOOR SINKS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.12 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—TRENCH DRAINS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-5 2.14 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - TRAP PRIMERS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- HOSE BIBBS A. Acorn B. Woodford C. Josam 2.16 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — SAND AND OIL INTERCEPTORS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CLEANOUTS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn C. Josam 2.18 WATER CLOSET, FLOOR MOUNTED, NORMAL A. Bowl: ANSI Al 12.19.2; 1.28 gallons per flush, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl with elongated rim, 1-1/2" spud and china bolt caps. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery operated sensor, escutcheon, vacuum breaker. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Seat: Solid elongated plastic, open front with self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.19 WATER CLOSET, FLOOR MOUNTED, ACCESSIBLE A. Bowl: ANSI Al 12.19.2M; 1.28 gallon per flush, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl with elongated rim, 17 high for accessibility, 1-1/2" top spud and china bolt caps. For model number see schedule on drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-6 B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery operated sensor, escutcheon, vacuum breaker. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Seat: Solid elongated plastic, open front with self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.20 URINAL, WALL HUNG, NORMAL A. Urinal: ANSI Al 12.19.2; vitreous china, 1/8 gallon per flush, siphon jet with flushing rim, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery operated sensor, escutcheon, vacuum breaker. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.21 URINAL, WALL HUNG, ACCESSIBLE A. Urinal: ANSI Al 12.19.2; vitreous china, 1/8 gallon per flush, siphon jet with flushing rim, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery operated sensor, escutcheon, vacuum breaker. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.22 LAVATORY, WALL HUNG, ACCESSIBLE A. Basin: ANSI Al 12.19.2; vitreous china lavatory with 4 inch high back, drillings for center punch, and rectangular basin with splash lip front overflow. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with battery operated sensor and strainer, chrome plated 17 gage L.A. pattern cast brass P - trap and arm with secured escutcheon and rigid supplies. For model number see schedule on drawings. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. For model number see schedule on drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-7 2.23 LAVATORY, COUNTER TOP, ACCESSIBLE A. Basin: ANSI Al 12.19.2; vitreous china unglazed rim for under counter mount, oval basin with front overflow. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Trim: ANSI Al 12.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting battery operated sensor and strainer, chrome plated 17 gage L.A. pattern cast brass P -trap and arm with escutcheon, and rigid supplies. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.24 SINK, SINGLE COMPARTMENT, ACCESSIBLE A. Bowl: ANSI Al 12.19.3; 5 inch deep outside dimensions, 18 gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self -rimming with undercoating, single hole punching, 3-1/2 inch strainer, ledgeback drilled for trim. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Trim: ANSI Al 12.18.1; chrome plated gooseneck spout fitting with wrist blade handles, chrome plated 17 gage L.A. pattern cast brass P -trap and arm with escutcheon and supplies. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.25 SINK, DOUBLE COMPARTMENT, ACCESSIBLE A. Bowl: ANSI A112.19.3; 18 gage thick, Type 304 stainless steel, self -rimming with undercoating, three hole punching, 3-1/2 inch strainer on right and strainer on left bowl, ledgeback drilled for trim, disposer under right bowl. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated gooseneck spout with single lever handles, chrome plated 17 gage L.A. Pattern cast brass P -trap and arm with escutcheon, rigid supplies. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.26 INSULATION KIT A. Where lavatories or sinks are noted to be insulated for ADA compliance, furnish the following: Safety covers conforming to ANSI A177.1, ASTM E84-07 and consisting of insulation kit of molded closet cell vinyl construction, 3/16 inch thick, white color, for insulating tailpiece, P -trap, valves and supply piping. Furnish with weep hole and angle valve access covers. 2.27 SHOWER, NORMAL A. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated supply with pressure balanced mixing valve bent shower arm with flow control and adjustable spray, ball joint shower head and escutcheon. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.28 SHOWER, ACCESSIBLE A. Trim: ANSI A112.18.1; chrome plated supply with pressure balanced mixing valve bent shower arm with flow control and hand held shower with 24" slide bar. For model number see schedule on drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-8 2.29 DRINKING FOUNTAIN, ACCESSIBLE A. Fountain: Wall mounted, stainless steel, accessible, vandal -resistant bubbler with push bar action and 1-1/4 inch P -trap. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.30 MOP SINK, FLOOR MOUNTED (MS -1) A. Bowl: Enameled cast iron, with 3" IPS drain and flat chrome strainer and vinyl rim guard. For model number see schedule on drawings. B. Trim: ANSI Al 12.18.1; chrome plated fitting with vacuum breaker, pail hook and hose thread outlet. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.31 FLOOR DRAINS A. ANSI Al 12.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, round, adjustable polished nickel -bronze strainer; and trap primer connection; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.32 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range - 100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psig working pressure; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.33 TRAP PRIMERS A. ANSI Al 12.26; cast bronze with 1/2 -inch connection. See Schedule on drawings for Model number. B. Provide a trap primer enclosed in a 12" x 12" x 4" NEMA -1 enclosure, with a 1/2" inch NPT female inlet complying with ANSI/ASME BI.20.1, outlet shall be 1/2" inch compression fitting, provide with circuit breaker, switch, timer, manual override, solenoid valve marked as UL Listed, electronic assembly tested and certified per UL #73, and backflow device anti -siphon atmospheric vacuum breaker IAPMO, ASSE 1001 and CSA. Provide in accordance with ASSE Standard No. 1018. See schedule on the drawings for model number. 2.34 HOSE BIBBS A. Provide recessed box, having one piece cast construction, stainless steel wall flange with a satin finish. The door shall be provided with a cam lock. Valves shall be cast bronze, exposed parts chrome -plated, tamper resistant lockshield bonnet and replaceable cartridge, % inch inlet for cold, and % inch outlet with vacuum breaker, See Schedules for Model No. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 224000-9 2.35 SAND AND OIL INTERCEPTORS A. Clarifier: Shall be two (2) compartment, precast reinforced concrete construction with manholes, H2O loading covers, extensions and sample box including drainage and vent piping and connections. B. Size and capacity as indicated in the Schedule on Drawings. C. Interior shall be coated with an approved epoxy coating. 2.36 ACCESS PANELS A. 12" x 12" No. 4 finish stainless steel flush type, locate and set after review. Steel door and frame with metal flange with concealed hinges and screwdriver operated stainless steel cam lock. Karp style DSC -214M for fire rated construction use KRP-150FR. 2.37 CLEANOUTS A. Exterior Surfaced Areas C.O.Y.B.: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. B. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas G.C.O.: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketted cover; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. C. Interior Finished Floor Areas F.C.O.: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar and adjustable nickel -bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. D. Interior Finished Wall Areas W.C.O.: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketted cover and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; see Schedule on drawings for Model number. 2.38 LAUNDRY HOSE BOX A. Recessed wall mounted corrosion resistant box complete with hot and cold supplies and 2" waste outlet. For model number see schedule on drawings. 2.39 ICE MAKER OUTLET BOX A. Recessed wall mounted corrosion resistant box complete with cold supply. For model number see schedule on drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 22 40 00 -10 B. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics. D. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. C •► A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00, color to match fixture. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. G. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop -drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 22 40 00 -11 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PLUMBING FIXTURES Specifications 22 40 00 -12 SECTION 275130 HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing a complete Hearing Assistance System. B. The Hearing Assistance system shall be compatible with PA system and shall be approved by the Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall provide following submittals and shop drawings for review and approval: 1. A complete list of equipment and materials proposed for system, with catalog cuts, technical data, manufacturer's specifications and detail drawings. B. Operating and Servicing Manuals, Record Drawings: 1. Deliver required number of copies of operating and servicing manual. Each complete manual shall be bound in a Flexible binder and all data shall be typewritten or drafted. 2. Each manual shall include all instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include complete 2 wire circuit diagrams of system, a wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving console and each rack, a schematic diagram of all components, and replacement part numbers. Each manual shall also include as -built cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating all cables with conduit, and as -built coding used on each cable. Programming forms of each system shall be submitted with complete information. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall conform to CCR, Title 24 Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulation and California Electrical Code, latest edition. B. 100% Digital. Receivers are digitally -tuned so transmission won't drift PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 TRAINING ROOM HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM A. Hearing Assistance System: Infrared Hearing Assistance System shall be manufactured by Listen Technology, Person Portable FM System or approved equal by Sennheiser or Williams Technology and consist of the following components: 1. Cat. No LT -700 FM Display Transmitter (1) 2. Cat. No. LA -278 Behind -the -Head Microphone (1) 3. Cat. No. LR -400 Portable Display Receiver (7) 4. Cat. No. LA -164 Ear Speaker (7) 5. LA -322 8 -Unit Portable FM Product Carrying Case (1) 6. LA -361 High Capacity AA Alkaline Batteries (8) Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM Specifications 27 51 30 -1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 EXAMINATION AND OPERATION 3.3 SPECIAL PUBLIC ADDRESS AND HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM TESTS A. Provide all instruments for testing and demonstrate, in presence of the Owner Inspector, that all circuits and wiring test free of shorts and grounds. B. Furnish all labor, instruments, appliances, equipment and materials necessary to demonstrate to the Owner that installation performs as required and specified. C. The Owner reserves the right to make independent tests of equipment furnished, to determine whether or not equipment complies with requirements specified, and to accept or reject any or all equipment on basis of results obtained. q •I�I�]�`1xNI[�]��siFYBIr] Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM Specifications 275130-2 SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vibration isolators. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International. Inc.: 1. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. B. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI S1.4 - Sound Level Meters. 2. ANSI S1.8 - Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels. 3. ANSI S1.13 - Methods for the Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air. 4. ANSI S12.36 - Survey Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources. C. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 575 - Method of Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment Space. D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and: 1. ASHRAE 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing In -Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans. 2. ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications. E. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 2. ASTM E477 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-1 3. ASTM E596 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction of Sound -Isolating Enclosures. F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors': 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp, plus connected piping and ductwork. B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as follows: 1. Basement, Under 20 hp a. 400 - 600 rpm: 1 inch b. 600 - 800 rpm: 0.5 inch C. 800 - 900 rpm: 0.2 inch d. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 0.14 inch e. Over 1500 rpm: 0.1 inch 2. Basement, Over 20 hp a. 400 - 600 rpm: 2 inch b. 600 - 800 rpm: 1 inch C. 800 - 900 rpm: 0.5 inch d. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 0.2 inch e. Over 1500 rpm: 0.15 inch 3. Upper Floors, Normal a. 400 - 600 rpm: 3.5 inch b. 600 - 800 rpm: 2 inch C. 800 - 900 rpm: 1 inch d. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 0.5 inch e. Over 1500 rpm: 0.2 inch C. Maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed those listed below by utilizing acoustical devices. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-2 D. Maintain rooms at following maximum sound levels, in Noise Criteria (NC) as defined by ASHRAE Handbook., HVAC Applications and ANSI S1.8. 1. Offices a. Executive: 30 b. Conference rooms: 30 C. Private: 35 d. Open-plan areas: 40 e. Computer/business machine areas: 40 f. Public circulation: 40 2. Schools a. Lecture and classrooms: 30 b. Open-plan classrooms: 35 3. Libraries: 30 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AMCA 300 standards and recommendations of ASHRAE 68. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-3 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: Mason Industries, Inc. 2. MW Sause & Company. 3. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Open Spring Isolators: Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Furnish with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. C. Restrained Spring Isolators: Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Furnish with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-4 5. Restraint: Furnish mounting frame and limit stops. D. Closed Spring Isolators: Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance. E. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators: Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance and limit stops. F. Spring Hanger: Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-5 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators or rubber hanger with threaded insert. 4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. G. Neoprene Pad Isolators: Rubber or neoprene -waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum 1/2 inch thick. C. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs: not to exceed 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: Single layer. H. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches deflection with threaded insert. I. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre -compressed molded glass fiber. J. Seismic Snubbers: Type: Non -directional and double acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by neoprene elements. 2. Neoprene Elements: Replaceable, minimum of 0.75 inch thick. 3. Capacity: 4 times load assigned to mount groupings at 0.4 inch deflection. 4. Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding 3 times rated load capacity of seismic snubber. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify equipment, ductwork and piping is installed before work in this section is started. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-6 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Provide access to existing piping and ductwork and other installations remaining active and requiring access. B. Extend existing piping and ductwork installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Lag ductwork, where indicated by wrapping with insulation and covering. Apply covering to be airtight. Do not attach covering rigidly to ductwork. B. Install isolation for motor driven equipment. C. Bases: 1. Set steel bases for 1 inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. 2. Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. D. Adjust equipment level. E. Install spring hangers without binding. F. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. G. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. H. Provide resiliently mounted equipment, piping, and ductwork with seismic snubbers. Provide each inertia base with minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to isolators. Snub equipment designated for post disaster use to 0.05 inch maximum clearance. Provide other snubbers with clearance between 0.15 inch and 0.25 inch. I. Support piping connections to isolated equipment resiliently as follows: Up to 4 inch Diameter: First three points of support. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-7 Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Specifications PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548-8 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Pipe markers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 230553-1 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products. 4. Brady. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton Identification Products. b. Brady Company. C. Craftmark. d. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches square. B. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton Identification Products. b. Brady Company. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Specifications IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-2 C. Craftmark. d. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges. C. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location plastic laminated. 2.3 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton Identification Products. b. Brady Company. C. Craftmark. d. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. D. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Identify air handling units, with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 230553-3 F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. H. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. I. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. J. For exposed natural gas lines other than steel pipe, attach yellow pipe labels with "GAS" in black lettering, at maximum 5 foot spacing. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING Specifications AND EQUIPMENT 230553-4 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems. 2. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council: AABC MN -1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument. C. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN -1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms. D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. E. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty. F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. G. Furnish reports in binder manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-1 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN -1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC. PART 2: PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following: 1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. S. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-2 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made. E. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance. F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner. 3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-3 C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to obtain required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near building entries. L. Check multi -zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then heating, then modulating. 3.6 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units. 2. Fan Coil Units. 3. Fans. 4. Air Inlets and Outlets. 5. Existing furnaces. 6. VVT by-pass/zone dampers. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-4 B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency C. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor I. Project altitude j. Report date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system C. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer C. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Specifications TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593-5 4. Electric Motors a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame C. HP/BHP and kW d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V -Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM C. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6. Fan Coil Data: a. Manufacturer b. Identification/number C. Location d. Model number e. Size f. Airflow, design and actual g. Entering air temperature, design and actual h. Leaving air temperature, design and actual 7. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-6 b. Manufacturer C. Model number d. Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure k. Discharge pressure I. Sheave Make/Size/Bore IT. Number of Belts/Make/Size n. Fan RPM 8. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow C. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature I. Design outside/return air ratio Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-7 m. Actual outside/return air ratio 9. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer C. Model number d. Serial number e. Airflow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore j. Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM 10. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size C. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor 11. Duct Leak Test: a. Description of ductwork under test b. Duct design operating pressure Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-8 C. Duct design test static pressure d. Duct capacity, air flow e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor f. Test apparatus 1) Blower 2) Orifice, tube size 3) Orifice size 4) Calibrated g. Test static pressure h. Test orifice differential pressure i. Leakage 12. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location C. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Specifications FOR HVAC 230593-9 SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories. 2. HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 2. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic - Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 3. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 4. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 6. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 7. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 8. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 10. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanu rate Thermal Insulation. 11. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 23 07 00 -1 12. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). 14. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 15. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 16. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors': 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters. C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450. D. Duct insulation, Coverings, and Linings: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, using specimen procedures and mounting procedures of ASTM E 2231. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-2 B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Owens-Corning. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products: 1. Aeroflex. Aerocell. 2. Armacell, LLC. Armaflex. 3. Nomaco. K -flex. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-3 2.2 PIPE INSULATION A. TYPE P-7: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 250 degrees F. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. Aluminum Pipe Jacket: 1. ASTM 8209. 2. Thickness: 0.025 inch thick sheet. 3. Finish: Embossed. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. 2.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. TYPE D-1: ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial grade with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket meeting ASTM C1136, Type II. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Density: 0.75 pound per cubic foot. B. TYPE D-2: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, with factory applied all service facing meeting ASTM C1136, Type II. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-4 C. TYPE D-5: ASTM C1071, Type II, rigid, glass fiber duct liner with coated air side. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F. 4. Maximum Air Velocity: 4,000 feet per minute. 2.5 DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS A. Aluminum Duct Jacket: 1. ASTM B209. 2. Thickness: 0.025 inch thick sheet. 3. Finish: Embossed. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Canvas Duct Jacket: UL listed, 6 ozlsq yd, plain weave cotton fabric with fire retardant lagging adhesive compatible with insulation. 2.6 DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. B. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. C. Adhesive: Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire -retardant type. D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with press -on head. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-5 E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Lagging Adhesive: Fire retardant type with maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. G. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad. H. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. I. Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify piping and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Division 07 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour. C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections and expansion joints. 2. Furnish factory -applied or field -applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory -applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field -applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-6 Furnish factory -applied or field -applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory -applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations. E. Inserts and Shields: Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and insulation. 2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish jacket. a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service. 3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller and inserts. F. Insulation Terminating Points: Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation. G. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: Push insulation on to piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered. 5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. H. Piping Exterior to Building: Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o'clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal piping. 3.3 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside dimensions. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-7 B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. D. External Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. E. Duct Liner: Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Cut insulation for tight overlapped corner joints. Support top pieces of liner at edges with side pieces. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-8 F. Ducts Exterior to Building: Install insulation according to external duct insulation paragraph above. 2. Provide external insulation with vapor retarder jacket. Cover with caulked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section. 3. Calk seams at flanges and joints. Located major longitudinal seams on bottom side of horizontal duct sections. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Cooling Services Piping Insulation Schedule: B. Ductwork Insulation Schedule: DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION INSULATION THICKNESS inches INSULATION PIPING SYSTEM TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS 1.5 Return Ducts (internally insulated) D-5 inches Condensate Piping from P-7 All sizes 0.5 Cooling Coils 1.5 Supply Air, Return Air (exterior to building on roof) D-2 Refrigerant Suction P-7 All sizes 0.5 Refrigerant Hot Gas P-7 All sizes 0.5 B. Ductwork Insulation Schedule: DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION TYPE INSULATION THICKNESS inches Outside Air Intake D-2 1.5 Supply Ducts (internally insulated) D-5 1.5 Return Ducts (internally insulated) D-5 1.0 Supply Ducts (externally insulated) D-1 1.5 Return Ducts (externally insulated) D-1 1.5 Supply Air, Return Air (exterior to building on roof) D-2 2.0 Supply Air, Return Air (exterior to building on roof) D-2 2.0 END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC INSULATION Specifications 230700-9 SECTION 230923 VVT CONTROL SYSTEM PART I: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all work for the complete installation of VVT controls. B. Work in this Section: Principal items include: Electronic and electric controls, includes thermostats, switches, relays, control panels for instruments. 2. Electric motors for air dampers, etc. (if required). 3. Local control panels. 4. Adjustment and validation of control system. Instruction of Owner's representative on maintenance and operation of control equipment. 5. Electric diagrams showing interlocks between equipment furnished under the other sections and control furnished herein. 6. Wiring and Conduit: low voltage wire and low voltage conduit for the control system under Division 15, all required power wiring, high voltage wire and high voltage conduit under Division 16. 1.3 SYSTEM A. The VVT Control System shall be installed as a installed project and shall consist of all sensors, thermostats, control panels, dampers, electrical low voltage (24 VAC) and line voltage control wiring for a complete and operating installation as specified herein. The system shall be a standard product with the manufacturer who will guarantee ongoing parts availability and factory trained field support for one (1) year after system acceptance. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. Automatic dampers in ductwork, casings, etc. furnished and installed by the Mechanical Division under control people's supervision. The dampers shall be correctly installed so that they operate freely and close tightly. Provide and install blank off plates when the control application requires dampers smaller than duct size. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VVT CONTROL SYSTEM Specifications 23 09 23 -1 B. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work; not work of this section: Power supply wiring for power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels, including starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory -installed, by manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: General: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent applicable: ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Latest Edition. EIA - Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits; RS -485. NEMA - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum); 250- 1979 NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; 1981 NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; 1981 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit installation drawings, sequences of operation and catalog cut sheets for each device of the proposed system prior to installation for engineer's approval. The drawings shall include the location and intercommunication of all stand-alone and subordinate control panels; the schematic diagrams, of the controlled equipment with sensors, thermostats and dampers shown interconnected to the system controllers; and logic diagrams that depict the sequence of operation. B. After completion of the installation and commissioning of the system including final adjustments, a full set of as -built documentation shall be turned over to the Owner. The as-builts shall include one (1) set of reproducible drawings and two (2) copies of the database on flexible or removable hard disk for each stand- alone controller and the supervisory computer. As -built documentation shall include diagrammatic layouts of the automatic control systems specified herein. Layouts shall show all control equipment, and the function of each item shall be indicated for the different seasons, Layouts shall be located in plastic protective folder and placed in the control panels. All Drawings shall be accompanied with a complete description of sequence of operation. Each control element mentioned in the sequence description shall be identified with the same mark as shown- on the control diagram. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VVT CONTROL SYSTEM Specifications 230923-2 C. Submittal of Materials: Material submittals shall be manufacturers prepared catalog cuts indicating type, size and technical details. Reference catalog cuts to the applicable specification article (e.g. 2.02A). Catalog cuts shall be submitted in complete groups of manufacturer's material. Partial submittals of groups or systems are not acceptable. 5. Verify that the submittal has been reviewed in detail and is in fact the Contractor's choice of materials. D. Upon receipt of contract and prior to the delivery of parts, submit eight copies of the following drawings: Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing the respective locations of components, as applicable and interconnecting wiring between all devices. Also all field terminal and sensing devices. Also all field terminal and sensing devices shall be listed by function and point number and shall display interconnecting wiring and terminals of controlled systems and devices. E. Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing electric connection details for transducers and other electric components. All connections shall be labeled to coordinate with the description of operation, including descriptions to indicate action of components, normal positions, spring ranges, etc. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS A. ZONEFIRST. No substitutions will be accepted. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to maintain beneficial performance of the entire VVT Control System for a period of one (1) year after acceptance of the system, or parts thereof, by an authorized representative of the Owner. Any defects in workmanship or material during the warranty period shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor at no charge to the Owner. All work shall be accomplished during normal working hours, Monday through Friday excluding legal holidays. Precaution shall be taken to minimize disruption of facility operations. B. A prepaid Warranty Service Agreement shall be turned over to the Owner at the time of the acceptance test as a prerequisite of system acceptance. The contract shall include the terms and conditions stated herein. C. Service work shall be performed by service personnel in the direct employ of the control contractors. The service technicians shall be factory trained and certified Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation WT CONTROL SYSTEM Specifications 230923-3 by the manufacturer to be competent in all aspects of the installed system. The technician shall have a working knowledge of calibration techniques, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, software diagnostics and microprocessor repair. D. System modifications shall be incorporated into the as -built documentation and/or operators and maintenance manuals when operating parameters, control point settings or control strategies are changed. System modifications made by the user of the controls contractor shall have both parties' approvals in order to maintain the Warranty Service Agreement. E. System enhancements beyond the scope of the project shall be field upgradable with pull out/plug-in ease. Provided at reasonable value added cost these upgrades may be purchased at the Owner's option. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL PANEL H32PK A. Two stage heat pump, gas/electric heating and cooling zone control panel kit. B. Three zones independent zones can be controlled by this panel. C. Quick "plug and play" connections for 12 -volt DC dampers. D. Up to ten 12 -volt CD "plug and play" dampers can be daisy -chained per zone. E. Color coded "screw -less" terminals for low voltage wires. F. System status, power and zone LED indicator lights. G. Kit includes 40VA, 24 -volt transformer (T24) H. Kit includes duct temperature sensor (ZPS). I. Kit includes outdoor air temperature sensor (OAS). J. Resettable circuit breaker protection. K. Individual zone damper test buttons. L. Attractive white ABS plastic case with snap on cover. M. Operating temperature range is OF -180F. N. Designed to work with Venstar wired thermostats. 2.2 BAROMETRIC BY-PASS DAMPERS SPRD A. Barometric relief damper with adjustable weighted arm for either horizontal or vertical mounting. B. Relieves air pressure on zoned HVAC systems. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation WT CONTROL SYSTEM Specifications 230923-4 C. Non -motorized. D. Low leakage gasket seal. E. Silent self-lubricating bearings. F. Can be used for vertical upflow or downflow of HVAC systems. G. Spiral formed duct sleeve 24 ga. 7" — 10" diameters. H. Spiral formed duct sleeve 22 ga. 12" — 20" diameters. 1. Diameter sizes 7", 8", 9", 10", 12", 14", 16", 18", 20". 2.3 ZONE DAMPER RDP A. 12 volt DC powered "plug and play' motor 50/60 Hz. B. Each damper includes 25' of 4 -wire modular cord with RJ11 end connectors. C. LED position indicator lights GREEN for Open and RED for Closed. D. Dual modular plugs on motor provides easy daisy -chain wiring of multiple dampers. E. Single blade round damper opens/closes in less than 5 seconds. F. Spiral formed duct sleeve 24 ga. 7" — 10" diameters. G. Spiral formed duct sleeve 22 ga. 12" — 20" diameters. H. Low leakage gasket seal. I. 12 -volt DC motor current draws 0.06A. J. Motor torque 75 oz. per in. K. Maximum static pressure 1.0" W.C. L. Diameter sizes 4", 5", 6", 7", 8", 9", 10", 12", 14", 16", 18" and 20". 2.4 THERMOSTAT A. Provide programmable thermostat to be compatible with ZONEFIRST controls and equipment. PART 1EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and requirements. All necessary Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation VVT CONTROL SYSTEM Specifications 230923-5 interconnections, services and adjustments required for a complete and operable system, shall be provided by this contractor who shall be a ZONEFIRST certified installer of the systems herein. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Electric Wiring: This contractor is responsible for all electrical installation and wiring for a fully operational VVT Control System as shown on the drawings and shall include all items not shown on the electrical plans or required as per the electrical specifications. Perform all electrical installation in accordance with local and national electrical codes. All low voltage wiring must be installed in conduit. All low voltage conduit installed under this section must be in accordance with Division 26. 3.3 PERMITS AND FEES A. This contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and inspections as required by federal, state or local law. This includes providing required notices, plans, licenses, and fees, obtaining any necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction, and delivering any certificates of inspection as may be required. No work is to proceed until all proper certificates and licenses are obtained and posted. 3.4 CLEAN-UP A. This contractor shall clean up regularly in order to maintain clean site conditions. In general, clean-up programs shall be scheduled by contractor at least once per week; however, the contractor shall clean up more often if required to meet OSHA standards. B. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with other trades so as to eliminate unnecessary cutting and patching. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Space Thermostat and Sensor Locations: In general, locate thermostats and sensors for room control immediately inside door, next to light switch at approximately 48 inches from floor. Coordinate thermostat locations with General Contractor and approval by Engineer. B. Local Control Panels: Mount all local control panels as indicated on the control drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation WT CONTROL SYSTEM Specifications 230923-6 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with other trades so as to eliminate unnecessary cutting and patching. 3.7 OWNER TRAINING A. Provide training for owner technicians, classes on ZONEFIRST controls total of 8 hours per student. Owner's representatives shall be provided a booklet showing the system layout, components, and operation and maintenance data. B. Training to include. Explanation of drawings and diagrams. Walk-thru of jobsite to locate control components Overview of operation and maintenance features. a. System front end operation (where applicable) END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation WT CONTROL SYSTEM Specifications 230923-7 SECTION 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Natural gas piping buried within 5 feet of building. 2. Natural gas piping above grade. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Valves. 5. Gas seismic valve. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Natural gas pressure regulators. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 - Structural Steel Framing: Product requirements for touch-up painting of structural steel. 2. Division 05 - Steel Joist Framing: Product requirements for touch-up painting of steel joists. 3. Division 08 - Access Doors and Frames: Access doors for concealed valves and accessories. 4. Division 09 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements for painting for placement by this section. 5. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports and firestopping for placement by this section. 6. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for valve and pipe identification for placement by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.15 - Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End Valves. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 23 11 23 -1 B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.33 - Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems Up to 125 psig (sizes 1/2 - 2). 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM D2513 — Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings. 4. ASTM D2683 — Standard Specification for Socket Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing 5. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers D. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. E. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. G. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 842 -Valves for Flammable Fluids. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 231123-2 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non -conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment. C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89. D. Use ball or gas cocks valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 4. Piping Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, rough -in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a. Natural gas pressure regulators. C. Design Data: Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 231123-3 B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, piping system, and system components. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for valves and gas pressure regulators installation instructions, spare parts lists. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform natural gas Work in accordance with NFPA 54. B. Perform work in accordance with CPC. C. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. D. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. E. Furnish shutoff valves complying with ASME B16.33 or ANSI Z21.15. F. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Design hangers and supports under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of California. 1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 231123-4 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. B. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding and backfilling of buried piping systems. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing. 1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two packing kits for each type and size valve. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME 831.9, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half -lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 4. High density polyethylene pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D-2513, Grades 2306, 3306, and 3408 with fusion joints only, similar to Driscopipe 8100- DRII Series. 2.2 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 2311 23-5 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger. 2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.4 GAS BALL VALVES A. Above and Below Grade 1/4 inch to 2 inch: Two piece, threaded ends, brass body, chrome plated brass ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, CSA certified, full port, similar to Jomar Model No. 175-LWN. B. Above Grade 1-1/4 inch to 4 inch: MSS SP 110, Class 125, two piece, threaded ends, brass body, chrome plated brass ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, CSA certified, full port, similar to Apollo Model No. 94A. 2.5 GAS COCKS A. Indoor Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends, CSA certified. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends, CSA certified. C. Similar to McDonald Model No. 10596. 2.6 GAS SEISMIC VALVES A. Provide a valve consisting of a swing check valve arrangement with an acceleration -sensitive triggering mechanism. The trip mechanism shall consist of a steel ball resting on a tapered cup -shaped support. The trip mechanism shall be factory set and sealed. A sight glass is provided so that the Open or Closed indicator can be seen, and the trip mechanism status of the valve can be easily determined. The valve assembly shall be certified by the California Sate Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 231123-6 Architect's Office, approved by the local authority, meet the requirements of ANSI Z21.70 and ASCE 25-97. See Schedule for Model number. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Coated stainless steel, fittings suitable for connection to piping system and equipment, capacity sufficient for the application, CSA Certified. Similar to Dormont Model No. 10. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install hangers and supports in accordance with ASME 831.9, ASTM F708, and MSS SP 89. B. Support horizontal piping hangers as scheduled. C. Install hangers to provide minimum 112 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 231123-7 E. Install hangers to allow 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers. H. Prime coat exposed steel pipe, fittings, hangers and supports in accordance with Division 09. Finish paint exposed steel hangers and supports in accordance with Division 09. Piping, fittings, hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. I. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. 3.5 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54 B. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings. C. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than that indicated on the drawings. D. Establish minimum separation of 1 foot from other services piping in accordance with CPC code. E. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly. F. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings. G. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density. H. Install pipe on prepared bedding. I. Route pipe in straight line. J. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. K. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe, buried 6 inches below pipe line. 3.6 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 231123-8 C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. D. Where required, bend pipe with pipe bending tools in accordance with procedures intended for that purpose. E. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. F. Size and install gas piping to provide sufficient gas to supply maximum appliance demand at pressure higher than appliance minimum inlet pressure. G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. I. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529. J. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Division 08. L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, weld, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer. Refer to Division 05. M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre -finished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 09. N. Install identification on piping systems including underground piping. Refer to Section 230553. O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. P. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements and Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Where gas appliance will be damaged by test pressure, disconnect appliance and cap piping during pressure test. Reconnect appliance after pressure test and leak test connection. C. Where gas appliance is designed for operating pressures equal to or greater than piping test pressure, provide gas valve to isolate appliance or equipment from gas test pressure. D. Pressure test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 231123-9 ou E. Where new branch piping is extended from existing system, pressure test new branch piping only. Leak test joint between new and existing piping with noncorrosive leak detection fluid or other approved method. F. When pressure tests do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest. G. Immediately after gas is applied to a new system, or a system has been restored after gas service interruption, check pipe for leakage. 1. Where leakage is detected, shut off gas supply until necessary repairs are complete. H. Do not place appliances in service until leak testing and repairs are complete. SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 23 11 23 -10 COPPER COPPER TUBING STEEL PIPE TUBING STEEL PIPE PIPE SIZE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM MINIMUM Inches HANGER HANGER HANGER ROD HANGER ROD SPACING SPACING DIAMETER DIAMETER Feet Feet Inches Inches 1/2 1 4 6 3/8 3/8 3/4 6 7 3/8 3/8 1 6 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/4 8 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8 2 8 10 3/8 3/8 2-1/2 8 10 1/2 1/2 3 8 10 1/2 1/2 4 8 10 1/2 5/8 5 8 10 1/2 5/8 6 8 10 5/8 3/4 8 8 10 3/4 3/4 END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING Specifications 23 11 23 -10 SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Refrigerant piping. 2. Unions, flanges, and couplings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers. 2. ARI 710 - Liquid -Line Driers. 3. ARI 730 - Flow -Capacity Rating and Application of Suction -Line Filters and Filter Dryers. 4. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves. 5. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME 1316.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME 816.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 3. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 4. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation REFRIGERANT PIPING Specifications 23 23 00 -1 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non -conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves or equipment. C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89. D. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of refrigeration piping system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. C. Product Data: Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping systems. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation REFRIGERANT PIPING Specifications 232300-2 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration piping, seal prior to shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. PART2: PRODUCTS A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. 2.2 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Copper Piping: Bronze. 2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation REFRIGERANT PIPING Specifications 232300-3 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 230529. E. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 230553. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. H. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow. I. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing. J. Insulate piping; refer to Section 230700. K. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft. L. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. M. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. N. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation REFRIGERANT PIPING Specifications 232300-4 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. C. Repair leaks. D. Retest until no leaks are detected. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation REFRIGERANT PIPING Specifications 232300-5 SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Duct Materials. 2. Insulated flexible ducts. 3. Single wall spiral round ducts. 4. Ductwork fabrication. 5. Duct cleaning. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 2. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Specifications 2331 00-1 B. Shop Drawings: Submit duct fabrication drawings, drawn to scale not smaller than 114 inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as Contract Documents, indicating: Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plain view. For exhaust duct systems, indicate classification of materials handled as defined in this section. 3. Fittings. 4. Reinforcing details and spacing. 5. Seam and joint construction details. 6. Penetrations through fire rated and other walls. 7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment. C. Product Data: Submit data for duct materials, duct liner, duct connectors. D. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible. B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Specifications 233100-2 B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for ducts. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality, having G90 (zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M. B. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM 8209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-1-114, aluminum connectors and Bar Stock: alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength. C. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. E. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Casco. 2. Glass Flex. 3. Glen Flex. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Flexible duct shall consist of an exterior reinforced laminated vapor barrier, 1-1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation (K = .25 @ 75 degrees F), encapsulated spring steel wire helix and impervious, smooth, non- perforated interior vinyl liner. Individual lengths of flexible ducts shall contain factory fabricated steel connection collars. Flexible fiberglass duct shall meet the requirements of NFPA No. 90A and UL 181. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. 2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Specifications 2331 00-3 4. Furnish each flexible duct section with integral clamping devices for connection to round or oval fittings. 5. Join each flexible duct section to main trunk duct through sheet metal fittings. Construct fittings of galvanized steel and equip with factory installed volume damper having positive locking regulator. Provide fittings installed in lined ductwork with insulation guard. 6. Flexible ducts shall be supported at or near mid -length with 2 inch wide, 28 gage steel hanger collar, attached to the structure with an approved duct hanger. Installation shall minimize sharp radius turns or offsets. The maximum length connecting to terminal outlets shall be 7 feet and minimum length of 5 feet. 2.3 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS 0 a C C Manufacturers: McGill AirFlow Corporation. Semco Incorporated. Tangent Air Corp. Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of galvanized steel. Construct duct with the following minimum gages: Diameter Gauge 3 inches to 14 inches 26 15 inches to 26 inches 24 28 inches to 36 inches 22 38 inches to 50 inches 20 52 inches to 84 inches 18 Construct fittings with the following minimum gages: Diameter Gauge 3 inches to 14 inches 24 15 inches to 26 inches 22 28 inches to 36 inches 20 38 inches to 50 inches 20 52 inches to 60 inches 18 Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Specifications 23 31 00 -4 62 inches to 84 inches 16 2.4 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction Standards). Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. E. Provide standard 45 -degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45 - degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90 -degree conical tee connections. F. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape. Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181A. Provide products bearing appropriate UL 181A markings. Do not provide sealing products not bearing UL approval markings. 2.5 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO ATMOSPHERE The following items shall have anti -corrosion coating. This is a spray applied, water based, single part, low VOC synthetic polymer coating embedded with #316 stainless steel applied to all interior and exterior exposed surfaces to atmosphere. This anti -corrosion coating shall meet hardness characteristics of HB -F per ASTM D3363 -92A and a cross hatch adhesion of 4B -5B per ASTM B3359-93. Humidity and water immersion resistance shall be up to a minimum 500 and 2000 hours respectively (ASTM D2247-92 and ASTM D870-02.) Corrosion durability shall be confirmed though testing to no less than 5,000 hours salt spray per ASTM 8117-90. a. Exterior, exposed ductwork b. Duct Casing C. Platform sheet metal covers and flashing Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Specifications 2331 00-5 d. Duct supports and bracing PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. C. Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller. D. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 230529. E. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Install pitot tube openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring. B. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. 3.4 CLEANING A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air flow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to other half. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. C. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Install access openings into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Specifications 233100-6 3.5 TESTING A. For ductwork designed for 3 inches w.c. above ambient, pressure test minimum 25 percent of ductwork after duct cleaning, but before duct insulation is applied or ductwork is concealed. Test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Maximum Allowable Leakage: In accordance with ICC IECC. 3.6 SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Material Schedule: AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply (Heating Systems) Steels Supply (System with Cooling Coils) Steel Return and Relief Steel General Exhaust Steel Outside Air Intake Steel Shower Area Exhaust Aluminum 100% OSA HV unit Ductwork Stainless steel B. Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule: AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Supply (System with Cooling Coils) 2 inch wg Return and Relief 1 inch wg regardless of velocity. General Exhaust 1 inch wg regardless of velocity. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Specifications 233100-7 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft Dampers 2. Combination fire -and -smoke dampers. 3. Duct access doors. 4. Volume control dampers. 5. Flexible duct connections. 6. Duct test holes. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Remote control balance system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 555 - Standard for Safety for Fire Dampers. 2. UL 555C - Standard for Safety for Ceiling Dampers. 3. UL 555S - Standard for Safety for Smoke Dampers. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 23 33 00 -1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers duct access doors and duct test holes. C. Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies and hardware used. D. Product Data: Submit for the following. Include where applicable electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1. Combination smoke/fire dampers including locations and ratings. 2. Flexible duct connections. 3. Volume control dampers. 4. Duct access doors. 5. Duct test holes. E. Product Data: For combination fire and smoke dampers submit the following: 1. Include UL ratings, dynamic ratings, leakage, pressure drop and maximum pressure data. 2. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details. 3. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-2 B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. C. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. D. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage. E. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for duct accessories. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 BACK -DRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pottorff 2. Ruskin 3. Greenheck Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-3 B. Product Description: Multi -Blade, back -draft dampers: Parallel -action, gravity - balanced, extruded aluminum. Blades, maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades linked together in rattle -free manner with 90 -degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. Furnish dampers with adjustment counter balance weight to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. Back draft damper shall be capable of adjusting to 0.025 inches of water pressure. 2.2 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin. 2. Pottorff. 3. Air Balance. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements B. Furnish and install California State Fire Marshal approved combination smoke/fire dampers where shown on plans. The dampers shall meet all the requirements for smoke dampers per the latest edition of NFPA 90A and UL standards. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be louver bladed type. Rating 1-1/2 hours for installation in one or two hour partitions. The units will incorporate a low friction design that provides overlapping. The blade edge seals will be silicone and provide a minimum Class 2 seal at 350 degrees as per UL 555S. The damper shall be capable of being remotely controlled and reset for pressurization and smoke evacuation. The fire releasing device will be a UL 33 listed HS10. Provide P150 end switch and wire to RCP -1 (remote control panel) mounted on ceiling below respective fire smoke damper. The fire releasing device must also be listed by the CSFM for use with the damper assembly. Melting fusible links are not acceptable. The dampers shall be provided in sleeves with pre -mounted motor actuators and dual position indicators for remote annunciation. The damper must be able to fail open or close for smoke, depending on the system requirements. The motors must be Belind FSLF120 or FSLF24 and have a minimum 5 year warranty. The motors must be mounted on a bracket that allows for use of slip joint connections or "Duct -mate" type connections without modification. The complete assembly must be factory cycled and tested prior to shipment. Provide suitable access for inspection and servicing of each damper. All smoke/fire dampers shall be tested by the Contractor in the presence of the field inspector and the State Fire Marshal. This test shall be performed prior to the installation of the ceilings. C. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, and UL 555S. D. Fire Resistance: 1-1/2 hours. E. Leakage Rating: Class I, maximum of 8 cfm at 4 inches wg differential pressure. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-4 2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Ruskin Manufacturing Co. 3. Duro Dyne Corp. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements: B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. C. Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, furnish minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less than 12 inches square, secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Furnish two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 4. Larger Sizes: Furnish additional hinge. 5. Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.4 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Young Regulator. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. C. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in both dimensions, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-5 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. 4. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. D. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame channel with suitable hardware. E. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, furnish oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Furnish closed end bearings on ducts having pressure classification over 2 inches wg;. F. Quadrants: Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches furnish regulator at both ends. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide. 3. Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gage galvanized steel. D. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs. per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range. 2.6 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Manufacturers: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-6 Young Regulator. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Furnish extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.7 TURNING VANES A. Square throat elbow with vanes not allowed. Provide short radius elbows with vanes per SMACNA details as indicated on the drawings. 2.8 REMOTE CONTROL BALANCING SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Power/Balance System as manufactured by United Enertech Corp. 2. Pottorff. B. The remote control system shall provide means of balancing airflow in ductwork above inaccessible ceilings. C. In these areas, the Contractor shall furnish and install Model Hi -i-3 at supply duct take -offs. The drive actuator shall be DC voltage. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install remote plate options of Model J50, J100, J150 or J300 terminal point. Color shall be white unless otherwise female outlet. Plenum rated cables are capable of lengths up to 1000 feet. E. The Contractor shall connect RJ -1 plenum rated cable from the damper to the specified. Model J300 has zinc plated steel faceplate. F. The balancing shall be achieved with a hand held power pack, utilizing an RJ -11 connector. Contractor shall turn over the hand held power packs to the Owner after balancing is complete. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation. C. Verify ducts and equipment installations are ready for accessories. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-7 D. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 3.2 INSTALLATION. A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 233100 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide a volume control for each grille and diffuser and in all other locations necessary to properly balance the system. C. Quadrants on insulated ducts shall be mounted on sheet metal brackets, set flush with the insulation. D. Install back -draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated on Drawings. Back draft dampers are not required for the fans with continuous operation and kitchen exhaust fans. E. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations Spaced every 50 feet of straight duct. 2. Upstream of each elbow. 3. Before and after each combination fire and smoke damper. F. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access. Review locations prior to fabrication. Mark access doors for fire and smoke dampers on outside surface, with minimum 1/2 inch high letters reading: FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER. G. Install temporary duct test holes required for testing and balancing purposes. Cut or drill in ducts. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. H. Install combination fire and smoke dampers at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A. 2. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running horizontally. 3. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening. 4. Handle damper using sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades, actuator, or jack shaft. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-8 5. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed. I. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. J. Provide remote control balancing system for balancing dampers located in hard ceilings. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate re -setting of combination/smoke fire dampers to Owner's representative. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications 233300-9 SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Centrifugal fans (utility fan) 2. Downblast centrifugal roof fans. 3. Ceiling fans. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. 2. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 4. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 5. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. C. American Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 1060 - Air -to -Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification Equipment Program. D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC FANS Specifications 23 34 00 -1 NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: UL 705 - Power Ventilators. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings, weights, ductwork and accessory connections. C. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturer's instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC FANS Specifications 233400-2 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for fans. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL FAN (UTILITY SET) A. Manufacturer: 1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Greenheck Corp. 3. ACME Engineering & Manufacturing Corp. B. General: 1. Utility fan shall include housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings and drives, belt -guard, and waterproof enclosure, as a factory assembled unit. Discharge arrangement as shown on drawings. 2. All fans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and the Certified Ratings Program. 3. Capacities and performance shall be as specified on drawings. See equipment schedule for details. C. Housing 1. Fan housing shall be constructed of heavy -gauge steel with the side sheets fastened to scroll sheets with lock seam. A stiffener bead shall reinforce the sides and top of discharge. 2. Inlet collars shall extend beyond the fan housing to provide uninterrupted duct connection. Inlet collars shall be round with slip joint type connections. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC FANS Specifications 233400-3 3. Cutoffs and aerodynamically spun inlet cones shall be designed to provide for the smooth air flow through the fan with a minimum of turbulence. 4. Motor and bearings supports shall be adjustable in design and be constructed of heavy welded steel. 5. Provide a drain connection in housing for vertical discharge applications. D. Fan Wheels: Utility sets shall be steel centrifugal forward curved type, non -overloading flat blade type wheel as indicated in equipment schedule. 2. All blades shall be continuously welded to the backplate and deep spun inlet shroud. 3. Wheel hubs shall be keyed and securely attached to the fan shaft. 4. All wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at factory after assembly. 5. Fan shafts shall be solid AISI C-1040 ground and polished steel. Close tolerance shall be maintained where shaft makes contact with bearings and fan wheel hub. All shafts shall have factory applied rust -preventive coating. E. Bearings: Shall be self -aligning, grease lubricated, pillow block type. A contact seal shall be provided for grease retention and protection from contaminates. Bearings shall provide a minimum life of 200,000 hours at maximum operating conditions. F. Drives: Shall be V -belt designed for 150% of motor horsepower and be complete with variable pitch motor drives. An exchange of sheaves and belts shall be supplied at no additional charge if required for air balance. G. Accessories: Shall be as noted on drawings. 2.2 DOWNBLAST CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FANS A. Manufacturers: Loren Cook Company. 2. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. 3. Greenheck Corp. 4. Penn Ventilation. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC FANS Specifications 233400-4 B. Fan Unit: Downblast type. V -belt drive, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; aluminum wire bird screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets. Housing to be provided with epoxy power coat with UV top coat for salt spray environment. C. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: Open drip proof. E. Roof Curb: 12 inch construction with continuously welded seams, and factory installed nailer strip. F. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non -fusible, in fan housing for thermal overload protected motor, NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure. G. Accessories: 1. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked. 2.3 CEILING FANS A. Manufacturers: 1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. 3. Greenheck Corp. 4. Penn Ventilation. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Centrifugal Fan Unit: Direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge opening, integral outlet duct collar. Discharge position convertible by moving interchangeable panels. C. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing or Fan mounted toggle switch for thermal overload protected motor. D. Grille: Aluminum. E. Wheel: Centrifugal forward curved type constructed of injection molded or polypropylene resin. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC FANS Specifications 233400-5 F. Motor: Open drip proof type with permanently lubricated sealed bearings and thermal overload protection. G. Accessories: See equipment schedule on drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Secure roof fans with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb or structure. B. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof exhaust. C. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from ceiling fans and as indicated on Drawings. D. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. E. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain. F. Install backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans. G. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer's field services. B. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of two days to start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC FANS Specifications 233400-6 B. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC FANS Specifications 233400-7 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Diffusers. 2. Registers 3. Grilles. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. C. Test Reports: Rating of air outlet and inlet performance. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Specifications 23 37 00 -1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for air outlets and inlets. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat Air Products. 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Type: Square, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi -core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree four-way pattern. C. Frame: To match ceiling type. D. Fabrication: Steel or Aluminum with baked enamel off-white finish. E. Accessories: Radial opposed -blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.2 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat Air Products. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Specifications 233700-2 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, vertical or horizontal face. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting. D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel finish. Note: Contractor shall use aluminum type for locker/shower area. E. Damper: Integral, gang -operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans. F. Gymnasiums: Furnish front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to be immobile. 2.3 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat Air Products. 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, double deflection. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting and gasket. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Specifications 233700-3 D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel. Note: Contractor shall use aluminum type for locker/shower area. E. Damper: Integral, gang -operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.4 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat Air Products. 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting. D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel. E. Damper: Integral, gang -operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. F. Gymnasiums: Furnish front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to be immobile. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify inlet and outlet locations. C. Verify ceiling or wall systems are ready for installation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Specifications 233700-4 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. B. Install balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or not dampers are furnished as part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly. Refer to Section 233300. C. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 09. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Specifications 233700-5 SECTION 23 40 00 HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Disposable panel filters. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air - Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. C. Military Standardization Documents: 1. MIL MIL -STD -282 - Filter Units, Protective Clothing, Gas -Mask Components, and Related Products: Performance -Test Methods. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 586 - High -Efficiency. Particulate, Air Filter Units. 2. UL 867 - Electrostatic Air Cleaners. 3. UL 900 - Air Filter Units. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ARI 850 Section 7.4. B. Dust Spot Efficiency: Plus or minus 5 percent. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on filter media, filter performance data, dimensions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES Specifications 23 40 00 -1 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for operation, changing, and periodic cleaning. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Camfil Farr. 2. American. 3. Burke. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Media: UL 900 Class 2, fiber blanket, factory sprayed with flameproof, non -drip, non-volatile adhesive. 1. Nominal Size: As required by unit manufacturer. 2. Thickness: 2 inch. C. Performance Rating: 1. Face Velocity: 500 fpm 2. Initial Resistance: 0.10 inch wg 3. Recommended Final Resistance: 0.50 inches wg. D. Casing: Cardboard -frame with perforated metal retainer. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets to prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES Specifications 234000-2 B. Do not operate fan system until temporary filters are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES Specifications 234000-3 SECTION 23 55 00 FUEL -FIRED HEATERS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fuel fired packaged air units. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for hangers for placement by this section. 2. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for vibration isolators for placement by this section. 3. Section 23 11 23 - Facility Natural -Gas Piping: Product requirements for natural gas piping connected to gas-fired heaters. 4. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for flexible duct connections. 5. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical connections specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 2. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 3. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 4. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED HEATERS Specifications 23 55 00 -1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and locations and sizes of field connections. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature and data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit Indicate rigging and assembly. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of thermostats or other products not mounted on unit. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Municipality of Newport Beach standards. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept heaters and controls on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED HEATERS Specifications 235500-2 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five-year manufacturer warranty for heat exchanger. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two throwaway filters for unit. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 FUEL FIRED PACKAGED AIR UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Reznor, Model SDH. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Self-contained, indoor, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet and supply fan assembly, with separated combustion gas furnace, minimum 81 % efficiency, unit designed for ceiling suspension. C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access -doors, glass fiber insulation and reflective liner. D. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with belt drive, variable pitch motor pulley. E. Filter: 1 inch thick permanent washable type, located to filter air before fan. F. Gas Fired Duct Furnace Units: 1. Heat Exchanger: Type 409 stainless steel welded construction. 2. Gas Burner: a. Reznor Tcore heat exchanger and single burner combustion system. b. Gas valve, two stage provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation, safety pilot, manual set (On - Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric valve. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED HEATERS Specifications 235500-3 C. Multi -try direct spark ignition. d. Furnace shall be equipped with all required safety elements including high temperature switch, condensate drain, condensate drain blockage shut -down switch and heat exchanger high temperature shutdown. e. Non -corrosive combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor. f. Gas furnace to be arranged for ducted inlet combustion air and fuel gas exhaust. Provide a concentric adapter at roof penetration. 3. Gas Burner Safety Controls: a. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. b. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation. C. Vent safety shutoff sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation, manual reset. d. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de - energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature, automatic resets. G. Dampers: 1. Option AR8 factory mounted air inlet side of cabinet. 2. Dampers: Two position outside air damper. Outside air damper fail to closed position. 3. Gaskets: Fit dampers with edge gaskets, maximum leakage 5 percent at 2 inches wg pressure differential. 4. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil. H. Controls: Adjustable, room thermostat, low voltage, to control heater stages in sequence with delay between stages and ventilation cycle to maintain space temperature setting. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED HEATERS Specifications 235500-4 B. Verify space is ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with gas fired units to NFPA 54. B. Installation - Natural Gas Piping: 1. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. 2. Connect natural gas piping to unit, full size of unit gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner service. 3. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 23 11 23. a. Strainer. b. Pressure gage. C. Shutoff valve. d. Pressure reducing valve. C. Install vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211 and manufacturer's instructions. D. Install fuel fired packaged air units with vibration isolation. Refer to Section 23 05 48. E. Provide hangers and supports for suspended units. Refer to Section 23 05 29. F. Provide connection to electrical power systems. Refer to Section 26 05 03. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FUEL FIRED HEATERS Specifications 235500-5 SECTION 23 81 03 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SMALL CAPACITY PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Packaged rooftop air conditioning unit. 2. Roof curb. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260503 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical connection to units. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air - Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 3. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-1 2. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) - Ratio of net cooling capacity in Btuh to total rate of electric input in watts under designated operating conditions. B. Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) - Total cooling output of an air conditioner during its normal annual usage period for cooling (in Btu) divided by total electric energy input during the same period (in Wh). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough -in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Controls. 8. Accessories. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit start-up report. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360. B. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. D. Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum EER and SEER prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360. E. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500. F. Perform Work in accordance with State of California standard. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect units from damage by storing off roof until roof mounting curbs are in place. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs with roof structure, roof deck and roof membrane installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for compressors. C. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for heat exchangers. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish two sets of filters for each unit. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Specifications PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-3 York International Unitary Products Group. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. Note: Basis of design is York as directed by the District. Contractor shall obtain permission from the District prior to pursuing substitutions under Division 01 (see Drawing -Equipment Schedule). If contractor submits on alternates, he shall assume responsibility for any and all necessary structural, electrical, plumbing, architectural and HVAC modifications, and coordinate such. B. General: The YORK'S AffinityM package unit shall be a fully factory assembled, pre- tested, single -piece heating and cooling unit designed for outdoor mounted installation. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, Puron refrigerant charge (R -410A), and special features required prior to field start-up. The two stage gas fired heaters have aluminized steel tubular heat exchangers and spark to pilot ignition. The unit wiring shall be both numbered and color coded. The entire unit shall be manufactured in a facility certified to ISO 9001 standards, and the cooling performance shall be rated in accordance with DOE and ARI test procedures. The heating performance shall be rated to DOE and GAMA test procedures. Units shall be CSA listed and classified to ANSI Z21.47/CAN/CSA 2.3 standards and UL 1995/CAN/CSA No. 236-M90 conditions. Outdoor sound ratings on sizes 024 and 060 shall be as low as 81 dB. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel, with exterior surfaces coated with a non -chalking, powdered paint finish, certified at 1000 hours salt spray test per ASTM -6117 standards. The unit top shall be a single piece "Water Shed" design, with drip edges and no -seam corners to provide optimum water integrity. Unit shall have a rigidly mounted condenser coil guard to provide protection from objects and personnel after installation. Unit shall have anti -corrosion coating. This is a spray applied, water based, single part, low VOC synthetic polymer coating embedded with #316 stainless steel applied to all interior and exterior surfaces, internal components, refrigerant lines and surface areas associated to the condenser section external cabinets and base rails. This anti -corrosion coating shall meet hardness characteristics of HB -F per ASTM D3363 - 92A and a cross hatch adhesion of 4B -5B per ASTM B3359-93. Humidity and water immersion resistance shall be up to a minimum 500 and 2000 hours respectively (ASTM D2247-92 and ASTM D870-02.) Corrosion durability shall be confirmed though testing to no less than 5,000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90. All airstream interior surfaces shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2 -in. thick, 1 Ib density foil -faced cleanable insulation. Insulation shall be bonded with a thermosetting resin (8 to 12% by weight nominal, phenol formaldehyde typical), and coated with an acrylic or other material that meets the NFPA 90 flame retardance requirements and has an "R" value Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-4 C. Fans: of 3.70. Insulation shall also be encapsulated with panel design or tape edges ensuring secure fit. 4. Cabinet panels shall be "large' size, easily removable for servicing and maintenance, with built-in lift handles. Unit shall be built on a formed, "Super -Structure" design base pan, with embossments at critical points to add strength, rigidity and aid in minimizing sound. Full perimeter base rails shall be provided to assure reliable transit of equipment, overhead rigging, for truck access and proper sealing on roof curb applications. Base rails shall be removable, when required, to lower unit height. Filters shall be furnished and be accessible through a removable access door, sealed airtight. 5. Return air filters shall be accessible through a dedicated hinged access panel and be on a slide -out track using standard size filters. Filter shall be standard off the shelve sizes and be the size per cabinet. Capability for 2 or 4 inch filters shall be on all sizes. 6. Holes shall be provided in the base rails (minimum 16 gage) for rigging shackles and level travel and movement during overhead rigging operations. 7. Fork lift slots shall be available from three sides of the unit (end and 2 sides) for sizes 03-14 and two sides of the unit (end and side) for other sizes. 8. Unit shall have a factory -installed internally sloped condensate drain pan, providing a minimum '/4 -in. -14 NPT connection to prevent standing water from accumulating. Pan shall be fabricated of high impact polycarbonate material and shall slide out for cleaning and or maintenance. Pan shall be fabricated of epoxy powder coated steel for other sizes. All drain pans conform to ASHRAE 62-89 self -draining provisions. 9. Unit shall have standard thru-the-bottom power and control wiring connection capability. Indoor blower (evaporator fan): a. Centrifugal supply air blower shall be direct drive design. b. Fan wheel shall be made from steel with a corrosion resistant finish. It shall be a dynamically balanced, double -inlet type with forward -curved blades, dynamically balanced to operate smoothly throughout the entire range of operation. C. The indoor fan system (blower wheels, motors, belts, and both bearings) shall be "Slip Track" (Slide -out) design for easy removal and cleaning. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-5 d. Evaporator -fan motors shall be continuous operation, open drip - proof. Bearings shall be sealed, permanently lubricated for longer life and no maintenance. 2. Outdoor blower (Condenser Fan Assembly) a. The outdoor fan shall be of the direct -driven propeller type, with corrosion -resistant aluminum blades riveted to corrosion -resistant steel supports. They shall be dynamically balanced and discharge air upwards. b. Condenser -fan motors shall be totally enclosed, thermally protected, and be of a shaft down design to protect from direct contact from harsh environments. 3. Induced -draft blower shall be of the direct -driven, single inlet, forward - curved, centrifugal type. It shall be made from aluminized steel with a corrosion -resistant finish and shall be dynamically balanced. D. Compressor(s): E. Coils: Fully hermetic type, direct drive, internally protected with internal high- pressure relief and over temperature protection. The hermetic motor shall be suction gas cooled and have a voltage range of + or - 10% of the unit nameplate voltage. 2. Factory mounted on rubber grommets with internal isolation and sound muffling to minimize vibration and noise, and be externally isolated on a dedicated, independent mounting. 3. Be mounted on dedicated mounting plate to ensure secure design and reduced sound levels. Evaporator and condenser coils shall be copper tube/copper fin with all joints brazed. 2. Condenser and evaporator coils shall be single slab, single pass design to facilitate easy coil cleaning. Composite coils or coils that require unit top panels removed shall be unacceptable. 3. Coils shall be leak tested at 170 psig and pressure tested at 1875 psig. 4. Evaporator coil shall be of the direct expansion, blow through design. 5. Condenser coil shall be draw through design F. Heating Section: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-6 Heat exchanger and exhaust system shall be constructed of aluminized steel and shall be designed with induced draft combustion with post purge logic and redundant main gas valve. 2. Heat Exchanger: a. The standard aluminized heat exchanger shall be of the tubular - section type constructed of T1-40 aluminized steel for corrosion resistance and allowing minimum mixed air entering temperature of 40 IF. 3. Burners shall be of the in -shot type constructed of aluminum -coated steel. 4. All gas piping shall enter the unit at a single location. Gas entry shall be capable through side or bottom for unit. 5. All factory -installed orifices are for operation up to 2,000 feet of altitude. For altitudes between 2,000 ft and 7,000 ft, a factory certified kit shall be furnished for field installation. 6. The integrated gas controller (IGC) board shall include gas heat operation fault notification using an LED (light -emitting diode). 7. Unit shall be equipped with anti -cycle protection with one short cycle on unit flame rollout switch or 4 continuous short cycles on the high- temperature limit switch. Fault indication shall be made using an LED. 8. The IGC board shall contain algorithms that modify evaporator -fan operation to prevent future cycling on high-temperature limit switch. 9. The LED shall be visible without removal of control box access panel. 10. Gas burner tray, when disconnected, shall easily slide out for maintenance. G. Refrigerant Components: Each refrigerant circuit shall include: Balanced port thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) with removable power element. 2. Solid core refrigerant filter driers with pressure ports. 3. Refrigerant pressure gage ports and connections on suction, discharge, and liquid lines. 4. Independent fixed orifice expansion devices. 5. Filter/strainer to eliminate any foreign matter. H. Filter Section: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-7 Standard filter section shall consist of factory -installed 2 -in. thick disposable fiberglass filters and shall be on a dedicated slide out track to easily facilitate access and replacement. 2. Filter section shall use standard size filters and be of common sizes within cabinet sizes. 3. Standard 2 -in. filter rack shall be field convertible to 4 -in. by removing a spacer rack. I. Operating Characteristics: Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125 F ambient outdoor temperature per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210 (03-12 sizes). 2. Unit with controls will operate in cooling down to an outdoor ambient temperature of 0° F. Electro -mechanical shall operate down to 40 F. 3. Unit shall be provided with fan time delay to prevent cold air delivery in Heating mode. J. Electrical Requirements: All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location — side or bottom. K. Motors: Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection. 2. Evaporator fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and inherent automatic -reset thermal overload protection or manual reset calibrated circuit breakers. Evaporator motors are designed specifically for Carrier and do not have conventional horsepower (hp) ratings listed on the motor nameplate. Motors are designed and qualified in the "air -over" location downstream of the cooling coil and carry a maximum continuous bhp rating that is the maximum application bhp rating for the motor; no "safety factors" above that rating may be applied. 3. All evaporator fan motors 5 hp and larger shall meet the minimum efficiency requirements as established by the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT), effective October 24, 1997. 4. Totally enclosed condenser -fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings, and inherent automatic -reset thermal overload protection. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-8 5. Induced -draft motor shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and inherent automatic -reset thermal overload protection. L. Special Features: 1. Full Perimeter Roof Curbs (Vertical): a. Formed of 14 -gage galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and shall be capable of supporting entire unit weight. Shall be interlocking design. b. Permits installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit on the curb. Field assembly required. C. Shall be available in both 11 -in. height if standard curb. d. External vibration isolator required that meets the 2010 CMC. See equipment schedule on drawings where required. e. Curb shall be fabricated by "ProVent". 2. Economizer/Power Exhaust: See Equipment Schedule on drawings. Economizer Power Exhaust shall be by "ProVent". PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Roof Curb: 1. Assemble roof curb. 2. Install roof curb level. 3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing with Section 23 05 29. 4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb. B. Install units on vibration isolators, as indicated on equipment schedule. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 238103-9 C. Connect units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. Refer to Section 23 33 00. D. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to condensate drainage system. E. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. F. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. G. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories. 3.3 INSTALLATION - NATURAL GAS HEATING SECTION A. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. B. Connect natural gas piping to unit, full size of unit gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner service. C. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 23 11 23. 1. Strainer. 2. Pressure gage. 3. Shutoff valve. 4. Pressure reducing valve. D. Install natural gas piping accessories above roof. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer's field services. B. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout. 3.5 CLEANING A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. C. Install new throwaway filters in units at Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 23 81 03 -10 B. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING Specifications UNITS — SMALL CAPACITY 2381 03-11 SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT -TYPE AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Split type cooling only units. (Ductless type). 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 210/ - Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. ANSI/NFPA 90A — Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Indicate refrigerant, drain and electrical rough -in connections on shop drawings or product data. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 01. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions and maintenance and repair data. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site. B. Store and protect products. C. Protect finished cabinets from physical damage by leaving factory packing cases in place before installation and providing temporary covers after installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Specifications 23 81 26 -1 B. Provide ten years manufacturer's warranty on refrigeration compressor. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL MOUNTED DUCTLESS TYPE SPLIT SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Mitsubishi. 2. Carrier. 3. Toshiba. 2.2 WALL MOUNTED DUCTLESS TYPE SPLIT SYSTEMS — MANUFACTURED UNITS A. The air conditioning system shall be split type system. The system to consist of a slim silhouette, compact wall mounted packaged evaporator section and matching air cooled outdoor unit. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. All wiring to be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). The units shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210 and bear the ARI label. Provide manufacturer's precharged refrigerant tubing. Add R -410a refrigerant as needed. System SEER shall meet or exceed the latest CEC Standards. B. Indoor Unit: The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and wired. The casing shall have a baked enamel finish. The evaporator fan shall be a high performance, forward curve line flow fan direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on permanently lubricated bearings. An adjustable change vane shall be provided with the ability to direct the air flow from horizontal to vertical. An adjustable guide vane shall be provided to manually change the air direction from left to right. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to copper tubing. The tubing shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan with drain shall be provided under the coil. C. Outdoor Unit: The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Outdoor unit shall be a heat pump or cooling only unit; see Schedule on drawings for type used. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. The unit shall be furnished with a direct drive, propeller type fan arranged for horizontal discharge. The motor shall have inherent protection, be of the permanently lubricated type and resiliently mounted for quiet operation. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. The compressor shall be of the high-performance rotary type with accumulator and internal thermal overloads. The compressor shall be mounted so as to avoid the transmission of vibration. Refrigerant flow from the condenser to be controlled by means of a capillary tube. The condenser coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to copper tubing. The coil shall be protected with a guard. The unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the matching indoor unit. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Specifications 238126-2 D. Controls: The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessor sections. One microprocessor shall be factory wired and located within the indoor unit. It shall have the capability of sensing room temperature and indoor coil temperature; receive and process commands from the thermostat; and control the outdoor unit. The thermostat shall be hardwired thermostat Model PAR 21 MAA and shall include automatic ON/OFF timer; liquid crystal display; "I FEEL" control mode which adjusts temperature by tapping the button that describes the present condition - "Too Cool", "Too Warm", or "OK". The optimum temperature set this way is memorized for immediate recall whenever the system is used again. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power interruption. E. Special Features (Field Installed): Internal (18K and larger units only) condensate pump shall remove condensate from the drain pan when gravity drainage cannot be used. Float control shall be in the condensate sump to shut unit down in case of pump malfunction. Pump shall be a "Sauermann" type. Provide secondary power connection (as scheduled) to condensate pump. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION — FAN COIL UNIT A. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to condensate drainage system. B. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26. C. Install valves and piping specialties as indicated on Section 23 33 00 and manufacturer's instructions. D. Install Work in accordance with State of California standards. 3.3 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A. Install refrigerant piping from fan coil unit to condensing unit. Refer to Section 23 23 00. B. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. C. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. D. Install control wiring between fan coil unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories per manufacturer's instructions. E. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26. F. Install Work in accordance with State of California standards. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Specifications 238126-3 3.4 CLEANING A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. C. Install new throwaway filters in units at Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate fan coil unit operation and maintenance. C. Demonstrate starting, maintenance, and operation of condensing unit. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Do not operate fan coil units until filters are in place, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Specifications 23 81 26 -4 SECTION 26 00 60 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical Demolition: Selective removal and disposal of interior and exterior components of existing electrical systems not to remain for completed Project, as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Demolition Work shall include complete demolition of components and shall include all buried and concealed items, their supports, coverings and adjoining finishes. 2. Demolition shall include terminating and labeling of conductors and removal of circuit overload protection devices and relabeling of panel board circuit diagrams and other such informational aids. 3. Extent of demolition is only indicated generally on Drawings and shall not be considered as the complete scope of demolition necessary. Conditions indicated are based on limited surveys of existing conditions. Deviations and conditions which could not be reasonably anticipated shall be governed by provisions in the Conditions of the Contract pertaining to unforeseen conditions. B. Electrical Components to be Demolished: Lighting fixtures: ceiling -mounted, as indicated on Drawings. 2. Power outlets and related conductors, including devices, outlet boxes and as indicated on Drawings. 3. Fire, signaling devices, and related conductors, as indicated on Drawings. C. Electrical Demolition due to Reconfiguration of Electrical Systems: Removal, disposal and reconfiguration of electrical components in order to keep existing systems operable, due to the following. Removal of partitions, walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. 2. Penetrations through partitions, walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Demolition Specifications 260060-1 D. Electrical Demolition to Eliminate Interferences: Removal disposal and reconfiguration of electrical components in order to eliminate conflicts of existing components to remain, due to the following. Interference with new electrical components provided under this Project. 2. Interference with new, added partitions, walls, floors and ceilings. 3. Interference with access for Work under this Contract, including structural, architectural, plumbing, HVAC and fire protection Work, whether or not indicated on Drawings, as necessary. 4. Interference with required clearances between and around components remaining and new components. E. Maintenance of Service: Maintain electrical power and signal services in full operation and protect systems against damage and disruption. Provide temporary services around Project area as necessary. F. Patching and Refinishing: Restore surfaces damaged due to electrical demolition, if not otherwise indicated or accomplished by Work described elsewhere in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Barriers, barricades, signs and temporary services. B. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board: Refinishing of surfaces. C. Section 099100 - Painting: Refinishing of surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Electrical Demolition: Submit proposed schedule for electrical demolition for review prior to commencing demolition Work. Indicate types and extent of service interruptions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Investigation: Before submission of schedule of electrical demolition, Contractor shall obtain from Owner all existing record drawings of electrical systems and shall conduct field inspections and tests as necessary to determine and confirm existing conditions of electrical systems in locations involving both electrical and general demolition Work. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Demolition Specifications 260060-2 B. Relationship to Existing Construction: Maintain and re -use existing conduit system serving fire alarm system in place and operational as far as practicable. 2. Owner will maintain conditions existing at the time of bidding in so far as practicable. However, variations within Project area may occur due to Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to the start of electrical demolition Work. 3. Protect building occupants and existing Work remaining in place. See Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for detailed requirements. 4. Repair and restore to original sound condition all items or portions of existing construction affected by electrical demolition Work. C. Coordination: Coordinate and sequence demolition with Owner to minimize disruption to Owner's continuing operations. Meet with Owner to review schedule and sequence of demolition which will interrupt electrical system operations and otherwise disrupt continuing operations in the facility. 2. Schedule review(s) a minimum of seven (7) working days before intended date of service interruption(s). 3. Do not interrupt electrical system operations without the written approval of the Owner. D. Termination and Disruption of Electrical Systems: Contractor shall make arrangements for temporary deactivation of services. Deactivation periods: Keep deactivation periods to a minimum. Use intermittent periods as directed. Schedule with Owner deactivation periods of systems to remain in service. Do not deactivate any electrical system to remain in service without the prior written approval of the Owner. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Salvageable Item Removed by Owner: Prior to start of electrical demolition work, the Owner will make reasonable efforts to remove furnishings and equipment not fixed to the building or to utility services. Refer to phasing and scheduling requirements in Section 011000 - Summary of the Project. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Demolition Specifications 260060-3 B. Salvageable Items: The Owner shall have "first right of refusal' for all salvageable items associated with the electrical demolition of systems. Prior to the start of electrical demolition work, the contractor shall obtain from the owner a list of salvageable items the owner wishes to retain. Ownership of salvageable items shall remain with Owner. unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 NON -SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Non -Salvageable Materials: All other materials, equipment, fixtures and debris become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Site. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Review of Existing Systems: Review documents and verify against existing conditions immediately prior to starting electrical demolition Work. Confirm locations of disconnects, conductors and outlets. Mark locations of concealed elements on surfaces. 2. Confirm whether circuits are active. Temporarily deactivate circuits as necessary. B. Utility Service Disconnection: Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services within demolition areas. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate capping locations on project record drawings. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protection: Conduct demolition Work and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with exit ways, roads, streets, walks, and facilities remaining operational. B. Temporary Barriers: Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. Erect and maintain temporary partitions or barriers to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to provide for continued occupancy of facility by Owner. C. Dust Control: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other approved methods to minimize amount of dust and debris rising and scattering in the air. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, staining, flooding, pollution and electrical shock. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Demolition Specifications 260060-4 D. Disposal Methods: Use methods which minimize spread of dust and debris. Do not throw materials from windows. Use enclosed chutes which dump directly into disposal containers. 2. Do not transport materials and debris through spaces to remain occupied, unless approved by Owner. When necessary to cross through occupied spaces, provide temporary covers and dust barriers. See Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. Provide plywood covers where necessary for wheeled traffic to cross existing flooring. E. Protection of Existing Construction: In removal of materials, take care not to damage construction remaining in place, salvageable materials and equipment. Repair or replace existing construction, materials and equipment damaged during demolition, to Owner's satisfaction, at no change in Contract Time and Cost. F. Remove all electrical materials completely and neatly, leaving surfaces smooth and ready for new Work. Saw -cut where cutting is necessary. See additional requirements specified in under Cutting and Patching. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Demolition Equipment: Locate demolition equipment so as not to impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors, roof or framing. B. Demolition: Proceed with demolition in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing foundation supporting structural members and finish material to remain. Coordinate activities with Work specified in other Sections. C. Removal: Remove materials to be re -installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect materials. Carefully remove, store, and protect for re- installation electrical materials and equipment identified on Drawings. 3.4 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING A. Disposal: Promptly remove from the Site all debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Dispose of debris legally. On-site burning or burying of debris will not be permitted. B. Salvage: Items of salvageable value shall be delivered to Owner at location at Project site as directed. C. Cleaning and Restoration: Clean adjacent finishes, equipment, improvements and other features of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Restore Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Demolition Specifications 260060-5 adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of the Work, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Demolition Specifications 260060-6 SECTION 26 01 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section supplements all sections of this division and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems for the Project. The work required under this division is not limited to the Electrical Drawings. Refer to Site, Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings which may designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete electrical system which includes all documents which are a part of the Contract. Work included: Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, skilled supervision necessary for, and incidental to, performing operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of the work in this section complete as shown or noted on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Refer to all sections in Division 1 Contract Requirements and Division 1 General Requirements. C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others: The electrical work includes the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished by others. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be furnished by others unless otherwise noted or detailed. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Guaranty See General Conditions and Section 01 70 00: Except as may be specified under other Sections in the specification, guarantee equipment furnished under the specifications for a period of one year, except for equipment required to have a longer guaranty period, from date of Substantial Completion against defective workmanship and material, and improper installation. Upon notification of failure, correct deficiency immediately and without cost to the Owner. Standard warranty of manufacturer shall apply for replacement of parts after expiration of the above period. Manufacturer shall furnish replacement parts to the Owner or his service agency as approved. Furnish to the Owner, through the Architect, printed manufacturer's Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 2601 00-1 warranties complete with material included and expiration dates, upon completion of project. Conform to Section 01 70 00. B. Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed and certified by a nationally recognized testing authority where UL does not have an approval. Custom made equipment must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety. Provide signage at all electrical rooms and on each exterior electrical enclosure access door or gate. Sign shall read "DANGER -HIGH VOLTAGE". Provide signage on each door or removable access panel on electrical equipment rated 600 volts and over. Sign shall read "DANGER -HIGH VOLTAGE". C. Codes and Regulations: Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL National Fire Protection Association - NFPA American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM American National Standards Institute - ANSI California Electrical Code - CEC California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Subchapter 5 California Building Code State & Municipal Codes in Force in the Specific Project Area Occupational Safety & Health Administration - OSHA California State Fire Marshal - CSFM The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer to the Publications, Standards, ordinances and codes, listed above. In the case where the codes have different levels of requirements the most stringent rules shall apply. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Codes, Permits, and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent shall apply unless variance is approved. a. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise specified. b. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the Work. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 260100-2 E. Shop Drawings: See Section 01 33 00 for additional requirements. Time Schedules for Submission and Ordering: The Contractor shall prepare, review and coordinate his schedule of submissions carefully, determining the necessary lead time for preparing, submitting, checking, ordering and delivery of materials and equipment for timely arrival. The Contractor shall be responsible for conformance with the overall construction schedule. Submittals will be checked for general compliance with specifications only. The Contractor shall be responsible for deviations from the drawings or specifications and for errors or omissions of any sort in submittals. Submit a complete list of materials and equipment proposed for the job, including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers. 5. Shop drawings shall be submitted in completed groups of materials (i.e., lighting fixtures or panelboards). The Contractor shall add and sign the following paragraph on equipment and materials submitted for review. "It is hereby certified that the equipment and material shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into the project; is in compliance with the Contract Drawings and specifications and can be installed in the allocated spaces". Failure to add the above written statement for compliance will result in return of submittals to be reviewed. a. Bind catalog cuts, plate numbers, descriptive bulletins and drawings, 11" x 17" or smaller, in sets with covers neatly showing titles. b. The Contractor shall verify dimensions of equipment and be satisfied as to Code compliance for fit prior to submitting shop drawings for approval. C. Where current limiting devices are specified, submit technical data to substantiate adequate protection of equipment cascaded downstream. Submittals shall not be reviewed unless supporting calculations and data are submitted therewith. d. Include complete catalog information such as construction, ratings and insulation systems, as applicable. e. For any material specified to meet UL or trade standards, furnish the manufacturer or vendor's certification that the material furnished for the work does in fact equal or exceed such specifications. Reference listings to the specifications' Sections and Article to which each is applicable. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 260100-3 g. Equipment Floor Plans: After approval of material is secured, prepare a floor plan of each electrical communication, and voice/data equipment room, drawn to scale at 1/2 inch equals 1 foot and submit for approval prior to rough -in in the same manner as for shop drawings. The layout drawings shall be exact scale. Equipment dimensions shall not exceed those indicated on the drawings. If proposed equipment exceeds these dimensions, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate all equipment arrangement within the room with all affected trades to provide all code clearances and proper arrangements prior to rough -in. Equipment that grossly exceeds the space allocated and would require an increase in room size is not acceptable. 6. Contractor shall prepare coordinated drawings when required by Section 01 3300. F. Interpretations: Requests for interpretations of drawings and specifications must be made by the Contractor through the Architect. Any such requests made by equipment manufacturers or suppliers will be referred to the Contractor. G. Substitutions: Refer to General Conditions. H. Submit comprehensive material list, shop drawings and complete technical data for the following equipment and materials: General Requirements: a. Main Switchboard. b. Panelboards. C. Automatic transfer switch. d. Conduits e. Conductors, include selected insulation type. f. Fuses g. Disconnect switches. h. Pullboxes, manholes and handholes. Standard lighting fixtures, specially fabricated fixtures, ballasts and lamps, with samples and sample of standard finish available (where requested). Integrated electronic system. k. Control devices, standard and special receptacles, switches, plug strips and finish device plates. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 260100-4 Cabinets for signal and telephone system, special terminals and cabinets. M. Access panels. n. Fire alarm system. o. Security system. P. Telephone/data network system. q. Closed circuit TV system. I. Utility Service: Contractor shall verify the locations shown on the drawings and shall include extensions of lines to service locations which are acceptable to the utility companies costs levied by the serving utility must be borne by the Contractor. 2. Verify electrical, civil, architectural and structural, dimensional and other requirements with the serving utility companies. 3. Should any major modifications to the work indicated be necessary to comply with the utility requirements, notify the Architect. 4. Within five days after award of Contract, notify serving utilities that the project is under construction and furnish them the dates on which the various services will be required. J. Record Drawings: Refer to Section 01 70 00, Execution Requirements. K. Work Responsibilities: The drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired locations or arrangement of conduit runs, outlets and equipment and are to be followed. Execute the work so as to secure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations. The Contractor is responsible for the correct placing of his work. 2. Locations shown on architectural plan or on wall elevations shall take precedence over electrical plan locations, but where a major conflict is evident, notify the Architect before installing any rough -in conduit underground or above ground. 3. In the event changes in the indicated locations or arrangement are necessary due to developed conditions in the building construction or rearrangement of furnishings or equipment, such changes shall be made without extra cost. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 2601 00-5 4. Verify dimensions and the correct location of Owner -Furnished equipment before proceeding with the roughing -in of connections. 5. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work carefully check and verify dimensions and sizes with the drawings to see that the equipment will fit into the spaces provided without violation of applicable Codes. 6. Should any changes to the work indicated on the drawings or described in the specifications be necessary in order to comply with the above requirements, notify the Architect. 7. Be responsible for coordination of coordinated drawings. 8. Replace or repair, without additional compensation, any work which does not comply with these requirements. L. Installation General: For special requirements, refer to specific equipment under these requirements. 1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specifications, do all excavating necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work. 2. Locations of Openings: Locate chases, shafts and openings required for the installation of the electrical work during framing of the structure. Do any additional cutting and patching required. Cutting or drilling in any structural member is prohibited without approval of the Architect. Furnish access panels as required. 3. Location of Sleeves: Where conduits pass through concrete walls, suspended slabs or metal deck floors, install sleeves of adequate size to permit installation of conduit. Sleeves shall be installed prior to pouring of concrete and shall have ends flush with the wall or extend 2 inches above floor surfaces. Verify locations. 4. Type of Sleeves: Sleeves shall be steel pipe or galvanized sheet steel. 5. Finish Around Sleeves: Rough edges shall be finished smooth. Space between conduit and sleeves where conduit passes through exterior walls shall be sealed to permit movement of conduit, but prevent entrance of water. Space between conduit and sleeves where conduit passes through fire rated interior walls and slabs shall be sealed with approved materials to provide a fire barrier conforming to the requirements of the governing authorities having jurisdiction, using UL Approved Firestopping Systems. 6. Wherever conduit extends through roof, install flashings in accordance with drawings and details. 7. Be responsible for cutting and patching which may be required for the proper installation of the electrical work. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 260100-6 8. Protect work, materials and equipment cause whatever and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Storage outdoors shall be weather protected and shall include space heaters to prevent condensation. Provide for the safety and good condition of all work until final acceptance of the work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment before requesting final acceptance. 9. Conduit and Equipment to be Installed: Clean thoroughly to remove plaster, spattered paint, cement and dirt on both exterior and interior 10. Conduit and Equipment to be Painted: Clean conduit exposed to view in completed structure by removing plaster and dirt. Remove grease, oil and similar material from conduit and equipment by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents in preparation for paint. 11. Items with Factory Finish: Remove cement, plaster, grease and oil, and leave surfaces, including cracks and corners, clean and polished. Touch up scratched or bare spots to match finish. 12. Site Cleaning: Remove from site all packing cartons, scrap materials and other rubbish. 13. Electrical equipment and materials exposed to public and in finished areas shall be finish -painted after installation in accordance with the Painting Section. All exposed screw-type fasteners, exterior, or interior in restrooms, shall be vandal -resistant spanner type; include tool. M. Excavation, Cutting and Patching: Excavating, trenching and backfilling required for the work of this Division in accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 2. Excavating and backfilling connected with electrical work, repaving cuts and providing and maintaining protective measures for the electrical work excavation required by the governing authorities having jurisdiction shall be performed as a part of the work of this Division. 2. Verify openings indicated on the drawings. Additional cutting, patching and reinforcement of the construction of the building as required. N. Tests: Equipment and systems for which the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) has an approved or recommended procedure, shall be tested in accordance with that procedure. Test values shall equal values recommended by NETA. Copies of test reports shall be submitted as required under shop drawing submittals. 2. Resistance to ground tests shall be accomplished by a qualified independent testing firm to measure resistance to ground at grounding electrodes. Make tests before slabs or affected areas are poured in order Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 260100-7 that corrective measures, if required, may be taken. Submit a report showing the results of these measurements. If the resistances exceed values specified elsewhere or NETA test procedure recommendations, perform corrective measures required to reduce resistance to acceptable values. 3. Prior to energizing any motor, measure the service voltage for phase balance and report if unbalance exceeds 1% from mean. 4. Measure the three-phase voltage at no load and at maximum load conditions and submit to the report showing the results of these measurements. 5. Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment, conduct an operating test. Conduct the test in the presence of an authorized representative of the Architect. Demonstrate system and equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and to be free from electrical and mechanical defects. Provide systems free from short circuits and grounds and show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground not less than the requirements of the governing electric code. Test circuits for proper neutral connection. 6. Complete tests prior to final inspection of project, including corrective work based on the results of the tests. 7. Perform special tests on systems and equipment as specified herein using personnel qualified to perform such tests. 8. Submit a report showing test voltage of line to neutral on the secondaries of transformers. 9. Measure voltage on secondary side of transformers with full load connected and adjust taps to provide rated secondary voltage. 10. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for other testing requirements. O. Protection: Protect finish parts of the materials and equipment against damage during the progress of the work and until final completion and acceptance. Cover materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or marred. Keep moving parts clean, dry and lubricated. P. Cleaning Up: Upon completion of the work and at various time during the progress of the work, remove from the building all surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Division. 2. Thoroughly clean switchgear including busses, apparatus, exposed conduit, metal work including the exterior and interior, and accessories for the work of this Division, of cement, plaster and other deleterious Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 2601 00-8 materials; remove grease and oil spots with cleaning solvent; carefully wipe surfaces and scrape cracks and corners clean. 3. Thoroughly polish chromium or plated work. Remove dirt and stains from lighting fixtures. 4. Leave the entire installation in a clean condition. Q. Completion: The work will not be reviewed for final acceptance until operating and maintenance data, manufacturer's literature, panel directories and nameplates specified herein have been approved and properly posted or installed and final cleaning of equipment and premises has been completed. 2. When the installation is complete and adjustments have been made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time demonstrate that systems are completed and operating in conformance with the specifications. 3. Refer to Section 01 40 00 for other system starting requirements. R. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit complete and at one time, prior to acceptance of the installation, 4 copies of manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance of electrical equipment, including replacement parts lists. As specified in Section 01 70 00. S. Inspection and Acceptance Procedures: The Architect will submit observation reports periodically during the construction phase detailing Contract deficiencies. The Contractor is responsible for making corrections immediately. Notice of Completion of the project will not be made until all items have been corrected. T. Substantial Completion of Electrical Systems: Prior to Substantial Completion of operating electrical systems, the Contractor shall: a. Provide materials of the type and quality specified and as necessary for proper operation, tested and ready for use. b. Deliver to the Architect, the Record Drawings. C. Furnish the required Operating and Maintenance Data/Manuals. d. Clean up of the project pertaining to this Division of the work. e. After installation has been completed and adjustments made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time, demonstrate to the Architect that systems are complete and operating in conformance with Contract Documents. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 260100-9 Conduct tests required and as specified in this Division and submit test reports and corrective actions taken. g. Submission of warranties and guarantees. Substantial Completion of Work Shall be Contingent On: a. Contractor replacing defective materials and workmanship. b. Upon completion of work and adjustments made, Contractor shall conduct an operating test for each system for approval at such time as Architect directs. Conduct test in presence of authorized representative of Architect and demonstrate that systems and equipment do operate in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and are free from electrical and mechanical defects. C. Contractor shall provide the necessary training programs and instructions to the Owner's representative. Number of hours or days as required under separate Sections of these Specifications. d. Submit copies of manufacturer's instructions and maintenance of electrical equipment including replacement parts lists. Each set shall include one set of shop drawings of equipment installed. U. Submittals for Change Orders: When changes are made during the construction phase, deletions and additions shall be presented in a manner that will indicate the cost of each item of material and corresponding labor. Markup shall be then added in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions. Unit pricing shall apply in event of changes, additions and deletions to the base Contract, as follows: a. Submit a unit cost, covering one hour of labor, including all applicable supervision, nonproductive labor, burdens, benefits, insurance's, taxes, direct and indirect job expenses including drawings, engineering temporary power, warehouse, tools, equipment, clean-up, bonds, overhead and profit, charged for labor. Unit cost of labor shall be applicable for duration through completion of the project. b. Material unit costs shall be based on the latest edition of "Electrical Trade Book," published by Trade Service Publications, Inc., Unit cost shall be taken from extreme right-hand column. Labor unit quantities, for specific items as required by unit pricing and for equipment not covered by unit pricing shall be those listed in the third column from the National Electrical Contractors' Association, Inc., "NECA Manual of Labor Units." Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 26 01 00 -10 3. For material not covered by the Unit Pricing, use the latest edition of "Electrical Trade Book, extreme right hand column. This materials cost shall remain for the duration of the contract and shall apply to all phases of construction. V. The Contractor at a time convenient to the Owner shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems. The instructors shall have received factory training and shall be thoroughly familiar with the equipment installed. The operating personnel shall receive the number of days instruction as indicated in other sections. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Basic Electrical Requirements Specifications 26 01 00 -11 SECTION 26 05 03 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. B. Determine connection locations and requirements. C. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Equipment Wiring Connections Specifications 26 05 03 -1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 CORD AND PLUGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell. 2. Pass & Seymour. 3. General Electric. B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment. D. Cord Construction: Type SO multi -conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Make electrical connections. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Install cord and cap for field -supplied attachment plug. F. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Equipment Wiring Connections Specifications 260503-2 Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Equipment Wiring Connections Specifications 260503-3 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes building wire and cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for wire identification. 1.2 REFERENCES A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. CEC — California Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air -Handling Spaces. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical -Fiber Members. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. 5. Increase wire size in branch circuits to limit voltage drop to a maximum of 3 percent. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Low -Voltage Electrical Power Specifications Conductors and Cables 260519-1 B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Interior Locations: Use only, Type THHN/THWN insulation in raceway. 2. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway, metal clad cable is permitted for lighting, fixture whips not to exceed 6 feet. 3. Exterior Locations: Use Type THHN/THWN or XHHW in raceway. 4. Underground Locations: Use THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation, in raceway. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conductor sizes are based on copper. B. Aluminum conductors are not permitted 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for building wire. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required. B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. AETNA. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp. 3. Colonial Wire. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Low -Voltage Electrical Power Specifications Conductors and Cables 260519-2 2.2 2.3 4. Encore Wire. 5. General Cable Co. 6. Republic Wire. 7. Rome Cable. S. Service Wire Co. 9. Southwire. 10. Superior Essex. B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. E. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C. WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors. B. Solderless Pressure Connectors. C. Spring Wire Connectors. D. Compression Connectors. TERMINATIONS A. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller: Solderless, compression type copper. B. Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed, compression type copper, with insulating sealing collars. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Low -Voltage Electrical Power Specifications Conductors and Cables 260519-3 3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions. B. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. C. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Special Techniques --Building Wire in Raceway: Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment. E. Special Techniques - Cable: Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. F. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. G. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device, such as circuit breakers. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Low -Voltage Electrical Power Specifications Conductors and Cables 260519-4 H. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install 2 -hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars. I. For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors, transformers, and other apparatus, or when space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other, insulate for dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit. 3.4 WIRE COLOR A. General: For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. B. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number. C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded. D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase. E. Ground Conductors: For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. 2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Low -Voltage Electrical Power Specifications Conductors and Cables 260519-5 B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Low -Voltage Electrical Power Specifications Conductors and Cables 260519-6 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wire. 2. Mechanical connectors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment. B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. CEC - California Electrical Code. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Grounding and Bonding Specifications for Electrical Systems 260526-1 B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. C. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple -use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove all paint, rust, mill oils, and surface contaminants at connection points. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with IEEE 142 and 1100. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. C. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. D. Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated grounding conductor installed with feeders and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of service equipment. E. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment. F. Bond main telecommunications grounding bus to building grounding electrode system at main electrical service entrance location with 6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Grounding and Bonding Specifications for Electrical Systems 260526-2 G. Install routing for grounding conductor as short and direct as practical. H. Install routing of bonding conductors with minimum number of bends and splices. Use sweeping bends. I. Install bonding connections with listed bolts, crimp pressure connectors, clamps, or lugs. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Grounding and Bonding Specifications for Electrical Systems 260526-3 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Equipment bases and supports. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. CEC — California Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Hangers and Supports Specifications for Electrical Systems 260529-1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads. B. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel. C. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten. D. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits. 2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage) thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS A. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder -actuated anchors. B. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. 3.2 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps. 2. Concrete Surfaces: Provide expansion anchors. 3. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 4. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors. 5. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 6. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Hangers and Supports Specifications for Electrical Systems 260529-2 B. Inserts: Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC. D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers. F. Supports: Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Hangers and Supports Specifications for Electrical Systems 260529-3 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART7: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes. B. Related Sections: Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Raceway and Boxes Specifications for Electrical Systems 260533-1 with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide Schedule 40 PVC conduit. C. Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid galvanized steel D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide Schedule 40 PVC conduit. E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, pull, and junction boxes. F. In Slab Above Grade: Provide Schedule 40 PVC conduit. G. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounted outlet boxes in finished areas. H. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide aluminum conduit, intermediate metal, electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounted outlet boxes in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. I. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid galvanized steel conduit. Provide sheet - metal boxes. Provide flush mounted outlet boxes in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Raceway fittings. 5. Conduit bodies. 6. Pull and junction boxes. 7. Handholes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Raceway and Boxes Specifications for Electrical Systems 260533-2 Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. B. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03. B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Raceway and Boxes Specifications for Electrical Systems 260533-3 B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type. 2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.6 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26. D. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. 2.7 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Concrete Composite Handholes: 1. Cover: Concrete composite, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough -in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26. B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29. C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53. D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Raceway and Boxes Specifications for Electrical Systems 260533-4 3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29. H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab. L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes. Q. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations. R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Raceway and Boxes Specifications for Electrical Systems 260533-5 S. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. T. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. U. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings. B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough -in to accommodate intended purpose. C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26. D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. M. Support boxes independently of conduit. N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Raceway and Boxes Specifications for Electrical Systems 260533-6 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. B. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings. C. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Raceway and Boxes Specifications for Electrical Systems 260533-7 SECTION 260548 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes seismic restraints and other earthquake -damage -reduction measures for electrical components. It complements optional seismic construction requirements in the various electrical component Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BOCA: BOCA National Building Code. B. SBC: Standard Building Code. C. UBC: Uniform Building Code. D. Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizontal movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake. E. Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor structure, or wall that may move independent of other mobile structural elements during an earthquake 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate types, styles, materials, strength, fastening provisions, and finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used. Anchor Bolts and Studs: Tabulate types and sizes, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by ICBO Evaluation Service. B. Shop Drawings: For anchorage and bracing not defined by details and charts n Drawings. Indicate materials, and show designs and calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Specifications 26 05 48 -1 2. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachment of restraints to both structural and restrained items. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings, identifying components and listing their strengths. Indicate direction and value of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. 3. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By ICBO Evaluation Service, showing maximum ratings of restraints and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). 4. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment, including other seismic restraints, in the vicinity. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of seismic restraints certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of seismic control devices for compliance with requirements indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in California Building Code, unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing seismic engineering services, including the design of seismic restraints, that are similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Seismic Zone and Zone Factor as Defined in UBC: Zone 4, Zone Factor 0.40. B. Occupancy Category as Defined in UBC. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Seismic Hazard Exposure Group as Defined in BOCA or SBC: III. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Specifications 260548-2 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural system and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire -protection, electrical, and other building features in the vicinity. B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. B -Line Systems, Inc. 3. Erico, Inc. 4. Unistrut Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Use the following materials for restraints: 1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated. 2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel. 3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel. 2.3 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. B. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel -expansion wedge type. 1. Concrete Inserts: Steel -channel type. C. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Specifications 260548-3 D. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP -69, Type 57. E. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single -sided type is not acceptable. F. Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of anchor bolts and studs used. G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of attachment devices used. 2.4 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1 -5/8 -by -1 -5/8 -inch cross section, formed from 0.1046 - inch thick steel, with 9/16 -by -7/8 -inch slots at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs, and flange edges turned toward web. 1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 570, GR 33. 2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A 36. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and designed for use with that product. 4. Finish: Baked, rust -inhibiting, acrylic -enamel paint applied after cleaning and phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated. B. Channel -Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel brackets and bolts. C. Cable -Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc -coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable attached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service. 1. Arrange units for attachment to the braced component at one end and to the structure at the other end. 2. Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM 603. Use 49- or 133 -strand cable with a minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be resisted. D. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Electrical equipment and conduit systems. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Specifications 260548-4 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved by authorities having jurisdiction, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 3.3 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted -channel fittings to spread structural loads and reduce stresses. B. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel -type concrete inserts or use expansion anchors. C. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors. D. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. E. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion anchors. F. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with expansion anchors. G. Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through members. H. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar joists. 3.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE A. Anchor rigidly to a single mobile structural element or to a concrete base that is structurally tied to a single mobile structural element. B. Anchor panelboards, motor -control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear, transformers, unit substations, fused power -circuit devices, communication system components, and electronic signal processing, control, and distribution units as follows: Size concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base. 2. Concrete Bases for Floor -Mounted Equipment: Use female expansion anchors and install studs and nuts after equipment is positioned. 3. Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient media between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete. 4. Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment: Install to allow for resilient media where equipment or equipment -mounting channels are attached to wall. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Specifications 260548-5 5. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment manufacturer. 3.5 SEISMIC BRACING INSTALLATION A. Install bracing according to spacings and strengths indicated by approved analysis. B. Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of braced components. C. Cable Braces: Install with maximum cable slack recommended by manufacturer. D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to the structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. 3.6 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Make flexible connections in raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross expansion and seismic control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate at electrical equipment anchored to a different mobile structural element from the one supporting them. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality -control testing: B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality -control testing: C. Testing: Test pull-out resistance of seismic anchorage devices. Provide necessary test equipment required for reliable testing. 2. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post -connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to the structure. Provide temporary load -spreading members. 5. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 6. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Specifications 260548-6 If a device fails the test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. Record test results. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Seismic Controls for Electrical Work Specifications 260548-7 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Wire markers. 3. Underground Warning Tape. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Product Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved white letters on black contrasting background color. B. Letter Size: 1. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/2 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 3. 3/8 inch high letters for identifying panelboards C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Identification for Electrical Systems Specifications 26 05 53 -1 2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Split sleeve type wire markers. B. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Install identification on existing equipment to remain in accordance with this section. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting. B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. C. Service Disconnects. C. Wire Marker Installation: Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes and each load connection. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Identification for Electrical Systems Specifications 260553-2 D. Underground Warning Tape Installation: Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Identification for Electrical Systems Specifications 260553-3 SECTION 26 05 72 ACCEPTANCE TESTING PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK It is the intent of these acceptance tests to assure that all Contractor supplied equipment is operational and within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with designed specifications. A. The acceptance tests and inspections shall determine suitability for energization of switchgear and cables. B. Items that shall be checked, inspected, and tested include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Relays. 2. Power/Lighting panel boards. 3. 600V rated cable. 1.2 APPLICABLE CODES A. All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes and standards except as provided otherwise herein. 1. California Electrical Code - CEC latest 2007 Edition. 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association - NEMA. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM. 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE. 5. National Electrical Testing Association - NET A. 6. American National Standards Institute - ANSI: a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code b. Z244-1, American National Standard for Personnel Protection 7. State Codes and Ordinances. S. Insulated Cable Engineers Association - ICEA. 9. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies - AEIC. 10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 26 05 72 -1 a. Part 1910, Subpart S, 1910.30S b. Part 1926, Subpart V, 1926.950 through 1926.960 11. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA: a. ANSI/CECB, Electrical Equipment Maintenance b. CECE, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces C. ANSI/CEC, National Electrical Code 2005 Edition d. ANSI/NFPA 101, Life Safety Code e. Project Design Specification. f. Project Design Drawings. g. Manufacturer's instruction manuals applicable to each particular apparatus. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING AGENCY A. The testing firm shall be an independent testing organization, which can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment or systems evaluated by the testing firm. B. The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment devices, installations, and systems. C. The testing firm and all the testing personnel shall have been engaged in such practices for a minimum of ten years. D. The testing firm shall meet federal OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Parts 1907, 1910, and 1936. Full membership in the National Electrical Testing Association constitutes proof of such criteria. E. The lead, on site, technical person shall be currently certified by the National Electrical Testing Associate (NETA) in Electrical Power Distribution System Testing. F. Testing firm shall utilize only full-time technicians who are regularly employed by the firm for testing services. Electrically unskilled employees are not permitted to perform testing or assistance of any kind. Electricians may assist, but may not perform testing and/or inspection services. G. The testing firm shall submit proof of the above qualifications. H. The testing firm shall be an independent organization as defined by OSHA Title 29, Part 1936 and the National Electrical Testing Association. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-2 I. All instruments used by the testing firm to evaluate electrical performance shall meet NETA's Specifications for Test Instruments. (See Section 1.7 of this specification). J. The terms used herewith such as Test Agency, Testing Laboratory, or Contractor Test Company, shall be construed to mean testing firm. 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall notify the Owners Representative prior to commencement of any testing. B. Any system, material or workmanship, which is found defective on the basis of acceptance tests, shall be reported. C. The testing firm shall maintain a written record of all tests and upon completion of project, assemble and certify a final test report. D. A stable source of 60 hertz power shall be provided for testing purposes by the Contractor. Owners Representative shall witness all tests and a minimum of 14 days notice shall be provided. 1.5 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Test Instrument Calibration The testing firm shall have a calibration program that assures that all applicable test instrumentation is maintained within rated accuracy. 2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. 3. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: a. Field instruments: Analog - 6 months maximum Digital - 12 months maximum b. Laboratory Instruments 2 months C. Leased specialty equipment - 12 months (where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor) 4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. 5. Records must be kept up-to-date which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested. 6. An up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure will be maintained for each test instrument. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-3 7. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested. 1.6 TEST REPORTS A. The test report shall include the following: 1. Summary of project. 2. Description of equipment/device tested. 3. Description of test, including date, time, and duration of test. 4. Test results. 5. Conclusions and recommendations. 6. Appendix, including appropriate test forms. 7. Identification' of test equipment used. S. Signature of responsible test organization authority. 9. Signature of the person witnessing the tests. 10. Furnish five copies of the complete report to the Owners Representative no later than thirty (30) days after completion of project unless otherwise directed. 1.7 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 - OSHA. 2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council, Chapter 4. 3. Applicable State safety operating procedures. 4. NETA Safety/Accident Prevention Program. 5. Owner's safety practices. 6. National Fire Protection Association - CECE. 7. ANSI Z244.1 American National Standards for Personnel Protection. B. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de -energized except where otherwise specifically required. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-4 C. The testing firm shall have a designated safety representative on the project to supervise operations with respect to safety. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. A protective coordination study shall be performed using SKM's Dapper or equal software to select or check the selection of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios, and characteristics of associated voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings. B. The coordination study shall include all voltage classes of equipment indicated on the single line diagram drawings. The entire electrical system shall be included in the coordination study. Verify characteristics and settings of existing devices in the field and from the manufacturer. C. The time -current characteristics of the specified protective devices shall be plotted on the appropriate log -log paper. The plots shall include complete titles, representative one -line diagrams of both buildings and legends, associated relays or fuse characteristics, significant motor starting characteristics, complete parameters of transformers, complete operating bands of low voltage circuit breaker trip curves, and fuse curves. The coordination plots shall indicate the types of protective devices selected, proposed relay taps, time dial and instantaneous trip settings, cable damage curves, symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. All requirements of the current California Electrical Code shall be adhered to. Reasonable coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be maintained. Separate coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices shall be provided on a system basis. Separate curves shall be used to clearly indicate the coordination achieved for feeder breakers with downstream fuses and circuit breakers in switchgear and substations. There shall be a maximum of six protective devices per plot. D. The selection and setting of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer ratios, manufacturer, type, range of adjustment, and recommended settings. Discrepancies, problem areas, or inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the project Owners Representative's attention. E. Five copies of coordination curves and tabulated data indicating selection and settings of protective devices shall be submitted to the Owners Representative for approval. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT VERIFICATIONS, TESTS AND CALIBRATIONS GENERAL A. As part of the contract, the Contractor shall perform tests of installed work as herein specified and specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-5 B. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform such tests and inspections. C. All tests shall be performed in compliance with the recommendations and requirements of the National Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NET A), and applicable codes and standards. D. Upon completion of the tests and inspections noted in these Specifications, a label shall be attached to all serviced devices. These labels shall indicate date serviced and the service company responsible. E. The test and inspections shall determine suitability for continued reliable operation. F. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owners Representative. Provide a minimum of two weeks notice to the Owners Representative. G. Furnish the necessary equipment and personnel to perform all required tests of all wiring and connections for continuity, short circuit, and improper grounds. Included, but not limited to, the following systems: substations, air interrupting switches, low voltage main and feeder circuit breakers, interlocking controls, panelboards, distribution transformers, branch circuits. 3.2 SWITCHGEAR AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS A. Visual and mechanical inspection: Inspect for physical damage and code violations. 2. Clean interior and exterior surfaces. 3. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. 4. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints by torque wrench method. Tighten connections in accordance with industry standard torque levels. 5. Make closure attempt on locked open devices. Make opening attempt on locked closed devices. 6. Make exchange with devices operated in off -normal positions. B. Electrical tests: Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground. 2. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner to detect loose or high-resistance connections and other circuit anomalies. 3. Inspect correctness of control wiring. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-6 3.3 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER A. Visual and mechanical inspection: 1. Inspect for physical damage and connection tightness. 2. Check transformer nameplate with singleline diagram. 3. Check proper operation of grounding or shorting devices. B. Electrical tests: 1. Measure current transformer ratio by primary current injection. 2. Measure potential transformer ratio. 3. Measure insulation resistance primary -to -ground, secondary -to -ground and primary -to -secondary. 4. Verify secondary wiring connections by secondary current injection. 5. Verify transformer polarity markings. 6. Perform current transformer saturation test. Plot transformer voltage current curve. 3.4 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS - ENCAPSULATED TYPE A. Visual and mechanical inspection: 1. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation, anchorage, and grounding. 2. Clean interior and all bushing and insulator surfaces. 3. Verify proper auxiliary device operation such as fans and indicators. 4. Check tightness of accessible bolted electrical joints. Tighten connections in accordance with industry standards. B. Electrical tests: 1. Perform insulation resistance tests winding -to -winding and winding -to - ground. Apply appropriate guard circuit over all bushings. 2. Perform dielectric absorption test winding -to -winding and winding -to ground for ten (10) minutes. Compute the polarization index. 3. Perform turns ratio test between windings for all top positions. 4. Perform insulation power factor tests on all high and low -voltage windings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-7 5. Check output voltages. 3.5 PROTECTIVE RELAYS A. Visual and mechanical inspection: Inspect relays for physical damage, presence of foreign material, moisture, condition of spiral spring, disc clearance and corrosion. 2. Clean cover glass interior and relay components. 3. Check for freedom of movement, proper travel and alignment, and tightness of mounting hardware and top screws. B. Electrical test: Perform insulation resistance tests on each circuit branch to frame. 2. Perform the following tests at the settings specified by Owners Representative: a. Pickup parameters on each operating element. b. Timing at three (3) points on time dial curve. C. Pickup target and seal in units. d. Special test as required to check operation of restraint, and other elements per manufacturer's instructions. 3. Perform phase angle and magnitude contribution tests on all differential type relays after energization to vectorially prove proper polarity and connection. 4. Check polarity and correctness of control wiring. C. Relay calibration and tests: Two relay wiring tests shall be made. a. Primary circuit polarity test shall include a DC test from the current transformer to each terminal block and relay terminal. b. Relay and circuit breaker operation test by application of power from the portable relay test set. D. Relay testing shall be accomplished after completion of the switchgear installation, using standard portable test set equipment and the relay manufacturer's testing directions and parameters to determine conformance of the relay to the time-overcurrent information given in the manufacturer's performance curves and the tap settings provided by coordination study. Overcurrent relay testing shall include: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-8 1. Zero set tests. 2. Pickup tests. 3. Time -current characteristic (operation at currents 3 and 4 times the directed tap settings), and instantaneous at the directed tap setting. 4. Target and seal -in operation. E. Target differential relays shall be tested similarly, except for the following additional tests: 1. Low voltage "through -currents" of approximately "full load" and "fault" magnitudes shall be circulated in HV busses. Bus differential relays shall not trip. 2. Low voltage currents shall be circulated within the differential zones of "low -fault" and "high -fault" magnitudes. Bus differential relays shall initiate tripping momentarily. 3.6 LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Visual and mechanical inspection: 1. Inspect for physical condition. 2. Inspect alignment and grounding. 3. Perform mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on the breaker and its operating mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Perform insulation resistance test on control wiring. 5. Clean mechanism, insulating surfaces and contacts. B. Electrical tests: 1. Measure contact resistance. 2. Trip overcurrent protective device by operation of each protective device. 3. Perform an insulation resistance test phase -to -ground, phase -to -phase and across open contacts. 4. Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with Doble procedure. 5. Perform timing test with Travel Analyzer to insure proper contact overtravel and pressure. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 260572-9 3.7 CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND LESS) A. Visual and mechanical inspections: Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection. 2. Torque test cable connection. Tighten connections in accordance with industry standards. 3. Perform infrared scan of all connections under loaded conditions. B. Electrical tests: Perform insulation resistance test of each cable with respect to ground and adjacent cables. 3.8 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Visual and mechanical inspection: Inspect ground system connections for completeness and adequacy. B. Electrical tests: Perform fall -of -the -potential test per IEEE No. 81, Section 9.03 to determine the ground resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral and/or derived neutral points. C. Infrared Inspection: All doors and cover shall be removed and upon completion of test be reinstalled by testing agency technicians. 2. A load bank shall be furnished to circulate low voltage currents of 400A magnitude through each bus, main breaker and feeder breaker. After two hours infrared scans shall be made of all bus joints. Problem area shall be photographed before and after corrections. After corrections, another current test of two hours duration shall be made. Again an infrared scan shall be made to confirm correct operation. 3. Upon completion, the switchgear shall be energized at 12kV. After 4 hours, infrared scans shall be made to determine areas of excessive corona. Problem area shall be treated the same as under B., above. 4. Upon completion of infrared scans, all covers and doors shall be reinstalled. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Acceptance Testing Specifications 26 05 72 -10 SECTION 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY PART7: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes short circuit and protective device coordination study encompassing portions of electrical distribution system from normal power source or sources up to and including utility company overcurrent devices and available faculty circuits, breakers in service entrance switchboard, fuses in service entrance switchboard, main breaker in sub -distribution panels, fuses in sub -distribution panels and main breaker and feeder breaker in each panelboard. B. Related Sections: Section 26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses. 5. Section 26 28 19 - Enclosed Switches. C. The Contractor shall submit a short circuit and coordination study prepared for the electrical over -current devices to be installed under this project to assure proper equipment and personnel protection. The study shall be for the new building and re -feed of existing building. Provide arc flash study for main switchgear, unit substation, switchboard, distribution boards, motor control centers and panels. The study shall be submitted prior to or at the same time with electrical distribution equipment for review and comment. The electrical distribution equipment shop drawings will not be reviewed prior to the study submittal. D. It is the responsibility of the entity performing the Short Circuit and Coordination Study to collect all data to fully perform the study, including but not limited to engine generator data, motor data, circuit breakers, utility company short circuit, available new and existing device ratings, conductor data, transformer ratings, etc. E. The study shall present an organized time -current analysis of each protective device in series from the individual device back to the source. The study shall reflect the operation of each device during all normal and abnormal current conditions when served from the utility and from the standby electrical system. F. The short circuit and coordination study shall be submitted prior to or along with the switchgear submittal, and shall include all equipment which has an AIC Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-1 rating. The short circuit study shall reflect that all equipment with an AIC rating is properly rated for its specific application. The submitted switchgear (including all equipment which has an AIC rating) shall reflect the findings of short circuit study (i.e., the AIC ratings of the equipment shall exceed the available short circuit current and any required derating factors at each point in the system.) 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: IEEE 242 - Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Buff Book). B. National Fire Protection Association: CEC — California Electrical Code. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Complete Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study to meet requirements of CEC. B. Report Preparation: Prepare study prior to ordering distribution equipment to verify equipment ratings required. 2. Perform study with aid of computer software program. 3. Obtain actual settings for all motors for equipment incorporated into Work. 4. Calculate short circuit interrupting and, when applicable, momentary duties for assumed 3-phase bolted fault short circuit current and phase to ground fault short circuit current at each of the following: a. Switchboards. b. Distribution panelboards. C. Branch circuit panelboards. d. Each other significant equipment location throughout system. C. Report Contents: Include the following: a. Calculation methods and assumptions. b. Base per unit value selected. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-2 C. One -line diagram. d. Source impedance data including power company system available power and characteristics. e. Typical calculations. 1) Fault impedance. 2) X to R ratios. 3) Asymmetry factors. 4) Motor fault contribution. 5) Short circuit kVA. 6) Symmetrical and asymmetrical phase -to -phase and phase - to -ground fault currents. 7) Tabulations of calculation quantities and results. f. One -line diagram revised by adding actual instantaneous short circuits available. g. State conclusions and recommendations. 2. Prepare time -current device coordination curves graphically indicating coordination proposed for system, centered on conventional, full-size, log - log forms. 3. Prepare with each time -curve sheet complete title and one -line diagram with legend identifying specific portion of system covered by that particular curve sheet. 4. Prepare detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time -current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings. 5. Plot device characteristic curves at point reflecting maximum symmetrical fault current to which device is exposed. Include on curve sheets the following: a. Power company relay characteristics. b. Power company fuse characteristics. C. Medium voltage equipment protective relay characteristics. d. Medium voltage equipment protective fuse characteristics. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-3 e. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip device characteristics. f. Low voltage equipment fuse characteristics. g. Cable damage point characteristics. h. Pertinent transformer characteristics including: 1) Actual transformer full load current. 2) Actual transformer magnetizing inrush. 3) ANSI transformer withstand parameters. 4) Significant symmetrical fault current. 5) Note: Any increase in actual transformer spec to account for temperature rating or any other reason must be accounted for and noted in the study. i. Pertinent motor characteristics. j. Generator characteristics including: 1) Phase and ground coordination of generator protective devices. 2) Decrement curve and damage curve. 3) Operating characteristic of protective devices. 4) Actual impedance value. 5) Time constants. 6) Current boost data. 7) Do not use typical values for generator. k. Transfer switch characteristics. I. Other system load protective device characteristics. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications Data: Submit the following for review prior to starting study. 1. Submit qualifications and background of firm. 2. Submit qualifications of individual or individuals, Professional Engineer performing study or under whose direction the study is performed. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-4 B. Software: Submit for review information on software proposed to be used in performing study. C. Product Data: Summarize results of study in report format including the following: Single Diagram: a. Show on the single line diagram all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the overcurrent devices installed under this project. Clearly show, on the one line, the schematic wiring of the electrical distribution system. b. Also show on the single line diagram the following specific information: 1) Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, and short circuit values at each bus. 2) Breaker and fuse ratings. 3) Transformer KVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R ratios, and wiring connections. 4) Voltage at each bus. 5) Identification of each bus. 6) Conduit material, feeder sizes, length, and X/R ratios. 2. Short Circuit Study: a. Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the available short circuit and ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate the motor contribution in determining the momentary and interrupting ratings of the protective devices. b. Entire system shall be modeled under both normal and emergency power. If any closed transition transfer switches are used, normal and emergency power shall be combined. C. The short circuit study shall incorporate the actual feeder types, sizes and lengths proposed to be used by the contractor. d. The calculations may be prepared by means of a digital computer. All pertinent data and the rationale employed in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory remarks of the study. e. Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table format. Include the following: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-5 1) Device identification. 2) Operating voltage. 3) Protective device. 4) Device rating. 5) Calculated short circuit current, indicating worst-case fault current incorporating all system models as outlined above. 3. Coordination Curves: a. Prepare the coordination curves to determine the required settings of protective devices to assure selective coordination. Graphically illustrate on log -log paper that adequate time separation exists (where possible) between series devices, including the utility company upstream device. Plot the specific time -current characteristics of each protective device in such a manner that all upstream devices will be clearly depicted on one sheet. Where a switchboard or panelboard has multiple devices of different sizes, it is not necessary to plot curves for each device when coordination for one device is demonstrated graphically and it is intuitively obvious that the other devices coordinate as well. b. The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination curves: 1) Device identification. 2) Voltage and current ratio for curves. 3) 3-phase and 1 -phase ANSI damage points for each transformer. 4) No -damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. 5) Cable damage curves. 6) Transformer inrush points. 7) Maximum short circuit cutoff point. 8) Short -time withstand capability of main 480V circuit breakers. 9) Coordination between the directional overcurrent relays and the main 480V breaker. C. Develop a table to summarize the settings selected for the protective devices. Include in the table the following: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-6 1) Device identification. 2) Relay CT ratios, tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup. 3) Circuit breaker sensor rating, long-time, short -time, and instantaneous settings, and time bands. 4) Fuse rating and type. 5) Ground fault pickup and time delay. Provide "Arc Flash" study and labeling of all 600V or below equipment for this project. "Arc Flash" study to be completed in accordance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. Include full report and electronic files and database for future use by the facility. Study to be completed using "SKM" or "Operations Technology' software. D. Submit copies of final report signed by Professional Engineer under whose direction the study was performed. Make additions or changes required by review comments. E. Acceptance or no exceptions taken by the engineer on any substitution proposed by the contractor shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from compliance with the project's specifications and performance requirements nor departure there from. The contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions and for the selection of fabrication processes, techniques and assembly, coordination of his work with that of all other trades and making any needed modifications consequent to the substitution at his own cost and for performing the work in a safe manner. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Use commercially available software, designed specifically for short circuit and protective device coordination studies with minimum of 5years documented availability approved by Architect/Engineer. C. Perform study in accordance with IEEE 242. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. The short circuit and protective device coordination study shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer (Electrical) licensed in the State of California, under whose direction the study was performed. B. The contractor shall have the coordination study prepared by qualified engineers who are employed by the switchgear manufacturer or an approved consultant. The Contractor is responsible for providing all pertinent information (feeder lengths and existing equipment parameters) as well as utility information (i.e. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-7 transformers, impedances, and available short circuit currents), required to complete the study. The engineer(s) or consultant(s) shall meet all state and local requirements with regard to professional registration and standards of practice. C. Demonstrate company performing study has capability and experience to provide assistance during system start up. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing. B. The short circuit portion of the study shall be submitted prior to or along with the switchgear submittal, and shall include all equipment which has an AIC rating. The short circuit study shall reflect that all equipment with an AIC rating is properly rated for its specific application. The submitted switchgear (including all equipment which has an AIC rating) shall reflect the findings of short circuit study (i.e., the AIC ratings of the equipment shall exceed the available short circuit current and any required derating factors at each point in the system.). 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work to expedite collection of data to ensure completion of study for final approval of distribution equipment shop drawings prior to release of equipment for manufacturing. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with local power company. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide assistance to electrical distribution system equipment manufacturer during start up of electrical system and equipment. B. Select each primary protective device for delta-wye connected transformer so device's characteristic or operating band is within transformer characteristics, including point equal to 58 percent of ANSI withstand point to provide secondary line -to -ground fault protection. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-8 C. Separate transformer primary protective device characteristic curves from associated secondary device characteristics by 16 percent current margin to provide proper coordination and protection in event of secondary line -to -line faults. D. Separate medium -voltage relay characteristic curves from curves for other devices by at least 0.4 second time margin. E. Analyze the short circuit calculations, and highlight any equipment that is determined to be underrated as specified. Propose approaches to effectively protect the underrated equipment. Proposed major corrective modifications will be taken under advisement by the architect, and the Contractor will be given further instructions. Provide minor modifications to conform with the study (Examples of minor modifications are trip sizes within the same frame, the time curve characteristics of induction relays, CT ranges, etc.). F. After developing the coordination curves, highlight areas lacking coordination. Present a technical valuation with a discussion of the logical compromises for best coordination. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting the trip settings of all breakers and other adjustable over -current devices per the approved coordination study. After the settings have been made, the Electrical Contractor shall apply an owner -furnished seal on the input. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the breaker testing agency with a copy of the final, approved coordination study and ensure all breaker testing is conducted with breaker settings adjusted per the study. C. Accomplish necessary field settings, adjustments, and minor modifications to conform with the study without cost to the owner. D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Owners Representative four copies of the following certifications: Certification by the Contractor that the protective devices have been adjusted and set in accordance with the approved protective device study. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Overcurrent Protective Device Specifications Coordination Study 260573-9 SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Digital Occupancy and Daylighting Sensor Control 2. Emergency Lighting Control (if applicable) B. Related Section 1. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices 2. Section 265100 — Interior Lighting C. Control Intent — Control Intent includes, but is not limited to: 1. Defaults and initial calibration settings for such items as time delay, sensitivity, fade rates, etc. 2. Initial sensor and switching zones 3. Initial time switch settings 4. Task lighting and receptacle controls 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) B. Underwriter Laboratories of Canada (ULC) C. International Electrotechnical Commission D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. 916 — Energy Management Equipment. 2. 924 — Emergency Lighting Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -1 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION A. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment: Digital Room Controllers — Self -configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relays controllers with 0-10 volt control for ballasts (if applicable) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers. 2. Digital Occupancy Sensors — Self -configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications. 3. Digital Switches — Self -configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. 4. Digital Photosensors — Single -zone closed loop and multi -zone open loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching or dimming control for daylight harvesting. 5. Configuration Tools — Handheld remote for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings. Handheld remotes for personal control — One -button dimming, two -button on/off, or five -button scene remotes provide control using infrared communications. Remote may be configured in the field to control selected loads or scenes without special tools. 7. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network — Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices. S. Network Bridge — provides BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication between rooms, panels and the Segment Manager or building automation system (BAS). 9. Segment Manager — provides web browser -based user interface for system control, scheduling, power monitoring, room device parameter administration and reporting. 10. Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU) — allows a standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-2 1.4 LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS A. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum application of lighting controls as follows: Space Control Requirements — Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual -ON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic -ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual -ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, open plan system and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line -of -sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner -mounted sensors and Manual -ON switches. 2. Bi -Level Lighting — Provide multi-level controls in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or applications where variable dimming is used. 3. Task Lighting / Plug Loads — Provide automatic shut off of non essential plug loads and task lighting in all spaces except toilet rooms and storerooms. Provide Automatic -ON of plug loads whenever spaces are occupied. For spaces with multiple occupants a single shut off consistent with the overhead lighting may be used for the area. 4. Daylit Areas — All luminaries within 15' of windows or within 7' of skylights (the daylit zone) shall be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones. Luminaires closest to the daylight aperture shall be controlled separately from luminaires farther from the daylight aperture, within the daylight zone. 5. Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) level that initiate dimming shall be programmed to be not less than 125% of the nighttime maintained designed illumination levels. Multiple -leveled switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas marked on drawings. Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings. Daylighting control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather than turning full - on prior to dimming. B. Additional controls: Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants or where line -of -sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner -mounted with manual -on switches. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-3 2. Conference, meeting, training, auditoriums, and multipurpose rooms shall have controls that allow for independent control of each local control zone. Rooms larger than 300 square feet shall instead have at least four (4) pre-set lighting scenes unless otherwise specified. Occupancy / vacancy sensors shall be provided to extinguish all lighting in the space. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, and the product data specified below at the same time as a package. B. Shop Drawings: Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed (standard diagrams will not be accepted). 2. Scale drawing for each area showing exact location of each sensor, room controller, and digital switch. C. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. D. Include data for each device which: Indicates where sensor is proposed to be installed. 2. Prove that the sensor is suitable for the proposed application. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Minimum (5) five years experience in manufacture of lighting controls. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment: Ambient temperature: 00 to 40° C (320 to 104° F). 2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non -condensing. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide a five year complete manufacturer's warranty on all products to be free of manufacturers' defects. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: Provide 2 each product to be used for maintenance. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-4 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper a. System: Digital Lighting Management (DLM) Basis of design product: WattStopper Digital Lighting Management (DLM) or subject to compliance and prior approval with specified requirements of this section, one of the following: a. WattStopper Digital Lighting Management (DLM) 2.2 SINGLE / DUAL RELAY WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Type PW: Manual -ON, Automatic -OFF passive infrared (PIR) wall switch occupancy sensor Furnish the Company's model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square -foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper PW -100, PW -200, PW -103, PW -203. B. Type UW: Manual -ON, Automatic -OFF ultrasonic wall switch occupancy sensor with Furnish the Company's model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square -foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper UW -100, UW -200. C. Type DW: Manual -ON, Automatic -OFF dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) wall switch occupancy sensor Furnish the Company's model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square -foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper DW -100, DW -200, DW -103, DW -203. 2.3 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM A. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company's system which accommodates the square -foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters. B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following: Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables: a. Sensitivity— 0-100% in 10% increments Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-5 b. Time delay— 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments C. Test mode — Five second time delay d. Detection technology — PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re -activation. e. Walk-through mode f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network. 2. One or two RJ -45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network. 3. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls. 4. Device Status LEDs including: a. PIR Detection b. Ultrasonic detection C. Configuration mode d. Load binding 5. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools. 6. Manual override of controlled loads. C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings. D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required. E. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC 2.4 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features: Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-6 2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttors and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall. 3. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission. 4. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics: a. Bi -level LED b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch C. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active 5. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps. B. Two RJ -45 ports for connection to DLM local network. C. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi -way switching. D. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa). 2. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only. 3. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change. 4. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours. 5. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch. 6. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads. E. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101. 2.5 HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROLS A. Battery-operated handheld switches in 1, 2 and 5 button configuration for remote switching or dimming control. Remote controls shall include the following features: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-7 Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for line of sight communication with DLM local network within up to 30 feet. 2. Blue LED on each button confirms button press. 3. Load buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads. 4. Inactivity timeout to save battery life. B. A wall mount holster and mounting hardware shall be included with each remote control C. WattStopper part numbers: LMRH-101, LMRH-102, LMRH-105. 2.6 ROOM CONTROLLERS A. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features: Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room. 2. Simple replacement — Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup. 3. Device Status LEDs to indicate: a. Data transmission b. Device has power C. Status for each load d. Configuration status 4. Quick installation features including: a. Standard junction box mounting b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ -45 patch cable 5. Plenum rated 6. Manual override and LED indication for each load 7. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-8 8. Zero cross circuitry for each load. B. On/Off Room Controllers shall include: 1. One or two relay configuration 2. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply 3. Three RJ -45 DLM local network ports 4. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy -based control of plug loads within the space. a. One relay configuration only b. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration 5. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-101, LMRC-102, LMPL-101 C. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include: 1. Real time current monitoring 2. One, two or three relay configuration 3. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply 4. Four RJ -45 DLM local network ports. 5. One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. 6. Optional Network Bridge for BACnet MSfTP communications (LMRC- 3xx). 7. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: a. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100% b. Set high and low trim for each load C. Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours 8. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy -based control of plug loads within the space. a. One relay configuration only b. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 260923-9 WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213, LMPL-201, LMRC-311, LMRC-312, LMRC-313. 2.7 DIGITAL PHOTOSENSORS A. Digital photosensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring. B. Digital photosensors include the following features: 1. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers. 2. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-10,000 footcandles (fc). 3. The capability of switching one-third, one-half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s). 4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a deadband or a separation between the "ON Setpoint" and the "OFF Setpoint" that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off. 5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a user -selectable minimum level. 6. Optional programmable wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of occupancy. 7. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls. 8. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission. 9. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding. 10. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF. 11. One RJ -45 port for connection to DLM local network. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -10 12. An adjustable head and a mounting bracket to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensor may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox. C. Closed loop digital photosensors include the following additional features: An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100 degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone. 2. Automatic self -calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. 3. Automatically establishes setpoints following self -calibration. 4. A sliding setpoint control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a "Day Setpoint" and the "Night Setpoint" to prevent the lights from cycling. 5. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-400. D. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features: An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room. 2. Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. 3. A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a "Setpoint" to be maintained during operation. 4. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-500. 2.8 ROOM NETWORK (DLM LOCAL NETWORK) A. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ -45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include: Plug n' Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached. 2. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup. 3. Push n' Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -11 Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor. wall switch or IR receiver. 2.9 CONFIGURATIONS TOOLS A. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface. B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include: 1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR -enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet. 2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu -driven operation. 3. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches. 4. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors. 5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto - commissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls. C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100 2.10 NETWORK BRIDGE A. The network bridge connects a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant network for communication between rooms, panels and a segment manager or BAS. Each local network shall include a network bridge component to provide a connection to the local network room devices. The network bridge shall use industry standard BACnet MS/TP network communication. The network bridge may be incorporated directly into the room controller hardware (LMRC-3xx Room Controllers) or be provided as a separate module connected on the local network through an available RJ -45 port. Provide Plug n' Go operation to automatically discover all room devices connected to the local network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager via the segment network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the network bridge on the local network. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -12 3. The network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for selected room device parameters to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include lighting control and power monitoring features as provided by the DLM room devices on each local network. Standard BACnet objects shall be provided as follows: a. Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room b. Read the detection state of the occupancy sensor C. Read/write the On/Off state of loads d. Read/write the dimmed light level of loads e. Read the button states of switches f. Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the room controller g. Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic sensitivity settings h. Activate a preset scene for the room Read/write daylight sensor fade time and say and night setpoints Read the current light level, in footcandles, from interior and exterior photosensors and photocells k. Set daylight sensor operating mode I. Read/write wall switch lock status 4. WattStopper product numbers: LMBC-300 2.11 SEGMENT MANAGER A. The Digital Lighting Management system shall include at least one segment manager to manage network communication. It shall be capable of serving up a graphical user interface via a standard web browser. Each segment manager shall have support for one, two or three segment networks as required and allow for control of a maximum of 127 local networks (rooms) and/or lighting control panels per segment network. B. Operational features of the Segment Manager shall include the following: 1. Connection to PC or LAN via standard Ethernet TCP/IP. 2. Easy to learn and use graphical user interface, compatible with Internet Explorer 8, or equal browser. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -13 3. Log in security capable of restricting some users to view -only or other limited operations. 4. Automatic discovery of all DLM devices on the segment network(s). Commissioning beyond activation of the discovery function shall not be required. 5. After discovery, all rooms and panels shall be presented in a standard navigation tree format. Selecting a device from the tree will allow the device settings and operational parameters to be viewed and changed by the user. 6. Ability to view and modify room device operational parameters. It shall be possible to set device parameters independently for normal hours and after hours operation. 7. Ability to set up schedules for rooms and panels. Schedules shall automatically set controlled zones or areas to either a normal hours or after hours mode of operation. 8. Ability to group rooms and loads for common control by schedules, switches or network commands. 9. Ability to monitor connected load current and display power consumption for areas equipped with room controllers incorporating the integral current monitoring feature. 10. Provide seamless integration with the BAS via BACnet IP C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMSM-201, LMSM-603. 2.12 EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Emergency Lighting Control Unit — A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include: 120/277 volts, 60 Hz., 20 amp ballast rating 2. Push to test button 3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface B. WattStopper Product Numbers: ELCU-100, ELCU-200. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -14 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. When using wire for connections other than the DLM local network (Cat 5e with RJ -45 connectors), provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination. Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements B. Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise indicated. C. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings. 1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after occupant leaves area. D. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including room by room description including: Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints. 2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.) 3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.) E. Re -commissioning — After 30 days from occupancy re -calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner's Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of re -commissioning activity. 3.2 FACTORY COMMISSIONING A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized representative who will verify a complete fully functional system. B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with ten working days written notice of the system startup and adjustment date. C. Upon completion of the system commissioning the factory -authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Specifications 26 09 23 -15 SECTION 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes main and distribution switchboards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C12.1 -Code for Electricity Metering. 2. ANSI C39.1 - Requirements, Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments. B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C57.13 - Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. 2. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low - Voltage AC Power Circuits. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 4. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. 5. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. D. International Electrical Testing Association: NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars for each phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Switchboards Specifications 26 24 13 -1 B. Product Data: Submit electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time -current curves of equipment and components. C. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production and field tests. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, configurations, and ratings of switchboards and their components on single line diagrams and plan layouts. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. B. Accept switchboards on site. Inspect for damage. C. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.9 SEQUENCING A. Sequence Work to avoid interferences with building finishes and installation of other products. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each key. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Switchboards Specifications 262413-2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Cutler Hammer. 2. Square D Snyder Electric. B. Product Description: NEMA PB 2, enclosed switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated on Drawings. C. Device Mounting: 1. Main Section: Individually mounted and compartmented. 2. Distribution Section: Panel mounted. Individually mounted and compartmented. D. Bus: 1. Material: Copper, standard size. 2. Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. 3. Insulation: Fully insulate bus bars. Do not reduce spacing of insulated bus. E. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. F. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from front only of switchboard, suitable for conductor materials and sizes as indicated on Drawings. G. Utility Metering Compartment: Furnish electronic power metering transformer compartment for District's use, in accordance with District requirements. H. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Furnish continuous current rating as indicated on Drawings. I. Enclosure: NEMA 4X. J. Align sections at front and rear. K. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion -resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc. 2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER A. Product Description: NEMA AB 1, molded -case circuit breaker. B. Field -Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger have mechanism for adjusting long time continuous current. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Switchboards Specifications 262413-3 C. Solid -State Circuit Breaker: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings; ground fault trip with integral ground fault sensing; instantaneous trip; and adjustable short time trip. D. Accessories: As indicated on Drawings. Conform to NEMA AB 1 1. Shunt Trip Device: 120 volts, AC. 2. Undervoltage Trip Device: 120 volts, AC. 3. Handle Lock: Provisions for padlocking. 4. Insulated Grounding Lug: In each enclosure. 2.3 GROUND FAULT DEVICES A. Ground Fault Sensor: Zero sequence type. B. Ground Fault Relay: Adjustable ground fault sensitivity from 200 to 1200 amperes, time delay adjustable from 0 to 15 seconds. Furnish monitor panel with lamp to indicate relay operation, TEST and RESET control switches. 2.4 AMMETERS AND VOLTMETERS (PROVIDE METER AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS) PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surface is suitable for switchboard installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1. B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. C. Install fuses in each switch and coordinate sizes with connected load. D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53. E. Install breaker circuit directory. F. Ground and bond switchboards in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Switchboards Specifications 26 24 13 -4 B. Tighten bolted bus connections. C. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as indicated on Drawings. 3.5 CLEANING A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Switchboards Specifications 262413-5 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low - Voltage AC Power Circuits. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 4. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 6. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 7. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Panelboards Specifications 26 24 16 -1 D. California Electrical Code (CEC): 1. CEC - California Electrical Code. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards. 2. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 3. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Cutler -Hammer. 2. Square D Snyder Electric. B. Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Panelboards Specifications 262416-2 C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 42,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on Drawings. E. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick -make, quick -break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Furnish interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R fuses. F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. G. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated on Drawings. H. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 or 4X as indicated on drawings. I. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Cutler -Hammer. 2. Square D Snyder Electric. B. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 14,000, 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on Drawings. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 or Type 3R as indicated on drawings. G. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Panelboards Specifications 262416-3 H. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Install panelboards plumb. C. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53. H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty, 3/4 inch. Identify each as SPARE. I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with CEC. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6. C. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. D. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Panelboards Specifications 262416-4 SECTION 26 27 16 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal blocks, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures, cabinets, and terminal blocks. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each key. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Specifications 26 27 16 -1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Manufacturers: 1. Raco. 2. Wiegmann Enclousres. 3. Hammond Manufacturing. B. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor or 3R for outdoors, steel enclosure. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver. D. Furnish interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel. E. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.2 CABINETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Raco. 2. Wiegmann Enclousres. 3. Hammond Manufacturing. B. Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls. C. Box Size: 24 inches inches wide x 30 inches high x 6 inches deep. D. Backboard: Furnish 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. E. Fronts: Steel, flush or surface type with screw cover front, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock. Finish with gray baked enamel. F. Furnish metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. G. Furnish accessory feet for free-standing equipment. 2.3 PLASTIC RACEWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Specifications 262716-2 2. Hubbell Mono -Systems, Inc. B. Product Description: Plastic channel with hinged or snap -on cover. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING WORK A. Remove abandoned cabinets and enclosures, including abandoned cabinets and enclosures above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces. B. Maintain access to existing cabinets and enclosures and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel. C. Extend existing cabinets and enclosures using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner in accordance with Section 26 05 29. B. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Specifications 262716-3 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART7: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multi -outlet assembly; and device plates and decorative box covers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Outlet boxes for wiring devices. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish two (2) of each style, size, and finish wall plate. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton. 2. Pass & Seymour. 3. Wattstopper. 4. Hubbell. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Wiring Devices Specifications 26 27 26 -1 B. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy -Duty, AC only general -use decora switch. C. Body and Handle: White plastic with rocker handle. D. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120 or 277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1. Bryant. 2. Leviton. 3. Pass & Seymour. 4. Hubbell. B. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Bryant. 2. Leviton. 3. Pass & Seymour. 4. Hubbell. C. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle. D. Device Body: White plastic. E. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as indicated on Drawings. F. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. G. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices. 2. Bryant. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Wiring Devices Specifications 262726-2 3. Leviton. 4. Pass & Seymour. 5. Hubbell. B. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless steel. C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal plate with hinged and gasketed device cover. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices. B. Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active. C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install devices plumb and level. B. Install switches with OFF position down. C. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. G. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Wiring Devices Specifications 262726-3 END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Wiring Devices Specifications 262726-4 H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 to obtain mounting heights as specified and as indicated on drawings. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor to top of outlet box. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor to bottom of box or as indicated on the drawings. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches horizontally above counter or back splash of counter. E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Wiring Devices Specifications 262726-4 SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Select fuses to provide appropriate levels of short circuit and overcurrent protection for the following components: wire, cable, bus structures, and other equipment. Design system to maintain component damage within acceptable levels during faults. B. Select fuses to coordinate with time current characteristics of other overcurrent protective elements, including other fuses, circuit breakers, and protective relays. Design system to maintain operation of device closest to fault operates. 1.4 FUSE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). B. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay). C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data sheets showing electrical characteristics, including time -current curves. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual sizes, ratings, and locations of fuses. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Fuses Specifications 26 28 13 -1 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two fuse pullers. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish fifteen spare fuses of each Class, size, and rating installed. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman. 2. Eaton Cutler -Hammer. 3. Reliance. B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or as indicated on Drawings. C. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase -to -phase voltage. 2.2 CLASS RK1 (TIME DELAY) FUSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman. 2. Eaton Cutler -Hammer. 3. Reliance. B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1. C. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase -to -phase voltage. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fuse with label oriented so manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Fuses Specifications 262813-2 SECTION 26 28 19 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fusible and nonfusible switches. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of installed fuses. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. PART 2: PRODUCTS PA 111,611:3Q�9TiUIIf] :I_6& -]:II 3q10W A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. Eaton Cutler -Hammer. B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Enclosed Switches Specifications 26 28 19 -1 C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R fuses. D. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. E. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts. 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Square D. 2. Eaton Cutler -Hammer. B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1 2. Exterior Locations: Type 4X. D. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts. 2.3 SWITCH RATINGS A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings. B. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30-600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes). PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. B. Height:5 feet to operating handle. C. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Enclosed Switches Specifications 262819-2 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Enclosed Switches Specifications 262819-3 SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diesel engine B. Generator C. Generator Output Devices D. Control Panel E. Remote Annunciator Panel F. Batteries and Charger G. Unit Mounted Cooling System H. Exhaust Silencer and Flexible Piping I. Weather -Proof (Sound Attenuated) Enclosure J. Fuel Supply and Storage Tank K. Spare Parts 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 36 23 - Automatic Transfer Switch. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA AB1 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers. B. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum.) D. NEPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. E. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems. F. NFPA 37 — Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines G. CEC - California Electrical Code. H. UL 2200 - Standard for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-1 UL 142 - Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids 1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. An electric generating system, consisting of a prime mover, generator, governor, coupling and all controls, must have been tested, as a complete unit, on a representative engineering prototype model of the equipment to be sold. B. The generator set must conform to applicable California Electrical Code and applicable inspection authorities. C. The generator set must be available with the Underwriters Laboratories listing as a stationary engine generator assembly. D. The generator set(s) must conform to applicable NFPA standards. E. The generator set(s) must meet EPA federal emission guidelines for stationary standby power generation. F. Provide a generator diesel engine that meets current South Coast AQMD regulation for 2013. Engine must have a Pre -Certified Equipment Permit on file with South Coast AQMD. G. Provide CARB verified engine exhaust diesel particulate filter (DPF/PM TRAP) if required by Local Air District. H. Contractor shall be responsible to obtain air permit to construct and operate for the standby generator. Owner to have option to apply for air permit on specified Generator Package prior to awarding bid. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that complete engine -generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems. Include the following: Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of the assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.5 MANUFACTURER & DEALERS QUALIFICATIONS A. This generator package shall be manufactured by GENERAC Industrial Power. B. The manufacturer shall provide factory -trained service and parts support through a factory authorized dealer/supplier that is regularly doing business in the area of the installation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-2 C. The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures describing the standard system specified, not a one of a kind fabrication. D. As part of qualification process; an authorized dealer/supplier, herein known as the dealer shall represent the manufacturer. To qualify as the dealer/supplier, it must be a "FULL PRODUCT LINE SALES & SERVICE DEALER OF GENERAC" and shall have 24-hour service availability. The dealer/supplier must have certified generator service technicians, inventory of parts to support after sales service and can prove 5 years of experience. PRIME contact is Thomas Pint of YC Power Systems. Contact phone number is (714) 396-7786. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Show plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements, and electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams. B. Product Data: Obtain data from Manufacturer or Supplying Company showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, remote annunciator panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, fuel tank, and radiator. C. Test Reports: Provide factory certified production and prototype results of performance testing. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. E. Submit computer sizing calculation to substantiate selection of unit base on the emergency load. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation Data: Include instructions for normal operation. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for routine maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and fuel tank, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures. C. Three (3) sets of owner's manuals specific to the product supplied must accompany delivery of the equipment. General operating instruction, preventive maintenance, wiring diagrams, schematics and parts exploded views specific to this model must be included. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 110, Level 1 system requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-3 B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of engine generator for one year (2 visits per year) from Date of Startup/Commissioning. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide one of each fuel, oil, air filter element and drive belt of the engine. 1.11 WARRANTY A. The standby electric generating system components, complete Genet, and instrumentation panel shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and factory workmanship for a period of five (5) years. Such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer's option, free of charge for parts, labor and travel. B. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service. Multiple warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, controls, etc.) will not be acceptable. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment of the specifying authority, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete system must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate warranty support. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Provide a 100 kW standby power system (Model No. SD100), to supply electrical power at 120/240 Volts, 60 Hertz, 1 -Phase. The generator shall consist of a liquid cooled diesel engine, a synchronous AC alternator, and system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system, including but not limited to the items as specified hereinafter. B. Provide an automatic transfer switch. Refer to Section 26 36 23 2.2 DIESEL ENGINE & ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT; A. Engine: The prime mover shall be liquid cooled, diesel fueled, turbocharged after cooled engine of 6 -cycle design TIER 3 compliance engine. The engine will have a 6 cylinder block with a minimum displacement of 6.7 liters, with a minimum rating of 152 BHP. The units shall require a minimum rated standby output of 100 KW at an operating speed of 1800 RPM. Each generator shall include a single generator controller that performs all Genset controls Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-4 3. The engine will be equipped with an electric, DC starting motor, positive engagement, of sufficient capacity to crank the engine at starting speed for one minute without overheating. Engine Fuel System: The engine fuel system shall be designed for operation on #2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel. The engine shall include a primary fuel filter, water separator, manual fuel priming pump, and engine flexible fuel lines must be installed at the point of manufacture. Element shall be replaceable paper type. The engines suction line shall be fitted with a check valve to secure prime for the engines injection pump. 5. Engine speed: 1800 rpm Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, over speed, and engine over crank. Limits as selected or recommended by manufacturer. Engine Starting: 12VDC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 8. The engine's cranking batteries shall be lead acid. The batteries shall be sized per the manufacturer's recommendations. The batteries supplied shall meet NFPA 110 cranking requirements of 90 seconds of total crank time. Battery specifications (type, amp -hour rating, cold cranking amps) to be provided in the submittal. 9. The Genset shall have an automatic dual rate, float equalize, 10 amp battery charger. The charger must be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The chargers charging current shall be monitored within the generator controller to support remote monitoring and diagnostics. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable. 10. Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic control, 1500 watts sized to maintain engine jacket water at 100 degrees and suitable for operation on 120VAC single phase. 11. Radiator: The engine is to be cooled with a unit mounted radiator, fan, water pump, and closed coolant recovery system. The coolant system shall include a coolant fill box which will provide visual means to determine if the system has adequate coolant level. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 104 degrees F, (40 degrees C) ambient temperature. A radiator fan guard must be installed for personnel safety that meets UL and OSHA safety requirements. 12. Engine coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with pipe plugs and shut-off valves, must be provided to the outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-5 13. Engine Oil System: Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have a replaceable oil filter(s) with internal bypass and replaceable element(s). The engine shall operate on mineral based oil. Synthetic oils shall not be required. The oil shall be cooled by an oil cooler which is integrated into the engine system. B. AC Generator, Regulator, Exciter Unit & Auxiliary Equipment: Rating: AC engine -generator set shall be rated by the manufacturer for continuous standby operation at 100KW, 100KVA at 0.8 PF, 60 Hz, 1800 RPM for use with a 120/240VAC, 1 Phase, 3 -wire system. The generator set manufacturer shall verify the diesel engine as capable of driving the generator with all accessories in place and operating, at the generator set kW rating after derating for the range of temperatures expected in service and the altitude of the installation. Site conditions are: 104 degrees F maximum ambient and 50 feet altitude. 3. Voltage regulation shall be +/-0.25 percent of rated voltage for any constant load between no load and rated load. The voltage regulator shall be equipped with three phase RMS sensing. 4. Engine speed shall be controlled with an integrated isochronous governor function with no change in alternator frequency from no load to full load. Steady state regulation is to be 0.25%. 5. Telephone Influence Factor; TIF shall be less than 50 per NEMA MG1- 22.43. 6. The diesel engine -generator set shall be capable of picking up 100% of nameplate kW and power factor, less applicable de -rating factors, in one step in accordance with NFPA Standard 100, Paragraph 5-13.2.6. 7. The alternator shall support 177 skVA with a maximum voltage dip of 30%. 8. The AC generator, exciter and voltage regulator shall be designed and manufactured by the engine -generator set manufacturer as a complete generator system. 9. The alternator shall be a 4 pole, revolving field, stationary armature, synchronous machine. The excitation system shall utilize a brushless exciter with a three phase full wave rectifier assembly protected against abnormal transient conditions by a surge protector. Photo -sensitive components will not be permitted in the rotating exciter. 10. The alternator shall use a single, sealed bearing design. The rotor shall be connected to the engine flywheel using flexible drive disks. The stator shall be direct connected to the engine to ensure permanent alignment Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-6 11. Single phase alternators shall be four lead and dedicated voltage designs. All leads must be extended into a NEMA 1 connection box for easy termination. A fully rated, isolated neutral connection must be included by the generator set manufacturer. 12. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG1 standard temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 130 degrees Centigrade. The main generator and exciter insulation systems must be suitably impregnated for operation in severe environments. 13. The alternator shall include a permanent magnet generator (PMG) for excitation support. The system shall supply a minimum short circuit support current of 300% of the rating for 10 seconds. 14. An alternator strip heater shall be installed to prevent moisture condensation from forming on the alternator windings. A tropical coating shall also be applied to the alternator windings to provide additional protection against the entrance of moisture C. Circuit Breaker(s): A mainline, electronic LSI 100% rated circuit breaker carrying the UL mark shall be factory installed. The breaker shall be rated 500 amps. The line side connections are to be made at the factory. Output lugs shall be provided for load side connections. The breaker is to include auxiliary contacts and shunt trip functionality. The generator shall include a unit mounted auxiliary power load center. All ancillary AC devices (block heater, battery charger, alternator strip heater, etc) shall have a dedicated breaker within the load center D. Engine -Generator Set Control: The generator control system, (H-100) shall be a fully integrated microprocessor based control system for standby emergency engine generators meeting all requirements of NFPA 110 level 1. The generator control system, (H-100) shall be a fully integrated control system enabling remote diagnostics and easy building management integration of all generator functions. The generator controller shall provide integrated and digital control over all generator functions including: engine protection, alternator protection, speed governing, voltage regulation and all related generator operations. The generator controller must also provide seamless digital integration with the engine's electronic engine control module (ECM) if so equipped. Generator controller's that utilize separate voltage regulators and speed governors or do not provide seamless integration with the engine management system are considered less desirable Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-7 3. Communications shall be supported with building automation via the Modbus protocol without network cards. Optional internet and intranet connectivity shall be available. 4. The control system shall provide an environmentally sealed design including encapsulated circuit boards and sealed automotive style plugs for all sensors and circuit board connections. The use of non - encapsulated boards, edge cards, and pc ribbon cable connections are considered unacceptable. 5. Circuit boards shall utilize surface mount technology to provide vibration durability. Circuit boards that utilize large capacitors or heat sinks must utilize encapsulation methods to securely support these components. 6. A predictive maintenance algorithm that alarms when maintenance is required. The controller shall have the capability to call out to the local servicing dealer when maintenance is required 7. Diagnostic capabilities should include time -stamped event and alarm logs, ability to capture operational parameters during events, simultaneous monitoring of all input or output parameters, callout capabilities, support for multi -channel digital strip chart functionality and .2 msec data logging capabilities 8. In addition to standard NFPA 110 alarms, the application loads should also be protected through instantaneous and steady state protective settings on system voltage, frequency, and power levels. 9. The control system shall provide pre -wired customer use 1/0: 4 relay outputs (user definable functions), 4 contact inputs, 2 analog inputs, communications support via RS232, RS485, or an optional modem. Additional 1/0 must be an available option. 10. Customer 1/0 shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data logging, and shutdown functionality. In addition, custom ladder logic functionality inside the generator controller shall be supported to provide application support flexibility. The ladder logic function shall have access to all the controller inputs and customer assignable outputs. 11. The control panel shall include a digital display for all user pertinent unit parameters including: engine and alternator operating conditions; oil pressure and optional oil temperature; coolant temperature and level alarm; fuel level (where applicable); engine speed; DC battery voltage; run time hours; generator voltages, amps, frequency, kilowatts, and power factor; alarm status and current alarm(s) condition per NFPA 110 level 1. 12. Generator Protection: The alternator shall be protected against overloads and short circuit conditions by advanced control panel protective Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-8 functions. The control panel is to provide a time current algorithm that protects the alternator against short circuits. To ensure precision protection and repeatable trip characteristics, these functions must be implemented electronically in the generator control panel -- thermal magnetic breaker implementation are not acceptable. E. Remote Annunciator: 1. Remote Annunciator: The system is able to provide 21 individual status displays using red, yellow and green LEDs. Communication with the Remote Annunciator is via a RS485 serial data link. Remote Annunciator Panel shall be Flush Mounted. 2. Indicators: a. Pre -low Oil Pressure b. Pre- High Water Temp C. Pre Low Water Temp d. Pre- Low Fuel e. Battery Chrg AC Fail f. Low Battery Voltage g. High Battery Voltage h. Not in Auto i. RPM Sensor Loss j. Overcrank k. Over speed I. Low Oil Pressure M. Hi Water Temp n. Lo Water Level o. Emergency Stop p. Gen Running q. Gen Power (ATS) r. Line Power (ATS) S. Systems Ready Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-9 t. Communications OK U. Spare F. Outdoor Generator -set Enclosure The Genset shall be packaged with a level 2 sound attenuating aluminum enclosure with an average sound level of 75.5 dBA @ 23' from all sides of the enclosure. The enclosure is to have hinged, removable doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. The hinges shall allow for door fit adjustment. Hinges and all exposed fasteners will be stainless steel or JS5000. The use of pop -rivets weakens the paint system and not allowed on external painted surfaces. Each door will have lockable hardware with identical keys. The enclosure shall be coated with electrostatic applied powder paint, baked and finished to manufacturer's specifications. The color will be manufacturer's standard. The sound attenuated enclosure shall utilize an upward discharging radiator hood. The enclosure shall be completely lined with sound deadening material. This material must be of a self -extinguishing design. G. Muffler: Critical exhaust silencer and or Diesel Particulate Filter shall be incorporated within the upward discharge radiator hood. H. Fuel Tank: The packaging shall include a double wall, sub -base mounted, UL142 listed fuel tank. The tank shall be sized to provide 48 hours of run time. 2. The tank shall include fuel suction and return connections, normal and emergency vents, secondary containment emergency vent and rupture basin sensor, mechanical fuel level indication and a stub -up area convenient for electrical conduit entry. 3. The fuel tank shall use an electric fuel sensor to provide an analog indication of fuel level. The controller shall have a warning indication on low fuel level and provide optional shutdown functionality for low, low fuel level. 4. The fuel tank must be supplied by the engine -generator set manufacturer and be installed before shipment. 5. The fuel tank shall include a fuel spill box with spill sensor, automatic overflow fill valve, and the normal vent elevated 12 feet above grade. Provide California PE Stamped and signed anchor bolt calculations Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-10 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform NFPA 110 four (4) hour test. B. Record in 15 minute intervals during four hour test: 1. Kilowatts. 2. Amperes. 3. Voltage. 4. Coolant temperature. 5. Room temperature. 6. Frequency. 7. Oil pressure C. Simulate power failure including operation of transfer switch, automatic starting cycle, and automatic shutdown and return to normal for a period of one (1) hour. D. Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions. E. Contractor to refer to the drawings for the Sequence of Operation requirements and shall simulate and perform all the scenarios indicated during testing, coordinate setting of solid state breakers with generator supplier/installer and switchgear manufacturer representative. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean engine and generator surfaces. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Describe loads connected to emergency and standby system and restrictions for future load additions. B. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system operates to provide emergency power. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-11 C. On -Site Training: Provide two (2) hours of on-site training to instruct the owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. Review operation and maintenance manuals, parts manuals, and emergency service procedures. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Engine Generators Specifications 263213-12 SECTION 26 36 23 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES – LOW VOLTAGE PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Furnish and install the low voltage automatic transfer switches having the ratings, features/accessories and enclosures as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The automatic transfer switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of UL and NEMA as follows: 1. UL 1008—UL-891 –Transfer Switches 2. UL 991 - Tests for Safety -Related Controls Employing Solid -State Devices 3. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code 4. NFPA 99 – Essential Electrical Systems of Health Care Facilities 5. NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems 6. NEMA ICS 10 – AC Transfer Switch Equipment 7. IEEE 446 – Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems 1.3 SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Front view and plan view of the assembly 2. Schematic diagram 3. Conduit space locations within the assembly. 4. Assembly ratings including: a. Withstand and Closing rating b. Voltage Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-1 C. Continuous current rating d. Short -Time rating if applicable e. Short-circuit rating if ordered with integral protection 5. Cable terminal sizes 6. Product Data Sheets. B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: Connection details between close -coupled assemblies 2. Composite front view and plan view of close -coupled assemblies 1.4 SUBMITTALS — FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: Final as -built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.04 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification as specified B. The final (as -built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. Provide Seismic qualified equipment as follows: The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified by actual seismic testing to meet all applicable seismic requirements of Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-2 the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) Site Classification. The site coefficients Fa = *1.0, FC = *1.5, and spectral response accelerations of Ss = *1.613g, S, = *0.600g are used. The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% damping factor, and a peak (SDs) of at least 1.076g's (3 -12 Hz) applied at the base of the equipment in the horizontal direction. The forces in the vertical direction shall be at least 66% of those in the horizontal direction. The tests shall cover a frequency range from 1 to 100Hz. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer and based upon testing of representative equipment. Equipment certification acceptance criteria shall be based upon the ability for the equipment to be returned to service immediately after a seismic event within the above requirements without the need for repairs. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above referenced standards. a. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon the above criteria to verify the seismic design of the equipment. b. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes. C. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the specified response spectra. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-3 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre -approved by the engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2.2 RATINGS A. The transfer switch shall have equal 3 cycle withstand; closing and interrupting ratings of 100 kAIC at 240/120 volts. B. The transfer switch shall be 100% equipment rated for continuous duty as shown on the drawings and shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1008 for emergency system total load. C. The voltage rating of the transfer switch shall be no less than the system voltage rating. The continuous current rating of the transfer switch shall be no less than the maximum continuous current requirements of the system. D. The automatic transfer switches shall be fully rated to protect all types of loads, inductive and resistive, from loss of continuity of power, without derating, either open or enclosed. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. For Power Case Switching Device — 200-5000A styles as shown on drawings: Switches rated 200 - 5000 Amp shall be Floor Mount construction utilizing draw -out mounted power case switches or circuit breakers, Cutler - Hammer type MAGNUM DS or approved equal. The power case switch shall have high -endurance characteristics being capable of no-load and full -load interruptions at rated current equal to or exceeding the UL endurance ratings for power circuit breakers without maintenance. Transfer switch shall operate with an in-phase monitor timer. Time Delay in neutral is the default. B. The switching panel shall consist of completely enclosed contact assemblies and a separate control or transformer panel. Control power for all transfer operations shall be derived from the line side of the source to which the load is being transferred. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-4 C. Each transfer switch shall be positively interlocked both mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing of both sources under either automatic or manual operation. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position in both normal and emergency positions. A neutral position shall not be possible under normal electrical operation unless a delayed transition accessory 32 is required for switching highly inductive loads. D. Transfer switches shall be capable of being operated manually under full rated load conditions. Manual operation shall be accomplished by a permanently attached manual operator, or by integrally mounted pushbuttons. Removable manual operating handles, and handles that may move in the event of an electrical operation during the manual operation, are not acceptable. Manual operators requiring source or load disconnection prior to manual operation are not acceptable. E. On transfer switches requiring a fourth pole for switching the neutral, the neutral shall be fully rated with equal withstand, closing and interrupting ratings to the power poles. Switched neutral poles which are add-on or overlap, or that are not capable of breaking full rated load current are not acceptable. F. The transfer switch shall have a multi -tap voltage selection plug for ease of voltage adjustment in the field. G. Where indicated on the drawings, the transfer switches shall be provided with a mechanism to allow easy access for preventive maintenance, testing or inspection. The draw -out mechanism shall provide visual indicators as to the position of the switch/breaker during the draw -out operation. H. When the transfer switches shall be provided with a mechanism, shuttered cassettes should be provided for safety purposes I. Positive mechanical key interlocks shall be provided for bypass isolation switches to prevent cross connection of services. J. When provided, the automatic transfer switch and the bypass isolation switch sections shall be interconnected with copper bus or cable. K. When indicated on the drawings, the bypass isolation transfer switches shall be provided with a draw -out mechanism to allow access for preventive maintenance, testing or inspection. The draw -out mechanism shall provide visual indicators as to the position of the switch/breaker during the draw -out operation. 2.4 MICROPROCESSOR LOGIC A. The transfer switch shall be equal to a Cutler -Hammer ATC type microprocessor -based controller. The controller shall be hardened against potential problems from transients and surges. Operation of the transfer switch and monitoring of both sources shall be managed by the controller. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-5 2.5 REFERENCES A. The automatic transfer switch controllers shall meet or exceed the following standards in addition to the basic switch standards 1. IEC 61000-4-2 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test 2. IEC 61000-4-3 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Radio- frequency, Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test 3. IEC 61000-4-4 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test 4. IEC 61000-4-5 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Surge Immunity Test 5. IEC 61000-4-6 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Immunity to Conducted Disturbances, Induced by Radio-frequency Fields 6. IEC 61000-4-11 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Voltage Dips, Short Interrupts and Voltage Variations Immunity Tests 7. CISPR11, Class B - Industrial, Scientific and Medical Radio-frequency Equipment - Electromagnetic Disturbance Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement 8. FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B 9. ATC -800, Select closed transition breaker based transfer switches 40- 2000A. This controller is full featured and available for use in either Open or Closed transition applications. This controller also has a second set of engine start contacts for Generator to Generator applications.. It features a communications interface for connection to Power monitoring or building automation control systems through a gateway) 2.6 MICROPROCESSOR -BASED CONTROLLER (ATC -800 CLOSED TRANSITION) A. The microprocessor -based logic controller shall be door mounted and shall provide the operator with an overview of the transfer switch status, parameters, and diagnostic data. The controller shall be designed for closed transition make - before -break transfer switch applications. The closed transition operation requires that both power sources shall be synchronized in voltage, frequency, and phase angle within prescribed limits. Source paralleling duration is limited to less than 100 milliseconds. The controller shall have a voltage range of 0-790 volts (50/60 Hz) and an accuracy of +/- 2% of nominal input voltage. The controller shall have a frequency range of 40-80 Hz and an accuracy of +/- .1 Hz. Control power input range shall be from 65 Vac — 160 Vac RMS 50/60 Hz. The controller shall be listed under UL Standard 1008 and shall be Eaton type ATC - 800 or approved equal. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-6 B. The microprocessor -based controller shall include an LED display, and shall display the following: 1. Connected Source and Load voltages on all phases 2. Connected Source and Load frequency 3. Condition status — Under -voltage, under -frequency 4. Real time clock for Time / Date stamp 5. Historical data 6. Programming and set point information 7. Password entry 8. Timer countdown for each timer while functioning 9. Help function for detailed description of displayed messages C. The microprocessor -based controller shall include individual LED's for indicating the following: 1. Mimic Bus Diagram showing Availability status of NORMAL source {12G} 2. Mimic Bus Diagram showing Availability status of EMERGENCY source {12H} 3. Mimic Bus Diagram showing Connection status of NORMAL source {12C} 4. Mimic Bus Diagram showing Connection status of EMERGENCY source {12D} 5. Mimic Bus Diagram showing Preferred status of NORMAL source 6. Mimic Bus Diagram showing Preferred status of EMERGENCY source 7. Mimic Bus Diagram showing Energized status of LOAD 8. Automatic mode 9. Test mode 10. Program mode 11. Display Navigational indicators for Status, Source 1, Source 2, History, Time/Date and Set Points D. The microprocessor -based controller shall contain the following features: 1. Programming protection Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-7 2. Set points shall be stored in Non -Volatile memory, and use of an external battery source to maintain operation during "dead" periods shall not be required. 3. Shall be capable of communicating to monitor all set points and operational characteristics over the following network protocol: a. RS232 b. RJ45 (10 Base T) C. Ethernet d. USB e. Modbus via RS485 f. Modbus RTU 4. Selector Switch for "PROGRAM" or `RUM' 5. Historical Data Storage to include: a. Engine Run Time b. NORMAL source Available time C. EMERGENCY source Available time d. NORMAL source Connected time e. EMERGENCY source Connected time f. LOAD Energized Time g. Number of Transfers h. Date, Time and Reason for Last Sixteen (16) transfers E. The microprocessor -based controller shall contain the following voltage and frequency features: 1. The voltage of each phase of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall be monitored, with under -voltage dropout adjustable from 50% to 90% of nominal and pickup adjustable from dropout setting +/-2% to 100% of nominal. (5J & 26J) 2. The voltage of each phase of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall be monitored, with over -voltage dropout adjustable from 105% to 120% of nominal and pickup adjustable from dropout setting +/-2% to 95% of nominal. (5K & 26K) Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-8 3. The frequency of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall be monitored with under -frequency dropout adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal and pickup adjustable from dropout setting +1 Hz to 110% of nominal. {5J & 26J} 4. The frequency of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall be monitored, with over -frequency dropout adjustable from 100% to 120% of nominal and pickup adjustable from dropout setting to 90% of nominal. {5K & 26K} F. The microprocessor -based controller shall contain the following time delay features: A time delay shall be provided on transfer to EMERGENCY source, adjustable from 0 to 1800 seconds. TDNE — Time Delay Normal to Emergency {1} 2. A time delay shall be provided to override a momentary power outage or voltage fluctuation, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds. TDES — Time Delay engine Start {2} 3. A time delay shall be provided on retransfer from EMERGENCY source to NORMAL source, adjustable from 0 to 1800 seconds. TDEN — Time Delay Emergency to Normal {3} 4. A time delay shall be provided after retransfer that allows the generator to run unloaded prior to shutdown, adjustable form 0 to 1800 seconds. TDEC — Time Delay Engine Cool down {4} 5. A time delay shall be provided for engine failure to start, fixed setting of 6 seconds. TDEF — Time Delay Engine Fail {7} 6. A time delay shall be provided for the neutral position, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds. {32A} 7. An In -Phase Monitor transition, which will permit a transfer or re -transfer between the NORMAL and EMERGENCY sources that have a phase angle difference of 8 degrees or less. Feature to include a permissible frequency difference and synchronization time set points of 1-60 minutes. The adjustable frequency difference shall be 0.00 to 3.0 Hz {32C with Default to Load Voltage Decay or 32D with Default to Time Delay Neutral} 8. Provide a closed transition transfer as the primary transfer mode. In the event Source 1 and Source 2 fail to synchronize within the permitted voltage difference, frequency difference, phase angle difference and time then the controller defaults to the In -Phase Transition With Default to Load Voltage Decay operation as described in 2.06.E-7 {32B} and 2.06F- 8 {32C}. Adjustable Frequency Difference 0.0 — 0.3 Hz. Adjustable Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-9 Voltage Difference 1 — 5 percent. Adjustable synchronization Time Allowance 1 — 60 Minute {47C} G. The microprocessor -based controller shall contain the following features: "HELP", "INCREASE", "DECREASE", "STEP" and "DISPLAY SELECT' pushbuttons 2. Plant exerciser, selectable — 7 -day interval, adjustable 0-600 minutes, load or no-load with Failsafe (23K) 3. System Test Pushbutton {6B) 4. Maintained 2 -Position Test Switch "AUTO" and "MANUAL" (6D) 5. Maintained 4 -Position Test Switch "AUTO", "TEST', ENGINE START' and "OFF" {6H} 6. Bypass Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN) Pushbutton {8C} 7. Bypass Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE) Pushbutton {8D} 8. Maintenance Electrical Operator Isolator Switch. Provide a 2 -Position Selector Switch, maintained contact, marked: "OPERATE" and "DISABLE". {913} 9. A programmable Preferred Source Selector with LED light indication for "Utility to Utility" or "Utility to Generator" systems (10B) 10. A programmable Preferred Source Selector with LED light indication for "Generator to Generator" systems. Provides dual engine starting circuits {10D) 11. Alternative Transfer Mode of Operation Switch. Provide a 2 -Position Selector Switch, maintained contact, marked: "AUTOMATIC" and "NON- AUTOMATIC'. {29G) 12. Space heater rated for [400] watts {41A or C} H. The microprocessor -based controller shall contain the following input/output contacts: Two (2) Form A contacts for closure of the Generator start circuit. The contacts shall be of silver alloy with gold flashing. The contacts shall be rated for 5 -Amp at 250 -Vac and 5 -Amp at 30-Vdc.110b, 10d) 2. One (1) Form C contact for NORMAL Source Position. The contacts shall be rated for 10 -Amp at 250 -Vac and 10 -Amp at 30-Vdc. {15E) 3. One (1) Form C contact for EMERGENCY Source Position. The contacts shall be rated for 10 -Amp at 250 -Vac and 10 -Amp at 30-Vdc. {15F} Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-10 4. One (1) Form C contact for PRE -TRANSFER SIGNAL. The contacts shall be rated for 10 -Amp at 250 -Vac and 10 -Amp at 30-Vdc. {35A} 5. One (1) Form C contact for NORMAL Source Available. The contacts shall be rated for 10 -Amp at 250 -Vac and 10 -Amp at 30-Vdc. {14E} 6. One (1) Form C contact for EMERGENCY Source Available. The contacts shall be rated for 10 -Amp at 250 -Vac and 10 -Amp at 30-Vdc. {14F} 7. One (1) Form C contact for ALARM SIGNAL. The contacts shall be rated for 10 -Amp at 250 -Vac and 10 -Amp at 30-Vdc. 2.7 WIRING/TERMINATIONS A. Terminal blocks shall conform to NEMA ICS 4. Terminal facilities shall be arranged for entrance of external conductors from the top or bottom of the enclosure. The main transfer switch terminals shall be suitable for the termination of conductors shown on the plans. 2.8 CUSTOMER METERING {18} A. Where indicated on the drawings, provide a separate customer metering compartment with front hinged door and include the following: Current transformers where shown on the drawings or elsewhere specified shall be wired to shorting -type terminal blocks. 2. Fused potential taps as the potential source on for metering as shown on the drawings. B. Microprocessor -Based Metering System —Provide IQ -2250 in the switchboard for metering. 2.9 ENCLOSURE A. Each transfer switch shall be provided in a NEMA 3R enclosure suitable for use in environments indicated in the drawings. 1. Space heater rated for 400 watts 41A or C. 2.10 FINISH A. NEMA 1, 12 or 3R enclosures shall be painted with the manufacturer's standard light gray ANSI 61.paint. NEMA 4 or 4X shall be stainless steel, non -painted. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-11 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. 1. Insulation check to ensure the integrity of insulation and continuity of the entire system 2. Visual inspection to ensure that the switch matches the specification requirements and to verify that the fit and finish meet quality standards 3. Mechanical tests to verify that the switch's power sections are free of mechanical hindrances 4. Electrical tests to verify the complete electrical operation of the switch and to set up time delays and voltage sensing settings of the logic B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative to assist the contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section for a period of 1 working day. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. B. The contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-12 3.5 TRAINING A. The contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner's representatives for two normal workdays at a jobsite location determined by the owner. B. A manufacturer's qualified representative shall conduct the training session. The training program shall consist of the instruction on the operation of the assembly, circuit breakers and major components within the assembly. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the contractor. C. The equipment shall be installed and checked in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 FIELD SERVICE ORGANIZATION A. The manufacturer of the ATS shall also have a national service organization that is available throughout the contiguous United States and is available on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Specifications 263623-13 SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 52 00 - Emergency Lighting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast -Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts -for High -Intensity - Discharge and Low -Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple -Supply Type). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product of manufacturer. C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data. D. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating luminaire finish color where indicated in luminaire schedule. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. 1.5 MOCK-UP A. Locate where indicated on Drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTERIOR LIGHTING Specifications 26 51 00 -1 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each plastic lens type. B. Furnish one replacement lamps for every 2 lamps installed. C. Furnish two of each ballast type. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as indicated in lighting fixture schedule. 2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Product Description: Electronic ballastless than 20 percent THD, suitable for lamps specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage. 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Phillips. 3. Sylvania. 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings. D. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTERIOR LIGHTING Specifications 265100-2 F. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. G. Install wall -mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings. H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. I. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 33 using flexible conduit. J. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. K. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. L. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. B. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp luminaires at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTERIOR LIGHTING Specifications 265100-3 SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 7: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes exterior luminaries and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast -Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts -for High -Intensity - Discharge and Low -Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple -Supply Type). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard Product of manufacturer. B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each lamp type installed. B. Furnish 1/2 gallon of touch-up paint for each different painted finish and color. C. Furnish two ballasts for each lamp type installed. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Product Description: Complete exterior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as indicated in the lighting fixture schedule. Provide mounting pole as required in the schedule. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation EXTERIOR LIGHTING Specifications 26 56 00 -1 2.2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS A. Product Description: ANSI C82.4, high pressure sodium lamp ballast, suitable for lamp and environmental conditions specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage. 2.3 LAMPS - GENERAL A. Minimum Efficacy, Lamps Greater Than 100 Watts: 60 lumens/W, except where otherwise indicated or permitted by applicable code. 2.4 HID LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Philips Electronic North America. 3. Substitutions: Not Permitted. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Bond and ground luminaries and metal poles in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp luminaries having failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation EXTERIOR LIGHTING Specifications 265600-2 SECTION 27 05 23 TELEVISION SYSTEM PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes television antennas; television distribution equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Service entrance from local cable utility. B. Premises wiring for broadband distribution of television signal, including individual outlets. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Signal at each outlet: 3 dBmV across 75 ohms, minimum, plus 5 dB, minus 0 dB. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Show installation details, cable routing, and system configuration. C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each component. D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, adverse findings, and recommendations. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of outlets, devices, and cable routing. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for setting and tuning channels, and for basic trouble -shooting procedures. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 27 05 23 -1 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of project. B. Installer: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Contact utility company regarding charges related to service installation. Include utility charges in this contract. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 VHF ANTENNA A. Product Description: Single channel antenna for each channel required. B. Impedance: 75 ohm, gamma match. C. Antenna Type: 5 element Yagi type. D. Gain: 13 dB over tuned dipole. E. Front -to -Back Ratio: 20 dB, minimum. F. Beam Width: 52 degrees vertical x 63 degrees horizontal or 38 degrees vertical x 48 degrees horizontal, minus 3 dB. G. Return Loss: 17 dB, minimum over entire channel. H. Construction: Tubular metal elements. I. Mounting Hardware: Suitable for stacking; minimum separation, 1/2 wavelength. J. Wind Resistance: Withstand 100 mph wind. 2.2 VHF PREAMPLIFIER A. Product Description: Single channel pre -amplifier for each required channel. B. Impedance: 75 ohm. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 270523-2 C. Bandpass: 6 MHz, plus or minus 0.25 dB. D. Gain: 24 dB, minimum. E. Signal -to -Noise Ratio: 3 db maximum. F. Power Supply: Remote, impedance matched for 22 dB return loss, 0.2 dB through loss. Furnish 120 volt, single phase input. 2.3 CONVERTER A. Product Description: Solid-state, crystal -controlled converter for each UHF channel required, set to convert to VHF channel scheduled. B. Gain: 10 dB. C. Minimum Input Signal: minus 1.0 dBmV. D. Maximum Signal Without Distortion: 35 dBmV. E. Signal -to -Noise Ratio: 8 dB, minimum. F. Bandpass Flatness: 0.5 dB over channel. G. Power Supply: Furnish 120 volt, single phase input. 2.4 VHF AMPLIFIER A. Product Description: One single channel VHF amplifier with automatic gain control for each required channel, including converted UHF channels. B. Impedance: 75 ohm. C. Input Match: 11 dB return loss. D. Output Match: 13 dB return loss. E. Bandpass Flatness at Full Gain: plus or minus 1.5 dB. F. Gain: Adjustable, 35 to 55 dB. G. Output: 69.5 dBmV, maximum, for 0.5 dB synch compression. H. Noise at Maximum Gain: 7 db maximum. I. AGC Range: 40 dB, minimum. J. Power Supply: Furnish 120 volt, single phase input. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 270523-3 2.5 BANDPASS FILTER A. Product Description: One bandpass filter for each required channel when adjacent to another required channel. B. Impedance: 75 ohm. C. Insertion Loss: 3.5 dB, maximum. D. Bandpass Flatness: 1.5 dB. E. Selectivity: minus 55 dB at 9 MHz. 2.6 ATTENUATOR PADS A. Product Description: 75 ohm impedance attenuator pad, with bandwidth of 6 MHz., plus or minus 0.5 dB. 2.7 TAP A. Product Description: All -channel, back -matched tap. B. Recessed, suitable for mounting with standard duplex receptacle wall plate. C. Through Loss: 0.7 dB, maximum. D. Return Loss: 20 dB, maximum. E. Isolation: 12 dB. At each tap to meet specified performance. F. Connector: F type coaxial connector. 2.8 SPLITTER A. Product Description: In-line, channel, back -matched splitter. B. Through Loss: 3.5 dB for two-way; 6.7 dB for four-way. C. Isolation: 16 dB, minimum. 2.9 ANTENNA CABLE A. Product Description: RG 59/F. 2.10 DISTRIBUTION CABLE A. Main Distribution Cable: .500 B. Branch Distribution Cable: RG 59/F. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 270523-4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Connect cable television service in accordance with Cable Utility instructions. B. Install grounding of television system components and wiring in accordance with Section 27 05 26. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements and 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Measure signal level at each outlet. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer's field services. B. Supervise final adjustments and tuning of system. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust each antenna using field strength meter to orient for acceptable signal reception on all channels. C. Adjust amplifier gain and make other system adjustments to achieve specified output levels at each outlet. D. Adjust traps to eliminate spurious interference END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 270523-5 SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wire. 2. Mechanical connectors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. 1. BICSI TDM Manual - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual. B. California Electrical Code: 1. CEC - California Electrical Code. C. Telecommunication Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance: 1. TIA/EIA 607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Communications grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Building grounding electrode. B. Do not use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Building plumbing system. 2. Building gas system. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms maximum. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections. C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide grounding, surge protection and lightning protection of telecommunications system in accordance with latest version of Grounding, Bonding and Electrical Protection chapter of the BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and CEC. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-2 1.11 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. B. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Conductor: Copper conductor bare. C. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor bare. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Copperweld, Inc. 3. Erico, Inc. 4. ILSCO Corporation. 5. O -Z Gedney Co. 6. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 7. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove paint at connection points. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and CEC B. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-3 C. Install grounding for each rack using 6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor to copper communication grounding bus bar located in main telecommunications room. D. Bond main telecommunications grounding system to building grounding electrode system at main electrical service entrance location with 6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor. E. Install routing for grounding conductor as short and direct as practical. F. Install routing of bonding conductors with minimum number of bends and splices. Use sweeping bends. G. Install bonding connections with listed bolts, crimp pressure connectors, clamps, or lugs. H. Between each telecommunications/signal room, install multiple busbars directly bonded with 6 AWG copper conductor. I. Position busbars near associated equipment and insulate from supports. J. Construct busbars of copper, 4 inches x 8 inches by 1/4 inch thick with pilot holes for ground lug. K. Bond backbone cabling at each sheath opening. L. Ground data cabinets, racks, cable trays, and mounting hardware located in MDF Room and IDF Rooms. M. Install ground from each piece of equipment to MDF Room grounding bar via an insulated cable no smaller than 6 AWG stranded copper wire. Install proper grounding lug on cable where connecting to racks and grounding bar. N. Label grounding conductors and grounding bus bars in accordance with Section 27 05 53. O. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements and 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Visually inspect from each bus bar to main grounding electrode service location. C. Test in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and CEC. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-4 D. When improper grounding is found, check entire project and correct. Perform retest. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526-5 SECTION 27 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART7: GENERAL iK IVAILVA /_\til A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Sleeves. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Firestopping relating to electrical work. 6. Firestopping accessories. 7. Equipment bases and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section. 2. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 28 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electronic Safety and Security. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through - Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire -Resistive Joint Systems. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-1 B. FM Global: FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. C. California Electrical Code: CEC - California Electrical Code. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): WH - Certification Listings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping (Through -Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of Fre, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour Fre rating. B. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to FM and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-2 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers. C. Product Data: Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F -Ratings and temperature T -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. Wall Penetrations: Fire F -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F -Ratings and temperature T -Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 -hour. a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T -Rating is not required. B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non -Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-3 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section [with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials. D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-4 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. Electroline Manufacturing Company. 3. O -Z Gedney Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads. C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel. D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten. E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits. F. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F. Self locking. 2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. B -Line Systems. 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division. 4. Unistrut Corp. 5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.3 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Through Non -fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. C. Fire -stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. 2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-5 1. Thunderline Link -Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. 2.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products. 6. Specified Technology, Inc. 7. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Sheet metal. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish LIL listed products [or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-6 E. Non -Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water -stop type wall sleeve. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. C -W 41111111111119-:T40M.MV9670 A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts. 5. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 6. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-7 B. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with CEC. D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers. F. Supports: Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping. B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture. 3.5 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links. B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-8 C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. E. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. G. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements and 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. 3.7 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270529-9 SECTION 27 05 33 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART7: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. 4. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 5. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. 6. Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems. 7. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems. 8. Section 28 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC). B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-1 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole. C. Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes. D. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, pull, and junction boxes. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. F. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. G. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-2 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. illlt:�111114161 V a] Ii! F-, I I N] 04 A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03. C. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-3 2.2 2.3 B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Interlocked aluminum construction. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Interlocked aluminum construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-4 2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube. 2. Wheatland Tube Co. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type. 2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Cantex. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 80 PVC. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.6 OUTLET BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-5 2.7 C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26. F. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16. D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. E. In -Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC'. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-6 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough -in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26. B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29. C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53. D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29 provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29. H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. K. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-7 L. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. M. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. N. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. O. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes. P. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations to cast boxes. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. R. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. S. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic and expansion joints. T. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. U. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights. B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough -in to accommodate intended purpose. C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26. D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-8 G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. M. Support boxes independently of conduit. N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings. D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. 3.7 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270533-9 C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 33-10 SECTION 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. 7. Lockout Devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 2. Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function. B. Samples: 1. Submit two tags, actual size. 2. Submit two labels, actual size. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Specifications 27 05 53 -1 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices, include tag numbers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State or Public Work's standard. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install labels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish two containers of spray -on adhesive. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Product Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color. B. Letter Size: 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Specifications 270553-2 2.2 LABELS A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. 2.3 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. B. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams, shop drawings or drawings. 2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS A. Description: Nameplate fastened with straps Nameplate fastened with adhesive or labels fastened with adhesive. B. Color: 1. Telephone System: Blue lettering on white background. C. Legend: 1. Telephone System: TELEPHONE. 2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description: 12 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. 2.6 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Anodized aluminum or reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Specifications 270553-3 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Install identification on existing equipment to remain in accordance with this section. B. Install identification on unmarked existing equipment. C. Replace lost nameplates labels or markers. D. Re -stencil existing equipment. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting. B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panels in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates on all equipment, cabinet, racks and backboards: C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations, and device outlets. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. D. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, panelboards, distribution boards and each fixture junction boxes. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation as indicated on Drawings or shop drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Specifications 270553-4 E. Conduit or Raceway Marker Installation: 1. Install conduit or raceway marker for each conduit or raceway longer than 6 feet. 2. Conduit or Raceway Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center. 3. Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00. a. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet. b. Paint bands 20 feet on center. C. Color: 1) Telephone System: Green. 2) Power System: Brown for 480V and blue for 208V. F. Underground Warning Tape Installation: Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 12 inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Specifications 270553-5 SECTION 27 13 00 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL A. Scope of Document The purpose of this document is to provide infrastructure design and installation guidelines for the City of Newport Beach Telecom minications systems. The owner of these facilities will be referred to herein as "City of Newport Beach". These guidelines are both to encourage standardization of data all communication configurations and layouts as well as to provide basic information necessary to cabling contractors and installation firms wishing to bid for installation work within these facilities. These installers shall be referred within this document as "Contractor". The documentation includes: Product specifications, minimum product performance, structured cabling design considerations and installation guidelines and makes reference to current, accepted low -voltage cabling Standards. In all instances where Standards are cited, it is assumed Installer will have familiarity with and implicitly follow the recommendations of the most current version of the Standard referenced at the time of installation. Compliance with most current Standards is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Anywhere cabling Standards conflict with National or local electrical or safety codes, Contractor shall defer to NEC and any applicable local codes or ordinances, or default to the most stringent requirements listed by either. Knowledge and execution of applicable codes is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any code violations shall be remedied at the Contractor's expense. B. Scope of Work Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Construction Documents unless explicitly instructed otherwise by CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH. All deviations from this must be by written instruction from CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH. Contractor shall be solely responsible for all parts, labor, testing, documentation and all other associated processes and physical apparatus necessary to turn -over the completed system fully warranted and operational for acceptance by CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH. Contractor shall provide performance verification testing of all installed links using up-to-date and industry accepted test equipment appropriate Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-1 to the types of links being tested. All testers used shall be factory calibrated within one year of use with references set daily prior to testing. 4. Contractor shall provide valid test data in electronic format and hard copy indicating passing of all installed links according to applicable Standards cited under 'Regulatory Requirements' section of this document. CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH reserves the right to require more stringent test requirements than those cited in the Standards. Such requirements will be requested in writing prior to installation. 5. Final acceptance of the installation shall be in writing by CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH. 6. Contractor shall provide all equipment brands and models are specified within this document. C. Clarification of specifications and bid documents Quantities of telecommunications equipment, typical installation details, cable routing conventions and support structure types will be provided as an attachment to this document if applicable. 2. If bid documents on specific projects appear to be in conflict, Contractor shall obtain formal clarification in writing from CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH to resolve the conflict. PART 2: REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 2.1 REGULATORY REFERENCES A. The following industry standards are the basis for the structured cabling system described in this document. ANSI/TIA a. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 - Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, or most recent revision at the time of installation b. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 — Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards, or most recent revision at the time of installation c. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 - Balance Twisted Pair Communications and Components Standards, or most recent revision at the time of installation d. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-2 e. ANSI/TIA —942 -Telecommunications Infrastructure for Data Centers, or most recent revision at the time of installation f. TIA-569-B - Commercial Building Standard for Telecom Pathways and Spaces, or most recent revision at the time of installation g. ANSI/TIA-606-A — Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings, or most recent revision at the time of installation h. ANSI -J -STD -607-A - Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements, or most recent revision at the time of installation i. ANSI/TIA 1152 — Testing of Copper Links 2. National Electric Codes a. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) (IEEE C 2) b. National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA 70) 3. ISO/IEC a. ISO 11801 - Generic Cabling for Customer Premises 4. OSHA Standards and Regulations — all applicable 5. Local Codes and Standards — all applicable 6. BICSI a. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 12th Ed., or most recent revision at the time of installation. b. Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM), 5th Edition, , or most recent revision at the time of installation. 7. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation. 8. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor must be aware of local codes that may impact this project. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-3 2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cabling System Warranty A Cable Products Warranty shall provide a complete warranty to guarantee a high performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall include all cable installed in the structured cabling system. The Cable shall be warranted for a period of at least 25 years. B. PANDUIT System Warranty A Certification Plus System Warranty shall provide a complete system warranty to guarantee end-to-end high performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall include copper connectivity components. The system shall be warranted for a period of at least 25 years. C. Product Guarantee All General GenSpeed 6500 products have a 25 -year guarantee. When installed per current TIA or ISO/IEC standards, the General GenSpeed 6500 Cabling System will operate the application(s) for which the system was designed to support. In order to qualify for the guarantee, the structured cabling system must be installed per the following: a. Meet all current ANSI/TIA telecommunications cabling Standards b. Panduit will provide a single source solution for the end-to-end installation C. Panduit Products must be installed per Panduit instruction sheets by a. certified Installer with minimum agreement of Panduit Certified Installer by Panduit Corp. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 60 miles of project. The Electrical/Telecommunications contractor must be Panduit Corp. approved for cabling and fiber solutions —who also is certified to install Warrantee -able solution by Panduit Corp.. A copy of certification documents for each must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid. The ElectricaI/Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the Panduit cabling solutions Certified Program. Manufacturer (Panduit) will extend a 25 -year Static, Dynamic and Applications Warranty to the end user once the Electrical/Telecommunications contractor fulfills all requirements under the Panduit Cabling Solutions Certified Program. At least 30 Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-4 percent of the installation and termination crew must be certified by Panduit for copper installation.. Also, Panduit must certify 10 percent of the installation and termination crew for optical fiber installation. Note: All Networks shall be installed per applicable standards and manufacturer's guidelines. If any General GS6500 product fails to perform as stated above, PANDUIT will provide new components at no charge. THis guarantee is made in lieu of and excludes all other warrantEEs, expressed or implied. The implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular use are specifically excluded. Neither seller nor manufacturer shall be liable for any other injury, loss or damage, whether direct or consequential. PART 3: QUALTY ASSURANCE 3.1 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Any contractor offering a proposal for an CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH data center project must meet the minimum requirements listed below. Contractors shall also provide written, hard copy documentation of these qualifications with their proposals. Be a Panduit Corp. PCI (Panduit Certified Installer) Design and Installation Contractor. 2. Have on staff an RCDD or equivalent, with equivalency being at the sole discretion of Panduit Corp. 3. Have a minimum of 15 years in the communications structured cabling business. 4. Have design and installation of communications structured cabling systems as their primary line of business. 3.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide a Panduit Certification Plus System Warranty on all installed copper and fiber permanent links. Such warranty shall provide a complete system warranty to guarantee high end-to-end performance for all applications designed to operate over the class of cabling installed. The guarantee shall include all connectivity components and cable within the permanent link and cover the system for duration of 25 years. 3.3 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved UTP 4 -pair Cable: Panduit Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-5 Approved Optical Fiber Cable manufacturer: Panduit 2. Approved UTP connector product manufacturer: Panduit 3. Approved Fiber Optic cabinet product manufacturer: Panduit 4. Approved Fiber Optic connectors/splices/couplers: Panduit 5. Approved Rack and Cabinet manufacturer: Panduit 6. Approved Patch Panel manufacturer: Panduit 7. Approved UTP Patch Cord manufacture: Panduit PART 4: PART 4 PRODUCTS 4.1 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS A. Panduit shall manufacture all products, including but not limited to cable management, faceplates, copper modules, patch panels, racks, 110 blocks, patch cords, labels, grounding lugs and fiber connectivity products for the purpose of this document. B. Panduit Corp. shall manufacture all data/telecommunication and fiber optic cable. 4.2 SUBSTITUTIONS — (NO EXCEPTIONS) A. This is a performance-based single source solution. Therefore, substitutions are highly discouraged. Substitutions must follow the same rigid standards for quality and termination style as those described in section 2.3 and 2.5. B. Any Contractor wishing to offer structured cabling products other than those specified herein shall submit a request for product substitution in writing no less than 14 days in advance of bid. Written requests for substitution shall be accompanied by all drawings, specification sheets and engineering documents, as well as third party laboratory performance test results proving equivalency in performance and manufacturing style. C. This written documentation shall be accompanied by samples of the substitution product offered for evaluation. Equal product acceptance must be received in writing. D. Contractor shall be responsible and assume all costs for removal and replacement of any subsitiuted product installed without prior written approval. Such costs shall include, but not limited to labor, materials as well as any peanalties, fees or costs incurred for late completion. E. Documentation: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-6 Installation documentation must include "as built' drawings. These drawings shall be supplied to the District Office no later than two weeks after completion of the DATACOM installation. Each wall plate shall have a mechanically produced label for visible identification of port number (Panduit Label maker LS9). Hand written identification will not be acceptable. Each outlet will need to be documented on "as built'. Any deviation from the manufactures specifications and guidelines must be noted and submitted by the vendor in writing. F. Standards & Codes Compliance: Equipment, devices, apparatus, systems and installation provided shall be entirely suitable and safe for each intended application and be in full compliance with applicable standards, requirements, rules, regulations, codes, statutes, ordinances, etc. of municipal, county, state and federal governments. 2. The installation must meet all industry standards and practices. Included but not limited to the following: a. American National Standards Institute / Telecommunications Industries Association Standards. b. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BiCSi) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, Version 12 or most current version at the time of installation. C. Electrical and Cabling materials and components shall be U.L. approved. d. All work must comply with current OSHA regulations and with the National Electrical Code. e. All materials, equipment, parts and pieces shall be new. No used, rebuilt, or refurbished material, equipment, parts and pieces shall be accepted. G. Installation: All cabling must be installed to the latest ANSI/TIA Standards and follow all recommendations within the BICSI Information Systems Transport Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM) 5th Edition or most recent revision at the time of installation. . Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-7 2. All conduit installation must meet all state and local codes. 3. Debris, boxes, leftover cables and trash must be removed from construction site upon completion of work. 4. Unless otherwise noted, all exposed wiring in furnished rooms shall be installed in wiremold surface raceway. No exposed cabling in classrooms. 5. Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway or conduit. 6. Use pulling lubricant or compound, where necessary, pulling compound must be water based pulling lubricant that will not deteriorate cable or conduit. 7. No splicing of Data cable is allowed. 8. All wire must meet or exceed national Electrical Code for PVC and Plenum wire. All wire and cable to be furnished and installed by Contractor. 9. All cabling shall be pulled in the highest point possible in the interstitial space above the accessible ceiling space. No cabling is allowed to rest on any ceiling tile or suspension system. 10. If more than one cable is run parallel with another, they must be hung every 5 ft. for support by drive rings or some sort of wire management. The cables must be secured with tie -wraps to the structure every 30 feet. 11. All cable / cabling shall be kept 30 inches away from any heat source; i.e. steam valves, etc. All cables / cabling shall be kept away from moveable mechanical equipment: i.e., dampers, valves, pneumatic tubes, etc. -- thirty (30) inches. 12. Data wiring must be at least: Five (5) inches from power lines 2kVA or less, Twelve (12) inches from fluorescent lighting and power lines 2 and RVA, Thirty-six (36) inches from power lines greater than RVA, Forty (40) inches from transformers and motors. 13. Where High Voltage is present in interstitial space, cables shall be kept away from the conduits as far as possible. Where possible, cables must cross AC power at 90 -degree angles. 14. Fire and smoke partition and wall penetrations must be sleeved with conduit. 15. Cables shall be pulled free of sharp bends or kinks. Cables shall not be pulled across sharp edges. Cables shall not be forced or jammed between metal parts, assemblies, etc. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-8 16. Cables shall not be pulled across access doors and pull box covers. Access to all equipment and systems must be maintained. 17. Termination of cables shall be of a high level of workmanship and satisfy Cat. 6 specifications for termination. 18. All UTP cable runs shall be less than 310 ft. and rated by the manufacturer to be certified for the latest compliance standard. 4.3 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. The Senior center Project consists of 3 closets 1 MDF and 2 IDF's. The individual characteristics of each location is noted below. Please note that these items are manufacturer recommendations. If said contractor believes other Panduit branded products are better suited for the installation please feel free to list them on your bid submission for consideration by the City of Newport Beach. B. The MDF will have 29 drops Part Number Quantity Description CMR19x84 1 19" rack CPPA48FMWBLY 1 48 port 2RU angled Patch Panel PRV6 2 6" cable manager front only PRD6 2 Vertical Cable manger Door NCMHF2 1 2" horizontal wire manager FRME1 U 1 Fiber Enclosure for FAPs CJ688TGBU 29 Cath Jacks FAP6WBUDLCZ 2 6 LC fiber termination panels for OM2 50um F5B10-NM1Y 24 Fiber Pigtails simplex FXE10-10M2Y 12 Fiber Patch Cords C. IDF 1 will have 117 drops Part Number Quantity Description CMR19x84 1 19" rack CPPA48FMWBLY 3 48 port 2RU angled Patch Panel PRV6 2 6" cable manager front only PRD6 2 Vertical Cable manger Door NCMHF2 1 2" horizontal wire manager FRME1 U 1 Fiber Enclosure for FAPs CJ688TGBU 117 Cath Jacks FAP6WBUDLCZ 1 6 LC fiber termination panels for OM2 50um F5B10-NM1Y 12 Fiber Pigtails simplex FXE10-10M2Y 6 Fiber Patch Cords D. IDF2 will have 31 drops Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-9 Part Number Quantity Description PZAEWM3 1 Wall Mount Rack CPP48FMWBLY 1 48 port 2RU Patch Panel NCMHF2 1 2" horizontal wire manager CMDSBLLCBL 1 PKG Fiber minioom Jacks CJ688TGBU 31 Cat6 Jacks CMDJLCTG 6 Dupl LC Sr./Jr. Fiber Adapter EI With Module TG F5B10-NM1Y 12 Fiber Pigtails simplex FXE10-10M2Y 6 Fiber Patch Cords E. Additional items - 1. OM2 fiber (2 runs of 6 strands each from MDF to each IDF. Use General OSP Fiber part number CG0064M1A-DWB. All fiber will be in conduit therefore Plenum rated is not necessary.. Lengths TBD by contractor. 2. 177 faceplates and - 254 jacks will be required part number UICFP21W and CJ688TGBU respectively Inclide Pandut Part CHB21W-X Mini Com Insert. Contact the City of Newport Beach for the exact quantity for each item. 3. 1 25 pair voice rated cable (each) will also be required from the mdf to each idf. Terminate the copper on the backboard in the mdf and each idf utilizing Panduit 110 block part number GPKBW144Y (qty of 3) General Cable Cat 3 Part number 2133033. 4. Patch cords will be supplied by the City of Newport Beach for this project. F. Copper Cable: 1. Recommended design shall include: a. Minimum one Four -pair 100 ohm, 23 AWG, UTP cable—Category 6 for data b. Maximum cable length is 90 meter C. All cable shall meet or exceed the following specifications Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-10 The General GS6500 Copper Cable or equivalent shall be used for the horizontal cabling subsystem. These requirements are for cables of unshielded 23 AWG bare copper conductors, insulated with thermoplastic, twisted into pairs and enclosed in a thermoplastic jacket. The finished cable shall exceedthe following requirements of the EIA -568-B.2. and ISO 11801 edition 2.0 for class cable requirements. All cable shall conform to the requirements for communications circuits defined by the National Electrical Code (Article 800) and the Canadian Building Code. Cable listed to NEC Article 800-51(a) will be used for "Plenum" installations and carry labeling of CMP. Cable listed to NEC Article 800-51(b) shall be installed in vertical runs penetrating more than one floor and carry the labeling of CMR. The cable manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 registered. As a minimum, every Master Reel shall be tested for Attenuation, Pair to Pair and Power Sum Crosstalk, Impedance, and RL. Testing shall be performed using a sweep test method to category 6 (500) MHZ. All testing shall be done in accordance with ASTM D 4566. A test report is provided indicating the Master reel number, the date of the test, and test results for RL, Attenuation, Crosstalk. Power Sum may be listed as Pass/Fail. Characteristic impedance shall be shown for each pair. G. Jacket Fire rating: Non -Plenum: Flame -Retardant PVC Plenum: Low -Smoke, Flame -Retardant PVC Part Number Category Colors 7133800 (Blue) TX6 Riser 4 7133801 (White) TX6 Riser 4 7131800 (Blue) TX6 Plenum 4 7131801 (White) TX6 Plenum 4 H. General Cable Voice Grade Cat 3 25 pair Part Number Category Colors 2133033 TX3 Riser Gray Fiber Optic Cable: Fiber Cable Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-11 When using optical fiber cables, any length of horizontal cables, work area cables, patch cords, and equipment cables is acceptable so long as the total of the combined lengths does not exceed 100m (328 ft). When installing per TS1372, the maximum cable length may not exceed 300m (984 ft.). Transmission is typically at 850nm for 1 gig OM2 at.62.5pm multimode optical fiber. 50pm OM2 OFL 1G optical fiber Wavelength Maximum Attenuation (nm) (dB/km) 850/1310 2.5 Minimum Information Transmission Capacity (MHz -km) 500 Part Number I Description AQ0064M1A-DWB I OSP OM2 6 strand fiber cable *General OSP cable Fiber Optic Hardware The PANDUIT FAP termination panels shall be used for the connectivity between IDF's and the MDF in all racks that have fiber terminations. The FAPs shall be installed in a fru fiber enclosure. The network cabling system shall be comprised of PANDUIT Opticam connectors in support of Cisco Switch inter -connectivity Panduit OM2 fiber for 1G tranmission utilizing multimode (50.0/ um only) ) glass fiber cabling. All interconnection points are to use Panduit fiber tenclosures as required as noted below. Enclosures Part Number Description FRME1 U 1 U fiber Tray FCE4U 4U fiber Tray FAPB Blanking Panels *denotes length Opticam Termination Kit Part Number Desch FCAMKIT Opticam termination kit Mini -Com Jacks LC Part Number IDescription CMDSBLLCBL LC Fiber Jack FAP Panels Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-12 FAP Panels consist of 6, 8 or 12 ports of fiber connectivity. Part Number Description FAP6WBLDLC 6 LC FAP Duplex multimode CJ688TGXX ada ter for 50/125um -Black FAPBWBLDLC 8 LC FAP Duplex multimode ada ter for 50/125um -Black FAP12WBLDLC 12 LC FAP Duplex multimode adapter for 50/125um -Black Termination Hardware (Data Jacks Copper): Category 6 Enhanced Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Four -pair Category 6 UTP cabling shall be terminated onto a four -pair Category 6 module. All modules shall be terminated using the T568B (B) wiring scheme. The eight -position module shall exceed the connector requirements of the TIA Category 6 standard. The jack termination to 4 -pair, 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be accomplished by use of a forward motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a punchdown or insertion tool. Part Number Style Category Colors CJ688TGXX RJ45 6 11 "Denotes color Faceplates: • The faceplate shall be ivory and labeled above each jack; numbers shall coincide with patch panel numbers. • Provide dust covers for each blank outlet. Typical CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH Faceplate Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes. Panduit Part # UICFP2IW Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-13 Patch Panels Standard MiniCom Patch Panels Part Number Description Flat patch panels CP24BLY Flat 24 port all metal 1 RU CP48BLY Flat 48 port all metal 2RU High Density patch panels CPPA48HDWBLY Angled 48 port in 1 RU CPP48HDWBLY Flat 48 port in 1 RU Additional Angled Patch Panel CPPA24FMWBLY Angled 24 port in 1 RU CPAA48FMWBLY Angled 48 port in 2 RU Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-14 Equipment Enclosures: PART 5 CABLING RACKS, CABINETS AND MANAGERS Racks The telecommunications rack shall be constructed of extruded aluminum and capable of accepting 19" wide EIA equipment. Rack construction method shall ensure an electrically bonded structure for ease of grounding. The rack shall be UL listed for 1,000 lbs. load rating. The equipment mounting rails shall be double -sided with #12-24 EIA universal mounting -hole spacing. The equipment mounting rails shall include printed rack space identification on the front and back and be numbered from top to bottom. The channel of the rack shall be capable of mounting Panduit NETRUNNERTM or PATCHRUNNERTP° Vertical Cable Managers. 24 #12- 24 mounting screws shall be included with the rack. Go here for more information on two rail racks. Two rail racks used in CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH data centers shall be: Part Number Description CMR19X84 Panduit 19" EIA rack, aluminum. Dimensions: 84.0" H x PRV6 20.3" W x 3.0"D. 2134mm x 514mm x 76mm . Vertical Cable Managers The 7 foot vertical cable manager shall consist of a metal backbone with cable management fingers that align with EIA rack spacing. The fingers shall be molded out of plastic and provide integral bend radius control throughout the entire length. Individual fingers shall be able to be removed without the aid of a tool. The backbone shall have pass through holes with rolled edges that provide bend radius control. The manager shall accept a metal, hinged door that can open to the right or left. The manager shall accept plastic slack management spools that can be repositioned as required. The vertical panel shall be able to manage all the cable on the rack without the aid of horizontal cable managers. Go here for more information on vertical cable managers. Vertical cable managers for CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH data centers shall be: Part Number Description Vertical cable manager, spools are not included. PRV6 Dimensions: 84"H x 6"W x 16.4"D 2133.6mm x 152.4mm x 416.6mm Vertical cable manager includes four PRSP7 slack PRV8 spools. Dimensions: 83.9" H x 8.0" W x 16.4" D 2131 mm x 203mm x 417mm Vertical cable manager includes four PRSP7 slack PRV10 spools. Dimensions: 83.9"H x 10.0"W x 16.4"D 2131 mm x 253mm x 417mm Vertical cable manager includes four PRSP7 slack PRV12 spools. Dimensions: 83.9"H x 12.0"W x 16.4"D 2131 mm x 305mm x 417mm Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-15 Horizontal Cable Managers The high capacity horizontal cable managers shall be capable of managing high performance cable on the front and rear of any 19" EIA rack. The high capacity horizontal cable managers shall be molded plastic with bend radius fingers that protect the cable. The fingers shall be inset towards the rack to allow easy access to patch cords and terminations. Standard pass through holes shall incorporate bend radius control. Dual hinged covers shall allow access to the cable pathway. Go here for more information on horizontal cable managers. Horizontal cable managers for CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH data centers shall be: Part Number Description NM2 2 RU manager, front and rear. Dimensions: 3.5"H x SRB19BLY 19.0"W x 13.1"D 88mm x 482mm x 332mm NCMHF2 2 RU manager, Front Only. Dimensions 3.5H x 19.0"W x 3.7"D 88mm x 483mm x 95mm Cable Support Bars Each patch panel shall include mounted behind it one "towel rack" style cable support bar for each 24 connections to which Contractor shall dress cables using hook and loop type cable ties. Go here for more information on cable support bars. Cable support bars for CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH data centers shall be: Part Number Description Cable strain relief bar extends 2" off of the rack to SRB19BLY support cables in punch -down or modular patch panel applications Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-16 Rack Installation Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes. Part Number Description CMR19x84 19" rack PRD6 6" wide vertical manager FRME1 U 1 RU fiber enclosure NCMHF2 2 RU front only horizontal cable manager Wallmount Enclosures Part Number Description PZAEWM3 Wall Mount Enclosure OVERHEAD/UNDERFLOOR CABLE ROUTING Contractor shall be responsible for sizing all pathways such that newly installed cable represents not more than a 35% fill as per manufacturer's directions. Overfilled pathways are the sole responsibility of the Contractor who shall remove and reinstall at Contractors expense. Overhead Cable Routing — Metal Ladder Rack Overhead cable distribution overhead shall be done using a layered system comprised of steel Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-17 ladder rack in combination with a plastic trough system. If there is a ladderrack requirment you can utilize a Hoffman or Chatsworth ladder rack system. Overhead Cable Routing — Panduit FiberRunner Cable Routing System -if necessary Overhead cable distribution plastic trough shall be the Panduit FiberRunner cable routing system — color BLACK. This system shall be a comprised of channel, fittings, and brackets designed to segregate, route, and protect fiber optic and high performance copper cabling. Channel and fittings shall be assembled using pre -assembled couplers. A selection of spill -out options shall be available that easily attach using the vertical tee. Fittings all fittings shall maintain a minimum 2" bend radius to protect against signal loss due to excessive cable bends. Available system colors shall be yellow, orange, and black. A full complement of mounting hardware shall be available for attaching system components to ladder rack, threaded rod, auxiliary framing, strut, equipment racks and raised floor pedestals. For more information on FiberRunner overhead cable routing system go here. Routing system shall be available off-the- shelf in sizes 2x2, 4x4, 6x4, 12x4, 24x4 and in colors yellow, orange or black. See Figure 1 below. FiberRunner is available in Yellow, Black or Orange Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-18 Fiber Optic Patch Cords: The modular connectors and patch cords will be chosen to match the horizontal cabling medium and rating. The same manufacturer shall provide the modular connectors and patch cords. The total patch cord length at the work area is not to exceed 3 meters (10 ft). Exception: When implementing an open office cabling system as specified under ANSI/TIA 568 C.1 (see section 3.4). Fiber Optics Optical Fiber Cable: Panduit Corp. FSDP5xxxY Efficient packaging of higher fiber counts Lightweight and easy to handle during installation Cable design and flexible buffer tubes allow for quick breakout and ease of routing High quality buffering offers ease of stripping while maintaining optical performance Sheath markings provide positive identification and length verification Extends life cycle and reduces cost of ownership Low attenuation designs increase network reliability and performance Multimode/singlemode hybrid designs extend life cycle and reduce cost of ownership Indoor/outdoor designs meet specific application requirements Higher fiber count cable provides application flexibility The PANDUIT Mini -Com® Network Cabling System shall be used for the Work Area subsystem, including all modular connectors. The network cabling system shall be comprised of PANDUIT Fiber Optic modular work area adapters in support of high-speed networks and applications designed for implementation on multimode (both 62.5/125 and 50/125 pm) glass fiber cabling. All outlets shall utilize interchangeable and individual connector modules that mount side by side to facilitate quick and easy moves, adds, and changes. Approved components of the Fiber Termination Hardware for the Work Area Subsystem shall include but are not limited to: • LC Style Connectors Panduit LC Optical Fiber Patch Cords shall be constructed from high performance 50/125µm multimode cable and LC duplex connectors with ceramic ferrules. Integral boots shall be provided to provide strain relief and help maintain consistent polarity. They shall come in standard lengths. Fiber Patch Cords/pigtails Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-19 Part Number Description F6E10-10M*Y LC to LC 62.5 Duplex Patch cord F5B10-NM*Y LC to Pigtail simplex *denotes length. Fiber Optic Termination Hardware: Panduit Rack Mount and Wall Mounted fiber optic enclosures shall be shall be capable of doubling the capacity by increasing fiber cable density within the allotted space when using LC connections. Enclosures shall provide patch cable protection. Enclosures shall protect fiber optic connections for patching or splicing requirements. Rack Mount Enclosures Ordering Information Part Dimensions Capacity Number 1.73"H x 17.60"W x 16.03"D Four QuickNet Cassettes, FCE1 U (43.9mm x 447.Omm x FAP adapter panels or 414.Omm) FOSM splice modules 1.74"H x 17.00"W x 14.20"D Holds up to three FAP or FRME1 U (44.Omm x 432.0mm x FMP adapter panels or 361.Omm) FOSM splice modules. 3.48"H x 17.60"W x 16.30"D Eight QuickNet Cassettes, FCE2U (88.4mm x 447.Omm x FAP adapter panels or 414.Omm) FOSM splice modules 6.98"H x 17.60"W x 16.30"D Twelve QuickNet FCE4U (177.Omm x 447.Omm x Cassettes, FAP adapter 414.Omm) panels or FOSM splice modules Fiber optic cables shall be terminated in rack or wall mounted Fiber Optic Termination Boxes, (FOTB), of sufficient size to permit termination of all fiber strands. In the event that an enclosure must be oversized (number of termination ports) due to manufacturer's product standardization, the next larger available enclosure size shall be specified. Only one Fiber Optic Termination Box in each termination location is desired. • Adapter plates, which accommodate LC type connectors, shall be specified for all available spaces within each Fiber Optic Termination Box. Multimode Receptacle Couplers shall be included in all ports of each adapter plate. All couplers shall be treaded. • All glass strands of each strands of each fiber optic cable shall be terminated on Panduit FAPs. The connectors have the following characteristics: Multimode, FDDI compliant; LC style 2.5mm bayonet connector; Zirconium oxide (ceramic) ferrule; Low loss - 0.6 db Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-20 (typical); Long strain relief boot. All fiber optic terminations shall be fusion spliced to the individual termination (fap) in the enclosure. • Fiber optic couplings shall be the same manufacturer as the fiber optic termination boxes used. • Patch panels shall be designed for mounting in standard 19" racks. Testing and Acceptance General All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the requirements of ANSI/TIA 1152 AND ANSI/TIA- 568 C.2. All pairs of each installed cable shall be verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed. All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document, the ANSI/TIA standards, the PANDUIT® Certification PlusSM System Warranty guidelines and best industry practice. If any of these are in conflict, the Contractor shall bring any discrepancies to the attention of the project team for clarification and resolution. Copper Channel Testing All twisted -pair copper cable links shall be tested for compliance to the requirements in ANSI/TA 1152 and ANSI/TIA 568-C.2 11 for the appropriate Category of cabling installed. Fiber Testing All installed fiber shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/TIA-C.0 AND ANSI/TIA- 3.3 For horizontal cabling system using multimode optical fiber, attenuation shall be measured in one direction at either 850 nanometer (nm) or 1300 nm using an LED light source and power meter. Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm (or 1310 and 1550 nm for single mode) in Both directions. Test set-up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/568-C.0 Standard, Method B. Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, the Contractor shall test each link Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-21 from end to end to ensure the performance of the system. ONLY BASIC LINK LOSS TEST IS REQUIRED. The contractor can optionally install patch cords to complete the circuit and then test the entire channel. The test method shall be the same used for the test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be those defined in the ANSI/TIA 568-C.3 Standard. Attenuation testing shall be performed with a stable launch condition using two -meter jumpers to attach the test equipment to the cable plant. The light source shall be left in place after calibration and the power meter moved to the far end to take measurements. System Documentation Upon completion of the installation, the telecommunications contractor shall provide three (3) full documentation sets to the Engineer/End User for approval. Documentation shall include the items detailed in the sub -sections below. Documentation shall be submitted within ten (10) working days of the completion of each testing phase. This is inclusive of all test results and draft as -built drawings. Draft drawings may include annotations done by hand. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be submitted within 30 working days of the completion of each testing phase. At the request of the Engineer, the telecommunications contractor shall provide copies of the original test results. The Engineer may request that a 10% random field re -test be conducted on the cable system, at no additional cost, to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined above. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the telecommunications contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the Engineer, including a 100% re -test. This re- test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Test Results documentation shall be provided in electronic format within three weeks after the completion of the project. The media shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover with the words "Project Test Documentation", the project name, and the date of completion (month and year). The results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and cable (or outlet) I.D., measurement direction, reference setup, and crew member name(s). The test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version and last calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless the manufacturer specifies a more frequent calibration cycle, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and the specific settings of the equipment during the test as well as the software version being used in the field test equipment. The field test equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C series of Standards. The appropriate and most current level tester shall be used to verify Category 6 cabling systems. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire (or fiber) test instrument shall be Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-22 submitted as part of the documentation package. Alternately, the telecommunications contractor may furnish this information in electronic form. The media shall contain the electronic equivalent of the test results as defined by the specification along with the software necessary to view and evaluate the test reports. When repairs and re -tests are performed, the problem found and corrective action taken shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be documented. The As -Built drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Their sequential number as defined elsewhere in this document shall identify outlet locations. Numbering, icons, and drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation provided. The Owner will provide floor plans in paper and electronic (DWG, AutoCAD rel. 14) formats on which as -built construction information can be added. These documents will be modified accordingly by the telecommunications contractor to denote as -built information as defined above and returned to the Owner. The Contractors shall annotate the base drawings and return a hard copy (same plot size as originals) and electronic (AutoCAD rel. 14) form Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-23 Grounding and Bonding This section is for contractor reference and can be used for this and future installations. A Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be located at the service entrance. A Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be located in each telecommunications space. The TGB will be grounded/earthed to the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). The TMGB shall be bonded to building steel and grounded/earthed to the electrical service ground according to J -STD -607-A guidelines. Each TGB shall be bonded to building steel and the electrical panel serving equipment in the telecommunications space. The gauge of the connecting ground/earth cable, known as the Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) will follow J -STD -607-A guidelines, as is shown in the table below. Sizing of the TBB TBB Length in Linear meters feet TBB Size AWG Less than 4 13 6 4-6(14-20) 4 6-8(21-26) 3 8-10 27-33 2 10-13 34-41 1 13-16 42-52 1/0 16-20 53-66 2/0 Greater than 20 66 3/0 Route the TBB to each TGB in as straight a path as possible. The TBB should be installed as a continuous conductor, avoiding splices where possible. Use PANDUIT part number series HTWC to tap into the TBB where necessary. When more than one TBB is used, bond them together using the TGBs on the top floor and every third floor in between with a conductor known as a grounding equalizer (GE). Use the J -STD -607-A guidelines for sizing of the TBB when sizing the GE (shown in the table above). Components, Kits and Hardware PANDUIT® StructuredGroundTm Grounding System (Structured Earth TM Earthing System) kits, components, and hardware shall be used to construct the grounding/earthing system. Use PANDUIT GB4 series BICSI/J-STD-607-A telecommunications grounding busbars for the TMGB, which is ideally located at the AC service entrance. Use a PANDUIT GB2 series busbar for the TGB in each of the other telecommunications/equipment spaces throughout the building. Use PANDUIT LCC -W series lugs when connecting conductors to the TMGB and TGB. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-24 Construction of the Grounding/Earthing System Avoid routing grounding/earthing conductors in metal conduits. If the grounding/earthing conductor must be routed through a metal conduit, bond each end of the conduit to the grounding/earthing conductor. Use PANDUIT GIRL series grounding clamps to bond to the conduit, a PANDUIT HTWC HTAP with clear cover to bond to the grounding/earthing conductor, and a #6 AWG copper conductor to connect the GPL grounding clamp to the HTWC HTAP. In telecommunications spaces with a small number of racks or cabinets, it may be most convenient to bond the grounding/earthing jumper cable directly to the TGB. Larger spaces require a mesh Common Bonding Network, as described below. Cable Sizes for Other Grounding/Earthing Applications Not Specifically Described Elsewhere in This Document Purpose Copper Code Cable Size Aisle grounds (overhead or under floor) of the common bonding network #2 AWG Bonding conductor to each PDU or panel board serving the room. Size per NEC 250.122 & manufacturer recommendations Bonding conductor to HVAC equipment #6 AWG Building columns #4 AWG Cable ladders and trays #6 AWG Conduit, water pipe, duct #6 AWG Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-25 Ladder Rack Bonding Ladder racks shall be bonded per the manufacturer's installation instructions. The bond shallbe made in accordance with Figure 3 below to the mesh Common Bonding Network. 6 AWG, 2 -hole compression lug PANDUIT Part #: LCC6- 14JAW U Drill Holes in Rack Hardware Required: (4) Screws, #1/4-20 X 3/4' (4) Nuts, ''/d' (4) Lock washers, ''/4" (4) Flat washers, Yd' Ick and mts. DUIT th j L%jUTlJIIIGI IL QI IW fUIi O JI IQII uc I/VI HIGU 111 UIi Wi UUTJ iU YYILII PHU IIIG LIIV VJ Nicaa.ribed in ANSI/TIA-942, as is shown in figure 4 below. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-26 Aisle Ground �y fi=o Common Bonding Network Jumper (Alternate Location) Paint Piercing Grounding Washer Electrostatic Rack Ground Strip Discharge (ESD) Port Standard Equipment Rack Network Equipment Equipment Jumper Common Bonding Network3:= 'Common Bonding e .Network Jumper Figure 4 - Properly Grounded/Earthed Rack (Back of Rack Shown) To provide electrical continuity between rack elements, PANDUIT paint piercing grounding washers, series RGW, shall be used where rack sections bolt together, on both sides, under the head of the bolt and between the nut and rack. All racks shall utilize a full-length rack ground strip, PANDUIT series RGS, attached to the rear of the side rail with the thread -forming screws provided to ensure metal - to -metal contact. Mount an electrostatic discharge (ESD) port kit, PANDUIT series RGESD, directly to the rack grounding strip on the back of the rack at approximately 48 inches from the floor. Mount a second RGESD directly to the vertical mounting rail of the rack in the Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-27 front at approximately the same height. Use the thread -forming screws provided to form a bond to the rack. Place the ESD protection identification stickers directly above the ESD ports. When the equipment manufacturer provides a location for mounting a grounding connection, that connection shall be utilized. Use the appropriate PANDUIT RG series jumper for the equipment being installed and the thread -forming screws provided in the kit. Use PANDUIT part number series RGCBNJ (Common Bonding Network Jumper) to attach the rack ground strip to the mesh CBN. This kit includes the #6 AWG cable with one factory installed two -hole lug and hardware to connect to the busbar and one HTAP to connect to the mesh CBN. In addition, all components can be utilized ii your mesh common bonding network is below or overhead. Do not bond racks or cabinets serially. Use the copper compression HTAP that comes with the kit to bond the conductor directly to the mesh common bonding network. Patch panels will be bonded to racks using the PANDUIT bonding screws, part number RGTBSG-C for racks having #12-24 equipment mounting holes, and RGTBSM6G-C for racks having M6 equipment mounting holes. Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing If the racks already have network equipment installed, it may not be feasible to install the rack ground strip without disrupting data cables. Further, it may be undesirable to disassemble rack hardware to install paint piercing grounding washers, or in some cases, the construction of the rack may make grounding washer installation impossible. In these circumstances, the PANDUIT Retrofit Rack Grounding Kits, PANDUIT part family RGR, are to be installed. For retrofit rack grounding/earthing installations, use PANDUIT part number RGRKCBNJY to ground/earth the rack to the mesh common bonding network. Use PANDUIT part number RGREJ696Y (provided with #6 AWG grounding conductor) or PANDUIT part number RGREJ1096Y (provided with #10 AWG grounding conductor) to ground/earth equipment chassis to the rack grounding busbar provided with the RGRKCBNJY as is shown in figure 6 below. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-28 Rack Grounding Bush Network Equip Grounding Jumper Grounding Jumper Figure 6 - Retrofit Rack Grounding/Earthing To provide electrical continuity between cabinet rails, PANDUIT rail jumper kit, series CGJ, shall be used to bond the front and rear equipment mounting rails. It may not be feasible or may be undesirable to disassemble the cabinet to install the paint piercing washers. Using the rail jumper kits is a more cost effective way to bond the equipment mounting rails together. All cabinets shall utilize a full-length rack ground strip, PANDUIT series RGS, Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-29 attached to the four mounting rails using the thread -forming screws provided to ensure metal -to -metal contact. All cabinets shall utilize a copper busbar, PANDUIT part number RGR1319U, as a main collection point before connecting to the common bonding network (CBN). The busbar can be mounted at the top or the bottom of the cabinet depending on where the CBN is located. The copper busbar will then be connected to the CBN utilizing the PANDUIT common bonding network jumper kit, part number series RGCBNJ. This kit includes the #6 AWG cable with one factory installed two -hole lug and hardware to connect to the busbar and one HTAP to connect to the CBN. In addition, all components can be utilized if the CBN is below or overhead. Mount an electrostatic discharge (ESD) port kit, PANDUIT series RGESD, directly to the grounding strip on the back of the cabinet at approximately 48 inches from the floor. Mount a second RGESD directly to the grounding strip at the front at approximately the same height. Place the ESD protection identification stickers directly above the ESD ports. Cabinet equipment mounting rails may utilize cage nuts, threaded holes or thru- hole type mounting fasteners to secure equipment to the rails. Each kit is supplied with the unique thread -forming screws and bonding studs to provide the bond to the equipment mounting rails. Grounding/Earthing PANDUIT Cabinets All PANDUITO Net -Access TM Cabinets shall be bonded in accordance with the methods prescribed in ANSI/TIA-942, as shown in figure 7 below. Aisle Ground -,,s cannot be created from edit! elcConunon Bonding Network y _pNY GroundedlEart ANDUIT Jumper (Alternate Location) If Cabinet Shown) Retrofit Cabinet Grounding/Earthing Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) If the cabinets already have network equip nt port isible to install the rack ground strips without rupting :s the rack ground strip would not be u and equipmem jumpers wuuru ue used to make the bond between network equipment and the busbar. See Figure 6 for details. Ground Strip (not used in Equipment Jumper to er grounding/earthing requirements ap retrofit application without Cabinet Grounding Strip ion. Shield Grounding A key element of a shielded copper cabling system is proper grounding. PANDUIT TX6TM 10GigTM Shielded Copper Cabling System s' figure 8 below. Basic equipment cabinet with the doors and side panels removed for clarity Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-30 Figure 8 — Properly grounding shielded copper cabling system (3) The patch panel a bonded to the, equipment rack for pmleclloo (4) Finally, the entre system is banded to a main bus bw bcaled m the Roos The cable shield shall be run continuously from port -to -port. As the shield becomes bonded to the equipment chassis when the plug is inserted into the jack on the equipment, this effectively bonds the shield conductor at both ends of the cable, and at patch panels in between. Such a system is most effective at reducing noise coupling to the data signal so long as the power sources feeding the equipment involved are bonded together. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-31 Labeling This section is inserted for your reference. Please follow the city of Newport Beach cable labeling schema. Technical Reference Design ID Products The Need for Labeling Proper labeling is crucial to the successful management of data center infrastructure. Labeling in the data center provides two very important benefits - determining locations of components and defining the system connections. It is this determining and defining that allows quick, clear communication required to accurately install, maintain, and repair critical infrastructure components resulting in efficient and reliable data center performance. Grid Labeling Component locations are determined using a X -Y coordinate system that is usually based on the floor tile system in the data center space. Using alphabetic designations on one axis of the room and numerical designations on the other axis of the room create a series of alphanumeric designations that can be established for each floor tile in a data center space. These floor tile designations are the basis for determining the location of data center devices. L'L]r:Lyf�rd�61�r:LHI�:II�Ir:2Jr�:f I�J6'lulrl�ll'T�61]GL91f�:i6�Ial 01 02 03 04 05 nR 1-17 Grid Label Recommendation Printer Type Laser/Inkjet Label P/N C850X1100YJJ Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-32 Cabinet/Rack Labeling The floor tile designations are used to identify each cabinet or rack in the data center. The cabinet/rack location is based on which floor tile the right front corner of the cabinet/rack rests upon. Cabinets and racks should have location labels applied to the top and bottom of both the front and rear of the device. These labels should be visible whether or not doors are closed or A typical cabinet/rack label would have the following scheme: AB04 THIS IDENTIFIER WOULD DEFINE THAT THE CABINETIRACK IS LOCATED WITH ITS RIGHT FRONT CORNER AT THE INTERSECTION OF ROW AB AND COLUMN 04. Cable/Rack Label Recommendation Printer Type Laser/Inkjet LS8 Desktop Thermal Label Area 2.00 x 1.00 2.00 x 1.00 2.00 x 1.00 Label P/N C20OX100YJJ C200X100YPC C20OX100YPT Panel Labeling Once the cabinet/rack identifiers are established then the various panels in the cabineUrack should be identified. The designation for the panel positions in a cabinet/rack can be either an alphabetic designation or a two -digit number that represent the rack unit number (RU) where the top -left mounting screw lands in the cabinet/rack. Using the RU method provides the data center manager with greater flexibility since it allows for panels and equipment to be added or removed later and not disrupt the designation of panel identifiers. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-33 A typical panel label would have the following scheme: AB04-24 This identifier would define that the top left mounting screw of the panel is located at the 24th rack unit position in the cabinet/rack located grid AB04 in the data center. Panel Label Recommendation Printer Type Laser/Inkjet LS8 Desktop Thermal Label P/N C100X050YJJ IC10OX050YJC IC10OX050YJT Port Labeling Now that cabinets/racks and panels in each rack are identified the next task is to establish identifiers for each port on a panel. Port identifiers are very important in that they will define the connectivity of cabling within the data center infrastructure. Many patch panels come from the factory with numbers already screen -printed above the ports. If this is the case then there is no need to re -label those patch panels. If the patch panels are not pre-printed with port numbers then labels will need to be created to identify the port numbers. The numbering sequence should proceed from left to right and top to bottom for all ports on a patch panel. The number of digits used for all numbers on a patch panel should be consistent with the total number of ports on that patch panel. For example a 48 -port patch panel should be labeled 01 through 48 and a 144 -port patch panel should be labeled 001 through 144. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-34 AB04-24:01 This identifier can be decoded to define that this is port 01 located on panel 24 in cabinet/rack AB04. This is somewhat redundant information given that the cabinet/rack and panel are clearly identified and are not usually required information on the port label since the cabinet/rack and panel are apparent to the viewer who is standing at the location of the port. Therefore a typical port label would have the following scheme: 01 This identifier defines that this is port 01. Port Label Recommendations Printer Type Laser/Inkjet Cable Type Copper Copper Copper Copper Fiber Label Style Adhesive Adhesive Non -Adhesive Non -Adhesive Adhesive Number of Ports 4 6 4 6 n/a Label P/N C261XO30FJJ C379XO30FJJ C261X035Y1J C390X03OYlJ C350X100YJJ Printer Type LS8 Cable Type Copper Copper Copper Copper Fiber Label Style Adhesive Adhesive Non -Adhesive Non -Adhesive Adhesive Number of Ports 4 6 4 6 n/a LabelP/N C252XO30FJC C379XO30FJC C261X035Y1C C390X030Y1C T100X000YPC- BK Printer Type Desktop Thermal Cable Type Copper Copper Fiber Label Style Adhesive Adhesive Adhesive Number of Ports 4 6 n/a Label P/N C252XO30YP C379XO30YP C350X100YJT Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-35 I T IT I Cable Labeling and Patch Cord Labeling Next the cabling on the back and front of the cabinet/rack must be identified. Labeling of cables on the back of the panel is considered cable labeling and the labeling of cables connected to the front of the panel is considered patch cord/equipment cord labeling. Cable Labels Cables labels are identified with information that defines the connection between the near end panel connection and the far end panel connection. A near end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port location. The far end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port location. A typical cable label would have information in the following scheme: AB04-24:01 /AB07-36:13 This identifier would be decoded to define the cable connects between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 going to cabinet AB07 panel 36 port 13. The far end of the cable would have a label that would have the same but with the information reversed. Recommended Cable Labels Printer Type Laser/Inkjet Laser/Inkjet Laser/Inkjet Laser/Inkjet Laser/Inkjet Cable Type Copper Copper Fiber Fiber Fiber Cable Diameter Cat5/5e/6 10G UTP/STP 2mm/3mm Duplex 3mm Dia (0.24" to 0.48" Marker Type Self -Laminating Self -Laminating Flag Flag Self -Laminating Label P/N S10OX150YAJ S10OX225YAJ F102X220FJJ F102X220FJJ S10OX225YAJ Printer Type LS8 LS8 LS8 LS8 LS8 Cable Type Copper Copper Fiber Fiber Fiber Cable Diameter Cat5/5e/6 10G UTP/STP 2mm/3mm Du lex 3mm Dia (0.24" to 0.48" Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-36 Self -Laminating I Self -Laminating for Label -Core I for Label -Core I Self-Lami (Label P/N I S10OX150VAC I S10OX225VAC I S10OX160VAC I S10OX220VAC I S10OX225VAC Printer Type Desktop Thermal Desktop Thermal Desktop Thermal Cable Type Copper Copper Fiber Cable Diameter Cat5/5e/6 10G UTP/STP Dia (0.24" to 0.48" Marker Type Self -Laminating Self -Laminating Self -Laminating Label P/N S10OX150VAT S10OX225VAT S10OX225VAT Patch Cord/Equipment Cord Labels Patch cord/equipment cord labels are identified with information that defines the connection between the near end patch panel front connections and the far end patch panel front connections or equipment connections. A near end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port location. The far end connection identifier would consist of the cabinet/rack location, panel location, and port location. ODCSSJ DC I6 ODCS53 DC 15 .,ua w �► ODCSSJ Dc e, .- ODCS5J Dc A typical patch cord label would have information in the following scheme: AB04-24:01/AB04-36:13 This identifier would be decoded to define the patch cord connection between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 going to the same cabinet panel 36 port 13. The far end of the cable would have a label that would have the same but with the information reversed. A typical equipment cord label would information in the following scheme: AB04-24:01 /A604 -Ti nley2:A This identifier would be decoded to define the equipment cord connection between cabinet AB04 panel 24 port 01 going to the same cabinet port A on equipment named Tinley2. Rack unit location could be substituted for equipment name if necessary. Recommended Patch/Equipment Cord Labels Printer Type I Laser/Inkjet I Laser/Inkjet I Laser/Inkjet I Laser/Inkjet I Laser/Inkjet Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-37 Cable Type Copper Copper Fiber Fiber Fiber Cable Diameter Cat5/5e/6 10G UTP/STP 2mm/3mm Duplex 3mm Dia (0.24" to 0.48" Marker Type Self -Laminating Self -Laminating Flag Fla('--Self-Laminating Dia (0.24" to 0.48" Label P/N S10OX150YAJ S10OX225YAJ F102X220FJJ F102X220FJJ S10OX225YAJ Printer Type LS8 LS8 LS8 LS8 LS8 Cable Type Copper Copper Fiber Fiber Fiber Cable Diameter Cat5/5e/6 10G UTP/STP 2mm/3mm Duplex 3mm Dia (0.24" to 0.48" Marker Type Self -Laminating Self -Laminating Self -Laminating for Label -Core Self -Laminating for Label -Core Self -Laminating Label P/N S10OX150VAC S10OX225VAC S10OX160VAC S10OX220VAC S10OX225VAC Printer Type Desktop Thermal Desktop Thermal Desktop Thermal Cable Type Copper Copper Fiber Cable Diameter Cat5/5e/6 10G UTP/STP Dia (0.24" to 0.48" Marker Type Self -Laminating Self -Laminating Self -I aminatin Label P/N S10OX150VAT S10OX225VAT S10OX225VAT Patch Panel Connectivity Patch Panel connectivity is considered the most important area of infrastructure labeling in that it defines the critical connections between ports on patch panels and equipment. This information defines the connections between the near -end ports and the far -end ports. This labeling can define the connection of a range of ports on a panel or just define the connection for two individual oorts. A typical patch panel connectivity label would have the following scheme: AB04-24:ports 01-12/AB07-36:ports 25-36 This identifier would be decoded to define the ports 01 through 12 on panel 24 of cabinet AB04 connect to ports 25 through 36 on panel 36 of cabinet A607. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-38 Recommended Patch Panel Connectivity Labels Printer Type Laser/Inkjet Media Copper Copper Fiber Ports 4 or less more than 4 n/a Label P/N C252XO30FJJIC379XO30FJJI C379X0301'JC C350X100YJJ Printer Type LS8 Media Copper Copper Fiber Ports 4 or less more than 4 n/a LabelP/N C252XO30FJC C379X0301'JC T100X000VJC- BK Printer Type Desktop Thermal Media Copper Copper Fiber Ports 4 or less more than 4 n/a Label P/N C2523(030YP T C379XO30YP T C350X100YJT Labeling For Other Systems In addition to the data connections there are many other systems in a data center that require labeling. Grounding and Bonding LABELING OF THE GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM INVOLVES THE IDENTIFICATION OF THE MAIN GROUNDING BUSBAR, GROUNDING BUSBARS, CONDUCTORS CONNECTING BUSBARS, CONDUCTORS CONNECTING DEVICES TO BUSBARS, AND EQUALIZING CONDUCTORS. The typical scheme for the main grounding busbar would be: 1-6301-TMGB This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the main telecommunications grounding busbar located on floor 1 in space B301. The typical scheme for a grounding busbar would be: 2-R201-TGB This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the telecommunications grounding busbar on floor 2 in space R201. Recommended Telecommunications Grounding Busbar Labels Printer Type I Laser/Inkjet I LS8 IDesktop Thermal Label P/N C40OX200YJ J C200X100YPC C40OX200YPT The typical scheme for the busbar connections would be: 1-6301-TMGB/2-R201-TG B This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the conductor that connects the main Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-39 telecommunications grounding busbar located on floor 1 in space B301 to the telecommunications grounding busbar on floor 2 in space R201. Recommended Busbar Connections Labels Printer Type Laser/Inkjet Cable Diameter 18-14 AWG 12-10 AWG 8-4 AWG 2-1 AWG 1/0-250 MCM Marker Type Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self -Laminating Label P/N S100X075YAJ S100X125YAJ S100X225YAJ S100X400YAJ S100X650YAJ Printer Type LS8 Cable Diameter 18-14 AWG 12-10 AWG 8-4 AWG 2-1 AWG 1/0-250 MCM Marker Type Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-LaminatingSelf-Laminating Self -Laminating Label P/N S100X075VAC S100X125VAC S100X225VAC S100X400VAC S10OX650VAC Printer Type Desktop Thermal Cable Diameter 18-14 AWG 12-10 AWG 8-4 AWG 2-1 AWG 1/0-250 MCM Marker Type Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self -Laminating Label P/N S100X075VAT S100X125VAT S100X225VAT S100X400VAT S100X650VAT Power Cables Labeling of the power system involves the labeling of the cables feeding power outlet units (POU) with information defining the source of power to the POU. This information would include the distribution panel and the circuit that feeds the POU. A typical scheme for the power labeling would be: AB03A-PP21-15 This identifier can be decoded to define that this is the power cable that connects POU A located in rack/cabinet AB03 to circuit breaker 15 in power panel 21. Recommended Power Cable Labels Printer Type Laser/Inkjet Cable Diameter 18-14 AWG 12-10 AWG 8-4 AWG 2-1 AWG 1/0-250 MCM Marker Type Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Label P/N S100X075YAJ S100X125YAJ S100X225YAJ S100X400YAJ S100X650YAJ Printer Type LS8 Cable Diameter 18-14 AWG 12-10 AWG 8-4 AWG 2-1 AWG -250 MCM Marker Type Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self -Laminating Self-Laminatingf-Laminatin FSe Label P/N S100X075VAC S100X125VAC S100X225VAC S100X400VAC0OX650VAC Printer Type Desktop Thermal Cable Diameter 18-14 AWG 12-10 AWG 1 8-4 AWG 1 2-1 AWG 1/0-250 MCM Marker Type Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Self-Laminatin Label P/N S100X075VAT S100X125VAT S100X225VAT S100X400VAT S100X650VAT Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-40 Safety, Fire and Security Maintaining a safe workplace is essential to the proper operation of the data center. There are many potentially dangerous systems present in a data center such as fire suppressant systems, cooling systems, and power systems. The following pre-printed labels can be installed in the data center. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-41 Area Part Number Example PPS0305W2100 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS PPS071OD73 PCV-120CY PCV-220CY PCV-480BY tential rc Flash Hazard 1��.%PPt^tib 277 W©LTS Fire Safety PPS1209GO10 PPS1209G011 PPS0710G001 EXIT Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-42 Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-43 i�ZZZA14 0 FIRE 0 i PHARM i .. �r W , j M l 1 i�V/ PSL-DCPL Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Structured Cabling System Specifications 271300-43 SECTION 27 13 43 COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES CABLING PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes arrangement with Telecommunications Utility Company for telecommunication service. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting backboards. 2. Section 26 05 34 - Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates. 4. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. 5. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems. 6. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems. 7. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. B. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance: 1. TIA/EIA 568 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 2. TIA/EIA 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Service entrance from Telecommunications Utility Company. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation COMMUNICATION SERVICES CABLING Specifications 27 13 43 -1 B. Product Data: Submit catalog data for each termination device, cable, and outlet device. C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS A. Material: Fire retardant Plywood. B. Size: 4 x 8, 3/4 inch thick. 2.2 PATCH PANEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton, Part Number 6910G -U24 or 6910G -U48. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, rack -mounted assembly of terminals and accessory patch cords, with adequate capacity for active and spare circuits. 2.3 TELEPHONE OUTLET JACKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton, Part Number 6110G-RX6 or equal. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Conform to TIA/EIA 568 requirements for cable connectors for specific cable types. 2.4 UNSHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Bertek, Part Number 530529TP-00.. 2. Superior Essex, Part Number 6A-272-XA or 6a -272 -XB. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation COMMUNICATION SERVICES CABLING Specifications 271343-2 B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 100 -ohm, unshielded twisted pair multipair cable 24 AWG copper conductor. 2.5 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Optical Cable, Part Number DX06-055D-W3SB/OFNR 2. Superior Essex, Part Number W300669G01 (indoor/outdoor riser rated) or 110066G01 (OSP rated). 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 62.5/125 um optical fiber cable. 2.6 UNSHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Bertek, Part Number 530529TP-00. 2. Superior Essex, Part Number 6A-272-XA or 6A -272 -XB. 3. Uniprise. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 100 -ohm, unshielded twisted pair plenum rated cable with 4 pairs, 24 AWG copper conductor. 2.7 OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Optical Cable, Part Number DX06-055D-W3SB/OFNR. 2. Superior Essex, Part Number W30066G01. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: TIA/EIA 568, 62.5/125 um optical fiber cable. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install pathways in accordance with TIA/EIA 569. B. Install wire and cable in accordance with TIA/EIA 568. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation COMMUNICATION SERVICES CABLING Specifications 271343-3 C. Install termination backboards and cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner. D. Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 empty 1 inch conduits to accessible location above ceiling at each location. E. Install pull wire in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet in length or containing bends. F. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 27 05 53. Mark backboards and cabinets with legend 'TELEPHONE." G. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment in accordance with Section 27 05 26. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect and test optical fiber cables in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.25. C. Inspect and test copper cables and terminations in accordance with TIA/EIA 568. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation COMMUNICATION SERVICES CABLING Specifications 271343-4 SECTION 27 41 16 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. All applicable portions of Section 26 00 00 shall apply to this section as though written herein completely. The work under this section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and accessories required to furnish and install complete audio visual systems for the science labs as shown on the plans. C. The system is based on a wall vault by Extron Electronics integrated audio- visual system. The system shall provide the capability of switching between images from computers, Blu Ray/DVD players, document cameras, or other AN sources. The images will then be routed to the LCD Projector in the science lab for display on a screen. Audio associated with the images shall be switched simultaneously to an amplifier which feeds ceiling mounted loudspeakers located in the training room. D. The system shall be provided with a wireless voice amplification system equal to Extron Voicelift system, VLM 2000 H. 1.2 RELATED WORK Document affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and sections of Divisions 1 and 26 of these specifications. A. The work described by this part includes the furnishing of all materials, equipment, supplies, labor and the performing of all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating systems. B. All conduits, outlet boxes, back boxes, junction boxes, terminal cabinets, backboards, wiring, cables, equipment, devices, etc., shall be furnished and installed complete under this section. Conduit and junction box sizes shall be determined by the Installing Communications Contractor for the particular wire and cable fills required for the systems installed. (Conduit sizes shall comply with the National Electrical Code). The entire responsibility of the system, including the installation, operation, function, testing and main- tenance for one (1) year after final acceptance under this section shall be the responsibility of the communications contractor. C. The Installing Communications Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, cables, devices, and other materials even though not specifically mentioned herein, which are necessary for the proper operation of the system so that the system shall perform the functions listed herein in compliance with all specified requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Specifications 2741 16-1 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Installing Communications Contractor shall hold a valid State of California C-7 license for all low -voltage work and a State of California C-10 License for any applicable high voltage work, shall have completed at least 20 projects of equal scope, shall have been in business of furnishing and installing communication systems of this type for at least five years, and capable of being bonded to assure the owner of performance and satisfactory service during the guarantee period. B. The Installing Communications Contractor shall hold all other licenses required by the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work. C. The Installing Communications Contractor shall be a factory authorized distributor and warrantee station for the brand of equipment specified and shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate repair service to the equipment. The Installing Communication Contractor shall maintain a spare set of all major parts for the system at all times. All circuit boards, amplifiers and control sub systems shall be 100% backed up with stock at contractor's shop. The Contractor shall employ factory -trained technical/service personnel for service and maintenance of the system. Their resumes will be required. The factory -trained technical/service personnel shall have a minimum of five years experience installing the proposed system. D. The installing Communication Contractor shall have a design staff with a BICSI certified (RCDD) Registered Communications Distribution Designer. The installing Communication Contractor shall have a factory trained service department. The service department shall be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, to arrive and initiate onsite service the specified equipment upon (24) hours notice. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In order to establish standards of performance the equipment specified shall be as manufactured by Extron. B. All of the Electronic Systems Equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Authorized Factory Distributor of the equipment. The Contractor shall furnish a letter from the manufacturer of all major equipment, which certifies that the Installing Communication Contractor is the Authorized Distributor and that the equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices. The Contractor shall also furnish a written guarantee from the manufacturer that they will have a service representative assigned to this area for the life of the equipment. C. All communication systems supplied shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories under UL Standard 1459. A copy of the UL listing card for the proposed system shall be included with the contractor's submittal. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Specifications 2741 16-2 1.5 SUBMITTAL AND MANUALS A. Comply with all requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and applicable sections of Divisions 1 and 16 of these specifications. B. Additional requirements of this section are: 1. Within thirty-five (35) calendar days after the date of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for review, eight copies of a complete submission. 2. The submission shall consist of four major sections with each section separated with index tabs. Each page in the submission shall be numbered chronologically and shall be summarized in the index. 3. The first section shall be the 'Index" which shall include the project title and address, name of the firm submitting the proposal and name of the Architect. 4. The second section shall include a copy of the Installing Communication Contractors valid C-10 California State Contractors License, letters of Extron factory authorization and guaranteed service, list of 20 projects of equal scope and list of proposed instrumentation to be used by the Contractor. 5. The third section shall contain an original factory data sheet for every piece of equipment in the specifications. 6. The fourth section shall contain a wiring designation schedule for each circuit leaving each piece of equipment and drawings showing system wiring plans for a typical science lab. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM A. Provide following Audio/Visual equipments including associated outlets, cabling, patch cords and raceways for complete operable Audio/Visual system as indicated on drawings. 1. Provide WallVault System, by Extron Electronics — WVS401, including witching system switcher, composite video wall plates, VGA and audio wall plates, VGA and audio floor plates, speakers with backbox, mini audio plates, wall controller, projector mounting kits, voice amplification system including IR microphone, IR receiver, management software associated cabling, and all components for complete integrated operation of the PVS systems, or equal. 2. Extron Voice Lift System VLM 2000 H. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Specifications 2741 16-3 3. Locate BluRay unit in AV cabinet. Provide mounting brackets as required to mount unit inside AV cabinet. Provide safety belt power strip at each unit location. B. Outlets and faceplates as indicated on Training Room multi -media riser diagram. All face plate shall be white and shall include appropriate modular inserts to confirm with system requirements. C. All interconnection cables, patch cords, terminations needed for complete operable system. D. AudioNideo Patch cables 1. All patch cables must be factory manufactured and color coded per owners requirements to match each campus cabling. Do not use cables that come with equipments. 2. All VGA patch cables shall have ferrites attached by the cable manufacturer to minimize radio frequency interference. 3. All composite video and stereo audio cable shall be minimum 20AWG, 75 ohm coaxial 3 -conductors assembly with high quality RCA color coded connectors on both ends. Cable shall be Extron #IN8900 series. 4. All RG6 coaxial cables shall be minimum 6 feel long and shall be terminated with F -type crimp -on connectors at both ends. Do not use cable with slide -on type connector. 5. RGBHV cable assembly shall be Extron #BNC-5 with (5) male color coded BNC Connectors on both ends. Field verify length of cable assembly prior to ordering. 6. S -video cable assembly shall be minimum 2 -conductors, flexible type cable with gold plated connector pins, Extron #S -Video F-6'. Field verify cable type prior to ordering. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The wiring of the system shall be executed in accordance with the drawings and the equipment manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Should any variations in these requirements occur, the contractor shall notify the architect before making any changes. It shall be the responsibility of the factory authorized distributor of the specified equipment to install the equipment and guarantee the system to operate as per plans and specifications. B. Furnish all conductors, equipment plugs, terminal strips, etc., and labor to install a complete and operable system. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Specifications 2741 16-4 C. The cables within the rack or cabinets shall be carefully cabled and laced with Velcro cable ties. All cables shall be numbered for identification. D. Splicing of conductors in underground pull boxes is not permitted. E. The labor employed by the contractor shall be regularly employed in the installation and repair of communication systems and shall be acceptable to the owner and architect to engage in the installation and service of this system. The contractor shall be prepared to prove that his labor force has been with the company for a minimum of 3 years, or has experience in this type of installation for a minimum of 3 years. F. The contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials. All exposed parts of the equipment, cabinets, and other equipment shall be left in a clean condition, unblemished and free of all dirt, dust, smudges, spots, fingerprints, etc., The contractor shall remove all debris and rubbish occasioned by the electronic systems work from the site. The contractor shall thoroughly clean all buildings of any dirt, debris, rubbish, marks, etc., Caused by the performance of this work. G. Prior to projector installation, Installer shall contact notify the Project Manager to notify the school site Technology Specialist to schedule all projector deliveries to the site. The projectors shall be made available to the Technology Specialist for serial number recording before the projectors are attached to the security boxes. H. The contractor shall contact the site Technology Specialist to arrange not less than four (4) hours for instruction of personnel in the operation and maintenance of the systems. This instruction time shall be divided as directed by the Owner. 3.2 WARRANTY A. The entire system shall be warranted free of mechanical or electrical defects for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of the installation. The transmitter and receivers shall be warranted for parts and labor for a period of three (3) years by the manufacturer. Any material showing mechanical or electrical defects shall be replaced promptly at no expense to the purchaser. B. The contractor shall maintain a competent service organization and shall, if requested, submit a service maintenance agreement to the owner after the end of the guarantee period. C. A typewritten notice shall be posted at the equipment rack which shall indicate the firm, address and telephone number to call when service is necessary. The notice shall be mounted in a neatly finished metal frame with a clear plastic window and securely attached to the inside of the door. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Specifications 2741 16-5 3.3 TESTING A. Provide all instruments for testing and demonstrating in the presence of the owner's inspector that the frequency response is as stated in the factory data sheets. Check all circuits and wiring to verify they are free of shorts and grounds. Perform all tests stated in each separate system specification B. The owner reserves the right to make independent tests of all equipment furnished to determine whether or not the equipment complies with the requirements specified herein and to accept or reject any or all of the equipment on the basis of the results thereby obtained. C. Check out and final connections to the system shall be made by a factory - trained technician in the employ of a manufacturer of the products installed. In addition, factory -trained technicians shall demonstrate operation of the complete system and each major component to the owner. D. System field wiring diagrams shall be provided to the owner by the system manufacturer prior to completion of the installation. E. Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, contractor shall provide to the owner a signed statement from the equipment manufacturer that the system had been tested and functions properly according to the specifications. The contractor shall be responsible to provide service within 24 hours (or by mutual consent) after notification by the owner or his representative, within the hours of 5:00 AM to 5:00 PM from Monday to Friday. Service request forms shall be supplied by the Contactor and the faxing or mailing of such request form shall constitute notification by the owner of a service request. 3.4 TRAINING A. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site training for site staff on the Science lab video systems. Training for personnel shall be provided by certified technology specialists. The scope of training shall encompass system operation and procedures. Technician training should include an integrated information overview, media retrieval procedures as well as operation procedures for local control configurations. The contractor shall provide a detailed written outline clearly describing the proposed plan for all training, for approval by the Engineer and Owner's representative. B. Training for staff will include basic system concepts. Staff will need to know how to power on/off the system, and how to access one or more media resources via remote control. Training should include use and operation of audio/video devices and techniques and trouble -shooting tips. Trainers should incorporate hands-on techniques to maximize staff opportunity to incorporate and develop curriculum that is both meaningful and targeted for their student needs. Clearly written support materials should be provided to all training participants. Manual describing operation and use of the system shall also be provided. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Specifications 2741 16-6 C. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site training for technicians. D. Trainers shall provide technicians with an in-depth technical overview of head end or control system concepts. Training should include basic overview of head end and local control and trouble shooting concepts. Head end training should include system concepts and hands on usage of media sources. Media center technicians will be trained to provide setup, operation and application of return video. Clearly written documentation and support materials must be provided for each installation. A training manual describing operation and use of the system shall also be provided. Provide control of local resources and will be equipped with the required local switching and control capability. Provide required cables to integrate all local room devices including Plasma displays, DVDNCR and audio I visual control system. PART 4: RECORD DRAWINGS A. The contractor shall maintain record drawings as specified in accordance with these specifications, and as noted below. B. Upon completion of the installation, four (4) copies of complete operational instructions shall be furnished, complete with record drawings. Instructions shall include part numbers and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of parts source. Final payment shall not be made until operational and maintenance manuals have been received. C. Drawings shall show locations of all concealed and exposed conduit runs, giving the number and size of conduit wires. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations and shall be dimensioned in relation to permanent structures to indicate their exact location. Drawing changes shall not be identified only with referencing CORs and RFls, the drawings shall reflect all the actual changes made. D. One set of record drawings shall be delivered to the owner in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM Specifications 2741 16-7 SECTION 27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Amplifier and control equipment. B. Input equipment. C. Reproducer equipment. D. Sound system cable. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 33 - Boxes. B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding. 1.3 REFERENCES A. CEC - California Electrical Code. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Public address system extensions for voice and music. B. Input components: 1. Provide new assistive listening system, within the performing arts building. C. Features: 1. Interface to telephone system. 2. One-way paging by zone. 3. Emergency paging override. 4. Distribution of background music. 5. Selective speaker talkback. 6. Assistive listening devices. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Specifications 2751 16-1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate layout of equipment mounted in racks and cabinets, component interconnecting wiring, and wiring diagrams of field wiring to speakers and remote input devices. C. Product Data: Provide showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each component. D. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of each test recommended by the manufacturer. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Division 01. H. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate that installation is complete and system performs according to specified requirements. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Record actual locations of speakers, control equipment, and outlets for input/output connectors. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Operation Data: Include instructions for adjusting, operating, and extending the system. C. Maintenance Data: Include repair procedures and spare parts documentation. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum five years documented experience. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Specifications 2751 16-2 C. Installer: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of CEC. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. C. Conform to requirements of Federal Communications Commission. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of public address and music system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 AMPLIFICATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: (Existing) 1. University Sound. B. Amplifier: Provide additional speaker amplifier to match existing. 2.2 SPEAKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. University Sound to match existing. B. Description: 8 -inch coaxial speaker with integral crossover circuit. C. Power Rating: 20 watts. D. Frequency Range: 45 - 18,000 Hz. E. Sound Pressure Level: 95 dB at 3 feet with 1 -watt input. F. Magnet: 10 ounces low frequency unit; 3 ounces high frequency unit. Material: Ceramic. G. Dispersion: -3 dB at 90 degrees, -5 dB at 110 degrees. 2.3 BAFFLES AND ENCLOSURES A. Manufacturers: 1. University Sound to match existing. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Specifications 2751 16-3 B. Description: 12 inch round, painted steel white finish with uniform perforations. C. Speaker Backbox: Insulated with sound -deadening material. 2.4 MATCHING TRANSFORMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. University Sound to match existing. B. Description: Tapped from 0.5 to 4 watts in 1 -watt steps, with primary/secondary ratio to match amplifier to speaker impedances. 2.5 VOLUME PADS A. Manufacturers: 1. University Sound to match existing. B. Description: Transformer type rated 30 watts. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mounting Heights: Coordinate locations of outlet boxes specified in Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated. 1. Wall -mounted Speaker: 7.5 above finished floor. 2. Volume Pad Outlets: 4 feet above finished floor. 3. Microphone Outlets: 1.5 feet above finished floor. C. Splice cable only in accessible junction boxes or at terminal block units. D. Make cable shields continuous at splices and connect speaker circuit shield to equipment ground only at amplifier. E. Install input circuits in separate cables and raceways from output circuits. F. Leave 18 inches excess cable at each termination at microphone, volume pad, speaker, and other system outlet. G. Leave 6 feet excess cable at each termination at system cabinet H. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. I. Use armored cable for outside speaker circuits. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Specifications 2751 16-4 J. Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles. Use spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system include bridle rings or drive rings. K. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. L. Connect reproducers to amplifier with matching transformers. M. Install equipment racks in location shown; arrange to provide adequate ventilation and access. N. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01. B. Measure and record sound power levels at designated locations. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 01. B. Include making final wiring connections, inspection and adjusting of completed installation, and systems demonstration. C. Certify that installation is complete and performs according to specified requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 01. B. Adjust transformer taps for appropriate sound level. C. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Division 01. B. Conduct walking tour of Project. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component. C. Use submitted operation and maintenance manual as reference during demonstration. 3.6 OWNER PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide detailed operation and maintenance instruction and training. B. Provide local classroom facilities. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Specifications 2751 16-5 C. Use submitted operation and maintenance manual as reference during training. Supplement with training materials as required. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Specifications 2751 16-6 SECTION 275130 HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing a complete Hearing Assistance System. B. The Hearing Assistance system shall be compatible with PA system and shall be approved by the Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall provide following submittals and shop drawings for review and approval: A complete list of equipment and materials proposed for system, with catalog cuts, technical data, manufacturer's specifications and detail drawings. B. Operating and Servicing Manuals, Record Drawings: Deliver required number of copies of operating and servicing manual. Each complete manual shall be bound in a flexible binder and all data shall be typewritten or drafted. 2. Each manual shall include all instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include complete 2 wire circuit diagrams of system, a wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving console and each rack, a schematic diagram of all components, and replacement part numbers. Each manual shall also include as -built cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating all cables with conduit, and as -built coding used on each cable. Programming forms of each system shall be submitted with complete information. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall conform to CCR, Title 24 Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulation and California Electrical Code, latest edition. B. 100% Digital. Receivers are digitally -tuned so transmission won't drift PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 TRAINING ROOM HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM A. Hearing Assistance System: Infrared Hearing Assistance System shall be manufactured by Listen Technology, Person Portable FM System or approved Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM Specifications 27 51 30 -1 equal by Sennheiser or Williams Technology and consist of the following components: 1. Cat. No LT -700 FM Display Transmitter (1) 2. Cat. No. LA -278 Behind -the -Head Microphone (1) 3. Cat. No. LR -400 Portable Display Receiver (7) 4. Cat. No. LA -164 Ear Speaker (7) 5. LA -322 8 -Unit Portable FM Product Carrying Case (1) 6. LA -361 High Capacity AA Alkaline Batteries (8) PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 EXAMINATION AND OPERATION 3.3 SPECIAL PUBLIC ADDRESS AND HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM TESTS A. Provide all instruments for testing and demonstrate, in presence of the Owner Inspector, that all circuits and wiring test free of shorts and grounds. B. Furnish all labor, instruments, appliances, equipment and materials necessary to demonstrate to the Owner that installation performs as required and specified. C. The Owner reserves the right to make independent tests of equipment furnished, to determine whether or not equipment complies with requirements specified, and to accept or reject any or all equipment on basis of results obtained. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation HEARING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM Specifications 275130-2 SECTION 28 05 33 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. 6. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 7. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems. 8. Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems. 9. Section 28 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security. 10. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC). B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-1 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide thick wall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal boxes. C. Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal boxes. D. Under Slab on Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal boxes. E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, pull, and junction boxes. F. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. G. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. H. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. 5. Nonmetallic tubing. 6. Raceway fittings. 7. Conduit bodies. 8. Surface raceway. 9. Wireway. 10. Pull and junction boxes. 11. Handholes. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-3 C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03. C. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. 2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-4 B. Product Description: Interlocked aluminum construction. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Interlocked aluminum construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel compression type. 2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Specifications CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-5 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.6 OUTLET BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs. D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26. 2.7 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 3. Thomas & Betts Corp. 4. Walker Systems Inc. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-6 5. The Wiremold Co. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16. D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4X; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. E. In -Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: 'POWER" or "SIGNAL". PART 3: EXECUTION ME WI iItal0r_\r[.]• A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough -in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26. B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29. C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53. D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-7 3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29. H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. K. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. L. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. M. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. N. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. O. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes. P. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. R. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-8 S. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic and expansion joints. T. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. U. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings. B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough -in to accommodate intended purpose. C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26. D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. M. Support boxes independently of conduit. N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280533-9 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings. D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. 3.7 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR Specifications ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 33-10 SECTION 28 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Wire markers. 3. Conduit markers. 4. Stencils. 5. Underground Warning Tape. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 2. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems. 3. Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY Specifications AND SECURITY 280553-1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Install nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Product Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color. B. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. 2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Split sleeve type wire markers. B. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Low Voltage Circuits: Wire number as indicated on shop drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY Specifications AND SECURITY 280553-2 2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Install identification on all equipment. B. Replace lost nameplates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting. B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners. or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. C. Transformers. d. Service Disconnects. C. Underground Warning Tape Installation: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY Specifications AND SECURITY 280553-3 Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY Specifications AND SECURITY 280553-4 SECTION 281600 INTRUSION ALARM PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, materials, appliances, tools and equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the Intrusion Alarm System. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Examine all other specifications and drawings for related work required. B. All general provisions and requirement for electrical work. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Included but not limited to as principal work. Control Panels 2. Initiating Devices 3. Dedicated Conduit System 4. Wiring 5. Accessories 6. Interface with Electronic Access Control System. B. System shall consist of motion devices and door contacts where indicated to detect intrusion into covered areas. Zone as indicated on drawings and have control panel provide alarm and trouble signals, by point and zone, communicated to district central office. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To qualify as a acceptable bidder, whether the bid is submitted to the Owner, his agent, a general contractor or sub -contractor, the system bidder or contractor shall be a qualified Security Alarm contractor and shall hold a valid C-10 license issued by the Contractors State License Board of California. The Contractor shall also hold a valid license from the State of California of Consumer Affairs Collection and Investigative Services for the purpose of installing security systems. The system Bidder or Contractor shall hereinafter be referred to as the Contractor. The Contractor shall hold all other licenses required by the legally Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTRUSION ALARM Specifications 28 16 00 -1 constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work. The Contractor shall be a factory authorized distributor/installer and service facility for the brand of security equipment specified. B. Minimum Contractor Qualifications: Five Years experience with comparable installations. 2. Shall be able to refer to at least 20 projects of this type rendering satisfactory service with contact persons, phone numbers and addresses. 3. Maintain an inventory of all major components in stock at all times. 4. Be able to provide service within 24 hours of notification. C. References: California Electrical Code. 2. State and Local Regulations. 3. California State Fire Marshall. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Meet with representatives of the OWNER at a time and location convenient to the Owner. Advise the Owner of programming options and incorporate all requirements on shop drawings before submittal to the Architect. Submit evidence of having met with the Owner. B. Submit product data sheets for all switches, keypads, wiring devices, device mounting, controllers, power supplies, cabinets, etc. C. Submit detailed shop drawings including dimensioned plans, elevations, details schematic and point-to-point wiring diagrams and descriptive literature for all component parts and cabinets. D. Submit six (6) copies of redrawn building floor plans showing all components of the intrusion detection system including interconnecting cabling and conduits. Drawings shall be prepared to scale and show all exterior glass, exterior door, all interior and exterior building walls, roof hatches, architectural and structural elements relevant to the installation of the system. Each Zone shall be shown on the plans. Indicate on the submittal drawings where conduit will be provided and where cabling will be run without conduit. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide main control panel, terminal cabinets, keypads, conduit and cable systems and site underground conduits as needed. B. Provide motion sensor(s) in each room having exterior doors, exterior glass or skylights. Quantity of sensors in each room shall be as required to detect entry Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTRUSION ALARM Specifications 281600-2 through exterior doors, exterior glass or skylights, and/or any other opening from the building exterior to the building interior. All sensors shall be mounted at 7'8" or higher and in the "corner" of the room for maximum detection of intrusion. C. Provide a magnetic switch at entry doors to each building, near its respective keypad. Connect to the system to initiate a timed circuit for keypad arming and disarming. D. Provide magnetic switches at all roof hatches and annunciate with a day zone to indicate open/close of all hatches during daytime at master keypad and alarm at night. E. Provide a dedicated system of conduits, cabling and outlet boxes required for a complete and operable intrusion alarm system. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS A. Provide a complete and operable supervised intrusion detection system as shown on the plans including but not limited to master control panel, keypad station motion detectors, connections to door switches, a California State Fire Marshall listed and approved digital communicator/dialer. Exact location and quantity of keypad shall be field coordinated with Owner's Representative. B. Upon detection of an intrusion by initiation of any device in the system, the system shall cause the annunciator to display and sound an alarm signal on the keypad. Alarm information shall be sent by digital dialer to the Owner's Central monitoring dispatch center, as identified by Lifeguard headquarters personnel. C. Systems shall detect the motion of a body taking not more than four steps in any direction of an area secured with motion detection equipment where entry doors or windows are possible access. D. Provide two (2) form 'C' contacts for the interface with the EMS system. E. The system shall be capable of off-site computerized access for remote access programming and control. System computerized access must be compatible with the Owner's existing system and equipment, and/or Contractor to include all necessary equipment and diagnostic equipment necessary to maintain the complete system at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.2 CONTROL PANEL A. Each Control/Communicator panel shall be the latest model of Bosch (Radionics Model D9412D) or equal 246 point,eight area/zone control panel with an intregal digital communicator and must be Underwriters Laboratories Listed. All external circuit connections shall be UL listed as power limited in accordance with the provisions of article 760 of the California Electrical Code (NFPA Standard #70). Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTRUSION ALARM Specifications 281600-3 B. Provide Point of Protection (POPEX) modules at the control panel for Popitmodule supervision Bosch (Radionics D8125 or equal). C. Provide Point of Protection indentification transponders (Poet) modules at building terminal cabinets to individually identify each detector or device in the system (Radionics D9127U or equal). D. The control/Communicator shall be microprocessor based. E. System shall include the following features: 1. Real time clock and test timer. 2. Battery charging circuit. 3. Battery voltage supervision. 4. Supervised automatic reset circuit breakers. 5. Onboard warning buzzer and diagnostic LEDS. 6. Automatic answer modem. 7. Lightning and RFI protection. 8. Central Station reporting formats. 9. Printer/CRT interface module for on-site serial data printer recording or CRT display of events. 10. Quad serial output module for enhanced serial data interface capability for specific accessory modules and devices. 11. Individual zone responses. 12. Custom annunciator text. 13. Audible alarm output, programmable steady or pulsed. 14. Automatic silencing. 15. Attack -Resistant enclosure and lock meeting Underwriters Laboratory Local 16. Burglary requirements. 17. A minimum of eight(8) auxiliary form "C dry contacts for a variety of programmable responses to alarm and trouble conditions. 18. Transformer enclosure for internal mounting of class 2 transformer. 19. Two telephone numbers with selective signaling options. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTRUSION ALARM Specifications 281600-4 20. Individual point responses. 21. Automatic test reports. 2.3 KEYPADS A. Master and zone keypads shall be Bosch (Radionics D1255 Alpha IV) series capable of displaying system status and controlling the alarm system. Keypads shall receive its operating power from the main control panel. Keypads shall be surface or flush -mounted on a wall near the main entry of the building, or required workspace entries. Keypads to be mounted at location and height to be determined by Owner, the keypad to be covered by a Lexan keypad protection cover. Keypad Bosch (Radionics D56 Backbox) to be used for surface mounting of keypad when needed. 2.4 INITIATING DEVICES A. Motion sensors shall be Visonic model K980 series or Intellisense model MC760 series passive infrared devices detecting thermal motional signals. Sensor coverage patterns shall be as required for optimum coverage at each individual location. B. Magnetic switches shall be fully concealed where possible in door frames.(Sentrol 1078, Ademco 947-75T), at roof hatches (Sentrol 2505A, Ademco 960), or other required areas (surface mount Ademco 7939, Amseco AMS39CV/AMS51CV). Ademco, Sentrol or Equal. 2.5 TERMINAL CABINETS A. Each intrusion detection system terminal cabinet, where needed, shall contain a Altronix SMP3 power supply with an Amseco XP1640 transformer and 12v 7ah battery for the motion sensors and a wood back board for mounting the POPIT/POPEX (Zonex) modules on. A Popit for each device and point ID programming to be installed. B. Cabling and Conduiting shall be as required for a dedicated alarm system operation. All Cabling for data to devices shall be shielded. Cabling shall be as follows: WEST PENN 3011- 4 Conductor 20 GA Shielded for all data runs from panel to aux cabinets. 2. WEST PENN 3244- 4 Conductor 18 GA Shielded for all data runs exceeding 1000' form panel to aux cabinet. 3. WEST PENN 242- 4 Conductor 22 GA unshielded for all runs from aux cabinet Popits to Motion Devices. 4. WEST PENN 224- 2 Conductor 18 GA unshielded for all runs from aux power supplies to aux cabinets for IR power. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTRUSION ALARM Specifications 281600-5 5. WEST PENN 221- 2 Conductor 22 GA unshielded for all runs form aux cabinet to door switches. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All connections throughout the system shall be soldered, crimped by means of AMP lugs, fastened with screw type terminals, made by spring tension clip"punch block" terminals or made by standard plugs and receptacles. Each wire twisted pair or cable shall be tagged throughout the site with EZ markers,with the room number it serves. All conductors in terminal cabinets shall be carefully formed and harnessed in a workmanship like manner. B. All systems cabling shall be installed in conduit except where wiring occurs above accessible ceilings. Wiring not in conduit shall be UL listed plenumtype cable. All wiring in walls shall be in conduit. All conduits shall be run concealed. Where architecture precludes concealed conduits, run conduits on beams or trusses and minimize the exposure to view. Identify on the submittal drawings all locations where conduits must run exposed. C. Locate motion sensors to provide optimum coverage of the space and mount sensors in corner of space where possible. Mount sensors at a height of T8" or more. Submittal drawings to show exact locations and heights of all sensors. D. Coordinate concealed door switch installations with finish hardware manufacturer. 3.2 PROGRAMMING A. Provide all system programming including the necessary product handlers so that all parameters are entered into the system and the annunciator displays a text which is customized to the facility. B. Program and connect the intrusion system to the telephone system for a complete and operational system as Owner requires. 3.3 TESTING A. Test all cabling for opens, shorts, and ground faults. B. Actuate all motion, door and roof hatch sensing devices and verify that the system performs as specified. C. The Data/Communications loops shall be opened in at least two (2) locations per building to check for the presence of correct supervisory circuitry. D. Before the contract shall be considered complete, the Contractor shall program the system per Owner requirements and demonstrate the performance of the system in the presence of the Lifeguard Headquarters Security Personnel. The Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTRUSION ALARM Specifications 281600-6 Contractor shall provide all test and reception equipment required to prove the performance as outlined. PART 4: COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE 4.1 INSTRUCTION A. Provide a minimum of two (2) four-hour periods to instruct Lifeguard Headquarters personnel in the proper operation of complete security system. The first instructional period shall be held prior to final acceptance of the system. The second instructional period shall be within a period of one year after final acceptance of the security systems, upon request of the Owner. 4.2 WARRANTY A. The entire system shall be warranted free of mechanical or electrical defects for a period of one(1) year after notice of completion. Any material showing mechanical or electrical defects shall be replaced promptly at no expense to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner , for the purpose of Warranty inventory: Four motion sensors. 2. Two concealed magnetic switches and magnets. 3. Two magnetic switches and magnets for roof hatches. 4. Four Bosch (D9127 Radionics Popits). C. Three (3) complete sets of As -Built plans with all Alarm Point of Protection devices and point numbers listed. D. Provide four (4) hours minimum of on-site training to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation INTRUSION ALARM Specifications 281600-7 SECTION 28 23 00 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cameras. B. Control equipment. C. Cable and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 16 00 - Intrusion Alarm System. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NPFA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description: Provide video communications between points of surveillance indicated on Drawings and central monitoring station. B. Capacity: 1. Cameras: Twelve. 2. Monitors: One. C. Configuration: NTSC, with 1 volt peak -to -peak across 75 ohms. D. Distribution: Baseband, DC to 6 MHz. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements, including system -wiring diagram. C. Product Data: Provide showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements for each component. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 282300-1 storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Record actual locations of cameras and routing of television cable. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Operation Data: Instructions for starting and operating system. C. Maintenance Data: Routine trouble shooting procedures. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum five years documented experience. C. Installer: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of CEC. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of television system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 CAMERAS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bosch Model 500i. 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 282300-2 B. Description: Intelligent PTZ video camera. C. Provide phase line -lock to synchronize camera to (-120 to 120) vertical phase adjustment. D. Lens: Zoom 3.5 mm to 122.4 mm f/1.6 to f/4.5 lens with automatic iris. E. Ratings: 1. Input Power: 120 volts, 60Hz. 2. Scene Illumination: 0.66 Ix for usable picture, 1.4 Ix for full video. 3. Horizontal Resolution: 540 TVL. 4. Signal to noise: 50 dB, minimum. 5. Electronic Shutter Speed: 1 to 10,000. F. Power Supply: Integral. G. Housing: Weatherproof. 2.2 MONITORS A. Description: Free standing monochrome television monitor. B. Screen Size: 21 inches C. Ratings: 1. Resolution: 800 lines. 2. Bandwidth: DC to 6 megahertz. 3. Linearity: 2% maximum. 2.3 SWITCHING EQUIPMENT A. Description: Sequential switcher with 12 positions and motion detectors for automatic alarm call up. B. Include provisions for loop feed to remote monitor location. C. Include provisions for rack mounting. 2.4 VIDEO RECORDER A. Description: DVD time lapse recorder with adjustable speed ratio from 1:1 to 400:1. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 282300-3 B. Format: DVD. C. Provide automatic real time recording on alarm. D. Include date and time generator. E. Include provisions for rack mounting. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Video Cable: 1. Cat 6 (waterproof). B. Cabinet: Provide freestanding equipment rack. 1. Size: Selected by equipment manufacturer. 2. Cabinet Finish: Gray. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Interface installation of closed circuit television system with intrusion alarm system. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01 40 00. B. Supervise final wiring connections and system adjustments. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust manual lens irises to meet lighting conditions. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Demonstrate system operation and provide eight hours of instruction with manufacturer's training personnel. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 282300-4 C. Conduct walking tours of Project and briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component. END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM Specifications 282300-5 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM PART1: GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 19 — Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. B. Section 26 05 26 — Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 28 05 53 — Identification for Electronic Safety and Security. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors. C. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994. D. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manufacturer (or division thereof). E. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL listing. F. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology) technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the systems integrity. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE A. Main FACP or network node shall be a NOTIFIER Model NFS-320 and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply in an economical space saving single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -1 the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. B. Operator Control: Acknowledge Switch: a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady -ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition. b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo sounders. 2. Alarm Silence Switch: Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto -silence timers. 3. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch: The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset. 4. System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically -latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. 5. Lamp Test: The Lamp Test switch shall activate all local system LEDs, light each segment of the liquid crystal display and display the panel software revision for service personal. C. System Capacity and General Operation: The control panel or each network node shall provide, or be capable of 318 intelligent/addressable devices. 2. The control panel or each network node shall include Form -C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and security relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC. 3. It shall also include four Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits. 4. The Notification Appliance Circuits shall be programmable to Syncronize with System Sensor, Gentex and Wheelock Notification Appliances. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-2 5. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad with easy touch rubber keys for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are not considered suitable substitutes. 8. The FACP shall support up to 20 logic equations, including "and," "or," and "not," or time delay equations to be used for advanced programming. Logic equations shall require the use of a PC with a software utility designed for programming. 9. The FACP or each network node shall provide the following features: a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out. b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 7. C. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. d. Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be .5 to 2.35 percent per foot for photoelectric detectors and 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot for ionization detectors. The system shall also support sensitive advanced detection laser detectors with an alarm level range of .03 percent per foot to 1.0 percent per foot. The system shall also include up to nine levels of Prealarm, selected by detector, to indicate impending alarms to maintenance personnel. e. The ability to display or print system reports. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a detector enters verification 20 times. g. PAS presignal, meeting NFPA 72 3-8.3 requirements. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-3 h. Rapid manual station reporting (under 3 seconds) and shall meet NFPA 72 Chapter 1 requirements for activation of notification circuits within 10 seconds of initiating device activation. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software. Self optimizing pre -alarm for advanced fire warning, which allows each detector to learn its particular environment and set its prealarm level to just above normal peaks. k. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm, or one smoke detector and one thermal detector. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address. M. Control -by -time for non -fire operations, with holiday schedules. n. Day/night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. o. Device blink control for sleeping areas. 10. The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel node notification circuits in March Time (120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 A-2-2.2.2), and California Code. Panel notification circuits (NAC 1,2,3 and 4) shall also support Two -Stage operation, Canadian Dual Stage (3 minutes) and Canadian Dual Stage (5 minutes). Two stage operation shall allow 20 Pulses Per Minute (PPM) on alarm and 120 PPM after 5 minutes or when a second device activates. Canadian Dual stage is the same as Two -Stage except will only switch to second stage by activation of Drill Switch 3 or 5 minute timer. The panel shall also provide a coding option that will synchronize specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific "sync pulse." 11. Network Communication: The FACP shall be capable of communicating on a Local Area Network (LAN), a firmware package that utilizes a peer- to-peer, inherently regenerative communication format and protocol. D. Central Microprocessor: The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art, high speed, 16-bit RISC device and it shall communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include an EPROM for system program storage, Flash memory for building -specific program storage, and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all control -by -event programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Control -by -event equations shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -4 3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of system displays, printer, and history file. The time -of -day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real time clock may also be used to control non -fire functions at programmed time -of -day, day -of -week, and day -of -year. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors. 5. An auto -program (self -learn) function shall be provided to quickly install initial functions and make the system operational. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based program utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off- line program the system with batch upload/download, and have the ability to upgrade the manufacturers (FLASH) system code changes. This program shall also have a verification utility, which scans the program files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare old program files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testing of any system operating changes. This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72 requirements for testing after system modification. E. System Display 1. The system shall support an 80 character display. The display shall include an 80 -character backlit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and a full PC style QWERTY keypad. 2. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator: 3. The 80 -character display shall include the following operator control switches: ACKNOWLEDGE, ALARM SILENCE, ALARM ACTIVATE (drill), SYSTEM RESET, and LAMP TEST. 4. The display shall annunciate status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software zones. 5. The display shall also provide Light -Emitting Diodes: The 80 -character display shall provide 12 Light -Emitting -Diodes (LEDs), that indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM WARNING, SECURITY ALARM, SUPERVISORY SIGNAL, SYSTEM TROUBLE, DISABLED POINTS, ALARM SILENCED, Controls Active, Pre -Discharge, Discharge and Abort. The display shall provide a QWERTY type keypad: The 80 -character display keypad shall be an easy to use QWERTY type keypad, similar to a PC keyboard. This shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 2831 00-5 numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming. The system shall support the display of battery charging current and voltage on the 80 -character LCD display. F. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Each FACP or FACP network node shall support one SLC. Each SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 159 intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) and 159 intelligent modules (monitor or control) for a loop capacity of 318 devices. SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring. CPU shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, prealarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements. G. Serial Interfaces The system shall include two serial EIA -232 interfaces. Each interface shall be a means of connecting UL Listed Information Technology Equipment (ITE) peripherals. a. One EIA -232 interface shall be used to connect an UL -Listed 40 or 80 column printer. Printers that are not UL -Listed are not considered acceptable substitutes. b. One EIA -232 interface shall be used to connect an UL -Listed 40 or 80 column printer. Printers that are not UL -Listed are not considered acceptable substitutes. C. One EIA -232 interface shall be used to connect a UL -listed CRT terminal. This interface shall include special protocol methods that allow off-site monitoring of the FACP over standard dial-up phone lines. This ancillary capability shall allow remote readout of all status information, including analog values, and shall not interfere with or degrade FACP operations when used. It shall allow remote FACP Acknowledge, Reset, or Signal Silence in this mode. It shall also allow adjustment of detector sensitivity and readout of the history file. d. The system shall include an EIA -485 port for the serial connection of optional annunciators and remote LCD displays. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-6 e. The EIA -485 interface may be used for network connection to a proprietary -receiving unit. H. Enclosures: The control panel shall be housed in a UL -listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi -flush mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust -resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish. 2. The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. 3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. For convenience, the door may be site configured for either right or left hand hinging. I. Power Supply: A high tech off-line switching power supply shall be available for the fire alarm control panel or network node and provide 6.0 amps of available power for the control panel and peripheral devices. 2. Provisions will be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required by adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies. 3. Positive -Temperature -Coefficient (PTC) thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over -current protection shall be provided on all power outputs. The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger for use with batteries up to 55 AH or may be used with an external battery and charger system. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field. 4. The power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions, and shall have the following LED indicators: Ground Fault LED AC Power Fail LED NAC on LED (4) 5. The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary power for the FACP. 6. The main power supply shall provide a battery charger using dual -rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge and be capable of charging batteries up to 200 AH. 7. All circuits shall be power -limited, per UL864 requirements. J. Auxiliary Field Power Supply — Addressable: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-7 The auxiliary addressable power supply is a remote 24 VDC power supply used to power Notification Devices and field devices that require regulated 24VDC power. The power supply shall also include and charge backup batteries. The addressable power supply for the fire alarm system shall provide up a minimum of 6.0 amps of 24 volt DC regulated power for Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) power or 5 amps of 24 volt DC general power. The power supply shall have an additional .5 amp of 24 VDC auxiliary power for use within the same cabinet as the power supply. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 - 25.0 amp hour batteries. The addressable power supply shall provide four individually addressable Notification Appliance Circuits that may be configured as two Class "A" and two Class "B" or four Class "B" only circuits. All circuits shall be power -limited per UL 864 requirements. The addressable power supply shall provide built-in synchronization for certain Notification Appliances on each circuit without the need for additional synchronization modules. The power supply's output circuits shall be individually selected for synchronization. A single addressable power supply shall be capable of supporting both synchronized and non - synchronized Notification Devices at the same time. 5. The addressable power supply shall operate on 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The interface to the power supply from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be via the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) or other multiplexed means Power supplies that do not use an intelligent interface are not suitable substitutes. The required wiring from the FACP to the addressable power supply shall be a single unshielded twisted pair wire. Data on the SLC shall be transmitted between 24 VDC, 5 VDC and 0 VDC at approximately 3.33k baud. The addressable power supply shall supervise for battery charging failure, AC power loss, power brownout, battery failure, NAC loss, and optional ground fault detection. In the event of a trouble condition, the addressable power supply shall report the incident and the applicable address to the FACP via the SLC. 8. The addressable power supply shall have an AC Power Loss Delay option. If this option is utilized and the addressable power supply experiences an AC power loss, reporting of the incident to the FACP will be delayed. A delay time of eight or sixteen hours shall be Dip -switch selected. 9. The addressable power supply shall have an option for Canadian Trouble Reporting and this option shall be Dip -switch selectable. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-8 10. The addressable power supply mounts in either the FACP backbox or it's own dedicated surface mounted backbox with cover. 11. Each of the power supply's four output circuits shall be DIP -switch selected for Notification Appliance Circuit or General Purpose 24 VDC power. Any output circuit shall be able to provide up to 2.5 amps of 24 VDC power. 12. The addressable power supply's output circuits shall be individually supervised when they are selected to be either a Notification Appliance Circuit when wired Class "A" or by the use of and end -of -line resistor. When the power supply's output circuit is selected as General 24VDC power, the circuit shall be individually supervised when an end -of -line relay is used. 13. When selected for Notification Appliance Circuits, the output circuits shall be individually DIP -switch selectable for Steady, March Time, Dual Stage or Temporal. 14. When selected as a Notification Appliance Circuit, the output circuits of the addressable power supply shall have the option to be coded by the use of a universal zone coder. 15. The addressable power supply shall interface and synchronize with other power supplies of the same type. The required wiring to interface multiple addressable power supplies shall be a single unshielded, twisted pair wire. 16. An individual or multiple interfaced addressable power supplies shall have the option to use an external charger for battery charging. Interfaced power supplies shall have the option to share backup battery power. K. Field Charging Power Supply (FCPS): The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote 24 volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances. The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs (two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notification devices. The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount backbox. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per NFPA requirements. 5. The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per 1995 UL standards. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-9 L. Specific System Operations: Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the system keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window and have a minimum of 9 levels. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 5 to 30 seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for verification. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad. 4. Point Read: The system shall be able to display or print the following point status diagnostic functions: a. Device status b. Device type C. Custom device label d. View analog detector values e. Device zone assignments All program parameters 5. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report will be generated and printed, listing all system status. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 800 events. Up to 200 events shall be dedicated to alarm and the remaining events are general purpose. Systems that do not have dedicated alarm storage, where events are overridden by non -alarm type events, are not suitable substitutes. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or printed in its entirety. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable substitutes. 7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -10 system responds with a reading that is above or below normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display, and printed on the optional printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform. 8. Pre -Alarm Function: The system shall provide two levels of pre -alarm warning to give advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre -alarm levels shall be fully field adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays. The system shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre -alarm level, to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms. 9. Software Zones: The FACP shall provide 100 software zones, 10 additional special function zones, 10 releasing zones, and 20 logic zones. 10. The fire alarm control panel shall include a walk test feature. It shall include the ability to test initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. Operation shall be as follows: a. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are selected to participate in walk test, for 3 seconds. b. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs for 8 seconds. C. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer. 11. Waterflow Operation: An alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on the main panel display, turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be affected by the signal silence switch. 12. Supervisory Operation: An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the system display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to enter the trouble mode. 13. Signal Silence Operation: The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification, relay, speaker etc) to deactivate upon depression of the signal silence switch. 14. Non -Alarm Input Operation: Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used as a non -alarm input to monitor normally open contact type devices. Non -alarm functions are a lower priority than fire alarm initiating devices. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -11 15. Combo Zone: A special type code shall be available to allow waterflow and supervisory devices to share a common addressable module. Waterflow devices shall be wired in parallel, supervisory devices in series. 2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Programmable Electronic Sounders: Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, at a sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device. 3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans. B. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971, be fully synchronized, and shall meet the following criteria: The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second. 2. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971 3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971 C. Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Manual fire alarm stations shall be non -code, non-breakglass type, equipped with key lock so that they may be tested without operating the handle. 2. Stations must be designed such that after an actual activation, they cannot be restored to normal except by key reset. 3. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet (30.5 m) front or side. 4. Manual stations shall be constructed of high impact Lexan, with operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the manual station in letters one half inch (12.7 mm) in size or larger. D. Conventional Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC, two wire, ceiling - mounted, light scattering type using an LED light source. 2. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch. 3. Detector shall be provided on a twist -lock base. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -12 4. It shall be possible to perform a calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the detector without the need for the generation of smoke. The test method shall test all detector circuits. 5. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), on the detector, which may be seen from ground level over 360 degrees. These LEDs shall flash at least every 10 seconds, indicating that power is applied to the detector. 6. The detector shall not go into alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 3000 feet (914.4 m) per minute. 7. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field cleaning of the detector chamber. 8. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw. E. Conventional Ionization Type Area Smoke Detectors: Ionization type smoke detectors shall be a two wire, 24 VDC type using a dual unipolar chamber. 2. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch. 3. Detector shall be provided on a twist -lock base. 4. It shall be possible to perform a calibration sensitivity and performance test on the detector without the need for the generation of smoke. 5. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) over 360 degrees, on the detector, which may be seen from ground level. This LED shall flash every 10 seconds, indicating that power is applied to the detector. 6. The detector shall not alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 1,200 feet (365.76 m) per minute. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field cleaning of the detector chamber. 7. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw. F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC type with visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the composite supply/return air ducts(s), with properly sized air sampling tubes. G. Projected Beam Detectors: The projected beam type shall be a 4 -wire 24 VDC device. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -13 2. The detector shall be listed to UL 268 and shall consist of a separate transmitter and receiver capable of being powered separately or together. 3. The detector shall operate in either a short range (30' - 100') or long range (100'- 330') mode. 4. The temperature range of the device shall be -22 degrees F to 131 degrees F. 5. The detector shall feature a bank of four alignment LEDs on both the receiver and the transmitter that are used to ensure proper alignment of unit without special tools. 6. Beam detectors shall feature automatic gain control which will compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt accumulation on lenses. 7. The unit shall be both ceiling and wall mountable. 8. The detector shall have the ability to be tested using calibrated test filters or magnet activated remote test station. H. Automatic Conventional Heat Detectors: Automatic heat detectors shall have a combination rate of rise and fixed temperature rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (57.2 Celsius) for areas where ambient temperatures do not exceed 100 degrees (37.7 Celsius), and 200 degrees (93.33 Celsius) for areas where the temperature does not exceed 150 degrees (65.5 Celsius). 2. Automatic heat detectors shall be a low profile, ceiling mount type with positive indication of activation. 3. The rate of rise element shall consist of an air chamber, a flexible metal diaphragm, and a factory calibrated, moisture -proof, trouble free vent, and shall operate when the rate of temperature rise exceeds 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. 4. The fixed temperature element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and actuator shaft. 5. Automatic heat detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet (762 square meters). I. Waterflow Indicator: Waterflow Switches shall be an integral, mechanical, non -coded, non - accumulative retard type. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -14 2. Waterflow Switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time which is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30- 45 seconds. 3. All waterflow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series. 4. Waterflow switches shall be provided and connected under this section but installed by the mechanical contractor. 5. Where possible, locate waterflow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting which changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve. J. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches: Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches. 2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. 3. The switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjusted to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position. 4. The supervisory switch shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing, which shall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves. 5. The switch housing shall be finished in red baked enamel. 6. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from its mounting. 7. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section and installed by mechanical contractor. a. This unit shall provide for each zone: alarm indications, using a red alarm an yellow trouble long -life LEDs and control switches for the control of fire alarm control panel functions. The annunciator will also have an ON-LINE LED, local piezo electric signal, local acknowledge/lamp test switch, and custom slide -in zone/function identification labels. b. Switches shall be available for remote annunciation and control of output points in the system, system acknowledge, telephone zone Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 2831 00-15 select, speaker select, global signal silence, and global system reset within the confines of all applicable standards. K. Alphanumeric LCD Type Annunciator: The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located back -lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. An audible indication of alarm shall be integral to the alphanumeric display. 4. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application. 5. It shall be possible to connect up to 32 LCD displays and be capable of wiring distances up to 6,000 feet from the control panel. 6. The annunciator shall connect to a separate, dedicated "terminal mode" EIA -485 interface. This is a two -wire loop connection and shall be capable of distances to 6,000 feet. Each terminal mode LCD display shall mimic the main control panel. 7. The system shall allow a minimum of 32 terminal mode LCD annunciators. Up to 10 LCD annunciators shall be capable of the following system functions: Acknowledge, Signal Silence and Reset, which shall be protected from unauthorized use by a keyswitch or password. 8. The LED annunciator shall offer an interface to a graphic style annunciator and provide each of the features listed above. L. All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864. M. Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT). The UDACT is an interface for communicating digital information between a fire alarm control panel and an UL -Listed central station. The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module position of the fire alarm control cabinet. Optionally, the UDACT shall have the ability for remote mounting, up to 6,000 feet from the fire alarm control panel. The wire connections between the UDACT and the control panel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair for multiplexed communication of overall system status. Systems that utilize relay contact closures are not acceptable. The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage detect), per UL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 2831 00-16 ability for split reporting of panel events up to three different telephone numbers. The UDACT shall be completely field programmable from a built-in keypad and 4 character red, seven segment display. The UDACT shall be capable of transmitting events in at least 15 different formats. This ensures compatibility with existing and future transmission formats. 5. Communication shall include vital system status such as: - Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non -alarm, supervisory) - Independent Addressable Device Status - AC (Mains) Power Loss - Low Battery and Earth Fault - System Off Normal - 12 and 24 Hour Test Signal - Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements) - EIA -485 Communications Failure - Phone Line Failure The UDACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in the Contact ID format. In this format the UDACT shall support transmission of up to 2,040 points. This enables the central station to have exact details concerning the origin of the fire or response emergency. N. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks: For ease of service all panel 1/0 wiring terminal blocks shall be removable, plug-in types and have sufficient capacity for #18 to #12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that are permanently fixed are not acceptable. O. Printer: The printer shall provide hard -copy printout of all changes in status of the system and shall time -stamp such printouts with the current time -of -day and date. The printer shall be standard carriage with 80 -characters per line and shall use standard pin -feed paper. The printer shall be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop or table. The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an interface complying with Electrical Industries Association standard EIA -232D. Power to the printer shall be 120 VAC @ 60 Hz. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -17 2. The system shall have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main FACP enclosure. Alarms shall be printed in easy -to -read RED, other messages, such as a trouble, shall be printed in BLACK. This printer shall receive power from the system power supply and shall operate via battery back-up if AC mains are lost. The strip printer shall be UL 864 listed. 3. The system shall have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main FACP enclosure. Alarms shall be printed in easy -to -read RED, other messages, such as a trouble, shall be printed in BLACK. This printer shall receive power from the system power supply and shall operate via battery back-up if AC mains are lost. The strip printer shall be UL 864 listed. P. Video Display Terminal: The Video Display Terminal shall provide a visual display and an audible alert of all changes in status of the system and shall annotate such displays with the current time -of -day and date. 2. The Video Display Terminal shall be enclosed in a cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop or table. 3. A detachable keyboard shall be provided that may be used for programming, testing, and control of the system. Individual keys shall be provided on the keyboard for the ACKNOWLEDGE, RESET, LAMP TEST, SYSTEM TEST, and SIGNAL SILENCE functions of the control panel. 4. The video display terminal shall include a count of all alarms and troubles in the system, as well as a count of all alarms and trouble requiring acknowledgment. These counts shall be continuously displayed during all FACP operations. 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Addressable Devices — General: Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address switches. Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159. 2. Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP -switch, are not an allowable substitute. 3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits. 4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash green under normal Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -18 conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 5. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system. The panel on a time -of -day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity. 6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7. 7. The detectors shall be ceiling -mount and shall include a separate twist - lock base with tamper proof feature. Bases shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications. 8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. 9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). 10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector. 11. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. 12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold. 13. Addressable modules shall mount in a 4 -inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box. An optional surface mount Lexan enclosure shall be available. B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (Manual Station): Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 28 31 00 -19 Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status. They shall use a key operated test -reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger. C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector: The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light -scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. D. Intelligent Laser Photo Smoke Detector: The intelligent laser photo smoke detector shall be a spot type detector that incorporates an extremely bright laser diode and an integral lens that focuses the light beam to a very small volume near a receiving photo sensor. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the photo sensor. The laser detector shall have conductive plastic so that dust accumulation is reduced significantly. The intelligent laser photo detector shall have nine sensitivity levels and be sensitive to a minimum obscuration of 0.03 percent per foot. 4. The laser detector shall not require expensive conduit, special fittings or PVC pipe. 5. The intelligent laser photo detector shall support standard, relay, isolator and sounder detector bases. 6. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed in NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shall not be required. 7. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normal operation and turn on steady red in alarm. E. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector: The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion. F. Intelligent Multi Criteria Acclimating Detector: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-20 The intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device that is designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single sensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a built-in microprocessor to determine it's environment and choose the appropriate sensing settings. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize advanced electronics that react to slow smoldering fires and thermal properties all within a single sensing device. 2. The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then have the ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls are moved or as the occupancy changes). 3. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastily in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive phenomena. G. Intelligent Thermal Detectors: Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate - of -rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit. H. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector: The smoke detector housing shall accommodate either an intelligent ionization detector or an intelligent photoelectric detector, of that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. Hostile -Area Smoke Detector: The detector shall be designed to provide early warning smoke detection in environments where traditional smoke detectors are not practical. The detector shall have a filter system to remove particles down to 25 microns. 3. This filter system shall remove unwanted airborne particles and water mist. This shall allow the detector to operate in environments where traditional smoke detectors would have nuisance alarms. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-21 4. The filter system shall consist of 2 filters one of which is field replaceable 5. The filter system shall have an intake fan to draw air and smoke through the filters into the sensing chamber. 6. The filter system shall be supervised so that if the filter is clogged or the fan fails the control panel reports trouble. 7. The filter system shall be powered from 24 VDC separate from the SLC communications. S. The detector shall utilize a photoelectric sensing chamber. J. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module: Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SI -Cs. 2. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 3. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED. K. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module: Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional 2 -wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device). 2. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. L. Addressable Control Module: Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. 2. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp of inductive AN signal, or 2 amps of resistive AN signal operation. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-22 3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote power supply. 4. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC. M. Addressable Relay Module: Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building functions. The relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. N. Isolator Module: Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire -to -wire short circuits on an SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loop segment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building. If a wire -to -wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open -circuit (disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section. The isolator module shall not require address -setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal operation. The isolator module shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated. O. Smoke Control Annunciator: On/Auto/Off switches and status indicators (LEDS) shall be provided for monitoring and manual control of each fan, damper, HVAC control unit, stairwell pressurization fan, and smoke exhaust fan. To ensure compliance the units supplied shall meet the following UL categories: UUKL, PAZX, UDTZ, QVAX as well as the requirements of NFPA 90A, HVAC, and NFPA 92A & 92B, Smoke Control. The control System shall be field programmable for either 90A operation or 92A/B operation to allow for future use and system expansion. The OFF LED shall be Yellow, the ON LED shall be green, the Trouble/Fault LED shall be Amber/Orange for each switch. The Trouble/Fault indicator shall indicate a trouble in the control and/or monitor points associated with that switch. In addition, each group of eight Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-23 switches shall have two LEDS and one momentary switch which allow the following functions: An Amber LED to indicate an OFF -NORMAL switch position, in the ON or OFF position; A Green LED to indicate ALL AUTO switch position; A Local Acknowledge/Lamp Test momentary switch. Each switch shall have the capability to monitor and control two addressable inputs and two addressable outputs. In all modes, the ON and OFF indicators shall continuously follow the device status not the switch position. Positive feedback shall be employed to verify correct operation of the device being controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto by physical switch position only are not acceptable. All HVAC switches (i.e., limit switches, vane switches, etc.) shall be provided and installed by the HVAC contractor. 5. It shall be possible to meet the requirements mentioned above utilizing wall mounted custom graphic. 2.4 BATTERIES A. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. B. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required. C. If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery and charger systems may be used. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. D. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi -flush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 283100-24 3.2 TEST The service of a competent, factory -trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7. A. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. B. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP. C. Verify activation of all waterflow switches. D. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. E. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. F. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. G. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. H. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. I. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk test. J. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points. K. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. L. When the system is equipped with a Voice Evacuation Control panel, the manufacturer's manual shall be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying voice messages. 3.3 FINAL INSPECTION A. At the final inspection, a factory -trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 2831 00-25 3.4 INSTRUCTION A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation." END OF SECTION Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Specifications 2831 00-26 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 16.13 Trenching PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 3123 16.13 A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 3123 23 - Fill B. Section 32 12 16 Bituminous Concrete Paving. C. City of Newport Beach Standard Specifications and Standard Drawings, dated 2003. D. "GREENBOOK" Standard Specifications for Public Works, 2006 edition. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-1b) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2010 B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. D. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances, containing no rocks or lumps over 2 inches in greatest dimension. B. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1 inch in the upper 12 inches of fill. C. Cohesionless Material Used for Structural Backfill: Provide sand free from organic material and other foreign matter, and as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. D. Bedding material shall meet the minimum standards listed below: 1. 3/4" Crushed Gravel. E. Slurry backfill where required shall be 2 sack unless otherwise specified. F. General Fill - Fill Type : Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Meeting the approval of the engineer of record. 4. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL. 3123 16.13 - Trenching 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 3.02 GENERAL A. Utilities: Section 3123 16.13 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to trenching. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted. 3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Section, immediately notify the Engineer and secure instructions. 5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instructions are received from the Engineer. B. Protection of Persons and Property: 1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of the Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section. C. Dewatering: 1. Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and substructure work to an approved location by pumps, drains, and other approved methods. 2. Keep excavations and site construction area free from water. D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site. E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times. 3.03 TRENCHING A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Provide sheeting and shoring necessary for protection of the Work and for the safety of personnel. 1. Prior to backfilling remove all sheeting. 2. Do not permit sheeting to remain in the trenches except when, in the opinion of the Architect, field conditions or the type of sheeting or methods of construction such as use of concrete bedding are such as to make removal of sheeting impracticable. In such cases, the Architect may permit portions of sheeting to be cut off and remain in the trench. C. Open Cut: 1. Excavate for utilities by open cut. 2. If conditions at the site prevent such open cut, and if approved by the Engineer, trenching may be used. 3123 16.13 - Trenching &30i2013 Page 2 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 16.13 3. Short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the conductor can be installed safely and backfill can be compacted properly into such tunnel. 4. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the limits of normal excavation lines in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects, backfill the voids remaining after removal of the objects as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 5. When the void is below the subgrade for the utility bedding, use suitable earth materials and compact to the relative compaction directed by the soil engineer, but in no case to a relative compaction less than 90%. 6. When the void is in the side of the utility trench or open cut, use suitable earth or sand compacted, or consolidated as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, but in no case to a relative compaction less than 90%. 7. Remove boulders and other interfering objects, and backfill voids left by such removals, at no additional cost to the City. 8. Excavating for appurtenances: a. Excavate for manholes and similar structures to a distance sufficient to leave at least 12" clear between outer surfaces and the embankment or shoring that may be used to hold and protect the banks. b. excavation beyond such appurtenances that has not been directed will be considered unauthorized. Fill with sand, gravel, or lean concrete as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer, and at no additional cost to the City. D. Trench to the minimum width necessary for proper installation of the utility, with sides as nearly vertical as possible. Accurately grade the bottom to provide uniform bearing for the utility. E. Depressions: 1. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after the trench has been graded. Provide uniform bearing for the pipe on prepared bottom of the trench. 2. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depth indicated or specified. 3. Where rock is encountered, excavate rock to a minimum over depth of 4" below the trench depth indicated or specified. F. Where utility runs traverse public property or are subject to governmental or utility company jurisdiction, provide depth, bedding, over, and other requirements as set forth by legally constituted authority having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the depth shown in the Contract Documents. G. Cover: 1. Provide minimum trench depth indicated below to maintain a minimum 36" cover over the top of the installed storm drain. H. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. I. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. J. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. K. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. L. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. M. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re -use from site. N. Stockpile excavated material to be re -used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 3122 00. 3123 16.13 - Trenching &30i2013 Page 3 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 O. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.04 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT Section 3123 16.13 A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.05 BEDDING A. Bedding for trenches is that material supporting, surrounding, and extending to 1 foot above the top of the pipe. Where concrete is specified to cover the pipe, the top of the concrete shall be considered as the top of the bedding. B. Where it becomes necessary to remove boulders or other interfering objects at subgrade for bedding, any void below such subgrade shall be filled with the bedding material. C. Bedding material, approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and meeting the minimum standards listed in Section 2.01.E above, shall be deposited and compacted to 90% relative compaction in the trench uniformly on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 12 inches over the top of the pipe. For pipes larger than 48" diameter, bedding material shall be placed up to spring -line. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. For non-metallic lines install a magnetic tracer tape at 12 inch maximum depth over top of pipe. C. When flexible pipe (PVC, HDPE etc.) is used, pipe shall be backfilled to the spring line, compacted and backfill tested prior to completing initial backfill. D. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. F. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. G. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2.5 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. I. Correct areas that are over -excavated. I. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. At the upper foot of subgrade beneath pavement and in all aggregate base: minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density. K. Reshape and re -compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.07 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Utilities lying parallel to stuctures and within the influence of the footings shall be backfilled with slurry. 3123 16.13 - Trenching &30/2013 Page 4 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3.08 TOLERANCES Section 3123 16.13 A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. End of Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching &30i2013 Page 5 of 5 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 3123 16.13 - Trenching &30i2013 Page 6 of 5 Section 3123 16.13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 23 Fill PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Section 3123 23 A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for paving. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches to utility main connections. B. Section 02810 Irrigation System. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-1b) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2010 B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/tn3)); 2012. C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. D. ASTM D 2488 - Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual -Manual Procedure); 2000. E. ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2010. F. ASTM D 4829 - Standard Test Method for Expansion Index of Soils; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01- General Requirements - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. 1. Provide Certification that import material meets these specifications. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill and backfill materials. 1. Engineered Fill: a. Non -expansive soil consisting of relatively granular material. b. Free of organic and inorganic debris. c. Shall have a Plasticity Index (P.I.) of 15 or less. 2. On-site soil may be used as engineered fill if the meet the engineering fill criteria and are approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. 3123 23 - Fill 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 23 3. Import soil may be used as engineered fill if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Import material must be approved prior to bringing to the site. 4. Fill material shall have a minimum R -value of 66. 5. All fill and backfill material shall consist exclusively of nonexpansive material. a. Materials fall into the GM, GC, SM, SC, SP, or SW categories (ASTM D2488-00). b. Materials shall have an expansion index of 10 or less (ASTM D 4829-03). 6. Rocks in fill material shall be placed in a sufficient soil matrix to ensure that voids caused by nesting of the rocks will not occur and that the fill can be properly compacted. 7. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1 inch in the upper 12 inch of fill or embankment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cutout soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Backfill excavations as promptly as progress of the Work permits, but not until: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade. 2. Inspecting, testing, approving, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Concrete formwork is removed. 4. Shoring and bracing are removed, and voids have been backfilled with satisfactory materials. 5. Trash and debris have been removed. B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Fill shall be placed in level lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness. E. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. G. Spread and thoroughly blend all fill materials, including backfill, after achieving proper moisture content. H. Prior to compaction, bring fill to proper moisture content (+/- 3% of optimum) by aeration or moistening. 1. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum dry density. J. The upper 12 inches of subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density. K. Subgrade should be firm and unyielding when proof rolled with heavy, rubber -tired grading equipment. L. Slope grade away from building minimum 2.5 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. 3123 23 - Fill &30/2013 Page 2 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 M. Correct areas that are over -excavated. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches and 1. Bedding: Use Fill Type 3/4" Crushed Gravel. 2. Cover with fill per City standard. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.05 TOLERANCES Section 3123 23 A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 COMPACTING A. Control soil compaction during construction to provide the minimum percentage of density specified for each area as determined according to ASTM D 1557. B. Provide not less than the following maximum density of soil material compacted at optimum moisture content for the actual density of each layer of soil material in place, and as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Pavements: a. Compact the top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density for cohesive soil material. 3.07 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture -conditioned before compacting, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compacting operations. B. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compacting to the specified density. C. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture -density relation tests approved by the Geotechnical Engineer 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01- General Requirements - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. D. Secure the Geotechnical Engineer's inspection and approval of subgrades and fill layers before subsequent construction is permitted thereon. E. Provide at least the following tests to the approval of the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. At paved areas, at least one field density test for every 2,000 square feet of paved area, but not less than three tests. 2. In each compacted fill layer, one field density test for every 2,000 square feet of overlaying paved area, but not less than three tests. 3123 23 -Fill &30i2013 Page 3 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 3123 23 F. If, in the Geotechnical Engineer's opinion, base on reports of the testing laboratory, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compacting and testing under the provisions of Division 01- General Requirements - Quality Requirements. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. End of Section 3123 23 -Fill &30i2013 Page 4 of 4 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 32 17 23.13 Painted Pavement Markings PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 32 17 23.13 A. State of California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, dated July 2002, Section 84-3. B. FS TT -B-1325 - Beads (Glass Spheres); Retro -Reflective; Rev. D, 2007. C. FS TT -P-1952 - Paint, Traffic Black, and Airfield Marking, Waterborne; Rev. E, 2007. D. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. E. FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov; current edition. F. Pavement markings for disability requirements shall meet the requirements of the California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24 Part 2, California Building Code: and ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, latest amendments. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: I. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Certificates: Submit for each batch of paint and glass beads stating compliance with specified requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint in containers of at least 5 gallons accompanied by batch certificate. B. Deliver glass beads in containers suitable for handling and strong enough to prevent loss during shipment accompanied by batch certificate. C. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. D. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated. 1. Parking Lots: White. B. Reflective Glass Beads: FS TT -B-1325, Type I (low index of refraction), Gradation A (coarse, drop -on); with silicone or other suitable waterproofing coating to ensure free flow. 32 17 23.13 - Painted Pavement Markings 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Section 32 17 23.13 A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking materials. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods. D. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oil -soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. E. Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried. B. Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. D. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown. E. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control points until after markings have been accepted. F. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings true, sharp edges and ends. 1. Apply paint in one coat only. 2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum. 3. Length Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 inches. 4. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. G. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated on drawings. 1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces. 2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable. H. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the design and size indicated. 3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked. 32 17 23.13 - Painted Pavement Markings &30i2013 Page 2 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 32 17 23.13 B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings. C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that recommended by the manufacturer. D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities. E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied, using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method. F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to City. End of Section 32 17 23.13 - Painted Pavement Markings &30i2013 Page 3 of 3 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 32 17 23.13 - Painted Pavement Markings &30i2013 Page 4 of 3 Section 32 17 23.13 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings, and accessories. B. Automatic valves C. Manual valves D. Control system. E. Pop-up rotor systems 1.02 DESCRIPTION Section 32 84 23 A. Provide all material, labor, equipment transportation, and services necessary for the furnishing and installation of the complete automatic sprinkler irrigation system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited to: 1. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials and refilling trenches. 2. Providing a complete system including piping, valves, fittings, rotors and automatic controls and final adjustment of heads to ensure complete coverage. 3. Line voltage connections to all irrigation controllers; low voltage control wiring from controller to remote control valves. 4. Electrical service and hookup to automatic controller 5. Automatic controller assembly and installation. 6. Thrust Blocking 7. Submittals, tests, as -built and record drawings. 8. Erosion control and repair of damage due to over watering and erosion. 9. Warranty replacement. 10. Cleanup, inspection and approval. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating and backfilling for irrigation piping. B. Section 3123 23 - Fill: Backfilling for irrigation piping. C. Section 32 93 00 - Exterior Plants. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile -Butadiene -Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2011). B. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2009. C. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009). D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 -General Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and layout of booster pump. Provide the following: 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30/2013 Page 1 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 32 84 23 I. Dimensions illustrating adequate clearances for ease of use to be provided between pump and surrounding areas. 2. Dimensions for concrete pad based upon final approved manufacturer's pump dimensions. 3. Wiring Diagram C. Product Data: Provide component and control system and wiring diagrams. D. Record Documents: Record actual locations of all concealed components piping system and conduit. E. Dimension from two permanent points of reference, building corners, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items: 1. Connection to existing water lines. 2. Connection to existing electrical power. 3. Gate valves. 4. Routing and/or directional turns of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension max. 100' along routing). 5. Sprinkler control valves. 6. Routing of control wiring. 7. Quick coupling valves. 8. Other related equipment as directed by the Architect. F. Detail Drawings: Submit detailed drawings for Owner approval, for all assemblies not detailed on the drawings. G. Controller Charts: 1. The Architect shall accept Record drawings before controller charts are prepared. Provide one controller chart for each controller supplied. The chart shall show the area controlled by the automatic controller and shall be the maximum size that the controller door will allow. 2. The chart is to be a reduced drawing of the actual "as -built" system. However, in the event the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a size that will be readable when reduced. The chart shall be a black line or blue line ozalid print and a different color shall be used to indicate the area of coverage for each station. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum of 10 mils. These charts shall be completed by the Contractor and approved by the Architect prior to final observation of the irrigation system. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog. 2. Provide schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide a determined amount of water. I. Maintenance Materials: Provide the following for City's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Sprinkler/Rotor Heads: One of each type and size. 3. Extra Valve Keys for Manual Valves: One. 4. Extra Valve Box Keys: One. 5. Extra Quick Coupler Keys: One. 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30i2013 Page 2 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 32 84 23 6. Prepare and deliver to the Architect, within 10 calendar days prior to completion of construction, two hardcover binders with three rings containing the following information: a. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representative. b. Catalog and part sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract. c. Contractor's Guarantee statement that all equipment has been installed per plans and specifications. d. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, storing and installation of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle that allows the length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged will be discarded and, if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Architect. In the event this notification is not performed, the irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Procedure: Submit information in conformance with the substitution requirements of Division O1, General Provisions. B. Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and flow charts for each item to be substituted. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All work and materials shall be in full conformance with the latest rules and regulations of the Newport Beach, CA Plumbing and Electric codes. B. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. C. Underwriters Laboratories: Electrical wiring, controls, motors, and devices shall be UL listed, and so labeled. 1.10 INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect or Designated Representative in advance for the following observation meetings, according to the time indicated: (Certain meetings may be grouped if prior approval is granted). 1. Coordinate one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 2. Booster Pump assembly: 48 hours. 3. Pressure supply line installation and testing: 48 hours. 4. Automatic controller location: 48 hours. 5. Coverage test: 48 hours. 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30i2013 Page 3 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 6. Final site review: 7 days. Section 32 84 23 B. When observations have been conducted by other than the Architect or Designated Representative, show evidence in writing of when and by whom these observations were made. I. Final Observation: a. The Contractor shall operate each system in its entirety for the Architect or Designated Representative at time of final observation. Any items deemed not acceptable by the Architect or Designated Representative, or not in compliance with these specifications and drawings, shall be reworked to the complete satisfaction of the Architect or Designated Representative. b. The Contractor shall show evidence to the Architect or Designated Representative that the City has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before final observation can occur. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with site backfilling, landscape grading and delivery of plant life. IRRAWAY.1N:L\►YIVI A. The warranty for the sprinkler irrigation system shall be made in accordance with the following form. B. A copy of the warranty form shall be included in the operations and maintenance manual. C. The warranty form shall be retyped onto the Contractor's letterhead and contain the following information D. WARRANTY FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM 1. We hereby warrant that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and work quality, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specification. We agree to repair or replace any defects in material or work quality that may develop during the period of one year from the date of acceptance, except those that may be caused by ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect. We also agree to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the City. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by the City, after receipt of written notice. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice from City, we authorize the City to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense, and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. 2. PROJECT: 3. CONTRACTOR: PHONE NO.: 4. ADDRESS: BY: 5. 6. DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: BY: PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: As shown on plans. B. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30/2013 Page 4 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS Section 32 84 23 A. PVC Pipe (Sizes up through Y): ASTM D 2241; 200 psi pressure rated upstream from controls, 160 psi downstream; solvent welded sockets. B. PVC Pipe (3" - 6" sizes): ASTM D 2241; 200 psi (1.38 MPa) pressure rated upstream from controls, 160 psi (1.10 MPa) downstream; rubber gasketed joints. C. Pressure and Non -Pressure Main Line Piping and Fittings: Sizes 2 1/2 inches and smaller shall be Schedule 80 PVC. D. Non -pressure lines (buried): Shall be PVC Schedule 40. E. Fittings: Type and style of connection to match pipe and shall meet the requirements for service at an operating pressure of 150 pounds per square inch, unless otherwise specified. F. Pipe Risers at Valves: 160 psi PVC pipe. G. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564 for PVC pipe and fittings. H. Sleeve Material: Schedule 80 PVC. I. PVC nipples: Schedule 80 with molded threads. All PVC pipe must bear the following markings: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Nominal pipe size. 3. Schedule or class. 4. Pressure rating in AST (not required on drip tubing). 5. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval (not required on drip tubing). 6. Date of extrusion. 2.03 OUTLETS A. Manufacturer: 1. As indicated on the drawings. 2. Substitutions: See Division 01, General Provisions 2.04 VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. As indicated on the drawings 2. Substitutions: See Division 01, General Provisions B. Gate Valves: Bronze construction non -rising stem. C. Ball Valves: PVC Type ll construction 150 PS1 working pressure. D. Quick Coupling Valves: Two-piece brass body construction, 150 -pound class, with 1 -inch female threads opening at base permitting operation with a special connecting device (coupler) designed for this purpose. 1. Coupler threads: Lug type. 2. Hinge cover: Provide with rubber -like locking N/A vinyl cover. E. Master Valves 1. Valve Type: Spring loaded, packless diaphragm activated, normally closed type with brass body, equipped with flow control and pressure regulation capabilities where noted. 2. Valve Solenoid: 24 volt AC, 4.5 watt maximum, 500 milli -amp maximum surge, corrosion -proof, stainless steel construction, epoxy encapsulated to form a single integral unit unless otherwise noted on plans. 3. Provide bleeder valve to permit operation in the field without power at the controller. 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30i2013 Page 5 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 F. Remote Control Valves Section 32 84 23 1. Valve Type: Spring loaded, packless diaphragm activated, normally closed type with brass body, equipped with flow control and pressure regulation capabilities where noted. 2. Valve Solenoid: 24 volt AC, 4.5 watt maximum, 500 milli -amp maximum surge, corrosion -proof, stainless steel construction, epoxy encapsulated to form a single integral unit unless otherwise noted on plans. 3. Provide bleeder valve to permit operation in the field without power at the controller. G. Valve Boxes 1. Remote control Valves: 14" x 19" of concrete material with locking cover. 2. Gate valves, ball valves and quick couplers: 10" round of concrete material with locking cover. 3. Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box. 4. Emboss, letters on valve boxes to indicate contents of valve box. (ie. GV = Gate Valve, QC = Quick Coupler, RC = Remote Control Valve, MV = Master Valve, BV = Ball Valve) 2.05 CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: 1. As indicated on the drawings. 2. Substitutions: See Division 01, General Provisions. B. Controller(s): Automatic controller, microprocessor solid state control with visible readout display, temporary override feature to bypass cycle for inclement weather, timer for a 24 station system, programmable for 7 days in quarter hour increments, with automatic start and shutdown. C. Controller Enclosure(s): exterior grade wall mount type made of weather and vandal resistant 100% stainless steel, NEMA Type 3R rated with lockable hinged door. D. Flow Sensor: In -Line Type with a non-magnetic, spinning impeller (paddle wheel) as the only moving part. Electrical connections shall be 2 single conductor 18 AWG leads 48 inches long. Insulation shall be direct burial "UF" type colored red for the positive lead and black for the negative lead. The meter body shall be fabricated from Schedule 80 PVC Tees with socket end connections. 2.06 ELECTRICAL (LOW VOLTAGE) A. Connections between controller and remote control valves shall be made with direct burial AWG -UH, 600 -volt wire, insulation thickness 3/64 inch, utilizing low-density high molecular weight polyethylene insulation. B. Splices, where permitted, shall be waterproofed using Rain Bird, Pen-Tite Connectors or fusible heat shrinking tubing, and housed in a box. Boxes for other irrigation use may be utilized for this purpose. C. Wire sizing shall be minimum of #14 "UF" 600 volt underground wiring, unless a shielded cable is used in which case #16 wire maybe used. Common wires to be #12 and white in color. Each "hot' valve wire shall have a distinct and unique color other than white with no repetition of colors. 2.07 PUMP SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Rainbird 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30/2013 Page 6 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 Section 32 84 23 B. Description 1. Pre -fabricated pumping station designed to produce the rated discharge pressure from the minimum design flow rate up to the maximum design flow rate. Pumps for this application are designed for use in flooded suction, suction lift and boosting applications only. The main pumps of this packaged system are of a horizontal single stage end -suction centrifugal type and are designed for indoor applications or installed within an enclosure protected from the elements and properly ventilated. 2. Substitutions: See Division 01, General Provisions. C. Pump and Motor Minimum Requirements 1. Flow: 110 GPM max. 2. Power: 5 HP Min. 3. PSI Boost: 40 PSI. Achieves 80 PSI at outlet of pump. 4. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) with Automatic pressure ramp -up capability 5. NEMA 3R Electrical Enclosure. Marine Grade with Exhaust Fan. 6. Circuit Breaker Motor Protection 7. Electric overload and VFD Fault shutdown safety 8. High Pressure & Low pressure discharge safety. Low pressure alarm. 9. 1 year warranty. D. Pump Station Options to be included 1. Externally mounted pump station fault alarm light. 2. Pump bypass manifold with isolation valves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify location of existing utilities. B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required. B. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions and receive Architect or Designated Representative's approval prior to proceeding with work under this section. C. Coordinate installation of irrigation system, including pipe, so there will be NO interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy him/her that he may safely proceed before starting work on the irrigation system. D. All piping or equipment shown diagrammatically on drawings outside planting areas shall be installed inside planting areas whenever possible. E. Layout and stake locations of system components. F. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system. 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30/2013 Page 7 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 3.03 TRENCHING A. Trench and backfill in accordance with Section 3123 16 and Section 3123 23. Section 32 84 23 B. Excavate trenches to required depths. Follow approved layout for each system. C. Trench bottom shall be flat to ensure piping is supported continuously on an even grade. D. Where lines occur under paved areas, consider dimension to be below the subgrade. E. Trench Size: 1. As indicated on the drawings. F. Trench to accommodate grade changes. G. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Assemblies: 1. Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Line Clearance: All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 6 inches from each other and from lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. 3. Connect to utilities. 4. Install all assemblies specified herein in accordance with respective detail. In absence of detail drawings or specification pertaining to specific items required to complete work, perform such work in accordance with best standard practice, with prior approval from Architect or Designated Representative. 5. PVC pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before installation. Installation and solvent welding methods shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. 6. On PVC to metal connections, the Contractor shall work the metal connections fust. Teflon tape or approved equal shall be used on all threaded PVC to PVC, and on all threaded PVC to metal joints. Light wrench pressure is all that is required. Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters into which the pipe may be welded. 7. Quick Coupling Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, locate valves within 12 inches of hardscape. 8. Set outlets and box covers 1 inch above finish grade in turf areas and 2 inches above finish grade in shrub planters. 9. Provide for thermal movement of components in system. 10. Use threaded nipples for risers to each outlet. B. Electrical Supply: 1. Low voltage wiring shall be placed in the same ditch and taped on bottom side of main lines unless otherwise approved. 2. Wire is to be taped a maximum 12 feet on center. 3. Provide a 12 -inch expansion loop at each connection and directional change. 4. Use a continuous wire between controller and remote control valves. Except as otherwise approved, do not splice wire at any point. All approved splices shall be enclosed in an acceptable box. 5. Each controller shall be provided with separate ground wire. C. Automatic Controller: 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30i2013 Page 8 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 32 84 23 I. Install as per manufacturer's instructions. Remote control valves shall be connected to controller in numerical sequence as shown on the drawings. 2. Controller shall be mounted inside lockable electrical cabinet. D. Pump Assembly: 1. Prepare concrete forms for concrete base of pump. 2. Plumb required inlet and outlet pipes through formwork. 3. Place concrete pad per Section 32 13 13. 4. Make piping connections. 5. Make appropriate electrical hookup connections per Division 16 - Electrical. 6. Coordinate with manufacturer 21 days in advance for start up. Manufacturer's representative shall be on-site for first start up. Additional fees apply from manufacturer if start up date is changed. Start-up must be performed by a certified employee of the pump manufacturer to maintain warranty. E. System Flush: After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfilling commences, open valves and flush system with full head of water. F. Valve Boxes: 1. All buried valves and equipment shall be installed with a proper box as specified in part 2 - products. 2. Fill area under box with a minimum of 1 cubic feet of pea gravel before box is installed. a. Identification tags shall be attached to each remote control valve, showing number that corresponds with controller sequence. Tags shall be manufactured of polyurethane Behr Desopaid, yellow in color with black letters 2-3/4 inches by 2-1/4 inches. b. All boxes shall be permanently marked on top, designating type of equipment installed as noted in drawing. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to backfilling, test system for leakage at main piping to maintain 100 psi pressure for two hours. B. System is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure occurs during test period. C. Testing of pressure main lines shall occur prior to installation of electrical control valves, quick couplers or any other equipment that might prevent a proper test from being performed. D. All piping under paved areas shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch, and proved watertight, prior to paving. E. If leaks develop, replace joints and repeat test until entire system is proven watertight. F. All hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the Architect or Designated Representative of the City. No pipe shall be completely backfilled until it has been inspected, tested and approved in writing. G. Furnish necessary force pump and all other test equipment. H. Upon completion of each phase of work, entire system shall be tested and adjusted to meet site requirements. I. Low voltage wire under paving shall be tested for continuity, prior to paving. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Backfill trench and compact to specified subgrade elevation. Protect piping from displacement. 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30i2013 Page 9 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 32 84 23 B. Buried pipe in trenches shall be center loaded only until all required tests are performed. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting areas. Backfill will conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other surface irregularities. C. A fine granular material backfill will be initially placed on all lines. No foreign matter larger than 1/2 inch in size will be permitted in the initial backfill. D. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of the Architect or Designated Representative. E. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments without cost to the City. 3.07 TEMPORARY REPAIRS A. The City reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep the sprinkler system equipment in operating condition. The exercise of this right by the City shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the warranty as herein specified. 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required. C. Contractor shall familiarize the City maintenance personnel with operation and maintenance procedures of the pump system prior to handing over of project site back to owner. Familiarity of pump systems should occur while manufacturer's representative is on-site. 3.09 MAINTENANCE A. The entire sprinkler irrigation system shall be under full automatic operation for a period of seven days prior to any planting. B. The Architect or Designated Representative reserves the right to waive or shorten the operation period. 3.10 CLEANUP A. Cleanup shall be performed as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be broomed or washed down, and any damage sustained to the work of others shall be repaired and work returned to its original condition. 3.11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall be required to train City's maintenance personnel in proper operation of all major equipment. Provide written evidence of the person or persons so trained to the Architect or Designated Representative. 3.12 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Instruct City's personnel in operation and maintenance of system. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. End of Section 32 84 23 - Underground Sprinklers &30i2013 Page 10 of 10 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number: 1111033 Section 33 3111 Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. B. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS Section 33 3111 A. ASTM D1785 -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2012. B. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications; 2011. C. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2011. D. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of 4 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. B. Use extra strength, minimum of SDR 35. C. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Sewer Service " in large letters. 2.03 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Pipe Bedding Material: As specified in Section 3123 16.13. B. Pipe Cover Material: As specified in Section 3123 16.13. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with applicable code(s). 33 31 11 - Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 8/30/2013 Page 1 of 2 Job Name: Newport Beach Lifeguard HQ Job Number. 1111033 3.02 TRENCHING Section 33 3111 A. See Section 31 23 16.13 for additional requirements. B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.03 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings. B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. 1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D2321. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet. E. Install trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 3123 16.13. 3.04 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS A. Intall cleanouts at changes in direction and as indicated on the plans. B. Cleanouts in pavement shall be constructed with cast iron frames and lids set in concrete collor. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 0140 00. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to City. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. End of Section 33 31 11 - Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping &30/2013 Page 2 of 2 SECTION 337119 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES PART1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid steel conduit. 2. Plastic conduit. 3. Plastic duct. 4. Reinforced resin conduit. 5. Precast concrete manholes. 6. Handholes. 7. Underground duct markers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Product and execution requirements for forms for cast -in-place manholes. 2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Product and execution requirements for reinforcement for cast -in-place manholes. 3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Product and execution requirements for concrete for cast -in-place manholes. 4. Section 31 10 00 —Site Clearing. 5. Section 31 20 00 — Earth Moving. 6. Section 31 50 00 — Excavation Support and Protection. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ASTM International: Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-1 1. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM C857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 3. ASTM C858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 4. ASTM C891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 5. ASTM C1037 - Standard Practice for Inspection of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 2. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 3. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 4. NEMA TC 6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. 5. NEMA TC 9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. 6. NEMA TC 10 - PVC and ABS Plastic Communications Duct for Underground Installation. 7. NEMA TC 14 - Filament Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 651A - Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Interconnected system of encased conduits, ducts, manholes and handholes to distribute medium -voltage power, low -voltage power (480v), emergency power and fire alarm. B. Conduit and duct routing manhole and handhole locations are shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Route and locate to complete duct bank system. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-2 C. Low -voltage: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit on bends and rigid plastic underground conduit. D. Telephone: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit on bends and rigid plastic underground conduit. E. Data communication: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit on bends and rigid plastic underground conduit. F. Fire Alarm: Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit on bends and rigid plastic underground conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of openings, and accessory locations for precast manholes. C. Product Data: Submit for metallic conduit and nonmetallic conduit, ducts, manhole accessories handholes, spacing and warning tape. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 — Contract Closeout: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing and elevations of underground conduit and duct, and locations and sizes of manholes and handholes. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 MOCKUP A. Construct mockup of plastic duct, two each at 2 feet long. B. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. C. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with existing underground utilities and structures. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-3 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of California and Public Work's standards. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1, steel. 2.2 PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of California and Public Work's standards. B. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with fittings and conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3. C. Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type A PVC, UL 651A, Type EB PVC, High-density polyethylene, Schedule 40, Fiberglass -reinforced epoxy. 2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of California and Public Work's standards. B. Product Description: Precast manhole designed in accordance with ASTM C858, comprising modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories. C. Loading: ASTM C857, Class A-16. D. Shape: Rectangular with truncated corners. As indicated on Drawings. E. Nominal Inside Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. F. Corner Panel Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. G. Inside Depth: As indicated on drawings. H. Wall Thickness: As indicated on drawings. I. Base Section: Include 3 inch deep x 14 inch round sump with cast sleeve, and two 1 inch ground rod openings. J. Top Section: Include 39 inch diameter grooved opening for frame and cover. K. Riser Casting: 6 inch, with manhole step cast into frame. L. Frames and Covers: ASTM A48/A48M; Class 30B gray cast iron, 30 inch size, machine finished with flat bearing surfaces. Furnish cover marked ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE, FIRE ALARM to indicate utility. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-4 M. Duct Entry Provisions: Window knockouts. N. Duct Entry Locations: As indicated on Drawings. O. Duct Entry Size: As required on drawings. P. Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanized rod and hardware. Locate opposite each duct entry. Furnish watertight seal. Q. Cable Rack Inserts: Minimum load rating of 800 pounds. Locate at 2 feet on center. R. Cable Rack Mounting Channel: 1-1/2 x % inch steel channel, 48 inch length. Furnish cable rack arm mounting slots on 1-1/2 inch centers. S. Cable Racks: Steel channel, 1-1/2 x 3/4 x 14 inches, with fastener to match mounting channel. T. Cable Supports: Porcelain clamps and saddles. U. Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic manhole step with 1/2 inch steel reinforcement. Cast steps at 12 inches on center vertically. V. Sump Covers: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30B gray cast iron. W. Source Quality Control: Inspect manholes in accordance with ASTM C1037. 2.4 HANDHOLES A. Furnish materials in accordance with State of California and Public Work's standards. B. Description: Molded composite handhole comprising modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories. C. Loading: ASTM C857, Class A-16. D. Shape: Rectangular, as indicated on Drawings. E. Nominal Inside Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings. F. Inside Depth: As indicated on Drawings. G. Wall Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. H. Covers: Molded composite with tamperproof fasteners. Furnish cover marked ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE, and FIRE ALARM to indicate utility. I. Duct Entry Provisions: Window knockouts. J. Duct Entry Locations: Each end, each side, as indicated on drawings. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-5 K. Duct Entry Size: As indicated on drawings. 2.5 UNDERGROUND DUCT MARKERS A. Underground Warning Tape: 12 inch wide, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. B. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored, plastic covering, imprinted with "Electric Service" in large letters. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation for rough -in. B. Verify locations of manholes prior to excavating for installation. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Abandoned duct bank to remain in place. B. Maintain access to existing duct bank and other installations remaining active and requiring access. C. Extend existing duct bank installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations. D. Clean and repair existing duct bank. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install Work in accordance with State of California and Public Work's standards. 3.4 INSTALLATION - DUCT BANK A. Install duct to locate top of ducts at depths as indicated on Drawings. B. Install conduit and duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (0.33 percent). Slope conduit and duct toward manholes and away from building entrances. C. Cut conduit and duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. D. Insert conduit and duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. E. Join nonmetallic conduit and duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-6 F. Wipe nonmetallic conduit and duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. G. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 -degree bends between pull points. H. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection. I. Terminate conduit and duct at manhole entries using end bell. J. Stagger conduit and duct joints vertically in concrete slurry encasement. K. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers. Secure separators and chairs to trench bottom prior to concrete slurry pour. L. Band conduits and ducts together before backfilling or placing concrete slurry. M. Securely anchor conduit and duct to prevent movement during concrete slurry placement. N. Place concrete slurry in accordance with Section 03 30 00. O. Use mineral pigment to color concrete red. P. Install ducts with minimum 3 inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides. Q. Install two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas. R. Connect to existing concrete encasement using dowels. S. Connect to manhole wall using dowels. T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples. U. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and moisture. 3.5 INSTALLATION - PRE -CAST MANHOLE A. Excavate for manhole installation in accordance with Section 31 50 00. B. Install and seal precast sections in accordance with ASTM C891. C. Install manholes plumb. D. Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole cover to finished elevation. E. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole installation is complete. F. Install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage system, 4 inch (DN100) pipe terminating in 1/3 cu yd crushed gravel bed under provisions of Section 33 41 00. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-7 G. Dampproof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has cured 28 days. 3.6 INSTALLATION - PRE -CAST HANDHOLE A. Excavate for handhole installation in accordance with Section 31 50 00. B. Install and seal precast sections in accordance with ASTM C891. C. Install handholes plumb. END OF SECTION 337119 Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes Specifications 3371 19-8 CITY OF t�EW�RT NEWPORT BEACH City Council Staff Report Agenda Item No. 15 November 26, 2013 TO: HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE CITY COUNCIL FROM: Public Works Department David A. Webb, Public Works Director 949-644-3330, dawebb(a_)newportbeachca.gov PREPARED BY: Peter Tauscher, Associate Civil Engineer 949-644-3316, ptauscher@newportbeachca.gov APPROVED: TITLE: Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project—Award of Contract No. 4869 ABSTRACT: The existing Lifeguard Headquarters is in need of major (primarily the interior) rehabilitation and is identified in the City Facility Financing Plan. Staff has now received construction bids for the Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation project and is requesting City Council's approval to award a contract to Optima Reengineering & Project Management (Optima RPM). RECOMMENDATIONS: 1. Approve the project drawings and specifications; 2. Award Contract No. 4869 to Optima RPM for the total bid price of $1,546,000.00 including acceptance of additive bid items A2, A3, A4, A5, A6 and A7 and authorize the Mayor and City Clerk to execute the contract; 3. Establish a contingency of $154,000.00 (approximately 10 percent) to cover the cost of unforeseen work; and 4. Approve Budget Amendment No. 14BA-022 transferring $596,000.00 from the Facilities Financing Fund to the Lifeguard Facilities Fund and appropriating $596,000.00 from the Lifeguard Facilities Fund unappropriated fund balance to Account No. 7414-C1002037 (Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation). FUNDING REQUIREMENTS: The available balance in CIP Account No. 7414-C1002037 (Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation) is approximately $1,148,280.00. At the time of adoption of the FY 2103- 14 CIP budget, it was anticipated that some level of additional funding would be Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project — Award of Contract No. 4869 November 26, 2013 Page 2 required based upon the outcome of the design and needed building upgrades. Upon approval of the requested budget amendment, sufficient funds for this project will be available. The rehabilitated building is planned to be furnished and outfitted using existing furniture and equipment and augmented as necessary with the Fire Department's operating budget. Contract costs will be expensed to the Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project Account No. 7414 -Cl 002037 as follows: Account Description Account Number Amount Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation 7414-C1002037 $ 1,744,000.00 Total Proposed uses are as follows: Vendor Purpose Optima RPM Construction Contract Optima RPM Construction Contingency Incidentals Material testing, special inspection, commissioning 1,744,000.00 Amount 1,546,000.00 154,000.00 44,000.00 Total: $ 1,744,000.00 DISCUSSION: The lifeguard headquarters building rehabilitation project will include reconfiguring existing work spaces; constructing a new meeting/training room; upgrading restrooms, showers, and first aid facilities; installing new HVAC, electrical, plumbing and low voltage systems; refinishing interior walls and floor finishes; replacing windows and doors; and providing significant structural improvements. At 10:00 A.M. on November 5, 2013, the City Clerk opened and read the following bids for this project: BIDDER Low Optima RPM 2 Avi-Con, Inc. DBA CA Construction 3 Hamel Construction, Inc. 4 Pub Construction, Inc. 5 JRH Construction Co. 6 T.B. Penick & Sons, Inc. 7 Horizons Construction Co. International, Inc. 8 H.A. Nicholas, Co. Inc., Inc. TOTAL BID AMOUNT $1,379,000.00 $1,723,000.00* $1,756,000.00 $1,764,000.00 $1,802,901.00 $1,908,058.00 $1,817,000.00 $1,939,000.00 *bid non-responsive The apparent low bidder, Optima RPM, submitted all the necessary forms and possesses a California State Contractors License Classification of "B", as required by Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project — Award of Contract No. 4869 November 26, 2013 Page 3 the project specifications. A check of Optima RPM, references indicates satisfactory completion of similar projects for other local municipalities and public facilities. In addition, City staff met with Optima RPM to discuss their qualifications, proposed bid price, and other project related issues following the bid opening. Optima RPM's total base bid amount of $1,379,000.00 is approximately 30 -percent above the Engineer's Estimate of $1,060,000.00. The Engineer's Estimate was verified by the project architect as well as the City's construction management consultant. The higher bid pricing is due to an improving economy and prices relating to the building construction materials market. Furthermore, staff recommends including the following additive bid items into the project as prices received were within expectation: • A2 — installing additional sheer wall panels ($25,000), • A3 — installing reinforced masonry wall ($24,000), • A4 — providing new structural connections ($35,000), • A5 — installing enhanced anchors between walls and floors ($38,000), • A6 — providing connector elements to shear walls ($25,000) and • A7 — installing plywood decking ($20,000). The total of the six recommended additive bid items is $167,000.00 bringing the contract total amount to $1,546,000.00. The additive bid items will provide significant structural upgrades to the existing facility. Alternative bid item Al — Replacement of Generator is not recommended as part of this contract work. Optima RPM's total bid, including the alternative bid items is still the lowest total bid submitted. On November 7, 2013, Hamel Construction, Inc. (third low bidder) submitted the attached formal bid protest letter to the City Clerk's Office with regard to the Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation project. According to the bid protest letter, Hamel suggests Optima RPM does not possess the proper license to enter into a contract for this project. Staff reviewed this complaint and found it without merit as Optima RPM does possess a CSLB Class B (General Building Contractor) license which also allows a general building contractor to take a prime contract and perform specialized licensed trade work involving at least two or more unrelated building trades. The Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation project involves electrical and plumbing trades as well as other general building items which meets the requirements for a contractor with a Class B license. Staff from the Public Works Department and City Attorney's Office reviewed Hamel Construction, Inc.'s bid protest letter and do not agree with the claims and recommend accepting Optima RPM's bid as the lowest responsible bid. As part of the bid review process, staff and the project's construction management consultant, Project Dimension Inc., checked the references submitted with the bid package. Results of the investigation indicate Optima RPM has the experience to complete the Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation project in a timely and efficient manner. Staff recommends accepting Optima RPM as a responsive and responsible Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project—Award of Contract No. 4869 November 26, 2013 Page 4 bidder. Pursuant to the contract specifications Optima RPM will have 102 consecutive working days to complete the project. ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW: Staff found this project exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act ("CEQA") pursuant to Section 15302 (replacement of existing facilities involving negligible expansion of capacity) of the CEQA Guidelines, California Code of Regulations, Title 14, Chapter 3, because it has no potential to have a significant effect on the environment. NOTICING: The agenda item has been noticed according to the Brown Act (72 hours in advance of the meeting at which the City Council considers the item). The Notice Inviting Bids for this project was advertised in the City's official publication and in construction industry publications. Submitted by: Public Works Director Attachments: A. Location Map B. Hamel Construction, Inc.'s Notice of Bid Protest C. Budget Amendment tr \ N NOT TO SCALE WORK AREA NEWPORT BEACH NEWPORT BEACH LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS LIFEGUARD HEADQUARTERS REHABILITATION LOCATION MAP OCFgN FROM\ \WEST CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT C-4869 1 11/26/13 Reply To: 24910 Las Brisas Road, Suite 110 Murrieta, California 92562 Telephone: 951.600.2733 Facsimile: 951.600.4996 www.tylerbursch.com TYLER, BURSCH, LLP LAWYERS &ADVISORS Orange County Office: 15540-B Rockfield Boulevard Irvine, California 92618 Telephone: 949.707.2733 November 7, 2013 Ms. Leilani I. Brown City Clerk of Newport Beach Office of the City Clerk Post Office Box 1768 Newport Beach, California 92658 Email: lbrown@newportbeachca.gov Fax: (949)644-3039 Attachment B San Diego Office: 16870 W. Bernardo Drive, Suite 400 San Diego, California 92127 Telephone: 619.2 99.273 3 VIA ELECTRONIC, FACSIMILE AND U. S. MAIL Re: Hamel Contracting, Inc. Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project Contract No.: C-4869 Dear Ms. Brown: The law firm Tyler & Bursch, LLP represents Hamel Contracting, Inc. ("Hamel Contracting"), which recently submitted a bid for the Newport Beach Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Project pursuant to Contract No.: C-4869 ("Contract"). It has come to our attention that the City of Newport Beach ("City") may be persuaded to accept Optima RPM, Inc.'s ("Optima") bid, or in the alternative, Avi-Con, Inc. DBA CA Construction's ("Avi-Con") bid. This letter represents Hamel Contracting's formal protest of both Optima's bid and Avi-Con's bid based on the grounds articulated herein. The purpose of competitive bidding is "to guard against favoritism improvidence, extravagance, fraud and corruption, to prevent the waste of public funds, to obtain the best economic result for the public, and to stimulate advantageous market place competition." (emphasis added) (Domar Electric, Inc. v. City of Los Angeles (1994) 9 Cal.4th 161, 173.) Public Contract Code §22038(b) provides that, "If a contract is awarded, it shall be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder." (emphasis added (Pub. Contract Code, §22038(b).) "'Responsible bidder' means abidder who has demonstrated the attribute of trustworthiness, as well as quality, fitness capacity, and experience to satisfactorily perform the public works contract." (Pub. Contract Code, § 1103 [codifying language in City ofinglewood--L.A. County Civic Center Auth. V. Superior Court (1972) 7 Cal.3d 861, 867]; see also Great West Contractors, Inc. v. Irvine Unified School Dist. (2010) 187 Cal.AppAth 1425,1450-1452; Taylor Bus Service, Inc. v. San Diego Bd. of Education (1987) 195 Ca1.App.3d 1331, 1341-1343; American Bar Association (ABA), Section of Public Contract Law, Model Procurement Code for State and Local Governments (2000), § 3-101 [a responsible bidder possesses "the capability in all respects of bidders to perform fully the contract requirements, and the Ms. Leilani 1. Brown November 7, 2013 Page 2 of 3 integrity and reliability which will assure good faith performance"]; 10 McQuillin, Municipal Corporations (3d rev. ed. 2009) § 29:81, at pp. 644-656.) Thus, the "lowest responsible bidder requirement" imposes on governmental agencies a duty to evaluate bidders' possession of such attributes in a reasonable way on the basis of specified criteria timely made known to bidders and the general public. The lowest bidder is not necessarily the lowest responsible bidder. (City of Inglewood, supra, 7 Ca1.3d at p. 867.) Therefore, prior to awarding the Contract, the City has a duty to evaluate Optima's trustworthiness, quality, fitness capacity, and experience to satisfactorily perform the Contract. Among the numerous violations related to the Contract's bidding process, Optima's bid violates Business and Professions Code §7057(b). To be in compliance with §7057(b) a general building contractor cannot perform work pursuant to a prime contract unless, "...the general building contractor holds the appropriate license classification or subcontracts with an appropriately licensed contractor to perform the work." Optima cannot self -perform work without the required licenses. Specifically, the Contract calls for plumbing and electrical work and Optima's bid failed to provide for a licensed subcontractor to perform that work. Therefore, Optima's bid violates §7057 of the Business and Professions Code. Furthermore, if the in the event the City accepts Optima's bid, the City would be in violation of §6100 of the Public Contract Code by failing to verify that Optima has the appropriate licenses prior to awarding the Contract. Public Contract Code §6100(a) states, "Any state agency or department, as defined in Section 10357, which is subject to this code, shall, prior to awarding a contract for work to be performed by a contractor, as defined by Section 7026 of the Business and Professions Code, verify with the Contractors' State License Board that the person seeking the contract is licensed in a classification appropriate to the work to be undertaken." The City would be in violation of §6100 by failing to verify Optima's licenses prior to awarding Optima the Contract. Failure to conduct a reasonable investigation pursuant to Optima's bid would constitute a clear violation of the City's duty addressed in City of Inglewood. As Optima's bid failed to conform to the legal standards addressed herein, the City is required to consider the remaining bids properly submitted. In the event the City intends to award the Contract to Avi-Con, Hamel Contracting hereby protests Avi-Con's bid on the grounds it is incomplete. Per the requirements clearly outlined by the City, Avi-Con was required to provide bids related to items Al through A7 as indicated in the Bid Summary. Avi-Con failed to provide the required information pursuant to the Notice Inviting Bids. Due to these deficiencies the City may not consider Avi-Con's bid. Based on these violations, Hamel Contracting hereby demands copies of all information related to the Contract to ensure that the City and/or Optima have not engaged in further violations. The information demanded includes, but is not limited to, Optima's complete bid, all correspondence between the City and Optima related to the Contract, and all documents accumulated as a result of the City's duty to investigate. If the City is inclined to accept Avi-Con's bid, then Hamel Contracting hereby demands the identical information related to Avi-Con's bid. Additionally, if the City fails to revoke Optima's bid pursuant to the violations herein addressed, our client will be Ms. Leilani I. Brown November 7, 2013 Page 3 of 3 forced to take all necessary steps to protect the integrity of the public bidding process. We thank you in advance for your cooperation in this matter. If you have any questions or concerns please do not hesitate to contact our office. JNB:jal cc: Public Works Department Post Office Box 1768 Newport Beach, California 92658 Email: pwinfo@newportbeachca.gov Fax: (949)644-3318 ATTACHMENT C City of Newport Beach NO. BA- 14BA-022 BUDGET AMENDMENT 2013-14 EFFECT ON BUDGETARY FUND BALANCE: X Increase Revenue Estimates X Increase Expenditure Appropriations AND Transfer Budget Appropriations SOURCE: from existing budget appropriations from additional estimated revenues X from unappropriated fund balance EXPLANATION: This budget amendment is requested to provide for the following: AMOUNT: $sss,aoo.00 Increase in Budgetary Fund Balance X Decrease in Budgetary Fund Balance No effect on Budgetary Fund Balance To increase revenue estimates and expenditure appropriations for the interfund transfer from the Facilities Financing Fund to the Lifeguard Facilities Fund and to increase expenditure appropriations for the design contract related to the Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation project. ACCOUNTING ENTRY: BUDGETARY FUND BALANCE Amount Fund Account Description Debit Credit 405 3605 Facilities Financing Fund - Fund Balance $596,000.00 * REVENUE ESTIMATES (3601) Fund/Division Account Description 9414 6000 Lifeguard Facility Fund - Transfer In EXPENDITURE APPROPRIATIONS (3603) Description Division Number 9405 Facilities Financing Fund Account Number 9900 Transfer Out Division Number 7414 Lifeguard Facilities Fund Account Number C1002037 Lifeguard Headquarters Rehabilitation Signed: proJ�v,!'� nancial Apal: Fin or Signed: Administrative Approval: City anager Signed: City Council Approval: City Clerk Automatic $596,000.00 $596,000.00 fi-f� - r Date t1lul 1-z Date Date